JP2020000724A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To give a player interest by a new performance using a movable member provided in a game machine frame.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a frame body for composing an outer shape of the game machine; lottery means for holding a lottery; profit-granting means for granting profit when a predetermined result is obtained by a lottery; performance execution means for executing a performance by predetermined display means on the basis of a lottery result; first movable decoration means operable to a first special decoration state on the basis of a result of a lottery provided in the frame body; and second movable decoration means operable to a second special decoration state on the basis of a lottery result. The game machine can execute a first special movable performance for operating the first movable decoration means in response to display of dynamic display using a simulated image for simulating the first movable decoration means and a second special movable performance for operating the second movable decoration means without displaying a simulated image for simulating the second movable decoration means, and a ratio of a lottery resulting in a specific result is higher when the second special movable performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 566

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball-and-ball game machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type game machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

  In recent years, a gaming machine in which a movable member capable of forming a decoration form is provided in a gaming machine frame has been known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-093655

  However, there is room for further improvement in the production using such a movable member.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to feel an interest in a novel effect using a movable member provided in a gaming machine frame.

  The gaming machine according to [Means 1] includes a frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine, lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and A profit giving means for giving a profit, a performance executing means for performing a performance using predetermined display means based on a lottery result of the lottery means, provided on the frame, and A first movable decorative means operable to a special decorative state, and a first movable decorative means provided on the frame at a position different from the first movable decorative means. And a second movable decoration means operable to a second special decoration state different from the special decoration state, wherein the effect execution means comprises a moving image using a simulation image imitating the first movable decoration means. The first movable decorative hand corresponding to the display of the target display And a second special movable effect for operating the second movable decoration means without displaying a simulated image simulating the second movable decoration means. A gaming machine characterized in that when the second special movable effect is executed, the ratio of the result of the lottery being the specific result is higher than when the first special movable effect is executed (for example, (See paragraphs 5581 and 5900 and FIGS. 523 and 566).

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which can make a player feel the interest by a new effect using the movable member provided in the gaming machine frame can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the disassembly. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 35 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 35 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 37. (A) is a view in which the effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to hide a part of the operation button that is to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, or the like. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51 (a). 51A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 51B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from behind. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view cut along the PP line in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63, which is exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63, which is disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view which expands and shows the part of the function display unit from the front in the state where the game board was attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of various detection signals input / output to the connection terminal board of rental devices, such as a game ball, which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 4 is a block diagram around a liquid crystal and a sound source built-in VDP in a sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a delivery motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 4 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure showing arrangement of an output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which performs drawing of the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 6 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. 6 is a timing chart for explaining a timing at which a connection confirmation signal is output to an INIT terminal of the upper-panel-side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a table form. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a circuit configuration in a case where a plurality of sensor signal input units respectively connected to a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to a base terminal of a transistor of a detection circuit unit. (A) shows a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in a conventional example, and (B) shows a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in an example. (A) shows a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in a conventional example, and (B) shows a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in an example. FIG. 11 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output unit, a voltage raising unit, and a detection circuit unit are arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage raising unit and a detection circuit unit are arranged on the same substrate, and a voltage output unit is arranged on another substrate (sensor substrate). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output unit and a voltage raising unit are arranged on the same board, and a detection circuit unit is arranged on another board (for example, a main control board). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected several sensors to the voltage output part in parallel. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which only the components (discrete components) having high security performance against fraud are integrated in the first control unit MCG. FIG. 11 is a view showing a partial region of a base substrate of a main control substrate according to a modification. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of obtaining operation information in the vicinity of the opening window. FIG. 119 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a relationship between a special operation receiving portion when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front and various effect members arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion in a front view. is there. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control mode with respect to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control mode with respect to a display part. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a third operation control mode for the display unit. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a third operation control mode for the display unit. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a third operation control mode for the display unit. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a flowchart which shows the control example about the detection information analysis process of the physical object performed in a peripheral control part regular process. (A) is a time chart showing the control when the effect reception occurs in a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows the state of the production operation when the effect reception occurs in each of the plurality of operation parts. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of an effect using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of an effect using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of an effect using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of an effect using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting-port passage process (step S5232). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing (Step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a big hit determination process (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol change process (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a gate part passage process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol normal process (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol change start processing when in the normal gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing procedure about the lottery regarding the notice effect which appears within the execution period of the effect pattern (the change time of the symbol) (the notice lottery performed in the effect symbol change start process). It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice determination table T2 referred when the said fluctuation | variation (extended hold | maintenance) is not the target of a timer prefetch effect in a normal game state (2nd timer notice lottery). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) referred to when a notice timer effect is performed in a normal game state, and (b) shows a normal game. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (2nd mission effect lottery) referred to when a notice side timer effect is not performed in a state. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice side timer type determination table T4 referred at the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505). The reach type and the processing status (when the decision to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation notice)) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation notice) have not been made are made. It is a figure which compares and shows the upper limit of the appearance of the timer target candidate effect determined according to the first to fourth processing situations, the fifth processing situation and the sixth processing situation to be described later, and the like. This is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and is in the first processing state in which a determination to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (YES in step S5507) is made in step S5508. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5a referred to in the processing of FIG. Step S5523 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and is in the second processing state in which it is determined not to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5b referred to in the processing of FIG. Step S5533 is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506), and is in the third processing state in which a determination to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (YES in step S5532) is made. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5c referred to in the processing of FIG. Step S5543 is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506), and is in the fourth processing state in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5532). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5d referred to in the processing of FIG. The process of step S5508 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which a determination to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (YES in step S5507) is made. Is a diagram showing an example of a table T6a-1 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 1 as a result of executing (step S5509). The process of step S5523 is a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a determination to not execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. Is a diagram showing an example of a table T6b-1 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 1 as a result of executing (step S5524). The process of step S5543 is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing situation in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5532). Is a diagram showing an example of a table T6d-2 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of executing (step S5544). This is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and corresponds to character reach in the second processing situation in which a determination to not execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number to be changed is selected. This is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and corresponds to SP reach in the second processing situation in which a decision to not execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number to be changed is selected. It is a figure showing an example of table T7a referred to by the 1st timer non-target notice lottery (Step S5512). It is a figure showing an example of table T7b referred to by the 2nd timer non-target notice lottery (Step S5525). In the case where the fifth timer is set to execute the mission effect (show a conversation notice) (YES in step S5552) without executing the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503). It is a figure showing an example of table T5e referred to in processing of Step S5553. In the case where the sixth processing state has been made in which it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T5f referred to in processing of Step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the notice side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552), step S5553 is performed. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-1 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 1 as a result of executing the process (step S5554). In the fifth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the notice side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552), step S5553 is performed. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-2 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of executing the process (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552), step S5563 is performed. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6f-1 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 1 as a result of executing the process (step S5564). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552), step S5563 is performed. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6f-2 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of executing the process (step S5564). (A) stores the hold information (first special symbol) in a state where the variable display is being executed and the three pieces of hold information (all the first special symbols) in a state where the variable display is not executed. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7a referred in a 1st special figure pre-reading process, when a new prize (1st special symbol) arises in a state. In (b), on-hold information (first special symbol) in a state where variable display is being executed and two on-hold information (both first special symbols) in which variable display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7b referred in a 1st special figure pre-reading process when a new prize (1st special symbol) arises in the state where it is. (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example about the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 which are referred when deciding the execution mode of a timer prefetch effect in the situation where the number of possible prefetch changes is four. . (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example about the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 which are referred when deciding the execution form of a timer prefetch effect in the situation where the prefetch variable number is three. . Normally referred to when there is no one that causes the big hit symbol to appear among the hold information in the state where the variable display is being executed and the hold information (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) in the state where the variable display is not executed. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a time pending change table T9a. A special reference that is referred to when there is one that causes a big hit symbol to appear in the hold information in the state where the variable display is being executed and the hold information (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) in the state where the variable display is not being executed. It is a figure which shows the time hold change table T9b. It is a figure showing an example of the processing procedure about the processing performed in order to realize one change production. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. (A) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision to not execute a mission effect (let a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed. (B) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed. This is a single-timer mode (YES in step S506), and timer target advance performed in the second processing situation in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the production. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination processing about whether to produce a timer object advance effect and at what timing to generate a timer object advance effect. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of a determination process for determining which type of effect mode to generate at the timing when a timer target advance effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of a determination process for determining which type of effect mode to generate at those timings when performing a timer target advance effect at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of a determination process for determining which type of effect mode to generate at those timings when performing a timer-targeted advanced effect at all of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. In the second processing situation in which the single timer is set (YES in step S506) and the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507), the number of notices is 2 Revival timer effect that is performed when it is determined that the user is one (step S523), and it is determined that “conversation notice” is to be performed at an earlier timing and “accompaniment A operation 1” is to be performed at a later timing. 3 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of FIG. (A) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S507). 6 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of a timer target suppression control to be performed. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the timer target suppression control when the rate of occurrence of the suppression period varies depending on the type of the production mode appearing as the production of the timer target. (A) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed into the effect object. (B) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed the effect object. Timer mode production performed in the second processing situation in which a single timer is set (YES in step S506), and a decision is made not to execute a mission production (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S507). 3 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of FIG. (A) to (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S506), and a second determination is made that a mission effect (show a conversation notice) is not executed (NO in step S507). 5 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of count output suspension control performed in the processing situation of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example about the processing procedure at the time of realizing count output stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer plus effect. It is a figure for explaining the concrete contents of a timer stagnation effect. It is a figure for explaining the concrete contents of the development effect connected to the timer object effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the operation effect in a timer. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer concealment effect. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure which shows the timer effect example concretely. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by a fixed channel method. The relationship between the game state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel system as this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by an automatic channel method. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, reproduction | regeneration sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in a peripheral control RAM. It is a flow chart which shows an example of search processing of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure showing an example of a variation pattern of sound control by each channel method or those combination. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search processing at the time of performing control which outputs sound of this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of conditions for selecting a channel whose sound output is to be replaced (sound reproduction is stopped) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of production for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is output. It is a figure showing an example of a priority of a sound effect in a production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half fluctuation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a composition table of a reproduction channel in sound source control in a modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the fluctuation | variation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a channel group-by-channel volume control table indicating the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs the sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, where (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure showing an example of a volume control table classified by sound effect showing volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound in the present embodiment. 9 is a first half of a flowchart illustrating a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the embodiment. 9 is a second half of a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a volume control process of performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, where (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure showing an example of a sound definition table. 246 is a diagram illustrating, by type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244, notification contents, a notification mode, a notification time, and a condition (release condition) at which the notification is ended. (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing performed when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is. FIG. 3C is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is. (D) is a diagram illustrating an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the contents of the effect progress lowering notification processing according to the notification state of the said pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure regarding the process concerning setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure showing an example about the content of restriction defined for every channel restriction level. It is a figure showing another example about the content of restriction defined for every channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special release process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under control is performed. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of an assignment status of each channel when a process related to a channel assignment canceling operation is performed. An example of the assignment status of each channel and the status of the movable decorative body when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination will be described. It is a time chart shown. The process of moving the movable decorative body in accordance with the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, but not in this process, is performed in another process. It is a time chart which shows an example about the state of the decoration body side. It is a time chart which shows an example about an allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during a period in which a symbol change is performed, and a state of a movable decorative body side. . FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of the assignment status of each channel and the status of the movable decorative body when a movable body abnormality has occurred in each of the plurality of movable decorative bodies at two different timings during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. is there. 5 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hit function). 6 is a time chart showing an example of display contents when an operation is performed a plurality of times. 5 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example of a production utilizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example of a production utilizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a front view of the gaming machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the effect pattern in the effect mode which can perform a sword-drawing effect, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transfer effect according to the type of a fluctuation pattern, (B) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sword part (sword body part) itself, (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, (C) 2nd. Indicates the sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, and (C) 2nd sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword decoration and the operation validity period concerning the operation means. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the first modification. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the first modification. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the first modification. 13 is a timing chart illustrating a relationship between a state change timing of a sword decoration body and an operation timing of an operation unit according to a first modification. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword effect of Modification 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword effect of Modification 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword effect of Modification 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword effect of Modification 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the sword effect of Modification 2. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration used for pseudo consecutive production. It is a figure which shows the example effect transition of the pseudo continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration body is provided during pseudo continuous change (re-change). It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration body is provided during pseudo continuous change (re-change). It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration body is provided during pseudo continuous change (re-change). It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect after operation of the sword decoration body (dropping effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin)) during the pseudo continuous change (re-change) common to all effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of effect patterns which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (border role) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (border role) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled during the reach effect as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above, the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure showing an example of transition. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button is enabled once and the sword decoration is not enabled, and thereafter the sword decoration is enabled. It is a figure showing about a suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing another example of the specific operation related production. It is a figure explaining an example about the effect when the "specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the production contents for each type about the production when a plurality of types (progress productions A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as precursor productions. It is a figure which shows the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect is performed as a specific operation related effect. It is a figure showing another example of the production contents when a specific operation related production is performed as a precursor production. It is a figure showing an example of a production in which button image BTG is displayed in a mode (specific production mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure showing the example of an effect at the time of the 1st indication effect being performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect at the time of the 1st precursor effect being performed. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control at the time of an automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control at the time of an automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control at the time of an automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining stable side automatic production processing at the time of an automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining stable side automatic production processing at the time of an automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining stable side automatic production processing at the time of an automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining an effect acceptance process according to a display type in an automatic button effect state. It is a figure for explaining an effect acceptance process according to a display type in an automatic button effect state. It is a figure for explaining an effect acceptance process according to a display type in an automatic button effect state. It is a figure for explaining an effect acceptance process according to a display type in an automatic button effect state. It is a figure for explaining an effect acceptance process according to a display type in an automatic button effect state. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when operated in a single operation mode a plurality of times when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and (b) is controlled in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when it is operated in a long press mode when not performed. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect at the time of starting operation in an aspect. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is in the effect state of three, the symbol change is started in a “first effect pattern in which a specific effect accepting period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”, It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when the operation (release operation) for releasing the automatic button production state or the operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in an effect state of three, the symbol is "second effect pattern (loss variation) in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears cannot be set". FIG. 9 is a time chart showing a processing example when a change is started and an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within an execution period of the symbol change; is there. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”, and the symbol variation execution period 12 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting to an automatic button effect state is performed within the section. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when an effect is advanced in a third effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "the specific processing regarding the production such as production setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "the specific processing regarding the production such as production setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production processing about a special production acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the contents of processing at the time of operating a movable decorative object when a specific condition is satisfied. 374 is a time chart showing a modification example of the example shown in FIG. 374. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until a sword decoration body 5001 returns to an original position. 6 is a time chart illustrating an operation state of an operation button during a series of operation check periods. (A) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of the operation button during a period other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of the operation button during the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the sword decoration during the operation reception period, and (B) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration and the abnormality detection during periods other than the operation reception period. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration and the abnormality detection during the operation reception period. (A) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of an operation button, and (B) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of a movable decorative body provided on a game board. (A) is a time chart showing an operation state of an operation button in a button projection effect in a normal state, and (B) is a time chart showing an operation state of an operation button in a button projection effect in an abnormal state. . (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button effect at the time of normal operation, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button effect at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart showing a relationship between an operation state of an operation button and a notification mode when an abnormality occurs in an operation reception period, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button when an abnormality occurs in an automatic operation confirmation period. 6 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between an operation state and a notification mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the effect at the time of abnormality occurrence of a movable decorative object. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button in the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-time saving state, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the time reduction state. 6 is a time chart illustrating an operation state. It is a functional block diagram explaining the composition and outline of the function for performing production control in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a module composition in a peripheral control part of a game machine of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a configuration up to obtaining data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flow when executing scheduler data according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating functions of the sound module of the embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the function of the lamp module of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the function of the sequence control in the production control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the function of the lamp and the sound in the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scheduler definition according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of operation of an accessory controlled using scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice effect performed in a series of fluctuation | variation display from the start of fluctuation | variation of special symbol to the stop in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler used and scheduler data. It is a figure explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting / flashing control of a lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which performs lamp control in button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow in a star character announcement of this embodiment, and a left star character. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right star character in a star character announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a medium star character in a star character announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in a logo combination fall notice of this embodiment. It is a drawing for explaining scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in a peripheral control board of the gaming machine according to the embodiment, and a relationship between these configurations. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on according to the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect in a series of fluctuation | variation display from the start of fluctuation | variation of the special symbol in this embodiment until it stops, (A) is the effect performed from the fluctuation | variation start to completion | finish, and performs the said effect. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating scheduler data and a scheduler to be executed. It is a figure explaining the content of button hatcher role first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the button hatcher role fall first half fall notice which is the first half of the hatchet role fall preview of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the hatcher role late fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter half of the hatchet role fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the hatcher role latter fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter part of the hatcher role fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for every fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for every fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the sub-effect block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control activation processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control update processing of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs a notice effect in a change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing which performs a notice effect, the execution time of the notice effect, and (B) is It shows scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute a notice effect. It is a figure explaining the relation between the liquid crystal effect block data for every variation pattern of this embodiment, and the liquid crystal design block data for every variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the drawing data file by the step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect-4 effects) with the image synthesis and motion creation graphic tool in the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the composition of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the composition of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. Show. It is a figure showing an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage in which a step-up notice effect is performed, and (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the production SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the step-up notice 1, and (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect. 3 shows a drawing image using scheduler data. It is a figure explaining master data defined on liquid crystal effect scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and effect SW corresponding to substitution data replaced with the master data concerned. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and especially shows the evaluation procedure which sets the effect SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in presentation SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of the structure of the production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines the production SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of production SW control information, (C) Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the production SW flag and the production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows the production SW flag and (B) shows the production SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW replacement table information contained in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, and the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table, (A) is effect SW replacement table information, (B) is effect SW 3 shows a replacement table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data that defines a layer information table according to the present embodiment, where (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is the content of the layer information table (for background). Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment. Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, and (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal effect common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini-character production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the program data which defines an individual common block of a button mini character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing a button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division | segmentation which can be determined in the callback function at the time of callback execution by the production SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of execution of the notice effect of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of a common block over a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) shows the display timing of a symbol and an announcement effect, and (B) shows a configuration of a liquid crystal announcement effect block by the common block. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image written in each layer is written to write an image in a frame buffer. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer and writing the converted image file to a frame buffer in the embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in a peripheral control RAM and then transferring the display list command group to a sound source built-in VDP in the embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring a display list command group to a sound source built-in VDP without storing the display list command group in a peripheral control RAM in the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure which has several display areas which change and display an identification symbol in this embodiment, (A) The example of a structure which has display area A and display area B of an identification symbol on one display screen, B) is a configuration example in which when there are two display screens, a display area A and a display area B of an identification symbol are provided on each display screen. It is a figure explaining the emphasis mode of the display area which performs change display of an identification symbol in this embodiment, and (A) is a normal mode which displays display area A and display area B in a standard mode (prescribed size). , (B) is an emphasis mode A for displaying the display area A in an emphasis mode, and (C) is an emphasis mode B for displaying the display area B in an emphasis mode. It is a figure explaining an example of a screen transition of a composition which performs change display of an identification symbol of this embodiment in display area A and display area B, respectively, and is interlocked when a part of change of an identification symbol stops in display area A. Then, an example in which the change of the identification symbol stops in the display area B is shown. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the composition which performs the change display of the identification symbol of this embodiment in display area A and display area B, respectively. An example of displaying all stop symbols is shown. It is a figure showing an example of the composition of the production block of the timer production of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of execution of the timer production of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production block of a background production of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of execution of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the mini-character production of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example in which an identification design changes and displays in a plurality of display areas of this embodiment, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example which displays an identification symbol independently and variably in several display area of this embodiment, and variably displays in the same form with predetermined timing. It is a figure which shows the example which displays an identification symbol variably in several display areas of this embodiment, and stops at a different symbol. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the game board of the game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the shape of the character combination in this embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman role thing in this embodiment, (A) is the figure seen from the front and (B) from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the character combination of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of the character role of this embodiment from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character role board of the character role of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character role board in the cover member of the character role of this embodiment, and shows the back side of the character role board. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the luminous body and the transmissive part and non-transmissive part of a cover member in the character role of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light emission body in the character role of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character role board of the character role of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character role substrate in the cover member of the character role of the modification 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of a character role substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the luminous body and the transmissive part and the non-transmissive part of a cover member in the character role of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character role substrate of the character role of the modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and has shown the state in which the character role substrate and the light guide member overlap. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character role substrate in the cover member of the character role of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back side of a character role substrate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character role of the modification 2 of this embodiment to the game board. It is a figure showing the sectional view of the snowman role thing of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowball accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back surface side cover member of the snowball accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowball board | substrate of the snowball accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back surface side of the snowball board | substrate of the snowball accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the horizontal section of the snowball accessory of this embodiment from the upper part. It is the figure which looked at the cross section of the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory in the modification of this embodiment from the top. It is a figure showing the whole game board of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the disassembled perspective view of the rabbit character of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view and the back view of the face board of the rabbit character of this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit character of this embodiment. It is the perspective view which showed the state where the rabbit character of this embodiment was in a standby position. It is a figure showing an example about a rabbit character of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a rabbit character of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a rabbit character of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the whole game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the stump character of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the stump character of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a back wall cover, and the front view of the back wall board. It is the figure which showed the stump box part in the modification of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a back wall cover, and the front view of the back wall board. It is the figure which showed the Example about the weeds of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the weaving thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example about a mountain object of this embodiment. It is a figure showing a board back grass part of this embodiment. In the stump box section shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A) of the present embodiment, the upper box section, the right box section, the lower box section, and the left box section are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It is a figure showing a state where it was moved. The figure which showed the example which provided the grass board part provided fixedly instead of the 1st grass movable part and the 2nd grass movable part, without providing the stump board part in front of the stump box part of this embodiment. is there. FIG. 517 is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 517 of the present embodiment. FIG. 518 is a view showing a modified example of FIG. 518 of the embodiment. FIG. 518 is a view showing a modified example of FIG. 518 of the embodiment. FIG. 518 is a view showing a modified example of FIG. 518 of the embodiment. (A), (B) is a figure which showed the example of a structure of the box rear wall part of FIG. 520 of this embodiment, (C), (D) is the figure of the box rear wall part of FIG. 521 of this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode in each effect pattern, a display state, and a light emission effect state in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode in each effect pattern, a display state, and a light emission effect state in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display aspect of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state with time progress of the moving state of a frame movable body, and the light emission effect state. It is the figure which showed typically the display aspect of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state with time progress of the moving state of a frame movable body, and the light emission effect state. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern. It is a time chart of a modification in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closably attached to the outer frame 2, a player which is detachably mounted to the main body frame 4 from the front side and which is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front side below the front 111 and operable by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front and below the plate unit, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and responding to a game state changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the front opening above the through-hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600 partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and are also rotatably attached to the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge member 150 is rotatably mounted, respectively, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and the body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is provided with an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper portion of the payout unit base 801 and extends left and right which is open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and facing left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are removably attached to the payout unit base 801 under the A payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, and a game ball that is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850 d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and in which a power supply board is housed, and which is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 that is attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls is housed therein. Payout control board box 950 There.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the right and left sides. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and which are locked with an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch 11 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes a mounting step 12 that is recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). The lower frame member 20 has the same length as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10 and the upper and lower widths. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower left and right fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 includes a front end notch 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the side surface outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has projections 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the depressions 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the fingers of a worker, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in the form of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a front portion bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 such that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, in a state where the left discharge hole 52 is assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left attachment portion 56 for attaching the left sliding member 81 to a portion on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right attachment portion for attaching a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61. A flat fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have.
The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the body frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d.
Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 63 at a position on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can be in a state of being all over. This allows the upper hinge pin 622 to be inserted into the bearing groove 63 and the upper hinge pin 622 to be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 stands up from a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 behind the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape having an upper end narrowed at an upper portion from the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, thereby forming the outer frame side upper hinge. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 match the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling backward from the main body frame 4 and to the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion 87. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper left and right fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.
Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, they are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is higher than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in a state of contacting the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper left and right fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lock mechanism of the main frame 4 to the main frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is described with reference to FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment includes a front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal bearing state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, since the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the main body frame 4 There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Accordingly, when an acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, the upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63 of the main body frame. And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the lock member 66 is connected to the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the upper hinge pin 622 applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a contacts the hanging part 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the lock member 66 is positioned such that the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment is generated, the load is not always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, either. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the side where the bearing groove 63 is opened. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Accordingly, the upper hinge pin 622 is housed in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c.
Thereby, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further rearward. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed via the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is moved to the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the upright wall portion 54. May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which game balls can pass. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is closed. A gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts can be prevented using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; The door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) having a vertically-extended outer shape extending vertically as described later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives game balls that have been fired by the firing device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and within the range of the cash or the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card deducted from the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Ball return display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction in front view, so that the player can perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper left side of the through-hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the through-hole 111 ( It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light-emitting decoration.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. Right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576, as will be described in detail later. A decorative top left lens member 579 and a decorative top right lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is mounted on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a rectangular door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and is attached to a rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers a lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to a rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view external shape extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is provided with a through-hole 111 which penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the through hole 111, the upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through holes 111 penetrating forward and backward. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 to which the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the front and left sides of the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 when viewed from the front. And a ball feed opening 115 for allowing the ball to pass through.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along an upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left and right extending middle reinforcing member attached to a lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 in front view. The locking unit 135 includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking unit 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate.
The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of projections. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. , A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two, and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 for urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape in which the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a character shape. In the hinge frame bracket 141 above the door frame, a mounting piece that connects the pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The lock spring 144 has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided with a door frame when the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.
Therefore, the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side allows the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame to be inserted into or pulled out of the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 on the body frame side from below. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 as viewed from the front is obtained. The hinge can be rotatably supported on the body frame 4.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Accordingly, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat plate-like extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a lower end portion tapered downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described below. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the front left side of the through-hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to the height near the center of the through-hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to substantially the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The door frame upper left decorative board 161 and the door frame lower left decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 have a plurality of LEDs 161a, 162a on the front surface thereof, respectively, which can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 and rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the glass unit mounting member 170 causes the protruding portion 172 to rotate. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the projection 172 is stabilized in a state where it projects downward from the base 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotation position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from a rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. The extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length of the cylindrical portion 181 in the axial direction and are arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In the present example, three) protruding ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state in which the handle unit 300 is also tilted in such a manner that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be viewed from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking pieces 191b of the glass frame 191 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is provided with a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and spaced apart left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end projects downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 with the upper end assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects from the lower side of the main body 201 to the rear. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. In the security cover 200, the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening / closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 for rotating the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmitting member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate 213a. As for a pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in front view is mounted on the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c of the reinforcing unit 130 in front view. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back.
FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34A, and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34B. FIG. 39A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 39B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and present a rendering image to the player. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is transparent at the center except for the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) such that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends at a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration portion 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction and extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being depressed in a circular cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration portion 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center side than that.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body 413 at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer periphery of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a to the front end side of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners at the top, bottom, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. The three detecting pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction such that two detecting pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  The six base openings 413e are provided on the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are depressed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter of the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape), is transparent, and has a door frame side effect display device 460 that is disposed on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Urged forward. The operation button 410 is further restricted from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. By the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440, the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side of the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The part 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be seen rearward is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer periphery to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in the state protruding backward. Thereby, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner part of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the rear, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a penetrating back and forth with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410, and a central opening 416a penetrating front and rear on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by the frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. When the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a pair of mounting portions 416e extending outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery, and mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metallized except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is mounted) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416, three from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag manner along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by exploding. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange 413 b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a radially outside the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 than the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along.
The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The decoration board 423 outside the operation button on the right side has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In a state where the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the button-shaped base 413 of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Accordingly, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. At the same time, the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b can cause only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 44 to FIG. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in FIG. 37. FIG. 45A shows a state in which the effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the center axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to hide the operation button by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has an overall height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than 大 き く of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thereby, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line, It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by an operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal operation state, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 projects forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the center axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, so that the operation button cannot be receded straight, and the operation button is There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is panned so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part, since it is mounted on the production operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326. In addition, the entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player pressing the operation button 410 can be prevented. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Because a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit down, the frame is kept in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is regulated, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed or operated with a strong force, such as when the effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape protruding forward (a part of a substantially spherical surface), the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. As compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, and the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are composed of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button decoration 432f, and the second button decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated. Thereby, it is possible to make it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall part of the decoration member 432 in the operation button Although a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operating button inner decorative member 432 and the outer peripheral surface of the operating button inner decorative member 432 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411 a and the second button decoration portion 411 b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross hatched portion surrounded by the dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside decoration member 432 of the operation button are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. 46 and are arranged concentrically, as shown in FIG. 46, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button internal decorative portion 432g intersect with each other, and are geometrically shaped. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button decoration section 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the irregularities of the first button decoration part 411a are changed. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see a moving decoration and entertain the player.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be provided.

The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, an operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, an operation button An upper inner decoration board 435 and an operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated.
That is, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminously decorated.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, so that only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminously decorated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by emitting the LED. From the lower side of the base unit 431 of the unit base 431 to which the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431 c projects forward to near the lower rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the left of the through hole 111 in a front view, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protruding forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member to the lower part of the left unit. The left unit lower decorative base 535 protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. It includes a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531, and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are opened from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111. ing. The left reflective standing wall portion 538 has a flat surface, and an inner surface provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. The reflecting surface may be provided not only by forming the inner surface of the left reflecting wall 538 itself from a reflecting material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflecting seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflection standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-described reflection standing wall portion 33.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531 and a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the square opening portion 531a. A lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532 a and the square lens portion 532 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a front surface and a rear surface formed into a smooth convex lens shape. By the circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be radiated forward in a point-like manner. With the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is concavely conical backward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c at the front surface. The input lens portion 532e bulging rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e generally increases outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, the groove portion is concave in an arc shape backward, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. The front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that grooves and ridges are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are circumferentially divided by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflector 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflection portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflector 532f is formed such that grooves and ridges are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the square lens unit 532b, light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a forward is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. ), And travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface in the square lens portion 532b. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When light reflected from the center side to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially in parallel with the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflection portion 532f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as going away from the center. (See FIG. 50). Thus, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens 532d and is emitted forward from the square lens 532b. At this time, since the cross-section of the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed in a wavy shape, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b is formed. The light can be emitted substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens unit to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member).

  The square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves with a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. Light can be avoided, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thus, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The unillustrated left unit decorative lens member is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion 532b of the left unit diffused lens member 532 and the circular decorative portion formed at a position located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffused lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons formed in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Also, the left-side decorative lens member is configured such that the multi-faceted decorative portion is moved forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left-unit diffused lens member 532 by light whose circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffused lens member 532. Each of them is illuminated and decorated by the light applied to the light.

  The upper decoration base 534 of the left unit is formed in a square shape extending in the front-rear direction and a rectangular shape extending vertically in a front view. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 534 on the left unit is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end such that the upper side moves rearward upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is concave backward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back.
FIG. 54 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 55B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and to the right of the through hole 111 in a front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 attached to the door frame is attached to the front of the right side decorative board 552 on the left side of the center of the front surface of the right unit base 551 from the front view, and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. Transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, right unit left diffusion member 553 attached to the left side of right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and sheet-shaped right unit left decoration member 554 and right unit left decoration member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left camera attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of Includes a over 555, the.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side in front view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with the front and right sides open. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light blocking member 559 and a light opaque mounted to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A right unit right light blocking member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right side having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension and a short front-rear extension in the shape of a rectangular tube, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting wall portion 568, an inner side surface which is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. In addition to this reflection surface, like the inner surface of the left reflection standing wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflection standing wall portion 568 itself is provided from a reflection material such as a metal or a resin, and the reflection surface is reflected on the same inner surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right portion) of the above-described reflecting standing wall portion 33.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c.
The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating and decorating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has white front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a plate-shaped main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short plate-like manner, A notch 553c, which is formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front view and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a, and is provided in the up-down direction. A plurality of side reflectors 553f vertically arranged such that the input lens unit 553e is located at the center in the up-down direction.

  The body part 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. As shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it moves forward from the rear end side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 553e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. 553a extends perpendicular to the plane, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side reflector 553f when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed toward the center. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. In addition, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward in a front view as it goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, and is reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f. It becomes.

  The light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected leftward in a front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Accordingly, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f to the left of the right unit left light blocking member 559 are left. The light that has been reflected to the side and passed through the main body 553a is radiated to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming the concentric arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. Thus, more uniform light and shade can be emitted to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing concave portion 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in the front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection part 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect presented to the player is transparent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. Part 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape from the left end side of the rear wall part 556b to the right in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right side in a front view right side of the main body part 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a, and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view of the main body 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main body 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the front as it goes forward from the rear end side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thus, the right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion having a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed into a sharp triangular shape such that, when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e, a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, so that each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and is reflected by the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflection portion 556f. It becomes.

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right side (side reflection part 556f) of the main body part 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body part 556a has a white color. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f in the main body 556a and the light radiated to the left from the side reflector 556f to the right on the right surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 556f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the right surface of the main body 556a outward (to the right) is prevented from becoming light having a concentric striped light and shade. Thus, uniform light and shade can be irradiated to the right. Accordingly, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, a side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in a front view. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the presentation concept is transparent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.
The right decorative member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the right decorative member 554 and the left cover 555 of the right unit. The decorations applied to the right decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view.
The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened.
The right unit left light-blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body 559a to the right in a front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of cutouts 559c, which are cut out in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the wall portion 559b to the left in front view and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, extend rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a, and And a plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes forward. The right diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556 have substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d which are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are respectively formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that an upper corner of a front end side of a vertically extending square is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is opened to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. Thereby, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left and right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with a predetermined width in the left and right direction. . Through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decoration board 552 to the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, since the inner space of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d, they are arranged behind the respective divided spaces. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 prevents the light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space is removed. , Can be independently illuminated. In other words, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to independently decorate each of them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b has a plurality of vertically-extending rectangular parallelepiped portions arranged in the vertical direction in a plurality of square pyramidal portions, and a plurality of triangular polyhedral portions in the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  Specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and the multi-face decoration is provided on the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape conforming to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the upper plate 321 front end of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at a front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility in a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. As a result, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, The pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in the door frame right side unit 550, a right unit left decorative member 554, a right unit right decorative member 557, and a right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the members 561 and the like to emit light in a specific manner, the staff in the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the malfunction and made to recognize the malfunction, thereby enabling quick response to the malfunction. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the player being frustrated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 59 is a sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the central base 571, which is attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and project from the center in the left and right direction forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a position in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits extending each and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and vertically separated A unit body 271 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 271 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space, the outer outer light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the outer periphery of the opening window. Outside light detection unit 35 (left outside light detection unit 35a, right outside light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outside.

  That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 and the outer peripheral light detecting unit 35 are disposed outside the outer periphery of the opening window. Substantially the entire area of the window can be made to function as a portion (operation receiving portion) that receives an operation by the player. Further, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not disposed in a dew state, but is disposed in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. Therefore, when detecting light with the outer peripheral light detection unit 35, it is possible to preferably eliminate the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is mounted on the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 and a plurality of slits 574b are closed. A plurality of (three left and right) transparent plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 over the opening 574a, respectively, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side, and the opening portions 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582, each of which extends to the vicinity of the center end.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and LEDs are mounted on portions of the plurality (three) of the light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b formed respectively on the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of unit main body 271. A pair of board bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a are mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to both left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is mounted diagonally so that the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 are moved rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front such that the lower part near the left and right ends of a square extending left and right swells downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit body 271 when viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a square extending left and right with a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending in the left and right directions and a half of the full width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the square as the base. The shape is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the frontwardly protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front face connect the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 with the front left and right ends of the front protruding portion. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit body 271, openings 574 a penetrating front and rear are formed at portions of the front surface up to positions outside the portions protruding forward from both ends in the left-right direction, respectively. The unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely at a predetermined height in a vertical direction and penetrating in a front-rear direction at a portion obliquely extending from a portion of the front surface protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a part of the front surface of the unit body 271 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to be three vertically separated from each other.

  The unit body 271 has an upper opening 574c that is notched squarely from the rear end toward the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is notched forward from the rear end to the left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front left decorative portion 574e is formed such that the front surface thereof is substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed in the front-rear direction. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent so that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that combines a substantially right triangle connecting the front end of the set side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decoration board 577 is placed behind the top middle decoration member 576 in a state where the front surface is inclined so as to move rearward downward as it goes along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decoration member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The light guide member 578 will be described as a straight portion that extends straight left and right from the end to the center from the end to the center near the center. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the circular arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and is formed such that the height in the vertical direction decreases at the arc portion 578b toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271 and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like unevenness, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc portion 578b and having a plurality of unevennesses. It has.

  In a state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is formed by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit main body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, LEDs 583a are mounted at positions facing the left end surfaces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is mounted inside the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 allows the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall having a square shape as viewed in front extending from the rear side of the side wall at right angles to the left and right, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of the right-angled triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper part of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the side that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in a board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so that the front face moves forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to cause a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the right rear side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front face of the board base 585 so that the front face moves to the front as it moves toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to move to the left and right. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arcuate portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in line with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member are provided. It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571.
The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are hollowed backward. Therefore, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that only the top middle decoration member 576 protrudes forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thus, the entire front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a through hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 before and after the door frame base 110 in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction is reduced. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponding to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 is a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The shape of the lower half (the lower part than the upper plate 321) of the effect operation unit 400 (the lower part of the upper plate 321) is recessed so that the front surface (the front surface of the lower plate front decoration portion 326c) is recessed backward. The front surface of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape such that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward of a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is emphasized and emphasized to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the “early pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, the operation button 410 can be pressed from above like an operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be left or right. , Or from the front, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised by the player. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 under the lower pachinko machine becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, and appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the lower part of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear portion of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around to the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In contrast, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. In other words, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d) in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower dish cover 340. Side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate hole 322a in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are discharged into the lower dollar box or the like from the lower plate ball hole 322a immediately after entering the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Accordingly, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 or the game balls or the like discharged from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoying that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the lower left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the lower plate 322, and a lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball 322. It can be guided to the hole 322a or indirectly reflected to the right wall to the hole 322a. Thus, in a state in which the lower dish hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are located on the left side of the lower dish hole 322a in the lower dish 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first region A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in which the lower plate 322 faces forward between the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand on or nears the lower plate 322, the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker opening 326e can be tactilely felt by the player, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in the private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Further, since the door frame 3 can illuminate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. Inside, the pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine with high appeal to the player is provided. Machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the top frame decorative unit in the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both left and right sides are located rearward. Accordingly, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player, The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers which are separated to the left and right are provided above the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not noticeable at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player, and to provide the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes greatly forward in the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  The door frame 3 has the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction projecting forward. And when the effect operation unit 400 is illuminated and decorated, the player can see a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. 63 is a front view of the game board without the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 taken apart and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is a view of the game board of FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled unit viewed from behind. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is formed. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board effect display 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board effect display 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the user, and the first special portrayed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A special winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a winning port 2005, and a starting port unit 2100 and a starting port unit. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view An upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center part 2500 attached at a substantially center in the game area 5a and having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 at an upper side from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and abuts a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by the spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened to the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 is located outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projection piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1008. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, FIG. 64 and FIG. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. , Is provided. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging steps 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step 1121 is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. And a through-hole 1122 penetrating through the hole.

  The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front. In addition, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner peripheral surface formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change or a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and from the front of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It has a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with respect to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward and engages elastically with the engaging step 1115.
The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110.
The engagement piece 1125 is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state in which a gap is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 so that the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 can be inserted. (A center side). By engaging the engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claw 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The lower side of the rear surface of the out opening 1126 of the panel holder 1120 has the same width as the out opening 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch 1127 which is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1127 matches the notch 1011 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 passes through the notches 1011 and 1127 to form the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened behind the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of Gaming Panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above-described game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with front components, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wooden board such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1150 has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guiding section 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction in front view. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 has the same width as the out port 1151 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left of the lower end in front view and is opened downward, and has a notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and a vertical direction above the notch 1152. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  The game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 on the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel can be inserted between the game panel 1150 and the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of openings penetrating before and after for mounting the front unit 2000, like the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  In addition, various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transmissive members so that they can be visually checked from the outside. I have. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to countermeasures against fraud described below.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal holding display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and a lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reserve consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002. A number display 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying a second special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special reserve number display 1406 including two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result. When the special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is mainly provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board effect display device]
Next, the gaming board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The game board effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side face in front view, and right fixing pieces 1602 protruding outward from the right side face in front view. This game board-side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves that are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010c, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize openings 2001 which are capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game region 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 are in the game region 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. And a special winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at a lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a.
The gate section 2003 is disposed in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially immediately below the stop section 1006. The second start port 2004 is arranged right below the gate 2003 from the front just below the gate 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a winning port 2005, and a starting port unit 2100 and a starting port unit. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view An upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached to a substantially central portion in the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

  The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 is upwardly opened with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the large winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6 pieces), and extend to the left and right in a size that can be received, and are formed to be openable and closable according to a game state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that can always receive game balls.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the game area 5a from the center in the up-down direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view and slightly downward. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is positioned on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes, from the front, the effect units and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to. The center role 2500 has a gate unit 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire periphery excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open to enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges the ball into the game area 5a. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having an open front and having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is mounted rotatably about an axis extending left and right along the axis and houses the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the front end in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, and is inserted. And a notch portion 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by notching from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism 3020 can be slid up and down on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 appropriately uses the underside rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, the underside front movable production unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player by rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, the stronger the clockwise rotation, the stronger the ball can be hit, and a maximum of 100 continuous game balls per minute, that is, , A game ball can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is formed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper portion of the center role 2500 enters the front view left side of the outermost surface of the center role 2500 from the highest portion, the game ball abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward. When a game ball is discharged from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is positioned right above the first start port 2002, so that the ball is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When game balls are received in the first opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the area other than the center into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 or the first There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), On the downstream side, it flows down in the area where the gate section 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are provided.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the selected normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, during the period of 0.3 to 10 seconds), the opening state is established, and the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible. When game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time elapses.

  Also, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”, “ A special lottery result for generating "medium hit", "small hit", "per probability change", "time reduction", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that special lottery results obtained by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R big hit "," probability change (change in probability) "," time saving (time reduction) "," probability change time reduction "," probability change time reduction no hit "and the like.

  When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the special winning opening 2005 is ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are supplied from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to accept game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), it is possible to receive a game ball. The opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the game balls cannot be accepted. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the case of "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed ("Time savings").

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The upper limit of the number of the reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 and the game board effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that each of the symbol columns is fluctuated and displayed in a state in which three symbol columns composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in a horizontal direction. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed such that the symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, or the like) according to the selected special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the game board effect display device 1600 (the symbol row is changed). (The time until the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center role 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, rear lower movable effect unit 3100, rear upper left movable effect unit 3200, rear left movable effect A light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. This can make the player entertain and can prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. In the window part, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided in the bulging portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative section 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative section of the present invention.

  In addition, the decorative member inside the operation buttons of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side are the second decorative body of the present invention, and the present embodiment. The second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration 432, the peripheral decoration 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration 476, and the peripheral decoration 478 correspond to the second decoration of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment and the sub-screen decoration substrate The LED 477a of the 477 is a light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 correspond to the base portions of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the rendering operation unit 400 (or the second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Such as the decoration in which the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, the decoration in which the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective with no perspective, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  In addition, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side (screen unit 470)) and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that the button lens 411 can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move. Then, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, and the like) approach or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, The first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478) change according to the change in the distance from the clean decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, and the like. , Etc.) can be changed to change the perspective of the decoration which appears to overlap with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration). The decoration (intersection mode) by the member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the button lens 411 and the first decoration body Since a space is formed between the second decoration and the second decoration, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration 411a and the second button of the operation button decoration member 432 are viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is much different, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. Through this, the operation member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the second effect display device 460 on the door frame on the far side can be visually recognized well, and the radial shape of the first button decoration portion 411a can be seen. , The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) or the door frame through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

  Further, since the in-operation button decoration member 432 includes the second in-button decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. Of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 cross each other, and thus the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player can be realized by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g stand out. it can.

  In addition, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g is provided. The decoration allows the player's line of sight and interest to be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that is visible in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, so that the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Further, each LED (or the sub-screen decoration board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 is mounted. When the LED 477a) emits light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), and further, the button lens 411 can also emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by light-emitting decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner board 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) at this time. Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, the second button decoration section 432g has the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button While the decoration is performed by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the inner decoration board 435 and the inner decoration board 436 below the operation button, the first button decoration unit 411a displays the second button decoration. The part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) diffuses and emits light with indirect light. Since the second button decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly light-emitting decorated while the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emitting decoration, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, With the LEDs (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 emitting light, the first button decoration part 411a and the By looking at the two-button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the sense of perspective is emphasized, and to appeal the player's interest to the player. A high pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, since the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the decoration member 432 inside the button lens 411 and the operation button (or the door) There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button decoration member 432 (or the door frame) is not required. The second side effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward and enlarged as much as possible, and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be made larger. 460A). Further, as described above, since there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be provided. The pachinko machine 1 can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance and attract the player's attention, and have a high appealing power.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is formed into a flat shape. Compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be hardly broken (hardly broken). Therefore, when the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being irritated and deteriorating the fun, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, the pachinko machine 1 has The outside diameter of the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing / retreating) by being operated by the player in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ３０30 cm, and an operation button interior decoration visible from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. And a frame-shaped frame unit 415 to be attached, the effect operation unit 400 having the largest possible operation button 410 at the position where the storage bowl of the game ball stands out in the conventional pachinko machine (second Since the effect operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b. First LED 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b with light emission, and second LEDs 422b, 423b for causing the frame side lens 417 to decorate with light, the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. In the frame main body 416 partitioning between the decorative part 411b Since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the cylinder 416d, the second button decoration 411b, and the center of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylinder 416d and the main body are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration 411b by the 413a and the inner extension 413f. Lighting can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently illuminated for light emission. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly and luminously decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescence effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately turning off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b, light emission effects of various patterns are performed. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to make the player entertain, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Also, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided by one operation button left outer decoration. Since the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration section is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. The first LEDs 422a and 423a can be moved as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b as compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently emitted. The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly illuminated and decorated, the appearance of the luminous decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, since the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decoration board 422 is moved in accordance with the advance / retreat of the operation button 410. In addition, the wiring connected to the decoration board 423 outside the operation button does not bend or extend, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken, and thus the operation button 410 can be moved (operation) or the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The light-emitting decoration can be enjoyed by the player without any problem, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When viewing the (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edges of the operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) are set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Is decorated, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b are appropriately made to emit light so that the decoration member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the light emitting effect and the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). The effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge is made operable by the player, the operation button 410 is provided to the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By allowing the player to operate, the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect) can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player-participation type effect and entertain.

  Furthermore, since it is provided with an opaque main body 413a and an inner extension 413f that enable only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second operation button 410 The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged rearward because the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is bright. It is possible to prevent the in-operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being hard to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a favorable state, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect) can be provided through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a favorable state, and the player can enjoy the decoration and the luminous effect sufficiently, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion from the portion 411b. On the other hand, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is provided at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer side Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. I will not do it. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described operation and effect can be realized.

  Further, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the second button decoration part 411b is provided behind the operation button 410. The body and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body 413a on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 Also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body 413a, and completely blocks the intrusion of light into the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can be. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration and the light emitting effect sufficiently, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is provided in front of a portion outside the operation button decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (the button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (the second door frame side second effect display device 460A) is moved from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (second display device 460A on the door frame side). The members and the rear (rear side) outside the effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. Also, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button decoration member 432 (the second effect on the door frame side) with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decoration member 432 in the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b are provided. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape.
Therefore, by appropriately emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, a light emission effect in which light turns around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect or a light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player hard to get bored with various light emission effects, and to enjoy the player. Instead, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game by the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 is driven into the game area 5a. At the same time, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 so that a predetermined space is provided behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, a portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is located from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside and a lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front, so that the lower plate 322 can be made less noticeable, and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively easily noticeable. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were viewed vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can make the player recognize at first glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine and can strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, at the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the upper portion extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends toward the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from contacting the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are brought into contact with or pressed against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the interest of the player from being lowered, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, lower plate covers 340 and 340A that restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j at the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling injured or unpleasant by entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j by the game ball, and the player's interest in playing the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  Also, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 in the lower plate second region A2, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 bounce inside the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325, the player can move the lower plate main body 325 to the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion). When the hand is put into the lower plate second area A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can restrict the fingertips and the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. And the like can be prevented from touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be.

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc., due to the contact of the game balls with the lower plate covers 340, 340A, etc. Is not transmitted to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) from the lower plate covers 340, 340A, and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

  Further, at the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, since the lower plate hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, the lower plate hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls released from the lower bowl supply port 323c can be directly inserted into the lower bowl extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be removed from the lower bowl main body 325. It is difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the contact with the rear side can be prevented, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be prevented from being damaged, and the interruption of the game can be reduced, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game balls in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be reduced, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition to this, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, it can be easily repaired simply by replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce an increase in the burden on the game hall where the player 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction expands most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as accepting a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After being provided on the plate unit cover 326 of the protruding plate unit 320, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are removably attached to the portion of the plate unit 320 that protrudes forward, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, which is capable of storing game balls. The storage plate (the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) is provided on the storage plate (the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) outside the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) in a front view. A space in the rear part of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view and the lower plate first area A1 located in front. , The effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and the storage dish (upper dish 321) can be seen. In addition, the lower plate 322) can be made small and less noticeable. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is conspicuous at a portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, and the gaming machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. Can be recognized at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be provided.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is located. Although smaller, the first lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the additional portion 325B, the second additional portion 325C, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in a region of the lower plate 322 that is not visible from the front (lower plate second area A2). it can. Accordingly, the storage amount of the game balls can be sufficiently ensured against the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first additional portion 325B, and the second additional portion. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portions 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C having a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, and the like, The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second effects) having different rearward protrusion amounts. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the effect operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 has a container shape depressed downward, and the game ball is formed. Can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portions 340a that rise from the upper ends of the main body standing wall portions 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having a shape corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, various forms can be accommodated. Accordingly, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are connected to the portion where more game balls are loaded by storage. No boundary (joint, division line PL) is located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even when a large number of game balls are stored, a force such that the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. The lower plate cover 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off the lower plate main body 325 without acting.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which games such as accepting game balls in the general winning opening 2001 and the like are performed. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And more than half of the lower plate 322 including (i.e., the player) is difficult to see from the front (player), the pachinko machine 1 can have a cleaner appearance and look better, and the player's interest can be improved. The pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the user. Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game in the lower dish 322 is provided to the player. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and prevent the ball from being distracted, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish on the bottom of the lower dish 322 that guide game balls from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball hole 322a by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). Since the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d between the ball hole 322a and the ball guiding portion 322c is made difficult to see, the lower plate hole 322a is left open. The game balls supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downwardly from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is possible to give an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoying the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate hole 322a. In addition, the lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate 322 is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured as compared with the appearance.

  Further, in a state in which the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower bowl 322 from the lower bowl supply port 323c are transferred to the lower bowl supply port 323c of the bottom of the lower bowl 322 and the lower bowl 322c. The guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d can smoothly guide the ball to the lower plate hole 322a and discharge it to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing around the lower plate 322, and it is possible to surely make the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 difficult to visually recognize from the front (a player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, to prevent the player from being distracted, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when the lower bowl extraction hole 322a is kept open, the game balls supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c to the lower bowl 322 can be immediately transmitted to the player without being noticed by the ball guiding section 322c or the like. Since it is possible to discharge the ball downward from the lower plate hole 322a, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game ball is discharged to the lower portion (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoying the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322, the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is at least twice as large as the size of 322, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls as in the case of a conventional pachinko machine lower plate.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 swelling forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as accepting a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit mounting for mounting a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 of FIG. In addition to the portion 326a, the decorative portion 326c on the front of the plate unit cover 326 on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is recessed so that the lower portion of the decorative portion 326c below the plate below the center in the vertical direction is hollowed backward. Because of the shape, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the production operation unit attaching portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate are seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see it. At a glance, it is possible to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and it is possible to obtain the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the front lower decorative portion 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Since a part is wrapped behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of game balls (the volume of the lower plate 322) in the lower plate 322, It is not necessary to play while paying attention to the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls, so that the player can be dedicated to the game, and the game can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is lower. The rear wall 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like can be made hard to touch. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game balls is sufficiently ensured even by touch, and when the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, the lower plate 322 Since it can be recognized that many game balls are stored in the game, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, and to enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 does not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, or the like, the player has the same feeling as the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity given to a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by relieving the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be wider toward the back side (rearward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is less noticeable at the front surface (the lower front decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to increase the appealing power to the player and to increase the player's appeal. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 covers the side and the upper side of the part of the lower plate 322 that is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) with the lower plate cover 340, the player can move the lower plate 322 into the lower plate 322. When the hand is inserted, it is possible to prevent a fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), thereby preventing injury. The game can be played in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is opened from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent and appealing enough to attract the player's attention, and the decoration by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, it is possible to entertain the decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball hole 322a that penetrates up and down so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine is used. Has the same function as the lower plate in the above, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, when playing with the present pachinko machine 1, will not be confused about the function of the lower plate 322, as in the past It is possible to play a game with a simple feeling, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower counter ball supply port 323c and the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is viewed from the front. The lower bowl hole 322a is invisible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer and the appearance can be improved, and a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the player's interest. Machine 1.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 swelling forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. The base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326, the door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting the effect to the player. The operation button decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Is about 15 cm and the center expands in the direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450). Operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 attached thereto, a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 are provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and the button lens is provided. Since there is a cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the decoration inside the operation buttons are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge, the back side (rear side), and the like of the in-operation button decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) from the gap between the member 432 (the screen unit 470). Thus, the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button button 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button (screen unit 470) to be separated from each other. Since the outer edge and the back side of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button can be made larger by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. 470) can be satisfactorily concealed by the first button decoration portion 411a and the like even when the gap between the large operation button and the large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm is prevented while preventing the appearance from being deteriorated. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be increased in size, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the interest of the player is increased. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained by attracting.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 (the main body 413a) is provided to protrude from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the outside of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) can be shielded by the inner wall of the button base 413 to make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is reduced. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the direction in which the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. (A plane perpendicular to the plane), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side.
Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) are combined by combining the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are provided. The side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device that allows the player to entertain with the operation buttons 410 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be embodied.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorativeness) is imparted to the operation button 410. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 has a button The clearance between the lens 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button (screen unit 470) can reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button (screen unit 470) from being seen. Deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like can be reduced to improve the appearance.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 over the entire circumference with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to form a player. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button (screen unit 470) of the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body 413a and the decoration member 432 in the operation button 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can move. Can be satisfactorily moved.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is formed in a cylindrical shape, compared to the case of a polygonal shape, the outer periphery has no directionality, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation-type production using the operation button 410 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the operation buttons 410 are enlarged, when performing a player participation type effect of causing the player to operate the operation buttons 410, it is easy to check the position of the operation buttons 410 without having to operate the operation buttons. Since the touch operation can be easily performed by touching the operation button 410, the player can easily participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is provided with the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), by presenting the effect image according to the game state, the interest of the player can be controlled. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be used. The effect can be enjoyed, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by the effect image or the light emitting effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making the player actively participate in the player-participation type production and entertaining. Also, by performing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good depending on the player, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. Can be.

  Further, it is possible to visually recognize the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) through the transparent button lens 411 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. This allows the player to immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the present pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has a high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's expectation for an effect using the operation button 410 or the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 is increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed at a portion on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decoration 411a may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed in a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) of the operation button 410 surrounds the entire periphery of the outer periphery of the button lens 411 from the outer periphery of the operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (the main body part 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation member decorative member 432 and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display units 460A may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may be a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decorations (flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on at least the inner wall side.
Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is desirably subjected to light diffusion processing such as a grain, a slit, a prism, or the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 has been described as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. However, the lower plate is recessed from both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). 322, or may be depressed rearward only from the right outer part of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), and a part may wrap around the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). It may be.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the lower plate 322 on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the lower front decorative portion 326 c) is curved rearward. Although an example in which the shape is concave is shown, the present invention is not limited to this example.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A device having a rotating body having a decoration on its surface, a device having a decoration having a decoration, and a movable device for moving the decoration, Characters, items, logos, and decorations that simulate scenes (dioramas) etc. that conform to the concept of the machine. Or a member provided with a decoration such as a seal or printing ”, or a member such as a panel. The number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j may be attached.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a that is opened forward for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to apply decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, and the like in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine to the front surface of such a dish unit cover by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, and the like. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is set by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion. Although an example in which coating is made difficult to see from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be made hard to see from the front, The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the arc-shaped one in which the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  In the above-described embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an elliptical shape) centered on the center.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button arranged on the rear side, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the front member and the rear member disposed in the front and rear (or up and down) is provided under a predetermined condition. It is also possible to adopt a configuration having a variable light transmitting means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a device such as a magic mirror, the rear side of which can be visually recognized due to a difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side"; Or become opaque so that the rear side can be seen. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By having the variable light transmission means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member, or, the front member and the rear member, is in a state that can be viewed, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapped decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, and the player can be prevented from getting bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the user.

  More specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member is darkened by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. When the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is illuminated by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

  Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. The decoration with the surface of the player can be shown to the player. When the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, if both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and When the space between the front member and the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED). ), And the satisfaction conditions of the respective variable light transmission means in the front member and the rear member are respectively satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) passes through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player.
Thus, by appropriately selecting a portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting section, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, when the rear side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, so it can be seen on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

  Also, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is described as a magic mirror, but the same function and effect can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film can transmit light even in an opaque state (has a light transmitting property), the light can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or decorated with light) by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects such as a light emitting effect and a decorative effect. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a block diagram showing a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a connection terminal board for a game ball or the like that relays an electrical connection with a display board. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that performs a process for generating a control power supply (for example, +5 V) and also controls a game including payout of award balls. And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect related to a game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The two control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 69, the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG that controls the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the power-on time. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like; A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage. Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, “main control built-in”) that updates a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 32767 is set as the minimum value in the present embodiment), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value as a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a). Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are changed to various types. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function And is composed of The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, and the information is output. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal based on the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is configured to output the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  A first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004, and general shown in FIG. A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting a game ball entering the winning opening 2001 or a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Also, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the attached magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting cheating using a magnet is transmitted to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signal from each of these switches, so that the main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. A control signal is output from 1310ca to a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to a starting port solenoid 2107 and an attacker solenoid 2108 via a panel relay board 4161, and a predetermined output port thereof. The drive signal is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the first special symbol display 1403 from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the ordinary symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information (game information) relating to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main with reset function is output. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game ball. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur at the general winning opening 2001 and 2012 where the game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function as serial data. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects to the bus 1310ah. It is connected to the circuit (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power-on. Is output from the payout control board 951, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the main control MPU 1310a completely erases the RAM from the main control built-in RAM. (Cleared).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like, as shown in FIG. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. An operation switch 954 also having a function as a RAM clear switch is a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as a “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. And outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out a game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d and a CR unit for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program converts various types of game-related information (game information) and various types of payout commands from the main control board 1310 into a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), an error release navigation command of 16 bits (2 bytes) (corresponding to a first error release command) is created, and the error occurrence command and error release navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as serial data to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmitting means).
The payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process was executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process was executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error canceling control means).

  When a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command). When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input.
In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals input from the various detection switches from the various detection switches, which are not reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. A payout control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and a payout control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset function and having no reset terminal. And is composed of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function is configured to reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a payout control system reset described later, and to output the information. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal based on the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by not being reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  An out-of-ball detection sensor 827 for detecting an out-of-ball of a game ball in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the discharge blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the discharge control MPU 952a via the discharge control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b. The input is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Also, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The dispensing control MPU 952a receives various commands related to dispensing from the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data system, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting the signal to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, thereby performing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, so that the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to be displayed on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is output to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply path of the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is seen." Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, the payout rotator and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance, and the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. Notification) and the number When “3” is displayed, it is notified that “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full sensor 279, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls). Is displayed, and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (that the electrical connection is cut off from one of the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it is "stocking (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present)" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is predetermined). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, so that the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Then, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game hall (a hall). ), The number of game balls and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal plate 784 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main computer 1310 that proceeds the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first transmitted to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via 869.
The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball renting device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. The payment control MPU 952a is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball rental display unit 330 to the game ball. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. Also, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. I have. The payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is turned off by the capacitor BC1 in the power-off process. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are transmitted to a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental devices such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (Accurately, the connection terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , CR unit 6 and game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and main door relay is performed. The terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. Each wiring (harness) is electrically connected between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the board with the connection terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like and the frequency display board 365. In addition, AC 24 V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game device rental terminal connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and the ground LG. , While supplying the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and supplying it to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the part surface thereof, and the push button switch is positioned at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. Is mounted, and a ball return display unit 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via a ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicators are sequentially driven one digit indicator at a time. The lighting of the digit segment display is controlled. By such lighting control, the ball rental display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6, or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment displays, and the designated one-digit segment display. Are turned on and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of seven signals) for designating the content to be displayed are provided from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the board 880, the one-digit segment display is sequentially lit according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content by the light emission of the container can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363.

  Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending display section 330. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be loaned in one payout operation (25 balls in the present embodiment, equivalent to 100 yen as an amount). Is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. And a signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible or impossible is output to the CR unit 6 via a PRDY signal, which is a signal terminal for connecting a lending device for a gaming ball or the like. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. For example, if the clerk of the hall or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that 200 yen of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for 200 yen in total are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of the paid out game balls as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 that can be electrically connected to or cut off from 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from a pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 operates the power switch 934 to rectify the 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935 a. A power factor improving circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 953 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a controls the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether to forcibly stop launching (firing) a game ball according to the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the firing control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal for notifying the fact via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a controls the driving current for launching (firing) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the driving current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, The control of sending the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side is performed.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. An effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side effect display device 1600 and a door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460 while controlling sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information for specifying the date, and time and minute. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and a lower speaker 92 And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various types of information (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the game board-side effect display device 1600 and various light emitting modes such as various LEDs) that are continued across the peripheral control unit regular processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input Manage schedule data that defines Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information such as information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ) Is stored, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally or not. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c cannot hold the stored contents only for a time period in which the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d You can't keep it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When this timer expires, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each of the decorative boards of the game board 5 is based on the various commands. A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted. Motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 through the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to a main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400 are provided. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors and the like) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). Diagnose whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviated Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I / Peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak read and write various data via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d; A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between the I / O port 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ＤＭＡDMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading / writing to / from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The I / O devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. While reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board, a serial I / O port for a motor driving board, a frame decoration driving amplifier board, a motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, serial I / O port for main control board, and serial I / O port for effect operation unit information acquisition.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a predetermined period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, the movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output.
This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant weight in the game. The LED lighting control is performed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like except for this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control potentiometer 1510a. When the knob of the volume control potentiometer 1510a is rotated, the resistance value is variable, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is controlled. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall of a failure of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to render the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful, or to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player). Is also transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependency on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound from the mute to the maximum volume is provided. Can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Thus, for example, even when a clerk of the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing an illegal act. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's misconduct due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while It is possible to increase the volume at which the sound is played and to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 in addition to the music and sound effects, or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. Sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in a time-series manner, and defines the order of the screen to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for designating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for designating which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or may be used when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

  The peripheral control ROM 1511b includes one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is obtained based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time From this, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further added by 10% which is the correction information acquired to the 75%. The backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores, among the various types of information updated by the execution of various control programs, the information to be backed up exclusively for backup. A work area 1511ca to be managed, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing a copy of various control programs stored therein, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copied data, and backup non-management data for exclusively storing, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, data not to be backed up. A work area 1511cf is provided.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and is cleared to zero. Regarding the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts the RAM clear effect. (For example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is backed up as a backup target, and effect information (1 ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is “Bank”. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is used in the same meaning.) “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. And “Bank 4” (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same sense).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. Lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored in the storage area. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (for an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set. Other schedule data is read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies is set. ai includes various kinds of information (for example, the effect of the operation operation) of acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, which are created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, are set. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data. Direction with peripheral control board 1510 based on LOCKN signal to be described A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor-drive-board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit regular process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board-side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. You. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. −DAT is set, and each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the door decoration is performed in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed is set. The processing proceeds on the basis of this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmit data memory area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. In some cases, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms), which is a content copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms). When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs as the effect backup information (1ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511 cc is managed as one page, with Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511 cc has a total of two pairs of Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d include a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power recovery due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Also, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit game state) Etc.), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is used for effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information 0) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. “(SRAM)” is “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , And “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of presentation information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with one pair of two banks as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the second backup area 1511dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing one pair of the Bank1 (SRAM) and the Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area. Reference numeral 1511dc denotes an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display control unit]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is illustrated in FIG. 72. As described above, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 are drawn. In addition to a sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a for controlling and various character data of screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, various kinds of music and sound effects are also provided. LCD and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d arranged near the lower part of the device 460 and transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 A signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the differential circuit 1512e for differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal, and a signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e Is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b includes, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (ring-shaped display object) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, and display of an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and volume adjustment icon data described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main body frame rear image data used for displaying the main frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear of the main frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player, and the display of the service mode screen Break used to display service mode screen image data and break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. In addition, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. In accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to incorporate the sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, transmits the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, one by one from the top screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound instruction data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the After being extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the first sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in VRAM”) is also provided. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board effect display 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also outputs the data for the door frame side effect display 460. The drawing data is sent from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The effect display arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is, as described above, the peripheral data. Since the control board 1510 is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, with respect to the channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the V-by-One ( (Registered trademark) ", the system is less affected by noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effector transmitter IC 4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to effect display drive board 4450. The serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, which is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 for one screen (1). Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for effect display device 460 is shown from channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, the “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to the rendering data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 in the built-in VRAM. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then (transmit), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps for a second, so that a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. The “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this method, the rendering data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, as shown in FIG. 74, stores music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel numbers. An output channel is set, music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized, and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume values are included. Specifically, for the production sound, the above-mentioned board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the amplified sound is amplified to a master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value. When the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the sound is amplified from the lower volume speaker 921 and the upper volume speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. The volume is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually converted to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. And amplifies the amplified effect sound into serialized audio data and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used; Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track used The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually set to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, in the case where the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of outputting the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 is briefly described. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which the production sound is incorporated, the subvolume value set for the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually It is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and And outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 actually. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been performed. The volume of the production sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the production operation unit 400). When the operation mode is changed to the setting mode by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set.) It is flowing.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1, Although the sound volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data. Then, when the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start flowing again from the point where the notification sound started flowing, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed after the notification sound started flowing. It starts to flow again from where you proceed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw in the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. And the upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and as differential serial data in which left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential schemes between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the plus signal and the noise component on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side effect transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , Green video signal, and blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, that is, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discern, the lower two bits that are output from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a and contain the weak color information are invalidated.

  Three video signals, ie, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Are input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs three image signals of a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. A signal and a clock signal are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and only one differential pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, so that the path from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600 is provided. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door. Since the signal is output (transmitted) to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the path from the channel CH2 to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side (No. Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the opposite side of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. On the closed side which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, besides the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 and the upper plate 321 is provided on the closed side of the main body frame 4. A full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching the paid-out game balls to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is disposed.
Also, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, there is arranged a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn to the vicinity of the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise due to the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise due to the electrostatic discharge by the game balls, and the like. The environment is subject to noise and the like that has entered the system.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1, “Thine Electronics Co., Ltd.” By adopting the differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less affected by noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; As described above, a differential one-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. Is not a parallel line provided simply in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a brief description will be given of a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the electronics for the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are provided by THine Electronics Even if a mechanism that is hardly affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., such a configuration using hardware alone causes an electrostatic discharge of a game ball. If the serial data in the parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko machine equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. For directing the door frame provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the Sheaver IC SDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The frame data is received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from the normal data, and in the display area of the door frame-side effect display device 460, an image such as a so-called sandstorm is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In the effect transmitter IC 1512d, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less affected by noise. In addition to such a hardware configuration, A twisted pair cable that can cancel (removal) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data in the differential system is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. Thus, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by the noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display controller 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what image it is. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 In the connection between the two, ie, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is not a structure in which the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are integrally formed, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4 separately. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4 to maintain the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it is not possible to solve the problem occurring in the door frame 3, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various kinds provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs the differential communication “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Was adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wires for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Accordingly, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 include, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is performed. Between input and output of a wiring pattern, a part of a signal for transmitting serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is reduced. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red, the other is gray, the power supply wires of the harness are red, and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes a LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In the differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection to transmit the two signals, When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. Have been. Thus, when two signals that have been differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to be transmitted so that the two signals are transmitted. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted to the differential circuit 1512 e. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit connection is performed to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a period of displaying the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on on the game board effect display device 1600, or performing a demonstration using the game board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and converts various serialized signals. And a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Upon receiving the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and judging that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame-side effecting receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying the predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal and output the image to the gaming board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

  When the door-frame-side effecting receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Then, the signal is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the control unit. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the plate unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that no failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “A failure has occurred in the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device”). Please call the clerk. "), Playing the game board by controlling the VDP 1512a In addition to outputting to the display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, “a problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device”) to that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a drive power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and adds the acquired calendar information and time information to the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad. The effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed is unfolded on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds not only calendar information and time information but also LED luminance setting information when the game board effect display device 1600 has an LED-type backlight. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by the PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, as well as calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker.
In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the hour, minute and second.

  As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. In addition, information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability) can be stored and held.

  In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the production date and time. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. The calendar information and the time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is desired. Or to adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the game panel effect display device 1600 has an LED type backlight, the game panel effect is displayed. The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and sets the calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is obtained by acquiring the time information for specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if June has already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 80% further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information obtained by the adjustment. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current date and time may be specified.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 1510a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 levels of values 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect (E.g., a screen displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or a notification is made that there is a high possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player, or the like). Etc.) also flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, so that the sound is muted. The maximum sound volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Thus, for example, even when a clerk of the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing an illegal act. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's misconduct due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects, the screen played by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and converts the converted value to a digital value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. I have. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of a sound effect such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and the effect sound is produced. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. And adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation to increase or decrease the value of the board volume, thereby adjusting the volume of music or sound effects. Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the clerk of the hall can turn the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. However, with the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall, there are cases where the player feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, and there are cases where the player feels loud and feels noisy with the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and the game console effect display device 1600 enters a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration. If the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effect because the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall is small and it is difficult to hear the sound or the sound effect, the staging operation unit 400 is used. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the volume adjusted by the store clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are loud, the production operation unit The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is played in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, the state becomes a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. Thereby, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game previously feels that the adjusted volume is low and it is difficult to hear music and sound effects, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player playing the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume, and last time, sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game If the player who has been playing feels loudly at the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud about the music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and performs a game this time can use the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 or the like. The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the pressing operation section 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, a power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 and FIG.
FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko machine is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that generates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the hit ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to a connection terminal plate 869 for a device for renting a game ball or the like via a power supply board 931 and is also supplied to a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the rectified power to the power factor improving circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies the DC + 37V to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the resulting signal to the emission control circuit 953a of the emission control unit 953 and the power generation circuit 935d.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. Backup power to the supplied RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control section 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball with a launching strength (firing strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302 as shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the ball and outputting the same to the firing solenoid 682, the ball feeding unit 250 outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 to thereby control the ball of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d supplies a direct current +5 V (DC +5 V, hereinafter referred to as “+5 V”), a direct current +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”) and a direct current from +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935 c. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is a + 5V power line, the power system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is a + 12V power line, and the power system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is a + 24V power line.

  The + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V generation circuit 1310g generates + 5V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is discharged. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the discharge control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The current flows toward the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electric connection method of + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 by an electric connection method in which the supply control substrate 951 and the power supply substrate 931 return to the supply control substrate 951 again. Is supplied and can be charged. Thereby, when the + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, the + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction by the diode MD0, The current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by supplying + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V generation circuit 1310g can generate + 5V. When the power is exhausted, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has a diode. Although the current is interrupted by MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is configured by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control substrate 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and + 12V are output. Two kinds of voltages, + 24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are supplied to the peripheral device via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 The drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates a DC 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter, referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board effect display 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to a backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V generation circuit 194a that generates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. In addition to the + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates and the like of the door frame 3.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates + 3.3V from + 12V. The + 3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. And the door frame side effect display device 460. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this + 5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0 and, for example, to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and generates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V power supply line of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from the + 5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the signs of the + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of + 12V and + 24V. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the data is input to a decorative board or the like of the door frame via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, that is, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, and applies the voltage to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line. As compared with the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Circuit of main control board]
Next, circuits and the like of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to the controller and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310g shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 for outputting a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 for outputting a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal has its one end electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, which is grounded to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component multiplied by the voltage) is first removed. And smoothed.

  The + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). , The ripple is further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to a power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or a momentary power failure to a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded, and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, the + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V generation is performed. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is applied with the main VBB to retain the stored contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is smaller than the threshold value when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected at one end to the other end of the capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected at one end to the other end of the capacitor MC8, which is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the output terminal F by applying +5 V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to a CLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a clock signal of 24 MHz. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this circuit receives an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 and the like. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, only the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the RAM (built-in control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952 a of the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 The operation is performed when the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from power-on, and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on). And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have a function of canceling an error of the payout control board 951, if an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is output from the payout control board 951 HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up having one end electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is connected to a non-inverting buffer. Main control via the ICMIC 10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 10A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  A circuit for outputting an operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and transmits an operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW when the operation switch 954 is not operated. In this case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic becomes HI and is input.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a must instruct that the RAM stored in the main control built-in RAM be erased to clear the RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal which is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the effect of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is increased by using the voltage of + 12V. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are shifted to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two kinds of voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure indication, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, and outputs the power supply control board in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. 951 to the payout control MPU 952 a and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, monitoring of +12 V power failure or momentary power failure, and output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal, which is a reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is a cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set) serving as a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected at one end to the other end of the capacitor MC20 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied by a voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , +12 V and the reference voltage Vref. The third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V, and the second terminal, which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the reference voltage Vref. The fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, is applied with the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V, and the sixth terminal, which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B, is applied with the reference voltage Vref. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line, and to one end. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR21, MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage starts to fall from + 24V when + 24V fails or momentarily stops. , The monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 has a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12 V is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, a fifth terminal, which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and one end. And the other end of the resistor MR25, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21, is divided by +12 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47 V in the present embodiment) when the voltage starts to fall from +12 V when +12 V fails or momentarily stops. , The monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The terminal is electrically connected to a PR terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure notice signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal). On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets a latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the logic is set to LOW at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Is maintained, a state where a signal whose logic is set to HI is output from the output terminal 1Q is maintained. The state of output from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal as the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal are each grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal as the D input terminal is stored, and is not output from the 1Q terminal as the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal which is a preset terminal and a signal from the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 which monitors the power failure or momentary power failure of + 24V, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary interruption, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal for inverting the logic of the output terminal 1Q terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The power failure clear signal is output after the main control MPU 1310a performs a power-on process to be described later and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is inverted. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951, and also outputs a peripheral power failure notice signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b for electrically connecting the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed through the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit including the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is set in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW becomes D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit without resetting function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and is connected to the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Also, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). (Harness) is electrically connected to the payout control board 951. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switching circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a subsequent switching circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from a 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and The MTR21 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The first-stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the second-stage transistor MTR22, that is, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the first-stage transistor MTR21, is reduced to the ground (GND) side, so that the second-stage switch circuit is turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW becomes D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. By being input, the preceding transistor MTR21 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is reduced to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, whereby the latter transistor MTR22 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 having one end grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit including the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is set in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW becomes D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW changes to the peripheral control board. 1510.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 1310b for transmitting a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the CPU as a peripheral power failure notice signal to the peripheral control board 1510, has one transistor each, and a power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 951. Main function without reset function to output as power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage. The logic of the payout power failure notification signal is based on the logic of the power failure notification signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure notification signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. And is different from the logic of the power failure notice signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 having one end electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is also connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, while the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected to the payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, a power failure notice is issued by a logic (ON / OFF signal) of a power failure notice signal using +5 V, which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board The main control MPU 1310a is connected between the main control MPU 1310a and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 in order to suppress the influence of noise entering a wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of payout control MPU 952a and peripheral control MPU 1511a Is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to / from main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. An RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 via the main control input circuit 1310b as a main serial data reception signal. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as a main payment serial data transmission signal without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb transmits a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and transmits the serial data transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is transmitted as the peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above is input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, and, for example, a payout that notifies the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are received via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function And outputs drive signals from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to various displays, and outputs various information (game information) relating to games to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to output the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The control output circuit 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, and the like.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. To the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. A main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 to each other. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is increased by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. Have been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is configured.
).

To the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310, + 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied via the dispensing control board 951, and to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50, the minus terminal is grounded to ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, for example, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main charge serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least a command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and the transmission can be completed as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

  As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of the intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When the shift register 1310aea transmits main serial data, a main serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from + 12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

  In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting the main circumference serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is connected to the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the gate. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is connected to ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is shifted to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . Accordingly, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  To the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also to a Vcc terminal (terminal No. 6) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (the fourth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (the fifth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main circumference serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Input terminal.

  Accordingly, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When power or a momentary power failure occurs, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be transmitted, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without being dropped or lost.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is reduced to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW due to the voltage being lowered to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V which is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage decrease. That is, for the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained. The control reference voltage includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 drops due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminal and the terminal, the terminal is the second auxiliary power supply. By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being interrupted and to prevent the command being transmitted from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate missing commands immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

  The plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all configured as main serial data, and include a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. Thus, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that allows all commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main circumference serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and does not omit them. Can be reliably received.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, circuits and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, and various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The + 5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing ripples (AC components superposed on the voltage). The second terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, and smoothing is performed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to a power supply terminal of a payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . The power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a has a power supply terminal, a VDD terminal, in which, when a power outage or an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 causes the power interruption or the instantaneous interruption. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) incorporated in the payout control MPU 952a, and has a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Are electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control substrate 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is reduced to VBB. Since the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 and does not flow through the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the VDD terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The stored contents are held by application of the payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 MHz) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG.
The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. You can do it.
Specifically, when the +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25 V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value while the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing a ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. Further, the smoothed +5 V is applied to not only the VCC terminal but also the OE terminal which is an output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from an OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is a clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to a ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power failure notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by a circuit to which a detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, a circuit to which a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit for inputting a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor and a circuit for inputting an operation signal from the operation switch will be described. Note that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration for inputting the detection signal from the switch is substantially the same, the circuit for inputting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state where 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21 and one end of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer frame opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is also pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 has a + 12V power supply in main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit including the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit including the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit including the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are provided with a door frame opening switch. A switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor PTR 20 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. You. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor The PTR 21 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is increased to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 because the door frame open switch 618 is OFF. As a result, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is increased to the + 5V side so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. When the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is increased to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI outputs an input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a by turning off the door frame open switch 618. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame release switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut off) in a state in which 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the terminal and to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21. It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer frame door open information output signal.

  The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32, which is connected to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 has a + 12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a voltage change from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  When the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor is turned off. The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the main frame becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR 28. As a result, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. The signal is input to the external terminal plate 784. When the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR 28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board. 1310.

  As described above, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main frame open switch 619 is turned on, an outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. Then, while the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off, and the logical Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of a state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. , It is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, but the door frame 3 and / or The player that the main body frame 4 is open can determine that a state that does not occur during the normal game has occurred, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer end The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, Or, although it cannot be determined whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player who has opened the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 does not normally occur during the game. It can be determined that this has occurred.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the normally open switches of the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are employed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the switch is turned on (conducting), the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducting) for some reason. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a short circuit occurs, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (a door frame opening switch 618 ′ and a body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body is closed for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, even when a normally open switch is used for the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a disconnection occurs. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of the two types of voltage of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 to indicate the power failure or the instantaneous power failure. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large value are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the paid outage power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V. At this time, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V is satisfied. When there is a sign of a power outage or a momentary power outage, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is set to HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. When there is no sign of a power outage or a momentary power outage of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. , The logic of the payout power failure notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. An output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the output terminal is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the dispensing control board 951. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the third tank PIC50 via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, has one end electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC40 has a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is supplied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to When the signal which is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951 on the payout control board 951, while the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When a signal whose logic is set to HI by being pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor 44a is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. At 951, a signal whose logic is LOW due to being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, whereby the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are supplied to a T-type filter circuit such as a three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the tank fullness detection sensor 279 is compared with the ball out detection sensor 827, the ejection detection sensor 842, and the like provided in the ejection device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. However, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a uses the full tank detection sensor. When it is determined based on the detection signal from 279 that the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped. Control is performed. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the payout motor 834 has the gaming ball in which the accommodation space is stored but is not full. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls. When the payout rotator is controlled to rotate the payout rotator to continue paying out the game balls, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 becomes unable to rotate when the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball path described above. The dispensing motor 834 becomes overloaded, abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted to the rotating motion of the dispensing rotator. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The first and second terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are set to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Also, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the same. When the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding and subsequent stages are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is converted into the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage via a resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR48, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is +12 V in main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 due to.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a preceding switch circuit, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from an operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) incorporated in the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. The operation is performed when the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM) is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time, and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on). Function. An operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in a function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, and after power-on (after a lapse of a predetermined period from power-on). In the function for canceling the error in ()), the signal is an error cancel signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned on, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned on. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 43. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. It is determined that the instruction is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is released. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI becomes the transistor PTR44. , The transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, as shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction does not instruct the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW becomes the transistor of the preceding stage. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned off, and the preceding switching circuit is also turned off. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 42. Is raised to the +5 V side by the resistor PR51, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that the instruction is given.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is an instruction to perform a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power line and the + 5V power line, respectively, to which +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power terminal of the payout motor 834. And the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 via the zener diode PZD60 with + 12V or + 5V as the motor driving voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are connected to the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60. Discharge motor drive signals are input to certain first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca via the resistors PR60 to PR63 to the drive ICPIC60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When the back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-mentioned zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to a stage preceding the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. Circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the BRDY as a ball request signal and the BRQ as one payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. Are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from 24 V AC supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or completed, and a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible via terminal board 869. And are output. As shown in FIG. 84, input / output circuits for inputting and outputting these various signals include photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are built in).
).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and is connected to a transistor via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND).
The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80A) without inverting the logic). Is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned on / off, the logic of a signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to a power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) having one end electrically connected to + 12V power supply line at power supply substrate 931 Is electrically connected to the other end. By turning on / off the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. You.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. You.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is also applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. I have.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and a payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the internal control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is output to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. It has the same logic.

  A PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is provided via a resistor PR84 to a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the PDY signal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR86 via the connection terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. At a predetermined voltage VL, and is electrically connected to the internal control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the internal control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic becomes LOW is output to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, an RXD terminal which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via a payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb as a payout serial data transmission signal. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

  The input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a are connected to the above-described RWMLR signal, dispensing power outage notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payment control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, respectively. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, and the above-described voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switch signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. The payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. Besides doing The payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the payer ACK signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output signal is output to the substrate 1310 or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. Output to

[10-3. Various input / output signals to / from main control board and various output signals to external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the payout control board 951 includes the payer serial data transmission signal, the payer ACK signal, the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 includes a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, Games such as jackpot information output signals such as two-round jackpot information output signals, probability variation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, ordinary symbol display information output signals, information on time savings information output signals, start opening winning information output signals, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal plate 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches ten. Prize ball number information output signal output every time, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal A game information signal such as an output signal, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. I do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. That is, to the external terminal board 784, two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 and an award ball number information output signal are output, and the main award ball number from the main control board 1310 is output. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output signal during working hours, and winning opening information Eight signals called output signals are output (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a game or the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer determines the number of jackpots in two rounds (two round jackpots). Is the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 when the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 is summed up with the number of jackpots in which 15 rounds have been made (number of occurrences of 15 round jackpots). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of occurrences of the two rounds or the number of 15 land hits from the total number of the jackpots, so that the number of the jackpots actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is large. It cannot be grasped whether it is a 2 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1. Some players select whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be skewed to the number of occurrences of the two round jackpots. 15 rounds big hit may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may excite the player more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot, The number of occurrences of the 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is two rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter shows 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of the big hit and the number of occurrences of the two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of times of the big hit game state. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the two round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the two round jackpot until the end, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal also has the 15 round jackpot information output signal. It is output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the two round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a two round big hit occurs, the two round big hit information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a two-round jackpot information output signal and a 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, a 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate.

  As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability variation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by the player who has opened the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. A signal that indicates that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal includes various prize ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize ports 2001 and 201, and the large prize port 2005 shown in FIG. This signal is transmitted every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered into the game reaches 10 balls. The 15-round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 15-round jackpot is generated. In the state The two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal for notifying that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability variation is a signal for a state where probability variation is occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that informs the user that there is a special symbol display information output signal, and the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that the display is in a stopped state, and the normal symbol display information output signal is output in a state where the variable display of the ordinary symbol is terminated (stopped) on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The information output signal is a signal that informs that there is a time reduction, the information output signal during time reduction is a signal that indicates that the time reduction state is occurring, and the start opening winning information output signal is the first start opening 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is used to output a prize ball number information output signal in white. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying the player every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number-of-prize-balls information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer sets the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the prize-ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the gaming balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the paid out game balls and to grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player whose door frame 3 and / or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during a normal game. In the present embodiment, this signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the body frame 4 are open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. // It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the signal is a signal that indicates that the state is a state, and in the present embodiment, the change of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is terminated (stopped) from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and to count the number of times to display the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is used to output a starting port winning information output signal in yellow.
The starting port winning information output signal is, as described above, a signal that informs each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, the game ball is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer executes the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and to count the number of times that the starting port winning information output signal has been input, and to count the number of times the pachinko machine 1 has the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

  The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, Output. When a 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15 round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, the number of times the 15 round big hit information output signal has been input can be counted and the total number of times that the 15 round big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot is occurring. In the present embodiment, the two-round jackpot information output signal is output while the two-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT6. Output. When the two round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a two round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the two round jackpot information output signal is input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of times that the two round big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the two round big hit information output signal is inputted.

  The output terminal PT7 is used for outputting a normal symbol display information output signal in blue. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal for notifying that the normal symbol variable display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol has been completed (stopped), and to count the number of times, and to display the general symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal during a time reduction. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that indicates that a time saving state is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When a time reduction information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is in a time reduction state when the time reduction information output signal is input. In addition to counting the number of times the information output signal is input during the time reduction, the total number of times the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be ascertained.

The output terminal PT9 is orange and outputs the information output signal during probability fluctuation.
As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the information output signal during probability variation is input, sets the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the probability variation is occurring. It is possible to grasp that there is, and it is possible to grasp the total number of times when the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the information output signal during the probability fluctuation has been input.

The output terminal PT10 is provided with a light blue color and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the ball that has hit the ball reaches 10 balls, this signal is transmitted to the effect. In the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 sets the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the game balls to be paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do.
A game ball to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered into various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the special winning port 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds. The output is made at intervals of 0.128 seconds so as to form one continuous signal.

  Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and a wiring having a connector colored in the same color as these colors is electrically connected to each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are connected to the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side of the center to the right side, also in this point, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer, and various types output on the main control board 1310 side Wiring to carry signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hole. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island facility side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the number of remaining game balls is low, the pachinko machine 1 happens to have a 15-round jackpot, so that the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient. In addition, for example, if a ball clogging or a ball is generated in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless the ball is clogged or the ball cannot be eliminated. Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 as prize balls reaches 10 in the prize ball information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side. Since the game signal cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 can output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a store clerk in the hall. The store clerk of the hall, for example, checks a hose-shaped replenishing nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 and specifies the position of the ball clogging (for example, if the ball is caught in the payout device 830). Then, the position of the clogged ball or the position of the ball is identified) and resolved, thereby returning to a state where the game ball is paid out.

  However, even if the clerk of the hall is proceeding with the work, the game by the main control board 1310 is progressing. When returning to the state in which the payout control board 951 is returned, the payout control board 951 pays out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal indicating that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches ten, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. In this case, an extremely large number of game balls are paid out even during the period in which the 15th round big hit has not occurred. The problem arises that the relationship cannot be accurately grasped by the hall computer.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 receives the game balls entered into various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls on the basis of the number of the game balls reaches ten, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to notify that, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are output. Via a hall computer. Accordingly, even if the above-described trouble (trouble such as clogging of the supply nozzle or the like, clogging of the ball in the dispensing device 830, or trouble of the ball) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of game balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit for effect display drive board]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near the lower part of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320, as described above. It mainly comprises a liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper-panel liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the minus signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which noise has been separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents a plus signal and a minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents disturbance of the serial signal.

  The door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 includes three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The signal is restored to three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have 8 bits each for the red, green, and blue video signals. Since the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two LOCKN signal output request data are also input into the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510, where two signals are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected in such a way that Thus, when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to be transmitted so that the two signals are transmitted. , The peripheral control terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450 V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame. From the side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a serial signal (serial data) by the differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect, while the differential circuit 1512e At When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a positive signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the output request of the LOCKN signal is received when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal to be described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, renders the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on as a game board side effect. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or the period during which the game board effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer and performing a demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510; The door frame side effect display device 460 is used to check whether or not the connection between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred. This is transmitted as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, The data format is completely different from the serial signal (serial data) of the differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of the company. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal signal is output. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when the received data is determined to be abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, for the purpose of forced output. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD, VDDO, LVDSVDD, PLLVDD, and PDWN terminals of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side staging receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit. A capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GND terminal serving as a ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal is provided. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output. A capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GNDO terminal serving as a ground for TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and a PLLGND terminal serving as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal indicates that when +3.3 V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and indicates that normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and power down. It is a terminal to communicate. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is a rising edge for transmitting various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, and D0 to D17 terminals) based on a clock signal DCLK output from a CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, a rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal is for instructing whether or not to permit output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by connecting the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, it will not be possible to output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. And a synchronizing signal (a 3-bit synchronizing signal) of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, The parallel signal composed of three synchronous signals (a 3-bit synchronous signal), a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal, which is restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to an abnormal state for some reason. If it is difficult to draw the data on the door frame side effect display device 460 with appropriate data, the mode is automatically switched from the normal mode to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Through this, it is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the effect to the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image data from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 for the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver IC SDIC0. The connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored by receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This terminal outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between them. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signal (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. Terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal indicating that data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 are valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal are provided with three video signals (18, red, green, and blue video signals) which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). The blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green image signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green image signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. These are input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other, and are connected to the same ground. Has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component included in first control unit MCG and second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that when an electronic component is surface-mounted, it is advantageous in that the size of the hardware circuit can be appropriately reduced by integration. However, among electronic components, integrated circuit components (components that are encapsulated in a relatively large package in which multiple types of single-function devices (such as resistors, diodes, or capacitors) are integrated) A relatively large space is created on the back side of the package because the package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which one single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package). Then, the space on the back side of such a package becomes a part that is difficult to be visually confirmed (a part where an electronic component (illegal component) is likely to be improperly mounted) in the state of surface mounting. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, for many years, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (a so-called base substrate or the like) instead of surface mounting.

  That is, the electronic components inserted and mounted tend to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting the electronic components, even in the mounted state, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place that can be easily visually confirmed, thereby preventing improper components from being mounted. It is controlled appropriately.

  However, in recent years, in the field of amusement machines, the size of the space used for production has been increasing, and the hardware circuit has been downsized while maintaining the security performance against improper mounting of electronic components. There is an increasing need to do so.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69, only the second control unit that performs effect control relating to a game is performed. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is unlikely to be targeted for impropriety, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

  That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment includes the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process. Is executable.

  Here, examples of various integrated circuit components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 include a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, and an electrolytic capacitor AC10 shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, the leads of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510). Only the surface mounting area to be mounted in the form is formed. That is, in this case, as the above-described various electronic components of the peripheral control board 1510, surface mount type components (SMD) are used. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are unlikely to be targeted for fraud, without compromising the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic components, The size of the hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The first control unit MCG uses the various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of the substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to provide the control power supply (for example, + 5V). Generation processing and processing relating to games including payout of prize balls can be executed. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly related to the grant of the player's privilege, the first control unit MCG is liable to be improper. Therefore, although it is required to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against improper mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and the game entertainment interest will be reduced. Is inevitably reduced.

  However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on its base plate (the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931). Of the various electronic components, the discrete component has a smaller package than the integrated circuit component, and even if the electronic component is improperly mounted on the back side, it can be easily confirmed visually. It can be said that the component has relatively high performance as security performance against improper mounting of electronic components.

  That is, the inventor has found that some of the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG include components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components). Focusing on the above, if the further integration as a hardware circuit is made only with components (discrete components) having high security performance against fraud, even on the first control unit MCG side which is likely to be fraudulent, It has been found that it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against improper mounting of electronic components.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG integrates only components (discrete components) having high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 117, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the improper mounting of electronic components on the first control unit MCG, which is liable to be fraudulent. Is described.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technology according to the present invention. For example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate. 951 and a power supply substrate 931. The example in which the characteristic technology according to the present invention is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. Here, here, for convenience of explanation, first, an example in which they are configured by one base substrate will be described.

Here, the base plate BB includes:
An insertion mounting area TH in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB to be inserted into the base plate BB, and which is inferior in fraud suppression performance although integration performance is inferior;
A lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form placed on the surface of the base plate BB, and the surface mounting area SM is excellent in integration performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, but is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are provided in the form of being divided.

  According to such a configuration, an electronic component that is unlikely to be fraudulent can be mounted on the surface mounting area SM, but an electronic component that should pursue fraud suppression rather than integration is mounted on the insertion mounting area TH side. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, and it is possible to preferably maintain the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
An integrated circuit component D1 in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively large package in an integrated manner and have low security performance against improper mounting;
A single-function element is merely enclosed in a relatively small package, and includes a discrete component D2 having high security performance against improper mounting.

  In this regard, as a first characteristic technique according to the present invention, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having the low security performance is connected to the insertion mounting area TH and the front surface. Of the mounting area SM, only the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance is mounted, and only the discrete component having high security performance is mounted in the surface mounting area SM having poor fraud suppression performance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against improper mounting of electronic components on the first control unit MCG, which is liable to be fraudulent.

  In the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, as the discrete component D2 having high security performance, a discrete component D2a of a surface mount type mounted on the surface mount area SM is provided. And a discrete component D2b of an insertion mounting type mounted on the insertion mounting area TH.

  That is, as described above, in general, integration of electronic components can be achieved by using a surface mounting type rather than an insertion mounting type. However, when the base plate BB is provided with both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM separately, for example, a position at which the integrated circuit component D1 to be electrically connected is provided. In addition, in view of the space in which the wiring pattern is provided, the electronic components are arranged not in the surface mounting area SM but in the insertion mounting area TH. It can also happen.

  In this regard, the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment does not use all of the discrete components D2 as the surface-mount type discrete components D2a, but uses the discrete components D2 in a form that is most suitable for integration. Partially, an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is used. As a result, it is expected that the miniaturization of the hardware circuit can be more suitably achieved while maintaining the security performance against improper mounting of the electronic component.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance is not formed on one side (back side) of the substrate, and is formed on the other side (front side) of the substrate. And the integrated circuit component are respectively mounted. On the other hand, the surface mounting area SM having inferior fraud suppression performance is not formed on one side (back side) of the substrate, but is formed on the other side (front side) of the substrate, and is formed between the integrated circuit component and the discrete component. It is desirable that the integrated circuit component is not mounted and only the discrete component is mounted. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back surface side, which is likely to be a blind spot when checking whether or not an unauthorized component is mounted, is eliminated. In addition, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted in the insertion mounting area TH that is excellent in fraud suppression performance, while the fraud suppression performance is improved. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted in the inferior surface mounting area SM, it is expected to reduce the size of hardware circuits while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting fraudulent components. Become like

  Further, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even with the discrete component D2 having the high security performance, the capacitor element having the larger capacitance value (back-up For the power supply, etc., the surface mounting area is considered to be relatively larger than other elements (resistance element, diode element, capacitor element with small capacitance value (such as for filter circuit)). It is not used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insert mount type discrete component D2b-C mounted on the insert mounting area TH. As a result, in miniaturizing the hardware circuit, security performance against improper mounting of electronic components can be more appropriately maintained.

  However, although the capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than the other elements (discrete parts), not so large a gap is created between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit part D1. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface-mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the surface mount area SM. Even in this case, it is necessary to maintain security performance against improper mounting of electronic components. Is possible.

  Moreover, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, a characteristic second technology based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technology according to the present application described above is inherent. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, one hardware circuit for achieving a specific electric function (for example, a backup power supply function) is provided. As a discrete circuit (a hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure constituted by a plurality of discrete components D2 mounted in a manner divided into an insertion mounting area TH and a surface mounting area SM.

  That is, in this case, the mounting on the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB is performed in spite of being one discrete circuit DHC for performing a specific electric function (for example, a backup power supply function). The electronic component D2b having a shape that allows it and the electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM are mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it harder to recall the fact that it is difficult to understand the circuit. In addition, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting area SM, a reduction in the size of the hardware circuit can be expected.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing improper use of electronic components.

  However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principle of the two characteristic technologies according to the present application. Next, an example in which the above technologies are applied to the embodiment of the present application will be described. explain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, a base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and a base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. And three base substrates. Then, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on these base substrates in a divided manner.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the three base boards, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed in the power board 931 and the base board of the main control board 1310 is formed. In the substrate and the base substrate of the dispensing control substrate 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided in such a manner as to be separated from each other.

  Then, of the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) of the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM” Is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base board of the main control board 1310 as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) of the “backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM” is mounted on the surface of the base board of the payout control board 951. It is to be mounted on the area SM as a surface mount type discrete component D2a.

  According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance and the discrete component D2 having a high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is a surface-mount type discrete component D2a. They are mounted on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against improper mounting of electronic components on the first control unit MCG, which is liable to be fraudulent. Characteristic first technology according to the present application).

  Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a specific type of discrete component (here, both the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are Schottky (Diode element) alone. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM having inferior fraud suppression performance have the same shape, it is expected that the labor required for fraud confirmation is omitted.

  Further, in the above configuration, the discrete components (electronic components that perform a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 originally should have are mounted on a board (main control board 1310) side different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space for forming the surface mounting area SM on the power supply substrate 931, the surface mounting area SM is formed on another substrate and mounted as a surface mounting type discrete component D2 there. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, capacitor elements and Schottky diode elements) is provided. Is provided, the plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted on the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and the surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I'm supposed to.

  According to such a configuration, despite being one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) intended to exhibit a backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board) on the base plate BB. 931) and an electronic component D2a having a shape enabling mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, dispensing control board 951). become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to exhibit a specific electric function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it harder to recall, and even if the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased, suppression of fraud can be expected (a second characteristic technology according to the present invention).

  Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for achieving a backup power supply function are inserted into the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element). In addition to mounting the discrete components D2 separately on two different boards (main control board 1310, dispensing control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board) 931 (capacitor element), that is, in this case, electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. The difficulty of understanding the circuit has increased So incorrect suppression can be further expected.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided to have an area smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting area SM having poor fraud suppression performance is provided, so that fraud can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG depends on the base plate of the first control unit MCG. The number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in the BB is smaller than the number of types of electronic components. Therefore, the number of types of electronic components to be visually checked for improper acts on the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM having relatively poor security performance is relatively reduced. Thus, the visual check can be facilitated.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as that on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. The electronic component is provided to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components to be visually checked for improper acts on the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area having relatively poor security performance is relatively reduced. Thus, the load on the visual check can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting area SM is provided on the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951, respectively. It may be formed.

  Also, the surface mounting area SM is formed only on a specific base substrate, and the surface mounting type discrete component D2 that should be mounted on another base substrate is collectively disposed on the specific base substrate. Is also good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not improper mounting has been performed, only the surface mounting area SM formed on the specific base substrate needs to be mainly checked, and therefore, it is necessary to perform fraud confirmation. It is expected that the necessary labor will be saved.

  However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting area TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to appropriately suppress fraud. Must.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is connected to the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although the configuration is made up of three base substrates, they may be configured together on one base substrate as schematically shown in FIG.

  In addition, the “base plate BB of the first control unit MCG” according to the present application may be any as long as the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH are separated, and this is provided by a plurality of base substrates. Alternatively, it may be provided by one base substrate.

  For example, as a base board of the main control board 1310, a first base board in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, the second base board is provided. By inserting and mounting the substrate into the insertion mounting area TH of the first base substrate, it is possible to maintain the security performance against improper mounting of the electronic components and to maintain the security of the electronic components inserted and mounted on the first base substrate. A structure in which the components and the electronic components surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other may be assumed. In this case, the “base of the first control unit MCG” is used. The “plate BB” is a concept including at least both the first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and the second base substrate on which only the surface mounting region SM is formed. . That is, such an aspect is also one of the aspects such as “both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG in a divided manner”. It is included as an embodiment.

  When the first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and the second base substrate on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided. It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so that the first base substrate and the second base substrate face different directions (preferably, orthogonal directions).

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the electronic component sealed in a relatively small package is a component (surface mounted component) mounted on the surface mounting area SM having inferior fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting unauthorized components (reducing the space on the back side).

  However, even with such a discrete component (surface-mounted component) having excellent security performance, there is a small space behind the discrete component (surface-mounted component) that is difficult to visually confirm when mounted on the surface-mounted area SM. Still left. Therefore, as for the hall that performs operation and management of the pachinko machine 1, it is understood that “there is no space left behind the discrete component (surface mount component) for mounting an unauthorized component”. However, it is not possible to completely dispel anxiety, such as "it is possible to create an extremely small unauthorized part and it may be installed illegally", and in situations where it is difficult to visually confirm it There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 may become complicated, for example, if confirmation is forced.

  Therefore, it is more preferable that the base boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are provided in the following mode instead of the above-described mode.

[Modification Example of Each Base Board of Main Control Board 1310 and Payout Control Board 951]
FIG. 118 is a view showing a partial area of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, a modification of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. The description of the modification example of the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951 will be omitted, but the modification can be made with the same contents as the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 described below.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

  Also, in the insertion mounting board THB according to this modification, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in a manner to be inserted, similarly to the insertion mounting board TH of the above embodiment. Similarly, the electronic components (insertion mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance and the discrete component D2b having a high security performance.

  However, as is apparent from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. Electronic components to be mounted in the same manner as described above. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example has a surface mounting area and a surface mounting component mounted on the area, respectively, at a glance, any of them can be used. A special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided is adopted.

  More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes, in addition to the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insert mounting components, a special mounting component D3 (in the drawing, a special mounting component D3). D3a and special mounting parts D3b). Although the special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in a surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance, the electronic mounting component D3 is concealed from the insertion mounting substrate THB. It is inserted and mounted via a special insertion mounting lead portion TL described later.

  According to such a special mounted component D3, although a surface mounting area to be described later and an electronic component (surface mounted component) mounted in the surface mounting area are provided inside thereof, fraud is suppressed. Since it has an appearance shape that looks as if it is one insertion mounting part mounted on the insertion mounting board THB with excellent performance, it is expected that it will be removed from the target part for malicious purposes by a malicious person Can be done. In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion of the insertion mounting board THB into which such a special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted is a surface mounting component on which the surface mounting component is mounted. It will function as an area.

  Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged (adjacent) at one place, but at a plurality of places on the base board MB. At the same time, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (special mounting component D3a in the drawing) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insertion mounting area) in which the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. It is to be established.

  That is, in this case, not only is the surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mounting parts) mounted in the surface mounting area subdivided and inconspicuous, but also to Since it can be well inserted into the insertion mounting area which is excellently provided as a relatively large area, the surface mounting area exists when a malicious person views the base board MB of the main control board 1310. In particular, it becomes possible to make the hardware circuit more difficult to notice, whereby it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while more appropriately maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components.

  As will be described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as the surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is sealed in the special mount component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used for one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for achieving a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, also in this modification, for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit), the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and the surface mounting area (Schottky diode element) (Diode MD0)). In addition, the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area does not adjoin the special mounting component D3a containing the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area (such as the power supply board 931). It is to be implemented in.

  As described above, it is difficult to recall that the electronic component incorporated in the special mounting component D3a exhibits a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), thereby increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit. Thereby, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

  Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted to expose the internal structure. Figures (portions surrounded by dotted lines) are included.

  As also shown in the explanatory diagram, a special mounting component D3a according to this modification includes a special surface mounting substrate SMB as a surface mounting substrate on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted. A surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on the special surface mounting board SMB, and a special insertion mounting lead as an insertion mounting lead inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the insertion mounting board THB. TL and an outer package OP for molding each of these parts with a mold resin.

  Here, the special surface mounting board SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead SL provided on the electronic component (discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type) mounted on the substrate and the special insertion mounting lead TL. It has a wiring pattern HP formed so as to be electrically connected, and is provided such that its mounting surface is substantially perpendicular to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting substrate THB.

  The surface area on the mounting surface of the special surface-mount substrate SMB is only large enough to mount the surface-mount type discrete component D2a, and is necessary when, for example, an integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. It is designed to have only a mounting surface with an area smaller than the required area. That is, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, a margin space for mounting other electronic components is left. In order to reduce the size of the surface-mount substrate SMB, in a state where the electronic component to be mounted (the surface-mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, a margin space for further mounting other electronic components is required. Not left.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to perform any wrongdoing on the special surface mount substrate SMB, so that it is possible to further reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing the mounting of illicit components. Will be as expected.

  Further, the surface mount type discrete component D2a has a package structure (inner package) in which the discrete component D2a itself is molded with a mold resin. Inside, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead SL by a bonding wire. In other words, the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mounting lead SL formed so as to be drawn out of the inner package (mold resin). By being electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, it can be connected to other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB. The above-mentioned Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected so that processing in cooperation with each other can be performed.

Further, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided in a flat external shape (package shape), and is soldered in such a manner that the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. It is surface mounted. However, as described above, the special surface mounting substrate SMB on which the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is mounted has a mounting surface that is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting substrate THB.
Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a provided in the special mount component D3 faces not the flat surface but the thinner surface (thin surface) of the insert mount substrate THB. It will be implemented in a form.

  In such a configuration, a thin surface having only a relatively small area, instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (for two through holes) is left in the insertion mounting board THB such that only one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in a situation where the special mounting component D3 is not provided, the special mounting component D3 can be disposed in the small area (for two through holes).

  Note that the size (length in the horizontal direction in the figure) of the surface mount type discrete component D2a according to this modification example is determined when the special mount component D3a is mounted on the insert mounting board THB. The pitch between the through holes into which the special insertion mounting leads TL are inserted (the interval between the specific insertion holes) is smaller.

  One end of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a forked structure sandwiching the special surface mounting substrate SMB from both sides, and the wiring pattern HP is formed in the special surface mounting substrate SMB. By being soldered at a certain position, it is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered in a state of being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and is connected to the insertion mounting board THB. Are electrically connected to various electronic components through the wiring pattern.

  In addition, the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded with a mold resin. Thus, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

  With such a configuration, it is extremely difficult to apply any wrongdoing to the surface mount board having poor fraud suppression performance.

  In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the external shape generated by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of the specific type of surface mounting component itself surface mounted inside. . That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a can be mounted in a state in which the external shape of the discrete component D2a itself is concealed, it does not seem that the specific type of surface mount component built in the special mount component D3a is mounted. As a result, the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased, and the suppression of fraud can be expected.

  In addition, the outer package OP has only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL among the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided inside the outer package OP (mold resin). The discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type is integrally molded with the special surface mounting substrate SMB so as to be drawn out of the device, whereby the special mounting component D3a is inserted into the lead portion for insertion mounting (special insertion mounting). (A lead part TL) is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component.

  According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a is provided despite the fact that the surface mounting substrate having poor fraud suppression performance and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the substrate are provided inside. Since it is possible to function as if it were a single insertion mounting component mounted in an insertion mounting area with excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected that malicious persons will be excluded from the target of illegal purposes Can be done. In addition, since it can be handled in the same way as one discrete component of the insertion mounting type even in the physical distribution and at the time of mounting, it can be said that it is excellent in such ease of handling.

  Further, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By being molded integrally with the target special surface mounting substrate SMB, the external shape as one electronic component having a size that cannot be included in the pitch between the through holes is also provided.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is kept in an external shape smaller than the pitch between the through holes in the insertion mounting area (the installation interval of the insertion holes), the main control board is used. It is easy for a third party to notice that a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base substrate MB of 1310, which may promote fraudulent acts.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface-mounted discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through-holes is one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through-holes. It is designed to have an external shape before mounting. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, on the base board MB of the main control board 1310, there is no electronic component having an external shape whose width is smaller than the pitch between the through holes. Since it is possible to make it appear as if only electronic components (insertion mounting components) of the type are mounted, it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing improper components from being mounted.

  Furthermore, the appearance shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the appearance shape of the electronic parts surface-mounted inside, and also all the insertion mounting parts (special parts) mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. (Electronic components except the mounting component D3). In other words, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification has an excessive security performance such as protecting a mere discrete component D2a having only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit with a double molding resin. After being given, the appearance shape is unique and relatively large as the appearance shape that intentionally attracts the attention of a malicious person.

  According to such a configuration, an excessive security performance performed on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, and therefore, a motivation to perform an improper action is reduced. Can be expected.

  Further, an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a is attached to the outer package OP. In this modified example, the contents (識別 3213) of the identification number are replaced by the inner package (○ 3213). The content (SD) of the identification number assigned to the surface-mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface-mount substrate SMB is configured to be different.

  According to such a configuration, since the contents (SD) of the identification number assigned to the specific type of surface mount component do not appear, the external shape generated by the outer package OP and the surface mount component inside the external package OP are used. The fact that the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component is different from that of the specific type (in combination with the structure of the double mold) makes it possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mount component is not mounted. In addition, it is possible to make it appear as if only electronic components of the insertion mounting type (insertion mounting components) are mounted, and it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing improper components from being mounted.

  Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting substrate SMB is set to be smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type. On this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and a molding resin is directly applied to the back surface thereof. It has become.

  That is, by adopting such a configuration, not only the unique and asymmetric appearance shape is formed, but also the length of the special mounting component D3a in the thickness direction is set to the insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. This, combined with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other, eliminates the need for securing a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the insertion mounting board THB, and eliminates many cases. The special mounting component D3a can be inserted while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

  As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification is externally visible as a single insertion mounting type discrete component, but is actually a special surface mounting substrate SMB and a surface mounting type discrete component. D2a. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is fixed inside the special surface mounting substrate SMB and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. In contrast, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire inside the insertion mounting component.

  In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a for surface mounting, a special mounting component D3b for surface mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value inside is provided.

  That is, the special mounted component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete mounted component D2b provided as a resistance element among the discrete mounted components D2b mounted in the inserted mounting area TH. It forms a circuit. Even with such a configuration relating to the filter circuit, it is recalled that the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have a close electrical role to exhibit a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make it difficult to understand, and by increasing the difficulty in understanding such a circuit, it is possible to expect suppression of fraud.

  As for the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface mounting substrate SMB. In this case, however, at least the electronic component having the highest height among the electronic components (insert mounting components) inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting board THB, such as arranging each electronic component in a horizontal row. For example, it is desirable to keep the external shape lower than the external shape (for example, a capacitor element omitted in the drawing) in order to reduce the size of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310.

  Further, the special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may include a plurality of types of electronic components. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are built-in, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted side by side and in a row on one special surface mount substrate SMB, and the electronic components are mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB. It is desirable to package the components and the special surface-mounting substrate SMB together by molding them with a mold resin.

  However, when a plurality of electronic components are incorporated in the special mounting component D3, the appearance of the electronic components naturally increases, and "the electronic components are of the type inserted and mounted in such a size and shape. It may be an insertion mounting type discrete component. " Therefore, in order to suitably obtain the dazzling effect using such prejudice, one surface-mount type discrete component can be used as a single unit, and its appearance and shape can be varied by the above-described double mold structure, and its thickness can be reduced. It is desirable that the surface is mounted so as to face the insertion mounting substrate TH.

  In addition to forming the above-mentioned double-molded outer package OP with a non-transparent material such as a mold resin, the outer package OP may be provided with an identification number different from the identification number assigned to the surface-mounted discrete component itself. It can be said that it is also important to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit by attaching it to the OP.

  The special mounting component D3 according to this modified example has a structure in which "one surface mounting type discrete component" smaller than "one insertion mounting type discrete component" is provided. The size when double molded becomes about the same size as "one insertion mounting type discrete component", so that it is possible to expect the above-mentioned excellent effects and effects. . Therefore, in a configuration in which a “one insertion mounting type discrete component” is provided inside and double-molded, the size becomes larger than the “one insertion mounting type discrete component”. Therefore, it is not possible to expect the above-mentioned excellent effects.

  Hereinafter, the technology described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized. Unless otherwise specified, each content described below can be adopted by any of the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and other examples thereof, and the technology described with reference to FIG. 118 and other examples thereof. This is an operational effect that can be achieved.

As described above, the technology described with reference to FIGS.
-Having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and using these electronic components, in addition to generating a control power supply (for example, +5 V), and proceeding with a game including paying out award balls A first control unit MCG that performs control related to the game, and has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and performs an effect related to a game progressed by the first control unit MCG by using the electronic components. Second control unit SCG
A gaming machine with the aim of solving problems such as "reducing the size of hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting". .

  More specifically, in the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, first, among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. The above-mentioned second control unit SCG, which is only to be performed, is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is not easily targeted for impropriety. " Is one of the technical features of the present invention in that it is constituted only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are also used as the above-described various mounting electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, and these mounting electronic components are obtained by the player. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 without deteriorating the security performance against the improper mounting of the mounting electronic component because it is not directly related to the privilege and is not easily targeted for fraud. Can be reduced in size.

  On the other hand, the processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly related to the grant of the privilege of the player, and therefore, the first control unit MCG is liable to be improper. Therefore, although the miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against the improper mounting of the mounting electronic components is significantly reduced, There is a situation in which a decline in game entertainment becomes inevitable.

Therefore, according to the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the first control unit MCG has a substrate
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB to be inserted into the base plate BB, and has an inferior performance in suppressing illegality, although the integration performance is inferior;
A surface mounting area in which the leads provided on the mounting electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate BB in such a manner as to be placed on the surface of the base plate BB, and are excellent in integration performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, but inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are to be provided first. Then, based on this, the following two types of mounting electronic components having different properties are selectively mounted on an insertion mounting area or a surface mounting area having the above properties in such a manner that the above-mentioned problem can be solved. It is one of.

・ Multiple types of single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively large package in the form of integration, and integrated circuit components with low security performance against unauthorized mounting ・ Single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package Only, discrete components with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

  More specifically, the first control unit MCG mounts the integrated circuit component having the low security performance only in the insertion mounting region excellent in the fraud suppression performance between the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region. At the same time, in the surface mounting area where the fraud suppression performance is inferior, only the discrete components having high security performance are mounted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against improper mounting of the mounting electronic component on the first control unit MCG, which is liable to be fraudulent.

  However, even in the case where the security performance against the improper mounting of the mounting electronic component is maintained in this way, the board of the first control unit MCG is liable to be targeted for impropriety. No change. Therefore, as for the substrate of the first control unit MCG, basically, as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7, FIG. 62, etc., a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) ), It is desirable to dispose the pachinko machine 1 with its mounting surface (flat surface) facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this case, it is possible not only to make it difficult for the mounting surface (flat surface) to be fraudulent by the transparent cover member, but also to perform the operation of opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 by the first control unit MCG. It is possible to monitor (visually check) whether or not an unauthorized component is mounted on the integrated circuit component. This makes it possible to appropriately secure the suppression performance and the monitoring easiness for the mounting of the device.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the mounting electronic components are mounted on one surface (back surface) of the substrate of the first control unit MCG. Instead, the mounting electronic component is mounted only on the other side (front side), and the mounting electronic component is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). It goes without saying that the pachinko machine 1 should be arranged with the other side (front side) facing the rear side.

  In addition, in view of the fact that the main control board 1310 is a part that performs processing directly connected to the player's privilege provision in the first control unit MCG, the first control unit MCG has the above-described configurations. It can be said that it is desirable to apply the present invention to a substrate included in the main control substrate 1310 among the substrates.

  Furthermore, in order to more appropriately maintain the security performance against improper mounting of the mounting electronic component, first, as a board of the main control board 1310, an insertion mounting area having excellent antifraud performance is formed, and the integrated circuit component and the integrated circuit component are formed. At least a first substrate on which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which a discrete component is surface-mounted without forming an integrated circuit component and having a surface-mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance formed therein are provided. To The first substrate among the substrates is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) and the one surface (the electronic component is not mounted). The other side (the back side) and the other side (the front side on which the electronic components are mounted) are arranged so that the other side faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the second board is Indicates that both the one surface (the back surface on which the electronic components are not mounted) and the other surface (the front surface on which the electronic components are mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are orthogonal thereto. It is desirable to dispose them so as to face the direction in which they do. In other words, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the presence of the surface mounting area (the second substrate) which is inferior in fraud suppression performance from the rear side, so that the security performance against improper mounting of the mounting electronic component is more preferable. Is expected to be maintained.

  However, even with such a configuration, if a malicious person becomes obsessed with "whether or not a surface mounting area with poor fraud suppression performance is formed", the surface with poor fraud suppression performance There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting area is formed may be noticed. In this case, although only the discrete component having high security performance among the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is mounted on the surface mounting region of the second substrate, the hole side has not yet been recalled. (For example, when a very small illegal chip is developed), a loss may occur.

  Therefore, on the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate on which both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance, not only the insertion mounting region but also fraud suppression. A surface mounting area with poor performance is intentionally formed on the same surface (front surface). The other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is mounted on the pachinko machine while no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed. It is desirable to arrange them so as to face the rear side of the vehicle. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate disposed so as to face the rear side is when a malicious person attempts to perform wrongdoing from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It plays a role as an advertising tower that emphasizes that "no mounting electronic components are mounted on the surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance, and the pachinko machine 1 has high fraud suppression performance". As a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness of a malicious person to find the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having poor fraud suppression performance is formed. The surface mounting region formed on the first substrate is desirably provided at a position (such as an end of the first substrate) where the presence of the first substrate is easily noticed when the first substrate is viewed.

  Further, the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate has an independent shape that is not electrically connected between the surface mounting area and the insertion mounting area formed on the same surface. Although it is electrically connected to the insertion mounting area, even if an unauthorized component is mounted on the surface mounting area, it is formed so that the insertion mounting area side is not affected (the game proceeds). On the output signal that does not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second substrate according to this example, unlike the first substrate, only the surface mounting region of the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, is formed. A mounting electronic component (here, a discrete component) is surface-mounted on the surface mounting area.

  Even when each of the above-described configurations is adopted, a "second board on which discrete components are surface-mounted in a surface-mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance" may be found by a malicious person. Sex cannot be completely ruled out. Therefore, among the surface mounting areas of the main control board 1310, the “surface mounting area formed only on the other surface of the first substrate and on which no mounting electronic components are mounted” is the surface mounting area. While the pachinko machine 1 is disposed facing the rear side with the pattern wiring as exposed, the “surface mounting area formed only on the other surface of the second substrate” is described. Is molded with a mold member (non-transmissive member) together with the second substrate in a state where only the discrete component which is hard to be fraudulent among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is surface-mounted, and the one surface ( Both the back side (on which no electronic components are mounted) and the other side (front side) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but face a direction orthogonal to the back side. It is desirable to be disposed. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mounting area is formed on the second substrate and which type of the discrete component surface mounted on the surface mounting area is. In addition, the use of mold members makes it more difficult for illegal acts on the mounting surface. (Surface mounting areas, which have poor fraud suppression performance, function as special areas where the mounting of illegal components is virtually impossible. (It is possible to remove the target from the monitoring of mounting.) It is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against improper mounting of mounting electronic components. It is expected that problems such as "things" will be suitably solved.

  However, more preferably, as for a mounted component (here, a discrete component) surface-mounted on the surface mounting region, as shown in FIG. 118, an example of a mold structure thereof, a molding member ( In a state of being molded with a non-transmissive member), it should be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area TH of the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the first board (the surface mounting area that impresses that “the surface mounting component is not mounted in the pachinko machine 1” and the electronic component, which is disposed so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1). In the insertion mounting area, a molding member (non-transmissive member) is provided together with the “discrete component”, the “integrated circuit component”, and the “second substrate”. As a result, the "surface-mounted region" in a molded state is inserted and mounted, and is electrically connected to each other. That is, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted, and the insertion mounting region having the excellent fraud suppression performance is included in the surface mounting region (the second mounting region) having the poor fraud suppression performance. 2) can be made invisible by the mold member, and it can be inserted as if it were inserted and mounted parts, so that it can function electrically. While minimizing the size of the hardware circuit ".

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mount components are mounted is inserted and mounted on the first substrate so that the thin surface of the substrate faces the rear side. Therefore, the molded second substrate can be mounted without generating a large blind spot with the first substrate.

  Here, even when each of the above-described configurations is adopted, the second substrate itself, which has been molded by the mold member (non-permeable member), may be used together with the unauthorized component by the molding member (non-permeable member). )), It is required on the hall side to periodically check whether any wrongdoing has occurred. In this regard, if the above-described mold structure is simply adopted, when the above-described fraudulent act of replacing the color and material of the mold member with another substrate having the same structure is performed, the fraudulent act is performed. This makes it difficult to detect that the electronic component is in a broken state, and may degrade security performance against improper mounting of the mounting electronic component.

  Therefore, in the surface mounting region of the second substrate to be molded, only a specific type of discrete component (mounting electronic component) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is included. It is preferable that the surface mounting is performed, and that the other types are not surface mounted on the second substrate, but are mounted only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only the discrete component having the specific shape is molded in the surface mounting area of the second substrate in a state of being surface mounted, so that the shape of the undulating portion in the mold member ( The degree of swelling of the mold member at the mounting position of the discrete component (for example, see FIG. 118) becomes unified. In other words, when a separate board on which an unauthorized component is further mounted in addition to a specific type of discrete component is molded by a molding member, the degree of bulging of the molding member at the mounting position of the unauthorized component is determined by the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Since the shape of the mold member is different from the degree of swelling in the above, it is easy to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent act due to the difference in shape (the degree of swelling is not unitary) appearing in the mold member, and the improper mounting of the mounting electronic component is prevented. It is expected that security performance will be maintained appropriately.

  In this case, at least a board of the first control unit MCG included in the main control board 1310 is configured so that discrete components of a specific type are collectively mounted only on the surface mounting area of the second board. It can be said that it is more desirable not to mount the circuit on a substrate different from the two substrates in order to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit.

  However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the “specific type discrete component” is required to be the same mounting electronic component in shape, and for example, is referred to as a “specific type discrete component”. If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the "PN diode" is a "discrete part different from the specific type", and is not mounted on the second substrate and is different from the second type. Will be required to be implemented. Strictly speaking, when a “Schottky barrier diode” is surface-mounted on a second substrate as a “discrete component of a specific type”, the “Schottky barrier diode” of the same product is applied to the second substrate. Therefore, it is desirable that the “Schottky barrier diode” of a different product is not mounted on the second substrate but mounted on a different substrate.

  However, on the board included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to more suitably reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit, only the type of the discrete component to be surface-mounted is different, and the other structure (the insertion mounting area is not formed, , A third substrate that is the same as the second substrate described above, and only one type of discrete component different from the specific type is surface-mounted. It is preferable that the third substrate is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area of the first substrate so as to be electrically connected to another mounting electronic component. According to such a configuration, the substrates (the second substrate and the third substrate) having the above-described mold structure are separated into different electronic components (in the example of FIG. 118, the special mounting component D3a, the special mounting component D3a) for each type of the discrete component. It is prepared as a mounting component D3b), and the shape to be monitored (the degree of swelling in the mold member) is unified for each substrate having a mold structure, and monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (for the corresponding substrate) Confirmation of whether electronic components of a type that should not be mounted are not mounted) can be facilitated. It is possible to suitably solve a problem such as "reducing the size of a circuit". In addition to the second substrate and the third substrate, a substrate on which only discrete components of a type different from the discrete components mounted on those substrates may be prepared in a similar manner.

  In the case where only one discrete component is surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, the monitoring can be further facilitated and the structure of the above-described double mold can be reduced. Together, it is possible to more suitably solve a problem such as "reducing the size of a hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against improper mounting of mounting electronic components".

  When a plurality of substrates (here, the second substrate and the third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) thus molded are provided, It is desirable that each of the surface mounting surfaces (the surface on the other side described above) be disposed so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, it is possible to collectively check the degree of bulging of the mold member of each substrate from the same direction. Confirmation of whether or not the electronic component is mounted) can be facilitated.

Further, each member (mold member) for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification display corresponding to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition to this, it is desirable that the surfaces on which the component side identification display is attached are all arranged so as to face the same direction.
That is, in this case, the “type of component-side identification display” and the “shape to appear on the mold member” respectively assigned to the second substrate and the third substrate can be made to correspond one-to-one. In addition, it is possible to facilitate the unauthorized monitoring of whether or not the replacement of parts has occurred. In this case, the component side identification display may be attached to the mold surface (the surface on which the mold member does not bulge) on the side opposite to the side on which the surface mounting area is formed. It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification display so as not to cause a confirmation error.

  Further, according to the above configuration, the second substrate and the third substrate, each of which has a surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance, have one electronic component molded together with a discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate. Each of the components is provided as a component, and is inserted and mounted so that the respective substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. That is, in this case, the second board or the third board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be used as if it is an insertion mount component without creating a large space between the first board and the second board. Therefore, it is expected that the size of the hardware circuit can be reduced while suitably maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components.

  However, in order to appropriately maintain the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components, the appearance of the “electronic component that is inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion mounted component” has the appearance of the second board or It is required that each of the third substrates is provided so as to be invisible to the substrate on which the surface mounting region is formed. Therefore, for the second substrate and the third substrate, a plurality of types of discrete components are prevented from being surface-mounted, an integrated circuit component is prevented from being surface-mounted, and as shown in FIG. In order for only one discrete component to be surface-mounted, for example, the size of the substrate is reduced and this is replaced with one insertion-mounted component (a structure in which an electric element is connected to an insertion-mounting lead portion by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it look as if it were a general electronic component (discrete component). That is, the surface mounting region formed on the second substrate or the third substrate is at least an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate or an empty state formed on the first substrate but not mounted thereon. It is required that the area be smaller than the surface mounting area.

  Further, after the second substrate and the third substrate are made compact in this way, the first substrate is provided with one electronic device each of the second substrate and the third substrate with respect to the first substrate. Insertion mounting parts (discrete parts (a general electronic device having a structure in which an electric element is connected to an insertion mounting lead portion by a bonding wire) to be mounted at a mounting height lower than those electronic parts when they are inserted and mounted as parts. Components)) and insert mounting components (discrete components (general electronic components having a structure in which an electric element is connected to an insertion mounting lead portion by a bonding wire)) mounted at a mounting height higher than those electronic components. It is more desirable that both are arranged. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting region having poor fraud suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate and having excellent fraud suppression performance. This makes it possible to more appropriately look as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second substrate and the third substrate may be provided as electronic components (mold components) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first substrate, or may be inserted into the first substrate. It is also important to provide electronic components (molded components) smaller than the largest discrete components to be mounted.

  In addition to the substrate (first substrate) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed, generally, the substrate corresponding to the type of the mounted electronic component is also provided on the substrate on which the electronic component is mounted. In many cases, a side identification display is attached. For example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is provided near a portion where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, regarding the second board and the third board according to this embodiment, it is possible to increase the difficulty in understanding the circuit by concealing which type of electronic component functions. It can be said that it is desirable to suitably maintain the performance of suppressing the mounting of an unauthorized component.

  Therefore, different board-side identifications are provided near the positions where the second board and the third board are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the insertion mounting surface of the first board. However, any of these board-side identification displays, including the board-side identification display corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component, includes any board-side identification display in the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable that a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”) be used. That is, in this case, even if the board-side identification display (the mounting surface of the first substrate) attached near the position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted is confirmed, the same type of mounting electronic device is used. Since it has a unique aspect different from the board-side identification attached to the component, which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second board or the third board, respectively Can be made difficult to recognize.

  However, in the case where a structure that makes it difficult to understand the circuit by concealing which type of electronic component the second substrate or the third substrate functions as described above is adopted, In order to ascertain the situation, there is a concern that a malicious person may perform an action of shaving the mold member and trying to check the internal element.

  Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, first, no substrate-side identification mark is attached to the surface mounting surface (the surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on the substrate. However, even if a malicious person attempts to check the inside of the mold member by shaving the mold member, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. Is desirable.

  Further, each of the discrete components surface-mounted on the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate or the third substrate is the same as most discrete components inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. Is molded by a first mold member of a different color, and both the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted are mounted on the second substrate by a second mold member of the same or similar color to the specific color. Further, it is desirable that the electronic component is inserted and mounted as a molded electronic component into an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate having the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is molded in the same form as the other insertion mounting components, and is molded to the first substrate. Even in the case of insertion and mounting, the administrator on the hole side can easily find out where the second and third boards are located, and if the second and third boards are fraudulent. It is possible to make it easy to confirm whether or not there is any.

  In this case, even a malicious person can help to grasp information on which surface mounting area (second board or third board) is provided with poor fraud suppression performance. It could be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the type of the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting area together with the second substrate or the third substrate by the second molding member. In addition to increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, the second mold member is provided with the same color or a similar color as the specific color provided on the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of the discrete component which is surface-mounted on the surface mounting area, an act is performed in which the second mold member is shaved by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside thereof. Even if it is, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate or the third substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside the second mold member is being scraped. Therefore, it is expected that the type of the electronic component is kept secret and the difficulty of understanding the circuit is appropriately maintained.

  Further, as described above, in this example of the description, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component, the same mounting surface is used. A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”) different from any of the board-side identification displays is provided. However, if only the board-side identification display having such a unique aspect is provided, it is not possible to grasp which type of electronic component functions as the hole side, and maintenance / There is concern that management will be adversely affected. Therefore, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component, a substrate having a unique mode is provided at a position relatively easily visible. In addition to providing the side identification, the same type of mounting electronic component (or a different type) mounted on the same mounting surface at a position that is relatively difficult to visually recognize (such as immediately below the molded second substrate or the third substrate). It is desirable that the board-side identification display having the same form as the board-side identification display provided in correspondence with the same type of mounting electronic component on the substrate is also secretly provided.

  Further, as described above, in this example, a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) of various discrete components mounted on the board of the main control board 1310 is provided in the surface mounting area of the second board. Only the discrete components (mounting electronic components) are surface-mounted. In the surface mounting area of the third board, one of various discrete components mounted on the board included in the main control board 1310 (for example, having a relatively small specific capacity). Only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) of the capacitors are surface-mounted. According to these configurations, it is apparent that the second substrate and the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit having a specific function (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit). That is, a mounting electronic component surface-mounted on a surface mounting area formed on a molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate) and a substrate (here, a second substrate or third substrate) different from the mounting electronic component. Then, by mounting a specific discrete circuit by mounting electronic components surface-mounted on the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), it is possible to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit or to improve the molded substrate. (Second substrate or third substrate) It is difficult to replace the substrate itself (because the structure in the mold is concealed, and it is necessary to make a mold part having no specific circuit function). It is expected to be provided for countermeasures.

  As described above, in summarizing the technology described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, configurations having some technical features have been described in the order in which a synergistic effect can be expected. Each configuration is described only as the best embodiment, and it is not always necessary to use all of the configurations at the time of implementation, and the configurations may be appropriately combined regardless of the order in which the configurations are described. Can be implemented.

  Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment and modified examples will be described below.

[Technical Thought 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic components,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a form to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a form placed on the surface of the base plate,
At least one of the surface-mounted components mounted on the surface-mounted region among the plurality of electronic components is, despite the fact that the surface-mounted component itself is molded by a mold resin, A gaming machine characterized by being molded together with the surface mounting area to be mounted by another molding resin.

[Technical Thought 1-2]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic components;
A second control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is capable of executing an effect progression process according to a result of the game progression process by using the electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing, the game machine can provide a privilege to a player,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a state of being inserted into the base plate, and a lead portion provided on the electronic component includes the base plate. Of the surface mounting area mounted in the form of being placed on the surface, only the surface mounting area is provided,
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area,
A first side surface mount component mounted on the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the first control unit among the plurality of electronic components, and a first side surface mount component provided on the base plate of the second control unit. Although any of the second side surface mount components to be mounted is itself formed by molding with a molding resin, the first side surface mount component and the second side surface mount component do not have to be mounted. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first side surface-mounted component is molded together with the surface-mounted region thereof using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the first side surface-mounted component itself.

  According to such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, the surface mount components mounted in the surface mount region having inferior impropriety suppression performance are formed by molding with a molding resin. Since the molding resin is molded integrally with the surface mounting area to be mounted by a molding resin different from the molding resin, it is possible to perform any wrongdoing on the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technical Thought 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic components,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting plate that is mounted in a form in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided on the insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted,
And a surface mounting plate on which the surface mounting leads provided on the surface mounting components of the electronic components are mounted in a form placed on the surface.
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting plate having a special insertion mounting lead formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting plate and to be insertable into the insertion mounting plate,
On the special surface mount board,
A wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mounting component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead portion is provided,
Surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board,
Of the surface mounting lead portion and the special insertion mounting lead portion, only the special insertion mounting lead portion is integrally molded with the special surface mounting plate so as to be drawn out of the mold resin, A gaming machine, which is mounted on the insertion mounting plate as one electronic component having a special insertion mounting lead.

  In the technical idea 2, such a surface-mounted component mounted in the surface mounting region having poor fraud suppression performance is made to function as if it is one insertion mounted component mounted in the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance. Can be expected to be excluded from malicious purposes by malicious parties.

[Technical Thought 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic components,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting plate that is mounted in a form in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided on the insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted,
And a surface mounting plate on which the surface mounting leads provided on the surface mounting components of the electronic components are mounted in a form placed on the surface.
The surface mount component includes:
At least a discrete surface mount component in which a single-function element is molded with a mold resin is included,
The discrete surface mount component,
The discrete surface mount component itself has a relatively large external shape by being integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific itself, and the base of the specific control unit. A gaming machine characterized by having an appearance different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

  According to the technical idea 3, an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is applied to a mere discrete surface mount component having only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing device or the like. It is designed to have a unique and relatively large external shape as an external shape that intentionally attracts the attention of a malicious person. That is, in this case, since the excessive security performance performed in the specific control unit can be shown to a third party, it is possible to expect a decrease in willingness to perform an illegal act.

[Technical Thought 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic components,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a form to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a form placed on the surface of the base plate,
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting area is provided in a plurality of places so that each area is a relatively small area, whereas the insertion mounting area is dispersed. A gaming machine provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

  In such a technical idea 4, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is divided into small parts so as to be inconspicuous by not being gathered at one place, and is further excellent in the fraud suppression performance and relatively large. They are arranged so as to be inserted into an insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes possible for a malicious person to make it difficult to notice that the surface mounting area exists when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit, while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized components, The miniaturization of hardware circuits is expected.

[Technical Thought 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and includes a specific control unit that can execute a control power generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic circuits,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
In the plurality of electronic circuits,
A backup power supply circuit that supplies a backup power supply to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode that are electronic components of a single function element. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a form to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a form placed on the surface of the base plate,
The insertion mounting area,
As the electronic component mounted on the surface mounting area is adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting area, it is provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area,
The backup power supply circuit,
Despite being provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power is cut off, the capacitor and the diode of the discrete circuit are provided. One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting region surrounded by the insertion mounting region, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting region of the insertion mounting region. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted at a position not adjacent to components.

  According to such a technical concept 5, although it is one discrete circuit for the purpose of exhibiting a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on the insertion mounting area on the base plate. An electronic component having a shape that allows smoothing and an electronic component having a shape that enables mounting on a surface mounting area are mixed. Therefore, it is recalled that when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of the specific control unit, they have an electrically close role to exhibit a specific electric function (backup power supply function). This makes it difficult to understand the circuit, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, it is possible to expect suppression of fraud.

  In addition, after arranging the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, into the insertion mounting area, which is provided as a relatively large area with excellent fraud suppression performance, the specific electrical function (backup power supply) The capacitor and the diode included in one discrete circuit for the purpose of exhibiting the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance, and even if the existence is noticed, the electronic component mounted on the surface mounting area cooperates with other electronic parts. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recall what electrical functions are implemented, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it is possible to reduce improper control. It can be expected.

[Technical Thought 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic components,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting plate which is mounted in a form in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided on the electronic component is inserted,
And a surface mounting plate on which the surface mounting leads provided on the electronic component are mounted in a form placed on the surface.
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting plate having a special insertion mounting lead formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting plate and to be insertable into the insertion mounting plate,
The special surface mount board,
A wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting plate and the special insertion mounting lead portion, and The lead for special insertion mounting is inserted into the insertion mounting plate and arranged so that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.

  A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Generally, components mounted on a surface mounting board often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the technical idea 6, the special surface mounting plate is arranged such that the mounting surfaces thereof are substantially orthogonal to the insertion mounting plate. That is, in this case, not a flat surface having a relatively large area, but a thin surface having only a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting plate. The special surface mounting plate can be provided even in a situation where only a small area (surface area) is left.

[Technical Thought 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic components,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting plate which is mounted in a form in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided on the electronic component is inserted,
A surface mounting plate mounted on the surface of the base plate such that a surface mounting lead provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate;
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface-mounted component mounted on the surface-mounted board includes a specific surface-mounted component having a size that fits within an installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided in the insertion-mounted plate. And
The specific surface mount component,
Despite having a size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mount component itself and the surface mount plate to be mounted are integrally formed by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A gaming machine characterized by having an external shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

  That is, if a specific surface mount component is left in an external shape smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insert mounting plate, a surface mount area having inferior fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which in turn can encourage cheating.

  In this regard, in the technical idea 7, the specific surface mount component is integrally molded with the surface mount board to be mounted using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole is made to appear, a surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. Can be made harder for a third party to notice.

[Technical Thought 8]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing an effect progress process according to a result of the game progress process by using the electronic components,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
Single-function elements include discrete components encapsulated in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components encapsulated in relatively large packages in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated,
The base plate of the first control unit includes:
An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted in a form inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mounting region is formed,
The first substrate includes:
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area faces the rear side of the gaming machine in a state where the pattern wiring is exposed. It is arranged in,
The second substrate includes:
The integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted with respect to the surface mounting area, and only the discrete component is mounted, and faces in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being provided.

  In such a technical concept 8, a first substrate on which an empty surface mounting area is formed without mounting any electronic components for mounting is prepared, and the first substrate is provided in the surface mounting area. In such a state that the pattern wiring is exposed, it is arranged facing the rear side of the gaming machine. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to perform wrongdoing from the rear side of the gaming machine, "No electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance, and the illegal It will play a role as an advertising tower that advertises that it has "suppressing performance", and thereby it is expected to suppress mounting of unauthorized components.

  On the other hand, the second substrate is arranged in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine so that its presence is hard to be noticed, and the integrated circuit is mounted on the surface mounting area. Of the components and the discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent are not mounted, and only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted. That is, in this case, in addition to the fact that the first substrate is present, the presence of the second substrate itself can be made difficult to notice, and even if the presence is noticed, the fraud suppression performance is poor. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted in the surface mount area, it is expected that miniaturization of the hardware circuit will be achieved while maintaining appropriate suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

[Technical Thought 9]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a second control unit capable of executing an effect proceeding process according to a result of the game proceeding process by using the electronic components;
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
Single-function elements include discrete components encapsulated in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components encapsulated in relatively large packages in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated,
The substrate of the first control unit includes:
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which a lead portion provided on a mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is provided on a surface of the substrate; A second substrate having a surface mounting region mounted thereon and a special insertion mounting lead portion extending outward and capable of being inserted into the insertion mounting region of the first substrate. And
The first substrate includes:
An insertion mounting area that can be mounted in a form in which the insertion mounting lead provided on the insertion mounting component is inserted, and a surface mounting lead provided on the surface mounting component is placed on the surface. Although both the surface mounting area that can be mounted are formed, no mounting electronic components are mounted on the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is not formed. It is said to have been exposed,
The second substrate includes
Only the surface mounting area of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area is formed, and the second board is mounted with only the discrete component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component. By inserting the special insertion mounting lead into the insertion mounting area of the first substrate as one electronic component molded on the first substrate, various kinds of insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate are formed. A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected between the game machines.

  In such a technical idea 9, as a surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance, a surface mounting area in which no mounting electronic component is mounted and a pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed. A first substrate), and a surface mounting area (second substrate) in which only the discrete components which are hard to be fraudulent among the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are surface-mounted and molded together with the substrate. It has. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to perform wrongdoing from the rear side of the gaming machine, the surface mounting area on which the mounting electronic components are mounted is made difficult to see, and no mounting is performed. Since only the surface mounting area on which the electronic components are not mounted is made visible, the surface mounting area is referred to as “No mounting electronic components are mounted on the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance. The gaming machine has a high level of fraud suppression performance ", and plays a role as an advertising tower, thereby suppressing the mounting of fraudulent parts.

  Moreover, in addition to the surface mounting area, an insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed on the first substrate on which the surface mounting area serving as the advertising tower is formed. Thus, the surface mounting region (second substrate) molded together with the substrates is inserted and mounted. In other words, in this case, in the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance in the substrate (first substrate) impressing that “the surface mounting component is not mounted”, the surface mounting region having poor fraud suppression performance (No. Since the two substrates are inserted into the mold in such a way that they are difficult to see, the size of the hardware circuit is expected to be reduced while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized components. Become.

[Technical Thought 10]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a second control unit capable of executing an effect proceeding process according to a result of the game proceeding process by using the electronic components;
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
Single-function elements include discrete components encapsulated in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components encapsulated in relatively large packages in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated,
The substrate of the first control unit includes:
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which a lead portion provided on a mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is provided on a surface of the substrate; A second substrate having a surface mounting area formed thereon to be mounted in a form placed thereon;
In the first substrate,
In a state where the mounting electronic component is not mounted on one surface and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the other surface, the other surface is located behind the gaming machine. While being arranged facing the side,
In the second substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on one surface, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other surface, and only the discrete component is mounted on the other surface. In a state where both sides of the one side and the other side are oriented in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine in a state of being molded, the first side is mounted on the first substrate. A gaming machine.

  According to such a technical idea 10, in the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region excellent in the fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on one surface, and the discrete component is integrated on the other surface. In a state where both the circuit components are mounted, the other surface is arranged so as to face the rear side of the gaming machine. As a substrate (first substrate), it is possible to appropriately secure the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized components and the ease of monitoring.

  In addition, for the second substrate having a surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance, the mounting electronic components are not mounted on one surface and the integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent are mounted on the other surface. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted, it is expected that miniaturization of the hardware circuit will be achieved while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

  Moreover, in the second substrate, in a state where the surface mounting area on which the discrete component is mounted is molded by a molding member together with the substrate, both of the one surface and the other surface are provided by the gaming machine. It is arranged so that it faces in a different direction from the rear side. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance is caused to function as a special area in which mounting of a fraudulent component is substantially impossible, and the monitoring of the mounting of the fraudulent component is required (game machine). From the rear side).

  In addition, in the surface mounting region (second substrate) removed from the monitoring target for mounting of the unauthorized component, the thin portion of the substrate faces the rear side (both the one surface and the other surface are the same). (It faces in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine) so as to be mounted on the first substrate. It becomes possible to mount the second substrate.

[Technical Thought 11]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a second control unit capable of executing an effect proceeding process according to a result of the game proceeding process by using the electronic components;
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
Single-function elements include discrete components encapsulated in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components encapsulated in relatively large packages in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated,
The substrate of the first control unit includes:
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted is formed;
A second substrate on which the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mounting area on which a specific type of mounting electronic component of the discrete component is surface mounted is formed; and A third substrate in which the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mounting area where a mounting electronic component of a type different from a specific type among the discrete components is surface mounted is formed; Has,
The second substrate and the third substrate include:
By being provided as discrete electronic components molded together with discrete components that are surface-mounted on those substrates, respectively, and being inserted and mounted on insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, respectively. It is electrically connectable with various insertion mounting parts mounted on the first substrate,
Each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification according to a type of a discrete component surface-mounted on each of the substrates. A gaming machine, characterized in that all of the surfaces with identification marks are arranged so as to face a specific direction.

  According to the technical idea 11, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted on the second and third substrates having the surface mounting regions inferior to the fraud suppression performance in different types for each substrate.

  Therefore, the mounting electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting area side with excellent anti-fraud performance will not only maintain the same anti-fraud function as before, but also will be mounted on the surface mounting area side with poor anti-fraud performance. Also, for electronic components for use, it is checked whether mounting electronic components having a type corresponding to each of the second and third boards are mounted (electronic components of a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding board). It is expected that it will be possible to easily detect even if an illegal operation has been made, and to reduce the size of the hardware circuit. become.

  Moreover, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mounting regions having inferior fraud suppression performance are formed are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components respectively surface-mounted on those substrates. And by being inserted and mounted respectively into the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, it is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate. I have. That is, in this case, a discrete component of a specific type originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are respectively inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insert mounted components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of unauthorized components.

  Further, each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification mark corresponding to the type of a discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, respectively. Each of the surfaces to which the side identification display is attached is arranged so as to face a specific direction. In other words, in this case, the “type of component-side identification display” and the “shape to appear on the mold member” assigned to the second substrate and the third substrate respectively inserted and mounted on the first substrate are one-to-one. Since it is possible to cope with such a situation, it is possible to facilitate the unauthorized monitoring as to whether or not the components have been replaced.

[Technical Thought 12]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a second control unit capable of executing an effect proceeding process according to a result of the game proceeding process by using the electronic components;
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
Single-function elements include discrete components encapsulated in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components encapsulated in relatively large packages in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated,
The substrate of the first control unit includes:
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area into which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, A second substrate on which a surface mounting area on which the discrete component is surface mounted is formed;
The second substrate includes:
Discrete components that are surface-mounted on the substrate are provided as one electronic component molded together, and are inserted and mounted in such a manner that the surfaces of the substrates are orthogonal to the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. By doing so, it is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
The first substrate includes:
An insertion mounting component mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and mounted at a higher mounting height than the electronic component A gaming machine characterized in that insertion mounting components are respectively provided.

  In such a technical idea 12, both the integrated circuit component that is easily targeted for fraud and the discrete component that is difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, only the discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate on which the surface mounting region having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed. It is expected that the circuit size will be reduced.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and formed on the first substrate. The board is inserted and mounted in such a manner that the board surfaces are orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion mount component without creating a large space between the first substrate and the second substrate. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while appropriately maintaining the performance of suppressing improper components from being mounted.

  Still further, the first substrate has an insertion mounting component mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and the electronic component. Since the insertion mounting components mounted at a higher mounting height are arranged respectively, the second substrate having the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed on the first substrate. This makes it difficult to recognize that the device is mounted in an insertion mounting region having excellent suppression performance.

[Technical Thought 13]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a second control unit capable of executing an effect proceeding process according to a result of the game proceeding process by using the electronic components;
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
Single-function elements include discrete components encapsulated in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components encapsulated in relatively large packages in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated,
The substrate of the first control unit includes:
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area into which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, A second substrate on which a surface mounting area on which the discrete component is surface mounted is formed;
The discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate is formed by being molded with a first mold member of a specific color different from many of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate includes:
An insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate and provided as one electronic component molded by a second molding member of the same or similar color to the specific color together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate A gaming machine characterized in that it can be electrically connected to various kinds of insertion mounting parts mounted on the first substrate by being inserted and mounted on the first substrate.

  According to the technical idea 13, while both the integrated circuit component that is easily targeted for fraud and the discrete component that is difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, only the discrete components that are hard to be fraudulent are mounted on the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance is formed. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed for the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component. In addition, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while appropriately maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of an unauthorized component.

  In addition, for the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate, the first mold member having a color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. Then, the second substrate to be mounted is formed as one electronic component further molded by a second mold member of the same or similar color to the specific color. I have to.

  Therefore, even when the second substrate on which the surface mounting region having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as the other insertion mounting components and is inserted and mounted on the first substrate, the hole is formed. The manager on the side can easily find out where the second board is, and can easily confirm whether or not the second board has been tampered with. However, in this case, even a malicious person may assist in grasping information as to which surface mounting region (second substrate) is provided with poor fraud suppression performance.

  In this regard, in the above-described configuration, the discrete component that is surface-mounted on the surface-mounting region is molded together with the second substrate by the second mold member, so that the type of the electronic component is kept secret and the circuit is difficult to understand. The second mold member is provided with the same color or a similar color as the specific color provided on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface, in addition to enhancing the performance. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of the discrete component which is surface-mounted on the surface mounting area, an act is performed in which the second mold member is shaved by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside thereof. Even if the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is being scraped, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member is being scraped or the first mold member inside the second mold member is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component is kept secret and the difficulty in understanding the circuit is appropriately maintained.

[Technical Thought 14]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a second control unit capable of executing an effect proceeding process according to a result of the game proceeding process by using the electronic components;
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
Single-function elements include discrete components encapsulated in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components encapsulated in relatively large packages in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated,
The substrate of the first control unit includes:
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area into which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, A second substrate on which a surface mounting area on which the discrete component is surface mounted is formed;
The second substrate includes:
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with a discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. It is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounting parts mounted on the
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification information corresponding to a discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is provided with the one electronic component. A specific board-side identification is provided corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification is provided corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a unique mode different from any of the board-side identifications provided in the insertion mounting area of the gaming machine, including the board-side identification.

  According to the technical idea 14, both the integrated circuit component that is easily targeted for fraud and the discrete component that is difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having the excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, only the discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate on which the surface mounting region having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed for the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component. In addition, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while appropriately maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of an unauthorized component.

  Further, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification information corresponding to the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is not provided. Is provided with a specific board-side identification display corresponding to the position where the second board as the one electronic component is inserted and mounted. The specific board-side identification display is the same type of mounting electronic component. In addition, a unique mode different from any of the board-side identification displays provided in the first control unit and the second control unit is included, including the board-side identification display provided in correspondence with. That is, in this case, even if the specific board-side identification displayed on the mounting surface of the first board is confirmed, the mode is different from the board-side identification displayed on the same type of mounting electronic component. Because of the unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. Also, in order to grasp the type of discrete components that are surface mounted on the surface mounting area, even if an act such as a malicious person shaving the mold member and trying to check the inside is performed, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical Thought 15]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and capable of executing a control power generation process and a game progress process by using the electronic circuits;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and capable of executing an effect progression process according to a result of the game progression process by using the electronic circuits,
A game machine which can provide a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing being executed,
In the plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit,
It is composed of electronic components for mounting a single-function element, and includes a specific discrete circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function,
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting area and a surface mounting area formed on different substrates,
In the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed in the base plate, only the specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted and the specific type is mounted. Are mounted as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic component, and are mounted on the different mounting substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. That can be electrically connected to the insertion mounting parts of
Among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit, another mounting electronic component different from the specific type is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A gaming machine characterized by being performed.

  According to the technical idea 15, only a discrete component (a mounting electronic component constituting a specific discrete circuit) that is not easily targeted for fraud is mounted on the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while appropriately maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of an unauthorized component.

  In addition, in a specific substrate on which a surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed, only a specific type of mounting electronic component of a plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted, and The electronic components for mounting are provided together as one electronic component molded together, and are mounted on the different mounting substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. Can be electrically connected to the insertion mounting component.

  That is, in this case, the specific board on which the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component. It is expected that the size of the hardware circuit can be reduced while maintaining the above. Further, in the specific board, since only the specific type of mounting electronic components among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted, it is confirmed whether or not the surface mounting area has been tampered with. It can be made easier. Also, since the specific substrate is molded together with the specific type of mounting electronic components, the specific substrate is inserted and mounted on another substrate on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of understanding a specific discrete circuit formed over a surface mounting area formed in a substrate and an insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate, and to provide a measure against fraud. Will be expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described. Subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This award ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to drive the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates. When the game machine is electrically connected to a game ball payout device (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. One prize ball is designated by the command 10H, and the command 11H is specified. , Two prize balls are designated,..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the ball lending machine 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. , A command 20H to a command 2EH are prepared, a command 20H designates one winning ball, a command 21H designates two winning balls,..., A command 2EH Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies a self-check.
The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as a command reception confirmation is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit related, power-on, normal figure synchronized effect related, ordinary power actor related, notification display, state It is divided into indication and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization Direction Related]
The special effect 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the division includes the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of a command named special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation.
To these various commands, "A * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronizing effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for designating out, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command instructs the probability and the time reduction state. Note that the probability and the time reduction state include a low probability time reduction state indicating a low probability state and a time reduction state, a high probability time reduction state indicating a high probability state and a time reduction state, and a low probability It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is not the time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is the high-probability state and is not the time-saving state (as the normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time reduction state is, for example, a normal pattern display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for changing and displaying the symbols in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the normal lottery result of the later-described ordinary lottery in a predetermined time is displayed. The number of times of stop display is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period during which the pair of movable pieces is opened and closed as shown in FIG. 8 is made longer as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), and FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 as shown, it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of possessed balls (in other words, the non-time saving state In addition, the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and when the pair of movable pieces is to be opened and closed, the period of the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is increased, so that the second start-up is performed. This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the mouth 2004 is increased).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 change, the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect starts, and the special figure 1 tuning is performed. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure hit information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing described below.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named start of special figure 2 tuning effect, designation of special symbol 2 and end of special figure 2 tuning effect. These various commands have a status "B * H" and a mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number).
) Are assigned (“*” indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronizing effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command designates the off, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The end of the special figure 2 tuning effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 change, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. 89, a jackpot opening, a jackpot opening 1 Nth display, a jackpot 1 closing display, a jackpot 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, and a jackpot opening. , A small hit open display, a small hit count display, and a small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (where “H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is for instructing the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is started during the opening of the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (the starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005), and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (when the starting opening unit 2100 is closed). The special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command starts during the small hit opening (while the small winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium and large winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (when the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005, and is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the start-up opening unit 2100). The special winning opening 1 count display command is issued when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (at the time of the small hit, when the big winning opening 2005 of the start-up opening unit 2100 is opened). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium-high winning opening (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small hit ending command is transmitted. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command named main control return destination at power-on. To these various commands, “D * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is issued when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power is restored). When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, the information instructs the user to clear the RAM. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, the power is restored when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored). ), The above-mentioned information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return from among the low-probability time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the high-probability non-time-saving state. And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when each of the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type is created, what kind of work is for the copyright, what kind of game specification (for example, a probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of times of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) (A so-called ST machine)).
In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is used to identify the type code among the Max Type, Middle Type, and Sweet Digi Type that indicate the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. The copyright code and the game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability fluctuation is performed in a state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited. And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the game specification occurs.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs a return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is as follows: When the main control board power is turned on (in addition to power-on, power recovery occurs when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored. Is also transmitted.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control-side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission processing, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to tsuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the general symbol display effect of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the box 1402, namely, the names of general figure synchronizing production start, general figure design, general figure synchronizing production end, and change state designation. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general figure synchronizing effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronizing effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specifying command is for specifying the off, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The figure tuning effect end command instructs the end of the general tuning effect, and the fluctuating state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time reduction state are a low probability time reduction state indicating a low probability state and a time reduction state, and a high probability time reduction indicating a high probability state and a time reduction state. State, a low-probability non-time-saving state indicating that the state is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As the gaming state, a low-probability non-saving time state is set).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designating command is transmitted immediately after the general figure synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol omission information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The ordinary electric production effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. It is composed of commands called “hit opening”, “opening of ordinary telephone”, and “ending of ordinary figure”. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per day is a command to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during the opening of the day. (The pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right directions by driving the starting port solenoid 2107. State or the time of expansion), and the end-of-normal-drawing command instructs the start of ending per-position.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for the ordinary electric power is transmitted when the ordinary electric power is opened. The ending command is transmitted at the start of the ending of the per-figure. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Information display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the categories of the notification display are composed of commands named winning award display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning prize abnormal display command indicates that a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 when the player wins the special winning opening other than during the big hit (during operation of the condition device), and the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100. Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electric signal in a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the electrical connection with 4005 or the like, this command is used to start the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  In addition, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame is in the opened state, the door frame is instructed to be notified, and the door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main frame 4 is in the open state, the main frame opening command is issued. The main frame closing command is issued by the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When the main frame is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning prize abnormal display command is transmitted when a prize is won at a special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device). Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of sending the command to the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door opening command is transmitted. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619), The frame closing command is transmitted when the main frame closing is detected (when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands called frame state 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error clearing navigation command (corresponding to error clearing command), and frame state 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. The command is set as the status, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1310a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, when the frame state changes, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration. , And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section is composed of various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Inspection of various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control-side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 90, as shown in FIG. 90, the starting mouth winning, the fluctuation shortening operation end designation, the high probability end designation, the special symbol 1 memory, the special symbol 2 memory, the ordinary symbol memory, the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. To these various commands, “9 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect. Based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the start of an effect when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 is determined. And a start of an effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability-end designation command instructs a state transition from the shortened operation state to the fluctuation-shortening non-operation state, and the high-probability end designation command instructs a state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). The special symbol 2 storage command is used to convey the number of balls that have not been used (the number of balls) yet to be displayed on the display. When the player enters the ball and notifies the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for variable display of the special symbol, the ordinary symbol storage command is the ordinary symbol 1 Reserved 0 to 4 (the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used in the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 for the game symbol to pass through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. The special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special design 2 storage prefetching production command instructing the notice of the display result by the first special design display 1403 based on the special design 1 hold is instructed. Before the second special symbol display 1405 is used for changing the display of the special symbol, a prefetching instruction is provided to pre-read and notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 suspension. Is what you do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the fluctuation has been determined after the reduction of the specified number of fluctuations has been completed (after the loss suspension period has elapsed). The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the change is determined (after the loss suspension period elapses) after the high probability number in the case of “high probability N times” is exhausted. When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a pending number that is not yet used for the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations is reduced from the number of reservations by using the first special symbol display 1403 to display special symbols in a variable manner.) The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays the special symbol 2). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used in the fluctuation display, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the second special symbol display 1405 displays special information based on the number of reserves. Pattern The normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of pending balls is reduced for use in the variable display, and when the number of normally activated ball 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal number of the functional display unit 1400 is changed). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not been used yet in the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol on the symbol display 1402, when the number of the reserves is further increased by the passing of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, or the ordinary symbol display is displayed based on the retained number. At 1402, when the number of reserves is reduced by using the normal symbol for fluctuation display, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserve balls increases (the game ball Is transmitted when the number of pending balls increases due to the entry of a special symbol 2, and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls is increased when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 operation increases (the number of gaming balls enters the second starting port 2004). But Sent when it increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the second starting opening When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 transmit the notification mainly by voice to notify the user of the situation. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown at 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification in which the pachinko machine 1 uses the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to notify by sound and also monitors the presence or absence of fraud.
On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not notify the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes a broken ball, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error, and a CR not connected. When the ball is broken, bit 0 (B0, “B”) is used. Represents a bit.), A value of 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) for 50 or more stocks, and a connection failure. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, the value 1 is set in B5, the value 0 is set in B6, and the value 0 is set in B7.

In the error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command), a ball watching, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error are prepared. In the ball watching, the value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and the payout detection sensor is set. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred.
“Retry error” indicates that payout of game balls that do not consistently occur due to a retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

  As the frame state 2 command, “without ball removal” is prepared, and a value of 1 is set in bit 0 (B0) while the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, a change in the frame state, and at the time of error clearing navigation, and an error clearing navigation command is transmitted at the time of error clearing navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 92. FIG. 94 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then, the operation of an initial value updating type counter, main control-side power-on processing, and main control-side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not a big hit game state is generated, and whether or not a reach (reach loss) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated. Reach judgment random numbers to be used for determination and fluctuations to be used for determining the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A display pattern random number, a jackpot symbol for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot Big hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining initial value of symbol random number, first special symbol display 1 when generating small hit game state 03 and a random number for a small hit symbol for use in determining a small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol display 1405, and an initial value for a small hit symbol for use in determining an initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol A random number for determination and the like are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine a normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 should be opened and closed, and to determine an initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for jackpot determination is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a to a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. I do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a symbol hit is normally updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining an initial value for determining normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and a checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum thereof is stored in the main control side power-off process (when the power is turned off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, for example, when the value does not match the checksum value (sum value), the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination is usually set to the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM, and normally updates the random number for the symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code from the fixed numerical range of the counter. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated as the random number for determining the initial value for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value set in the random number for the initial value determination for the symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is provided by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the second security measure prevents the analysis from being performed by taking two-stage security measures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for a normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles the game board 5 to obtain an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the counter value obtained by illegally acquiring and updating the normal symbol hit judgment random number and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is assigned, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5 ′, that is, in another pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus is analyzed by disassembly. An instantaneous stop is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals, and even if a game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a has a circuit configuration such that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control program performs a main control-side power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as a “built-in”) built in the main control MPU 1310a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. WDT control register ”). The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register, the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and a watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a) (until the measured time reaches the time set by the timer set value). Hereinafter, unless a timer clear set value is set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the electric power clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 serving as a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result indicates that the logic becomes HI when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting its logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and changes the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, until the latch state is set. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of electric power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been. The determination as to whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to HI. Is input to Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q when the state in which the logic is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal with the logic being LOW is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game-side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it has been done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that the instruction does not indicate that the RAM is to be cleared when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is to be cleared, and the operation switch 954 is determined to be operated.

  In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). In other words, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system shown in FIG. 72 that performs the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (boot). Wait until you do. In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on the power failure notice signal. If there is an input of a power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure notice signal continues. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the game information is deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not deleted. If the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, if the game information is not to be deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is for calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, game checks information such as a checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in a main control power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 1; if the main control-side power-off process has not been normally completed, the value is set to 0. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after production for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, if a fraudulent person The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device) is applied to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and the state after the return is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets the value of the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off process is not normally completed, the main control program executes the entire main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control-side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control-side power-on operation control means). More specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates that the RAM is to be cleared and game information is to be deleted, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control-side power supply is cut off. When the processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for the normal symbol hit determination based on the taken out ID code is obtained. Performs an initial value derivation process of always deriving the same fixed value from the above, and sets this fixed value as the normal value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination for use in determining the initial value of the random number for normal symbol determination described above. I do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310 a are described. ), The transmission serial port prescaler is used to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is used to set the initialization of the transmission circuit and to set the transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs a test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing machine of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) or the like when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is updated in hardware by a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Is set to latch and acquire a random number, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined high speed is determined based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). The other values in the numerical range are successively extracted without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted, Based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are rapidly extracted without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and performs main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as a big hit determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform that the power has been turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in (1) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control-side main process is started, an error clearing navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) is issued. The execution of the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the receipt is regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the error detection navigation command of the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the power-on as described above, based on the concept of time sharing. The RAM clear processing is executed upon the input (game control side power-on operation control means), and the execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted after the predetermined time has passed even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which should have been used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced with a game storing unit for a predetermined time from power-on. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM serving as a payout storage unit described later) as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process, or after a lapse of the predetermined time, It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball payout operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit random number update processing (step S56). In the non-hit random number updating process, the above-described reach determination random number, variation display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-described random number for normal symbol hit determination, random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal has been input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt disable setting (step S58). With this setting, a main control timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program executes the starting port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. Then, the drive signals output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated as the sum of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM except for the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program performs setting for prohibiting RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Since the main control built-in WDT 1310af cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset. Thereafter, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control-side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and performs a main control-side power-on process by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally. Has been inspected. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be described. First, a problem when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing is advanced. Will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to the power failure or the instantaneous power failure. The charged electric charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous interruption. That is, even if the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the charged power is applied as +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The main-control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the interruption. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power outage or momentary power failure occurs and the When the power is cut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time standby process of step S22, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A standby time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots) is started, and immediately before the standby time is reached. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within about 7 ms, step S42 is performed. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52. Thereafter, the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control timer interrupt processing described above is performed and the contents of the main control internal RAM are updated, the main control power off processing in the main control power on processing may not be able to be completed. . For this reason, the main control-side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored, without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are determined to be the same. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even when the operation switch 954 is operated by the store clerk or the like at the time of power restoration and the intention of the store clerk of the hall to clear the RAM is not given, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notification signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby processing in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Can not prevent the game information from being updated, and there is no fluctuation in the checksum calculation result. It has become so that it does not. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum of step S64 when restarting. Therefore, the game information stored immediately before the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure or the power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the power supply 1 is cut off, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a supplies power to the VDD terminal by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main system composed of the processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing at the time of the side power cut-off, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, when restarted, calculates the checksum in step S28. It is determined that the calculation result of the checksum (that is, the value calculated and stored of the checksum in step S64) in the backup processing matches, so that the instantaneous power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is determined. There is no initialization of game information immediately before a power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af to thereby reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Can be restarted again without any updating of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be surely completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the main control side power when the power is restored, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or the instantaneous power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed. It is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input in step 24 immediately after. If the power failure notice signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S24. Returning to the determination, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12 is cleared to the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. By setting the set value and clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and starting the time measurement again, the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. . By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, in step S52, The content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM can be prevented from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt process described later. The mechanism was adopted. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to the power outage or the momentary power outage, a portion covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all, and a main control side power supply. The content of the main control built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that can be reliably completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all by hardware. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. For transmission, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. I have. Here, first, the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , That is, the problem in the case where, in step S50, the power-on main control return destination command does not perform the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen in the big hit game state (for example, the screen of the big hit game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or power failure when the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and thereafter, when power is restored, the main control board 1310 executes In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, the gaming state is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs, and the attacker is attacked. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started to shift from the state where the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state where it is opened. That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power outage occurs, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned, It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a large winning prize port 1 count display command for detecting the number of game balls having entered the special prize opening 2005 by detecting a game ball entering the special prize opening 2005 and being detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the ball of the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even though the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the big hit game state (that is, what round).

  In such a situation, for example, when ending the fourth round (the fourth round) of the jackpot game state, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. From the main control board 1310 to the special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 during the round). When the main control board 1310 transmits to the board 1510 and starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Transition from the open state to the open state (that is, 5-5 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and the time saving state described above and finally displays the screen in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  Also, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece has been expanded) indicating that a game state in which a game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen to be transmitted to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the game state becomes advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen informing the user of the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the game state is enabled. In such a case, the game state is restored to a game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as a game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (ie, a screen for instructing a game ball to enter the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot know what game the player plays.

  As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, that is, a so-called frozen state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on as well as when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power-on state command). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command and the power-on main control return command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-described example, the peripheral control board 1510 When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening and closing member 2107. The peripheral control board 1510 can inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state in which the player is in the state of being in the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating the number of the round). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in the big hit game state, A screen that starts driving the solenoid 2108 and informs that the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 (for example, “Big hit. The special winning opening is open. Please display a message that informs the player that a ball should be thrown in.) Is displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, and power is restored to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. Later, it is possible to instruct the player to enter a game ball into the special winning opening 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a state in which the game is in a game state advantageous to the player, and the power is subsequently restored, the starting port solenoid 2107 is used as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs the driver that driving has started and the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction (for example, “The movable pieces are being expanded. Is displayed on the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, and the power is returned to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. Can be instructed to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Accordingly, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 in detail where the peripheral control board 1510 should return. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, that is, a so-called frozen state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described processing of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup processing, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison judgment, the values of the checksums cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only the two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information. Is stored. For these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated and the RAM is cleared by the operation, the information instructing the clearing is performed at the time of power-on. In this case, the power is restored in any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability-time-saving state, low-probability-non-time-saving state, and high-probability-non-time-saving state. And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine, when the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type are created as the pachinko machine 1 (accurately, the main control board 1310), respectively, What kind of game specifications (for example, if the probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification is a game specification (a so-called ST machine or the like) in which a probability variation occurs when the game is performed 30 times or 70 times).

In a manufacturing line of a maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line determines which one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, B, D, C, D, and F), It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works is mixed at the time of manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the worker of the manufacturing line can It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is also impossible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the works of a plurality of types is mixed. While the 1310s are mixed, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery, and also when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the model code of the pachinko machine is included). In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thus, the operator of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the detailed information on the model displayed on the inspection monitor can be visually checked, so that the main control It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability fluctuation occurs. Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 13 The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually checking the inspection monitor, and separates the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the subsequent main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control program switches the register bank on the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control-side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control-side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to that of the register tank. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1402 is turned on in accordance with the ordinary symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are output from the payout control board 951. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs that the ACK signal has been received normally is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed.
Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program includes, for example, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and a magnetic detection sensor for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. The payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 reads out the detection signal from the payout control board 951 and the payout ACK signal transmitted from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Are stored in the input information storage area as input information. Also, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each of the signals is read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other signals shown in FIG. 90 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start-up sensor 4002, a start-up winning command corresponding thereto is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start-up sensor 4004. And the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning opening 2001 and 2011, and a count sensor 4005 for detecting game balls entering the large winning opening 2005 , A detection signal from a first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 , And a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, when this switch input process is started, first is read for the first time, respectively, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the elapse, each is read again as a second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. Those not having the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for the first to third times, and the reading twice for the second to fourth times, a total of two times of reading is performed, thereby causing an influence of chattering, noise, and the like. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are detected. Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), and therefore each time the counter is incremented, each time the counter is counted up. The above-described random number for determining a normal symbol hit and the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the hit per symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit random number update processing updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are determined in the main control-side power-on process (main control-side main process) shown in FIG. The update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the main routine. However, every time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven, and If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for initial value determination for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs award ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out the game balls is created, and the prize ball is paid out. If the number of planned game balls reaches ten, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and the output is stored in the output information storage area as output information, The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so the main prize ball number information output signal is set to output to convey this effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is checked. The self-check command is generated and transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls that have been paid out will be replaced by In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. Is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that effect, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-described frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 951 of the reception is output as output information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Note that the frame state 1 command here corresponds to a first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to a first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the jackpot is not in a gaming state (when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005), or the like. Then, a prize abnormal display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input (Random number value) is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. (A determination as to whether or not to generate a big hit game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and a value of a counter for updating a random number for the big hit symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. A determination is made as to whether or not the probability variation hit determination value is matched (determination as to whether or not probability fluctuation is to be generated). Here, “probability variation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) that is set higher than that of a normal case (a low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the low probability, and are read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 is read in the high probability. To 32767 are set, and are read from the probability-change-time determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing of step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches the jackpot determination value, a random number for jackpot determination (that is, a random number value acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special effect 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information. I do. In addition, when the game state is changed to the big hit game state according to the game state to be generated, for example, various commands (big hit opening command, big win port 1 opening N-th display command, big win port 1) shown in FIG. A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two, the figure The second round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the round display lamp 1407a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set to be turned on, and stored in the output information storage area as output information. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol hit is extracted and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. To memorize.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is displayed such that the total number of stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for a normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read out gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as “normal lottery”). It is determined whether or not the movable piece is to be opened and closed based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that a game state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the ordinary figure tuning effect related shown in FIG. 89 are created, and are transmitted as transmission information. While storing in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric winning effect shown in FIG. Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and an output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol fluctuation based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 89 are created. The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so that the ordinary symbol display 1402 is illuminated according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally completed from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the big hit game state is set, or a driving signal is sent to a starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to the output, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game, such as information output information during time reduction, start port winning information output signal etc. And outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the above-described transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, and special figure 2 Command, various commands classified into jackpot-related (for example, when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, a large winning prize is determined based on a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). A special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a mouth counting command), various commands classified into power-on, various commands classified into ordinary figure synchronizing production, various commands classified into ordinary electric production production, FIG. 90 The various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display and status display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 transmits at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea can be completed. At the time of power recovery in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in the reservation setting of a command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Which constitutes the power-on state command as main serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitutes the power-on main control return destination command, status, The mode is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control-side power-on process, and the game information is stored in accordance with the game information. There are cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit) ) Is transmitted (error command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to the terminal (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 The main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Unit)) (a door frame command sending means, a second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 1510 (production control). Unit)) (a door frame command transmission unit, a second door frame command transmission unit). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door close command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af does not have to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup processing has been executed, as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. The main control return destination command at the time of power-on shown in FIG. Can be output to In other words, the main control board 1310 performs the main setting in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power supply processing in step S34 in step S50 in the main control side power supply processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power-on status command classified as power-on and a power-on main command shown in FIG. The control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is output as main circumference serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, to the game board side effect display device 1600. Effect display in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game and the power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or the power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the main control board 1310 can display and notify the return destination of the progress of the game in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistakenly viewed as having failed in a state where the player has failed. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. At step S38 in the main control-side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. With this, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are generated by creating a power-on main control return destination command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, a power-on state command is configured as main circumference serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode and sum value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying any of the above-mentioned Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating a model type, a copyright code for specifying a copyright of a work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, and the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. This causes the peripheral control MPU 1511a to be in a state in which interrupt permission is set, and output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of the game effect and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. In addition to the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up, the effect backup information (the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms), ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While the effect backup information (1 fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. To start cold.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information, which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db also in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM). When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Subsequent to such a hot start or a cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC controller 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in (1), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information to the game board. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn on the light is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes, as described above, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board-side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed, the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100%. This is to prevent that.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. I have.

Subsequent to step S1006, the production control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1.
By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, first, the value 1 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Game-board-side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates transmission of the lamp driving board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the data in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first one byte of the game board side emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmission buffer register.
Thereby, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK by 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The transmission of the data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board) every time a transmission interrupt request is generated. The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register, which is emptied.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing the data to the buffer register, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area for the LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of the 1511cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of one byte of data is started one bit at a time.

  Whenever a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers this (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad by one byte at a time. , And frame decoration via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer, start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 and the like based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in which various information obtained by setting the operation button 410 are monitored, the operation state of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed in the game effect. It is determined as appropriate whether or not to reflect this.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when rendering exceeding the rendering capability of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is performed, the generated rendering data for one screen (for one frame) is rendered on the gaming board side display device 1600 and on the door frame side. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called dropping of frames occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronizing the effect with music and sound effects etc. according to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, The sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the music and sound effects are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, music and sound effects matched to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number of emission data from the first emission data is changed to the emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the head sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the drive data from the first drive data The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in a time series and constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data specified by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the production control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program is configured to transmit information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and various information transmitted from the main control substrate 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. I do. In the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, the number of ordinary symbol holdings. A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start-up suspensions changes, and a special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (a special winning opening count command) output every time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command indicating a full state shown in FIG. 90 (a second error occurrence command, It is analyzed whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means), and it is recognized which game state is currently in play. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main body frame opening command, a main body frame closing command, a door opening command or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. As the various commands, various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified into big hit related, and power-on shown in FIG. 89 are shown. Various commands, various commands classified in the ordinary figure synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the ordinary electric production production-related, various commands classified in the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-described door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, error clear navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command), and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error generating command). There are various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to the test, and various commands to be classified into other.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of turning on the power, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into a status display shown in FIG. For example, if the command is an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from a normal effect form associated with the effect operation, so that, for example, the game board side Using the effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device) to visually warn the outside, or use a speaker to warn the outside audibly ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, an improper act on the main control board 1310 which may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs a prefetch effect control process (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes a process related to a look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or a special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command (hereinafter, “prefetch effect command”) is received, a prefetch effect is executed. Make settings. The details of the prefetch effect control process will be described later.

  The pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 when a game ball wins in the starting ports 2101 and 2102. In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the prefetch effect command, the prefetch effect flag is set in the received command analysis processing in step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the content of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in the present embodiment, even when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether to actually execute the prefetch effect.

  Then, when executing the prefetching effect, the mode of the hold display of the start memory is changed as the prefetching effect (normal prefetching effect). In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, a continuous look-ahead effect that changes the mode of the hold display every time the start-up memory where the variable display is executed is exhausted is executed. I do. In the prefetching effect control process, a process for executing a normal prefetching effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous prefetching effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, a case in which the number of unstarted start memories is a certain number or more, or a case in which the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be prefetched is a big hit is high. You may.

  Note that the contents of the look-ahead effect include not only changing the display mode of the start memory, but also displaying effects on the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470, such as displaying a character and changing the background, emitting light from a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker. Or an effect such as an operation of a movable body.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer is designated by the pointer in the time-series light-emitting data constituting the light-emitting mode generation schedule data. The game board-side emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations provided on the door frame 3 The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board is stored in various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and displays the screen data indicated by the pointer among the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. From the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and outputs the extracted data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board effect display device. 1600 and one frame (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation processing, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated every time the sound data creation processing is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, the volume is set to mute for the substrate volume 0, and set to the maximum volume for the substrate volume 6, and from the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume. Each volume is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the audio data in the audio data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the silence to the maximum volume is programmed by the program to the built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a clerk of a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's misconduct due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects, the screen played by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally stored peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to be backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) in the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is copied by the peripheral control D A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in the Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the copy to the backup second area 1511cc in the Bank4 (1fr). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc is continuously provided for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is to be backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular process is executed. The effect control information (SRAM) stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) is used as the effect backup information (SRAM), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db at high speed. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of the Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated as the request factors of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) are designated by copying the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM). From the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, all of the data up to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are continuously copied in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The backup second area 1511dc is continuously designated by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and then sets 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. To complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The following describes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed in response to the above. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed by the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit routine is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 of the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the value of the stationary processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. In addition to the transmission to the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. The fact that this has been done is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, so that the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit cannot perform the normal processing until the V blank signal is input and then the next V blank signal is input.

As a result, in the present peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input.
In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit regular process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing has failed, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is not performed, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and then the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33-time 1-ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1-ms timer interrupt process has been started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is assigned to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, a motor and solenoid driving process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in chronological order. Among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the motor driving board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is read. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the staging operation unit 400 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series to constitute. 73 is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. The first one byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. The transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by this whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller by one byte. 1511ad, and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, The frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. To start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data designated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and is created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first one byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK to transmit the data in the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started one bit at a time.

  Each time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers this (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port transmission serial The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register, which is emptied.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the serial I / O port for the motor driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in effect operation unit 400 are input, history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created, and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110).
In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of the failure and the state of occurrence of the failure between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side performance display device is obtained. A drawing state 460 can be obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. In addition, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally copied are respectively backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time it is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, as the effect backup information (1 ms), Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 of the backup first area 1511 cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is copied by the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa. A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the A controller 1511ac to Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the bank 3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and Bank0 (1ms). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). , And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank4 (1ms). And From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred in units of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the first address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the effect of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, the various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since the routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 72 triggers main peripheral serial data to be built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated in response to the fetching, and peripheral command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, a status is allocated as a first byte, a mode is allocated as a second byte, and a status and a mode are regarded as numerical values as a third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received in main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main-circle serial data transmitted from main control The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been fetched from the reception buffer. When the status that is the first byte of the main serial data is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the third byte of the main serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  If the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main serial data, and the third byte of the main serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the mode as the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value as the third byte of the main serial data is received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and When the sum value, which is the byte, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. Under file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Has been determined. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has been changed to an irregular main circumference serial data due to noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the reception command storage area. 1511 cac is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This “peripheral control unit reception ring buffer” is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second status of the main serial data when storing the data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. And the associated mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 can be received. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal executed when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and outputs a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice). (S1302). If it is determined that the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has not been input, this routine ends.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the flow returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In step S1304, when the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is turned off, the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. As a result, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed, so that even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308).
In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the transmitted command at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, a command backup process is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified to be copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the contents stored in the head address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to transfer the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Copy is specified, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Is specified in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to this point are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control is performed. The PU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc are successively copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in succession.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure notice signal is input in this determination, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.
When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Accordingly, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically returning from reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation processing executed as one processing of the drawing state information acquisition processing of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In the LOCKN signal history creation processing, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the signal is output to convey the fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores one byte (8 bits: the most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, the least significant bit B0, and "B" represent bits). It has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. A request is made to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data) A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is not requested. Is determined.

If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504).
In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, if there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 <-B4, B4 <-B3, B3 <-B2, B2 <-B1, B1 <-Least significant bit B0.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. If there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read out in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Least significant bit B0, and so on. From the first bit to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

  As described above, every time the LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a description will be given of a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG.
In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. 101, stores the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. Is determined, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has the value 0, and the lower four bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination of step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 In this state, the connection between the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in and the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Is determined, and the value of 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. (Count the cumulative number). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset. At this time, the value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the upper limit of the cumulative number CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number of times. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (greater) than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative number of times in step S1526, that is, it is determined that a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is a flag that indicates whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Value 1 indicates that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, each is set to 0. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset. At this time, the value is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a description will be given of the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95. This connection recovery processing is executed following the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 101, and includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether the screen generation schedule data is being activated from among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along with the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed along with the data and the updating of the pointer has been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. In this determination, a period in which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the gaming board effect display device 1600 or a state where the pachinko machine 1 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the gaming board effect display device 1600 is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the current period is based on the screen generation schedule data, and display the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board effect display device 1600. When the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state or during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the gaming board effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, and the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is displayed on the gaming board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or in the customer waiting state, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  If the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, if the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is terminated as it is, while in step S1540 the routine is executed according to the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and the updating of the pointers has been completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT determines whether or not the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. The number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem, is determined. (Count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred once.

  If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is equal to 0 in step S1542, that is, if the number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be in a state of failure is not found once, this value remains unchanged. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem, the number of times determined at step S1542 is one. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has reached the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, and This flag indicates whether the connection between the receiver and the receiver has a failure. If the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure, the value is 1; Is set to 0 when the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state where a failure has occurred in the connection does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is equal to 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In the SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby outputting the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, and is used for the door frame side effect. This restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, the communication error display process is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine ends. In the communication error display process, the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is used to surely inform that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Perform processing to draw on For example, a message “A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk” is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In the communication error display process, a period during which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 or a state where the pachinko machine 1 is in a customer waiting state and the demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 is performed. During the operation, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation check request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, A LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. And a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition to the processing, a notification sound (for example, “a problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device”) is repeatedly performed from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, a process of lighting all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be performed.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decoration symbols which are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Variation display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part normal processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result selected by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main processing or the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94 or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery selected by accepting the game ball in the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is completed, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls is paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result selected by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result selected by accepting game balls in the second starting port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that a left decorative symbol is displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, and a central decorative symbol is displayed in the center. And, on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. Can be recognized by the player. At this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in a semi-transparent mode so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the center decorative symbol rotates from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed while being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the stopped decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped and displayed left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern have an opaque mode so that the background image at the position is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is displayed in a variable manner and is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, are started and stopped, and are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the first special lottery result selected by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery selected by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 for transmitting the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, as shown in FIG. When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit in the power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In order to indicate the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the When the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, that is, the effect is progressing along with the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule is being updated. While the data is being activated, that is, during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol to the stop display, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is performed. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  Thereby, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, between the time when the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are started to be changed and stopped and displayed, the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed. Even when the value is not the value 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that the failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is once or not, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not connected. The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process Without performing the communication error display process of step S1548, for example, a message such as "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. , The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame-side effect display device Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effecting receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effecting transmitter IC 1512d.

When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the time process, the effect is completed along with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, during the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Of the step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the time process In the determination of step S1540 in the connection restoration process shown in FIG. 102 which is executed as one process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, when the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that the connection with the receiver is in a state of failure is not found once, the routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, ie, the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the device and the receiver has a failure is at least one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0. When the connection between the transmitter and receiver is faulty. If the cumulative number determined to have not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and ends the routine. If the value of FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if a failure has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the flow advances to step S1548 in the same process to display the above-described communication error. Performs the processing and ends the routine.
In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the gaming board-side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are provided. This is the case where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure once even during the connection with the ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed. When the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure). Is occurring), the communication error display process must be performed. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Call a clerk. Is displayed and notified, and a LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 for notifying that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  The variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is again displayed. Since the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 during the interval period until the start, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is validated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect A malfunction occurs between the connection with the receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of times that the connection has been made is once and the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has not reached the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, SYNC By always performing the pattern output process, while performing the process of restoring the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the transmitter and the receiver When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state where a problem has occurred in the connection during the period has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver). ), The communication error display processing is always performed, for example, the game board effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the like. And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is performed The processing for restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display processing in step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 The message "A trouble has occurred on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk" is not displayed, so the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that there is, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The image is displayed based on.

  In this way, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative again. During the interval until the symbol change display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display for the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started until the stop display is performed, and then the door frame side effect transmitter is provided. Door frame-side staging receiver ICSD that informs that drawing data received from IC 1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is information in which the combination of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information of most interest to the player, and benefits the player. Can be determined by the player whether or not a jackpot gaming state occurs, so that the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are fluctuated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise or the like and is incorrect. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the effect is not interrupted in the middle of the process and the process for restoring to the state where the drawing can be correctly performed is performed. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the gaming board side effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state. During the period in which the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, this is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state. During the operation, the transmission is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is performed by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, The two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. The two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d, the data is determined to be abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 around the peripheral control unit 1511. Output to the control MPU 1511a. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, While it can be determined that no failure has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450. The notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk.”) Is displayed to control the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600 and a notification sound to convey that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is the serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The circuit connection is performed so that the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that has received the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that no trouble has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as the notification process when determining that the malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify a store clerk or the like of the hall by executing a notification process. The clerk of the hall or the like can very easily check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays the game, and the check does not take much trouble. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without trouble.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450 Since this signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the signal is for the door frame side effect. The receiver IC SDIC0 is a door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. If the transmitted image cannot be normally received, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effecting receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effecting transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 starts. By outputting the image data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication error between image communications at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the problem. It has become. Therefore, by detecting and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame-side effect display device 460, transmits the image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception cannot be performed normally, the effect control microprocessor generates a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. Telling you Message, "A problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." The generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 to inform the user. You can do it.
In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the failure. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall that happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall or the like has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, by detecting and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) between the timings K1 and K2. The connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. From the door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d A connection confirmation signal notifying the start of transmission to the frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 can be repeatedly output to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. Has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move in a direction in which the communication failure is solved.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. This is a case where the connection between the effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communications is provided. Door from door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d When the connection confirmation signal notifying the start of transmission to the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the connection is confirmed. When the output of the signal is stopped, and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d changes the door frame to a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern). Stop transmitting to the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and control the liquid crystal display The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction elimination signal, only during a period in which the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move in a direction in which the communication malfunction is eliminated. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during a period in which the progress of the game is not executed, the main control board 1 Even if the ten main control MPU 1310a starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the door frame The effect distortion (image disorder) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460 is caused by the fact that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the game again and finishes (period from timing K1 to timing K2). (Every (interval period)), it is possible to move in the direction of eliminating.

  According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 in FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 in FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first starting port 2002 and a second starting port which are starting areas in which the game balls fired by the hitting ball firing device 650 are provided in the game area 5a toward the game area 5a defined and formed on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are mounted.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is turned off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game-related information stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when operated within the period from the time of power-on to the time of power-on processing of the payout control unit, the payout control built-in RAM is stored in the RAM. A RAM clear function of outputting a RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to a payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing stored payout information, and a main control power supply of FIG. The period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or the power If the operation is performed after a lapse of a period during which the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed from the time of entry, the RWMLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830. And an error clearing function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is performed. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, for erasing information about the game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period in which a payout control unit power-on process is performed from power-on. A RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to a payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. Of the period when the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. When the operation is performed after a lapse of a period (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on processing is performed after the power is turned on), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830. An error clearing function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is a game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions of a pachinko machine 1 and an error canceling function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error canceling function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input portion of the panel relay board 4161 is provided with various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detecting sensor. , A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. I do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area to manipulate a flowing state of the game ball as desired to obtain an unfair advantage. Illegal gameplay is endless.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting unit, a sound warning, or the like. I have.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine.
The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with a voltage of +5 V generated by a +5 V generation circuit 1310 g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when detecting no more than a predetermined value of magnetism, and outputs a voltage when detecting more than a predetermined value of magnetism. (0 V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is off, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is not detecting magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the flow of current from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thus, when the transistor ITR0 is off, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected not only to the pull-up resistor IR2 but also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 at the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b includes a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 at the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. Thus, when the transistor ITR in the preceding stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor section corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output section 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and applied with + 12V. Further, the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

  Further, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0 in a stage preceding the detection circuit unit 4164. Thus, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input section 4162 and the detection circuit section 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 turns off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also increased to the +12 V side (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table form in FIG. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 turns on, the transistor ITR1 turns off, and the transistor NTR1 turns on, similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. The connector member has a pin contact type and a bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact portion terminal of the connector member. In the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled at the time of connection work or the like, the pin contact is lost. The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust and the like easily enter from this portion.

  Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance similarly occurs. For example, when a right-handed game is played, when a small sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific portion of a game area in which a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down is applied to a connector member. However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in a connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. Note that the magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that of a case where the contact of the connector is normal.

  As described above, the built-in transistor STR is turned on when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting the magnetism. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, and the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detected. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR occurs, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  It should be noted that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, near the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the big winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, and the like. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of the present embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that the magnetic sensor input circuit between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 is in a non-detection state in which the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than a voltage (second voltage) lowering the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR to the ground side (second voltage) and lower than the first voltage is applied, the predetermined voltage acts on the detection circuit unit 4164. Is provided, and a voltage output section 4163 and a detection circuit section 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising section 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 at the previous stage of the connection. It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged at the subsequent stage. Further, +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR0 of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected. Connected to base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state exists, in the above example, when it determines that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a sets An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and a process of outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board effect display 1600, the door frame effect display 460, an alarm lamp, a sound, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 105, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164.

  The operations of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b at the subsequent stage are the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), and when contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of the connector member or the like, the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is generated. False detection can be prevented.

  When an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS as in the related art, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command by using a magnet. That the illegal game using the game is performed, or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is broken by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the warning display, the voice, or the like. I do. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the second embodiment includes the main control of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end grounded. And a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is disposed downstream of the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to a connection point with the base terminal of transistor ITR0. That is, the second embodiment is an example in which the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by the resistor IR3 that flows a current to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 at a stage before the connection. ing.

  Further, in the detection circuit unit 4164, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage lowered to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 turns off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are turned on. A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 106, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor by the current flowing through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. Will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and the current flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current of a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage substantially drops to the ground, and the second resistor IR3 is grounded. Current hardly flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 at the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164.

  The operations of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b at the subsequent stage are the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), and when contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of the connector member or the like, the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is generated. False detection can be prevented.

[Embodiment 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting a Darlington circuit set to an operation voltage higher than the second voltage and higher than a predetermined voltage lower than the first voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5.
In comparison with the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, the resistors IR4 and IR5 connected in series are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, the third embodiment is an example in which the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by the resistors IR4 and IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of a resistor IR4 in addition to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0. One end of a resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the following transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied to the other end, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off, and the transistor ITR2 also turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistance IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0. As a result, the preceding transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

  When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the subsequent stage is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 107, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1 by the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector section. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and the current flows to the ground through the resistors IR4 and IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to ground, and almost no current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the Darlington circuit which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Does not flow. Therefore, the preceding transistor ITR0 is not turned on. Further, the transistor ITR2 at the subsequent stage is not turned on.
As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operations of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b at the subsequent stage are the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), and when contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of the connector member or the like, the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is generated. False detection can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open-collector-type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to a base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 turns off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on, and the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the provided voltage output unit 4163 is connected to a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (a commercially available product, TOSHIBA) ).

  Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member Any sensor may be used as long as it transmits a sensor signal from a detection sensor, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detecting sensor, and a contact sensor. A sensor or the like can be applied.

[Application Example in which Sensor Signal Input Unit 4162 of Panel Relay Board 4161 is Applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments described above is described as preventing erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance generated when contact of the connector is abnormal. Incidentally, the applicable portion of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, the detection sensor may be set at a plurality of locations in the gaming area (for example, placed near the starting opening, the winning opening, the winning opening, the out opening, etc.). . Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and a detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on a panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor depends on the installation location of the detection sensor and various circuit patterns and wiring (harness). Is appropriately selected. Regarding this point, various forms are taken depending on the type of the gaming machine.

  By the way, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes due to the change in the resistance value due to the aging of the used electric components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and the wiring pattern and the length of the wiring (harness). If the value is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes, for example, when the design of the type, location, and length of wiring (harness) of the detection sensor is changed due to a specification change during development. Therefore, the current flowing to the detection sensor changes. Also, depending on the location of the detection sensor, the length of the harness, or the location where the harness is routed, there may be places where noise can be easily picked up, and the influence of the noise also changes.

If a current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a cause, the current flowing through the detection sensor may be different from the original design value. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor is erroneously detected.
In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 according to the first to third embodiments is capable of changing the electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and the wiring pattern over time and the wiring (harness). Even when the resistance value changes depending on the length, erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be used for general purposes. In the conventional example shown in FIG. 104 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is indicated by a box surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

  Hereinafter, a case where noise is present on the harness will be described as an example. FIG. 110A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 110A is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise is present.

  As shown in FIG. 110A, in the conventional example, when there is no noise, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the level is low (0.4 V), and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. Voltage (0.8 V). When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12 V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is present, even when the magnetism detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform is a voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as indicated by the hatched portion. ), The transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  In addition to the noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), when overshoot occurs, erroneous detection does not occur in the state where magnetism is detected, but when undershoot occurs, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. And the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 105 is raised to 2 V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8 V by the voltage raising unit 4166. Have been. In the detection operation, when there is no noise, the voltage is low (0.4 V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism and is lower than the raised voltage 2 V. (0.8 V). When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12 V) and higher than the raised voltage 2 V, so that the voltage raising unit 4166 turns on and the voltage (0. 8V), and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Is lower than the raised voltage 2V, the voltage raising unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance due to aging will be described as an example. FIG. 111 (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111 (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 111 (A) is a signal waveform input in a normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform input in a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance due to aging.

  In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance due to aging, even when the magnetism detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, a voltage input as indicated by a hatched portion is a transistor. Since the voltage exceeds the turn-on voltage (0.8 V) of the ITR0, the transistor ITR0 remains on and the off-state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance due to aging, the input voltage is turned on by the transistor ITR0 in a state where the magnetism detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Voltage (0.8 V), the voltage raising unit 4166 maintains the OFF state because the voltage is lower than the raised voltage 2 V. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

As described above, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented. In addition, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 includes the voltage raising unit 4166, noise may be changed depending on the location of the detection sensor, the length of the harness, or the location where the harness is routed. The sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise even when there is a place where it is easy to pick up. Therefore, the circuit units (sensor signal input unit 4162 and detection circuit unit 4164) provided on panel relay board 4161 can be generalized.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a margin for a design change during development.

[Sensor Signal Input Unit 4162 'of Another Embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 described in the first to third embodiments includes the built-in transistor STR. The built-in transistor STR is turned on when the magnetism is not detected, while the built-in transistor STR is turned on when the magnetism is detected. Although a transistor whose transistor STR is turned off is used. In other words, in the sensor signal input unit 4162, a sensor whose input is low when no magnetism is detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected is used. Instead of this, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when magnetism is not detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor that turns off when magnetism is not detected and turns on when magnetism is detected Can also be used.

  FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect a magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and turned on when it detects a magnetism of a predetermined value or more.

  The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected via a connector CON1 to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

  As the voltage raising unit 4166, those described in the first to third embodiments described above can be used. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage raising section 4166 is an example configured by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 at a stage before the connection.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged at the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit section 4164 'is constituted by a transistor ITR0. Further, +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and + 12V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied to one end. I have.
Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 form a sensor signal winning section 4162 ', and the transistor ITR0 forms a detection circuit section 4164'.

[Detection operation when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 turns on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, so that the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 ', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on.
When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the zener diode ZD0, and the zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, the zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation in abnormal case due to change in resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 turns on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, so that the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  At this time, even if noise is present on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, since the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, the Zener diode ZD0 There is no effect on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 via the anode terminal of the detection circuit section 4164, and the transistor ITR0 remains on. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 '.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the zener diode ZD0, and the zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, the zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  At this time, even if noise is present on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. This is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off. In other words, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in a normal case.

[Example in which a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 are arranged on panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which three identical substrates (on the panel relay substrate 4161), a voltage output unit 4163, a voltage raising unit 4166, and a detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 is arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which a voltage raising unit 4166 and a detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and a voltage output unit 4163 is arranged on another substrate (for example, a sensor substrate). It is a figure showing an example.

  In FIG. 115, a voltage output unit 4163 and a voltage raising unit 4166 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and a detection circuit unit 4164 is arranged on another board (for example, main control board 1310). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration. Thus, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be variously changed.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the present invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with aging or the length of the wiring includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position in the game board 5a is configured by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 according to the first to third embodiments in FIG.

  The voltage output unit 4163 outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and outputs a second voltage that is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low-level voltage (for example, 0.4 V) while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the magnetism. At this time, a high-level voltage (for example, 12 V) is output.

  The detection circuit unit 4164 switches on and off the output of the detection signal in accordance with the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. In the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113, since the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments is used, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to a stage preceding the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

  Then, with respect to the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (for example, 12 V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4 V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage (for example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising section 4166 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163, and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161). . In this example, a sensor signal input unit 4162 includes a voltage output unit 4163 and a voltage raising unit 4166 disposed downstream of the voltage output unit 4163.
Also, a plurality of voltage raising units 4166,... Are electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open-collector-type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensors MGS, respectively, are connected to the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  In FIG. 113, when any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 turns off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to consider the changing resistance value as illustrated. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) for various types of gaming machines. Becomes possible. Therefore, it contributes to the design change during development and the reduction of man-hours related to manufacturing.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment described in FIG. 112 are provided, and the plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. In FIG. 116, a magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is used. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low-level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), When the MGS does not detect magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high-level voltage (for example, 12 V).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit section 4164 'described in the other embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 which is pulled up to + 12V, and the one end of the main control input circuit 1310a has + 12V. , The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V.

  In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 'turns off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control relating to the progress of the game and the effects will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the display mode (design images, various background images, characters, display images of characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, The display mode and the operation mode of various members (such as the stage operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the stage are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, a first and second start-up opening winning process is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processing, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the starting opening. Done.

  If the processing flag is 0 when the first and second start-up opening prize processing is completed, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the hold state is exhausted and executed, and the result of the jackpot determination (hit, type, etc.) is stored. , The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing has been completed, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the stored big hit determination result, the current game state, and the like. After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the stop display, and the stop symbol (the big hit symbol, the lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second start-up opening prize processing is completed, the processing during the change is executed. In this fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. To stop. Then, thereafter, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the change start processing is a big hit, the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the result of the big hit determination stored in the change start processing is not a big hit (losing). , The process selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the processing is started again from the fluctuation start processing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the big hit game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set a jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of the won jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and when the type of the hit big hit is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probable change state. After updating the gaming state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the processing is started again from the fluctuation start processing.

Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol until the symbol variation ends, and the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. The type of the pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a large hit variation variation pattern, a loss reach variation variation pattern, and a loss variation variation pattern. The big hit change is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after the reach effect, the change display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the big hit symbol. Is performed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is losing and it is determined that the reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is developed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally developed so that the symbol is determined and stopped and displayed. The outlier fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and when it is not determined to perform the reach in the reach determination based on the reach random number, the effect display device 1600 does not perform the reach effect. Then, an effect is developed in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally lost and the symbol is fixed and stopped.
Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by obtaining game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to the information, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. Further, on the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to appear, and also changes the effect display (background or hold image) related to the degree of expectation or effects. Control is performed to change the mode (display or movement) of the operation unit 400 or to operate a movable member such as the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information for the operation buttons 410 and operation information of the player near the opening window, and can also execute control relating to effects according to the information.

  Here, the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window. Members that are not relevant for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information are omitted. These are shown schematically. FIG. 120 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 which is housed in the main body frame 4 and has the game area 5a in which the game ball flows down, and the game area 5a are made visible. A door frame 3 having an opening window and provided to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflection standing wall portion 33 that stands upright along the outer periphery of the opening window and is formed to be able to reflect light on at least the inner side surface thereof. Has been. The opening window is a portion of the through-hole 111 that is closer to the front (front side) than the glass plate 192.

  Here, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is formed by a lower reflecting standing wall portion 338 formed by the lower plate unit base 323, a left reflecting standing wall portion 538 formed by the left unit base 531, and a right unit base 551. A right reflecting wall portion 568 is provided, and these members are arranged in a substantially U-shape along the outer peripheral edge of the opening window (an aspect in which no reflecting standing wall portion is provided above the opening window). It is constituted by doing. In the lower reflective standing wall portion 338, the left reflective standing wall portion 538, and the right reflective standing wall portion 568, the inner surfaces thereof are substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided to be a light reflection surface.

  According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflective standing wall portion 338, the left reflective standing wall portion 538, and the right reflective standing wall portion 568 are provided among the substantially vertical U-shaped reflecting standing wall portions 33. The portion (upper side of the opening window) is described as follows: "The light from the predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. 33 so that the light reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 travels on the one specific imaginary plane P outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It also functions as a second part that makes it possible to "be detected."

  Furthermore, in the reflective standing wall portion 33 according to the present embodiment, one reflecting member extends over each inner surface of three separate members (the lower reflecting standing wall portion 338, the left reflecting standing wall portion 538, and the right reflecting standing wall portion 568). The structure in which the member 36 (for example, a reflection seal) is attached is adopted, and thereby the reflection performance as the reflection standing wall portion 33 is suitably secured including the joint of the three separate members.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window (see FIG. 23). In the internal space 3435a, a left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a and a left outer peripheral outer light detection unit 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having extremely low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P that intersects the lower reflective standing wall portion 338, the left reflective standing wall portion 538, and the right reflective standing wall portion 568, respectively, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only to the side so that light can travel toward the opening window side and that light from the opening window side is taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573 and between the opening window in order to suppress fraudulent acts from behind the speaker 573. A transmission member 3436a designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is provided.

  Further, the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a is unitized with the left outer peripheral outer light detection unit 35a, and emits light toward a wide area on at least the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so as to be able to proceed.

  Further, the left outer peripheral outer light detection unit 35a is unitized with the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a travels toward the opening window side, is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, becomes reflected light from the reflecting standing wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435a. Incorporated in. In this regard, in the internal space 3435a, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a. The light emitted and reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b provided on the upper right side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window (see FIG. 23). In the internal space 3435b, a right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34b and a right outer peripheral outer light detection unit 35b are provided. Note that the right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member having extremely low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, similarly to the internal space 3435a, the internal space 3435b is a space including the one specific virtual plane P at a position intersecting the lower reflective standing wall portion 338, the left reflective standing wall portion 538, and the right reflective standing wall portion 568, respectively. The opening is provided only to the side where the opening window is provided, so that light can travel toward the opening window side, and is provided as a space into which light from the opening window side is taken. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, and between the opening window and the opening to suppress fraudulent acts from the back of the speaker 573. A transmitting member 3436b designed to have an extremely high transmittance and an extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is provided.

  The right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is unitized with the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b, and emits light toward a wide range on at least the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so as to be able to proceed.

  Further, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b is unitized with the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b travels toward the opening window side, is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, becomes reflected light from the reflecting standing wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435b. Incorporated in. In this regard, in the internal space 3435b, since only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b, while disturbance is appropriately suppressed, the right outer base outside light emitting portion 34b does not emit light. The light emitted and reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the lower reflective upright wall portion 338, the left reflective upright wall portion 538, and the right reflective upright wall portion 568 enclose the area surrounded by the height and width in three directions ( The area indicated by the dotted pattern in FIG. 120) functions as a special operation receiving portion 3333 that can detect the operation by the player, and the operation mode of the player with respect to the special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. Thus, effect control according to the determination can be executed.

  For example, when the player does not perform an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is not interrupted by any physical object, and is not reflected by any physical object. Are reflected light from various angles (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) and travel toward the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a. That is, in the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a, reflected light from such various angles is reflected by a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) using an optical lens or the like. Has a structure that can be separately detected, and outputs information indicating that no physical object is present in the special operation receiving unit 3333 to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  Also, at this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is not obstructed by any physical object, and is not reflected by various physical objects at various angles (at least one of various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P). ), And travels to the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b. That is, the right outer-circumference light detection unit 35b also uses an optical lens or the like to transmit reflected light from such various angles to a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). Has a structure that can be separately detected, and outputs information indicating that no physical object is present in the special operation receiving unit 3333 to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  On the other hand, when the player performs an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the manner shown in FIG. 119, a part of the light emitted from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is changed by the player's finger ( (Physical object), and only light other than light directed in the direction (angle range) in which the light is blocked is reflected by the reflection standing wall 33 and travels toward the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a. That is, in this case, the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a uses the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By judging the direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the size of the physical object in any direction as viewed from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is determined. Information on whether an object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  At this time, a part of the light emitted from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range). Only the other light becomes reflected light on the reflective standing wall portion 33 and travels to the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35b uses the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By judging the direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light that is emitted from the light source, the physical size of the physical direction in any direction when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is determined. Information on whether an object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b, and analyzes the information. When the physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the coordinate position (x, y) and the size of the physical object exist as well as the information on whether the object exists or not (whether the operation has been performed on the special operation receiving unit 3333). Information related to the information can be obtained. Then, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment periodically acquires such information, whereby the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the size of the physical object are determined. An operation gesture such as a change can be determined, and effect control according to the determination is performed.

  Note that these analysis processes need not necessarily be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and may be performed by an external unit that acquires information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may obtain the analysis result from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share and analyze the result.

  In addition, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light emission from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b are set to blinking modes, and the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34b is in a light-off state. A certain period and a period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light-off state and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state may alternately occur. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is reflected by the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a. If the light is detected on the side of the external light detection unit 35b and analyzed based on this information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b do not interfere with each other. As a result, it is expected that more accurate detection information will be obtained.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light emission from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b are made to blink, respectively. , The period in which the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a is in the light-off state and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state, the period in which the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state, and One cycle in which the light-off period sequentially occurs may be repeated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is reflected by the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a. If the external light detecting unit 35b detects the offset, the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 35a also detect the offset when the external light emitting unit 35a is turned off, and analyze based on these information. The light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b do not interfere with each other, and can be determined after eliminating the detected offset. It is expected that high detection information will be obtained.

  Alternatively, visible light may be used as the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, in consideration of the effects of light at various places, it is necessary to use an invisible light such as infrared light to prevent disturbance from these effects and the effect light. It is more desirable to appropriately suppress the adverse effect on the surface.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “the light from the predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. A first portion that enables “the light to be reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33” and “a light reflected by the reflecting standing wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is outside the outer periphery of the opening window. The second portion enabling the “detection” is provided as the same portion of the reflection vertical wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. However, a plurality of regions in which light can travel between the inside and outside of the outer periphery of the opening window are provided for the reflective standing wall portion 33, and the outside outside light emitting portion and outside outside light detection portion are separately provided for those regions. May be arranged respectively.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an upper opening, but the inner space 3435a and the inner space 3435b of the upper portion of the opening window are formed. The reflection standing wall portion 33 may be formed also on the peripheral edge between them. However, it is preferable that the opening direction of the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b is provided so as to be directed downward in order to suppress direct light from illumination or the like from becoming a disturbance. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, special use is made by using the left outer outer light emitting unit 34a and the left outer outer light detecting unit 35a, and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b and the right outer outer light detecting unit 35b. The operation in the operation receiving portion 3333 is made detectable, but is not limited thereto. That is, any structure may be used as long as the operation in the special operation receiving portion 3333 can be detected. For example, the reflected light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the reflected light from the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b are reflected in one outer peripheral. The physical object may be detected by the light detection unit and the coordinates (x, y) and the size of the physical object may be determined based on the detection result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, light from the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window is transmitted to the opening window. The outer peripheral light detector 35 (left outer periphery) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window as reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33 erected along the outer periphery of the opening window and formed so as to be able to reflect light at least on the inner surface thereof. By detecting the outside light detection unit 35a and the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b), the vicinity of the opening window functions as a special operation receiving unit 3333, and an effect corresponding to the operation mode of the player in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is provided. Executable.

  The outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not disposed in a dew state, but is disposed in the inner space 3435 of the side base 572 opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. As described above, when the unit 35 detects light, it is possible to appropriately exclude the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  However, even with such a configuration, light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 from a portion of the internal space 3435 opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. Since the structure is such that the effect light can be taken in in addition to the light, there is a concern that such effect light becomes a disturbance and adversely affects the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral light detection unit 35.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 first moves on the one specific virtual plane P. Is arranged at a position where the light cannot be irradiated. More specifically, the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving portion 3333 and has a very low light transmittance (or 0). Attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 has a wider shape than the frame-side light-emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to travel rearward (the side where the opening window is provided). This makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to the present embodiment, the first right decorative base portion 551a provided with a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance is provided. A second right decoration base portion 551b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right decorative base 551a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting unit L1 so that light from the frame side light emitting unit L1 can contribute as effect light. The base portion 551b is formed between the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, the second right decorative base portion 551b according to the present embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the player side through the first right decorative base portion 551a while maintaining the first right decorative base portion 551b. The right-side decorative base portion 551a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, so that light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 is preferably suppressed from traveling to the opening window. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 includes both the base portion BL1 and the second right decoration base portion 551b, but includes only one of them. Even in such a case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  On the other hand, the frame side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2 having a very low light transmittance (or 0). At a position where the light traveling on the specific virtual plane P can be irradiated. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame-side light emitting unit L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L2 is provided with the opening window. It is said that it is difficult to travel to the side, so that light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 is hardly taken into the internal space 3435.

  However, since the height of the reflecting member 36 is small, there is a concern that light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member or the like and goes toward the opening window. Therefore, in the left unit base 531 according to the present embodiment, the first left decorative base portion 531a provided with a material that allows the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to travel at a high transmittance is provided. And a second left decorative base portion 531b provided by a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left decorative base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as effect light, whereas the second left decorative base portion 531a. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, the second left decorative base portion 531b according to the present embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel to the player side through the first left decorative base portion 531a while maintaining the first light. The left decorative base portion 531a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, so that light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is preferably suppressed from traveling to the opening window. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second left decorative base 531b is provided on the left unit base 531 and the second right decorative base 551b is provided on the right unit base 551. It is not always necessary to provide these members, and even in this case, it is difficult for the effect light to be taken into the internal space 3435 as described above. When the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b are not provided, the reflection member 36 is not provided with the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a. If it is not attached to the outer surface (a surface that can be contacted from the outside) but attached to the inner surface (a surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a, It is expected that the direct physical contact of the LED will prevent the reflection performance from deteriorating. In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34 (the left outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34a, the right outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34b) passes through the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a, and then passes through the above. The light is reflected by the reflecting member 36, passes through the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a again, and is taken into the internal space 3435.

  When the second left decorative base 531b is provided on the left unit base 531 and the second right decorative base 551b is provided on the right unit base 551, the reflecting member 36 is omitted and the second decorative base 551b is omitted. The left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b may also function as reflection members using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect light from the frame-side light emitting units L1 and L2 from being disturbed only by providing the reflecting members (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b). The detection accuracy of the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 can be appropriately secured by the reflected light from the reflecting members (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b) while being appropriately suppressed. Become.

  The peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment can obtain information such as the coordinates and the size of the physical object located near the opening window by using the principle of acquiring operation information near the opening window. With this configuration, a more dynamic and highly operable operability is achieved by using a substantially entire area of the opening window (approximately the entire area that can be visually recognized in front view of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving portion 3333. The directivity suitable for this can be realized.

  Hereinafter, the operability and the staging effect that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving portion 3333 will be described. FIG. 121 to FIG. 127 are schematic diagrams for explaining operability and performance that can be realized by using the special operation receiving unit 3333, and are related in describing the operability and performance. In addition to omitting parts that are not shown, related parts are also schematically shown.

  FIG. 121 shows a special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed in a front view, and various effect members AE arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 in a front view. Is schematically shown. The arrows in the figure simply indicate the movable ranges of the various movable members among the effect members A to E.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this example is viewed from the front, it can contribute to an effect according to the result of the big hit determination on the far side across the glass plate 192. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C, a display unit D, and a board surface light-emitting unit E provided so as to be able to emit light at a portion where the game ball can flow down and other portions are arranged. . Arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

  Note that these members are shown as examples for explaining the technology of the present application, and do not always correspond to the embodiments described above with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. Basically, however, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are composed of a “rear under-rear movable production unit 3100, a back upper left movable production unit 3200, a back left movable production unit 3300, a back upper middle movable production unit 3400, a back The display unit D is equivalent to the “effect display device 1600”, and the panel light emitting unit E is “various decorations provided on the game board 5”. Various LEDs mounted on a substrate. " In addition, the board surface light-emitting part E does not necessarily need to be provided in the game board 5, for example, may be a member (light guide plate etc.) provided in front of the game board 5.

  Here, on the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display unit D on which the effect display according to the result of the big hit determination is performed is positioned as a target of the operation effect, and the display unit D of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is viewed from the front. When the player performs an operation on the overlapped coordinate area and detects this as a physical object, control can be performed such that an effect change according to the operation appears on the display unit D.

  Hereinafter, an example of the effect control in the case where the effect is changed on the display unit D by the operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described.

[First operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (a), when the first effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of the entire coordinate area (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, a first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted, and displayed. A specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the unit D. Then, during a predetermined period during which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation is performed on any part of the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the first coordinate area Z1 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly , It is sufficient that a finger or the like is in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it). When this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden and displayed. At the same time, the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated, and an effect change is caused on the display unit D, so that control can be performed that can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination result depending on the type of the effect effect change that has occurred.

  At this time, when an effect change is generated based on an operation performed anywhere in the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving portion 3333, the effect change is performed at least on the display unit D. It is desirable to generate the light in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the first display area in front view with his / her finger or the like, the effect changes at least in the first display area. Until the user shifts his / her finger or views the first display area from an oblique direction instead of front view (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D), the first display area is displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the appearing effect change. Alternatively, the player himself / herself can proceed with the game without confirming the effect change in the first display area while keeping his / her finger on the first coordinate area Z1, or can be positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible to select a way of enjoying, such as having a third person who does not confirm the effect change in the first display area, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  If no operation by the player is detected until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing comes) from the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed. , And the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 may be generated, or an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 may be generated. The effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be ended.

[Second operation control mode for display unit D]
In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of the whole coordinate area (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, "the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display unit D" and "the third display area of the display unit D" And the third coordinate area Z3 facing the area "is set (controlled) so that the effect can be received, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display unit D, and the third display area is displayed. Displays the third operation instruction image S3. Then, during a predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is displayed. An operation is performed on somewhere (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly, a finger or the like in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is not required to be performed), and this is performed as a physical object. When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the effect reception of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated, and the display unit D is displayed. A specific effect (an effect corresponding to the selected side (the coordinate area side where the physical object is detected)) is generated, and in the generated specific effect, the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination result is Thereby enabling executing the instigation that may be controlled.

  Note that no operation by the player has been detected until a predetermined period elapses (specific timing comes) after both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 appear. In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is ended. ing. At this time, a specific effect that appears when an effect is received in the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or the specific effect may not be generated. However, when a specific effect appears when an effect is received in the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, an operation on the second operation instruction image S2 is received before the execution of the specific effect. It is preferable that a display (effect or the like) generated when the operation is performed or a display (effect or the like) generated when an operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the effect on the side where the effect has occurred is forcibly executed while the operation is not being performed on any of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest without knowing what effect is being executed.

  In addition, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display unit D, not only the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is allowed, but the same operation is performed. During the period, the same effect reception may be permitted for other operation means such as the operation button 410.

  For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first effect condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 can be effected, and the specific operation instruction image S1 During the predetermined period in which is displayed, even if the pressing operation (detection of the button switch) on the operation button 410 is performed instead of the operation (detection of the physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, The operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the effect reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated, and an effect change is caused on the display unit D. Expectation of the result of the big hit determination is determined depending on the type of the effect effect change. A control whose degree can be suggested is enabled.

  Note that, even when an operation (detection of a physical object) is performed on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the effect reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated. An effect change is generated on the display unit D, and control is performed so that the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination can be indicated by the type of the effect change.

  Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the effect can be accepted for both the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410. I do. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the operation is not performed on any of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 (detection of the physical object), but is performed on the operation. When a pressing operation on the button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed, a second selection image indicating that a specific operation instruction image S2 is being selected and a specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. The switching display between the third selected image indicating that the user is in the state of being in the state is performed. Then, in a state where either the second selected image or the third selected image is displayed, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the selected image is displayed. Generates a display (effect or the like) that allows the user to grasp that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where is displayed, and selects the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3. Both the images (the second selected image and the third selected image) are not displayed, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410 ends. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated on the display unit D, and a control that can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination result in the generated specific effect is enabled.

  In addition, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, it is possible to accept an effect for an operation on another operation means (an operation for accepting any decision), and when there is an operation on the other operation means, a selected image appears. In addition to generating a display (effect) that allows the user to grasp that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 has been received, the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selection image) Both the image and the third selection image) may not be displayed, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and another operation means may be terminated. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated on the display unit D, and a control that can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination result in the generated specific effect is enabled.

  In addition, within the above-mentioned predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area are displayed regardless of whether the second selected image or the third selected image appears. The effect can be received in the area Z3. Then, when an operation on any one of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, it does not matter which of the second selected image and the third selected image is present, and the effect is produced. A display (effect or the like) on the side where the reception was made appears, and none of the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected images (second selected image, third selected image) are displayed. Then, the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and the further operation means is ended. At this time, an operation is detected before the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected images (the second selected image and the third selected image) are all hidden. The switching display may be performed so that the selected images (the second selected image and the third selected image) on the other side appear. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated on the display unit D, and a control that can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination result in the generated specific effect is enabled.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to allow the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410. The same production reception is possible. In this regard, in the second operation control mode, in the case where the same effect reception is enabled but the operation on the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is performed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area By receiving only one operation (detection of a physical object) in the area Z3, it is possible to generate an effect on the side according to the preference of the player. That is, in the case of using another operation means, the “side according to the preference of the player until a predetermined period has elapsed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed” Cannot be produced, or "at least two or more operations are performed using a plurality of operating means", whereas when a specific operation receiving portion 3333 is used, It is possible to make the display mode according to the preference of the player appear with only a small number of operations (one in this production example), so that a more complex production performance can be realized with simple operability. Will be as expected.

  In addition, while providing such efficient operability, if at least two or more operations are performed by using a plurality of operation means to simultaneously provide operability that can achieve a desired operation, The player can worry about which one to select as a desired operation while performing an operation in a process stage leading to a desired operation. In other words, in this case, it is easy to imagine the effect state after the selection in performing the operation in the process stage up to the desired operation, and it is difficult to decide which operation should be performed with a margin within a predetermined period. Will be able to do it. As described above, since the player can selectively use the operation means having different required number of operations depending on whether the player is in a state of being able to decide promptly or in a state of being worried, the gaming interest can be maintained. Become like

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, by setting the display unit D as the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is possible to realize an unprecedented effect. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the special operation receiving unit 3333 is provided with an operation receiving range larger than the display unit D in front view (the coordinate range to be detected is the glass plate 192). (Approximately the entire area), and by realizing production using such special relationships, it is possible to realize more dynamic, highly operable operability and production performance suitable for this. .

[Third operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 123 (a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, a fourth coordinate area Z4 opposed to the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so that the effect can be received, and displayed. A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the part D, and a specific image that prompts the user to operate the specific operation target image S4 to move to the movable body B in another display area of the display part D is displayed. indicate.

  Then, during a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation is performed on any part of the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the fourth coordinate area Z4 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 ( Strictly speaking, it is sufficient that a finger or the like is present in the special operation receiving section 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it.) When this is performed and detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. The coordinate area in which the effect can be received is not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display unit D but a large fifth coordinate area including at least a coordinate area opposed to the movable body B provided outside the display unit D. Change the setting to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 of this example is opposed to a movable body B provided outside the display unit D from a coordinate area opposed to the fourth display area (not necessarily coincident with the fourth coordinate area Z). This is set so as to straddle the movable body B, the display unit D, and the panel light emitting unit E.

  At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that an operation has been performed anywhere in the fourth coordinate area Z4 of the special operation receiving section 3333. (Displayed in a vibrating manner) to make it possible to recognize that the specific operation target image S4 is in a state where the specific operation target image S4 can be moved by an operation by the player.

  That is, in the third operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. When it is moved to, the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display unit D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display unit D, and it is as if the effect on the movable body B is started. Has been realized.

  Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving portion 3333 and the physical object is moved in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects such movement of the physical object, and The control for moving the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the detected movement of the physical object is executable. Accordingly, the specific operation target image S4 is in the special operation receiving portion 3333 of the physical object from the time when the physical object is not moving to the coordinate position facing the movable body B and is in the middle of movement. The user moves in the display unit D so as to follow the movement in front view.

  More specifically, with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the fifth coordinate area Z5 to FIG. 124 (a). In the peripheral control board 1510, the specific operation target image S4 is moved in the display unit D so as to follow such movement of the physical object. However, if a physical object such as a finger is located at the position shown in FIG. 124A and an attempt is made to display a specific operation target image S4 in a display area facing the position, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed. A part thereof protrudes from the display unit D, and the whole cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, only a part that can be displayed on the display part D displays the specific operation target image S4, and the part that protrudes from the display part D has its existence. Is controlled so that a corresponding portion of the panel light-emitting unit E emits light so that is recognized. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the portion where the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the panel light emitting unit E Is controlled so as to increase the portion corresponding to the light emitting area.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to express a state where the specific operation target image S4 on the display unit D is about to jump out of the display unit D by the operation of the player, and the display unit D It is possible to realize more dynamic and highly operable operability which is not contained in a single unit, and to produce performance suitable for the operability.

  In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124A, a physical object such as a player's finger is located at a coordinate position facing the display unit D in the fifth coordinate area Z5. Despite being placed, the effect control is performed not only on the display unit D but also on a member (panel light emitting unit E) different from the display unit D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the plurality of members in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it is easy to recognize that an effect corresponding to the movement has appeared, thereby It is possible to suitably realize the performance that is suitable for the dynamic operability.

  When the physical object such as the player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124A in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the physical object is not displayed on the display unit D but on the game board 5 (Here, it is placed at a coordinate position facing the panel light-emitting unit E). However, also in this case, not all of the specific operation target image S4 is suddenly hidden and only the panel light emitting unit E emits light, but the specific operation is performed as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D. Control is performed such that the portion where the target image S4 is displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the portion corresponding to the light emitting area of the board surface light emitting unit E is increased. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated from the coordinate position facing the display unit D by a specific distance, an effect (here, light emission) is produced only on the panel light emitting unit E of the display unit D and the panel light emitting unit E. As a result, it is possible to express an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display unit D.

  Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 124 (b), the peripheral control board 1510 displays the position facing the physical object. Is controlled to emit light from both the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-described effect control performed between the display unit D and the panel light emitting unit E is also performed between the panel light emitting unit E and the movable body B. I'm trying to do it. More specifically, when the physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light emitting unit E) approaches a predetermined distance from the coordinate area facing the movable body B, the physical object Even though the object itself is in the coordinate area facing the panel light emitting unit E, the effect control is performed not only on the panel light emitting unit E but also on a member (movable body B) different from the panel light emitting unit E. I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing both the board light emitting unit E and the movable body B in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect corresponding to the movement (here, display It is easy to recognize that the specific operation target image S4) that has moved out of the part D is appearing (moving), and thereby it is possible to suitably realize the performance suitable for dynamic operability. .

  Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further up in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the specific operation target image S4 on the movable body B. It is determined that the operation as if moved to has been performed properly, and it is determined that the condition in the third operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the fifth coordinate area Z5 is terminated. In addition, a display that can recognize that the condition (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) in the third operation control mode is satisfied appears on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. The control for starting the effect is executed. The effect using the movable body B can be realized as, for example, an effect in which the movable body B emits light in a predetermined mode, an effect in which the movable body B operates in a predetermined mode, or the like. To be able to suggest the degree of expectation for the result.

  In the third operation control mode, when the physical object moves out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 while the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving section 3333 (the finger is moved from the special operation receiving section 3333). 123 (a), it is desirable to start over from the state shown in FIG. That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically acquires the position information of the physical object regularly regardless of the execution state of the effect, whereby the physical object moves within the fifth coordinate area Z5. Information indicating that the object has moved, information indicating that the object has moved out of the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

  Further, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow only the movement of the physical object in a specific direction component. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

  The fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. In addition, when there is no part capable of effect expression indicating that the specific operation target image S4 exists on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, the coordinate position is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. An effect expression that suggests that the specific operation target image S4 exists at the site may be performed.

  Further, in this example, the board surface light-emitting unit E capable of effect expression (light emission) is placed between the display unit D and the movable body B, but the board surface light-emitting unit E is not necessarily provided. Good. That is, in this case, the player operates after the specific operation target image S4 is not displayed on the display unit D until the physical object is moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B (or a nearby coordinate position). Means that the operation is continued while holding the image in which the specific operation target image S4 is moving in the head.

  In addition, the display unit D displays a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and determines in which position the specific operation target image S4 exists in accordance with the movement of the physical object. The effect display may be performed.

  Although each of the coordinate areas Z1 to Z5 is shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, they are actually invisible to the player.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2, and C on which the effect operation is performed in accordance with the result of the big hit determination are also positioned as the operation effect targets. When the player performs an operation on a coordinate area of the operation receiving unit 3333 that overlaps the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in a front view and detects this as a physical object, a staging operation according to the operation is performed. It can be controlled. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate mode (speed, moving amount) while selecting any one of the plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth operation control mode for movable body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 126 (a), when the fourth effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, a sixth coordinate area Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive effects. At this time, in order to enable the player to recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 is capable of accepting the effect for operating the movable body C, a specific display image is displayed on the display unit D, It is desirable that C emits light in the first mode (for example, emits light in a blinking mode) or vibrates.

  Then, during a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be able to receive the effect, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly, special If a finger or the like is required in the operation receiving portion 3333, the touch does not always have to be performed.) If this is performed and detected as a physical object, the effect can be accepted as shown in FIG. 126 (b). Is changed to a larger seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C, instead of the sixth coordinate area Z6. Here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. By moving the movable object C to a coordinate position facing the portion, an effect of moving the movable body C so as to follow the movement of the physical object is realized.

  Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 126B is reached, a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control to enable recognition of. In the example shown in FIG. 126B, the movable body C is caused to emit light in the second mode (for example, to emit light in the constant mode).

  However, from the player's point of view, it is not known what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, and after the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6, There is a concern that even if an attempt is made to move the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be performed properly. As a result, if a physical object such as a player's finger falls out of the seventh coordinate area Z7 despite the intention to perform an operation along the movable range CT of the movable body C (special operation receiving section) 126A), the player may start again from the state shown in FIG. 126A, contrary to the intention of the player, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126A and 126B, the seventh coordinate area Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as a control target. The sixth coordinate area Z6 is set in an enlarged range of at least the first distance over all directions in front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. I have to do that.

  According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, the direction deviates from the movable range CT of the movable body C. When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the effect is received (even though the state shown in FIG. 126A is not restarted). Since a phenomenon occurs, the operation can be performed by estimating the movable range CT of the movable body C through confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the movable body C is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions (first positions (FIG. 126 (b)) in the movable range CT set for the movable body C. 126 (c), the second position shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third position shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the fourth position (end position) shown in FIG. 127 (b)). Control to be executed. Then, on this, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is defined as a first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including a part opposed to the first position (original position), and a second drive coordinate area including a part opposed to the second position. Z7-2, a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a portion opposed to the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a portion opposed to the fourth position. By determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate area according to the determination. Control is executable.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) in the movable range CT is controlled by the control target. Is set as a range extending at least by the first distance from the sixth coordinate area Z6 in the left, right, and lower directions except the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends.

  According to such a configuration, a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)). Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (movement of less than the first distance), the physical object remains within the single first driving coordinate area Z7-1. The movable body C does not move, but continues to stay at the first position (original position) corresponding to the detected first drive coordinate area Z7-1 without moving. Become. That is, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player is being accepted for the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126A is not restarted). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends.

  On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object is moved. If the physical object is moved in the direction in which the movable range CT of the body C extends (movement of less than the first distance), the physical object only moves in the second distance shorter than the first distance, and the physical object shown in FIG. From the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. 126 to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126 (c). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 (see FIG. 126 ( From b)), it moves to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position within the movable range CT also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to the above, there is a range extending by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from any of the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is It is easy to stay within the single second driving coordinate area Z7-2, and the movable body C does not move and corresponds to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 where the physical object is detected. In the second position. That is, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player is being accepted for the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126A is not restarted). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends.

  Moreover, since the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 is set to be widened and set to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)). In this case, the criterion that is determined to be appropriate as an operation for moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C after a physical object such as a finger is detected after the detection of the physical object is relaxed. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving the physical object while estimating the movable range CT while not knowing what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. It will be possible to maintain the interest.

  Note that when the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Light may be emitted in a mode (for example, green) different from the light-emitting mode (for example, blue). At this time, when a physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C has finished moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (movable If the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) at the time when the body C starts to move toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is determined that the operation by the player has been properly received. Recognition can be performed from an early stage, and it is possible to suppress the irritability caused by the delay in the behavior of the movable body, which is inevitable for a quick operation by the player's finger or the like.

  Further, when the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control to move to the latest detection position is performed.

  Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126 (c)) is moved upward by the operation of the finger or the like by the player, and moves to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 ( When detected within a)), the movable body C corresponds to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. It moves to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position within the movable range CT is in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to the above, there is a range that extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

  That is, as described above, when a movable body that does not have an operation capable of instructing the operation direction unlike the display means is set as an operation target, it is necessary to know this without understanding what kind of movable range is provided. You have to move the physical object while guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, an effect is received from the movable range CT of the movable body C to the left and right ranges. As described above, by expanding the range, the criterion that is determined to be appropriate as an operation for moving the movable body C along the movable range CT is relaxed.

  However, when the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and then moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6. , The deviation from the movable range CT tends to increase. Therefore, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-1 are arranged in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It is assumed that the operation has such a range that extends over a longer distance than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, so that the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 increases and the deviation from the movable area CT gradually increases. This can be accepted as an appropriate rendering operation. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while estimating the movable range CT provided in the movable body C while not knowing the movable range CT. As a result, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest of the game. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that is not opposed to the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

  When the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C is located at the first position and the second position May be caused to emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red) different from any of the light emission modes (for example, green) at the time of being positioned. Further, when a physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C has finished moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (movable body C). The light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green) at the time when starts moving toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3).

  For the same reason, the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is furthermore leftward and rightward than the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It has a range that extends over long distances. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward by the operation of the player's finger or the like, and the fourth drive coordinate area Z7- 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It does not necessarily move to the position (FIG. 127 (b)). In addition, when the physical object in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the operation of the finger or the like by the player and detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4, it is movable. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

  That is, the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the big hit determination. The effect has been determined, and among the determined effects, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. When the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the operation of the player's finger or the like, the movable body C is moved to the fourth position (FIG. 127 ( b)) The degree of expectation (specific results must be obtained) depending on whether an effect that moves up to the fourth position or an effect that returns to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) without moving to the fourth position appears. May be deterministically indicated).

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the physical object in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the operation of the finger or the like by the player and detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. In this case, it is determined that the condition in the fourth operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. When it is determined that the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the movable body C is set in a region where the effect can be received. Is moved to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the movable body C is not set in the area where the effect can be received. Control to move C to the first position is performed.

  However, at this time, even when the movable body C is determined to be movable to the fourth position, the movement of the movable body C temporarily moving downward (movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127) (B)), or even if it is determined that the movable body C cannot be moved to the fourth position, the movable body C once moves upward. It is desirable to show a moving movement (an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b))) in order to improve the game entertainment.

  When the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C is located at the first position and the second position In a light emitting mode (for example, green) or a light emitting mode (for example, rainbow color) different from the light emitting mode (for example, red) when being located in the third position. However, unlike the case of the first to third positions, the timing may be not the timing when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but the timing later than the timing (the movable body C). It is desirable to make it appear after the timing when the movement from the movement to the fourth position can be definitely determined). Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, It is desirable to end the light emission after a later timing (a timing at which it is possible to definitely determine that the movable body C does not move from the movement to the fourth position).

  After moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a lapse of a predetermined time. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode ends.

  By the way, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body is movable from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit. C can be moved freely. For example, when the movable object C is moved to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 side, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the first driving. Based on the physical object being detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) to the first position (FIG. 126 (b)). . When the movable object C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127A) and then the physical object is operated to return to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the second driving. Based on the physical object being detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)). It will be.

  According to such a configuration, as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)), the driving mode of moving the movable body C up and down in small increments depends on the player's preference. Can be played according to the player's preference, so that it is possible to manipulate the "pause" until the final result appears in the production, improving the entertainment interest of the game Is expected. After the detection of the physical object in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the effect acceptance for the fourth operation control mode is terminated, so that the movable body C cannot be manipulated freely.

  It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is provided from when the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) is set (controlled) to accept the effect until a predetermined period elapses (specific timing comes). In the case where the physical object is not properly detected, the effect reception for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 may be caused, or the movable body C may be moved without such behavior. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to be located at a plurality of predetermined positions (first positions (original positions) shown in FIG. 126 (b)).

  Further, in the fourth operation control mode according to this description example, regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit, the movable range CT moves from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)). The movable body C can be freely moved during the interval. Instead, the movable body C can be moved within a range from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) of the movable range CT. The degree of expectation of the suggested big hit may be increased as the position is higher. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different jackpot expectation degrees based on the result of the jackpot determination, and positions determined by the selected effect pattern (first position to fourth position). ), The movable body C is controlled to be operable. At this time, when the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or moves from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. In some cases, an effect (moving back and forth) of whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position may appear.

  Further, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when the images S1 to S4 are to be able to accept the effect, it is necessary to generate the coordinate areas Z1 to 4 larger than the images S1 to S4 in front view. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, a sixth coordinate area Z6 smaller than the movable body C in front view is generated when the movable body C can receive an effect. That is, since a movable body often includes a part having a relatively large movement amount and a part having a relatively small movement amount, for example, a part having a relatively small movement amount is produced. It is desirable to remove the game from the reception target in order to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. On the other hand, in the display unit, if an attempt is made to set the coordinate area in accordance with the size of the image to be able to accept the effect, a large image is required to appropriately maintain operability. Since there is a concern that the balance with the display image may be deteriorated, it is desirable to independently set the size of the image for which the effect can be accepted, separately from the setting range of the coordinate area.

  However, when performing control to detect movement of a physical object in a specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and to produce an effect corresponding thereto. Is, for example, the physical object detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 is moved and the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-3 does not pass through the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 or the third driving coordinate area Z7-3. It is also assumed that a situation occurs in which the detection is suddenly performed in Z7-4. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is to be detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the left hand is to be detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, it should not be determined that the physical object has not moved, and an effect (such as movement of the movable body C) corresponding to the movement should not be executed.

  In this regard, the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while executing the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing (every 33.3 ms). In the timer processing, information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and information from the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b are acquired, and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. Then, in the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing, a specific coordinate area is analyzed by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) pieces of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed. (For example, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) determine whether the physical object is moving properly, and, based on the determination result, control data for the actuator. Set Then, in the interrupt processing every 1 ms, the control for driving the movable body C is performed based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable object C is moved from the physical object to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. The movement of the physical object follows the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 when viewed from the front in the middle of the movement that has not finished moving. Note that the coordinate information is stored in chronological order in which the coordinate positions were acquired.

  For example, even when a physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 after a physical object is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. At a timing before the detection of the physical object in the coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, If there is no coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and control is performed so that the movable body C is not operated.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. Is performed when the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. 4 are detected in chronological order. For example, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, only the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is detected. The movable body C does not move. Thus, only when an appropriate operation is performed on the special operation receiving portion 3333, an appropriate effect can be displayed.

  In the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C in accordance with whether a physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4, but the present invention is not limited to this. The control for moving the movable body C is performed according to whether the movement of the physical object having the vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is detected within the movable range CT of the movable body C. It may be. That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in chronological order.

  The setting control of the coordinate area, the detection of the movement of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C used in the fourth operation control mode are, for example, described in the third operation control mode described above. May be applied to the image S4.

  Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (effect reception) of the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not been completed and is still continued. During this process, control is performed to move the rendering target (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the moving direction and the moving amount of the physical object already detected. In such a configuration, it is possible to create a production effect as if the player himself created the production, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the effect reception for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed using the coordinates set at that time. Limited to the area. However, the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 itself is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position and the movement of the physical object based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit steady processing (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, any of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed. Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating a control example of the physical object detection information analysis processing executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing.

  That is, the peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not an operation effect reception period that occurs based on the satisfaction of a specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination (step S3301). As a result, when the operation is in the operation effect reception period, as described above, based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area in which the effect can be received. In addition to analyzing whether the physical object is present or not, if the physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received, the movement mode and the size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the results of the analysis for the effects, control (re-set or end) of the coordinate area in which the effects can be accepted, control for causing a change in the effects of the effects such as display images and movable bodies, Is performed to maintain the effect state (step S3303). As a result of performing the process of step S3302, even if a physical object is not detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received, the control (resetting, resetting, In some cases, control may be performed to return an effect target such as a display image or a movable body to the original position (for example, to control the movable body C to move to the first position shown in FIG. 126A).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S3301, if it is determined that the coordinate area in which the effect can be received for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not in the operation effect receiving period in which the effect is set, the analysis contents for the effect are determined. The analysis is performed with contents different from those described above (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided so as to face the entire game board 5. Therefore, an act of placing a magnet at a coordinate position facing various winning ports in the special operation receiving portion 3333 or a wire or the like from a gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192 to illegally facilitate winning of a game ball. It is conceivable that an act of breaking the speaker that emits an alarm sound at the time of intrusion and destroying the speaker is performed.

  Therefore, in the process of step S3312, an analysis is made as to whether there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. Like that. For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and if a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the movement mode and the size of the physical object are determined. Is analyzed to see if it matches the movement mode, size, and the like that can appear when cheating is taking place. If it is determined that there is a possibility that fraud has been committed as a result of such fraud countermeasure analysis, an external output indicating that fraud has been committed is executed or an alarm sound or warning light is emitted. Control is performed so that an improper action such as issuing an improper action is performed (step S3313). If it is not determined that there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed, control is performed so that such improper action is not performed (step S3313). ).

  As such an analysis procedure for countermeasures against fraud (step S3312), for example, first, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as an analysis reference position ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range including the analysis reference position and extending by a predetermined distance from the analysis reference position is set, and the detected physical object is kept within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) (Whether the physical object hardly moves). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some wrongdoing has been performed in the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method of determining that there is a certain value. At this time, if the size of the physical object is such that it is not possible to perform a fraud (such as having a very thin shape), the fraud is performed even if such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility. Thus, it is possible to prevent false notification from being erroneously made when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

  According to such a configuration, in the operation effect reception period, even if all actions have been performed, the action is not determined to be improper, and the analysis is performed only as the effect and the result of the analysis is performed. In the case where it is not during the operation effect reception period while the effect control according to the above is performed, it is determined that any action is to be analyzed for fraudulent acts, and control for countermeasures against fraud according to the result of the analysis can be performed. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and this event is detected, depending on the production situation, It can be considered as a directing action and cause a specific effect change, or it can be deemed as a fraudulent action and reported incorrectly. In this way, by using one piece of detection information for a plurality of different purposes (here, the purpose of production and countermeasures against fraud) in accordance with the situation of the game or the production, the number of purposes can be increased with less detection information. Can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

  In this example, when there is no operation effect reception period that occurs based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination, the effect change is not caused by the operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333. However, even when the operation is not in the operation effect reception period (always), the display image is changed by the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333, or the movable body emits light and moves. Is also good. However, in this case, when it is not during the operation effect acceptance period, in addition to determining all acts as targets for analyzing fraudulent acts, it is also judged as targets for analyzing directing acts, and performing control according to the results of these judgments, respectively. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving section 3333, both the effect change and the fraud notification can appear.

  In addition, while monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that a specific rendering condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. If the operation effect acceptance period has occurred based on this, the monitoring process is performed to determine whether or not the physical object continues to stay in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) without terminating the analysis processing for countermeasures against fraud. It is desirable to continue the operation after the operation effect acceptance period has occurred. That is, in this case, during the operation effect acceptance period, in addition to performing the effect analysis process and performing control in accordance with the result, whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) Monitoring is continued, and depending on the result of the monitoring, fraudulent notification is performed.

  By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first effect period in which the effect reception for the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body) is permitted, the operating means ( For example, control may be performed on the operation button 410) to further generate a second effect period in which an effect reception relating to a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) is permitted.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), at the timing t1, the special operation receiving unit 3333 allows the effect reception (panel operation reception) for the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body). It is assumed that the first production period has occurred. In the first effect period, the special operation receiving unit 3333 starts moving the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 until the timing t2 at which the first reception time elapses from the occurrence of the period. Control for operating the movable body in a mode according to at least the moving direction and the moving amount of the physical object already detected (analyzed) while the detection (analysis) relating to the movement is not completed and is still continued. (For example, control for moving a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of the physical object) can be executed.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the specific rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the first rendering period is generated and the period is continued without being ended. In addition, a second effect in which an effect reception (button operation reception) relating to a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) is permitted in an operation unit (for example, operation button 410) different from special operation receiving unit 3333. It is possible to execute control for setting an effect pattern, a notice effect, and the like that are determined to generate a period.

  That is, in this case, when the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, an effect reception (button operation reception) for the second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) is permitted by the operation button 410. Control to generate a second effect period to be performed. Then, when an operation on the operation button 410 is received before the timing t12 at which the second reception time has elapsed from the occurrence of the second effect period, the second effect period ends at that time. Let it. Alternatively, if the operation on the operation button 410 has not been received until the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period ends when the timing t12 arrives.

  According to such a configuration, the effect reception relating to the first effect event is permitted in the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333), and the effect reception relating to the second effect event. And the second effect period permitted by the second operation portion (here, the operation button 410) simultaneously occurs (timing t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129 (a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period that occurs after the first effect period ends earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, even if the first operation portion is being operated, the operation is interrupted and the second operation portion is operated. Therefore, it is required that the first operation part and the second operation part are simultaneously operated in different modes, and it is possible to provide unprecedented effect operability and suppress a decrease in gaming interest. Will be as expected.

  In order to suitably realize such dramatic operability, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the effect reception for the second effect event (the effect of the effect that is terminated after a relatively short time elapses). In regard to “acceptance”, an effect is produced when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (finite amount of operation) has been performed on the second operation portion (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control for generating a second effect event (for example, an effect operation for changing a display image) without an operation thereafter. For example, when one pressing operation is detected on the operation button 410, the second effect period ends before the timing t12 arrives, and after that, no operation is required, and the effect changes to the display image. This corresponds to the control that causes

  On the other hand, with regard to the effect reception relating to the first effect event (the effect reception that is terminated after a relatively long time elapses), the effect reception is performed at least until the second effect period ends and further thereafter. Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operation on the one operation part, the reception of the effect on the first effect event is continued without ending, and each time the operation on the first operation part is performed during the continuation, It is desirable to perform control to reflect the effect change according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without terminating the effect reception according to the movement mode (movement amount or the like) of the physical object. Each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms), control that repeatedly executes the process of moving the movable body to the analyzed latest coordinate position corresponds to this.

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation on the first operation part is interrupted when the second production period occurs after the delay of the first production part, the operation opportunity for the first operation part is lost. Since it is possible to appropriately guarantee that the game is not interrupted, a decrease in gaming interest due to the interruption is suppressed. Further, after the operation on the first operation part is interrupted, the second performance period can be ended at a relatively early stage by operating the second operation part, and thereafter, the operation on the second operation part is performed. Since the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation occurs without the need for the operation, the operation on the first operation part can be restarted at a relatively early stage, This also suitably secures an operation opportunity for one operation part.

  In this case, in a situation where the operation on the first operation part is restarted, the effect change (second effect event) according to the operation on the second operation part is just started, and the first operation It is possible to generate a special effect situation such that the second effect event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, the effect that the effect of changing the size of the specific display image occurs when an operation is performed on the second operation part, and the specific display image is moved to the specific position when the operation is performed on the first operation part Influence (change) on the mode of the production target of the second production event, such as "Move a production event to move", is set as the first production event. In a special production situation, the second production event can be enjoyed while the mode of the production target of the second production event is changed by operating the first operation part. High operability and performance suitable for this are realized.

  Here, as an example of affecting (changing) the mode of the production target of the second production event when performing an operation on the first operation part, for example, production of the second production event Changing at least one of a moving amount, a moving direction, a moving speed, a light emission mode (a color, a traveling direction, a light amount, and the like), a size, and a shape of an object (a display image, a movable body, and the like) are mentioned. However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and any object can be used as long as it can have some effect on the production target (display image, sound production, movable body, etc.) of the second production event. That is, while the target of the operation effect on the first operation part and the object of the operation effect on the second operation part are the same effect target, the effect mode (for example, the first operation part In the operation effect for the second operation part, the size is changed, and in the operation effect for the second operation part, the display position is changed). In addition, the first effect period does not necessarily have to be set as a finite time, and the operation for the first operation part is received even after the second effect period has ended. What is necessary is just to be able to perform an operation on the first operation part when an event has occurred.

  In addition, during a period in which both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously, of the effect reception relating to the first effect event and the effect reception relating to the second effect event, The display for prompting the operation instruction or the display for indicating the maximum remaining time as the second production period is preferably performed only for the reception of the production, so that the interruption of the operation on the first operation portion is suitably promoted. Desirable above.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, in order to appropriately realize such a relationship of the effects, even though the control for generating the second effect period is performed later than the first effect period, The control is performed so that the first effect period is not generated after the second effect period.

  Further, in the above description example, both the first effect period and the second effect period occur at the same time. However, if the second effect period occurs later than the first effect period, the first effect period is set. You may make it temporarily stop and generate | occur | produce a 1st effect period again when the 2nd effect period ends. Even in this case, it is not possible to realize the above-described operability and performance that influences the mode of the performance target of the second performance event when performing an operation on the first operation portion. It is possible.

  Further, in the above description example, each time an operation is performed on the first operation part, the control for reflecting the effect change according to the operation is performed. However, a plurality of operations are performed on the first operation part. When there is a control, control for reflecting the effect change according to the operation may be performed.

  In the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the following various operation reception effects can be realized by appropriately using the control method according to each of the above-described description examples.

[Direction example 1 using special operation receiving portion 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130A, the effect pattern of the effect example 1 (the variation pattern of the effect example 1) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect of the effect example 1 is displayed on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative pattern SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, during the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears, the coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 is set to accept the effect. An operation effect period for (control) is generated.

  Here, at least the effect patterns of effect example 1 are effect pattern A1 of effect example 1 that is determined to operate movable body A1, and effect example 1 that is determined to operate movable body A2. Effect pattern A2. However, while the movable body A1 is provided on the front side of the game board 5 so as to be visible from the player side, the movable body A2 is difficult to be visually recognized from the player side behind the game board 5. And is provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if any of the effect patterns A1 and A2 are performed as the effect patterns of the effect example 1, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. , A suggestion image HG1 indicating that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed. Similarly, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light to indicate that a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

  Then, when such a slide operation is properly received while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the player to follow the slide operation as shown in FIG. 130 (b). Control is performed to start moving the movable body A1 to the left. Note that, even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves as shown in FIG. After moving the body A1 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A1 is permitted. In this situation, a display appears on the display unit D indicating that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to the specific rendering position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is high. It is desirable to produce an effect such as a change in the aspect or shape.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 uses FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A1 is allowed so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears to indicate that the movable body A1 failed to move to the specific rendering position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is low, and the light emission of the movable body A1 is terminated. Will be controlled to be performed.

  On the other hand, if the player's slide operation is properly received while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (c). Control is performed so that the movement of the movable body A2 to the left is started in a manner to follow. Note that, even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves as shown in FIG. 131 (c) so as to follow the slide operation by the player. After moving the body A2 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which effect acceptance for the movable body A2 is permitted. In this situation, a display appears on the display unit D indicating that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to the specific rendering position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is extremely high. It is desirable that an effect such as a change in the mode or shape of light emission be performed.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 uses FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A2 is permitted so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears to indicate that the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is low due to the failure to move the movable body A2 to the specific rendering position, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Is terminated.

  According to such an effect example 1, when the player performs a slide operation in the situation shown in FIG. 130A that makes it appear as if the movable body A1 operates, the movable body A1 is operated. Instead, since the movable body A2, which has been difficult to visually recognize, suddenly appears and moves, such a movable production with a surprise as if the production target has been replaced prevents a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. Can be done.

  Although illustration is omitted, according to such a production example 1, during the period from when the situation in FIG. 130 (a) appears to when the situation in FIG. 130 (c) appears, the slide operation by the player is performed. Although the movable body A2 has begun to move, it is still at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize (behind the game board 5), and when viewed from the player side, there is a situation where it seems as if no effect change has occurred. Will be able to appear. That is, in this case, after the player has been discouraged that no effect change has occurred even though the slide operation by the player has been performed properly, the movable body A2 is moved forward of the display unit D. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest by such a movable effect having a surprise.

  Further, in the above-described effect example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and (c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to a position overlapping with the decorative symbol SZ in the fluctuating state. Then, the player is encouraged to shift his or her gaze from the decorative pattern SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, and it is possible to make it difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In addition, in the above-described configuration, the manner in which the decorative pattern SZ overlaps with the case where the movable body A1 appears and the case where the movable body A2 appears is different, so that the decorative pattern SZ is moved to the movable bodies A1 and A2. Even if the player fails to shift the gaze, it is possible to predict which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by confirming the size and position of the portion where the decorative pattern SZ has been difficult to visually recognize. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the user misses which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned production example 1, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is arranged on the back side of the game board 5; Both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed on the rear side of the game board 5, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed on the rear side of the game board 5.

  Here, in the case where both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are provided on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is provided on the front side so that the movable body A2 is difficult to visually recognize. Even when A1 moves, it is desirable that the movable base portion (the portion that does not move) and the like continue to be located at the front side of the movable body A2, thereby maintaining the visibility of the movable body A2.

  On the other hand, in the case where both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged behind the game board 5, it is possible to give a pleasure as to which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation of the player. Become like In this case, the portion of the game board 5 located on the front side of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is caused to emit light, and the operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion is encouraged. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-mentioned effect example 1, the movable direction (left direction) of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left direction and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, a leftward game is prompted by an operation instruction (suggestion image HG1) indicating the left direction. Although the slide operation is performed by the player, the movable body A2 moves upward, and such a movable effect with surprises can more appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest. Alternatively, even when the operation on the movable body A1 whose movable direction is set to the left direction is promoted, an operation instruction indicating the upward direction is made to appear, so that the sliding operation by the player in the upward direction is performed. When this operation is performed, the movable body A2, which has been difficult to visually recognize, may move upward and appear.

  Further, in the above-described effect example 1, when the movable body A2 appears due to an operation by the player, the movable body A1 is not operated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by the operation of the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if the movable bodies A1 and A2 are moved by a predetermined distance and then only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is more appropriately suppressed by the movable effect with the surprise. Will be able to gain. Alternatively, when the movable body A2 is moved by the operation of the player, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, after the movable body A1 moves by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player. The lowering of the game entertainment can be more appropriately suppressed by a certain movable effect. However, when the operation target of the player is switched between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is allowed to stay at a predetermined location for a predetermined time (time required until the movable body A2 moves to the predetermined location). It is desirable to perform an effect.

  Further, in the above-described effect example 1, while the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c)), the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 emit light, respectively. In such a situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily need to emit light. That is, in this case, the timing at which the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the movable body A1, or the movable body A2 starts moving forward of the display unit D and returns to the original position. The control for terminating the light emission of the movable body A1 is performed at timing when the visual recognition becomes easier than at a certain time (timing when the movable body A1 is moved to a predetermined position).

  In addition, in the above-described effect example 1 and other examples, the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view, but a panel light emitting unit E is disposed instead of the movable body A1. You may do so. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a)), the panel light emitting unit E located on the front side of the movable body A2 emits light, so that the movable body in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body A2. The user is prompted to operate the coordinate area (special operation receiving section 3333) facing A2.

  Further, in the display unit D according to the above-described effect example 1, in each of the situations shown in FIGS. The status (the initial status in which none of the movable bodies are operating) is shown. However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed according to the location of the movable bodies A1 and A2 so that the moving state of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized simply by looking at the suggestion image HG1. It may be.

[Direction example 2 using special operation receiving section 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132A, the effect pattern of the effect example 2 (the variation pattern of the effect example 2) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect of the effect example 2 is displayed on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decoration pattern SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, during the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears, the coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable body A1 is set to accept the effect (control). ) To generate an operation effect period.

  Here, at least the effect pattern of the effect example 2 is determined so as to operate the movable body A1 and the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 and the movable body A1 and the movable body B are respectively operated. And the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 described above. Then, in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the above-mentioned effect example 1, FIGS. 130 (a) and (b) and FIG. 131 (a) (or FIG. 131 (b)) In the mode shown in (1), an opportunity to receive an operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the opportunity to receive the operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided, the opportunity to receive the operation effect on the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 2, in the display unit D, a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. , A suggestion image HG1 indicating that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed. Similarly, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light to indicate that a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

  However, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, when an operation to a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is received (when a physical object is detected), a specific effect event is performed on the movable body A1. 132, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D is not displayed, and control for interrupting the effect reception in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1 is performed. At this time, the decorative pattern SZ on the display unit D is desirably displayed in a mode that is visible but difficult to view (eg, translucent display), and the light emitting state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to make it.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the display unit D in which the suggestion image HG1 is hidden, an operation on an operation means (such as the operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. A prompting operation instruction image SG is displayed, and an operation acceptance period for a specific effect using the other operation means (such as the operation button 410) is generated. Then, when an operation on another operation means (such as the operation button 410) is received during the operation reception period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG on the display unit D is not displayed as shown in FIG. At the same time, control is performed such that a movable body B that is different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the effect target is operated. In the effect example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display unit D for a predetermined time.

  Then, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the movable body B operates in this way, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), in the display unit D, the movable area B moves in a coordinate area (not shown) opposed to the movable body A1. A suggestion image HG2 indicating that an operation of sliding the body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed, and a coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 that faces the movable body A1. Is again generated (operation control period) for setting (controlling) the effect reception to be possible. At this time, the opportunity of the effect operation of the movable body A1 is given again. However, after the situation shown in FIG. 132 (a) appears, the movable body A1 operates without operating the movable body B. It is desirable to set the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 in which the movable body A1 operates after the movable body B operates, so that the degree of expectation is higher than the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 described above. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display mode of the suggestion image HG2 is made different from the suggestion image HG1 shown in FIG. It is desirable to make the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 different from the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. .

  In the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIGS. 130 (b) and 131 ( a) (or an opportunity to receive an operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided in the mode shown in FIG. 131 (b), so that the movable body A1 moves. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c) (or FIG. 131 (b)) as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the effect example 1 described above. In the mode shown in ()), an opportunity to receive an operation effect on the movable body A1 may be provided, and an effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

  In particular, in the effect pattern AB of this effect example 2, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), a suggestion image HG2 suggesting that the effect pattern is a highly expected effect pattern appears, or the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is changed. Since it is made to be different, this is also a movable effect that appears when an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, left direction) is performed in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is preferably performed in a special execution mode different from the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2.

  According to the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the first effect opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is first given (in this situation, the second operation is performed). Despite the fact that the second production opportunity for the part (for example, the operation button 410) is not given), when the first operation part is operated and the effect is received, the first operation part is different from the first operation part. A second effect opportunity for the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is provided, and the first effect opportunity is temporarily lost. Then, when the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and the effect is received in a situation where the first effect opportunity is once lost, the second effect event ( Here, the operation of the movable body B) occurs. In other words, in this case, it is possible to produce a performance effect as to whether or not the second performance opportunity for the second operation portion is given when the performance is received for the first operation portion. The novel operability using the operation part of the present invention is provided.

  In order to preferably realize such novel operability using a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable to always provide the second operation part in a mode that is difficult to physically operate. Then, when it is determined that the second effect opportunity is to be given to the second operation part, it is difficult to physically operate the second operation part based on the fact that the effect has been received for the first operation part. It is desirable to control from the mode to the mode that is easy to operate, and to allow the effect reception for the second operation part when in the mode that is easy to operate. Here, the “physical hard-to-operate mode” refers to, for example, a mode in which the second operation site (for example, the operation button 410) is covered by another member and the operation is difficult, or the second operation site. Is a state in which it is located in a state where it has already been operated, and “control from a state that is difficult to physically operate to a state that is easy to operate” means, for example, that the second operation part itself is Control to operate to a position that is not covered by another member, control to operate another member that covers the second operation part to a position that does not cover the second operation part, and control to operate the second operation part This can be realized as control for operating to a position different from the state at the time of the operation. Further, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation part from the state in which it is difficult to physically operate the state to the state in which the second operation part is easy to operate may not necessarily be when the effect is received for the first operation part. May be when a specific time elapses after the effect pattern is executed. In any case, when an effect is received for the first operation part, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity of the second operation part is operated to give the second operation opportunity to the second operation part. This is desirable in order to indicate that the operation target has been changed from the first operation part to the second operation part, and that the change increases the expectation.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the first effect opportunity using the first operation portion (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is provided, the first operation portion is operated. A second production opportunity is provided based on the reception of the production. However, after a predetermined time elapses after the first effect opportunity using the first operation portion (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is provided (or after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the first operation is performed. A second effect opportunity may be given to a second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410) different from the first operation portion, and the first effect opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation portion until the predetermined time elapses, but the first effect event is terminated based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (If the production target is a movable body, control is performed to return the movable body to the original position.) Alternatively, a first effect opportunity using the first operation part is not given, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the suggestion image HG1, a second operation part different from the first operation part (for example, A second effect opportunity for the operation button 410) may be given. That is, in this case, even if the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the effect is not received by the operation on the first operation portion.

In the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, and then the suggestion image HG1 is hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. May be further displayed. According to such a configuration, the manner in which the suggestion image HG1 changes to the suggestion image HG2 having a higher degree of expectation can be described, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. However, at this time, when the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state where the effect is not received for the first operation part, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, from a color display to a monochrome display, to a translucent display, or the like). Or a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize). Still further, a timekeeping image indicating the remaining display time of the suggestion image HG1 (remaining time during which the effect is received for the first operation portion) is also displayed, and the effect is not received for the first operation portion. In the state, the state in which the remaining time does not decrease is indicated by the timing image, so that the player can recognize that the remaining period in which the effect reception for the first operation part is performed does not decrease. As a result, a game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be enjoyed with ease.
In this case, even though the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed, it appears that the remaining time for effect reception is reduced by a predetermined amount, and then the remaining time does not decrease. Can be provided by the above-mentioned timekeeping image, so that a more interesting effect can be provided.

  In addition, in the effect pattern AB of the above-described effect example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1, based on the fact that the effect is received for the first operation part, the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed. A period is generated, and the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed during the predetermined period (for example, the display mode is changed from color display to black and white display, or a display mode that is relatively invisible such as translucent is displayed), and timekeeping is performed. The state in which the remaining time does not decrease depending on the image (for example, the display meter does not decrease and enters a stationary state) may be shown. At this time, it is desirable to change the display mode of an image different from the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D. In this case, when a predetermined period ends after the second effect opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode having a higher degree of expectation, and the effect reception for the first operation portion is performed again. You may do so.

  Further, in the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1 that prompts the operation of setting the movable body A1 as a production target (or in a state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. Although the movable body B does not have to be operated by the operation of the player, for example, based on the fact that a special result is obtained in the determination as to whether a predetermined operation condition is satisfied or not. It may be a non-operating movable body that operates. When such a non-operating movable body is adopted, even if it is determined that the non-operating movable body is to be operated (a special result is obtained), no operation instruction is given to the non-operating movable body, and an operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination as to whether or not the predetermined operation condition for the non-operable movable body is satisfied is appropriately generated regardless of the execution state of the effect pattern, other effect objects (movable body and display image) And the like, the decision to operate the non-operable movable body can be made secretly while the suggestion image HG1 is being displayed, so that an operation instruction relating to another effect object appears and the operation is accepted. Among them, it is possible to have the possibility that non-operating movable body unrelated to this suddenly operates or the possibility that special movable body and other production targets operate simultaneously at the same time. It can be expected that such unexpected operation effects will enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  When the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the target operation site (a specific coordinate area in the special operation receiving unit 3333, an operation button 410, or the like). ) Alone, the effect can also be received in the coordinate area (special operation receiving unit 3333) facing the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the portion where the operation instruction image SG appears. Is also good. According to such a configuration, even when the operation part cannot be recognized, it is only necessary to operate the specific images (the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image S) appearing in the display unit D. A similar effect can be generated, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, while the detection of the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has been started and has not been completed yet, at least the physical object that has already been detected has been detected. Although control for moving an effect target (display image or movable body) can be executed in a manner according to the moving direction and the amount of movement, the speed of movement of the physical object is detected in performing the control for moving the effect target. The movement speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving portion 3333, the effect is effected in a coordinate area of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the portion to be operated. Although the reception is performed, it is not always necessary to be in the coordinate area facing the part to be operated, and the effect reception may be performed in a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Good.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, a change in light caused by an operation (a physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333 is detected by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35, and this is detected by the peripheral control board 1510. The analysis is used to determine the operation mode (such as movement information of a physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333. For example, the special operation receiving unit 3333 is operated using a touch panel installed on the glass plate 192. The operation mode of the unit 3333 (in this case, the mode of the touch operation on the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 is adversely affected.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, assuming that the main control program has shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes Under the condition that the detection signal from the one opening port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball in the first starting port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball in the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the big hit control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped indicates a mode that indicates either “8R probable big hit A” or “8R normal big hit”, the special winning opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed eight times after opening the game for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the special winning opening 2005. Control to 8R big hit game state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "16R probable big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "8R probability change big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ), The opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005 is controlled to an 8R big hit game state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled twice to control the 2R big hit game state.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time reduction control is executed, the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than in the left-handed. As described above, left-handing is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if the jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of up to eight rounds. Only a state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of the winning type) ), A big hit game state of 16 rounds open for a long time (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained), such as the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when a big hit is won Therefore, when the shift control is performed to the right-handed state, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than in the left-handed state.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a variation counter described later, and the like are performed.

  In the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of the jackpot 2005 as described above, as shown in FIG. 140, a high probability is determined in accordance with the winning type of the jackpot that has triggered the jackpot game. Each set processing of the flag and the time reduction flag is executed.

  The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in a jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 139 described later. The first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 or a second special symbol stop processing (not shown) to be described later, which is set when the big hit game state based on the probable big hit and the 8R probable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, Reset with.

  The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving control is being executed (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability-time-saving state), and as shown in FIG. 140, the time-saving control (high-probability time-saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, will be set when the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R certain big hit A, 16R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit B) ends. Or it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a big hit after the low probability time saving state occurs, a first special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 144 described later. Or it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The change number counter is a counter that indicates the number of changes in the special symbol since the change number counter was reset, and is used in a first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) illustrated in FIG. 142 described below. It is updated (for example, counted up) when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit B) Is reset when starting the big hitting game state based on.

  If the big hit execution flag has not been set (NO in step S5235), then as a process in step S5236, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hitting game state is being controlled is set. Is determined. Then, as a result, if the small hitting execution flag is set, a small hitting control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hitting game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the special winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving Each set process such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, if the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), the second special designed A second special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the lottery for the second special symbol in the held state is not lost (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol is not played. Irrespective of the hold status of the lottery, only the random determination for the second big hit determination random number is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player only maintains the driving of the game ball to the right side of the center role 2500 (right-handed). Only the lottery (determination process) for the two big hit determination random numbers can be continuously performed without interruption.

  It should be noted that the special figure game (symbol variation) using the second special figure (second special design) is limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (first special design). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which a game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a start prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning has occurred, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage processing (step S5232).

  Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 135. First, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes each random number (the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the reach determination, the random number for the jackpot symbol, the random number for the variation display pattern) ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not the value is “4” which is the (upper limit) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (the determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. The following steps S5243 to S5245 will be performed in order to set the state.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Then, the first special figure pre-reading process for executing the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the processing is ended (step S5245). As will be described later, the first look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In the first special figure look-ahead processing, information necessary for the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect, the contents of the effect, and the like (information on a hit for a look-ahead determination, a pattern type for a look-ahead determination, etc.). Information, information on a variable pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.), and store it in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information of a stage before it is finally determined, such as a SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group, and a small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5242 that the number of reserved special first symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S5234).

  Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 136. First, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes each random number (the second big hit determination random number, the second reach determination random number, the second big hit symbol) on the second special symbol side as the process of step S5251. (Random number, random number for second variation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is set to the maximum value based on the counter value. Is determined (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. The following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed in order to set the state.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  Then, the second special figure pre-reading process for executing the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the processing is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the prefetch effect on the second special figure side is an effect that suggests the determination result of the second special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure pre-reading process, information (hit information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is performed and the effect content on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated. The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information of a stage before it is finally determined, such as a SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group, and a small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing the one-shot effect described below may be performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held.

  When the reserved number of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the reserved number of the first special symbol in the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). (First reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) instructs the number of reserved second special symbols. Command (second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read big hit determination random number is performed. 1st special symbol normal process in which is performed (step S5280)

  2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which a process of determining a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on a result of the determination process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )

  3. The variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the effect corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device (game board effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode of the effect display to be performed (step S5282).

  4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The first special symbol display mode 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the determination process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control mode is stopped. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5301. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a fluctuating display of the first special symbol in a suspended state, the process is next executed as a process of step S5302 to be stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first random number for determining the big hit, the first random number for determining the reach, the random number for the first big hit symbol, and the random number for the first variable display pattern) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in, first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (for example, the first big hit determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first big hit symbol random number, and the first variable display pattern random number). First-Out).

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored sequentially from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released sequentially from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol storage area a to second special symbol storage area d). The random numbers extracted in this manner are sequentially stored from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process, which is a process of determining the hit of the big hit, is performed based on the read random number for the first big hit determination. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S5311), the high probability state shown in FIG. The big hit determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S5311), the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is selected (step S5313). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability for each type of special random numbers (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number). (Low-probability non-short-time state, low-probability time-short state), a large-hit judgment table used in the low-probability state, and a high-speed game state used in the high-probability state (high-probability non-short-time state, high-probability time-short state). A big hit determination table at the time of probability. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the type of first big hit determination random number coincides with the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability at low probability; approximately) "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability to be referred to, 204 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and 65332 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating that (the big hit probability at the time of low probability; approximately “1/321”).

  Also, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The first big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the outlier determination values (big hit probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability which is referred to be compared with the second big hit determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and 63496 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match the out-of-office determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The random numbers for the second big hit determination are associated with each other (big hit probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). It should be noted that the big hit determination table set for the big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first big hit determination random number and the big hit determination table set for the big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second big hit determination random number. The jackpot determination values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of the jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination tables at the time of the low probability and the large hit determination table at the time of the high probability may be different (or both may be different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that the big hit is determined (step S5315). ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the big hit has been lost, the read big hit determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won based on the selected big hit determination table. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process process) of the present example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (loss determination).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-hours reduction state. And a reach determination table in the low-probability state when the gaming state is in the low-probability state (low-probability non-short-time state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches the reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the above. However, the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state matches the reach determination value indicating that all of the 72 types of reach-determination random numbers do not reach in order to maximize the speed of the game when in the time-saving state. In this way, it may not be possible to match with the reach determination value indicating the reach.

  Also, the reach determination table in the low probability state indicates that five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown, and to match the reach determination values indicating that 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the low-probability state is higher than that in the high-probability time reduction state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-working state, five types of reach determination including the same reach-determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables in the high-probability work reduction state and the low-probability state are described. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the use random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the 67 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination values that indicate that the reach is not performed. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is the same as in the low probability non-hours reduction state.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and determines that a reach loss has occurred (YES in step S5120). Then, the reach flag indicating that the change becomes the reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140B, and reads the random number for the first big hit symbol read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, 200 total Are stored in a form associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 140 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side stores the random numbers for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit B, 2R normal hit) in the symbol determination table. Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first big hit symbol is set to be different from the type of the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high-probability state is the same. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the second big hit symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

  The following is a brief summary of the specific games and effects for each type of jackpot.

  1. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 is displayed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big hit game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hitting game state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. Is controlled to the effect mode in which the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 is displayed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big hit game state Controls the low probability time saving state until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times (or wins the jackpot in the period until the 100 times are exhausted), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state An effect display device in which a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) is performed, and in a low probability time saving state, it is relatively disadvantageous. 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 is displayed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 16R big hit game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and determines whether the number of rounds will exceed 8 rounds (whether it will be 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (successful rendering). ) Is performed and an additional challenge effect is performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed since the high-probability time-saving state is controlled, a relatively advantageous state is obtained. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 is displayed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big hit game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and determines whether the number of rounds will exceed eight rounds during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state (whether it will be 16 rounds) (failure production) ) Is performed and an additional challenge effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the high-probability time-saving state is controlled, the state is relatively advantageous. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 opens the large winning opening 2103 for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have been awarded in the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the step 2, the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103. After this 2R jackpot game state, a special Until the fluctuation display of the symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until the symbol is exhausted 100 times), the low probability time reduction state is controlled, and a specific character is executed during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. Perform a battle effect in which the player is defeated (battle defeat effect), and in the low-probability time-saving state, the effect display device 1600 is relatively disadvantageous. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, no winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except in the case, only the first special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a big hit (8R certain variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, no game ball wins in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 displays the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and a big hit (16R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In a jackpot related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 gaming balls can be paid out by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 at longest (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot A, it is determined to be an 8R probability variable jackpot A symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 8R normal jackpot, it is set to 8R normal jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol. decide. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is determined to be the 16R probability variable jackpot, it is determined to be the 16R probability variable jackpot symbol as the jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be the 8R probability variable jackpot B, the jackpot symbol is the 8R probability variable jackpot. If it is determined to be a B symbol, and if it is determined to be a 2R normal big hit, it is determined to be a 2R normal big hit symbol as a big hit symbol.

  If the big hit flag has not been set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag has been set in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After it is determined to be a unique symbol stop mode (step S5334), the flow shifts to step S5337.

  Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the loss symbol as the mode of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (step S5336), and proceeds to step S5337. I do.

  After the stop symbol is thus determined, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the lottery result (any one of the type of big hit, the small hit, the out of reach, and the out of place) as the process of step S5337. (Which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S5338, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), this process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → Stop display is performed in the order of the middle decorative symbols (note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be synchronously displayed in the same symbol in a synchronized manner and may be simultaneously stopped and displayed). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative patterns are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal big hit is won as a big hit. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as another symbol) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, a release design accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same design with the left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” and a different middle decorative design; reach loss) When the outlier is specified and the outlier is specified, it is determined to be an outlier symbol (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

  In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit to appear before the big hit game starts, and the big hit game Is displayed after the start of the game.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag to If it has been done (step S5341), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and a small hit flag is set. Is set (step S5343), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5344). If the reach flag is set (step S5345), the reach variation pattern table (not shown) is set. (Not shown) (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are selected. If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the fact is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), the process is ended. As a result, the first special symbol display control is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 for the thus determined variable time, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Will be performed.

  The variation pattern table of this example includes random numbers for jackpot determination (first random number for jackpot determination, random numbers for second large jackpot determination) and random numbers for jackpot symbols (first random number for jackpot symbol, random numbers for second large symbol hit). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the information. In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. It is stored in a form associated with each of the first variation display pattern random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads the selected variation pattern table and the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the read random number for variable display pattern with the read random number for variable display pattern and obtaining the variable time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Is determined. As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, the small hit is not won in this example, and therefore, the small hit variation pattern table is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Have been. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for the variation display pattern among the 241 types of random numbers for the variation display pattern are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The kinds of random numbers for the variation display pattern are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the super reach effects with a low big hit expectation is executed, and the 18 random numbers for the variable display pattern have a high big hit expectation. This is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any of the super reach effects is to be executed.

  Note that the super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach effect, and the player who wants to generate the jackpot game state has a player with respect to the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations have increased. In other words, such a super-reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and thus, even if a loss is finally displayed, the degree of expectation of the player for the big hit gaming state Can be increased. However, in practice, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation of the jackpot playing state, during the period in which the super reach effect is being executed, a high-expected notice effect that is a lottery different from the fluctuation pattern appears (Composite) is required.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of losing which is provided in correspondence with the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state are included. And a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common with the above. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A change time of 12 seconds can be set, and a change time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time reduction state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is performed. In addition to prompting, the player has secured time to make the second starting port 2004 win a game ball.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the fluctuation time at the time of the loss of the second special symbol, each game ball hit into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state). It is possible to prevent the paper from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the right-hitting game ball is supplied to a region immediately above the gate unit 2003.
Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 in the time saving state (high probability time saving state or the like), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second start port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). Accordingly, under a condition that can be successively accepted by the second starting port 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center role 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if the game balls are accepted, control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be successively digested with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of about "1/32" each time the game balls are accepted. Will be made possible.

  In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state), In many cases, the starting port 2004 receives game balls at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely set as the variation time in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state). It can be set as short as 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol change is completed only in a time (0.1 second) shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 second). Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, it is possible to suppress such game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5371. In the processing of (1), the fluctuation timer for setting the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is decremented by one. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, that the fluctuation time determined by the lottery has elapsed (step S 5372), the process proceeds to step S 5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 (step S 5371), if the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time to stop the symbols is confirmed). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5381. As the processing of the above, while performing display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit gaming state (step S5387). The standby time until the start of the big hit gaming state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit gaming state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, When the time reduction flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is an initial value (step S5389). (S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R likelihood jackpot A command, 8R likelihood jackpot command, 8R likelihood jackpot A, 8R likelihood jackpot A, 8R likelihood jackpot, 8R likelihood jackpot, 8R likelihood jackpot B, 2R likelihood jackpot) Big hit command, 8R positive variable big hit B command, 2R normal big hit command) are set. Thereby, the effect (battle effect or additional challenge effect) of the jackpot game state according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when the vehicle is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special symbol that has been extinguished after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of times the special symbol changed after being controlled to the low probability time reduction state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is determined that the condition for terminating the low probability time reduction state is satisfied, and The function is stopped and the game is shifted to the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state) (step S 5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S 5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S 5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game state is started is set (step S 5394), and the small hit game is performed. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hitting game state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value, of the first special symbol process flag. (Step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interruption control is performed, it is determined that the small hitting execution flag is set in the processing of step S5236, and the small hitting control processing (step S5240b) is performed. The small hitting game state is executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the execution state of the small hit game state does not change the game state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S 5393), it is determined that the game has been lost, and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394), the process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag or the small hit executing flag is not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is performed according to the suspended state. (Lottery and symbol control) are performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main signal is output as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 executes a gate passage process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. I do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbols is stopped is performed based on the read ordinary random numbers (step S5403).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing that stands by until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4. Variation display of the ordinary symbol so that the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation control of the normal symbol becomes a mode suggesting “per-universal drawing”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received into the second starting port 2004. Electric-powered accessory opening processing for executing processing for enabling the control (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passing process (step S5402).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains, from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, the counter value of the ordinary suspension number counter as the process of step S5411. Then, based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to the suspended state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the ordinary pending number counter is counted up (added by one).
Next, as the process of step S5413, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as a process of step S5414, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in a normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the above-mentioned variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly held.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

  When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol ordinary process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs a It is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the ordinary symbols in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S5422, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol retaining storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is processed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area out of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary figure variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially stored in the first (earliest) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time reduction state (low probability non-time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S5425), a non-time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S5425). In step S5427, the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process (step S5428).

  The general chart hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is a time reduction (high probability time reduction state). And a non-time-saving time-of-day map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving-time general-purpose hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all the 255 types of normal random numbers coincide with the general-purpose hit determination value indicating that the general-purpose hit was won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the working hours, the game ball is always elected per ordinary drawing, the movable piece is opened, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. We control acceptance. Not all of the 255 types, but more common random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to coincide with the general figure hit determination value indicating that the general figure has been won.

  In addition, in the non-working time general-purpose hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is found that all of the 255 types of normal random numbers coincide with the general-purpose hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. However, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-usual-drawing determination value indicating that the out-of-usual figure is out of place. As described above, in non-working hours, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the ball is not elected per ordinary drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no control to allow game balls to be accepted into 2004. However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a hit of a normal symbol even in a non-time saving state. In this case, a winning probability (for example, 50%) lower than that of the time saving state is set, and a lottery result of the normal symbol becomes a hit. In this case, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, and then is advanced again. You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the 2nd starting port 2004.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, and determines that it is an ordinary symbol hit (step S5429). ), After setting a per-flight hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won per per-figure (step S5430), the per-figure perimeter as a mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (a normal design stop pattern) On the other hand, the symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is a loss as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol ordinary processing, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. A non-normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S5404), this process is ended.

  Then, while such control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit regular processing (reception command analysis processing (reception command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation at each time is grasped, and an effect according to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and when there is such a situation, performs control relating to a hold display or a pre-reading effect according to the start winning. Then, thereafter, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation process, effect symbol variation stop process, big hit display process One of the big hit game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process: Until the variation pattern command relating to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, it takes effect (such as demonstration effect) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control regarding the big hit is not performed. When the control is performed and a variation pattern command relating to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing.

  Effect design variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command and the like, and the change of the decorative symbol is started based on the determined effect content. Control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the rendering of the effect symbol.

  Processing during effect design change: Control such as starting various effect contents determined in the effect design change start process at each timing during the pattern change period is performed, and when the change time ends, the value of the process flag is set. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing stop of all the symbols, the control of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative design and deriving and displaying the display result (stop design) is performed.
When the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit display process. Update to the value corresponding to.

  Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect that notifies the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of the big hit) in a period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

  Big hit game processing: Control for various effects during the period of occurrence of the big hit game state. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing.

  Big hit end effect processing: The effect display device 1600 controls an effect (a display effect for notifying a player that the big hit game state has ended, etc.) in a period from the end of the big hit game state to the allowable variation state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determination table T1 that is referred to in the effect symbol change start process when in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) is associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) associated with the fluctuation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and determines the determined effect pattern. Based on the (fluctuation effect), the control is performed so that the change of the decorative symbol is started.

  The effect pattern (fluctuation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (fluctuation effects) is determined based on a production lottery or a game situation. You may make it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with a part of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  Further, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) in this way, and then performs a preview lottery (a process of judging the notice effect) based on the jackpot determination result, the symbol type, and the change pattern. By performing a control (processing during the fluctuation of the design symbol) to make the preview effect won in the preview lottery appear at a predetermined timing in the execution of the determined effect pattern (variable effect), a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. It is made possible to indicate the degree of expectation of the big hit symbol by the appearance mode and the like as being compoundable.

  Conventionally, among such composite effects, there is a case where a plurality of appearances are performed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed while the same specific notice effect (for example, a timer effect) is being executed. In this way, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained. However, since the notice effect can be combined only when the degree of expectation of the big hit symbol is high, the frequency at which a plurality of timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally decreases. However, it was considered difficult to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  As will be described later, the “timer effect” refers to a predetermined effect appearing during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and displays a count display toward a timing at which the predetermined effect is performed by a first predetermined numerical value. (For example, “60 seconds”) to a second predetermined numerical value (for example, “0 seconds”), which is executed as a count effect display or as a standby display (being prepared, etc.) before the count display is started. It is. In other words, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is ensured that some effect always occurs when the count reaches the second predetermined numerical value. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or cut-in A) in which one of an effect mode (an effect mode with a low degree of expectation) and an advantageous effect mode (an effect mode with a high expectation) that are relatively disadvantageous for the player appears. , B) are subject to the timer effect, it is ensured that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined numerical value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the notice timer effect executed as a result of the notice lottery), at least at the time when the count display is started, it is kept confidential about which effect is the effect target. It is desirable to do so. In addition, “the effect target of the timer effect” is the effect of the effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value becomes the second predetermined numerical value (for example, “0 second”) as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target occurs.

  In the “timer effect” according to the present embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer effect as described above. If the timer effect is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed since the count was started ( (E.g., the number of seconds).

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when the user has won the notice lottery, the effect pattern (the notice side timer effect) determined based on the determination table T1 is used. A timer effect (variable-side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the variable effect) can be executed. That is, in this case, if only the notice side timer effect to execute the count effect display as “the effect content of the advance effect that functions so that the big hit expectation degree is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command” Instead, it is also executed as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", so that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command Effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without uselessly stacking (adding an expected degree by satisfying the condition of “winning in the preliminary lottery”). For example, when the special jackpot expectation degree when the specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is “20%”, when the notice side timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation is increased by the function of the composite effect. For example, it becomes “40%”, and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount. On the other hand, when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. The timer effect can be executed with the degree kept at “20%” (appears only when a specific variation pattern is selected), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

  It should be noted that the jackpot expectation degree when an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the change number (further, the effect pattern), and basically, as the change number increases, the jackpot expectation degree increases. There is a tendency to be higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variable timer effect in which the “conversation notice” is directed as the effect content is executed. The appearance ratio is as follows: variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the expected big hit at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail. An effect pattern (count change pattern) in which a variable-side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a different probability than in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but in the case of the change numbers 5 and 6, the variable timer effect for which the conversation notice is to be directed can be executed. This is different from the variation numbers 3 and 4 in the point. Variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that all the same character reach effects are performed. However, in variation numbers 9 and 10, a variation side timer effect for which a conversation notice is directed is executed, and variation numbers 11 and 14 are performed. 12, a variable-side timer effect with cut-in A as the production target is executed, and with the variation numbers 13 and 14, a conversation notice and cut-in A are executed, and the variable-side timer effect with these as production targets are executed. Are different in that they can be The variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed. However, the variation numbers 17 and 18 execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation announcement, and the variation numbers 19 and Reference numeral 20 denotes a variable-side timer effect with cut-in B as the target, and variable numbers 21 and 22 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in B, and the variable-side timer effect with the cut-in B as the target. Are different in that they can be It should be noted that the big hit expectation is higher when the variable timer production with cut-in A and B as the production target is performed than when the variable timer production with the conversation announcement as the production target is performed. Is set such that the expectation of a big hit tends to be higher when a variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is performed.

  The “conversation notice” is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after an effect pattern (decorative effect of a decorative pattern) is executed, and that a relatively low level of expectation is often added. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the performance pattern (decorative effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and have a relatively high expectation. This is an effect that is often performed (or an effect in which a relatively high level of expectation is always added). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set such that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-ins A and B, and the later-described character A operations and B) having higher expectations. It is something to be done. In addition, the “cut-in” appearing as the content of the variable production is executed in the character reach in such a manner as to correspond to the cut-in A appearing as the production content of the announcement production, whereas the “reach in” This is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the effect contents (effect patterns) for a plurality of variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as a variable side timer effect. Then, if the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (for example, variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a normal reach production with a low degree of expectation”, a count production display as a notice timer effect is displayed. In order to prevent the effect from being won (by increasing the degree of premium) and appropriately secure the expectation UP when the notice-side timer effect appears, the fluctuation pattern is “variation pattern for executing the fluctuation-side timer effect ( (Variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like), the variation pattern has a predetermined type (for example, variation Nos. 1 to 6) are reduced.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns for which the variation side timer effect is executed. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) may correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, and 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is not executed, and four variation patterns (variation numbers) are provided. Nos. 1 to 4) correspond to the above-described predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), and the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is such that the count effect display (variable timer effect) can be performed (count variation pattern), the notice is more noticeable than when the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. As a content of the effect of the effect, the ratio of determining that the count effect display (notice timer effect) cannot be executed is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (variable effect) without reducing the frequency of appearance by unnecessarily increasing the degree of expectation.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The appearance ratio of the notice side timer effect differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the effect of the notice timer is effected, it is possible to appear with a medium lottery probability. When the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the effect of the notice timer is expected to appear with a high probability of lottery. ing.

  In addition, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the notice-side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in fact, a bigger hit than in the case of a loss. The announcement timer effect can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern that has been won, and the variation number 22 can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced in advance depending on whether the change pattern is the first count change pattern (for example, change number 10) or the second count change pattern (for example, change number 22). Is different as the effect content (notice timer effect). Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the appearance ratio of a plurality of count displays is high in one effect pattern (variation effect), In some cases, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, so that it is expected that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (eg, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the announcement timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern in comparison with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effects appear (the ratio at which the notice-side timer effect is determined to be executed in the preview lottery) is set to be high. In other words, in this case, only the big hit expectation is required to win one notice side timer effect in the notice lottery, and two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the production effect of the double timer can be realized without needlessly increasing the jackpot expectation.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is directed and the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is directed are described. In this example, the mode of the count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even if an effect pattern (for example, change numbers 9 and 11) with the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable timer effect (variable count effect display) is confirmed. By recognizing the easiness of the notice timer effect to appear, coupled with `` the appearance ratio of the notice timer effect is made different depending on which count variation pattern it is '' You can expect it.

  Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice-side timer effect (notice-side count effect display), regardless of whether the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable-side timer effect (variable-side effect) It may be different from (or different from at least one of) the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display, or may be the same as the same mode (or at least one of them). .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (the notice count display effect) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be directed. This is useful for improving the sense of expectation by allowing the player to recognize that a notice timer effect that is set to a high degree is appearing. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice timer effect be different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable timer effect (variable count effect display). As for the common mode as the notice timer effect (display of the notice count effect), a plurality of modes (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different expectations are prepared, and any one of them is executed. You may do so.

  Further, in order to be able to more appropriately recognize that the notice-side timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice-side timer effect is executed and a count display when the variable-side timer effect is executed. It is desirable to make the counting speed (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or counting down) different. In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, even during the period in which the count display is in progress, the counting speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and the fluctuation-side timer effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is compared with the timer effect. Can be given an interest in which of the notice side timer effects with high expectations is being executed, and the entertainment of the game during the timer consumption period can be suitably maintained.

  Also, at this time, in the variable-side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same as) the count speed of the advance-timer timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in) ( Cut-in) and a mode in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively not close to the count speed of the notice timer effect (conversation notice), whether or not the notice timer effect is executed Can be made interesting by making the difficulty of the judgment different. Also, in the variable-side timer effect (or the notice timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice-side timer effect (or the change timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count display may be performed by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the notice-side timer effect are simultaneously executed, it is easy to determine whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is performed for the variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) corresponding to the variation-side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for digesting all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when a variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is obtained, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for the effect, and the count display of the variation timer effect and the notice timer are performed. By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the effect count display different (for example, the larger the total number of counts is likely to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed is different. To make it interesting

  In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (the effect target of the timer effect, the reach effect, Although the contents of the production are the same, the production of multiple production patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display (the total number of counts or the time required for digesting all the counts) is provided. (The same effect type is used for each effect pattern) and a plurality of different change patterns may be prepared and made to correspond one-to-one.

  In addition, even if the number of displayed counts (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect differ, or even when the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable-side timer effect and the advance notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to add interest by making it difficult to determine whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed. .

  In addition, if the notice-side timer effect is executed with a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect is executed with a count-up display, so that it is possible to definitely determine whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be greatly improved. In addition, while the notice-side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice) is executed in a count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for cut-in) is executed in the countdown display, the difficulty in determining whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed is made different depending on the production target to make it interesting. Can be granted.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is produced for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, and cases where different effects are produced. To control. Then, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed to the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, a different effect is targeted for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the jackpot expectation becomes low becomes high, and even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be produced in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is set as the target of the effect in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, one of the change-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect is first performed by the predetermined numerical value. Since the count display is continued while the other count display is continued, at this point, it is as if the effect is a different effect (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode). Looks like). Then, after this, the other count display which has been continued reaches a predetermined numerical value in a manner in which it is clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed, and is ended. Even if it is revealed by the timer production on the finished side that a conversational announcement with a relatively low degree of expectation is a production target, a different production that can appear thereafter is regarded as a production target ( It is expected that the timer effect is executed in a mode having a relatively high degree of expectation) and that the expectation of maintaining the game is maintained to improve the game entertainment.

  Also, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, the timing at which the variable-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice-side timer effect It is desirable that separate count end indications (eg, “successful count!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) appear at the timing of reaching the numerical value.

  More specifically, the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, which are directed to the “conversation notice” executed as the effect on the variable side or the notice side, appear in one effect pattern. And in this case, the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the notice-side timer effect respectively proceed simultaneously, but in the variable-side timer effect, the change-side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuating side specific production that occurs (such as "Successful count!" Or an effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice side timer production involves the The count display is made in accordance with the notice-side specific effect ("Chance UP!", A timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect) that occurs as the notice-side effect). By proceeding, separate count end corresponding displays will appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the effects of the conversation notice and the cut-in are always executed when the effects are set as the effects of the variable timer effect (when the count change pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, when the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value when the count display reaches a predetermined value when the effect is to be directed to the variable timer effect. It is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effect to be the production target of the variable-side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the above-mentioned effect pattern (variable effect), and only by executing the effect pattern, the variable-side timer effect and its effect It is desirable that each of the effects to be performed (an aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation) can appear. However, in place of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable-side timer effect is executed, an effect (an aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect is always selected in the advance lottery. .

  If the production of the conversation notice and the cut-in are not included in the production of the variable side timer production, it is determined whether or not to appear as the production content of the preliminary announcement in the preliminary lottery described later. A determination is made as to in what manner (an aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation or an aspect having a relatively low degree of expectation) as the effect content of the side, and control relating to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination. .

  Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 148 will be summarized.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, first, the current game is performed based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, or the like. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expected degree) to the probability of a certain change when a specific effect pattern appears, the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the like. become.

  Then, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable-side timer effect) are prepared as selectable effect patterns associated with the variation numbers. In this case, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the hit in the hit determination. At this time, if the big hit determination has been won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is increased, and accordingly, the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The tendency is that the probability that a big hit symbol will appear becomes higher as the time becomes slower.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a special effect condition is satisfied, the count change pattern (change numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired. Even in this case, an effect pattern that is set so that the variable-side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern appearing during the symbol change (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) is selected, how the notice effect is performed during the execution period of the effect pattern. In such a case, it is determined whether to additionally execute (combine or not) (preliminary lottery).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure for a lottery (notice lottery performed in the effect symbol change start process) related to a notice effect that appears during an effect pattern execution period (symbol variation time). Note that the processing procedure of the preview lottery described below is merely an example, and the processing procedure of the preview lottery is not limited to this as long as the intended purpose of the preview performance can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 149, at the time of the preliminary lottery, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation (suspended to be completed) waiting to be started is a target of a timer prefetch effect described later (step S5501). ). Then, as a result, the first timer announcement lottery is performed if the target is a timer prefetch effect (step S5502), whereas the second timer advance lottery is performed if the timer is not a prefetch effect (step S5502). S5521).

  That is, in the case where the timer prefetch effect is targeted (first timer preliminary lottery), the notice timer effect is executed as compared with the case where the timer prefetch effect is not targeted (second timer preliminary lottery). It is set to increase the rate at which decisions are made. The ratio may include a ratio determined by 100%. In each of the first timer advance lottery and the second timer advance lottery, a different decision table is prepared for each game state, whereby a decision to execute a notice side timer effect according to the game state is made. (For example, in the high-probability time-short game state, the notice timer effect is executed at a lower rate (including the rate determined at 0%) than in the normal game state). It has become.

  FIG. 150: is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice determination table T2 referred to when the said fluctuation | variation (extended hold) is not the target of a timer pre-reading effect (2nd timer notice lottery) in a normal game state. .

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer announcement lottery according to this embodiment, when a variation pattern command (here, variation numbers 1 to 6) of a predetermined type has been acquired, the announcement timer effect is provided. Is not determined. The same applies to the first timer announcement lottery and other game states.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 148, in the second timer announcement lottery, even if the effect pattern (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the change numbers 15 to 22) appears in the effect content of the same reach type, the variation side The effect pattern in which the timer effect is included as the effect content (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) is compared with the effect pattern in which the variable timer effect is not included as the effect content (for example, SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 and 16). Therefore, it is set so that the ratio of the decision to execute the notice timer effect is increased. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable timer effect, notice timer effect) can appear in one effect pattern without winning a double timer effect described later in the advance lottery, As a result, it is possible to realize the double timer production opportunity without needlessly increasing the jackpot expectation (winning for the double timer production). The same applies to the first timer announcement lottery and other game states.

  However, in the first timer announcement lottery, the proportion of the decision to execute the announcement timer effect is generally higher than in the timer announcement determination table T2 referred to in the second timer announcement lottery. More specifically, in the first timer announcement lottery, no matter which of the variation numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the first timer announcement lottery is compared with the timer announcement determination table T2 referred to in the second timer announcement lottery. The rate at which the decision to execute the timer effect is made higher.

  As will be described later, in the timer look-ahead effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (low-expected mode, high-expected mode, fixed Embodiment). In the first timer announcement lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, and the second timer announcement lottery is performed even when the look-ahead effect is being executed in the low expectation mode. Is set to be generally higher than the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the above. In addition, when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the high expectation mode, the ratio of the decision to execute the notice timer effect is generally higher than when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the low expectation mode, and the timer look-ahead effect is performed. When executed in a fixed manner, it is set so that a decision to execute the notice timer effect is always made regardless of the variation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 22).

  Then, when it is determined that the notice-side timer effect is to be executed as a result of the timer notice lottery (the first timer notice lottery and the second timer notice lottery) (YES in step S5503), the process of step S5504 is executed. If a one-mission effect lottery is not performed but a decision to execute the notice timer effect is not made (NO in step S5503), a second mission effect lottery is performed as the process of step S5551.

  That is, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the number of count displays (the total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started (the longer the time required for the time consumption of the timer), the higher the expectation of a big hit. Is set to have However, in this case, when the count display number (the total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is small, the big hit expectation degree tends to be low. There was a concern that the interest would decline.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment causes the effect display device 1600 to display a “specific display related to the first effect” such as “let the first effect appear”, and displays the specific display. When the first effect occurs (appears) during the display of, a special effect such as “mission success” appears to enable execution of a mission effect that confirms that the big hit has been won.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, an effect type (here, a conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the timer effect is set as the first effect. We are going to adopt it. In other words, in this case, if a timer effect is executed while a specific display such as “let a conversation notice (first effect) appear” (while a mission effect appears), a count display is performed. Even if the count display number (the total number of counts) displayed when the game is started is small, the production target of the timer notice is “conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage”. It can be expected that the winning is confirmed), and the count display (count total) displayed when the count display starts is large, and the count display is continued even after the conversation notice ends Therefore, it can be expected that the jackpot expectation will be high even in the case of Kill as to become.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in order to more appropriately achieve the synergistic effect generated by the timer effect and the mission effect, a specific display (conversation notice should be displayed) related to the first effect. ) Is displayed, a preliminary lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) so that the appearance ratio of the timer production is higher than when the specific display (let the conversation notice appear) related to the first production is not displayed. I am going to do. By this, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed only by displaying the specific display (let the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect, and thus it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest. Will be able to The first effect to be displayed in the mission may not be the “conversation notice”, but may be executed instead of, for example, any of the effects shown in FIG. 160.

In addition, the appearance ratio of the timer effect is displayed when the specific display (show the conversation notice) related to the first effect is displayed, compared to when the specific display (show the conversation notice) is displayed. Although any method may be adopted as a method for increasing the value, it can be realized by adopting any of the following methods, for example.
a. First, it is determined whether or not to perform a mission effect.When it is determined that the mission effect is to be performed, the timer effect is performed so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when the mission effect is not determined. Method of determining whether to appear b. First, it is determined whether or not to perform a timer effect. Method to determine whether to appear

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment employs the above-described method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) when it is determined in the processing of step S5503 that the notice-side timer effect has been won, it is not determined that the notice-side timer effect has been won in the process of step S5503. As compared with the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case of the above, the ratio of determining to display (mission display) a specific display (let a conversation notice appear) related to the first effect becomes higher, It is determined whether or not to display a mission within the fluctuation (effect pattern).

  In addition, a specific display related to the first effect (let a conversation notice appear) and a timer look-ahead effect that indicates that the notice-side timer effect is to be executed (first preceding mode, second preceding mode, third preceding mode) Mode) can be displayed simultaneously. Further, under a predetermined condition, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed in which, when the specific display appears, a specific display related to the first effect (let's make a conversation notice appear) increases.

  In addition, as for the specific display related to the first production (make a conversation notice appear), for example, when the reservation information to be subjected to the mission production (the suspension information for generating the mission production) is obtained, the suspension information is displayed. The display may be performed over a plurality of variable displays until the display is exhausted. Also, at this time, when the suspension information to be subjected to the mission effect (the suspension information for generating the mission effect) is the suspension information for the big hit, the fluctuation executed before the suspension information for the big hit is exhausted. A special notice (successful mission) may be displayed by causing a conversation notice to appear in the display. However, when the special display (mission success) is displayed in advance in this way (when the mission success is displayed when the pending information for generating the mission effect has not been consumed yet), the loss variation display is executed. It is desirable to be limited only when there is. In other words, in this case, although the special display (mission success) is displayed, a losing symbol (losing effect) appears in the variable display in which the special display appears, and thus the special display (mission success) is displayed. In this state, the hold information that is the target of the mission effect is digested and the big hit symbol (big hit effect) is displayed in the variable display, thereby making it possible to improve the game entertainment.

  According to such a configuration, while the mission effect and the timer look-ahead effect are performed over a plurality of variations, even if the mission succeeds before the count display of the timer effect is started, the lost symbol is displayed in the variation display. It is possible to realize an effect as if the variable display in which the big hit symbol appears is carried over until the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started is displayed.

  FIG. 151 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) which is referred to when a notice timer effect is performed in the normal game state, and FIG. 151 (b). Is a diagram showing an example of a second mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) referred to when a notice timer effect is not performed in a normal game state.

  As is clear from FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a which is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is performed, when the notice-side timer effect is not performed. It is set so that the ratio of determination to display (mission display) a specific display related to the first performance (let a conversation notice appear) is higher than the second mission performance determination table T3b referred to. I have. This is the same in each table referred to when in another game state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired even though the variation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the variation pattern in which “conversation notice” appears as the variation effect. In such a case, the setting is made so as not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display (show the conversation notice) related to the first effect is displayed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. Have been. That is, since the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach effects (reach types with low expectations), both timer effects and mission effects occur in such reach effects with low expectations, and the mission succeeds. In such a case, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced due to the lack of a desire such as "I wanted to see such a production in a type of reach production having a higher degree of expectation". For this reason, in the variation numbers 5 and 6, although the variation side timer effect with the “conversation notice” as the effect target is performed, the reach effect is performed in any of the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. Also, it is desirable to set so as not to execute an effect in which a specific display (let a conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed. This is the same in each table referred to when in another game state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the variation pattern in which “conversation notice” appears as a variation effect, but these variation numbers are acquired. Also, when any of the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b is set, a mission effect in which a specific display (show a conversation notice) related to the first effect is displayed is not executed. Have been. This is because the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 are the fluctuation patterns at the time of the loss, and it is not possible to display the success of the mission (determining that the big hit has been won) in the effect. The same applies to each table which is referred to in other game states.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 correspond to the hit variation patterns that cause “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect, and these variation numbers 10, 14, and When the specific display related to the first production (display a conversation notice) is displayed when 18, 22 are acquired, a message indicating that the mission has been successful (suggesting that the big hit has been won) is displayed. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504), which is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is performed, the hit change patterns (change numbers 10, 14, 18, and When 22) is acquired, the execution probability is set (three times) to be significantly higher than the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the notice side timer effect is not performed. I have. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. The same applies to each table which is referred to in other game states.

  On the other hand, during the execution of the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, 20) in which the "conversation notice" is not made to appear as the content of the variation production, a specific display related to the first production (let the conversation notice appear) Is displayed, a strange situation such as "The conversation notice cannot be made to appear despite the mission display, and the big hit symbol is displayed after the mission failure" may occur. Absent. Therefore, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504), which is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is performed, the hit change pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) in which "conversation notice" does not appear as a change effect ) Is set (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high as compared to the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the notice timer effect is not performed. I have. The same applies to each table which is referred to in other game states.

  However, as will be described later, a relatively high probability is obtained when it is determined that a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect is acquired and a mission effect is executed. Is controlled so that the probability that "conversation notice" will be executed as the contents of the notice effect is increased (steps S5509 and S5534 described later). In view of the fact that such control is performed, the "conversation notice" is also displayed for the fluctuation effect, even for the hit fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) in which the "conversation notice" does not appear as the content of the fluctuation effect. The mission effect may be performed with the same execution probability as the hit variation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that appear as contents.

  On the other hand, the variation numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are reach productions at the time of a loss in which "conversation notice" is not made to appear as the production contents of the fluctuation production. Such a reach production can be performed in the form of a mission production failure without causing a "conversation notice" to appear, so the loss production is performed. In the first mission effect lottery performed, the execution probability is set (three times) to be significantly higher than the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the notice side timer effect is not performed. I have. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. The same applies to each table which is referred to in other game states.

  As will be described later, a reach effect (variation numbers 7, 11, 15, 19, etc.) at the time of loss that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as the effect content of the variable effect is acquired, and it is determined that the mission effect is executed. At times, the control is performed such that the probability that the “conversation notice” is executed as the effect contents of the notice effect becomes zero. This is because, in the li-zhi production at the time of losing, it is not possible to display a message indicating the success of the mission (suggesting that a big hit has been won).

  According to the configuration relating to such a mission effect, always (when the mission effect does not appear), the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) is the second effect (conversation notice) rather than the first effect (conversation notice). It is more desirable to have an effect with a higher degree of expectation (for example, cut-in or a character action described later) in order to obtain a sense of expectation, and the effect object of the timer effect (count effect display) is the first effect. If it is (conversation notice), it is not possible to appropriately obtain a sense of expectation. However, if a timer effect (count effect display) is performed when a specific display (show a conversation notice) relating to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the effect object of the timer effect is the first effect. In any of the (conversation notice) and the second production (cut-in), it is possible to obtain at least a feeling of expectation higher than that expected in the second production (cut-in). You can enjoy with confidence.

  Moreover, when such a specific display (show a conversation notice) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, a specific display (show a conversation notice) concerning the first effect (conversation notice) in the symbol effect is displayed. Since the appearance ratio of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when the is not displayed, only the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) (display the conversation notice) is displayed. It is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest. In order to realize such an effect control, the variable-side timer effect need not always be prepared so as to be executable, and may be realized only by the notice-side timer effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, both the conversation notice and the cut-in (or the later-described character action) can be executed within one effect pattern, and the conversation notice is cut-in (or the role described later). (Object movement). Therefore, if the mission display (show the conversation notice) is being executed, there is a possibility that the mission will succeed even if the count display number (count total) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started is small. Because of being conscious, a decrease in expectation is suppressed. In addition, when the count display number (count total number) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started, the sense of expectation can be suitably maintained by itself when the count display number (count total number) is large. It is expected to maintain stable.

  In addition, as will be described later, the timing of displaying the specific display related to the first effect (letting a conversation notice appear) (mission display) is performed during the period during which the symbol change targeted for the specific display is performed. Not only in the middle, but also during the period in which the symbol change targeted for the specific display is still on hold. Also, in the situation where the specific display (show the conversation notice) related to the first effect is displayed during the period in which the symbol change targeted for the mission effect is still on hold, It will be described later that a special display such as “mission succeeded” may be generated by appearance (appearance).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (Step S5504) is performed in this way, a notice-type timer type lottery is performed as the process of Step S5505 in order to determine the execution mode of the notice-side timer effect. .

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the notice timer type determination table T4 referred to in the notice timer type lottery (step S5505).

  As shown in FIG. 152, in the notice timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the notice timer effect is performed in the form of a single timer or the notice timer effect in the form of a double timer. The production random numbers are allocated in different distributions according to the variation numbers. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment refers to the notice side timer type determination table T4 based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and determines that the value of the effect random number acquired is a single timer mode and a double timer mode. By determining which one of the modes is assigned, the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505) is executed.

  The “single timer” to be determined in the notice-side timer type lottery corresponds to “a mode in which one notice-side timer effect is executed in one effect pattern”, and a “double timer” "Corresponds to" an aspect in which two notice-side timer effects of different effect targets are executed in one effect pattern ". In the announcement timer type determination table T4, the effect random numbers are assigned to each variation number so that the big hit expectation when the "double timer" appears than the "single timer" is higher.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute the above-described variable-side timer effect depending on the type of the variation pattern (variation number). Therefore, if it is determined that the notice timer effect is executed in a single timer mode when such a count change pattern is selected, the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in a double timer (or triple timer) mode. Similarly, if it is determined that the notice-side timer effect is to be executed in the form of the double timer when the count change pattern is selected, the change-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect are included in one effect pattern. By appearing, a timer effect is executed in a triple timer (or quadruple timer) mode.

  That is, in this case, if the number of appearances (single, double) of the notice side timer effect is determined regardless of whether the count variation pattern is selected or not, "the appearance of the timer effect appearing in one effect pattern" The greater the number, the higher the expectation of big hits "may be broken, and this makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the effect when the timer effect is executed (which aspect is the higher expectation) It is feared that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice-side timer effect can appear. When a variation pattern (variation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) in which the variation timer effect is not executed is selected, the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation) Therefore, the SP reach having a relatively high degree of expectation is more likely to select the double timer mode.

  On the other hand, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice-side timer effect can appear, the variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) for executing two variation-side timer effects having different production targets. Is selected, only when the SP reach is relatively high in expectation according to the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation), the double timer mode Is to be selected. In other words, in this case, if the aspect of the quadruple timer appears due to the appearance of two variable-side timer effects and two notice-side timer effects of different production targets in one effect pattern, the type of SP reach having a relatively high degree of expectation , It is definitely suggested that the effect pattern will be executed, and it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. However, instead of this, when the aspect of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable-side timer effects and two notice-side timer effects of different production targets in one effect pattern, the big hit symbol will definitely appear. It may be suggested.

  When a variation pattern (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) for executing two variable-side timer effects of different production targets is selected, the single timer mode is selected in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505). Is selected, the appearance of a triple timer appears when two variable-side timer effects and one notice-side timer effect that are different in the effect target appear in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such an aspect of the triple timer appears, the above-mentioned timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation. When the variation numbers 13 and 14 are selected, it is determined that the notice timer effect is executed only with a relatively low probability as compared with the variation numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to use a triple timer). (See the distribution mode of the variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

  On the other hand, a variation pattern (variation numbers 9 to 12, 17 to 20) for executing one variation-side timer effect is selected from among variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice side timer effect can appear. , The probability of selecting the double timer mode in the case of the character reach (variation numbers 9 to 12) having a relatively low degree of expectation is set to be extremely low, and the SP reach (variation number having a relatively high degree of expectation) is set relatively high. 17 to 20) are set so that the selection probability of the double timer mode is greatly increased. That is, in this case, in combination with the distribution mode of the variation number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, the triple timer mode (one variation side timer production and two advance timer productions, or two variation side timer productions) is included in one production pattern. Performance and one notice timer effect), the ratio of appearance of SP reach with relatively high expectation will increase instead of character reach with relatively low expectation. Will be able to

  In the notice-type timer type lottery according to the present embodiment (step S5505), only the process of selecting either the single timer or the double timer as the type of the notice-side timer effect is performed. However, for the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery process may be performed so that the notice-side timer effect of the triple timer or more can be executed, or the count display mode of the notice-side timer effect may be changed to the expected degree. It may be executed as a lottery process regarding which of a plurality of different modes (for example, different colors) is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, after the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed, as a result of the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505), the single timer mode and the double timer mode are selected. Which of the above has been decided to perform the notice timer effect (step S5506), and whether the decision to perform the mission effect has been made as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507, S532). The effect lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) for the timer target candidate effect (the notice effect that can be the effect of the timer effect on the notice side) with the contents (table) according to the results of the above. , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
In the case of the single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and the first processing state in which a determination to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (YES in step S5507) is made, First, based on the notice number determination table referred to in the first processing state, during the execution of one effect pattern, how many of the timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect. A determination process is performed (step S5508). Next, a determination process regarding which type of advancement effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advancement effects is to be a timer effect effector Is performed (step S5509).

If it is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and it is in the second processing state in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (show conversation notice) (NO in step S5507), First, based on the notice number determination table referred to in the second processing state, during the execution of one effect pattern, how many of the timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect. A determination process is performed (step S5523). Next, a determination process regarding which type of advancement effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advancement effects is to be a timer effect effector Is performed (step S5524).

In the case of the double processing mode (NO in step S5506), and in the third processing state in which a decision to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (YES in step S5532) is made, First, based on the notice number determination table referred to in the third processing state, during the execution of one effect pattern, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect. A determination process is performed (step S5533). Next, a determination process regarding which type of advancement effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advancement effects is to be a timer effect effector Is performed (step S5534).

In the case of the double processing mode (NO in step S5506) and the fourth processing state in which a determination to not execute the mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5532) is made, First, based on the number-of-announcements determination table referred to in the fourth processing situation, during the execution of one effect pattern, how many of the timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the advance effect. A determination process is performed for (step S5543). Next, a determination process regarding which type of advancement effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advancement effects is to be a timer effect effector Is performed (step S5544).

  FIG. 153 shows reach types when a decision to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) has been made and when a decision to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) has not been made. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a comparison of the upper limit of the number of appearances of the timer target candidate effects determined according to the processing status (the fifth processing status and the sixth processing status, which will be described later, in addition to the first to fourth processing statuses). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a mission effect (show a conversation notice) is to be executed, a mission effect (show a conversation notice) should be made. ) Is controlled so as to increase the upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect as compared to when it is not determined that the execution is performed.

  That is, whether or not to perform the notice timer effect, whether or not the notice timer effect is performed in the form of a single timer, whether or not the reach type is a reach effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, Regardless of the determination result, such as when the decision to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) has been made, the decision to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) , The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is increased as compared with the case in which no is performed.

  Note that such processing settings include the effect lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, and S5544) when the above-described notice-side timer effect is executed, and when the notice-side timer effect described below is not executed. This is realized through setting of each table referred to in the effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

  According to such a configuration, when a mission effect (show a conversation notice) is executed, the appearance ratio of the notice effect is increased and the average number of appearances is increased. In addition to this, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation such as `` If the notice production is so frequent, a conversation notice with relatively low expectation may appear in those notice productions and the mission will succeed '' become able to. Note that, as described above, the production to be displayed on the mission is required to be a production with a relatively low degree of expectation, such as a conversation notice, but it does not necessarily have to have the lowest degree of expectation. When the types of effects that can be the effect of the timer effect are classified into two groups in accordance with the degree of expectation, the types may be such that they are classified into groups having relatively lower expectations. Or, compared to a specific production with a relatively high degree of expectation that appears after the reach production is started, a preview production that has a lower degree of expectation and appears at a timing before the reach production is started, Is also good.

  FIG. 154 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and is in the first processing state in which a determination to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (YES in step S5507) is made. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5a referred to in the process of step S5508 in such a case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154, since the table T5a is referred to when the notice-side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice-side timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1 to 6 and the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (fluctuation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) in which a conversation notice appears as the content of the variation effect are acquired, the corresponding table is used. T5a is not referenced.

  Further, in the table T5a, since it is referred when the notice-side timer effect is executed in a single timer mode, the effect random number is set separately for each variable number so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. Allocated. However, for a variable number in which a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  Further, in the table T5a, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the hit effect among the variation numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, up to three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and up to two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation number 14 Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the content of the variation effect, whereas in the variation numbers 10 to 12, the variation content is the effect content of the variation effect. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and up to the variation number 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect. It has become. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that one or more preview effects are substantially allocated to each other. In the variation number 14, substantially two or more preview effects are substantially assigned. It is synonymous with each being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the rendering random number of "400" is substantially allocated to the number of notices 3, and the rendering random number of "600" is allocated to the number of notices 4. Therefore, it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effect is allocated so as to be most likely to appear.

  Incidentally, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) appearing when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation degree than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in A) appearing when the variation number is 11 or 12. Is as described above. However, in the table T5a referred to when the first processing state is set, the variation number 10 refers to an effect pattern in which "mission success (special display) is displayed and then stopped with a big hit symbol." In consideration of the "executable", the number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher than those in the case of the variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). With this, the game entertainment when the mission success (special display) is displayed is improved.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the relationship that is substantially the same as the relationship between the variation numbers in the character reach is set. . However, in SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the variation number The variation number 20 at the time of hit is higher in the number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the announcement effect than the variation number 18 (the higher the expected number of large hits, the more the number of advance notices is likely to increase). Also, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than in character reach.

  As will be described later, in the character reach in the first processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation) until symbol fluctuation is stopped. , A special timer). However, one of the up to five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot confirmation effect (special timer), and when a conversation notice is selected, it also functions as a jackpot effect due to mission success. When four or more candidate effects appear, an announcement effect of a jackpot determination appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 7 which is the character reach at the time of the loss, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach (cut-in A) at the time of the loss In No. 11, only up to two (substantially up to three) timer target candidate effects can appear.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach in the first processing situation, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, The timing at which the cut-in B, the accessory B operation) can appear is reached. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission, so that when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmed notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 15, which is the SP reach at the time of the loss, only up to five timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach (cut-in B) at the time of the loss. In 19, only up to four (substantially up to five) candidate timer effects can appear.

An example of each effect prepared as the timer target candidate effect is described below.
-Conversation notice: A line of a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the jackpot expectation degree can be changed according to the content of the dialogue. It is set lower than the effect (change in hold, cut-in A, action of character A, cut-in B, action of character B).
-Change in hold: display corresponding to the hold display that has become the target of the digestion even during the pattern change performed in accordance with the hold exhaustion (display not already in the hold state, but corresponding to the hold display when it was in the hold state) Is displayed, the display mode (color, etc.) of the hold display that has become the digestion target is changed. The suggested jackpot expectation may change depending on the display mode after the change. The big hit expectation at the point in time when the pending change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the action of the accessory A, the cut-in B, and the action of the accessory B.
Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in such a manner as to be preferentially displayed for the effect performed during the change of the design, and the big hit expectation when the cut-in A appears is the character A It is set lower than the action, cut-in B, and accessory B actions.
Operation of character A: This is for operating any of the above-described effect movable bodies, and the big hit expectation when the character A operation appears is set lower than that of the character B operation.
Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in such a manner that priority is given to the effect performed during the pattern change, and the big hit expectation when the cut-in B appears is the character A It is set lower than the action and the accessory B action.
-Action B operation: The action of moving any of the above-mentioned effect movable bodies. When the action B action appears, the jackpot expectation degree is determined by other effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A). , The action of the accessory A, and the cut-in B). The production movable body operated in the accessory B operation may be different from or the same as the production movable body used in the accessory A operation, but the operation is performed when the same production movable body is used. The mode will be different.

  It should be noted that each of these effects can be performed as a timer-targeted effect, as well as a period before the count display is executed, during the execution, after the execution, or a fluctuation period during which the timer effect is not executed. Can be executed as an effect that is not the object of the timer. In addition, each of these effects may be executable in any of a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, such as a blue cut-in A and a red cut-in A. In addition, the pending change may include a premium mode (special mode) in which a big hit is confirmed when it appears. However, in this case, if the premium mode (special mode) appears during the execution of the count display, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the hold change is not executed as the target of the timer effect.

  FIG. 155 is an aspect of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and is in the second processing state in which it is determined not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5b referred to in the process of step S5523 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the notice timer effect is executed, the fluctuation number 1 corresponding to the change pattern in which the notice timer effect cannot be executed. When No. to 6 have been acquired, the table T5b is not referred to. However, since it is referred when the mission effect is not executed, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17 corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) in which a conversation notice appears as the effect content of the fluctuation effect. , 21 have been acquired, the table T5b is also referred to. Therefore, in the table T5b, the effect random numbers are also assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for the respective notice numbers.

  Similarly, since the table T5b is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected separately for each variable number so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. Is allocated. However, for a variable number in which a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  Similarly, in the table T5b, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, up to two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation numbers 7 to 12, For the variation numbers 13 and 14 having relatively high expectations, at most one timer target candidate effect is not assigned. However, in Variation Nos. 7 and 8, the timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the production content of the variation production, whereas in Variation Nos. 9 to 12, the production content of the variation production is 1 One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and as for the variation numbers 13 and 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect. It has become. Therefore, the variation numbers 9 to 12 are synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is substantially allocated to each of the change numbers 9 to 12, and the variation numbers 13 and 14 substantially correspond to two or more notice effects. It is synonymous with directing each production.

  Then, for example, the variation number 14 is substantially the same as the rendering random number of “1000” assigned to the number of 3 notices, so that the variation numbers 7 to It can be said that among the fourteenth, the most noticeable effects are allocated so as to be most likely to appear.

  Note that, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the relationship that is substantially the same as the relationship between the variation numbers in the character reach is set. However, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher in SP reach than in character reach.

  In addition, in the table T5b, the production random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as the table T5a. However, since the production random numbers are referred to when the mission production is not executed, the table referred to when the mission production is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is smaller than T5a.

  FIG. 156 is an aspect of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and is in the third processing state in which a determination to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (YES in step S5532) is made. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5c referred to in the process of step S5533 in a case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 156, the table T5c is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, and thus corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice-side timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1 to 6 and the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (fluctuation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) in which a conversation notice appears as the content of the variation effect are acquired, the corresponding table is used. T5c is not referenced.

  However, in the table T5c, since it is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of the double timer, the effect random number is separately set for each variable number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated. However, for a variable number in which a timer-targeted candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the content of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer target candidate effects as the content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be assigned as the effect content of the notice effect in accordance with the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be assigned (variation numbers 13 and 21).

  Further, in the table T5c, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect of the variation numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, up to four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and up to three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation number 14 Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the production content of the variation production. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and up to the variation number 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect. ing. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that one or more preview effects are substantially allocated to each other. In the variation number 14, substantially two or more preview effects are substantially assigned. It is synonymous with each being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the effect random number of “400” is allocated to the number of notices 4 and the effect random number of “600” is allocated to the number of notices 5 Therefore, it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effect is allocated so as to be most likely to appear.

  In the character reach in the third processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer) until symbol fluctuation is stopped. ) Can come. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate productions is a jackpot confirmation production (special timer), and when the conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big success production due to the mission success. When four or more characters appear, a jackpot confirmation notice effect (mission success or special timer) appears. Therefore, in the table T5c, the number of variation at the time of the loss is up to three (the total of the number of the candidate effects for the timer on the variable side and the number of the candidate effects for the timer on the notice side is up to three). Is not allowed to appear.

  Moreover, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot-determined effect (special timer). Therefore, when the number of advance notices 5 is selected when the variation number is 8, or when the advance number is 10 or 12, the advance notice is issued. When the number 4 is selected, and when the notice number 3 is selected at the time of the variation number 14, the execution of the jackpot determination effect (special timer) is determined. As described above, when the notice timer effect is performed in the double timer mode, the appearance ratio of the special timer described later is higher than when the notice timer effect is performed in the single timer mode. In addition, it is possible to expect not only to win a big hit but also to shift to a high probability time saving state and to execute a 16-round big hit game. In particular, when a mission effect is executed in the double timer mode, it is possible to further have such a sense of expectation. It will be possible to create a great production situation.

  Incidentally, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) appearing when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation degree than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in) appearing when the variation number is 11 or 12. This is as described above. However, in the table T5c which is referred to when the above-mentioned third processing state is established, in the table T5c, the variation number 10 is “an effect pattern in which“ mission success (special display) ”is displayed and then stopped with a big hit symbol. In consideration of the "executable", the number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher than those in the case of the variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). With this, the game entertainment when the mission success (special display) is displayed is improved.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the relationship that is substantially the same as the relationship between the variation numbers in the character reach is set. . However, in SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the variation number The variation number 20 at the time of hit is higher in the number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the announcement effect than the variation number 18 (the higher the expected number of large hits, the more the number of advance notices is likely to increase). Also, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than in character reach.

  As will be described later, in SP reach in the third processing state, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation) until symbol fluctuation is stopped. , Cut-in B, character B operation). However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission, so that when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmed notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5c, up to five variable numbers corresponding to the SP reach at the time of the loss (up to a total of five pieces of the variable-side timer target candidate effects and the number of the notice-side timer target candidate effects on the notice side). Only the timer target candidate effect is allowed to appear.

  FIG. 157 is an aspect of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and is in the fourth processing state in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5532). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5d referred to in the process of step S5543 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 157, the table T5d is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed. When 6 is acquired, the table T5d is not referred to. However, since it is referred when the mission effect is not executed, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17 corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) in which a conversation notice appears as the effect content of the fluctuation effect. , 21 have been acquired, the table T5b is also referred to. Therefore, in the table T5d, the effect random numbers are also allocated to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for the respective notice numbers.

  Similarly, since the table T5d is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, at least two timer target candidate effects are selected separately for each variation number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Is allocated. However, for a variable number in which a timer-targeted candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the content of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer target candidate effects as the content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be assigned as the effect content of the notice effect in accordance with the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be assigned (variation numbers 13 and 21).

  Similarly, in the table T5d, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the hit effect of the variation numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, up to three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit productions of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and up to two timer target candidate effects are produced for the hit productions of the variation numbers 13 and 14. Only allocated. However, in Variation Nos. 7 and 8, the timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the production content of the variation production, whereas in Variation Nos. 9 to 12, the production content of the variation production is 1 One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and as for the variation numbers 13 and 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect. It has become. Therefore, the variation numbers 9 to 12 are synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is substantially allocated to each of the change numbers 9 to 12, and the variation numbers 13 and 14 substantially correspond to two or more notice effects. It is synonymous with directing each production.

  Then, for example, the variation number 14 is substantially the same as the rendering random number of “1000” assigned to the number of advance notices 4, so that the variation numbers 7 to It can be said that among the fourteenth, the most noticeable effects are allocated so as to be most likely to appear.

  Note that, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the relationship that is substantially the same as the relationship between the variation numbers in the character reach is set. However, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher in SP reach than in character reach.

  In addition, in the table T5d, the production random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as the table T5c, but since the production random numbers are referred to when the mission production is not executed, the table referred to when the mission production is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is smaller than T5c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505), it has been determined whether the notice-side timer effect is performed in the single timer mode or the double timer mode (step S5505). S5506), and further, whether or not a decision to perform a mission effect has been made as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507, S5532) (steps T5507 and S5532). After determining the number of appearances (preliminary productions that can be the production target of the preliminary timer production) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, and S5543), any type of preliminary announcement is made as the timer target candidate production by the determined number. A new production, or even a preview production A determination process as to whether to effect target Ma effect (step S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  FIG. 158 is an aspect of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing state in which a decision to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure showing an example of table T6a-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing processing of Step S5508 (Step S5509).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in the table T6a-1 (step S5509: number of notices 1), the table T6a-1 is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in a single timer mode. Therefore, one announcement effect determined to be executed as a timer target candidate effect is naturally set as an effect object of the announcement timer effect (in the figure, a circle indicates the announcement timer effect). It is performed as a production target). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, if it is required to determine N (two or more) advance effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5509: number of advance notices N), N timer target candidate effects are required. The announcement effect is determined, and one of them is determined as the effect object of the announcement timer effect.

  In this case, it is required to determine N (two or more) preview effects as timer target candidate effects, and N-1 of them (one in a single mode, two in a double mode) When the following number of effects are to be directed to the notice-side timer effect (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544), even if effects of the same effect combination of N pieces are selected as timer target candidate effects. It is desirable to make the jackpot expectation different depending on which of the effects is determined as the notice timer effect. For example, a first effect (for example, a conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early timing in one effect pattern and a second effect (for example, a character A) that appears at a relatively late timing in one effect pattern Is selected as a timer target candidate effect, a later effect (for example, a character A operation) is performed on the advance effect (for example, a character A operation) than when the first effect (for example, a conversation notice) is set as the effect object of the advance effect timer. It is set so that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) becomes higher when the effect is to be produced by the timer (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even if a variable number for executing “conversation notice” or “cut-in A, B” is acquired as the effect content of the variable effect, the notice effect "Conversation notice" and "cut-in A, B" can be determined as the production contents. However, as a result, if it is determined that the same production appears in both the production content of the variable production and the production content of the preview production, the control to make this appear separately as the production content of the preliminary production is not performed. The process of setting the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) appearing as the effect contents of the effect as the effect object of the notice timer effect is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544).

  For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1), the case where “conversation notice” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect with the change numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 or the case where “cut” is made with the change numbers 11 to 14 When “In A” is determined as the production content of the notice effect, or when “Cut-in B” is determined as the production content of the notice effect with variation numbers 19 to 22, the production contents of the variable effect and the production of the notice effect It is decided that the same effect will appear in both the content and the content. However, in this case, the control that separately appears as the content of the announcement effect is not performed, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) that appears as the effect content of the variable effect is set as the effect object of the notice timer effect. Processing is performed.

  When it is determined that a specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appears in both the effect contents of the variable effect and the effect contents of the notice effect, this is separately defined as the effect contents of the notice effect. May be set so that the specific effect (the effect content of the notice effect) on the side that appears separately is set as the effect object of the notice timer effect.

  In addition, since this table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1) is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make a notice of conversation), it is also shown in FIG. 148. As described above, when the fluctuation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the "conversation notice" are acquired as the contents of the fluctuation effect, or "conversation notice" is selected as the timer target candidate effect (contents of the notice effect). In the case (PTN1), a special display (mission success) is displayed, and it is definitely suggested that a big hit symbol appears.

  In this regard, in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 at the time of executing the "conversation notice" as the content of the fluctuation effect, the variation numbers 8, 12, and at the time of not executing the "conversation notice" as the content of the fluctuation effect It is set so that the ratio of determining “conversation notice” as the content of the notice effect is lower than that of 16, 20. That is, as described above, when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect produce "conversation notice". However, in the case where the two timer effects are directed to the same effect, basically, the big hit expectation is higher than when the two timer effects are directed to different effects. This is because the degree is set to be low. This makes it possible to relatively lower the appearance ratio of the special display (successful mission) when both the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect target “conversation notice”.

  The same applies to the effect contents of the variable production other than the “conversation notice”. For example, among the variable numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, the variable number for which “cut-in B” is not executed as the content of the variable production effect Of the 15 and 16, the variation number 15 at the time of loss is assigned 150 effect random numbers, while the variation number 16 at the time of hit is assigned 250 effect random numbers. On the other hand, among the variation numbers 19 and 20 that execute “cut-in B” as the content of the variation effect among variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, 250 variation random numbers are included in the variation number 19 at the time of loss. On the other hand, only 200 effect random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 20 at the time of hitting.

  In other words, in this case, if “cut-in B” is to be directed only by the variable-side timer effect in the variable numbers 15 and 16, both the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect appear in the variable numbers 19 and 20. Thus, the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol becomes higher as compared with the case where both of them are directed to “cut-in B”. Thus, in a situation where two timer effects are simultaneously displayed in the count, whether or not those timer effects reach the predetermined numerical value in the same effect target will function as an important effect element, and during the count display, It becomes possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment.

  Also, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach, in the variation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 at the time of hitting, until the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol variation). In the special timer mode, the effect (for example, a probable change suggestion effect during a jackpot game or a high round suggestion effect) that appears after the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern instead of the effect that appears in The execution of the notice timer effect can be determined. Although the special timer will be described later, in this embodiment, the special timer may not appear even if it is determined in step S5509 that the special timer is to be generated. The execution state of the special timer, including the presence / absence of the special timer, will be determined in the process of step S5514.

  Here, in the notice side timer effect, there is a case where the big hit expectation degree is relatively high even if the total number of counts from the start of the count display to the end thereof is small (for example, the start of the fluctuation display is started). On the other hand, in the variable-side timer effect, control is performed so that the expected degree indicated by the timer effect is always lower than the case where the total number of counts from the start of the count display to the end thereof is smaller than the case where the count is large. You may.

  As will be described later, such a special timer not only definitely indicates that a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, but also has a high probability time-saving game state or a 16-round big hit when it appears. The fact that the rate at which the game is executed is relatively high can be said to be more beneficial for the player than the timer effect that targets another effect. Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By controlling, a feeling of expectation when a special display (at the time of successful mission) appears is more appropriately played (steps S5509 and S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (the number of advance notices 1), among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variation side timer effect (mission success) for which the conversation notice is directed appears. 100 random numbers are assigned to the special timer for the fluctuation numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, while the variable timer effect (mission success) for which the conversation notice is directed does not appear. In the variation numbers 8 and 12, only 50 effect random numbers are allocated to the special timer.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even when the special display (mission success) does not appear, when a mission effect (show a conversation notice) is performed (steps S5509 and S5534), the mission effect (conversation) is performed. By controlling the appearance ratio of the special timer to be higher than when the notice is not performed (steps S5524 and S5544), a sense of expectation when a mission effect (appear the conversation notice) appears. Is played more suitably.

  In addition, when the timer effect is performed in a double manner by the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is lower than when the timer effect is performed in the double manner by only the notice timer effect. It is set to be low. Further, even when the timer effect is performed in a triple mode of one variable-side timer effect and two notice-side timer effects, one of the notice-side timer effects targets the same effect as the variable-side timer effect. In this case, the appearance ratio of the special timer is set to be lower than in the case where the same effect is not set as the effect target in the advance timer effect and the variable timer effect.

  FIG. 159 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a figure showing an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing processing of Step S5523 (Step S5524).

  As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variation numbers 10 and 14 have Fifty effect random numbers are assigned, and twenty effect random numbers are assigned to variation numbers 8 and 12. As described above, when the mission effect (appear a conversation notice) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer is used as compared to when the mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (table T6b-1). It is clear that the appearance ratio is set to be low.

  Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is referred to when the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the variable effect. The table T6b-1 (the number of notices 1) is also referred to when variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the losing variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), the effect random numbers are allocated to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

  In addition, in the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, a variation-side timer effect that targets "conversation notice" as the effect content of the variation effect appears. When "conversation notice" is selected as the effect content, both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are executed with "conversation notice" as an effect object. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), when "conversation notice" is selected in the change numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, "other notice numbers" The production random numbers are distributed so that the big hit expectation is lower than when "conversation notice" is selected.

  The same applies to the production contents of the variable production other than such "conversation notice". For example, for "cut-in B" in which both the variable timer production and the notification timer production in SP reach can be the production targets, The allocation is performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1).

  Similarly, this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is also referred to when it is determined that the notice-side timer effect is to be executed in a single timer mode. One announcement effect determined to be executed as a timer target candidate effect is naturally set as an effect object of the announcement timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, if it is required to determine N (two or more) advance effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5524: number of advance notices N), N timer target candidate effects are determined. The same applies to the case where the notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as the effect object of the notice timer effect.

  In contrast to the timer-based preliminary lottery when the preview-side production timer is performed in such a single mode (steps S5509 and S5524), the timer-targeted preliminary lottery when the preview-side production timer is performed in a double mode (step S5534, step S5534). Also in S5544), when both the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect target the same effect, a big hit is obtained compared to the case where the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect target different effects. The effect random numbers are distributed basically in the same manner, for example, the degree of expectation is set to be low.

  FIG. 160 shows an example of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing situation in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6d-2 referred when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

  As shown in FIG. 160, in this table T6d-2f (step S5544: number of notices 2), the table T6d-2f is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the form of the double timer. Therefore, both of the two preview effects determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are naturally set as the effect targets of the preview timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, if it is required to determine N (three or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5544: number of notices N), N timer target candidate effects are determined. The notice effect is determined, and two of them are determined as the effect objects of the notice timer effect. Such a process is also performed in the timer-targeted preliminary lottery in another effect situation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d-2f, when both the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect target the same effect, the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect It is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than in the case where a different effect is set as the effect target.

  Also, if one of the two announcement effects selected as the announcement effect timer is the same effect as the variation effect timer, one of the two announcement effects selected as the special announcement effect timer is changed. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than when the effect is not the same as the effect timer.

  In particular, in the case of the variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22, both of the two preview effects selected as the preview-side production timers are the same production target as the two variable-side production timers appearing in one production pattern. Has a much lower expectation of big hits.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of such a timer-based preliminary lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, and S5544), which of the timer-target candidate renderings is to be produced, the production of the notification-side timer rendering is performed. When each of the targets is determined, a count display lottery is performed as the process of step 510.

  In this count display lottery (step 510), each of the effects determined to appear as the timer target candidate effect is to appear at which timing in one effect pattern (fluctuation pattern), and furthermore, the effect target A decision is made as to from which timing in one effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) the notice-side timer effect to be counted and displayed is executed. It should be noted that, in this determination, when the appearance timing of the effect that is the production target of the notice timer effect is late, the big hit symbol (special display mode) is compared to when the appearance timing of the production that is the production target of the notice timer production is early. ) Is desirably performed so as to increase the appearance ratio.

  FIG. 161 is an aspect of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision to not execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number corresponding to character reach is selected.

For example, when variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 161, first, as an effect on the variable effect (effect pattern) side,
・ Normal production period during which normal production is performed,
・ Normal reach production period after the decorative pattern has reached the reach mode under the background of the normal production, ・ Character reach production period in which the production is switched to a background different from that of the normal production, and ・ The hit of a big hit As shown in the figure, it is determined that each period such as the symbol stop period in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (big hit symbol, losing symbol) appears sequentially within a 50-second fluctuation time (a period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed). (See the “variable time” and “variable PTN effect” rows in the figure).

  Also, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, a variation side timer effect is started as an effect pattern in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and is displayed for 10 seconds. It has been determined that the appearance of "" and the appearance of "cut-in A" after the variable-side timer effect is started again after a predetermined time has elapsed and displayed for 10 seconds.

  As described above, even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), the effect pattern is not limited to this, and the variation-side timer effect is started a predetermined time after the start of the symbol variation, and this is counted and displayed for 5 seconds. After that, another effect pattern such that a “conversation notice” appears can be selected. Also, as described above, the selection of such an effect pattern has been executed before the lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) relating to the notice effect.

  Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), with the appearance of each of such effect periods appearing sequentially and the effect contents on the fluctuating side have been determined, it is determined in the timer target advance lottery (here, step S5524). A determination is made as to at what timing each of the effected object of the notice-side effect timer and the notice-side effect timer that counts and displayed for the effected object appear. In addition, in addition to the timer target candidate production that is the production target of the notice side production timer in the timer target preliminary lottery, if the timer target candidate production that is not the production target is further determined, the timer target candidate production that is not the production target The appearance timing is also determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

  For example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (in this case, step S5524), as shown in FIG. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute the conversation notice and the notice timer effect. In this embodiment, the conversation notice 1 among the conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure is the form having the lowest expectation of the big hit, and is selected such that the expectation of the big hit increases as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), any one of the conversation notices 1-4 is selected based on the hit or the change pattern of the big hit (change numbers 7 to 14) and the like. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, at this time, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 in which the conversation announcement appears as the content of the variation effect are acquired, the above-described announcement effect is also performed in the above-described timer target announcement lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. And in this case, apart from the conversation announcement performed as the content of the variable production, the count display of the timer production is not displayed as the conversation announcement as the production content of the variation production, The control to be performed is executed (the mode of the conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  As shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the above-mentioned timer target preliminary lottery (here, step S5524), “reserved” is set as the content of the preliminary production. If "change" is determined, it is determined in which of the pending changes 1 to 5 to execute the pending change and the notice timer effect, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. If so, it is determined in which of the cut-ins A1 to 3 the cut-in A and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed, respectively, and the "actor A operation" is determined as the effect of the notice effect. If it is, it is determined which of the character A operations 1 to 4 is to execute the character A operation and the notice side timer effect, respectively. If Ma "is determined so that the determining whether to perform the announcement side timer effect in any aspect of special timers 1 and 2.

  In this embodiment, the mode with the smallest number is the largest hit expectation degree in any of the effect selections of the pending changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A effects 1 to 3, and the accessory A operations 1 to 4 in the figure. , And the selection probabilities are set so that the larger the number, the higher the expectation of big hits. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are effects that indicate that a big hit symbol (special display mode) always appears.

  As shown in FIG. 161, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, three timings at which the notice timer effect can appear in one effect pattern (here, character reach) are performed. Although they are prepared (at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F), their appearance timings are determined by a plurality of types of timer target notices (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, and special timer). Then, at such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2, and a little before the appearance timing of the notice F), a plurality of counts are prepared as the total count display when the notice side timer effect appears ( 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.), and even if any of those count display totals is displayed, it predicts which effect the production target is. The configuration is difficult.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7-14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, 10 seconds is reached at the timing that arrives shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings. , 20 seconds, or 30 seconds, a notice timer effect with a total count display count can appear. However, when a notice timer effect with a total display count of 10 seconds appears, it is difficult to predict which of the conversation notice 3 and the hold change 3 is being executed only in the effect pattern of the character reach. When a notice timer effect with a total display count of 20 seconds appears, any of the hold change 4 and the cut-in A2 is executed only in the effect pattern of the character reach. It has become difficult to predict.

  In this regard, when a notice timer effect with a total count display of 30 seconds appears at a timing that comes shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings, only the character reach effect pattern is used. When viewed, only the aspect of the accessory A operation 2 can be executed. However, looking at the effect pattern of SP reach described later (see FIG. 162), since the mode of the accessory A operation 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, the appearance timing of the notice E2 is slightly shorter. Even if a notice timer effect with a total display count of 30 seconds appears at the timing of arriving before, in any case, the notice timer effect including the character reach or the SP reach may be performed. It is difficult to predict what will happen.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to leave unclear which effect is to be directed when the notice-side timer effect appears (the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of the effect to be directed). Since it is possible, the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained until the count display of the timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0). In this embodiment, when a notice-side timer effect having the same total number of displayed counts appears at the same timing, basically (unless there is a balance with a mission effect or the like), the effect target is a conversation notice. At that time, the big hit expectation is the lowest, and the big hit expectation is set to be gradually higher in the order of hold change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, action B action.

  Further, according to the above configuration, when the notice timer effect appears, a plurality of count display totals (the big hit expectation differs depending on the length of the seconds) are prepared regardless of the appearance timing. Therefore, when the notice timer effect appears, it is possible to give an interest about which is the total number of the count display, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the notice timer effect appears. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, even if it is the notice side timer effect that appears at any timing, the effect target is set to be difficult to predict at the time of appearance, but one effect (For example, a special timer) may be included so as to include a mode in which the effect target is set to be predictable. The appearance timing at which the notice side timer effect may appear may include an appearance timing at which only one count display total appears.

  In the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. 161, for the sake of convenience of explanation, when the same effect is to be produced in both the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, the variation It is described as if the count display is performed for the same number of seconds in the side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, or as if the count display is ended at the same timing. However, as described above, actually, even when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed to the fluctuation timer effect and the notice timer effect, the end timing of each count display is made different. While one of the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect first reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) and is terminated, the other count display is continued.

  In the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. 161, it is described as if the count display of the timer effect is performed in seconds, but the unit of the number appearing in the count display is “seconds”. It is not limited to. Therefore, for example, the time required for changing the number of the count display in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect may be different, or the time required for each change in the count display in the variable timer effect is constant. It is not necessary.

  In the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. 161, when “special timer” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect, the notice timer effect in any of the special timers 1 and 2 is used. To decide what to do. In other words, in this case, after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach), when 20 seconds have elapsed (during the execution period of the big hit game), the count display becomes a specific numerical value (here, 0). Will be reached. Then, thereafter, an effect indicating that the type of the big hit is a type that is advantageous to the player (for example, a hit type for shifting to a high probability time saving state, a hit type in which a 16 round big hit game is performed, etc.) is started. As described above, such an aspect of the special timer is set in step S5514 described later.

  In this embodiment, it is determined which of the special timers 1 and 2 is to be selected in the count display lottery (step S5511). You may make it set in step S5514.

  Also, instead of the timing when the variable display according to the hold information is started, when the count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, it is a case where the timer prefetch effect described later is not executed. Also, a mode (for example, during timer preparation) displayed in a timer prefetch effect described later may appear (for example, appear with a predetermined probability) for a predetermined time until the count display is started.

  FIG. 162 is an aspect of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision to not execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number corresponding to SP reach is selected.

For example, when variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 162, first, as an effect on the variable effect (effect pattern) side,
・ Normal production period during which normal production is performed,
・ Normal reach production period after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode under the background of the normal production, ・ Character reach production period in which the production progresses by switching to a background different from that of the normal production,
-The decorative design is not stopped during the character reach production period, and the SP reach production period appears in a form where the stage progresses further.-The decorative design is stopped so as to show the hit of the big hit (big hit design, losing design) In the processing status, it is determined that each period such as the symbol stop period to be performed has been determined to sequentially appear within a fluctuation time of 90 seconds (a period during which the symbol fluctuation is performed) (“variation time” in FIG. Refer to the row of “fluctuating PTN effects”).

  In this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 has been acquired, a variation side timer effect is started as an effect pattern in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and is displayed for 10 seconds. It has also been determined that the appearance of "" and the appearance of "cut-in B" after the variable timer effect has been restarted after a predetermined time has elapsed and displayed for 10 seconds.

  In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1) as well as in the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to select another effect pattern such as starting a variable timer effect after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol change, displaying the count for 5 seconds, and then displaying a "conversation notice". ing.

  In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), for example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect contents of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in which of the conversation notices 1 to 6 the conversation notice and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed. In this embodiment, among the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation of the big hit, and is selected so that the expectation of the big hit increases as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), any one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the hit or the change pattern of the big hit (change numbers 15 to 22), etc. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, similarly, when the fluctuation numbers 17, 18, 21, and 22 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect are acquired, the notice is also provided in the above-mentioned timer target announcement lottery (step S5524 in this case). When "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the effect, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. And in this case, apart from the conversation announcement performed as the content of the variable production, the count display of the timer production is not displayed as the conversation announcement as the production content of the variation production, The control to be performed is executed (the mode of the conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  As shown in FIG. 162, when the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach have been acquired, in the above-mentioned preliminary lottery for the timer (here, step S5524), the effect content of the above-mentioned announcement effect is “held” If "change" is determined, it is determined in which of the pending changes 1 to 7 to execute the pending change and the notice-side timer effect, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. If so, it is determined in which of the cut-ins A1 to 5 the cut-in A and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed, respectively, and the "actor A operation" is determined as the effect of the notice effect. If it is, it is determined in which of the character A operations 1 to 4 to perform the character A operation and the notice side timer effect, respectively, and as the contents of the notice effect described above, If "in B" is determined, it is determined in which of cut-ins B1 to 5 the cut-in B and the notice timer effect are to be executed, respectively. Is determined, it is determined in which mode of the accessory B operations 1 to 4 to execute the accessory B operation and the notice timer effect.

  In this example of the SP reach, any one of the effect selections of the pending changes 1 to 7, the cut-ins A1 to 5, the accessory A operations 1 to 4, the cut-ins B1 to 5, and the accessory B operations 1 to 4 in the figure. Also in the above, the mode with the smallest number is the mode with the lowest expectation of big hits, and the selection probabilities are set so that the bigger the number, the higher the expectation of big hits.

  In the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the notice-side timer effect can appear in one effect pattern (here, SP reach) are prepared (at the start of the change, the notice E2). A little before the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F, just before the end of the normal reach production period, within the character reach production period, the timing when the SP reach production period starts), 161 is similar to the example shown in FIG. 161 in that it is difficult to predict which effect the effect is when the effect appears.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, a mode in which the production target is set to be predictable by associating only one production target with the total count display (for example, the cut-in B timer 40 seconds) or a notice Appearance timings at which the side timer effect can appear include an appearance timing at which only one count display total appears (for example, 10 seconds at a timing when the SP reach effect period starts).

  As described above, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the time of appearance of the notice effect or the notice timer effect determined in the timer target notice lottery is determined. In this regard, when the number of preview effects determined by the preliminary lottery for the timer is two or more, in addition to the production of the production of the preliminary timer production, the production timing of the production that is not the production target of the production of the preliminary production timer Etc. are also determined. Further, when the notice timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, at what timing the two notice timer effects and the effects to be produced appear, respectively (two notice timer effects). (Including whether or not to execute the count display at the same time) is also determined.

  However, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the number of preview effects determined in the timer target advance lottery, whether or not the mode is the double timer, and a mission effect (show a conversation advance) are executed. It is desirable that the notice effect and the appearance time of the notice timer effect determined in the timer target notice lottery be determined in different modes depending on the processing status such as whether or not. For example, in a processing situation in which a mission effect (show a conversation notice) is executed, if a conversation notice appears at a relatively early stage after the start of the change, the effect of the staging is lacking. It is desirable to make it easier to select a conversation notice that appears at a later stage. Further, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when a situation in which each count display progresses simultaneously appears, compared to the case where each count display is executed in a period in which each count display does not overlap in one effect pattern. Because it is possible to have a real feeling that the display is being performed, the selection ratio is higher when there is a situation where each count display progresses simultaneously than when there is no situation where each count display progresses simultaneously. It is desirable to do. In addition, when the number of preview effects determined by the timer target preliminary lottery is two or more, the appearance timing of the preview effects is determined so that the preliminary effects do not appear at the same time.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the notice side timer effect can appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice F, shortly before the end of the normal reach effect period, the character reach effect period Of these, the timing at which the SP reach production period is started) is within a period in which each announcement production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, action B action) can be performed. It is desirable to set. That is, in this case, even if the notice effect does not appear at a specific timing, the notice timer effect is started, or even if the notice timer effect is not started at the specific timing, the notice effect is performed. It can be expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed. In addition, a notice effect appears at a specific timing, and further, an effect state in which a notice timer effect is started may occur. Therefore, it is expected that an improvement in game entertainment will be achieved. And in this case, when the notice effect is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change (at a specific timing), the notice effect is not executed when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the notice-side timer effect is started is higher than at times.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, the special timer is set as the process of step S5511, where the notice side timer effect determined by the count display lottery is set as the special timer. It is determined whether it is possible.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, apart from the timer target candidate effect (the notice effect that can be the effect object of the notice timer effect), the non-target effect The non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and the non-target notice F can be executed as a notice effect (a notice effect that cannot be an effect target of the notice timer effect). Among these, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the big hit expectation degree is lower than the non-target notice F when the count display of the notice timer effect is not performed, whereas the notice timer effect is In the situation where the count display is performed, the big hit expectation degree is set to be higher than the non-target notice F.

  In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the count display is not performed. When the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed, there is a relationship that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol (specific symbol mode) appears becomes lower than when The notice side timer effect (count effect) such that the degree of expectation of the big hit symbol (specific symbol mode) appearing higher than when the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed. Display) can be executed. Thus, a notice-side timer effect in which the count display is performed in such a manner as to greatly increase the degree of expectation when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears (the non-target notice E2 ( The timer effect in which the first effect is started and ended is referred to as a “special timer”.

  In other words, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect having a lower degree of expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), whereas the count display is not performed. During the performance, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect). Therefore, although the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is not a target of the effect of the notice side timer effect (count effect display) and has no relation to the effect, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is not completed until the count display is exhausted. One effect) can be made to be interested in whether or not it appears, thereby maintaining the game entertainment during the period until the count display is exhausted and the predetermined effect (timer target candidate effect) is performed. It is expected to work.

  Also, in the case where the countdown display is started with the total number of counts where the notice timer effect is small, the big hit expectation degree is set to be lower than the case where the count display is started with the count total where the countdown timer effect is large, By realizing the control related to such a special timer, even if the notice side timer effect starts the count display with a small total number of counts, the non-target notice E2 is displayed while the count display is being executed. Can be made to be conscious of the possibility of the appearance of the game, and a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed. In this sense, if the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being performed, the premium mode in which the jackpot is confirmed in the subsequent effects (such as a notice of a conversation, cut-in, and the operation of a character) in the timer effect. Is desirably controlled so as to increase the appearance ratio of. Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  In this embodiment, the non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as a so-called step effect, and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is provided on condition that the non-target notice E1 appears. It is assumed that it can appear in. The non-target notice E3 is allowed to appear on the condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 respectively appear. In this embodiment, the big hit symbol always appears when the non-target notice E3 appears. Like that. According to such a configuration, if the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the notice timer effect is being performed, the user is interested in whether the non-target notice E2 appears. Can be maintained, and the entertainment of the game during the count digestion period can be appropriately maintained.

  However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 do not necessarily have to be executed as a so-called step effect. The target notices E1 and E3 need not always be prepared. In addition, the order in which the non-target notice F appears after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears is not limited to this. For example, after the non-target notice F (second effect) appears, The target notice E2 (first effect) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may appear first in all notice effects, or may appear last in all notice effects. May be set as appropriate. In addition, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related (suggested) to the type of the reach effect performed in the variable display.

  If the non-target notice E2 is not realized as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 be performed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectation degrees. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the mode with the highest expectation of big hits, the expectation of big hits may be higher than the non-target notice F even if the count display is not performed. . However, a comparison between the jackpot expectation (expected degree including all aspects) that can be expected when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is not performed and the jackpot expected degree that can be expected when the non-target notice F appears appears. , It is required that the big hit expectation is higher when the non-target notice F appears.

  In this regard, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the state where the count display is being performed (in the case of the special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in one of a plurality of modes including a mode with a low jackpot expectation. In addition, it is desirable that the big hit expectation is higher than the non-target notice F in any case. That is, in this case, an effect situation is created in which the jackpot expectation is dramatically increased even though the non-target notice E2 is executed in a manner with a low jackpot expectation. Even if there is a moment of disappointment due to the appearance, it is expected that the game display is expected to be improved by confirming that the count display is being executed. In this sense, even in the case of such a special timer, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in a mode with a low jackpot expectation degree, and the non-target notice E2 can be executed in any mode including the low mode. Is executed (and irrespective of whether or not another noticeable effect has occurred), it is desirable that the expected degree of appearance of the big hit symbol is the same. Note that the degree of expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target notice E2 appears in a state where the count display is being performed, it is desirable to set so that a highly expected form of the plurality of forms is likely to appear.

  Further, when the count display is performed across the non-target notice E2, for example, even if the count display is started with any of the different total counts (for example, “10” and “5”), the same number (for example, It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when “1”). At this time, of the candidates (for example, “20”, “10”, “5”) as the total count appearing at the start of the count display, less than half of the candidates with the smallest total count (for example, “5”). It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when the number (number less than 2.5) is reached. In this manner, by preventing the non-target notice E2 from appearing until the count display is completely consumed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment during the period until the count display is completed.

  Note that the non-target notice F may be made executable in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations. However, in the situation of the special timer, the non-target notice F has the highest jackpot expectation. Even if it appears in the mode, it is required that the non-target notice F be set so that the big hit expectation is not higher than the non-target notice E2 (for example, the mode with the lowest big hit expectation).

  In addition, the non-target notice E2 may be allowed to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the time when the variable display is started. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears with the same total count at the same timing, a case where the non-target notice E2 is straddled and a case where the count display is not straddled occur, and the game entertainment at the time when the count display is executed is generated. It is expected to maintain.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, with respect to the variable-side timer effect, the relationship between the non-target notice E2 in the execution period of the count display among the candidates that can be selected as the execution mode (effect pattern) is described. Such an embodiment is not included.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when it is determined in the process of step S5511 that the notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512 is performed. If the first timer non-target announcement lottery is performed as the processing of step S5510, and it is determined that the mode of the announcement timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) cannot be a special timer, the processing of step S5525 As a result, a second non-target preview lottery is performed.

  It should be noted that the case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer means, for example, in the examples shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, an effect mode (for example, FIG. 161 shown in FIG. 161, cut-in A1, cut-out A1, cut-out A1, and character action 1, 2, etc.) are selected, and whether or not the production mode can be a special timer Are classified in advance.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first non-timer preliminary lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is referred to in the second non-timer preliminary lottery (step S5525). It is a figure showing an example of table T7b.

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, in the non-timer preliminary lottery (steps S5512 and S5525), it is not possible to be the target of the production of the preliminary timer effect on the basis of the jackpot hit result, the variation pattern (variation number), and the like. A determination process is performed as to which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F prepared as the effect is to be executed.

  In the table T7a (first timer non-targeted lottery) referred to during the special timer, the notice E2 is compared with the table T7b (second timer non-targeted lottery) referred to when the special timer is not used. The big hit expectation when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) to be executed is selected is greatly increased. More specifically, when the mode of executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is higher than when the mode of executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected. ing.

  On the other hand, in a table T7b (second timer non-target announcement lottery) referred to when the special timer is not used, the announcement F is executed when the mode of executing the announcement E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected. The big hit expectation is lower than when the mode (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  In this embodiment, when the table T7a referred to at the time of the special timer is compared with the table T7b referred to when the timer is not the special timer, when the mode of executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected. There is a change in the distribution of the production random numbers and a change in the jackpot expectation, but when the mode of executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected, there is no change in the jackpot expectation, and even the distribution of the production random numbers changes. But not the same.

  According to the effect by such a special timer, when the count display is performed in a manner of straddling the non-target notice E2 (special timer mode), the straddle of the non-target notice F without straddling the non-target notice E2 ( Compared to the case where the count display is executed in a mode other than the special timer), the rate at which the effect mode with a high expectation appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, or the big hit symbol appears when the symbol effect is stopped The percentage will be higher.

  Furthermore, in one symbol effect in which the count effect is not executed, when both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed, one symbol in which the count effect is not executed. In relation to the non-target notice F (second effect) not being executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) being executed, there is a relationship in which the rate of appearance of the big hit symbols is higher than when the non-target notice F2 (first effect) is executed. Even when the (second effect) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed within one symbol effect, the count effect is performed in the first mode across the non-target notice E2 (first effect). Is executed, both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed in one symbol effect, respectively, and the non-target notice F2 (second effect) straddles the non-target notice F (second effect). Count effect in two aspects So the proportion of big hit symbol appears is higher than when it is the row.

  That is, in this case, even if the “non-target notice E2 (first effect)” and the “count effect” are each a symbol effect to be executed, the count effect is “non-target notice E2 (first effect)”. Was executed, or “Exclusion notice F2 (second production)” is executed so as to indicate that the degree of expectation has been further raised without straddling “non-target announcement E2 (first production)”. , The degree of expectation is higher when "non-target notice F (second effect)" is not performed than when "non-target notice F (second effect)" is performed in one symbol effect Will be higher. Therefore, effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, cut-in A, action of character A operation, cut-in which are different from any of the production effects of the count production (non-target notice E2 (first production) and non-target notice F (second production)) B, character B operation, etc.), and although it is a non-target notice E2 (first production) or a non-target notice F (second production) that is not originally relevant, "the count production ends. Until the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears before the "Even if the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears after the count effect is finished, The second effect) will be further executed ”, and the like, and the display of the game during the period from when the count display is exhausted to when the predetermined effect (timer target candidate effect) is performed will be performed. To maintain It will be waiting.

  In this embodiment, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) which is not executed as the target effect of the count effect crosses the count effect, it is not executed as the target object of the count effect. When the count effect straddles the non-target notice F (second effect), the relationship between the expected degrees is reversed from the relationship between the expectation degrees when the count effect does not cross. However, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) may be executed as an effect target of the count effect. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, the directivity regarding whether or not the count effect straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect). Will also be added.

  Either the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect) can be executed as the target of the count effect, and the other is executed as the target of the count effect. It may be something that does not.

  In addition, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the player is more likely to expect a big hit than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect). It may be configured such that the rate of transition to a high-quality game state (such as a high-probability time-saving game state) increases. At this time, the rate of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (such as a high-probability time-saving gaming state) may be 100%.

  Further, as described above, the count effect is executed in one of a plurality of modes (the total number of counts, the display mode, the timing at which counting is started, and the like). In this regard, the count effect in the specific mode is executed between the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F2 (first effect). It is preferable that the execution is performed so that at least there is a case where the execution is performed across the notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, for example, even if a count effect of the same number of seconds is started, either a case where only the notice E2 (first effect) is straddled, or a case where only the notice F (second effect) is straddled. Since it is possible to advance the count effect while making it unclear, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment during the period in which the count effect is being executed.

  Furthermore, the count effect of the specific mode is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not to straddle the notice F (second effect), or to straddle the notice E2 (first effect). In addition to the case where the notification is executed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect), the case where the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) are executed so as not to cross each other is also performed. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) appear over the entire period from the start to the end of the count effect. become able to. In this case, the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) may appear within the same symbol variation in which the count effect of the specific mode has been executed, but within the same symbol variation. May not appear.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the rate at which the big hit symbol appears is higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect). It was configured as follows. However, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears does not change regardless of which mode the count effect is executed. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a completely independent effect that is not affected by the effect such as "which aspect appears as the count effect", and the count effect is executed. The performance at the time can be suitably enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), it is possible to cause a change in the rate at which the big hit symbol appears depending on the manner in which the count effect is executed. desirable. According to such a configuration, depending on whether the target to which the count effect is straddled is the notice E2 (first effect) or the notice F (second effect), the mode as the count effect is a big hit expectation degree. Since it is possible to make the effect characteristics different from each other, it is expected that the entertainment interest during the period in which the count effect is performed is appropriately maintained.

  However, even if the count effect that straddles the notice F (second effect) is the mode with the highest degree of expectation among a plurality of modes, the degree of expectation when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect) is exceeded. It is desirable not to have them, for example, to have the same degree of expectation. The expectation may be 100%.

  Also, of the count effects of at least some of the count effects of the plurality of modes, at least some of the count effects may straddle the notice F (second effect) but do not straddle the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to do. In this way, the number of modes as a count effect that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect) is made smaller than the number of modes as a count effect that can straddle the notice F (second effect). By doing so, it is possible to suggest the possibility of straddling the notice F (second effect) depending on which mode the count effect is performed. However, it is desirable to prepare at least two or more multiple modes for the count effect that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect).

  The notice F (second effect) is executed before the notice E2 (first effect), and the notice E2 (first effect) is executed after the notice F (second effect) ends. It may be executed as described above. At this time, when a count effect that straddles the notice F (second effect) appears during execution of the notice F (second effect), the notice effect F (second effect) is executed but the count effect that straddles this does not appear, It is desirable that the ratio of appearance of the count effect that straddles the notice E2 (first effect) be increased. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, even if the count effect is ended not by the notice E2 (first effect) but by the notice F (second effect), the notice E2 (first effect) is performed. It is possible to expect that a count effect that straddles will appear further, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes an effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination. In this regard, even if the effect pattern does not include the notice F (second effect), it is desirable that the notice E2 (first effect) and the count effect straddling the notice pattern E2 can appear. According to such a configuration, even if the notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that a count effect that straddles the notice E2 (first effect) will appear. Become like However, when the notice F (the second effect) does not appear, the notice E2 (the first effect) is displayed in comparison with the case where the notice F (the second effect) is executed but the count effect that straddles this does not appear. It is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the straddling count effect be low.

  In addition, as for the number of modes of the count effect (the total number of counts, the display mode, the timing at which the count is started, and the like) that can cross over the notice F (second effect), a plurality of modes are prepared. As described above, even if the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, the notice F (second effect) is not necessarily executed during the period in which the count effect is executed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even when the count effect is executed in a desired manner, whether or not the notice F (second effect) appears during the period in which the count effect is executed is determined. This makes it possible to provide interest, and the entertainment of the game while the count effect is being performed can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, a plurality of modes of the count effect (a total number of counts, a display mode, a timing at which counting is started, and the like) that can cross over the notice E2 (first effect) are prepared. As described above, when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, it is desirable that the notice E2 (first effect) is always executed within the period in which the count effect is executed. . According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed in a desired manner, it is suggested in advance that the expectation degree of the count effect greatly increases over the notice E2 (first effect). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately improve the game entertainment while the count effect is being performed.

  Then, the timer non-target preview lottery (the first timer non-target preview lottery and the second timer non-target preview lottery) is performed to determine which of the non-target previews is to be executed. Next, step S5513 is executed. It is determined whether or not it is determined that the above-described special timer is to be executed as the process (1).

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in the situation where the specific type of reach effect (character reach) is selected, the notice timer based on the result of the big hit determination (such as a hit or a variation pattern) is determined. It is possible to execute a control that starts an effect (count effect display) and continues the count display even after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (effect display). In other words, in this case, the count display will continue even after the effect pattern (effect display) according to the result of the jackpot determination is completed and the non-display is performed. It becomes difficult to predict the fluctuation time (reach type) of the game, for example, an effect in which the count display started during the symbol change is related to the effect in the big hit game state after the symbol stops For example, it is possible to make the subsequent production development interesting.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period of the big hit game after the symbol is fixed and stopped, or the big hit game) During the period), the first special effect in which the ratio of winning in the type of transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state when it appears, or the number of rounds (16 rounds) in which the expected value of the amount that can be acquired as a prize when it appears is large. The second special effect in which the ratio of execution is high can be executed. Note that these ratios may include 100%. Then, a notice-side timer effect, which is directed to an effect started after the appearance of such a big hit symbol (special display mode), is started before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, and its count is counted. The display is controlled to be continuously executed even after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

  That is, in this case, the count display of the notice side timer effect started before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears does not end when the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, and the big hit symbol (special display mode) does not end. When a specific numerical value (here, 0) is reached after being continuously executed even after appears, the first special effect or the second special effect comes to appear. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, it not only definitely indicates that a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, but when it appears, a high-probability time-saving game state or a 16-round big hit game Is relatively high, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, in addition to the fact that the big hit has been won in the big hit determination, the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a high probability time saving game state, a 16 round big hit game Is determined), and when it is determined that the specific type is determined, the special timer may be controlled to appear with a higher execution probability than when determining that the specific type is not determined. Desired.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the processing of step S5513, the execution of whether or not to make the special timer appear next is performed as the processing of step S5514. The execution mode of the special timer is determined, including the presence or absence.

  For example, in the process of step S5514, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a high-probability time-saving gaming state or a type that generates a 16-round big hit game). As a result, when the jackpot is not the specific type, by making a determination that the special timer does not appear with a predetermined probability, when the special timer appears, the expectation that the jackpot is the specific type is increased by the thinned-out amount. Will be able to do it. Note that the expectation may be 100%. Further, when it is determined that the special timer is not to appear, other notice effects (timer target candidate effect, non-target notice) and the notice timer effect may appear instead of the special timer.

  In this embodiment, in the process of step S5514 after the determination of the execution of the special timer is once performed in the timer target preliminary lottery, the type of the big hit is determined, and the special timer is executed based on the result. Whether or not to execute a special timer in the processing of step S5514 is determined by performing a timer target preliminary lottery based on the type of the big hit other than the hit of the big hit. It may not be decided again whether or not to do so.

  Also, for the first special effect or the second special effect after the appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) (for example, the start interval period of the big hit game or the big hit game period after the symbol is stopped), the big hit is The execution may be performed in any one of a plurality of modes that are special types and have different degrees of expectation. That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) when the special timer appears, the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in a high expectation mode among a plurality of modes. It will be.

  Further, in this embodiment, for an effect (first special effect or second special effect) after the appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode), a predetermined time has elapsed since the big hit symbol (special display mode) appeared. 161 (in the example shown in FIG. 161, the timing at which 20 seconds have elapsed), but a plurality of timings (for example, the first at which 15 seconds have elapsed after the appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode)) (The timing and the second timing after 30 seconds have elapsed). That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first mode that reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) when 15 seconds have elapsed since the appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) (or shortly before), and the big hit symbol When 30 seconds elapse (or shortly before) 30 seconds after the (special display mode) appears, one of the second mode that reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) is selected and displayed.

In this case, it is set so that the rate at which the special type jackpot is obtained is higher when the effect appears at the second timing than when the effect appears at the first timing, and the jackpot is the specific type. In some cases, if the execution of the special timer is performed in the second mode higher than that in the first mode, the count display after the appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) is continued. It becomes possible to have an additional interest.
Note that these ratios may include 100%. By the way, when the effect does not appear at any of the first timing and the second timing, the rate at which the special type jackpot is obtained is set lower than when the effect appears at the first timing. .

  In addition, the special timer is displayed as, for example, “timer preparation” during the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, and the “timer preparation” is displayed. The count display may be started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears while the player is in the state. In other words, during the big hit game, the time required for the digestion of each round game fluctuates according to the progress of the game. Therefore, in the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears. If the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined numerical value during a specific round game, and further, to set the start of an effect to be directed. In this regard, if the count display is started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of “timer preparation” is maintained until a specific round game during the big hit game is started. Then, by causing the count display to start in accordance with the start of the specific round game, the effect that the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value during the specific round game and the effect to be a production target is executed. Can be set. At this time, a display such as “timer preparation” may not be performed until the count display is started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

Further, when the count display is started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, the count display is also different during the execution of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears. May be started.
The other notice side timer effect may be such that the count display is completed before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears and the effect to be directed appears, or the big hit symbol ( After the appearance of the special display mode), the count display ends, and an effect to be directed appears (double special timer).

  It should be noted that the effect during the fluctuation display is different from the effect during the jackpot game, and an effect at the time of effect switching different from any of the effects (for example, an opening effect) is usually performed between them. It is often done. In this regard, in the switching period in which the effect at the time of such effect switching is executed, the count display of any timer effect is set so as not to reach the predetermined value, and the count display is not displayed during the switching period. It is desirable to make the player recognize that the two effects (here, the effect during the variable display and the effect during the big hit game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, even while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display is reduced by the amount of time that has elapsed, and when the count display is displayed again, It is desirable to control so that the value is smaller than the value of (the value is larger when counting up instead of counting down).

  If the execution mode of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514), or if the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), then, in step S5515, the above-described timer target announcement lottery or counting is performed. After the notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like is set in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery ends. As a result, drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined by the preliminary lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect at the timing at which each effect should appear in the effect design fluctuation process.

  On the other hand, after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) is performed when it is determined that the notice timer effect has not been won (NO in step S5503), various lotteries (notice side) related to the notice timer effect are performed. Without performing a timer type lottery or a single lottery, etc.), the timer target candidate production (preliminary notice) with contents (table) according to whether the mission production is decided to be performed as a result of the second mission production lottery (step S5552) An effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, and S5564) is performed for a notice effect that can be an effect target of the side timer effect.

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
In the fifth processing state in which a determination to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (YES in step S5552) is made without executing the notice side timer effect (NO in step S5503). First, based on the number-of-notifications determination table referred to in the fifth processing state, during the execution of one effect pattern, how many of the timer target candidate effects as the contents of the effect A determination process as to whether or not to appear is performed (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of notice effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5554).

In the sixth processing state in which it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (show conversation notice) (NO in step S5552). First, based on the number-of-notifications determination table referred to in the sixth processing state, during the execution of one effect pattern, how many of the timer target candidate effects as the contents of the effect A determination process as to whether or not to appear is performed (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed to determine which type of notice effect will appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5564).

  Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice-side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (show a conversation notice) is executed. When the decision to the effect is made, the upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate production is set to be larger than when the decision to execute the mission production (make the conversation notice appear) is not made. To control.

  FIG. 165 is a fifth processing situation in which a determination is made that a notice effect is not to be performed (NO in step S5503) and that a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) is to be executed (YES in step S5552). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5e referred to in the processing of step S5553 when the table T5e is present in FIG. In FIG. 166, a sixth determination is made that the notice effect is not to be performed (NO in step S5503), and the mission effect (appear for conversation notice) is not to be performed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T5f referred to in processing of Step S5563 when it is in a processing situation.

  First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when a mission effect is performed, a loss variation pattern (a mission cannot be successful) in which a conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. When the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation pattern) are acquired, the table T5e is not referred to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, in the table T5f, which is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the loss fluctuation pattern (the mission success may occur) in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the fluctuation effect. The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the non-existent variation patterns are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, the effect random numbers are also assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for the respective notice numbers.

  In the tables T5e and T5f, both are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states in which the notice timer effect is not executed. In these processing conditions, the effect of the notice timer effect is produced. It is not essential to select any of the timer target candidate effects that can be the target. Therefore, in each of the tables T5e and T5f, an effect random number is assigned to each variation number so that the timer target candidate effect does not necessarily have to be selected (the number of advance notices is 0).

  In addition, among the contents of the same reach effect (character reach and SP reach) in the table T5e and the table T5f, the change number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect is changed. As for the contents of the production, the rate at which a larger number of timer-subject candidate productions are selected is higher than the variable numbers for which the timer-subject candidate productions (conversation notice or cut-in A) do not appear. In the variation number 7 that is the reach, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear in the variation, and in the variation number 15 that is the SP reach at the time of loss, only the timer candidate candidate effect can appear up to the maximum of five. The points that are not performed are the same as those of the above-described table T5a and the like.

  149. Then, as shown in FIG. 149, in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice side timer effect is not executed, how many of the timer target candidate effects appear as the effect content of the notice effect. Are performed (steps S5553 and S5563), and then a determination process (steps S5554 and S5564) is performed to determine which type of notice effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the determined number. . However, if it is determined that none of the timer target candidate effects will appear as a result of the above-mentioned number-of-announcements determination processing (steps S5553, S5563) (number of advance notices 0), in the timer-targeted advance lottery (steps S5554, S5564), One processing result that does not select any of the timer target candidate effects regardless of the variation number will always be selected.

  FIG. 167 shows a fifth processing situation in which a determination is made that a notice effect is not to be performed (NO in step S5503), and a mission effect (show a conversation notice) is to be executed (YES in step S5552). FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-1 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 1 as a result of executing the processing of step S5553 (step S5554). FIG. 168 is a fifth example in which a determination is made (YES in step S5552) not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-2 referred when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5553 in the processing situation (step S5554).

  In FIG. 169, a sixth determination is made (NO in step S5552) to not execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-1 referred when the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5563 (step S5564) in the processing situation. FIG. 170 shows a sixth example in which a decision is made not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503), and not to execute the mission effect (show conversation notice) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-2 referred when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5563 (step S5564) in the processing situation.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f which are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations are used when it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect. Since it is referred to, none of the N preview effects that are determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are set as the effect targets of the notification side timer effect, and all of them are normal. It is executed as a mode of a notice effect (in the figure, the mark “x” indicates that it is executed as a normal notice effect).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, in the tables T6e and T6f which are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations, the same effect is produced in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. Since it is not set as a target, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22 corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the content of the variation production are executed. An effect random number is allocated separately for each variable number so that a conversation notice is not selected as a notice effect to be performed. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, the variation numbers 11 to 14, 19 to 19 corresponding to the loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot be successful) in which the cut-ins A and B appear as the production contents of the variation effects. When 22 has been acquired, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that the cut-ins A and B are not selected as the announcement effects to be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f which are referred to when the fifth and sixth processing states are performed are referred to when the notice-side timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the effect (here, special timer) based on the premise that the notice-side timer effect is performed is not included in the notice effects to be selected.

  In addition, in the table T6e which is referred to when the fifth processing state is set, the table T6e is referred to when it is determined that the mission effect (show the conversation notice) is executed. As also shown, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the “conversation notice” are acquired as the contents of the fluctuation effect, or as the timer target candidate effect (contents of the notice effect) Is selected (PTN1), the point that the special display (mission success) is displayed and the big hit symbol appears definitely is the same as in the case of the above-described table 6a.

  Also, in the table T6f which is referred to when the sixth processing status is set, the table is referred to when the mission effect (show the conversation notice) is not executed, so that the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the variable effect. The fact that the production random numbers are assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation patterns to be performed (variation patterns in which the mission cannot be successful) is assigned separately for each notice number. Is the same as

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, even if it is determined in the processing of step S5503 that the notice-side timer effect is not to be executed, after the timer-targeted notice lottery (steps S5544, S5564) is performed, Which of the non-targeted effects E1 to E3, F prepared as effects that cannot be targeted for the effect of the notice side timer effect based on the jackpot hit result, the fluctuation pattern (variation number), etc. A determination process (third timer non-target preview lottery: step S5555) is performed.

  The table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, but basically has the same form as the table T7b (second timer non-targeted preliminary lottery) referred to when the timer is not a special timer. When the mode for executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is lower than when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  Then, after the third timer non-target announcement lottery (step S5555) is performed, next, the timer target announcement lottery (steps S5544 and S5564) and the third timer non-target announcement lottery (step S5515) are performed as the processing of step S5515. After setting the notice effect determined in step S5555) or the like in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery ends. As a result, drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined by the preliminary lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect at the timing at which each effect should appear in the effect design fluctuation process.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the notice-side timer effect is not to be executed, the timer target notice lottery and the third non-timer target notice lottery are separated. I decided to do it. However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5503 that the notice timer effect is not to be executed, it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F in relation to the notice timer effect, The timer target announcement lottery and the third timer non-target announcement lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

  In the above-described special timer mode (the non-target notice E2 is set such that the big hit expectation is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice timer effect is not performed. In the situation where the count of the notice timer effect is displayed, the big hit expectation is set higher than the non-target notice F). Since it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F, the timer target preliminary lottery and the third timer non-target preliminary lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

  Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the advance notice timer effect, a determination process regarding which effect is to be executed in what manner as the advance effect is performed. May be determined after determining in what form the effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the notice-side timer effect and the execution mode.

  By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a prize (acceptance of a game ball) occurs in the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, whether to perform a prefetch effect on the hold information corresponding to the prize. A determination process is performed as to whether or not there is (steps S5245 and S5255). In this regard, in this determination processing, the hold mode for changing the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the hold display targeted for the pre-reading effect is based on the information on the hit or the change pattern of the jackpot determination included in the hold information. Lottery for a change effect (lottery for the presence or absence of execution, display mode), lottery for a look-ahead zone effect that spans multiple changes (lottery for the presence / absence of execution, lottery for the execution mode (color, number of continuous executions, etc.)), etc. In addition to the above, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the variable display according to the hold information is a target of the “timer look-ahead effect”.

  Here, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which, when a variable display (variable display of a production target) that has been in a suspended state when being executed is being executed, a rate at which a notice-side timer production appears within the variable time becomes high. For example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, “Timer is being prepared”) is displayed at the start timing of the special symbol change display that is started after the winning timing (the timing of winning the timer prefetch effect). ") Is displayed. The reason why the predetermined image (for example, “timer is in preparation”) does not appear at the winning timing (time when the timer look-ahead effect has been won) is to determine which hold information corresponds to the timer look-ahead effect. In order to make it difficult to recognize.

  According to such a timer look-ahead effect, it is suggested that a higher ratio of the notice-side timer effect appears over a plurality of variable displays, without specifying which of the hold displays corresponds to. As a result, it is expected that game entertainment will be maintained over a plurality of variable displays. However, of the preceding effects (look-ahead effects), including such a timer look-ahead effect, a type of continuous (or continuation) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. When performing an effect (advance period effect), if the same type of effect (advance period effect) and the execution period overlap, the effect becomes too complicated and the target / purpose There is a concern that it is not possible to understand whether it is a production or not, and the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, when determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (prefetch determination at the time of winning), the preceding period effect corresponding to the other hold information that has been previously won is not being executed and is waiting for execution. A determination is made as to whether or not the state is satisfied. Then, at least on condition that the preceding period effect according to the other winning information that has been previously won has not been executed and is not in a state of waiting for execution, the preceding period effect such as the timer look-ahead effect is newly added. Is determined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the two preceding period effects from being performed at the same time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, as the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the timer pre-reading effect, a similar state continuous pre-reading effect in which at least a part of the stop symbol appears in the same mode (color of a number, etc.) over a plurality of changes, or a background image over a plurality of changes It is possible to adopt a look-ahead zone effect or the like in which is changed to a special mode. In the above-described processing (pre-reading determination at the time of winning), among the preceding period effects, not only that the preceding period effects of the same type do not appear overlapping, but also that the preceding period effects of different types are executed. Are controlled not to overlap. Among the pre-reading effects, for the type of effect that is performed over a plurality of variable displays by specifying which of the pending displays corresponds to (for example, a pending change effect), the execution status of these preceding period effects It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of the situation, but if a new prize occurs when the preceding period effect is being executed or is waiting to be executed, a new prize will be generated when it is not in that situation It is desirable to perform the prefetching determination at the time of the prize so that the appearance ratio of the effect of the type (for example, a change-on-hold effect) is reduced as the prefetching effect according to the winning as compared with the case where the winning is performed.

  In this way, during a preceding period effect such as a timer look-ahead effect (an effect of a type that is continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display corresponds), is executed. Is to perform a prohibition control to prevent the occurrence of a prize of a game ball even if a prize is newly generated for the preceding period effect. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. However, when such a prohibition control is performed, the frequency of the preceding period effect being performed as the preceding effect is reduced as much as the preceding period effect is subjected to the prohibition control, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. You.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when performing the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information while the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information has not yet started, first, the specific effect Set information indicating that the status is restricted. If the hold information is newly stored while the information is set by the previously stored hold information, the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is at least ended. Until the effect of the preceding period corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed until the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information has been changed and the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information has been completed. The control is performed so that a preceding period effect corresponding to the suspended information can be executed.

  That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is not permitted at the time when the hold information is newly stored, thereafter, the game is advanced and stored first. When the game situation is such that there is no concern that the effect of interference with the preceding period effect corresponding to the pending information will occur, the execution of the preceding period effect once determined that the execution is not allowed is allowed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the frequency at which the preceding period effect is performed while performing the prohibition control for the preceding period effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  More specifically, in the first special figure prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new prize is generated, first, the first special hold is performed. It is determined based on the value of the number counter or the counter value of the second special pending number counter, etc., what order the pending order (digestion order) of the new winning is. For example, in the case of the first special figure pre-reading process, first, the hold information corresponding to the new winning is stored in any of the first special symbol hold storage area a to the first special symbol hold storage area d. Determine if it is in the state. Then, after this, the precedent period effect execution target is stored in the hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed, which is stored prior to the new winning. Determine if any are missing. As a result, even if there is specific hold information for which the preceding period effect is to be executed, the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new prize is not completely prohibited, but the specific In the period after the end of the variable display according to the suspension information, the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is controlled.

  Hereinafter, a technique for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed game situation as an example.

  FIG. 171 (a) stores the hold information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is being executed and the three pieces of hold information (all the first special symbols) in the state where the variable display is not executed. It is a diagram showing an example of a table T7a referred to in the first special figure pre-reading process when a new prize (first special symbol) occurs in a state where it is present. FIG. 171 (b) shows the hold information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is being executed and the two pieces of hold information (both first special symbols) in the state where the variable display is not executed. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7b referred in a 1st special figure pre-reading process, when a new prize (1st special symbol) arises in the memorized state.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this table T7a, on-hold information (first special symbol) in a state where the variable display is being executed and three pieces of on-hold information in a state where the variable display is not executed (any one) A new special prize (first special symbol) depending on which of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is included in the preceding period effect or none of the first special symbol). It is possible to determine from which timing the corresponding pending information can be targeted for the preceding period effect (the number of prefetchable fluctuations).

  For example, in the table T7a, both the hold information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is being executed and the three pieces of hold information (all the first special symbols) in the state where the variable display is not executed are displayed. Is not the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display corresponding to the hold 1 (the first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a) and the hold 2 (the first special symbol hold storage) A variable display corresponding to the second hold information stored in the area b) and a variable display corresponding to the hold 3 (third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b); The new prize is targeted for four variable display periods including a variable display corresponding to a hold 4 corresponding to a new winning (fourth hold information stored in the first special symbol holding storage area d). It is possible to perform the preceding period There is determined (determination that prefetching variability number is 4). That is, in this case, at the timing after the variable display in the running state ends and the variable display according to the first hold information is started, the variable display according to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is performed. The execution of the preceding-period effect targeting is performed.

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold information in the state where the variable display is being executed is targeted for the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 2 and the variable display according to the hold 3 are displayed. It is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new prize can be executed over the three variable display periods with the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the winning (the fact that the number of possible prefetch changes is 3). Is determined). That is, in this case, the timing after the variable display in the running state ends, the variable display according to the first hold information further ends, and the variable display according to the second hold information starts. Thus, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is permitted.

  Here, even if the hold information in the state where the variable display is being executed is targeted for the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1, the variable display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 It is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new winning can be executed over four variable displaying periods of the variable displaying according to the above and the variable displaying according to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning ( (A determination that the number of possible prefetch changes is 4) may be made. However, in this case, the preceding period effect that appeared in the variable display in the running state and the new preceding period effect started with the variable display according to Hold 1 are executed continuously, and these are performed. Is the preceding period effect the same effect (whether the previous preceding period effect is continuing) or is another preceding period effect newly started (whether the previous preceding period effect has ended) A method of setting this as a prohibition period so that a preceding period effect is not newly generated in the first variable display after the preceding period effect ends (a method adopted in the table T7a) because it becomes difficult to distinguish the preceding period effect. It is more desirable to adopt Note that such a method is employed not only in the table T7a but also in other tables T7 (tables T7b and tables not shown).

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the preceding period effect, two variable displays, a variable display according to the hold 3 and a variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning. It is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new prize can be executed over the period (determination that the number of possible prefetch changes is 2). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state ends, the variable display according to the first hold information ends, the variable display according to the second hold information further ends, and the third change display ends. At the timing after the start of the variable display according to the hold information, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is permitted.

  Also, in the table T7a, when the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period effect, only the variable display period corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning, the preceding period for the new winning It is determined that the effect can be executed (determination that the number of possible prefetch changes is 1). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state ends, the variable display according to the first hold information ends, the variable display according to the second hold information ends, and the third hold information ends. At the timing after the variable display corresponding to the new prize is further ended and the variable display corresponding to the fourth hold information is started, the preceding period for the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning. The execution of the effect is allowed.

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 3 is a target of the preceding period effect, it is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning is not executable (the fact that the number of possible prefetch changes is 0). Judgment) is performed. That is, in this case, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is not allowed.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as an object of determination as to whether or not it is the target of the preceding period effect. However, since it is basically the same as the table T7a, the description is omitted. Also, tables similar to these are prepared at the time of holding 2 prize or at the time of holding 1 prize, but the description is omitted.

  By the way, at the time of winning the hold 4 or the like, it is assumed that there are two pieces of hold information targeted for the preceding period effect. In this case, however, based on the hold information of the later hold order in the hold order, Is determined to be the number of prefetchable fluctuations. For example, at the time of winning the hold 4, if the variable hold and the hold 2 are subject to different preceding period effects in the table T7a, the hold 2 in the later order of the hold is the target of the preceding period effect. Is determined, "the number of prefetchable fluctuations = 1".

  In addition, as described above, such control relating to the prohibition period of the preceding period effect is a type of effect that is continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. The purpose is to set the prohibition period of the effect of this type based on the execution status. Accordingly, the prohibition period of the preceding period effect does not occur depending on the execution status of the effect (holding change effect) of the type that specifies which of the hold displays corresponds, and the execution status of the preceding period effect (read ahead) (Even if the number of possible changes = 0), the type of effect (holding change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported is not prohibited.

  In addition, even in the prohibition period of the preceding period effect, of the timer pre-reading effect, the timer pre-reading effect performed in the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode to be described later causes the notice-side timer effect to appear. This may appear because certainty is not required.

  In addition, as the prohibition control of the preceding period effect, when the holding information of the second special symbol side is included in the holding information in the state where the variable display is not executed, the holding information of the second special symbol side is used as the leading information. Even if it is not the target of the period effect, control may be performed so that a new preceding period effect is not started until the variable display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is ended. Good. In this case, the period of the next variable display after the variable display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is not required to be the prohibition period, and a new preceding period is started from the time when the next variable display is executed. It is desirable to allow the production to start.

  Further, in the process of confirming the state of the look-ahead effect set for the hold in this way and determining the number of possible prefetch changes according to the result, each time the hold is completed, or a new prize is generated. It is desirable to carry out each time.

  Then, in the first special figure prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the number of possible prefetch variations is determined in this way, the determined period (prefetchable A determination process is performed to determine what kind of preceding period effect is to be executed (including whether or not it is executed) based on the number of changes.

  For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the hold information corresponding to the new winning. As described above, as the type of the preceding period effect, there are a plurality of look-ahead zone effects that display a background image related to a plurality of fluctuations, and a plurality of specific preceding displays that indicate that there is a high possibility that the notice-side timer effect will be executed. It is possible to prepare a timer look-ahead effect that is displayed over the fluctuation as a selection candidate. Then, as a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, a determination process regarding in what form the preceding period effect of the determined type is to be executed is performed.

  FIGS. 172 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 which are referred to when determining the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect in a situation where the number of prefetch changes is four. It is. FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b) show examples of tables T8b-1 and T8b-2 which are referred to when determining the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect in a situation where the prefetch variable number is three. It is.

  As described above, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which the appearance rate of the notice-side timer effect increases when the hold information that is the target of the look-ahead is consumed when it appears. The control MPU 1511a executes the timer prefetch effect in the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, the third preceding mode, or the like in which the appearance ratio of the notice timer effect is different.

  Here, the first preceding mode is, for example, a mode in which a first mode such as “preliminary feeling of occurrence of a timer” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when a timer prefetch effect is executed in the first preceding mode. The probability of executing the notice timer effect is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

  In the second preceding mode, for example, a second mode such as “timer occurrence chance” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the timer prefetch effect is executed in the second preceding mode, the notice side The probability of execution of the timer effect is set to approximately 80% (step S5502).

  In the third preceding aspect, for example, a third aspect such as "timer is being prepared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The effect is always executed (even if it is not 100%, the probability may be higher than the second preceding mode) (step S5502).

  Then, based on the information on the hit of the big hit for the pre-reading determination, the information on the variation pattern number for the pre-reading determination, and the like, it is determined which execution mode to execute as the timer pre-reading effect. For example, in the situation where the number of possible prefetch changes is 4, referring to the tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. In a situation where one of the modes is selected based on the information and the effect random number allocated to the information and the number of possible prefetch changes is 3, the tables T8b-1 and T8b- shown in FIG. 2, any one of the modes is selected based on the information for prefetching corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random number allocated to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the table T8a-1, in the state where the first preceding mode is finally displayed, the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started. The following three modes are prepared as modes.
When the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3 or hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect is not caused to appear in any mode, and the timer look-ahead effect is targeted. A mode in which the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (a feeling of occurrence of the timer) when the change display of the hold information is in the hold 1 state. The change display of the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is held. In the state of No. 3, the timer prefetch effect does not appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is in the state of Hold2, the timer prefetch effect is performed in the first precedent effect. A mode in which the information is displayed in a manner (a feeling of occurrence of a timer) and is continued even in the state of the hold 1. Hold this timer prefetch effect when dynamic display is in the state of the hold 3 and displayed in the first prior embodiment (feeling of timer generator) 2, aspects to be continued in a state of hold 1

Further, in the table T8a-1, the following six modes are available as the modes in which the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started in a state where the second preceding mode finally appears. It is prepared.
When the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3 or hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect is not caused to appear in any mode, and the timer look-ahead effect is targeted. A mode in which the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) when the change display of the hold information is in the state of hold 1-The change display of the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is hold 3 In the state of, the timer look-ahead effect is not caused to appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 2 state, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the second preceding mode. (Timer Occurrence Chance) Displayed and Continued in Hold 1 State • Hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect When the variable display is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) and is continued in the hold 2 and hold 1 states. When the variable display of the hold information is in the state of Hold 3, the timer prefetch effect does not appear in any mode, and the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is in the state of Hold 2. , The timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (a feeling of timer occurrence), and the timer look-ahead effect is displayed when the fluctuation display of the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 1 state. Is changed from the first preceding mode (timer generation chance) to the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) and displayed. When the variable display of the held information is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (a feeling of occurrence of the timer) and is continued in the state of hold 2; When the fluctuation display of the hold information targeted for the effect is in the state of Hold 1, the timer look-ahead effect is changed from the first preceding mode (presence of timer occurrence) to the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) and displayed. When the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 3 state, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (a feeling of occurrence of the timer), and the timer look-ahead effect is provided. When the variable display of the hold information that is the subject of the hold is in the hold 2 state, the timer look-ahead effect is changed from the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) to the second preceding mode (timer generation switch). Change) to display and continue this even in the state of hold 1

  Note that the timer look-ahead effects of the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are displayed in the state of Hold 1 and then displayed continuously even after the hold information is exhausted and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. In addition, the mode may be changed further in the variable display started by digesting the suspension information. Further, in the variable display, when the notice-side timer effect is started, the timer look-ahead effect in the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode may be hidden, but when the notice-side timer effect is started. However, the display is continued even when the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are not displayed before the notice-side timer effect is started, or after the notice-side timer effect is started. If the display is not displayed at a predetermined timing thereafter, it becomes possible to add interest. If the notice-side timer effect is not executed despite the execution of the timer look-ahead effect in either the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started, the non-display is not performed. It will be displayed. Further, it is more desirable that the timing of the non-display is the same as the timing of the non-display when the notice-side timer effect is executed (the predetermined timing, etc.).

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the first precedent mode (preliminary feeling of timer generation) or the second precedent mode despite the appearance of the timer prefetch effect in which the appearance ratio of the notice side timer effect increases when any of them appears. The timer look-ahead effect of (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (during timer preparation) appear as different effects from each other. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, when the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are displayed, the timer look-ahead effect is changed from these preceding modes to the third preceding mode. This is not adopted for the display mode. Also, in a situation where a timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) is appearing, a timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (a premonition of timer occurrence) or the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) appears. In addition, in the situation where the first look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (timer occurrence) or the second look-ahead mode (timer occurrence chance) appears, the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) appears. Can occur.

  Therefore, in a situation where the number of possible prefetch changes is four, referring to table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a), the first preceding mode (presence of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) In addition to determining the execution mode relating to the timer prefetch effect, the execution mode relating to the timer prefetch effect according to the third preceding mode (during timer preparation) is further determined with reference to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. 172 (b). It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the table T8a according to the present embodiment, in the state where the third preceding mode finally appears, the pending information of the timer prefetching effect is displayed. Only one of the following modes is prepared as a mode in which the variable display is started.
-When the fluctuation display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is in the state of Hold3, the timer prefetch effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation is in progress), and this is displayed in Hold2 and Hold1. Mode to continue even in the state

  However, in the case of the third preceding mode, the timer is not limited to the above-mentioned first mode, and similarly to the case of the above-mentioned first preceding mode, when in the state of the hold 3 or the hold 2, neither timer look-ahead effect appears, and , A mode in which the third preceding mode is displayed may be selected.

According to such a configuration, the case of executing the first look-ahead effect in the first preceding mode (presence of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance), and the case of the third preceding mode (timer generation chance) The case where the look-ahead effect is executed, and both the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (foreseeing the occurrence of the timer) or the second preceding mode (the timer occurrence chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (the timer is being prepared) The case where each is executed comes to appear.
Then, when both the timer look-ahead effect in the first preceding mode (foreseeing the timer occurrence) or the second preceding mode (the timer occurrence chance) and the timer look-ahead effect in the third preceding mode (the timer is being prepared) are respectively executed, Since there is a situation where it is definitely suggested that the notice-side timer effect is to be executed, the user can enjoy the effect such as changing from the first preceding mode to the second preceding mode with a margin and a sense of security. Will be able to

  In addition, control may be performed such that the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding mode, the timer prefetch effect of the second preceding mode, and the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding mode can appear simultaneously.

  It is desirable that the target pre-reading effect of the third preceding aspect (timer preparation) be continued to be displayed even after the target suspended information is consumed and the variable display is started. Then, in this case, after the target hold information is consumed and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) is not displayed when the notice-side timer effect is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third precedent mode of the timer look-ahead effect is adopted as the mode in which “timer is being prepared” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. You may make it employ | adopt as a mode which starts the count display toward the effect (the effect which appears in the unexecuted fluctuation | variation display) made into the effect target of a timer effect. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time during which the state of Hold 1 is continued (the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in the state of the fluctuation display when in the state of Hold 1) and the fluctuation display of Hold 1 are exhausted. The count display is performed for a total time including the time from the start to the production of the production targeted for the notice timer production, and the timer look-ahead production (third preceding mode) and the notice timer The effect is executed as one count display in which two variable displays are linked.

  In this regard, in the case where the third preceding aspect is realized as one count display linked to such a notice side timer effect, the count display is not performed in the hold 3 or the hold 2 and the count display is performed in the hold 1 state. It is desirable to execute. In other words, if the count display is started when the player is in the hold 3 or the hold 2, the effect (the effect set as the effect of the notice timer effect ( The remaining time until the start of the effect in the unexecuted fluctuation display) is changed, so that the count display for the same effect (count display until the predetermined number is reached) can be appropriately executed. This is because there is a concern that it will disappear.

  The table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173 (a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173 (b) are the same as those shown in FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b). Since it has basically the same relationship as the table T8a-2, the detailed description is omitted.

  Further, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the first special figure prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the determination regarding the pending change effect is made. Processing is also performed. The hold change effect is to change the hold display mode corresponding to the hold information acquired according to the winning to one of a plurality of modes different from the normal hold mode, so that the hold display is performed in any mode. It is intended to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit when the hold display is exhausted depending on whether the display is displayed.

  More specifically, as the hold display according to the present embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, a mode of blinking white, a mode of displaying blue, and a mode of displaying green , A red display, or a rainbow display. Basically, the big hit expectation when the display is suspended and displayed in a blinking white display Is low, and the big hit expectation is gradually increased in the order of blue, green, and red. When the hold is displayed in the form of displaying in the rainbow color, the probability that the big hit symbol appears when the hold is exhausted is 100. %. Note that the big hit expectation is naturally set for the normal hold mode, but the big hit expectation when the normal hold is displayed is set to be lower than the mode of blinking white. Alternatively, it may be set to be the same as or higher than the mode of blinking white.

  Therefore, normally, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, a first effect situation with a lower jackpot expectation than when displaying in green or red is provided. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a control that can provide a second effect situation in which the big hit expectation increases when a mode in which white or blinking or blue is displayed instead of green or red under predetermined conditions appears. Is executable.

  FIG. 174 shows the case where there is no one that causes the big hit symbol to appear in the hold information in the state where the variable display is being executed and the hold information (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) in the state where the variable display has not been executed. It is a figure which shows the normal time pending change table T9a referred. In addition, FIG. 175 shows an example in which a big hit symbol appears in the hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the hold information (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) in which the variable display is not executed. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special time pending change table T9b which is sometimes referred to.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new prize (acceptance of a game ball) occurs in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the first special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure In the pre-reading process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the hold information stored before the new winning and in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold It is determined whether any one of the large hits (1 to hold 3) causes the big hit symbol to appear (the big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination or the pre-reading determination and the winning is determined). Then, as a result, when it is determined that there is nothing to make the big hit symbol appear, the normal time table T9a ( By executing the hold change effect with reference to FIG. 174), usually, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, the first effect situation with a lower jackpot expectation degree than when displaying in red is normally performed. To be offered.

  However, it is determined that some of the on-hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the variable display is not executed and the big hit symbol is displayed before the new winning. In this case (when a rare event occurs), the second effect status is provided by executing the hold change effect with reference to the special-time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special hold change table T9b, the red and rainbow colors related to the hold display mode are first acquired as the hold information corresponding to the new winning. Regardless of the content of the "read-ahead information" or "read-ahead information on variation patterns", the effect random numbers are distributed so that they are not selected.

  Regarding the green color related to the hold display mode, even if the variation pattern (variation numbers 7-14) is such that the effect random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal-time hold change table T9a, the special-time hold change In the table T9b, effect random numbers are distributed so as not to be selected. In this regard, if the look-ahead information regarding the variation pattern is equivalent to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special time suspension change table T9b. In comparison with the change table T9a, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the appearance probability of green color is low both when the big hit is won and when the big hit is lost.

  On the other hand, with respect to the white blinking and the blue color related to the mode of the hold display, in the special hold change table T9b, the appearance probability thereof is increased both when the big hit is won and when the win is lost, compared to the normal hold change table T9a. The distribution of production random numbers has been made. In addition, white blinking and blue regarding the hold display mode can be selected in the special hold change table T9b even if the variation numbers are 1 and 2 that are not selected in the normal hold change table T9a. The distribution of the production random numbers has been made as described above.

  According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high expectation degree in which a big hit symbol appears (for example, an effect in which a notice timer effect for the action of the accessory B in the variation pattern of the SP reach appears) is executed. If a new prize occurs while the player is in the game (under predetermined conditions), if a green or red mode appears as a hold display corresponding to the new prize, a big hit symbol will appear in the high expected effect during the execution. The second production situation where it is relatively easy to have the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the high expected production during the execution when the white blinking or blue aspect appears while the expectation of Can be provided.

  In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect, the remaining time during which the state of Hold 1 is continued (the state of the variable display when in the state of Hold 1). Remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol) and the time from when the hold 1 is exhausted and its fluctuation display is started to when the production targeted for the production of the notice side timer production is started. Can be displayed. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears on the effect display device 1600, there is a possibility that the variable display ends before the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value and the next variable display starts. Therefore, it is expected that the control of the game using the above-mentioned special-time suspension change table T9b is combined with the control to improve the game entertainment.

For example, suppose that a count display of a notice side timer effect (or a timer preparation) appears during execution of a variable display (for example, SP reach) in a situation where a white blinking or blue hold display appears as a hold 1. Therefore, the second game progress can have a higher expectation that the big hit symbol appears than the first game progress described below.
-The effect of the notice on the timer side is the effect in Hold 1 that shows only a low degree of expectation (blinking white or blue), and is held after the running variable display (for example, SP reach) ends in the loss mode. The first game progress / notification side timer effect in which the change display according to the hold information of No. 1 is started is not the effect in Hold 1 indicating only a low degree of expectation (blinking white or blue), but the change during execution. The second game progress that is directed to the effect in the display (for example, SP reach)

  That is, despite the execution of the notice timer effect with a high jackpot expectation (for example, a jackpot symbol appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears), the notice timer effect with a low expectation (for example, In some cases, the effect in the hold 1 of a blinking white or blue color in which the big hit symbol appears only with a probability of only about several percent may be set as the production target, and the possibility of the big hit symbol appearing is greatly reduced. According to the above-mentioned second game progress, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such an effect situation, and it is special because the change display during execution is a big hit. Chance is increased by referring to the time-hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) and expecting that the hold display of the hold 1 is in an effect state of blinking white (high appearance probability) or blue. The fact that the notice timer effect with a high expectation of big hits is directed to “the effect in the running fluctuation display” also functions as if it supports “the running fluctuation display is a big hit”). Since the double will increase chances, it will be possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  The third preceding mode of the timer prefetch effect may be executed as “timer preparation” instead of the count display. That is, in this case, when the display is switched from the state in which “timer is being prepared” is displayed to the count display, it is possible to recognize that the notice side timer effect targeting at the effect in the variable display is to be performed. Therefore, when there is a suspended display that is blinking white or blue when the count display appears, it is possible to expect that a big hit symbol will appear in the variable display.

  On the other hand, in a situation where the hold display of green or red (especially red) is displayed, if the "timer preparation" is not displayed and the count display is started, the notice side timer effect is performed. In addition, not only does it become difficult to expect a big hit symbol from appearing in the variable display, but also the timer on the advance notice side so as to further increase the degree of expectation for the green or red (especially red) hold display. The production can no longer function. Therefore, if the display of "Timer is in progress" is displayed while the green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, the green or red (especially red) hold display is It is hoped that the count display will not be started, and it is expected that the gaming entertainment will be maintained within the period until the count display (preliminary timer effect) is started.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high jackpot expectation appears in the variable display during execution, a new winning is generated, and the suspension display of any of the modes such as blinking white, blue, green, and red is performed. Is confirmed, it is possible to predict at a predetermined probability whether or not a big hit symbol will appear in the variable display during execution, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  The hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is executed for a hold display corresponding to a new winning, but the effect target is actually “new Instead of "Whether a jackpot symbol appears in the variable display of the hold information (hold information that has changed hold) according to the winning", the "hold information stored before the new winning (hold not changed (Whether a big hit symbol appears in the variable display of (information)). Therefore, even if no hold change is performed when a new prize is generated, or if the above-described preceding period effect is prohibited, the special-time hold change table T9b is used according to the hold information subsequently won. When the hold change effect using is executed, the look-ahead effect can be performed as if the look-ahead effect occurred afterward for the hold information for which no look-ahead effect was performed. It is expected that game entertainment will be reduced due to not being performed.

  In the special hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected in some reach types, but similarly to the red mode, any variation pattern may not be selected. . In short, if the rate of appearance of a high expectation aspect that can appear as a hold display is a lower rate (including 0) than the normal-time hold change table T9a, white appears when the count display appears. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest when there is a blinking or blue display.

  Further, the pending change can be generated at the time of winning, at the start of the change, or at a predetermined timing during the change, and the number of times of the change may be plural. That is, in this case, even if the count display of the notice side timer effect is started in the variable display according to the hold display that is blinking white or blue, the blinking white or blue may change to green or red. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, in this embodiment, even during the change of the symbol performed in response to the hold-down, the display corresponding to the hold-indicated as the target of the hold-out (although it is not already in the hold-up state, As described above, the corresponding display is displayed, and the display mode corresponding to the hold display is further changed (hold change).

  However, when the holding change effect using the special time holding change table T9b is realized, a new prize is generated during the execution of the specific effect with a high expectation during the execution of the variable display, and the prize is generated. If the hold display corresponding to the above occurs in red, a special effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, a timer effect targeting the action of the character B, etc.) is being executed, and the big hit symbol is displayed in the variable display. It may be a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

  Therefore, a new prize is generated during a period in which a specific timer effect that is directed to at least the character B operation in the timer effect is being executed (during a period in which a specific effect with a high degree of expectation is being executed). Even if this is the case, it is desirable to control so that the hold display corresponding to the winning does not appear on the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the change in the hold is hidden. Further, it is desirable to keep the non-display state of the hold display even after the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value and the digestion is completed.

  However, in this case, the hidden display, which has been hidden, is not continuously hidden until the variable display is ended. For example, during the period of the variable display, a hit effect or a loss ( It is desirable to display a hold display that has been hidden after the timing of a loss effect suggesting a jackpot (losing a jackpot) and display the mode of the hold change. According to such a configuration, even if the hold display according to the new winning is red, it is already in a situation where it is suggested that it is a loss, so that the entertainment interest does not decrease, and the hold display Is red, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by including the holding information with high expectation of big hit in the holding.

  Note that the control related to the non-display of the hold display does not target all timer effects (notification effects), but rather a relatively large hit such as one in which the action of the character B is set as an effect target among the timer effects. It is desirable to execute only a specific timer effect with a high degree of expectation (a notice effect with a high degree of expectation).

  Further, as described above, when the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the third preceding mode (for example, the timer is being prepared) while the blue hold display appears. In this case, the count display (timer effect) is started in the fluctuation display before the blue hold display is exhausted, and it is desired that the game progresses in which the big hit symbol appears. In this regard, even in the case where the game progresses such that the game progresses, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the change, or whether the count display (timer effect) is not started or the change corresponding to the blue hold display is performed. In the variable display, the count display (timer effect) is started before the blue hold display is extinguished, so that a sense of thrill as to whether the count display is started in the display is given. The count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, rather than the rate (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started in accordance with the start timing of the variable display. It is desirable to control so that the ratio at which the start of the process is started is higher. Note that the ratio may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to control so that the ratio at which the count display (timer effect) starts when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display is higher than the case where the red hold display appears. . Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  The count effect (a hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b) in which such a double chance-up occurs is based on “hold information displayed in the second mode among a plurality of modes (for example, In the variable display of the identification information that is started by digesting the red prefetch hold, the hold information (for example, the blue prefetch hold) displayed in the first mode among the multiple modes is digested. The rate at which the jackpot symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed is higher than that of the started variable display of the identification information. Hold information having a slower digestion order than the variable display in the execution state when the specified count effect is being executed during the execution period of the variable display. Are displayed in the second mode (for example, red prefetching hold), the hold information is displayed in the first mode (for example, blue prefetching hold). The ratio at which the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in the execution state is lower than in the case. "

  According to such a configuration, when a red display (second mode) is performed for a variable display that is late in digestion order and has not been executed yet, the specific count is displayed in the variable display that is already in the execution state. Assuming that the count display of the effect has reached a predetermined value (here, “0”) and ended, a blue hold display (first mode) is displayed for the variable display that is slow in digestion order and has not been executed yet. In some cases, an effect mode having a lower degree of expectation appears as a target of the effect than when the count display of the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the variable display that is already in the execution state and is ended. The ratio will be high. That is, in this case, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, whether or not a red hold display (second mode) appears for the variable display that has not been executed yet functions as an important effect element. Through such a special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment for a long period from the start of the specific count effect to the end thereof. Will be as expected. In this sense, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, it is still executed at the time of a new prize or a change effect on hold (for example, an effect of upgrading a blue hold display to a red hold display). It is important that the hold display for the variable display that does not exist can be made to appear in one of a plurality of modes such as a blue hold display (first mode) and a red hold display (second mode). There is.

  According to such a special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, when a red hold display (second mode) appears for a variable display that has not been executed yet, the current execution is performed. When the count display is not ended and the variable display is continued until the next and subsequent variable displays, the ratio of appearances with high expectation at the end of the count display increases, so the specific count display ends. Expect to not be. On the other hand, when a blue hold display (first mode) appears for a variable display that has not yet been executed, it is better to end the count effect with the variable display being executed, which is a blue hold with a low degree of expectation. Since the rate of appearance of an effect having a high degree of expectation when the count effect ends is higher than when the count effect is ended within the variable display, it is expected that the specific count effect is ended earlier.

  However, the count effect does not necessarily need to straddle a plurality of variable displays, and may be ended within one variable display in which the count effect has started. Even with such a configuration, if a new prize is generated while the count effect is being executed, a blue hold display (first mode) and a red hold display are displayed for the variable display that has not been executed yet. Since there is no change in which one of the display (the second aspect) appears and the point can function as an important staging index for the count effect, a special effect between the count effect and the look-ahead effect. Through the relationship, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment for a long period from the start of the specific count effect to the end thereof.

  At the start of the specific count effect, a plurality of on-hold displays are displayed, but none of the specific modes (for example, pre-reading reservation such as green or red) are performed (for example, a state in which the display is not changed to the pre-reading reservation). May appear, a process (for example, a process of changing from normal hold to red hold) during which the specific count effect is being executed may be executed. According to such a configuration, at the start of the specific count effect, it is assumed that a plurality of on-hold displays are displayed, but an effect state that is not in a specific mode (for example, a state in which the state is not changed to the pre-reading hold) appears. Also, there is a possibility that the display may change to a hold display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (specific display result in the variable display in the execution state) May be shifted from a state where the ratio is derived and displayed to a state where the ratio is high) to a state where the ratio is low. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment from the start of the specific count effect to the end thereof. To be expected.

  However, at this time, a plurality of display modes are prepared as the count display by the specific count effect, and in a case where the count display is being exhausted while the count display is being displayed in the first mode, the second mode is used. A process of causing a specific mode to appear on the hold display until the count display in the specific count effect reaches the predetermined value (e.g., normal hold) It is desirable that the rate of execution of the process of changing from “reservation” to “red hold” be reduced. According to such a configuration, by confirming the count display by the specific count effect, the display mode can be changed to a hold display having a specific mode (prefetch hold such as green or red) during the count period. Recognizing the "high possibility", it is possible to predict the "high possibility that the specific count effect will continue until the next symbol change is started" from the remaining count value. Therefore, it is possible to provide interest by comparing the results of the recognition and prediction.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, at the start of the specific count effect, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed but none of the specific modes is in an effect state (for example, a state in which the state is not changed to the prefetch hold), During the execution period of the specific count effect, the process of causing the specific mode to appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed (for example, the process of changing from normal hold to red hold) may not be made executable. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the display may change to a hold display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (in an execution state). In the variable display, there is no possibility that the ratio at which the specific display result is derived and displayed is changed from a high ratio to a low ratio at that ratio). Will be able to provide a sense of security.

  In addition, a plurality of reserved displays may be sequentially digested until a predetermined time required for the specific count effect has elapsed, and a plurality of symbol changes may be sequentially completed. According to such a configuration, even if the third hold display is red-hold in the situation where the specific count effect has been started, a symbol change corresponding to the third hold display is started. Since the specific count effect may reach the predetermined value during the execution period, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment until the specific count effect is completed.

  Further, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, after the symbol variation is stopped (temporarily stopped), a process of bringing the symbol variation back into the variable state may be executed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the symbol change is stopped (temporarily stopped) while the pre-reading suspension is displayed for the variable display that has not been executed yet, the identification in the execution state is performed. Since it will function as an effect as if the next symbol change is started while the count effect is continued, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment until the specific count effect is completed Become.

  Further, in the above-described effect example relating to the “double chance increase” (holding change effect using the special time holding change table T9b), the hold display is displayed smaller than the count display in the count effect, or is displayed in front of the hold display. Moving the movable decorative body or displaying another display image so as to cover the hold display, so that even if a change occurs in the hold display, it is difficult to notice this change, It is desirable to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when it occurs.

  In addition, a "first mode requiring a relatively long time" and a "second mode requiring a relatively short time" are prepared as the "specific count effect", and the "effect pattern (variation time of the symbol)" is prepared. Based on the result of the big hit determination, a plurality of effects are set as “specific effect patterns shorter than the relatively long time (first mode), but longer than the relatively short time (second mode)”. You may make it select and execute from a pattern. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect pattern appears, the specific count effect is continued until the next variation depending on which mode (first mode, second mode) the specific count effect is executed. Since the game entertainment is not continued, it is expected that the game entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  Further, in the above-described effect example relating to the “double chance increase” (hold change effect using the special time change table T9b), the “hold information (for example, red In the variable display of the identification information that is started by digesting the pre-reading hold of the first, the hold information (for example, blue pre-reading hold) displayed in the first aspect of the plurality of aspects is started by being digested. The rate at which the jackpot symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed is higher than the variable display of the identified information, but "the specific count effect is performed at least during the period in which the variable display of the identification information is performed. Sometimes, the hold information having a slower digestion order than the variable display in the execution state (when the specific count effect is being executed during the execution period of the variable display, it is in a state where it has not been executed yet). When the pre-reading hold for the change display is displayed in the second mode (for example, red pre-reading hold), the hold information is displayed in the first mode (for example, blue pre-reading hold). Also in the variable display in the execution state, the ratio of the specific display result derived and displayed is reduced '', in a case where the symbol variation is executed in a time shorter than a predetermined time required for the specific count effect, There is a case where the symbol change is executed in a longer time than a predetermined time required for the specific count effect. However, in this case, as for the above-mentioned “specific count effect”, “effect indicating the remaining time for the specific effect (remaining time until a specific effect change occurs for the specific effect) by updating the count value according to the passage of time. May be executed as, for example, "an effect indicating the remaining time for a specific effect by an image change according to the passage of time". In short, if it is possible to indicate the remaining time, it is possible to provide an interest as to whether the symbol change is completed before this remaining time is consumed, and it is possible to reduce the interest in gaming Can be suppressed.

  Note that "specific count effect" is not "effect that suggests the remaining time for the specific effect by updating the count value according to the passage of time", but "image change according to the time elapsed for the remaining time for the specific effect, etc." An effect example (counting effect that is different from the above-described effect example relating to “double chance up” (pending change effect using the special time pending change table T9b) is realized by another description such as “effect suggested by (Directing).

  In addition, regarding the “specific count effect”, the effect change of the specific effect related to the specific effect is terminated at an intermediate stage before the “remaining time until the specific effect change occurs for the specific effect” is suggested. May occur. At this time, an effect change that may not appear when the “remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect” may be performed without being terminated in the middle stage. These modified examples are also applied to an effect example (count effect) different from the above-described effect example relating to “double chance increase” (hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b). Is also good.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is won during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is executed. When the generated hold information is newly acquired according to this, the variable display targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started, and when this is being executed, the ratio at which the notice side timer effect is executed is as described above. The control which can execute the timer look-ahead effect (the control concerning the one-shot effect) is performed differently depending on the newly acquired hold information (new winning).

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a processing procedure for processing performed to realize such a one-shot effect. This processing is performed during a period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed, a prize winning (acceptance of a game ball) to a specific starting port. ) May be performed, or within a period before the hold information held before the winning (suspend information in which the information regarding the effect is deleted / reset) is consumed. May be performed at a predetermined timing.

  As shown in FIG. 176, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines, in the process of step S5601, whether the hold information according to the new winning indicates specific game information. In addition, the specific game information may be, for example, "game information that causes a specific fluctuation pattern of high expectation such as SP reach to appear when the new reservation information is exhausted" or "the new game information". Game information that wins a jackpot when the hold information is exhausted. Here, for convenience of explanation, “game information that wins a jackpot when the new hold information is exhausted” will be described as the specific game information.

  Then, as a result, if it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new prize indicates specific game information, the process proceeds to step S5602 to store the hold information before the hold information corresponding to the new prize. With regard to the pending information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode or second preceding mode) of the held information, at least a part of the information relating to the effect is deleted and the one-time effect is performed. Reset to content.

  For example, when the first preceding mode (preliminary feeling of timer occurrence) is set as the timer look-ahead effect, when the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is exhausted, the notice-side timer effect is generated with a probability of approximately 20%. When the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) is set as the timer look-ahead effect, a probability of approximately 80% is obtained when the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is consumed. As described above, the notice timer effect is executed. However, in the processing of step S5602, all (or at least a part of) the information regarding the timer prefetch effect is deleted, and a table referred to when determining the effect pattern (such as SP reach) and the advance lottery is determined. A setting (setting of a one-time change flag, etc.) for changing to a different one from the normal time is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs control (FIG. 149) related to the effect based on the effect information (deleted / set) thus changed (FIG. 149), so that the first look-ahead effect (the premonition of timer occurrence) and the second Regardless of which of the two preceding modes (timer generation chance) is set, the notice timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50% in the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149). Also, when determining the contents of the effect pattern and the notice effect, for example, a table (not shown) at the time of the effect change is referred to based on the fact that the one-time change flag is set, and various effects are performed in a manner different from the normal effect. Will be executed.

  Then, after the alteration processing (Step S5602) for the pending effect information that is set as the target of the timer look-ahead effect is performed, as the process of Step S5603, the background image is changed to the background image when the one-shot effect is performed. Perform a process to change to. At this time, it is desirable that the display (the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode) appearing as the timer prefetch effect is also not displayed. That is, in this case, when a new prize is generated (or between the time when the prize is generated and the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is consumed), the background image at the time of the one-shot effect is changed. If the image is suddenly changed to an image, the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode that had appeared up to that point is hidden, but the background image itself at the time of the one-shot effect functions as one mode of the timer look-ahead effect. Will be able to gain. Then, during the period in which the background image at the time of the one-shot effect is appearing, it is determined whether or not the notice side timer effect appears when the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is consumed (whether it is a fake). It is possible to give a great interest, and thereby, it is possible to maintain a game entertainment during a period in which the timer prefetch effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5601 that the hold information corresponding to the new winning does not indicate the specific game information, then in step S5611, whether or not to execute a completely changing gaseous effect is performed. Is determined. This one-time gaseous effect is an effect in which the background image is changed to the background image at the time when the one-time effect is performed in the process of step S5603 even though the above-described alteration processing for the hold information (step S5602) is not performed. That is.

  In the process of step S5611, when it is determined that the one-shot gassing effect is not to be performed, the present timer prefetching effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode) and the determining mode of various effects are continued. That is, the processing (FIG. 176) ends without performing any processing relating to the one-shot effect.

  In such a configuration, when a new prize is generated during the period in which the timer prefetch effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is executed (in a specific starting area). When the game ball is accepted and game information corresponding to the game ball is newly acquired), the fluctuating display targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started, and when the variable display is being executed, the above-described notice timer effect is activated. The notice-side timer effect can be executed so that the execution ratio differs according to the newly acquired game information (hold information). That is, in this case, if the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed, the hold information is not the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect, but the new information. The acquired hold information is specific game information (information indicating a specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach, information indicating a big hit, or information indicating that the type of the big hit is to be shifted to a high-probability time-short game state, etc. ), The rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed changes during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. Until the variable display is executed, expectations for other effects can be given, and a decrease in gaming interest during the period can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above configuration, if the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed, the hold information is not the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect, but the relevant information. Depending on whether the newly acquired hold information is the specific game information, after performing the above modification process (step S5602), before the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is consumed. Then, the background image is changed to the background image at the time of the one-shot effect, and the display related to the timer look-ahead effect is hidden. In other words, in this case, until the one-shot effect is started, the stage of the effect is to provide a sense of expectation to the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect, with the subject of the effect being a timer look-ahead effect. On the other hand, after the one-shot production is started, the main body of the production is changed to one-production production, including the timer look-ahead production, to give a sense of expectation to the newly acquired hold information It will be shifted to an effect situation in which various effects are performed. Therefore, when a hold with a higher expectation than the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is acquired, it becomes possible to flexibly change the subject of the effect, and it is already set as already set. Thus, it is possible to avoid that the production time for the hold information with high expectation is deprived by the production.

  Such a one-shot effect may be executed even if the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect indicates that the jackpot is won. In other words, in this case, even if the main body of the production has shifted to the newly won hold information, a jackpot effect will appear in the hold that is digested earlier than that, so a surprising effect is realized. As a result, a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed, the process (FIG. 176) relating to the above-described one-shot effect is executed. However, the process (FIG. 176) relating to the one-shot effect may also be executed when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding aspect is being executed. .

  Further, the background image at the time of the one-shot effect may be continued even after the change display according to the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect ends. That is, in this case, with respect to the hold information that is digested after the variable display according to the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect ends, it functions as a one-stop gassing effect.

  In addition, even when such a one-time effect is not executed, the timer prefetching effect may be executed on the condition that the new prize is generated and a specific condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the effect pattern (SP reach, etc.) and the preliminary lottery for all the pending information stored before the new winning is changed to a table different from the normal time. The setting for the change (setting of a change flag, etc.) is performed, and as a result, the appearance probability of various effects changes unless it is a change gasse effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, at the time of the one-shot effect, the ratio at which the notice timer effect is executed is changed, but when the one-time flag is set, an effect pattern different from the normal time is determined, so that the changing timer is performed. You may make it change the rate at which an effect is performed. Thus, even if the variable number does not cause the variable-side timer effect to appear when the one-shot effect is not executed, the variable-side timer effect appears when the one-change effect is executed, or the variable-side timer effect appears when the one-change effect is not executed. Even if the number is a number, it is possible to control so that the variable side timer effect does not appear when the one-time effect is executed.

  In addition, when such a one-shot effect is performed, even if the timer effect is caused to appear when the one-effect effect is not executed, the possibility that the variable-side timer effect may not appear when the one-effect effect is performed may occur. There is a concern that there is a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game, so when performing the one-shot production, a special announcement that cannot appear at normal times (when the one-shot production is not executed) is performed. You may control so that an effect may appear.

  Also, in the variable display, which was the target of the timer look-ahead effect at the time of the one-shot effect, the ratio at which the notice-side timer effect is executed is not necessarily constant (here, 50%). May be controlled differently depending on whether or not a big hit symbol appears in the variable display.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 177 and FIG. 178, details of the above-described timer effect example will be described in detail. Here, the processing example relating to each of the above-described effects is merely an example to the last, and for example, an effect other than the above-described type may be executed as the content of the notice effect, and the appearance timing of each notice effect and Appearance conditions and the like may be appropriately changed as long as they are within the same technical concept. Therefore, in the effect examples described below, although there may be included inconsistencies with the processing contents relating to each effect described above, they are within the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are simply changed as appropriate. In addition, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed in the notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning that includes a timer look-ahead effect. Also, as the mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted below, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  FIG. 177 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is fluctuated and displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state. FIG. 177 (B) shows that two winnings are generated during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (A), and the hold information corresponding to those wins is stored. The hold display corresponding to No. 1 indicates a normal hold mode, and the hold display corresponding to the second winning hold 2 indicates the effect status displayed in a red mode. FIG. 177 (C) shows that after the decorative symbol SZ which was in the variable display state in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (B) is stopped and displayed in a lost pattern, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). 2) shows the effect state in which the shift information is shifted and the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested to be in a fluctuating state. Note that, in this effect example, as is apparent from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of variable display is displayed (state of hold 0), it is shown at the time of hold 1. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). Further, it is described above that the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in a hold change mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) even in the state of such a fluctuation display. It is on the street.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold information in the hold 1 state at the time of FIGS. 177 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Alternatively, or after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation display, the suspended prefetching effect is executed. The reserved look-ahead effect may be executed in any of the above-described first preceding mode, second preceding mode, and third preceding mode. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. The appearance of the effect means that the hold information of the hold 0 (in the state of the variable display) or the hold information of the hold 1 is set as the target of the hold look-ahead effect (the example here). Then, the hold information of the hold 1 is set as the target of the hold look-ahead effect).

  FIG. 177 (D) shows that one prize is generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (C), and the hold information corresponding to the prize is normally held as the hold display corresponding to the hold 2. The effect status displayed in the mode of FIG. However, assuming that the hold display corresponding to this hold 2 indicates specific game information (in this case, the big hit information) and satisfies the above-described one-shot effect execution condition, FIG. 177 (E) is shown. As described above, the control related to the one-shot effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

  As described above, the one-shot effect is to change the content of the hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored before the hold information (here, hold 2) that generates the one-shot effect and is in the hold state, and to hold it. It is what digests. On the other hand, the above-mentioned one-time change gaseous production is, for example, a hold that occurs when the hold display corresponding to the second hold does not indicate specific game information (here, the big hit information) and generates the one-time change gaseous effect. The contents of the hold information (here, hold 1) stored before the information (here, hold 2) and in the hold state are held and consumed without being modified. That is, in this case, when the hold 1 is exhausted, the ease of occurrence of various effects differs depending on whether the one-shot effect or the one-touch gasse effect is performed. It is possible for the player to guess whether or not the hold indicating the game information is included (whether the one-shot effect or the one-shot effect is being performed), so that a decrease in the game interest can be suppressed. In both the one-shot effect and the one-shot effect, it is desirable to control the hold display (here, hold 2) corresponding to those effects so that no hold change occurs regardless of the result of the jackpot determination.

  Therefore, the timing at which the control related to the one-shot effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2 is after the end of the variable display of the hold 0 that is not a target for changing the hold information. In addition, it is desirable that the change be prior to the start of the variable display of the hold 1 to be changed. In this regard, in this embodiment, the control related to the one-shot effect is executed when the losing symbol is stopped in the change display of the hold 0 but the hold display of the hold 1 has not been shifted yet. As shown in FIG. 177 (E), the hold information of the hold 1 (particularly, the information related to the effect) is modified, and as shown in FIG. The image is not displayed (displayed in a normal hold mode), and the background image is changed to the background image at the time of performing the one-shot effect. Also, at this time, a predetermined display image (here, “change”) is displayed for a predetermined time.

  Further, in such an effect situation (FIG. 177 (E)), the timer look-ahead effect that had appeared so far until the change display of the hold 0 was ended is continued to be displayed without starting the count display. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the target of the timer prefetch effect is Hold 1.

  FIG. 177 (F) shows that after the appearance of the one-shot effect background shown in FIG. 177 (E), the hold information stored as the hold 1 is digested and shifted into a fluctuating state by shifting the hold information. Shows the production status.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 177 (F), the hold information in the hold 1 state at the time of FIG. The count display of the timer effect is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display. Similarly, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), a specific display (here, “show conversation announcement”) related to the first production (here, “conversation announcement”) is displayed. Have been. The timing at which the specific display (show the conversation notice) appears may be before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or may be after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. And can appear at an appropriate timing.

  It should be noted that the timer effect, including the case of the timer look-ahead effect (FIG. 177 (D)), is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative patterns, and the like. In the so-called ticker mode (slide image), a partial display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays “Appear a conversation notice” is hidden by a timer effect that is displayed with higher priority than this. ing.

  Also, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), since the timer effect starts the count display with a relatively small number of counts such as "10 seconds", the effect with a low degree of expectation can be obtained by looking at only this. There is a high possibility that it is targeted for timer effects, and there is a concern that gaming entertainment may decline. However, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific display (conversation notice) indicating that the effect type (conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the timer effect is to appear. Is expected to appear, and it is expected that the production target of the timer production is a “conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage”, and that the success of the mission will definitely confirm that the big hit has been won. As a result, a decrease in gaming interest is suppressed.

  In addition, when the one-shot effect is executed, the timer effect appears at a different probability from the normal time as described above. For example, when the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the first preceding mode (a feeling of occurrence of the timer), the timer effect appears only with a probability of approximately 20% in normal times. On the other hand, when the one-shot effect is being executed, the timer effect appears with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect appears in such a one-shot effect background, the one-shot effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes is not a one-shot gasse effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change (approximately 20%). (Approximately 50%), and the expectation of winning the jackpot (because it is determined that the hold information of the jackpot is included at the time of performing the one-shot effect) is increased. However, at this time, if the timer effect does not appear in such a one-shot effect background, the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change instead of the one-effect effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. The result is that the degree of concern that the flat gas production (approximately 20%) is being performed is increased.

  When the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% in normal times. When the one-shot effect is executed, the timer effect appears only with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect does not appear in the appearance of such a one-shot effect background, the change in the appearance probability of the timer effect is not a one-shot gasse effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change (approximately 100%). The effect (approximately 50%) is being executed, and it is definitely suggested that the information includes the hold information for winning the jackpot. However, at this time, when the timer effect appears in such a one-shot effect background, the one-shot effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change is not a one-shot effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes (approximately 50%). As a result, the degree of concern that the effect (approximately 100%) is being executed increases.

  FIG. 178 (G) shows a timer-related indication indicating that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177 (F) has reached a predetermined value (here, 0) and has reached the predetermined value (here, 0). The display (here, “Yukuzo”) indicates the production situation in which the appearance has occurred. Note that the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) indicating that the predetermined value (here, 0) has been reached may appear after the count display of the timer effect is hidden.

  In the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (G), the count display has reached a predetermined value while the mission display (let the conversation notice appear) is still displayed. Is a situation that is definitely suggested in the situation where it is about to appear, and it can be said that it is a situation where great attention is paid to whether or not a conversation notice appears as the effect.

  In FIG. 178 (H), after the timer effect having reached the predetermined numerical value and the timer-related display thereof in FIG. "Maybe it's a chance.") Immediately after this, a special display indicating that the mission was successful appears in the mission effect (show a conversation notice).

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (H), it is indicated that the mission was successful in the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear), so that it is definitely suggested that a big hit will be won.

  FIG. 178 (I) shows that after the mission is successful in FIG. 178 (H), the variable display is stopped with a missing symbol even though a special display (here, “mission succeeded!”) Appears. Shows the production status.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with respect to the specific display (here, “let the conversation notice appear”) relating to the first effect (here, “conversation notice”), the hold information to be the production target (In the situation shown in FIG. 178 (I), hold 1), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the hold information (FIG. 178 (I)). In the situation shown in (1), it is possible to appear earlier even during the period of the variable display corresponding to the hold 0). Moreover, the timing of displaying the first effect (here, "conversation notice") and displaying the special display (here, "mission succeeded!") Itself is also the holding information (the big hit) which is the target of the effect. In addition to being able to appear within the period of the variable display according to the variable display, the variable display is performed within the period of the variable display according to the hold information (the hold information that does not cause a big hit) before the variable display under a predetermined condition. Is also allowed to appear earlier.

  According to such a configuration, even though a special display (here, “mission succeeded!”) Appears in the mission effect and it is definitely suggested that a big hit will occur, the variable display ends with a lost symbol. Since the game is stopped (stopped), an unexpected situation occurs as a player. However, after this, when the next variable display is started, the variable display ends (stops) with a big hit symbol, so that a sense of happiness after being once dropped into a desperate state is given. . As a result, even after it is definitely suggested that a big hit will be made, it becomes possible to give a directing inflection, and it is possible to maintain a game entertainment until the big hit symbol is stopped. become.

  However, when the special display is caused to appear in advance in this manner, there is a concern that a complaint by the player with respect to the hall may occur at the time when the variable display is terminated (stopped) with a lost symbol. Therefore, in the loss fluctuation in which the special display appears first, the special display does not appear in a ratio in which the pre-reading effect over the next variable display (variable display that becomes a big hit) is executed within the execution period of the variable display. It is desirable to set it higher than usual. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is completed in FIG. 178 (H), the timer is not used until the variable display is ended (stopped) in a lost pattern. A look-ahead effect is to be newly generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission succeeds before the count display of the timer effect is started, a change symbol is displayed in the change display, and a change display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears. It is possible to realize an effect as if the variable display in which the big hit symbol appears is carried over. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a complaint on the player side with respect to the hall side at the point in time when the variable display is ended (stopped) in a lost pattern.

  However, it is not always necessary to execute the look-ahead effect that spans a plurality of such variable displays (until the variable display that becomes a big hit). In this sense, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the hold information in which the big hit symbol appears It is desirable to continue to display the special display (here, “mission succeeded!”) That appears during the execution period of the variable display in which the lost symbol appears even after the variable display is started and the variable display is started. In this regard, if such a special display (here, "mission success!") Is continuously displayed until the big hit symbol appears in the variable display in which the big hit symbol appears, the effect is produced until the big hit symbol is stopped. 178 (K), as shown in FIG. 178 (K), a production image that definitely suggests that a big hit is won as a production in the production pattern, since there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced without a natural inflection. It is desirable to hide the special display (here, “mission succeeded!”) At a timing before appears. As a result, after the special display (here, “mission succeeded!”) Is hidden, the effect image shown in FIG. 178 (K) (determined to win the jackpot as the effect content in the effect pattern) Until the suggested effect image) appears, the anxiety about the appearance of the big hit symbol increases to some extent, and the effect status shown in FIG. 178 (L) (the effect status in which the big hit symbol is stopped) ) Is expected to be appropriately maintained for game entertainment.

  In addition, in FIG. 178 (J), the count display of the timer effect of 30 seconds is started, and after the effect status shown in FIG. 178 (J) appears, the effect status shown in FIG. 178 (K) changes. Until it appears, the count display of the 30-second timer effect ends, the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, and the effect to be directed is generated. Needless to say.

  Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 179 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is fluctuated and displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state. FIG. 179 (B) shows the hold information corresponding to the three wins generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (A), and holds the first win. An effect in which the hold display corresponding to No. 1 is the normal hold mode, the hold display corresponding to the second winning hold 2 is red, and the hold display corresponding to the third winning hold 3 is displayed in blue. Indicates the situation. FIG. 179 (C) shows that after the decorative symbol SZ which was in the variable display state in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (B) is stopped and displayed in a lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). 2) shows the effect state in which the shift information is shifted and the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested to be in a fluctuating state. As is clear from the drawing, even in this effect example, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of variable display is displayed (state of hold 0), it is shown at the time of hold 1. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). Further, it is described above that the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in a hold change mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) even in the state of such a fluctuation display. It is on the street. In FIGS. 179 and 180, the movable body KT for effect, which has been omitted in FIGS. 177 and 178, is illustrated for convenience of explanation.
In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, a “rear under rear movable production unit 3100, a back upper left movable production unit 3200, a back left movable production unit 3300, a back upper middle movable production unit 3400, a back under front movable production unit 3500, etc. Movable member "

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information in the hold 1 state at the time of FIGS. 179 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Alternatively, or after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation display, the suspended prefetching effect is executed. The reserved look-ahead effect may be executed in any of the above-described first preceding mode, second preceding mode, and third preceding mode. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. The appearance of the effect means that one of the hold information of the hold 0 (in the state of the variable display), the hold information of the hold 1 and the hold information of the hold 2 is set as a target of the hold look-ahead effect. (In this example, the hold information of Hold 1 is set as the target of the hold look-ahead effect).

  Here, as a mode of the hold look-ahead effect, the count display may be executed from the time when the corresponding hold display (here, the hold information of Hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, the event that the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends after the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) may occur, and the count display may be a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”). Event that the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends before the display reaches, even if the count display is being executed, the target of the timer effect is any hold information. Can be made difficult to grasp.

  However, in this effect example, any one of the first preceding mode (foreseeing the occurrence of a timer), the second preceding mode (for a timer occurrence chance), and the third preceding mode (for a timer occurrence chance) is displayed as the reserved look-ahead effect. Can be done.

  In this regard, in the effect state shown in FIG. 179 (C), of the hold information 0, 1, 2, the hold information 1 is in a red form, and is in a hold display mode with the highest expectation of a big hit. In view of this, from the player's point of view, it is desirable that the timer look-ahead effect targets the hold information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red hold display. In other words, in this case, since the composite effect indicates that the expected degree of the jackpot obtained by the hold information 1 is higher, the hold 0 in the normal hold mode and the blue hold 2 with a low expectation are read ahead by the timer. It becomes possible to make the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears in any of the hold information 0 to 2 higher than the case where the big hit expectation degree is dispersed for the effect. Also, if the blue hold 2 with a low degree of expectation becomes a target of the timer look-ahead effect, there is a concern that the game entertainment will decrease. It is also important that the production progresses so that it is not subject to the look-ahead production.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, if a new prize occurs while the hold information (big hit hold) in which the big hit symbol appears is stored, instead of the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174), the big hit hold time With reference to a dedicated table (FIG. 175: special-time hold change table T9b), the hold change effect is executed. In the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b, when a jackpot hold is already included (when the hold 1 in the red mode is a big hit), red and green are unlikely to appear in the hold 2 mode. And the appearance of blinking blue or white becomes relatively easy to appear. Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), if the timer look-ahead effect targets the hold information 1 and functions so as to increase the jackpot expectation, the blue hold 2 having a low expectation is set to the timer The chance increase due to avoiding a decrease in the game entertainment due to the target, and the special time suspension change table T9b (FIG. 175) is referred to because the suspension information of the suspension 1 in the red mode is a big hit and the blue mode Chance up due to being able to expect that the hold display of hold 2 is blue (high appearance probability) is in the state of production (the notice timer production with high expectation of big hit is “production in the fluctuation display during execution” Also acts as a proof that "variable display during execution is a big hit".) From becoming cormorants, it is possible to improve the game playability.

  Therefore, in the effect states shown in FIGS. 179 (B) and (C), when a new prize is generated, whether a suspended display of blue or white blinking is newly generated, or a suspended display of green or red is displayed. If it is confirmed whether a new hit occurs, it is possible to recognize whether a jackpot hold is included, and it can be said that there is an effect situation in which a new prize is encouraged.

  FIG. 179 (D) shows the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ in the running state while the mode of the timer pre-reading effect shown in FIG. 179 (C) is maintained (without starting the count). After the end (stop), the hold information stored as the hold 1 is digested by the shift operation of the hold information, whereby the effect state is changed to a fluctuating state.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (D), the player sets the target of the timer look-ahead effect to the hold information of the hold 0 (in the state of the variable display) in the red mode and the blue mode. It becomes possible to recognize that the information is any of the hold information of the hold 1, and it is hoped that the count display will be executed within the execution period of the variable display corresponding to the hold information of the hold 0 which is a red mode.

  Also in this example of the effect, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative patterns, etc., including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 179 (D)). Here, a partial range (left portion) of the dialogue portion of the female character in the conversation notice is hidden by a timer effect displayed with higher priority than this.

  FIG. 179 (E) shows an effect situation in which the timer prefetch effect ends and the count display of the timer effect is being executed during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (D). .

  However, as described above, whether or not the count display is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the digestion of the red hold information (whether the timer prefetch is for the red hold information) ) Is an item of extremely high interest to the player. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display in the running state is displayed so that the player is less likely to visually recognize that the count display is in the running state. It is possible to control to move the movable body KT for presentation to the front and to position it for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, it is checked whether or not the timer effect count display is being executed while the timer effect (timer look-ahead effect, count display) is being executed and the player is feeling excited. By making it difficult, the attention to the timer effect can be further increased, and the thrilling feeling can be enhanced.

  In order to suitably realize such an effect, in a situation where the timer effect is executed but the count display is not yet executed (during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect, etc.), the effect movable body KT is used. Is desirably controlled so as not to operate (move). That is, in this case, since the movable body KT for production suddenly moves and the count display becomes difficult to see when the player does not care about the presence of the movable body KT for production, With such a surprising effect that occurs at the worst timing, attention to the timer effect can be further enhanced, and the thrilling feeling can be enhanced.

  In addition, the operation effect by the movable body KT for the effect may be made to function only as an effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the timer look-ahead effect and makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display among the timer effects. You may make it function also as target notice E2 (1st production). In other words, in this case, an effect situation in which the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is not an effect target of the timer effect and has no relation to the original effect, but the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed during execution of the count display. By becoming (FIG. 179 (E)), for example, a bigger jackpot expectation than the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)) is shown, and the gaming entertainment is improved. Will be able to do it.

  As described above, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 (in this case, the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect) be executed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation. In a state where the display is not executed, it is desirable to indicate the jackpot expectation degree depending on which of the light emission modes (blue, green, and red) appears when the movable body KT for production operates. At this time, if the movable body KT for production operates in the red light emission mode, a bigger jackpot expectation than the cut-in production shown in the next production situation (FIG. 179 (F)) may be displayed. The expectation value of the big hit expectation when the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect occurs is lower than the expectation value of the big hit expectation of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)). Is required. However, as described above, in the case where the operation effect is performed by the effect movable body KT during the execution of the count display, even if any of blue, green, and red appears as the light emission mode, the effect movable for the effect is performed. It is desirable to control such that the big hit expectation indicated by the motion effect by the body KT is the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, during execution of the count display, attention is paid not to what kind of aspect appears in the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect, but to whether the motion effect itself by the movable body KT for effect occurs. Are gathered, so that it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being degraded depending on the mode when the motion effect is produced by the effect movable body KT.

  By the way, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (E), the chances of the above double are successfully increased because the target of the timer look-ahead effect is not the hold 2 of the blue mode but the hold 1 of the red color. In addition, the chance increase due to execution of the non-target notice E2 (in this case, the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect) during the execution of the count display is also successful. Therefore, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will not be won in the variable display even in such a high expectation effect, the gaming interest is originally enhanced. In the expected fluctuation display, it is inevitable that the entertainment interest of the game is significantly reduced. In this regard, in the above-mentioned special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the big hit hold (including the hold 0) is included, when a new prize is generated, the green or red hold is performed. Since the information is difficult to appear, if the hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new prize in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (E) is displayed in a red manner, a jackpot hold is included. This may expose the player to the fact that they are not playing.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a new prize is won during a period in which the count display of a specific timer effect, which is considered to have a high degree of expectation, is executed among the timer effects, or in a period thereafter. Is generated, it is difficult to recognize the mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow colors), and it is difficult to recognize the mode even if the hold display already displayed is further changed. I'm going to do it. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 179 (E), the hold 1 and 2 are hidden and displayed with their shadows, making it difficult to recognize the mode of the hold display. May be hidden. Thus, even when a count display with a high degree of expectation is being performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a green or red hold display appears when a new prize is generated, thereby deteriorating the game entertainment. become.

  FIG. 179 (F) shows that after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 179 (E) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, This shows an effect state in which an effect (cut-in effect by an ally character) that is an effect target of the timer effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179 (F), even in a situation in which an effect (cut-in effect by an ally character) that is a production target of the timer effect is being executed, the holds 1 and 2 are hidden and the shadows thereof are displayed. The mode of the hold display is difficult to recognize.

  FIG. 180 (G) shows that, after the effect (cut-in effect by the ally character) that is the target of the timer effect in FIG. This shows an effect state in which it is shown that the stop is made with a big hit symbol.

  In the state of production shown in FIG. 180 (G), it is definitely suggested that a big hit will occur, so that no matter which one of the modes of reservations 1 and 2 appears, the interest in the game decreases. There is no such thing. Therefore, for the hold 1 and 2 that are hard to recognize, after the effect indicating whether or not a big hit is displayed is displayed in a manner that allows recognition of which mode is appearing. It is desirable to be done. In other words, in this case, even if it is indicated that the fluctuation display is confirmed and stopped by losing the ally character to the enemy character, the hold 1 and 2 modes can be recognized at that time, and the hold In some cases, it may be recognized that one of the colors 1 and 2 is in the form of red or rainbow colors, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), a new timer effect has occurred and the count display has been started. Even in the effect state shown in FIG. 180 (H) in which the big hit symbol is fixed and stopped and the variable display is ended, the count display remains (the count number displayed at the start of the count display). Of these, the number of counts is still less than the smallest count (10 seconds), and the effect that is the target of the timer effect is not generated at all, and continues even after the variable display ends. The special timer effect is executed as described above.

  However, thereafter, during the period in which the opening effect is executed in the effect condition shown in FIG. 180 (I), the count display of the timer effect is not displayed. Thus, the variable display (symbol effect) ended in the effect condition shown in FIG. 180 (H) and the effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) started in the effect condition shown in FIG. 180 (J) are displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the effects are not connected to each other, and thus the player can enjoy the newly started effects in a fresh feeling.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is secretly executed in accordance with the passage of time even during the period in which the count display of the timer effect is hidden (the execution period of the opening effect). When the count display of the timer effect is redisplayed in the effect (big hit game effect) during the jackpot game started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount. I am trying to be.
Then, a production situation will be created as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer production reaches the predetermined value suddenly decreases, so the player's side counts in a state where the feeling is not ready The display can be made to reach a predetermined numerical value, and the timer effect continued from the state of the variable display can be appropriately prevented from becoming a rut.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment controls the timer effect continued from the state of the variable display so that the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value within the execution period of the big hit game. At this time, the point that a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) that indicates that the predetermined value (here, 0) has been reached appears is the same as the timer effect performed during the period of the variable display.

  FIG. 180 (K) shows that after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 180 (J) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here “0”) and a timer-related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, This shows an effect state in which a specific effect (corresponding to the first special effect and the second special effect described above, which is indicated by “CHANCE” in the figure) that is a target object of the timer effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (K), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) can be executed within the execution period of the big hit game, and the specific effect (“ When “CHANCE” is displayed), the big hit that is won is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player (for example, a type in which the number of rounds of the big hit game is 16 rounds, or a high probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game). Is high, the degree of expectation is high. The ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the above-described special timer effect in which the count display is continued until after the big hit game is started is executed, not only the big hit is determined but also the big hit that has been won is a big hit type advantageous to the player. Since a certain degree of expectation is also increased, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Then, after that, an effect in which the ally character fights the enemy character in a specific round game or the like is performed, and as a result, the ally character wins (FIG. 180 (L)). Is shown. Note that when the ally character is defeated in the effect, it is indicated that the winning big hit is not a big hit type advantageous to the player.

  When the result of the effect during the big hit game appears, the game proceeds with the content according to the result. For example, if the result that the ally character wins is obtained, the big hit game is executed up to 16 rounds. Or is controlled to a high probability time saving state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, if the result that the ally character is defeated is obtained, the big hit game is ended in eight rounds, or a game state having a lower degree of advantage than the high probability time saving state after the big hit game is completed (for example, a low probability game state). Control, etc.).

  Here, the effect contents of the specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) shown in FIG. 180 (K) may be related to an effect in which an ally character fights an enemy character in a specific round game. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), the effect contents in which the ally character acquires a weapon in the specific effect are set, and the effect of fighting the enemy character using the weapon acquired in the specific round game is executed. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), it is possible to imply that the possibility of the ally character winning in the subsequent battle has increased.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself which may appear when such a timer effect is executed, and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described. In addition, each effect described below can be appropriately combined and executed between the effects, and can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-described effects. Further, in each of the following effect examples, the case where the effect is executed as a notice timer effect is described, but it may be executed not as the notice timer effect but as a variable timer effect. That is, in this case, the effect contents according to the following effect examples are determined in advance as the effect contents of the variation pattern.

[Direction excluding timers]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of production modes (for example, a conversation notice, a hold change, a cut-in A, a character A operation, a special timer, a cut-in B, a character B operation, and the like) are set as effect candidates to be timer objects. ) Is prepared, and any one of the effect modes is set as a timer target (counter target) (timer target preview lottery), and a count display is performed toward a timing at which the effect mode set as the timer target appears. Execute In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation (accessory A notice), special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation) (Preliminary object B notice)) is performed while it is unknown which of the timers is being targeted, and in such an effect state, the production mode that is not targeted by the timer (timer target notice) A display suggesting which of the rendering modes has not been determined as the timer target in the lottery) may be performed (timer target exclusion rendering).

That is, in this case, at the stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is being exhausted, information for estimating which effect mode is the timer target is provided.
For example, if a low-expectation production mode (for example, a conversation notice) is suggested as a production mode that is not a timer target, the possibility that a low-expected production mode appears as a timer target at that time is excluded. Therefore, even though the remaining count in the timer effect is being exhausted, a highly expected effect mode (for example, the action of the character B) or the like is expected to appear as a timer object. Is expected to be improved. In addition, if a highly expected production mode (for example, the action of the character B) is suggested as a production mode that is not targeted by the timer, at that point in time, it is determined that there is no expectation for the timer production, and another production is performed. It is possible to focus on the effect, and it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value is suppressed. According to such a configuration, while the remaining count is being consumed, the sense of expectation for the timer effect can be appropriately changed without changing the mode of the count display itself.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (refer FIG. 148) corresponding to "the character reach without a timer" are selected in a situation. FIG. 181 (b) shows a mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (refer FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP timer reach without timer" are selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), a specific timer type (one of “hold change 5”, “accessory A operation 3”, and “special timer 1”) is obtained as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). 181 is selected (refer to FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed. Even in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), the specific timer type (step S5510) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). When any of “Change of hold 5”, “Operation of accessory A 3”, and “Operation of accessory B 1”) is selected (refer to FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

  However, the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type has no relation and the variation pattern type Alternatively, the determination may be made based on the fact that a special result has been obtained by a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination. As will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be caused to appear in a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed ex post (with respect to the timer object first effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), an effect that does not appear as a timer object It is possible to indicate in advance which type the mode is. In addition, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not yet been executed (the state in which even the display of the timer look-ahead effect has not appeared), the timer effect is performed later than when the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. Is desirably set to be high, and is also executed as an effect that indicates that the timer effect is to be executed in advance.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of “hold change 5” or “character A operation 3”, 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change. At the timing of the round, a count display having a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“Hold change 5” or “Character A operation 3)) appears.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of “hold change 5” or “accessory A operation 3”, similarly, 20 seconds have elapsed since the symbol change was started. At the timing of the passage of time, a count display having a count of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“Hold change 5” or “Pot A operation 3 ") appears.

  In this regard, in the case of these examples, although the timer effect is not executed (a state in which even the display of the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed) at the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change. First, a timer target exclusion effect may occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is indicated that “conversation notice” is not a candidate for a timer object. Can be grasped by the player that is changed to any of the pending change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation. That is, in this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), a low-expected effect mode is out of the timer candidate. Since the player can recognize the fact that the high expectation effect is a candidate for a timer object, the player hopes that the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation. , And it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the timer effect (count display) is not executed.

  During the period in which the count display is not executed (in this example, the period from the start of the symbol change to the elapse of 20 seconds), the above-described timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode, the second The preceding mode, the third preceding mode) may be displayed.

Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation, a second timer-targeted exclusion effect may occur in synchronization with the start of the count display in the timer effect.
In the second timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice) that have been excluded in the first timer target exclusion effect are excluded. For example, in the second timer target exclusion effect, if it is indicated that the “special timer” is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate changes to hold, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B , The player can recognize that the operation has been narrowed down to one of the accessory B operations. In this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), the effect mode in which the jackpot is determined is selected from the timer target candidates. Since it is now possible to recognize that it has deviated, it is possible to incite anxiety about whether a highly anticipated effect appears as a timer object by turning around from the time when the first timer target exclusion effect is executed Become.

  Then, at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, a third timer target exclusion effect may occur. In the third timer target elimination effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) that have been excluded in the first and second timer target exclusion effects are further excluded. For example, if it is indicated that “cut-in B” is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate is narrowed down to any of the pending change, cut-in A, character A operation, and character B operation. This can be grasped by the player.

  Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol change, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0), and the effect mode (“hold change 5 ), A hold change occurs, and in the case of "casual item A operation 3," the main object A operation occurs).

  By the way, in the timer effects of “hold change 5” and “accessory A operation 3” shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timer target is set when 40 seconds have elapsed since the symbol change was started. As shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in the timer effect of such an aspect (a timer effect in which an effect of a timer object is executed when 40 seconds have elapsed), as shown in FIGS. It can be seen that only three items, that is, the notice of the conversation, the change in hold, and the action of the accessory, are prepared as the targets of the timer effect. That is, in this case, when the experienced player confirms that the timer effect of the mode in which the count display reaches the predetermined value occurs at a timing of 40 seconds after the symbol change is started, the timer object is set to the conversation notice. , Hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation, but not any of the three: conversation notice, hold change, character A operation It is expected to see through. At this time, if two effects out of the conversation notice, the change in hold, and the action of the accessory A are sometimes excluded by the timer target exclusion effect, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any of the effects is performed. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer target exclusion effect such that at least two or more effects are left as timer effect candidates.

  According to such a timer target exclusion effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in a non-executed state or during the count display execution, the feeling of expectation or anxiety is raised (any effect is excluded from the timer target). (Depending on whether or not the game is performed), it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches the predetermined value.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timing at which the timer target exclusion effect is generated is determined by the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer target effect). The timing is set when any one of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc., from the start of the change) arrives as candidates for the timing of the occurrence of.

  For example, looking at the time charts shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, when 45 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, even if the count display becomes 0 after that, the “target item A operation” is performed as a timer target effect. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. As described above, in the timer effect, usually, each timing (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds from the start of the fluctuation) prepared as a candidate of the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) is prepared. And so on), there is a relationship that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are narrowed down. In this regard, by performing the timer target exclusion effect, even for a beginner, each timing (in this example, the variation start timing) prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) is provided. 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.), the type of effect that can appear as a timer object is narrowed down, and the timer effect can be enjoyed to a high degree. .

  Therefore, of the examples shown in FIG. 181 (a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of “special timer 1” (the count display having a count of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the character reach symbol change is displayed. In this example, each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds elapse from the start of the fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer target exclusion effect, The second timer target exclusion effect is executed. In addition, of the examples shown in FIG. 181 (b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of "character B operation 1" (a count having a count of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the symbol change of SP reach). In the example where the display is performed), every time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds elapse from the start of the fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are respectively executed.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings have arrived since the symbol change is started, one effect mode that is not a timer target in the count effect is suggested. I did it. However, the timer target exclusion effect does not necessarily need to be executed each time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and a predetermined probability is set every time these timings arrive based on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination. , A timing for executing the timer target exclusion effect may be selected from the timings for executing the timer target exclusion effect. At this time, the execution probability of the timer target exclusion effect may be made different for a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing after the symbol change is started (for example, a timing at which the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) may occur), the symbol change is relatively started after the symbol change is started. If the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is higher than the later timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur), one effect The count display can be digested for a relatively long time in a state where it is suggested that the aspect is not a timer target. However, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the first timer target exclusion effect can occur, and when the timer object exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer object exclusion effect can occur. It is desirable that the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbols appear the same at the above (or at any timing when the timer target exclusion effect is executed). In this case, the expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer target exclusion effect appears at an early timing after the count display is started (after the symbol starts to change) (while the execution ratio of the timer target exclusion effect is increased). Since they become conscious of playing games, it is expected to improve the game entertainment from the beginning of the production.

  In the case of realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a firstly sets a timer target based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “hold change 5” of character reach). Judgment as to whether an exclusion effect is to be generated, and at what timing (in the example of FIG. 181 (a), at most three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) the exclusion effect is to be generated) Perform processing. Next, at each timing when it is determined that the timer target exclusion effect is to be generated, a determination process is performed on which effect mode is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer target. These determination processes are performed, for example, after each process illustrated in FIG. 149 is performed, or after the step S5510 is performed and before the step S5511 is performed. This can be performed based on the processing result information.

  Alternatively, a timer-targeted exclusion effect that is exclusive (conversation announcement only) indicating that a specific effect mode (for example, a conversation announcement) is not targeted for a timer may be performed. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a dedicated timer target exclusion effect based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “hold change 5” of the character reach). A determination process is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special timer target exclusion effect.

  In any case, when the production mode suggested as the production mode not targeted by the timer is a production mode of a relatively low expectation, the suggested production mode is a production mode of a relatively high expectation. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearance of the highly expected effect as an effect for the timer higher than that of the case where According to such a configuration, when a special timer target exclusion effect that excludes a low expectation effect mode (conversation notice) appears, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, at least at a specific timing among the plurality of timings, only a specific presentation mode (for example, “conversation notice” which is a production mode that is supposedly a low expectation) can be suggested as a presentation mode that is not a timer target. May be set as follows. That is, in this case, at the point in time when the timer-targeted exclusion effect occurs at a specific timing, it is understood that a specific effect mode (for example, “conversation notice” which is a supposedly low-effect effect mode) is not targeted for the timer. Since it is made possible, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest by giving a sense of expectation that the effect of the timer object is in a highly expected effect form.

  Also, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, one effect mode is suggested as an effect that is not a timer object. May be suggested. For example, if two low-expected effects are suggested, it is possible to greatly enhance the game entertainment while the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed.

  Regarding “display that indicates which effect mode is not a timer target”, the period from when the count display is started to when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or It is desirable that the display be performed during the period until the effect targeted by the timer is executed) and that the display be maintained during the same period. Further, as for “display that indicates which production mode is not targeted by the timer”, if the display is maintained after the production targeted by the timer is executed, the timer production is performed. Can be used as a material for remembering which effect mode the target was in.

  Further, when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, the display “indicating which production mode is not a timer target” is displayed while the remaining count of the count display is consumed (for example, a specific timer). When the type of timer effect is executed, the display is hidden at a predetermined timing (when the count reaches a specific count value) when the count display reaches a specific count value before the count display reaches the predetermined value, and the non-display is performed. May be maintained and the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the effect targeted for the timer may be executed. In other words, in this case, the remaining count of the count display will be exhausted while it is not known when the “display suggesting which production mode is not the timer target” is hidden. It is expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period during which it is easy to turn into a rut). In order to obtain such an operation and effect, for the non-displayed “display that indicates which effect mode is not a timer target”, the count display reaches a predetermined value and becomes a timer target. It is desirable that the non-display state be maintained even after the effect mode has appeared. However, even if `` display that suggests which production mode is not the timer target '' is hidden, the production once suggested as the production mode that is not the timer target is used as the production for the timer target. It is important to control so that they do not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect without worry unless the memory of the hidden effect mode is forgotten. In addition, for the non-displayed “display that indicates which effect mode is not a timer target”, the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect mode targeted for the timer appears. After maintaining the non-display state (for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time), the symbols are displayed again at a timing before the symbols are fixed and stopped, and it is confirmed whether the memory of the player is correct. It is desirable to be able to do so.

  In addition, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state and a “display indicating which effect mode is not a timer target” appears, the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied. When the condition is satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while it is not executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to give a sense of tension regarding the timer effect before the count display is started, and it is possible to provide a sharp effect.

  Note that, as will be described later, “display that suggests which effect mode is not the timer target” is shown in FIGS. 198 (C) to (K) and FIGS. 200 (B) to (J). In addition, it is only necessary to be able to grasp that the effect mode does not occur when the count display becomes 0. As other methods, for example, in addition to a method of displaying the name of the effect mode on the effect display device 1600 and adding an X mark thereto, a conversation notice or a cut-in at a timing before the count display reaches 0 is given. A method to show that a female character or a male character has died and to indicate that a conversation notice or cut-in cannot be executed. It is shown that the color is not changed by being displayed by the above, or that the characters A and B are broken down and become inoperable at a timing before the count display reaches 0. Alternatively, a method or the like that suggests that the action A and the action B cannot be performed may be adopted. In short, a special mode that cannot appear at a timing before the count display reaches 0 is prepared when the timer display is selected as an effect for the timer, and at a timing before the count display reaches 0, By performing an effect that is not targeted by a timer such as a conversation notice or a change in hold in a special mode, it is possible to realize a “display that indicates which of the effect modes that are not targeted by a timer”. .

  In addition, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, a highly expected effect mode as the timer target is more likely to appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value than when the timer target exclusion effect does not occur. With such control, it is expected that the game display can be more appropriately improved when the count display is exhausting the remaining count.

  By the way, if it is suggested that the effect mode (special timer) of winning determination is not a timer object in the timer object excluded effect, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even in this case, there is a concern that the game will be compared with an effect mode (special timer) in which the hit is determined, and the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when it is indicated that the effect mode (special timer) of winning determination is not a timer object, even if any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the symbol is displayed. The fluctuation may be always stopped at the big hit symbol.

  Alternatively, when a timer target exclusion effect is generated, a large hit symbol appears regardless of which effect mode appears as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The ratios (expectations) may be the same. In this case, the expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value. The timer effect can be terminated early at the time when the time is consumed). As a result, it is possible to shift the attention to other effects while the remaining count of the count display is being consumed, so that an effect design that increases the types of effects appearing per unit time Be able to encourage.

  Also, if two or more count displays (timer effects) appear within one symbol fluctuation period and an effect that reaches a predetermined value at a different timing after the timer target exclusion effect is executed, the timer It is desirable to control an effect mode that is suggested to be not a timer target in the target exclusion effect so as not to appear as a timer object in any timer effect (count display).

  Also, for the production mode in which it is suggested that the timer is not targeted by the timer target exclusion production, even if the timing is different from the timing at which the count display reaches the predetermined value, the production is not performed afterwards. It is desirable to control (control so as not to appear even as an effect that is not the object of the timer).

  When performing the timer target exclusion effect, a preceding effect may be performed to indicate whether or not it indicates that the timer target is not set. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined mode does not appear in the preceding effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is executed after the predetermined mode appears in the preceding effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the timer target exclusion effect is executed in accordance with one of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, it is only necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect in accordance with any of a plurality of predetermined timings, and it is not always necessary to perform the effect in accordance with these timings. However, even within the period in which the count display is being executed, it is preferable that the timer-targeted exclusion effect not be executed during a specific effect period such as a period in which the remaining count is low.

Also, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), there are timer types in which the execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not allowed over the entire period in which the count display is being executed, and among the timer types in which the count display is being executed. The execution of the timer target exclusion effect may not be permitted in a part of the period. By preparing such a special timer type, when the timer type appears, it is possible to concentrate on the state of digesting the count display, and enjoy the original timer effect. Become like
In order to obtain such an operation and effect, when it is in a special period in which the timer target exclusion effect cannot occur, an effect mode different from that in the absence of the special period appears to be in the special period. It can be said that it is important for the player to be able to recognize this. On the other hand, even if the timer type does not allow the execution of the timer target exclusion effect for the entire period in which the count display is being executed, the timer effect is not concentrated in the period before the count display is started. Since there is no concern that the player will be killed, it is desirable to allow the execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

  In addition, the period in which the above-mentioned “display indicating the effect mode that is not the timer target” is hidden is controlled as the same period as the period in which the execution of the timer target excluded effect is not permitted. Is also good.

  In addition, the count display in the timer effect is performed in at least one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode, and when the count display is performed in the second mode, the first mode is performed. The control may be performed such that the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is higher than when the count display is performed in the mode. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed by the count display mode, and to pay attention to the effect during the count display by the count display mode.

  The timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The determination may be made based on the fact that a special result is obtained by a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the determination. As will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be caused to appear in a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good.

  Also, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not yet been executed (the state in which even the display of the timer look-ahead effect has not appeared), compared to the case where the timer object exclusion effect has not appeared. Thereafter, it is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased so that the effect is also performed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed. In this sense, the timer target excluded effect may be executed as the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect. In other words, in this case, when the symbol fluctuation in which the timer effect is executed has not been started and is still in a hold state, a specific effect mode that is not set as a timer target in the timer effect can be suggested. Whether a timer effect appears due to a symbol change in the middle, a timer effect appears due to a symbol change in a hold state, or whether a timer effect does not appear, etc. It is expected that game entertainment until the timer effect occurs will be maintained.

[Advance production for timers]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a counts a predetermined effect (operation of the accessory B) using the specific decorative member (accessory B), and displays a count display toward a timing at which the predetermined effect appears. It is executed up to a predetermined value within the period in which the symbol effect is being performed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, in the period in which the symbol effect is performed, the specific effect is specified within a period before the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears. By making an effect using the decorative member appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is set as a count target (timer target first effect).

  That is, in this case, by paying attention to what effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being consumed, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value Can be predicted, so that it is expected that the gaming entertainment from the start of the count display to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value is appropriately maintained.

  FIG. 182 is an aspect of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a determination to not execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target advance effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (refer FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP reach with no timer" are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when any one of the specific timer types (first-timer timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. 162 is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The first effect for the timer is executed. In the advanced timers 4 to 6 of the advanced timers 1 to 6, the effect of the accessory A used in the “operation of the accessory A” and the accessory B used in the “operation of the accessory B” as the effect of the timer. An effect such as “local A & B operation” for operating both is performed.

  However, the timer target advance effect is not performed when a specific timer type (advance timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), but is exemplified in FIG. 162, for example. If any of the timer types selected is selected, the timer target advance effect may be performed, or the timer type is not related and a special effect lottery based on the variation pattern type or the result of the big hit determination is performed. You may make it perform based on the result having been obtained. As will be described later, the timer target advance effect may be caused to appear in a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed ex post (for the timer target advance effect) (although it is unknown whether or not it is executed), the count display of the timer effect is performed. Can be shown in advance as to which type the effect mode that appears when is a predetermined value. And in this case, when the timer target advance effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (the state of even the display of the timer prefetch effect does not appear), the timer target advance effect does not appear later than when the timer target advance effect did not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is set high, and the effect is also executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is to be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the advance timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds is calculated at a timing around 20 seconds after the symbol change is started. After the count display is started and the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“the accessory B operation” or “the accessory A & B operation”) targeted for the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the advance timers 2 and 5, a count display having a count of 70 seconds is started according to the start timing of the symbol change, and the count display is set to “0”. , An effect mode (“operation of the accessory B” or “operation of the accessory A & B”) targeted for the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of the advance timers 3 and 6, the display of the timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode) is performed in accordance with the start timing of the symbol change. At the same time that the display of the timer look-ahead effect is displayed, the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed at the timing when about 50 seconds have elapsed, and the count display having a count of 20 seconds is started. After the display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“the accessory B operation” or “the accessory A & B operation”) targeted for the timer appears.

  In this regard, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, the state in which the timer effect is not executed (even the display of the timer prefetch effect appears at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) elapses after the symbol change is started. Despite the setting, the first timer target advance effect may occur. In the first timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “effect B operation” or the “accessory A & B operation” that is the effect of the timer of the advance timers 1 and 4 is moved to the first position or its vicinity. An effect of vibrating rattling (a role play B rattling) is performed.

  In other words, the “effect B operation” which is the effect of the timer of the advance timer 1 is “the effect of displacing the accessory B from the first position to the second position”, and is the effect of the timer of the advance timer 4. The “casing A & B operation” is “the effect of displacing the accessory B from the first position to the second position and displacing the accessory A from the third position to the fourth position”. In the timer target advance effect, an effect (actor B rattling) different from any of these effects is performed, although they are common in using the character B used in the effects. According to such a configuration, although it is in a stage before the timer effect is executed, it is possible to suggest that the timer effect is likely to be performed later, and also, the target effect in the timer effect is performed. It is possible to suggest which of the effect modes (indicating that the effect is an effect using the accessory B). Also, in the first timer target advance effect, using the accessory B, an effect (attribute B rattling) different from the timer target effect (attribute B operation, accessory A & B operation) is performed. While suggesting that the target effect in the timer effect is an effect using character B, it is concealed how the character B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect for the timer is performed.

  In the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol change, the second timer target is displayed while the timer effect count display is being performed. Advance production may occur. In the second timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “effect B operation” or the “actor A & B operation” which is the effect of the timer of the advance timers 1 and 4 is shifted from the “first position”. An effect of shifting to the “first halfway position between the first position and the second position” (intermediate action (small) of the accessory B) is performed.

  That is, the second timer target first effect is also common in that it uses the character B used in the “character B operation” and the “character A & B operation”, but is different from any of these effects (character B middle operation (small)). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is being exhausted), it is determined which effect mode the target effect is in. It becomes possible to suggest (indicate that the effect is an effect using the accessory B). Also, in the second timer target advance effect, using the character B, the effect (the character B middle operation (small)) different from the timer target effect (the character B operation and the character A & B operation) is performed. By doing so, while suggesting which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, it is not determined how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to keep the game secret, and it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect for the timer is performed.

  Moreover, in the second timer target advance effect, the effect range using the accessory B (from the “first position” to “first (The displacement from the “first position” to the “second position”) that appears when the “accessory B operation” or the “accessory A & B operation” is performed. ). Therefore, by comparing the first timer target advance effect with the second timer target advance effect, the character B is rendered in the timer target effect (“character B operation” or “character A & B operation”). It can provide inferences about how to operate.

  Further, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) elapses after the symbol change is started, the third timer target is displayed while the count display of the timer effect is being performed. Advance production may occur. In the third timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “effect B operation” or the “actor A & B operation” that is the effect of the timer of the advance timers 1 and 4 is changed from the first position to the “ An effect of performing displacement to the "second halfway position between the first halfway position and the second position" (movement of the accessory B halfway (large)) is performed.

  That is, the third timer target first effect is also common in that it uses the character B used in the “character B operation” and the “character A & B operation”, but is different from any of these effects (character B middle operation (large)). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is being exhausted), it is determined which effect mode the target effect is in. It becomes possible to suggest (indicate that the effect is an effect using the accessory B). Also, in the third timer target advance effect, using the character B, an effect (operation of the character B middle (large)) different from the effect of the timer target (character B operation, character A & B operation) is performed. By doing so, while suggesting which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, it is not determined how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to keep the game secret, and it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect for the timer is performed.

  Moreover, in the third timer target advance effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (displacement from the “first position” to the “second halfway position”) is greater than in the first and second timer target advance effects. It becomes larger and becomes closer to the range of the effect (displacement from the “first position” to the “second position”) that appears when “the accessory B operation” or “the accessory A & B operation” is performed. I have. Therefore, by comparing the first to third timer target effects, the character B is operated in any manner in the timer target effect (“character B operation” or “character A & B operation”). You will be able to provide more insight into what to do.

  On the other hand, in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, also in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), the Each of the effects such as “Movement of character B on the way (small)” and “Movement of character B on the way (large)” are performed as the first to third timer target advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, at any of the timings Ta <b> 1 to Ta <b> 3, the timer target advance effect is performed in a state where the count display is exhausting the remaining count. Will be performed.

  On the other hand, also in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), the “role B rattling” and “ Each effect such as "movement on the way to object B (small)" and "movement on the way to the accessory B (large)" is performed as the first to third timer-targeted advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, at each of the timings Ta1 and Ta2, the count display is not executed, and the timer prefetch effect is displayed. Originally, the first and second timer target first effects are performed. According to such a configuration, the timer target advance effect is executed when the count display is in the non-executed state, but in the case of the first timers 1 and 4 that are not displayed even if the timer prefetch effect is performed. As compared to the event, the rate of occurrences of events such as "the timer effect itself was not executed even though the timer target advanced effect was executed" is reduced, so the player has higher expectation The user can enjoy the timer target first-aid effect.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches the predetermined value after the first to third timer target advance effects are executed. Then, after this, the effect of the timer is executed, and then the symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  In addition, in the timer target advance effect according to the present embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrives after the symbol change starts, the “casing B operation” or the “casing A & B operation”. An effect using the character B used in the above is to be performed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target advance effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are determined based on the type of the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination. A timer target advance effect may appear at a predetermined probability each time it arrives, or a timing at which the timer target advance effect is executed may be selected from those timings. Also, at this time, the execution probability of the timer target advance effect and the selection ratio of the effect content may be made different for each of the predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

  In the case of realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines a timer target based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “first-out timer 1” of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) is performed to determine whether the first-time effect is to be generated and at what timing the first-time effect for the timer is to be generated. Next, at each timing when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to be generated, a determination process (see FIGS. 184 and 185) for which effect mode is to be executed as the timer target advance effect is performed. These determination processes are performed, for example, after each process illustrated in FIG. 149 is performed, or after the step S5510 is performed and before the step S5511 is performed. This can be performed based on the processing result information.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content (table T10) of the determination process (table T10) for determining whether to generate the timer target advance effect and at what timing to generate the timer target advance effect.

  As described above, the timer target advance effect is a time period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the time period before the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer object appears, arrives. Is an effect that indicates that the effect using the specific decorative member is set as a timer object by causing an effect using the specific decorative member used in the effect of the present invention, and the peripheral control according to this embodiment. The MPU 1511a prepares three timings Ta1 to Ta3 as timings at which such a timer target advance effect can appear.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first refers to the table T10 shown in FIG. 183, and finds the hit information, the information on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information. Is selected to execute the timer target advance effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (or not to execute the timer target advance effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3) based on.

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, as a selection candidate regarding the execution of the timer target advance effect, “the timer target advance effect is not executed at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ none ”in the figure)”, "Execute the timer target advance effect only at the timing Ta1 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (" Ta1 "in the figure)", "Execute the timer target advance effect only at the timing Ta2 of the timing Ta1 to Ta3 (FIG. "Ta2"), "Execution of the timer target advance effect only at the timing Ta3 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (" Ta3 "in the drawing)", "At the timings Ta1 and Ta2 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3" Perform the timer target advance effect (“Ta1 in the figure” 2)) "," Execute the timer target advance effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1 & 3" in the figure) ", and" Timer target at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 " There are prepared selection candidates such as "execute the first effect (" Ta2 & 3 "in the figure)" and "execute the timer target first effect at all of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (" Ta1 & 2 & 3 "in the figure)".

In the example of the table T10, when the count display is not executed and the timer prefetch effect is not displayed, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the timer target advance effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target advance effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1 & T2, the timing T1 & T3, and the timing T1 & T2 & T3.
However, as described above, the timer target advance effect may be performed at these timings.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the timer target first-time effect is executed is higher than when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. In addition, the number of times that the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used in the effect on the timer is “Common A & B”, the specific decorative member used in the effect on the timer is “Common B”. The setting is made so that the rate at which the timer target advance effect is executed increases, and the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of performing the determination process based on the table T10, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to be performed at least at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the timer target advance effect appears. The determination process for the effect type is further performed.

  FIG. 184 is an example of the contents of the determination process (table T11) for determining the type of the effect mode to be generated at the timing when the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T11 illustrated in FIG. 184. Then, based on the hit information, the information on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, the effect type of any type (“government B rattling”, A determination is made as to whether or not “the action B midway operation (small)” and “the action B midway operation (large)” appear at the above-mentioned determined one timing.

  FIG. 185 is an example of the contents (table T12) of the determination processing for determining which type of effect mode to generate at those timings when performing the timer target advance effect at any two of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T12 illustrated in FIG. 185. Then, based on the hit information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, the effect type of any type (“actor B rattle → role “Battery rattling”, “Battery rattling → Movement of character B midway (small)”, “Movement of character B midway (small) → Movement of character B halfway (small)”, “Rakuten B rattle → Matter of character B "Movement in the middle (large)", "Movement in the middle of character B (small) → movement in the middle of character B (large)", "Movement in the middle of character B (large) → movement in the middle of character B (large)") A determination is made as to whether or not to appear at each of the two timings that have been determined.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that the “accessory B rattle → the accessory B rattle” appears, the “accessory B rattle” is displayed at any of the two timings that have been determined. It is executed as a timer target first-aid effect, and when it is determined based on the table T12 that "the character B rattles → the character B halfway operation (small)" appears, the two of the determined two At the earlier timing of the timing, the “Battery B rattling” is executed as a timer target advance effect, and at the later timing of the two timings that have been determined, the “Battery B middle operation (small)” Is executed as a timer target first effect.

  FIG. 186 shows an example of the contents of the determination process (table T13) for determining which type of effect mode to generate at those timings when performing the timer target advance effect at all of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T13 illustrated in FIG. 186. Then, based on the hit information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, the effect type of any type (“actor B rattle → role “Battery rattle → rattle B rattle”, “Battery rattle rattle → character B rattle ratchet → action B halfway motion (small)”, “Character B rattle rattle → character B middle way motion (small) → character B halfway Action (small) "," Machine B halfway action (small)-> half-size B action (small)-> half-size B action (small) "," Mineral B rattle-> half-size B play-half-way Operation (Large) "," Rotary B rattling → Partial B partway operation (small) → Partial B partway movement (Large) "," Regular part B partway movement (Small) → Partial part B partway movement (Small) → Action B halfway action (large) ”,“ Judgery B halfway action (small) → Judgery B halfway action (large) → Judgery B halfway action (large) ”, It is determined whether or not the character B middle-movement (large) → the role-middle B operation (large) → the role-middle B operation (large) ”appears at each of the three determined timings. It will be.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that "the character B rattle → the character B rattle → the character B rattle" appears, at any one of the three timings determined to be already determined, Is determined to be executed as a timer target advance effect, and based on the table T13, a determination is made that "local character B rattling → local character B halfway operation (small) → local character B halfway motion (large)" appears. Is performed, at the first timing of the three timings determined to be the above, the “casing B rattle” is executed as a timer target first-time effect, and among the three timings determined to be the predetermined timing, At the second timing of the above, "Movement of character B in the middle (small)" is executed as a timer target advance effect, and the three timings which have been determined as described above are used. And executes the "character object B middle operation (large)" as the timer object first out effect in the third timing.

  In the examples of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same manner (selection ratio) regardless of which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 has been determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. The determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio) depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 has been determined to cause the timer-targeted advance effect to appear. For example, if the timing at which it is determined that the timer-targeted advance effect is to appear is later, the determination process is performed in such a manner that the effect mode having a larger effect range is selected at a higher rate, It is possible to estimate how much time remains until the target effect is performed based on the size of the range of the effect that appeared in the timer target advance effect. In this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 (G), by operating the specific decorative member (in this case, the accessory B) in a manner overlapping the count display of the timer effect in a front view, the timer object In order to preferably obtain such an operation and effect, the count display is made difficult to be visually recognized during the execution of the first stage effect (the operation of the character B during the operation (small) and the operation of the character B during the operation (large)). Thus, if the timer target advance effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target advance effect is executed at the same timing, the timer target advance effect is executed according to the type of the effect that appears at that time. Or be prepared for the stage to be performed soon (when the range of the stage is large), or feel that there is enough time left before the stage for the timer is performed ( (When the output range is small), and then it is expected that there will be a gap between when the accurate remaining count is grasped, and that it will be more interesting. At this time, the count display may be hidden during execution of the timer target advance effect, and the count display may be displayed again when the timer target advance effect ends.

  However, when the specific decorative member (in this case, the accessory B) is operated in a manner overlapping the count display of the timer effect in a front view so that the count display is difficult to visually recognize during the execution of the timer target advance effect ( Or, if the count display is hidden), it is erroneously recognized that the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is being executed even though the timer target advance effect is being executed. There is a concern. Therefore, it is desirable to make it difficult to visually recognize the count display during the execution of the timer target advance effect, and to continuously execute the count sound generated in accordance with the execution of the count display. That is, the output of such a count sound is terminated when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and is not output when the effect of the timer is performed. By continuously outputting the count sound during the execution of the effect, it is expected to prevent the user from erroneously recognizing that the effect for the timer is being executed.

  In addition, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, compared to the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear, the effect in the timer target advance effect is larger in the effect range. It is set so that the rate at which the mode is selected is high.

  In addition, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decoration member used in the effect on the timer is “main item A & B”, when the specific decoration member used in the effect on the timer is “main item B”, In comparison, in the timer target advance effect, the ratio of selecting an effect mode having a large effect range is set to be higher.

  In addition, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, the effect mode in which the effect range is larger in the timer target advance effect when the timing is late among the timings Ta1 to Ta3 than when it is the earlier timing among the timings Ta1 to Ta3. Is set to increase the selection ratio. Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether or not there is not much time left until the effect for the timer target is performed based on the size of the range of the effect that has appeared in the first effect for the timer target.

  In addition, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as the time elapses, the range of the effect in the timer target advance effect (actor B rattle → actor B intermediate operation (small) → actor B intermediate operation (large)) ) Is spread, and it is set so that the reverse (a mode in which the effect range is narrowed) does not occur even if the current status is maintained (for example, the play of the character B rattle → the play of the character B rattle). In other words, in this case, as the time elapses, the mode becomes closer to the range of the effect that appears when the “object B operation” or the “accessory A & B operation” of the timer object is performed. By confirming the effect, it becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until the “object B operation” or the “character A & B operation” for the timer is reduced.

  Further, in the timer target advance effect according to the present embodiment, the specific decoration member (accessory B) used at the time of the timer object effect (for example, the operation of the accessory B) is always used, but the timer object effect ( For example, the timer target advance effect may be performed using a different decorative member (for example, character A) without using the specific decorative member (character B) used at the time of the character B operation). That is, in this case, in the timer target advance effect, it functions as an effect indicating the type of the effect that appears when the count display reaches the predetermined value with a predetermined accuracy. Then, when such a timer target advance effect is realized, the type of the effect to appear as the timer target advance effect (actor B rattle, character B halfway operation (small), character B halfway operation (large)) In addition, it is desirable to make the type (precision) of the type of the suggested effect appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, depending on the number of times of execution. For example, when the type of the effect having a large range of the effect (the action B middle action (large)) appears, the timer target first-out is compared with when the type of the effect (the role B rattling) whose the range of the effect is small appears. It is possible to increase the ratio of the effect (the operation of the accessory B and the operation of the accessory A & B) using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used in the effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value. When the number of executions of the timer target advance effect in the fluctuation is large, the effect using the specific decoration member (accessory B) used in the timer object advance effect is larger than when the number of executions is small. The rate at which the action and the accessory A & B action) appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value may be increased.

Further, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of presentation modes including “local character B operation” and “local character A & B operation” (“local character B operation”, “local character A & B”) Other than the “operation”, an effect using a specific decorative member (accessory B) is performed as a timer target advance effect on the assumption that any of the effect modes that do not use the accessory B) can appear. And
However, as an effect using the accessory B, it is assumed that only one of the “operation of the accessory B” and the “operation of the accessory A & B” is prepared. An effect using B) may be performed.

  For example, as an effect mode using the accessory B, while only the “accessory A & B operation” can appear as an effect for the timer, the specific decoration member (the accessory B) is used as the first effect for the timer. When the effect used is performed, only a part of the decorative member (accessory B) used in the effect on the timer (the accessory A & B operation) is used in the timer object advance effect. In other words, in this case, while suggesting that the "effect using character B" appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value due to the timer object advance effect, the "effect using character B" This makes it more difficult to predict the whole picture (use of the accessory A in addition to the accessory B), which can be concealed. Therefore, the effect of the accessory B when the count display reaches a predetermined value by a plurality of timer target advance effects (actor B rattling → actor B intermediate operation (small) → actor B intermediate operation (large)) Even if the effect approaching the range is executed and its prediction is made possible, since the presence range of the accessory A as well as its presence is concealed, the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value is kept. It is possible to suitably maintain the contents of the effect of the target (the operation of the accessory A & B) in a secret state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B operation is performed may be performed as a timer target advance effect.

  According to such a configuration, the timer target advance effect is performed using only a part of the characters A and B (the character B) used in the “character A & B operation” that is the effect of the timer. Needless to say, in the timer target advance effect, the effect range of the accessory B in the “accessory A & B operation” using only some of the accessories A and B (the accessory B) used in the “accessory A & B operation” The effect (movement of part-B midway (small), movement of part-B midway (large)) appears only in a part of. Then, after such a small production range is gradually expanded by a plurality of timer target advance productions, only the character B is produced in a larger production range by performing the “character A & B operation” that is the production of the timer. In this case, the effect using the character A also appears, and thus the novelty when the effect of the timer object is performed is lost by performing the timer object advance effect when the remaining count is consumed. It is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be maintained appropriately without such a situation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target advance effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (the effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily have to be exactly the same, and may be any as long as it is possible to indicate which effect mode appears as a timer target effect by the timer target advance effect. For example, as a fan-shaped accessory, a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory" are arranged overlapping in a front view, and the timer target first effect In this case, the specific decorative member used in the above is defined as a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory”, and the specific decorative member used in the performance for the timer is set as a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, at a stage (while the count display is being performed) before an effect using a fan-shaped character as a timer target effect, a fan-shaped character is used as a timer target advance effect. It is possible to produce a performance.

  Further, in this embodiment, the accessory is used as the specific decoration member, but a display means may be used as the specific decoration member instead. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, the same effect as the above-described effect using the accessory is realized by increasing the range in which the display appears (the range of the effect) or by changing the display content. It is possible.

  Incidentally, it is desirable that the “effect using the specific decorative member” performed as the timer target first-time effect be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the specific decorative member is an accessory, after a predetermined time has elapsed, control is performed to return the specific decorative member to the original position.When the specific decorative member is a display unit, after the predetermined time has elapsed, The control for hiding the display as the timer target advance effect is performed. At this time, it is desirable that the above-mentioned predetermined time required for the timer target advance effect be shorter than the time required for the effect (effect for the timer object) to appear when the count display reaches the predetermined value. In this way, by realizing different rendering modes depending on the length of time, in the timer target advance rendering, the specific decorative member used in the timer target rendering can be kept to a degree that is not very satisfactory. As a result, it is possible to keep the game entertainment suitable by waiting for the count display to reach the predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the count display is hidden, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B) Action etc.) can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, a first effect mode (for example, a conversation notice) among a plurality of effect modes appears. Even after this, the count display is re-displayed thereafter, and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the redisplay of the count display, the count display is hidden again, and a second effect mode (for example, the action of the accessory A (forecast of the accessory A)) of the plurality of effect modes appears. (Resurrection timer directing).

  That is, in this case, after the first presentation mode is shown as if it were a timer target (counting target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer presentation, and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode is performed. Since the production mode is indicated to be a timer object, even if the count display reaches a predetermined value and the display is hidden at a timing when a production with a relatively low degree of expectation appears, Then, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed thereafter, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  FIG. 187 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). In the situation, it is determined that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and it is determined that “conversation notice” is to be performed at an earlier timing and “accessory A operation 1” is to be performed at a later timing. FIG. 52 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the resurrection timer effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “character-less character reach” are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, a case where a specific timer type (there may be more than one in the accessory A operation 1) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing relating to the resurrection timer effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the resurrection timer effect is not performed, but the resurrection timer effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. Alternatively, the following process may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), assuming that the timer type of “accessory A operation 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing as follows. The selected “casing A operation 1” is displayed in a plurality of presentation modes (“casing A operation 1-1”, “casing A operation 1-2”, and “casing A operation 1” -3 "and" Character A operation 1-4 "). It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  187 (a), in the mode of the “principal item A operation 1-1”, 20 seconds after the count display having the count number of 40 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change. When the elapsed time elapses, the "conversation notice" which is not set as the timer is executed, and when the count reaches a predetermined value when 40 seconds elapses, the count display is not displayed, and the timer is set as the target. “Accessory A operation (accessory A notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of the "character A operation 1-2", after the count display having the count number of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol fluctuation, the predetermined value is set when 20 seconds have elapsed. When the count is reached and the count display is not displayed, a “conversation notice” (first production mode) that is not targeted for the timer is executed, but when the “conversation notice” ends, the count display is changed. The timer display is re-displayed and the timer effect continues, and the count display is hidden again after a lapse of a predetermined time (after a lapse of 40 seconds from the start of the count display having the count number of 20 seconds). The “target A operation (preliminary A notice)” (second effect mode) targeted for the timer is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of the "character A operation 1-3", after the count display having the count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, the predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have elapsed. A notice E2 (first effect mode) is executed as a non-target notice that cannot be a timer target effect while the count display is hidden, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) ends. Then, the count display is re-displayed and the timer effect continues, and the count display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display having the 12-second count). Is displayed again, and the “operation of the accessory A (preliminary announcement of the accessory A)” (second effect mode) which is set as the timer object is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of the "character A operation 1-4", after the count display having the count number of 8 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, the predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have elapsed. When the count display is hidden, a notice E1 (first production mode) is executed as a non-target notice that cannot be a timer target effect, but the notice E1 (non-target notice) is executed. When finished, the count display is re-displayed and the timer effect continues, and the count is counted after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display having a count of 8 seconds). The display is not displayed again, and the “accessory A operation (accessory A notice)” (second effect mode) which is set as a timer object is executed.

  In other words, of the plurality of presentation modes prepared corresponding to “casing A operation 1”, “casing A operation 1-2”, “casing A operation 1-3”, and “casing A operation” The mode of "1-4" corresponds to the resurrection timer effect. In these resurrection timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden from the start of the count display until the timer target effect (operation of the accessory A) is performed, and the effect that is not the timer target ( Since the conversation notice, the notice E2, or the notice E1) appears, it is possible to make it seem as if the timer effect has ended when the effect appears.

  In this regard, in the mode of “character A operation 1-2”, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B) that can be adopted as a timer object , Recreation timer effect for the effect (conversation notice) having a lower jackpot expectation degree than the effect for the timer (effect A operation). I'm going to do it. In other words, in this case, after the effect (conversation notice) with a low expectation of big hits appears as if it appeared as a timer object effect, it is shown that the effect (conversation notice) is not a timer object effect (count display). Is re-displayed), and the effect (operation of the character A) having a higher jackpot expectation than the effect (conversation notice) comes to appear as the effect (second effect mode) of the timer object (the count display is reset again). Display), it is expected that such reversible effects will enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, in the modes of the “casing A operation 1-3” and the “casing A operation 1-4”, a plurality of presentation modes that cannot be adopted as timer objects (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F) , Etc.) as a target (first effect mode) to perform the resurrection timer effect. In such a configuration, when an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer object (here, notice E2 or notice E1) appears as if it is an effect of a timer object, the timer effect is not terminated at this timing. Will be suggested to be continued. That is, in this case, in particular, the notice E1 that appears when the mode of the “accessory A operation 1-4” is executed has a low degree of expectation of itself, but the timer effect continues without being ended at this timing. By functioning as an effect that suggests, it is possible to contribute to the enhancement of gaming interest. Note that a plurality of effect modes that cannot be adopted as timer objects (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F, and the like) can appear even when the timer effect is not performed.

  In addition, in each of the “casing A operation 1-2”, the “casing A operation 1-3”, and the “casing A operation 1-4” according to this embodiment, they appear when the count display is started. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), the peripheral control MPU 1511a secretly sets a 40-second effect timer for control. Even if the display is temporarily hidden, the processing for continuously updating the effecting timer is internally performed, so that when the time 40 seconds elapse after the count display is started, the effect ( Character A operation) appears. According to such a configuration, any one of the "casing A operation 1-1", the "casing A operation 1-2", the "casing A operation 1-3", and the "casing A operation 1-4". Even when the accessory A operation 1 is executed in the mode, the count display is not displayed again at the same timing from the start of the change, and the effect (the accessory A operation) for the timer can be made to appear.

  And in such a resurrection timer effect, "count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed" are different count digests. It is important to be able to recognize that you are doing the same count digestion instead of doing it, as it indicates that the timer production has not been completed and is continuing .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of the “accessory A operation 1-2”, when the count display having the count number of 20 seconds becomes “0 second”, the count display is hidden. The "conversation notice" will be executed, but after the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display is displayed in a minus notation and redisplayed, so that "0 seconds" when the display is hidden is We try to express how the count digestion is not over and this is continuing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of the “accessory A operation 1-2”, the count digestion is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden. The count display is re-displayed from the state where the count has been digested for the hidden time. More specifically, in the mode of "character A operation 1-2", the count display becomes non-display at "0 second", and after the non-display state is maintained for 2 seconds, the count display is re-displayed. However, when the count display is displayed again, the count is digested by the minus count from "-2 seconds" to 18 seconds.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the symbol fluctuation is stopped after the effect for the timer is executed in this way.

  In the case of realizing such a resurrection timer effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the type of the fluctuation pattern or the type of the timer effect (for example, “Character reach“ operation A operation 1 ”) based on the result of the jackpot determination. Thus, a determination process (see FIG. 187 (b)) for determining whether to generate the resurrection timer effect or to determine in which mode the resurrection timer effect is generated is performed. This determination processing may be performed based on the result information of each processing before, for example, after step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 is performed and before step S5511 is performed. It is possible.

  FIG. 187 (b) shows that, when the timer type of “accessory A operation 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the “accessory A operation 1” is included in the form of the resurrection timer effect. It is a figure showing an example about the contents (table T14) of the judging processing about which of a plurality of production modes to perform.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the “request A operation 1” of the character reach is selected, the “request A operation 1” is replaced with the “request A operation 1-1”. , "Accessory A operation 1-2", "Accessory A operation 1-3", or "Accessory A operation 1-4".

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, referring to the table T14 shown in FIG. 187 (b), the information is allocated to the hit information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the information. Based on the effect random number, any one of the “casing A operation 1-1”, “casing A operation 1-2”, “casing A operation 1-3”, and “casing A operation 1-4” Is to select whether to execute the timer effect.

  Then, as a result, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in any of the “casing A operation 1-3” and the “casing A operation 1-4”, the processing in steps S5512 and S5525 is performed. The type of the non-target notice is determined based on the determined type. For example, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of “character A operation 1-3”, it is determined in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525 that at least the notice E2 is to be executed as the non-target notice. That is, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of “character A operation 1-4”, in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525, at least the notice E1 is executed as the non-target notice. A determination will be made.

  In the example of the table T14, when the resurrection timer effect for the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect mode (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer object is set. The big hit expectation is set to be higher than when the target resurrection timer effect is executed. Further, when a resurrection timer effect is performed for an effect that has a high degree of expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer object (notice It is set so that the big hit expectation is higher than the case where the resurrection timer effect is executed for the effect mode with low expectation among E1, E2). Further, in the example of the table T14, the rate at which the resurrection timer effect is executed is higher when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, as compared to when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. Is set to

  According to such a resurrection timer effect, the non-display of the count display causes an effect mode (first effect mode) with a low degree of expectation to appear once, which temporarily gives the player disappointment. The display is re-displayed and the display is continued, and the count display continued after a predetermined time has been hidden again, so that an effect mode (second effect mode) having a high degree of expectation appears. As a result, it is possible to give the player who was paying attention to the count display a temporary disappointment, but also to give unexpectedness and surprise by continuing the count and reversing the stage, and the entertainment interest is reduced compared to the past Can be suppressed.

  In this sense, an effect with a high degree of expectation (second effect) is executed as an effect using two different decorative members, and then an effect with a low degree of expectation (first effect). It is desirable to execute as an effect using only one of the two different decorative members (or a decorative member related thereto) in order to express the reversibility by the resurrection timer effect. At this time, one of the two different decorative members does not necessarily have to completely match when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, as the fan-shaped accessory, a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory” are arranged in an overlapping manner in a front view. This is the case where the decorative member used in the mode is a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and the decorative member used in the second effect mode is a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the effect performed as the first effect mode has a lower degree of expectation.

  Also, in such a resurrection timer effect, "count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "count display that was hidden and then redisplayed" are different counts. In order to be able to recognize that the same count digestion is being performed, rather than digesting, the count sound is displayed as "Once hidden" while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the process from “count display that appears before the display is performed” to “count display that has been hidden and then displayed again”.

  Further, in this embodiment, the resurrection timer effect is performed only once during the period in which one symbol change is performed. However, the resurrection timer effect is performed a plurality of times during the period in which one symbol change is performed. It may be executed over a period of time. In this case, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed each time the count display is hidden. Then, as the number of times the resurrection timer effect is executed during the period in which one symbol change is performed increases, the effect type (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) with a high degree of expectation as the effect of the timer as the effect of the timer object. It is desirable to increase the ratio of occurrence of.

  In the resurrection timer effect, the time from when the count display is hidden to when the first effect mode (conversation notice, notices E1, E2, etc.) appears, and after the redisplayed count display is again hidden, The length of time until the second effect mode (the action of the character A) appears is made different so that it is possible to recognize whether or not the effect of the timer target is appearing. It is desirable to do.

In addition, in order to improve the game entertainment as a timer effect, when a resurrection timer effect is performed for an effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer object As compared to the case where the resurrection timer effect for the notices E1 and E2 is executed, an effect mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) having a higher degree of expectation appears as the effect for the timer. It is desirable to control the ratio to be high.
Further, when a resurrection timer effect is performed for an effect that has a high degree of expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer object (notice E1, E2) as compared to the case where the resurrection timer effect is performed for the effect mode with a low degree of expectation, the effect mode (effect type and effect contents (cut-in It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of the aspect))) increases.

  Further, in the resurrection timer effect according to the present embodiment, the first effect mode appears after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and is not displayed, and the first effect is displayed. When the mode is completed, the count display is re-displayed, and the count display is negatively counted. When the count display reaches a specific negative value and the display is not displayed, the second display mode is displayed. If the first effect mode or the second effect mode is caused to appear under the non-display condition, the count display is hidden when the first effect mode or the second effect mode is caused to appear. The respective count values at the time of execution may be appropriately set.

[Timer target suppression control]
In other words, the effect set as the target of the timer effect (counting target) can often be executed even when the timer effect is not performed. For example, a specific effect executed at a predetermined timing based on a fluctuation pattern is specified. An effect (for example, notice of conversation, change of hold, cut-in A, operation of character A, cut-in B, operation of character B, etc.), a predetermined effect (for example, change of hold) executed at the timing of winning, and the like. Be prepared. However, among these, under the situation that the “specific effect performed at a predetermined timing based on the fluctuation pattern” is the target of the timer effect (counting target), a new prize is won when the count display reaches the predetermined value. When a predetermined effect (for example, a change in hold) is caused by chance and this occurs, the predetermined effect is generated in relation to the count display reaching a predetermined value as a target of the timer effect. Or, it may be difficult to determine whether a predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (a situation of confusion). ) May be overlooked (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) Rikane no.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a specific type of timer effect targeting a specific effect is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the specific type of timer effect reaches a predetermined value. When the first period is relatively large, the display of the predetermined effect that is not the object of the timer when a new prize is generated is allowed, but the first period ends, and the count display in the timer effect of the specific type becomes the predetermined value. When the remaining time until the time reaches the second period is relatively short, the display of the predetermined effect which is not the object of the timer is not allowed even if a new prize is generated (timer object suppression control). With this, in a situation where a specific type of count effect with the specific effect as a timer target is executed, while the occurrence of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target due to the occurrence of a new prize is allowed, the count display as a timer effect target is performed. It is difficult to determine whether the predetermined effect has occurred in relation to reaching the predetermined value, or whether the predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused). ) Can be suitably avoided.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows a mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a determination is made not to execute the mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of timer target suppression control performed when a specific variation number is selected in a situation.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the specific timer type, first, a count having a count of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, a specific effect targeted for the timer appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a period from the start of the symbol change to the specific count value (for example, “5 seconds”) before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0 seconds”). In the (first period), when a new prize is generated, display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is permitted (permissible period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, “5 seconds”). In the predetermined period (second period), even if a new prize is generated, a timer target suppression control that does not permit the display of the predetermined effect that is not a timer target is performed (suppression period).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the timer target suppression control according to this embodiment, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect is not permitted is set to “the count display is the specific count value ( For example, after "5 seconds"), the period from when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") until the specific effect targeted by the timer is executed (finished) " It is to be continued until "the period after the end of the specific effect". In other words, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) and the specific effect that is the object of the timer occurs, the effect itself is suppressed, so that the effect is itself a timer object. The specific effect functions as a valuable effect occurrence opportunity, and the degree of attention to the specific effect is improved, so that the game entertainment when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 second”) is suitably maintained. Will be expected.

  However, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, “5 seconds”) has elapsed since the end of the specific effect targeted by the timer. At this time, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect that is not the object of the timer is not allowed is ended, and according to such timer object suppression control, the symbol fluctuation is stopped after the end of the suppression period. In the period until the new winning is generated, the display of the predetermined effect that is not the object of the timer when a new winning is generated is allowed again.

  By the way, as described above, in the above-mentioned suppression period, even if a new prize is generated, the display of the predetermined effect which is not the object of the timer is not permitted as described above. However, in this case, during the suppression period in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed even if a new prize is generated, there is a concern that a game in which a new prize is not generated by the player may be performed, and thus the speed of the game per unit time. And the disadvantage of the hall side may occur.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not allow the display of the predetermined effect due to the new prize even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period. Does not discard the display of the predetermined effect itself, but performs control to delay (carry over) the timing of the display until the end of the suppression period. According to such a configuration, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by the new prize is not allowed, but the display of the predetermined effect is preferably executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress playing a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period.

  In the case where a new prize is generated within the allowable period and a predetermined effect is displayed, sound output is performed in accordance with the display of the predetermined effect, whereas a new prize is generated and a predetermined output is generated within the suppression period. When the display of the effect is delayed (carry over) until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable not to perform the sound output in accordance with the display when displaying the predetermined effect. As a result, the display of the predetermined effect can be performed secretly at a timing different from the normal time (at the time of winning), and when the predetermined effect displayed when the player does not know is seen, the surprise is improved. It is expected to be provided to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, for the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the execution period of the effect that is the timer target to start to the timing after the execution period ends, the timer target It is desirable to control so that it does not necessarily occur when an effect is performed.

  For example, such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability when a timer effect is performed, and when a big hit is won in the big hit determination, the time when the big hit is lost (losing) is compared with when the big hit is lost. Therefore, if the rate of occurrence of such a suppression period is increased, when a prize is generated aiming at timing around the time when the effect of the timer is performed, a predetermined effect due to the prize is generated. (Suppression period has occurred and there is a high possibility that a big hit has been won) will be encouraged, and a new prize will be generated during the suppression period A game that is not allowed to be performed is suppressed.

  Further, the rate at which the suppression period occurs varies depending on the type of the production mode that appears as the production of the timer object (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.). With this configuration, when a prize is generated within a period before the production of the timer object is performed, whether or not the predetermined production due to the prize is generated (the suppression of the specific type of production Is likely to be executed as a timer target), and it is suppressed that a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period is performed. Will be done.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a table (table T15) referred to in the timer target suppression control when the rate at which the suppression period occurs varies depending on the type of the presentation mode that appears as the timer target presentation. .

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a conversation notice, a hold change, a cut-in A, a character A operation, a cut-in B, a character B operation, and the like are prepared as effects for the timer. .

  In this regard, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), basically, the lower the jackpot expectation degree, the lower the rate of occurrence of the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer-targeted effect, and the larger the jackpot expectation. It is set so that the higher the effect mode is, the higher the rate of occurrence of the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer-targeted effect is performed.

  More specifically, the suppression period is not necessarily generated when the effect of the timer target is "conversation notice", and the suppression period is set to 20% when the effect of the timer object is "cut-in A". When the effect of the timer is “cut-in B”, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the effect of the timer is “movement of character A”. In some cases, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and when the effect of the timer object is "movement of character B", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80%. Is a "special timer", a suppression period is always generated.

  According to such a configuration, the higher the jackpot expectation degree, the higher the rate of occurrence of the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer-targeted effect, so that a predetermined effect is generated due to a new winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the production mode with a high expectation of big hits. Conversely speaking, the effect mode with a low jackpot expectation degree becomes more likely to be overlooked as the effect mode has a low jackpot expectation, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect mode with a low jackpot expectation degree appears. The effect can be made to proceed while keeping the concealment of the game, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game is appropriately maintained until the symbol is stopped.

  In addition, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the occurrence ratio of the suppression period is determined according to the type of the production mode that appears as the production for the timer regardless of whether the big hit has been won. I have. Therefore, both when the jackpot is won and when the player loses (loses), the suppression period can be generated at the same rate as long as the type of the production mode that appears as the production for the timer is the same. .

  By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the effect of the timer is “suspended change”, the suppression period is always generated even if the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. Like that. That is, the “suspended change” according to this embodiment can be displayed not only as a specific effect that is a timer target, but also as a predetermined effect that is not a timer target when a new prize is generated. Therefore, if the suppression period does not occur when such a “hold change” occurs, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the “hold change (variable symbol) May change at the same time) and a change in hold display (change in hold display corresponding to the pending symbol) due to a new prize may cause simultaneous confusion. is there. Therefore, it is desirable to always generate the suppression period when the effect of the timer object is “hold change”. However, as described above, for "holding change", similarly to "conversation notice", the possibility of overlooking this is increased, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect mode with a low jackpot expectation degree is changed. If the aim is to make the effect proceed while keeping the appearance, the control may be performed so that the suppression period does not occur even when the effect of the timer is a “hold change”.

  In the example of the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the rate at which the suppression period occurs varies depending on the type of the production mode that appears as the production for the timer, but in addition to this, the production of the same type Even in this mode, the rate at which the suppression period occurs may be made different depending on the timer type determined in the count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

  For example, even when “conversation notice” is selected as the effect for the timer, the “conversation notice” is changed to “conversation notices 1 to 4” shown in FIG. 161 and further to “conversation notice 1 to 4” shown in FIG. It is desirable that the occurrence rate of the suppression period be made different depending on which of the "conversation notices 1 to 6" applies. In this case, the occurrence ratio may include 100% or 0%.

  In addition, the effect of the timer object is any one of “conversation notice”, “hold change”, “cut-in A”, “special timer”, “character A operation”, “cut-in B”, “character B operation”. In this case, the suppression period may be generated at a predetermined ratio not only for a predetermined period before and after the execution of the effect of the timer target, but also for the entire period from the start of the symbol change to the stop thereof. In particular, when the effect of the timer is the "special timer" with the highest expectation of big hits, the above-described suppression period is always generated over the entire period from the start of the symbol change to the stop, so that the "special timer" May be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect resulting from this is not discarded, and the time for performing the display is determined when the suppression period ends. Although the control for delaying (carrying over) is performed, the display of the predetermined effect itself may be discarded so as not to be performed.

[Timer production for new timer productions]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while performing the count display during the period in which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, a conversation notice, a hold change, , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.), a timer effect of hiding the count display in accordance with the timing of appearance is enabled. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, a “specific effect mode” is prepared as one of the plurality of effect modes that appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and then the “specific effect mode” is prepared. When the "mode" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) up to that point is newly started.

  That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is performed in a manner divided into the first count display and the second count display, the time required for the entire timer effect is the same. The time required to complete one count display (the first count display or the second count display) itself can be shortened, and the monotonousness during the digestion of the count display can be eliminated to achieve a game entertainment interest. Is expected to be suppressed.

FIG. 189 (a) shows a mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a determination is made not to execute the mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). In the situation, when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer character reach” are selected, a time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect directed to the new timer and directed to the new timer It is a chart.
FIG. 189 (b) shows a mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). In the situation, the time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect directed to the new timer performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “SP reach with no timer” are selected. It is a chart.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and (b), for convenience of explanation, only one pattern of the type of “timer effect with a new timer as an effect object” is prepared for each variation pattern. A plurality of types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) having different generation times of the first count display (for example, a pattern in which the first count display is started in the middle of the symbol change) and different end times are prepared. Then, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

In the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect object” illustrated in FIG. 189 (a), first, a first count display having a count of 30 seconds is started in synchronization with the start of symbol change. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is not displayed, a “specific effect mode” targeted for the timer appears. After the "specific production mode" appears in this manner, a new count display (a second count display having a count of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is newly displayed. To start this (new timer).
In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, whenever a “specific effect mode” appears, a count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is always made. ) Is newly displayed and this is started. However, even if the first count display has reached the predetermined value in this way, merely starting a new count display (second count display) differently from this causes the execution of the effect targeted by the timer. May feel as if they were entrusted with the game, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may decline.

  Therefore, in the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect object” according to this embodiment, first, as a “specific effect mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. A "failure production" that does not show any degree of expectation will appear. That is, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect having a degree of expectation as an effect for the timer (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, role (For example, a motion of the object B), a disappointing effect situation is created as if it failed. However, in the effect condition, the second count display is newly started, so that the game As a result, the player feels that he can again challenge the failed timer effect, and is expected to improve the game entertainment through such inflection.

  However, in the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect object” illustrated in FIG. 189 (a), the second count display started after the “failure effect” is not ended within the symbol fluctuation period, and the remaining count is not changed. A symbol stop (a big hit symbol or a lost symbol) is performed in a state where the digestion has not been completed. According to such a configuration, even if the player is looking forward to what degree of expectation will appear when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the count is extinguished. At the point when the symbol stop (big hit hit) is displayed earlier, it is possible to completely lose the interest regarding the big hit expectation, so that there is no production effect without causing a decrease in gaming interest. The timer effect can be ended. At the symbol stop that appears before the second count display is completely exhausted, in addition to the losing symbol, the jackpot symbol can also appear, so especially when the jackpot symbol appears, there is no gaming interest at all. It does not decrease.

In other words, in the “timer effect using the new timer as an effect object” shown in FIG. 189 (a), the effect with the expected degree is not appeared as a timer object at all, but the symbol change is almost the entire period (at least half of the time). Count display (first count, second count) is performed over the above period),
-In addition to performing an effect that is conscious of the possibility that an effect with some degree of expectation may appear at an intermediate stage (an effect in which the first count reaches a predetermined value),
・ Equipped with a configuration in which the newly started 2nd count display is stopped with the number of symbols remaining, the sense of expectation that the effect for the timer will soon occur will be almost completely changed. It can be sustained over a period of time. In addition, it has been described above that in any one of the first count display and the second count display, a decrease in gaming interest caused by not producing an effect having a degree of expectation is appropriately suppressed. It is on the street.

  On the other hand, in the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect object” illustrated in FIG. 189 (b), the count number of 30 seconds is coincident with the start of the symbol change similarly to the example illustrated in FIG. 189 (a). The first count display with is started. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is not displayed, a "specific effect mode (failure effect)" which is targeted for the timer appears. After the “specific production mode (failure production)” appears, a count display (second count display having a count of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared up to that time is displayed. The point of newly displaying and starting this is the same as the example shown in FIG. 189 (a).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), a symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol fluctuation period. It is supposed to. In this regard, “Timer production with the new timer as the production target” means, as described above, the expectation that the production of the timer target will soon occur without producing any production with the expected degree as the timer target. Since it has a technical feature in maintaining it, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of symbol fluctuation, an effect with an expected degree appears. Do not. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol variation period, simply performing a process that does not cause the effect having the expected degree to appear does not apply to the timer. It is not possible to maintain the expectation that the production will occur soon.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol fluctuation period, The count display is not hidden, but is maintained as a display reaching a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the symbol is stopped while the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display has reached the predetermined value and is maintained, when viewed from the player's side, an effect (effect to be counted) corresponding to the fact that the second count display has reached the predetermined value appears. Since it seems to be in a strange state, it is possible to appropriately maintain the expectation that the effect of the timer object will soon occur until the symbol stop is performed. And even with such a configuration, it is possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation when a symbol stop (big hit hit) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. As a result, the timer effect can be ended without causing any effect to appear without causing a decrease in gaming interest.

  By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and (b), for a player who has already confirmed “timer effect with a new timer as an effect object”, any failure effect or the second count display will occur. There is a concern that it will be noticed that no production will occur. Therefore, only when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count (including the period in which the display of the state where the second count display has reached the predetermined value is maintained), A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the two-count display. Alternatively, the rate of occurrence of special effects may be increased. According to such a configuration, the second count display has a different counting purpose from the first count display, and the big hit symbol is stopped during the period in which the second count display is exhausting the remaining count. This makes it possible to give an interest of whether or not it is not. In this sense, the first count display and the second count display may have different display modes (form, position, size, etc.) from each other.

It should be noted that the special effect may be generated when the second count display has a remaining count and this is in a running state. However, in view of generating a special effect as an effect corresponding to the second count display, when the big hit symbol is stopped, after the second count display is hidden (the second count display remains the remaining count) It is desirable to execute a special effect after the state is hidden even if it is in the state).
Then, it is desirable to continuously display the special effect executed in this way including the execution period of the big hit game and the subsequent game period. That is, in this case, the special effect is ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process relating to the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect target”.

  The special effect may be generated within the period of the symbol change. In this case, it is desirable that a special effect be executed after the big hit symbol appears (for example, displayed in a temporary stop state) and the second count display is hidden during the symbol change period. However, a big hit symbol may appear (for example, displayed in a temporary stop state) during the symbol change period, and the second count display may be hidden after executing a special effect.

  Then, if the special effect occurrence rate (including 100%) is increased when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count, the symbol stop is performed. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before being displayed, the second count display may be hidden, and the symbols may be stopped in the hidden state. Even in such a case, the game entertainment can be maintained while the second count display is being performed. However, even if the big hit symbol appears when the symbol is stopped after the second count display reaches the predetermined value and the second count display is hidden, the rate of occurrence of the special effect is kept relatively low. In this case, the ratio may include 0%.

  When realizing such a “timer effect with a new timer as an effect object”, in particular, a “failure effect” that does not show any degree of expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is made to appear. Then, unlike the above-described timer effect in which other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, and the like) appear (these are described below). And the effect of the “timer effect targeting the new timer” based on the fulfillment of predetermined effect conditions that are completely unrelated to the result of the jackpot determination and the type of fluctuation pattern. Is desirably determined. That is, in this case, in a situation where both the big hit and the losing can be stopped when the symbol change is stopped (a situation where the big hit symbol may appear according to the probability of the big hit lottery), the “new timer is set. It is possible to generate a “timer effect targeted for the effect”, whereby a failed effect having no degree of expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value can appear. This makes it possible to maintain the expectation that the effect of the timer object will soon occur without causing any effect having the degree of expectation as the timer object, over the period in which the symbol change is performed.

  However, if it is not required to exhibit such an operation and effect, the "specific production mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failed production without any degree of expectation. Alternatively, it may be executed as another effect mode (for example, a conversation notice, a change in hold, a cut-in A, a character A operation, a cut-in B, a character B operation, etc.). In this case, through the same processing as in the case of performing the above-described timer effect that causes other effect modes (for example, notice of conversation, change in hold, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) to appear. "Timer production with the new timer as the production target" will be executed.

  In FIG. 189 (a), in the example in which the first variation pattern (the character reach without the timer) is selected, the symbol is displayed before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches the predetermined value. In FIG. 189 (b), in the example in which the second variation pattern (SP reach without a timer) is selected, the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (the character reach without the timer) is selected, a pattern in which the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches the predetermined value may appear, or the second variation pattern may appear. In the example in which the variation pattern (SP reach with no timer) is selected, the symbol variation may be stopped before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. When a variation pattern different from these variation patterns is selected, a “timer effect with the new timer as an effect target” may be performed.

  In addition, the first count display may be executed as a count display having a shorter number of counts than the second count display, which may be stopped during the execution of the count display, so that the effect of the timer object will soon be generated. It is desirable to maintain the expectation of doing something.

  In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the “failure effect” is performed, if the symbol is stopped before the count display is finished, any of the big hit symbol and the lost symbol can appear. However, in the normal count display that occurs irrespective of the “failure effect”, it is desirable that the big hit symbol always appears if the symbol is stopped before the count display is finished.

  The first count display has a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds) as the count number, and may be executed in any of them. The first count display and the second count display may be performed separately in one mode (for example, 40 seconds) regardless of the count number executed in the first count display. It is desirable to be able to recognize that it is being executed.

  Also, in view of the fact that the first count display and the second count display are executed as separate count displays, the time period during which the first count display is performed and the time period during which the second count display is performed (Including a period in which the display reaches a predetermined value and is maintained as it is), a process of making a display mode (including a color difference and an effect) of a background image and the like different. desirable. In such a process, even if a reach effect occurs during the period in which the first count display is performed and the display shifts to the background image for the reach effect, when the second count display is subsequently executed, the process is not performed until then. A display mode different from that described above appears, and the second count display is executed even when the reach effect occurs within the period in which the second count display is performed and the display shifts to the background image for the reach effect. A display mode different from the display mode that is sometimes displayed is maintained even during the reach effect period, and is maintained until the second count display is hidden.

  In the “timer effect with a new timer as an effect object” according to the present embodiment, the “specific effect mode” which appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed is any type. A "failure effect" that does not indicate the degree of expectation was made to appear, but instead of this, another count start suggestion that a new count display different from the count display that was being executed until now is suggested An effect may be caused to appear. In this case, the expectation may be indicated by the separate count start suggestion effect, or the expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, during the period in which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, etc.) prepared as candidates for counting are performed. , Cut-in B, character B operation, etc.), a timer effect of performing count display up to a predetermined value toward a timing at which at least one of them appears can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display becomes the predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes the predetermined value (here, “0”). A hell timer mode (first timer mode display) where the ratio of appearances of high expectation effects (effect type and effect contents (cut-in mode, etc.)) as a timer target effect is relatively low when When the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a heavenly timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of a high expectation effect as a timer target effect is relatively high can be displayed. Yes (timer mode effect).

  That is, in this case, when the remaining time of the count display is consumed, any one of the timer mode displays having different degrees of advantage with respect to the timer effect is displayed. (Here, “0”), it is expected that the entertainment interest until the game is maintained.

  FIG. 190 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing state in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). Variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “SP reach without timer” are selected, and timer mode production performed when “cut-in B1” is determined to be performed as a production for the timer 3 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (actually, not only the cut-in B1 but a plurality of types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161). The following processing relating to the timer mode effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the timer mode effect is not performed, and the timer mode effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. Alternatively, the following process may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 190, assuming that the timer type of “cut-in B1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the selected “cut-in B1” as the next process. B1 ”in a plurality of presentation modes (“ cut-in B1-1 ”,“ cut-in B1-2 ”,“ cut-in B1-3 ”,“ cut-in B1-4 ”) including the mode of the timer mode production. A determination process as to which is to be performed is performed. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  In the example of FIG. 190, in the mode of “cut-in B1-1”, when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of “50” was started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, The “cut-in B (cut B advance notice)” targeted for the timer is executed under the condition that the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “cut-in B1-2”, 20 seconds elapse after the count display having the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and this is the first identification. When the count value (here, “30”) is reached, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed while the count is being digested, and 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display. When a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached after lapse, “Cut-in B”, which is a timer target and is not displayed, is executed, but the hell timer mode (first timer mode) is executed. Display) is not hidden, and is maintained even after “cut-in B” is hidden.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “cut-in B1-3”, 18 seconds elapse after the count display having the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and this is the first specific count value. When a second specific count value ("32" in this case) earlier than the above is reached, a heavenly challenge effect is performed to determine whether or not a heavenly timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress. The display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is performed as a result of the failure of the heaven challenge effect, and when a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached 50 seconds after the count display is started. While the count display is not displayed, the “cut-in B” targeted for the timer is executed. However, the display in the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is not performed. Since without being to indicate the "cut-B" was hidden even the display is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “cut-in B1-4”, 18 seconds elapse after the count display having the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and this is the first specific count. When the count value reaches a second specific count value (here, "32") before the value, a heaven challenge effect is performed as to whether the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress. As a result of the success of the heavenly challenge effect, a heavenly timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed, and a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached 50 seconds after the count display is started. Then, while the count display is not displayed, “cut-in B” targeted for the timer is executed, but the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is not performed. After the "cut-B" without being in the non-display is hidden even the display is maintained.

  That is, among the plurality of presentation modes prepared corresponding to “cut-in B1”, the modes “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4” are determined by the timer. This is equivalent to mode production. In these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs while the count is being consumed, and the effect for the timer is executed while either of the timer modes is displayed. Will be done. Therefore, even when the count display is exhausting the remaining count, it is possible to give the timer effect an effect by the timer mode effect related to the timer effect.

  More specifically, when the heaven timer mode appears as the timer mode effect type, the ratio of appearance of the effect type having a higher degree of expectation as the timer target effect is higher than when the hell timer mode appears. It is difficult to wait for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value, because the rate of appearance of a high expectation as the mode (production content) of the cut-in B, which is the effect of the timer object, becomes high. As a result, it is possible to further watch the timer effect. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as the timer mode effect type, the effect of the timer target itself cannot be expected compared to the case where the heaven timer mode appears, so the effect is different from the timer effect. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest even if a low-expected effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In order to make such a heaven timer mode and a hell timer mode function more effectively, when the heaven timer mode is displayed and when the hell timer mode is displayed, the same effect as the timer target effect is made. Even when the mode appears, it is desirable to control so that when the effect mode appears while the heaven timer mode is displayed, the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol is stopped thereafter becomes higher.

  In addition, in the timer mode effect according to the present embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4”), a timer Even after the target effect has been executed and has been hidden, the display of the timer mode type (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, even after the timer effect ends, the effect can be advanced while the timer-related effect is displayed, and the effect condition in which the timer effect is executed in either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode. The symbol stop is performed in a state where the player recognizes whether or not the symbol exists. As for the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, the display is not displayed before the count display reaches a predetermined value (before the effect of the timer is generated), or the symbol stop is displayed. The display may be hidden at the previous timing, or may be maintained when the symbol stop is displayed, and may be hidden when the symbol stop is completed.

  The display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is executed (for example, during the execution of the timer prefetch effect). Also, if the display of the heaven timer mode or hell timer mode or the heaven challenge effect is performed in the state where the count display is not executed, the timer effect is not necessarily generated from the time when those effects are executed until the symbol is stopped. You may not make it do. However, when the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode or the heaven challenge effect is performed in the state where the count display is not executed, compared to the case where those effects are not executed in the state where the count display is not executed. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased before the symbol is stopped, and the effect is also performed as an effect that indicates that the timer effect is to be executed in advance.

  Further, in the modes of “cut-in B1-3” and “cut-in B1-4”, a heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display reaches the second specific count value, and thereafter, the count display is changed to the first display. The heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect when the count value reaches the specific count value, whereas in the mode of “cut-in B1-2”, the count display becomes the second specific count value. When the heaven challenge effect is not performed, the hell timer mode is displayed when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

  According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, first, it is possible to watch whether or not the heavenly challenge effect appears when the count value reaches the second specific count value. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility that the heaven timer mode will occur is lost. That is, in this case, the hell timer mode is generated when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself does not occur. It becomes possible to further watch whether or not the hell timer mode occurs when the condition becomes.

  When the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the ratio of appearance of the effect with high expectation as the effect of the timer is higher than in the case where the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the rate of appearance of a highly expected effect as the effect of the timer is different between the case where the timer mode effect itself does not occur and the case where the hell timer mode occurs, the opposite is true. Even when the relationship is adopted, it is possible to further watch whether or not the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

  On the other hand, if the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are set as the timer mode effects when the count display reaches the first specific count value. Is executed, it is possible to further watch the type of the timer mode effect that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

  According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also several specific count values different from the predetermined value (first specific count value, second specific count value) The timer effect (count value) and the effects related to the timer effect (count value) can be made to be interesting and gaze at the timer effect. Can be suitably maintained.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 190, the count display of the timer effect sequentially reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value, and when the count value reaches the predetermined value, the effect for the timer is executed. Will be stopped.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, not only the cut-in B1 but a plurality of types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the specific timer type is selected (see FIG. 161). It is determined in which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) to execute as the timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190). However, instead of the cut-in B1, cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510). The timer type may be determined from these candidates. This processing method can be similarly applied to the processing related to the execution of another effect (for example, a resurrection timer effect).

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the effect for the timer is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, the effect (cut-in B) of the specific type is performed as compared with the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. The ratio of contents with high expectation (cut-in B is performed in a color with high expectation, etc.) is increased. However, instead of this, when the effect for the timer is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, a plurality of performance types (for example, a conversation notice, a hold change) can be performed as compared with the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. , Cut-in A, special timer, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.), the effect type with a high degree of expectation may be increased. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, the effect type having a high degree of expectation may be increased as the effect targeted by the timer, and the ratio of contents having high expectation may be increased.

  In addition, a specific effect type among a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, special timer, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) is selected as the timer target effect. In the case where a timer type is selected, or when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), one of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode always occurs within the execution period of the count display. Is also good. In this case, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode occurs can also appear without performing the heaven challenge effect.

  Further, an effect indicating that one of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode always occurs within a period before reaching the second specific count value at which the heaven challenge effect is executed may be performed.

  Also, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a heavenly high probability mode in which the rate of success of the heavenly challenge effect when the heavenly challenge effect occurs (the ratio displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher than in normal times. It may be made to shift to. That is, in this case, in the heavenly high probability mode, the probability of occurrence of the heaven challenge effect itself in the case where the heaven timer mode is not displayed is reduced (the probability of generating the hell timer mode without causing the heaven challenge effect, The heavenly high probability mode is realized by increasing the probability that the mode effect is not generated) or by lowering the expectation of the timer target effect itself generated in the heaven timer mode compared to the normal time.

  In the heaven challenge effect, a period during which the operation by the player can be accepted is set, and the result of the success or failure of the heaven challenge effect based on the operation performed by the player during the period (heaven timer mode, Which of the hell timer modes will occur) may be displayed.

  Also, if the heaven challenge effect occurs when the number of executed counts in the count display is relatively small, such as when the heaven challenge effect occurs at the same time as the timer effect count display starts, the count in the count display It is desirable that the rate of success in the heavenly challenge effect (the ratio displayed in the heaven timer mode) be higher than in the case where the heavenly challenge effect occurs when the number of executions is relatively large. . In other words, in this case, just before the appearance of the effect that is the target of the timer effect, it is possible to maintain the entertainment of the game due to the expectation that the effect will occur soon, and the effect that is the target of the timer effect appears. When it takes a long time (the number of counts) to perform the game, the expectation that the heavenly challenge effect will occur will be expected to maintain the game entertainment. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer object effect is executed.In this case, the success rate of the heaven challenge effect is minimized, and the timer object effect already executed is performed. On the other hand, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is generated in a trailing manner.

  Further, a heavenly challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. When the heaven challenge effect is executed as a target effect of the timer effect, the success rate in the heaven challenge effect (the ratio displayed in the heaven timer mode) is set to 100%, and after the heaven timer mode is displayed. During the symbol fluctuation period, the ratio of appearance of a highly expected effect (for example, character B operation) among the effects prepared as one of the timer target candidates, although the timer effect was not applied to the timer, Is desirably set higher than the case where no has appeared.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while performing the count display during the period in which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, a conversation notice, a hold change, , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.), a timer effect of hiding the count display in accordance with the timing of appearance is enabled. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the count display, a predetermined effect different from the timer effect (the effect preferably has a predetermined degree of expectation, but is not necessarily limited thereto). When executed, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until a predetermined value is reached, and the output related to the count display is not performed until the predetermined value is reached until the predetermined value is executed. Either of the production modes for which the output is to be stopped is made to selectively appear (count output stop control).

  According to such a configuration, even if the output related to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the output reaches the predetermined value, and the output is stopped in the middle and the output related to the predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the output of the count display of the timer effect is performed and the entertainment of the game is maintained until the count reaches a predetermined value (count exhaustion period).

  FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) show a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and a determination has been made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). 9 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of count output stop control performed when a specific variation number is selected in a second processing situation.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the specific timer type, first, a count having a count of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, the effect of the timer object that is the timer object appears.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time when the predetermined effect appears. It is determined whether the situation is in a predetermined specific performance situation. Then, as a result, when in a specific effect situation, the control for stopping the output related to the count display of the timer effect and executing the predetermined effect is performed. In addition, the “predetermined specific effect status” used for determining whether to stop the output related to the count display of the timer effect in the middle is, for example, the count display of the timer effect is executed. This refers to an effect situation in which a competition occurs in the effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed using an area.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is not stopped even after the output related to the predetermined effect ends. The count display is not re-output. On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the peripheral control MPU 1511a internally keeps time internally from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the change). When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display), it is determined that the timing at which the count display whose output has been stopped reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) has arrived, and The effect of the target appears.

  According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is executed, while the output related to the count display is kept stopped, if the output of the count display is not stopped, the output is set to the predetermined value (here, “0”). When the timing that should have been reached arrives, the effect for the timer will appear. That is, in this case, it is expected that the timer effect, which had been shown as if the timer effect had been prematurely terminated by the execution of the predetermined effect, was continually kept secretly. Will be done.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), even when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the predetermined effect is not required. When the production situation at the time of appearance of the production is not in a predetermined specific production situation, the output related to the count display of the timer production is continued until it reaches a predetermined value without stopping, and the count display is digested. In such a situation, a predetermined effect is executed.

  More specifically, the predetermined effect is “an effect in which an enemy character appears in a specific area”, “an effect of attacking in a specific area”, or “display when an effect fails in a specific area”. And the effect of outputting music ”, if such a predetermined effect is executed while the count display is being executed in a specific area, the player will be able to perform the timer effect (count display). On the other hand, there may be a concern that some adverse effect on the performance (for example, the degree of expectation as a timer performance may be reduced) may be exerted. Therefore, when there is an effect situation in which such a concern may occur, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and a predetermined effect is executed, so that any adverse effect on the timer effect is produced. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect without producing an image as if it were exerted (the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)). In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment makes the effect of the timer object appear in a surprise manner while maintaining the output stoppage state related to the count display. Thus, it is possible to expect that the entertainment interest of the game is improved (the production mode of FIG. 191 (b)).

  However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped every time such a predetermined effect is executed, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself is deteriorated, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may deteriorate. Is done. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when executing the predetermined effect, an empty area (an area where no effect is output) is provided in an area different from the specific area where the count display of the timer effect is output. In some cases, the predetermined effect is output not in the specific area but in an empty area instead of the specific area (FIG. 191 (c)). )). This makes it clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect in which the execution of the count display of the timer effect is interrupted in the middle of the process, and that when the predetermined effect is executed, the gaming interest is reduced. Will be avoided.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 191, the symbol fluctuation is stopped after the effect for the timer is thus executed.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure when implementing such count output suspension control.

  As shown in FIG. 192, assuming that it is determined that the predetermined effect is to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of the variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment performs First, when it is time to generate a predetermined effect within the execution period of the symbol variation, it is determined whether or not a specific effect is present before starting the output of the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

  Here, the “specific production situation” means that, when a predetermined production is newly output, an area necessary for newly outputting the predetermined production is other various productions (here, a count display of a timer production or the like). As described above, this is a situation in which the space is completely used for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 201 (G) and (H), which will be described later, the “bullet firing effect” by the cannon corresponds to the predetermined effect. Then, in the bullet firing effect, an empty (unused) area among the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area, and the lower area in the display area is selectively used as a bullet firing destination. Normally, an effect of bullet firing is performed using the unused area. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), which will be described later, the area required for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect includes other various effects (count display (upper left area), symbol fluctuation (upper right area)). Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. This corresponds to the above-mentioned “specific production situation”. If it is supposed that a bullet is fired in such a specific production situation, a production (for example, a count display) that is already in an output state at the firing target of the bullet is broken or destroyed by the fired bullet. (There is a competition for the production output between the timer production and the predetermined production), and as a result, there is a concern that the expectation of the big hit may be reduced. Also mentioned above.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, prior to starting the output relating to the predetermined effect, when it is determined that the specific effect is present (YES in step S5701), a different effect from the predetermined effect has already been obtained. The output of the effect in the output state (here, the count display) is stopped (step S5702), and the process related to the output of the predetermined effect is performed using the resulting free area (step S5703).

  On the other hand, prior to starting the output for the predetermined effect, when it is determined that the specific effect is not present (NO in step S5701), another effect is set in the area necessary for effect output. Since there is an unused area that is not used, without stopping the output of another effect different from the predetermined effect, performing processing related to the output of the predetermined effect using the unused area. (Step S5713).

Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, an effect mode that is advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to increase the ratio of the appearance.
For example, in the example of FIGS. 191 (b) and (c), if the effect of FIG. 191 (b) in which the effect for the timer is suddenly executed after the output related to the count display is stopped, It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of a high expectation effect (effect type and effect content) as an effect for the timer is higher than when the effect mode of FIG. 191 (c) appears.

  Note that the processing of step S5702 and step S5703 may be executed as one processing. For example, if the output data of the predetermined effect is overwritten on the processing area in which the output data of the count display is stored, the output related to the count display is automatically stopped. It becomes possible to perform an output relating to a predetermined effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a certain effect state is present, the output relating to the count display is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed. However, the effect to be output stopped is not limited to this. May be stopped.

  In the process of step S5702, an effect type for which output is to be stopped is selected from among a plurality of effects (in an output state) using an area necessary for outputting a predetermined effect, and output of the selected effect is stopped. Alternatively, a predetermined effect may be output. In this case, it is preferable that priorities are set in advance for a plurality of effects that are selection candidates for output suspension, and an effect type for which output suspension is to be performed is selected based on the priorities. It is desirable that this priority be set in advance on a program based on whether the effect is more important for the player. As a result of judging the priority, if all of the other effects in the output state have a higher priority than the predetermined effect, the output of the other effect is maintained and the output of the predetermined effect is not performed. .

  Then, the effect type that is to be output stopped is to be executed as a plurality of effects that are related and connected to the effect contents (for example, a timer effect connected by a count display and a timer target effect). During the effect that appears first in the effect (for example, during the execution of the count display), the output is stopped, and before the effect that appears later (for example, the timer target effect) is started, the predetermined effect is started. Is terminated, it is desirable to execute the effect appearing later without stopping the output.

  In addition, regarding the effect and the predetermined effect that are the targets of output cancellation when executing the predetermined effect, in addition to the effect by the image display, the effect by the action of the character, the effect by the music, the effect by the board lamp, etc. Good. In addition, when performing the predetermined effect, the effect or the predetermined effect that is the target of the output stop is a composite of at least two or more of each effect element such as image display, character action, music, and a board lamp. When the effect is executed as a composite effect, at least one of the composite effect elements may be simply stopped. For example, if the predetermined effect is a “bullet firing effect” shown in FIG. 201 (G) to be described later, and the effect to be stopped is “a composite effect of an image display and a board lamp”, the composite effect Even if only the output related to the image display is stopped and the output related to the panel lamp is maintained, the effect of the panel lamp in the display area where the bullet as the image display does not reach is adversely affected. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition due to production) will occur.

[Timer Plus Direction]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first counts at least one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, and the like). It is possible to display a count display within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and display the count display for a predetermined time, and then hide the count display so that the effect to be counted appears in the non-display state The production is executable. In this regard, in the count effect, after hiding the count display that has reached the specific count value (for example, “0”), not only one of the plurality of effect modes appears but also the specific count value (for example, “0”). )), It is possible to execute an effect of continuing the count effect by redisplaying the count display in a form having a larger count value (timer effect).

  That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, “0”) and one of a plurality of effect modes appears in a state where the count display is not displayed, the count display is not changed. Since there is a possibility that the rendition is performed with a count value larger than the specific count value and the count effect is further continued (a possibility that an effect mode with a higher degree of expectation will further appear) occurs, the count display is It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained after being hidden.

  FIG. 193 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of a timer plus effect performed when a specific change number (SP reach without a timer) is selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (not only the cut-in B2 but also a plurality of types) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (FIG. 162), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is not performed, and the timer plus effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. Alternatively, the following process may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), assuming that the timer type of “cut-in B2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the timer type as the next process. A determination process is performed to determine which of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-1” and “cut-in B2-2”) including the “timer-plus effect” mode will execute “cut-in B2”. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  In the example of “cut in B2-1” of the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change, a count display having a count value of “40” is displayed, and then 40 seconds elapse. When the elapsed time has elapsed, a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached and the count display is not displayed, and “cut-in B (cut B advance notice)” targeted for the timer is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “cut-in B2-2”, after a predetermined time elapses from the symbol change, a count display in which the count number is significantly reduced as compared with the mode of “cut-in B2-1” is displayed. I have. In general, in such a timer effect, no effect is often performed during a period from when the count display is executed to when the count display reaches a predetermined value. You. Therefore, in the timer plus effect ("cut-in B2-2" mode) shown in FIG. 193 (a), first, a relatively small first count value (here, "4") after a lapse of a predetermined time from a symbol change. After the count display having the count display is displayed and hidden, the first double corresponding effect is displayed in the non-display state for a longer time (here, 4 seconds) than the time during which the count display was displayed (here, 4 seconds). (For example, 9 seconds).

  Here, in the first double corresponding effect, first, an effect of cut-in B as an effect corresponding to a count display having a first count value (here, “4”) (first timer target effect). Execute However, in the first timer target effect, a mode (a character wearing a blue aura) with relatively low expectation appears as the mode of cut-in B. After that, an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed is executed in such a manner as to have a count value larger than the first count value. In addition, as an effect about whether or not to re-display the count display, for example, whether or not a specific display image (count-up image) appears, and whether or not a specific movable character (count-up character) operates It can be realized as an effect of whether or not.

  In addition, in the effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display (count-up effect), each time the count display in the non-display state is redisplayed, the count display is executed prior to the display. The effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable role (count-up role) is made different depending on the number of times of redisplay. It is desirable to do so. In the case where a specific movable character (count-up character) is adopted as a character indicating that the count display is to be re-displayed, the specific movable character (count-up character) is counted up. In addition to this, it is desirable to be used for other effects such as, for example, a jackpot determination. However, in this case, in addition to making the operation mode of the specific movable auditorium (count-up auditorium) different, in addition to the specific movable auditorium (count-up auditorium), a different movable auditorium is further operated. It is desirable to perform a movable effect in cooperation with them in order to grasp that the count-up effect is not being executed.

  According to such a configuration, as the targets of the count “4”, two different effects (the first timer target effect (cut-in B) indicating the degree of expectation (cut-in B), and the second whether the count display is redisplayed) Since the timer target effect (count-up effect) is performed, if the count display (count “4”) for a relatively short time is executed, the timer target effect for a longer time can be enjoyed. become able to. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the time required for the count display to be executed while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest during the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Become so.

  In this regard, in the mode of “cut-in B2-2”, an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display in the first double-response effect appears, and when the effect result appears, the first effect is displayed. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display so as to have a second count value (here, “5”) larger than the count value of “1”. However, in the first double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the count display is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable that the timer effect be terminated at this point.

  After that, when the count display having the second count value (here, “5”) is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double corresponding effect is displayed in the non-display state. Is executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time for which is displayed (here, 5 seconds).

  In this second double-compatible effect, first, the effect of the cut-in B is set as the effect corresponding to the count display having the second count value (here, “5”) (third timer target effect). Execute. However, in the third timer target effect, a mode (a character wearing a green aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect appears as the cut-in B mode. After that, an effect (fourth timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed in such a manner as to have a count value larger than the second count value.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, “5”) requiring a longer time than the first count value (here, “4”) is executed. However, in exchange for this, the effect of the cut-in B is executed in a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, while trying to extend the time required for the count digestion, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest during the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value is expected. Become.

  In this regard, in the aspect of “cut-in B2-2”, an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display in the second double-response effect appears, and when the effect result appears, the second effect appears. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display so as to have a third count value (here, “7”) larger than the count value of “1”. However, even in the second double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result in which the count display fails to be displayed again is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable that the timer effect be terminated at the time.

  Thereafter, when the count display having the third count value (here, “7”) is hidden, the third double-response effect is displayed in the non-display state, and the count display is displayed. The execution is performed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (here, 7 seconds).

  Here, even in the third double-compatible effect, first, as an effect corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, “7”) (fifth timer target effect), cut-in is performed. The effect of B is executed. However, in the third timer target effect, a mode (a character wearing a red aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects appears as the cut-in B mode. Then, after that, an effect (sixth timer object effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed so as to have a count value larger than the third count value.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, “7”) requiring a longer time than the first and second count values (here, “4” and “5”) is performed. Is executed. In exchange for this, the effect of the cut-in B is executed in a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer object effects. It is expected that a decrease in gaming interest during a period until the predetermined value is reached will be suppressed.

  In this regard, in the mode of “cut-in B2-2”, in the third double-response production, a production result that fails to redisplay the count display appears, and at this point, the timer production ends. Will be done. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect for the timer, but until the cut-in B according to this mode appears. Since the count display for a relatively short time is displayed a plurality of times, and the effect corresponding to the count display is executed a plurality of times, the time between the start of the timer effect and the end of the timer effect is displayed. It is expected that game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

  Moreover, each time the count display is redisplayed, the total time during which the count display is displayed is itself greater than the total time during which the count display is hidden, while increasing the count value to increase the length of the effect as a whole. Is also shortened, and each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is executed in a more highly expected manner, so that the timer effect is executed for a long period of time while maintaining the gaming interest. Will be able to

  Further, in the mode of “cut-in B2-2”, every time the count display is hidden, the degree of expectation is gradually increased by changing the mode (color) of the same effect (cut-in B). Since it is possible to express the appearance of going, it is possible to execute the count display of these multiple times as one timer effect for “cut-in B”, and the effect (red color) finally displayed It is possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura is an effect target of the timer effect.

  In the third double-response effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result in which the count display is successfully redisplayed is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect is displayed. It is desirable to continue. However, when the maximum number of times that the count display is re-displayed is reached, the effect is not the effect of cut-in B that has been executed until then, but a different effect (the degree of expectation is higher than in any mode of cut-in B). Yes, it is desirable to execute a special effect that is not prepared as a timer target candidate so that the maximum number of times can be recognized. In this case, the effect as to whether or not to re-display the count display after the special effect has been executed will not appear, but the time required for the special effect will be described in terms of the double corresponding effect (two The effect is performed for a longer time than the effect for which the timer-targeted effect is performed, and it indicates that the degree of expectation is higher than the effect that has appeared so far (the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura). It is desirable to try to improve the entertainment interest of the game. In this case, the expectation may be 100%.

  FIG. 193 (b) is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the timer plus effect.

  The timer plus effect may be performed in a manner shown in FIG. 193 (b). That is, in the mode shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the count display having the first count value (here, “4”) is started after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, the first count value ( Here, the effect corresponding to the count “4” corresponding to “4”) (four-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “4” (the effect at the time of the 4-second timer), the effect period is set for the time required for the first count value (here, “4”) to be consumed. During the effect period, a timer target effect such as cut-in B is executed in a predetermined manner (such as a character wearing a blue aura).

  According to such a configuration, the effect for the timer can be executed in the situation where the count display is being executed, so that the entertainment of the game during the count exhaustion can be suitably maintained. .

  In addition, when the effect corresponding to the count “4” (the 4-second timer effect) is completed, the count display of the count “4” also reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). It is easy to recognize that the count display has reached a predetermined value (here, "0") by simply checking the effect corresponding to the count "4" (directing with a 4-second timer) without checking the count display of the effect. Will be able to

  Then, after the timing at which the effect corresponding to the count “4” (the 4-second timer-based effect) ends (after the count display of the count “4” reaches a predetermined value), the first count value ( In this case, an effect (first count-up effect) as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed is executed in such a manner as to have a count value larger than “4”). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as “the effect as to whether or not to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a). When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect is terminated at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, as a result of the first count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears, the second count value (here, “4”) larger than the first count value (“4”) Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving “5”). In this regard, in this modified example, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having the second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”) is displayed. An effect corresponding to “5” (5 second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the production corresponding to the count “5” (production at the time of 5 seconds timer), the production period for the time required for the second count value (here, “5”) to be consumed is set. During the production period, the production for the timer, such as cut-in B, appears in a higher expectation mode (such as a character wearing a green aura) as compared to the above-described production with a count of “4” (production with a 4-second timer). Will be done.

  Then, after the timing at which the effect corresponding to the count “5” (the five-second timer-based effect) is ended (after the count display of the count “5” reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here, Then, an effect (second count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is performed in such a manner as to have a count value larger than “5”). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as “the effect as to whether or not to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above-described count display is performed as the effect. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect is terminated at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, as a result of the second count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears, the third count value (here, “5”) larger than the second count value (“5”) Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving “7”). In this regard, in this modified example, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of giving the third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”) is displayed. An effect corresponding to "7" (effect at the time of 7 seconds timer) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “7” (the effect at the time of the 7-second timer), the effect period for the time required for the third count value (here, “7”) to be consumed is set. During the effect period, the timer target effect such as cut-in B appears in a higher expectation mode (such as a character wearing a red aura) than in the case of the effect corresponding to the count "5" (directing with a 5-second timer). Will be done.

Then, after the timing at which the effect corresponding to the count “7” (the 7-second timer-based effect) ends (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here, In such a case, an effect (third count-up effect) of whether or not to redisplay the count display may be executed in such a manner as to have a count value larger than “7”).
This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as “the effect of whether or not to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is performed as a result of the effect. When an effect pattern that fails to re-display appears, the timer effect ends at this point without re-displaying the count display.

  In this regard, in this modified example, after the timing at which the effect corresponding to the count “7” (the 7-second timer effect) is ended (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. This shows an example in which a count-up effect itself that does not appear appears. In this way, even when the count-up effect itself does not appear, as in the case where an effect pattern that fails to re-display the count display in the count-up effect appears, the count display is not re-displayed. At this point, the timer effect ends.

  According to the count-up effect according to such a modified example, when a count display having a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed and immediately set in advance corresponding to the count value. Since the count-response effect (cut-in B or the like) having the effect content for a certain period of time is started, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment during the execution of the count display. Further, when such a countermeasure effect is completed (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect as to whether the count display has a larger count value and is displayed again is performed, and these two effects are alternately performed. Since the timer effect is executed and continued by appearing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the count display is simply performed and the effect is not performed at all in the timer effect. Can be maintained.

  In this modification, a count-response effect (for example, count “4”) having the effect content for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, “4”) During the execution of the corresponding effect, the count display is digested (4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 0 countdown). However, as described above, the effect corresponding to the count (for example, the effect corresponding to the count “4”) according to this modified example is performed so that the effect is ended in accordance with the timing at which the displayed count value (eg, “4”) has been consumed. Since the count display is performed, only the count value (for example, “4”) at the time of appearance is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display (4 → 3 → 2 → 1) is performed during the count display. It is more desirable not to perform this for the (countdown of 0) in order to encourage the attention to the count-response effect (for example, the effect corresponding to the count “4”).

  Then, in each of the examples shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and (b), the symbol fluctuation is stopped after the timer effect is executed in this way.

  Among the timer plus effects, in the effect on whether or not to re-display the count display, an effect reception period of a predetermined time is set, and the count is performed based on an operation performed by the player during the period. An effect that indicates that the display is to be redisplayed (successful effect) or an effect that indicates that the count display is not to be redisplayed (failure effect) may appear. In other words, in this case, after a successful performance appears, the timer display is continued by redisplaying the count display in a manner that the count number increases, and when a failed performance appears, the count display is thereafter redisplayed. Absent. When such an effect is adopted, even if no operation is performed by the player during the effect reception period, a predetermined effect result (successful effect or failed effect) is determined at a predetermined timing after the period has elapsed. Will be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the times required for the first to third double-response effects are set to the same time. However, each time display ("4", "5", "7") is used. May be set to different times from each other. For example, each time the count display is redisplayed, as the count value of each count display gradually increases, the time required for a double-response effect corresponding to each count value gradually increases. With this setting, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short, and the length of the entire effect can be appropriately extended while maintaining the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, in the effect regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display, in displaying the effect of the effect, a plurality of effect modes having different ratios (expectations) in which the count display is redisplayed in a form of increasing the number of counts are displayed. Either one may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, each time the count display is redisplayed, a count display having a count value larger than the count value when the previous count display was displayed is displayed. It is not necessary to redisplay a count display having a count value that is always larger than the count value when the count display is displayed. In other words, even if the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, even if the predetermined effect image appears thereafter, the count display is simply redisplayed, thereby improving the game entertainment. We can expect it. However, despite the re-display of the count display with the count value smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed, the production with higher expectation as the timer target production than the previous count display was performed. If the appearance ratio (may be 100%) is increased, the sense of speed from the display of the count to the appearance of the timer-targeted effect is increased, thereby further improving the entertainment interest of the game. Will be able to do it. When the redisplay is repeatedly performed in the count display having such a small count value, the appearance timing of the timer target effect gradually decreases from the time when the count display is first displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by such an accelerated timer effect.

[Timer stagnation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, a conversation notice, a hold change, a cut-in A, a character A operation, a special timer, a cut-in B, a character B operation, or the like) is performed. The count display is performed during the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the effect mode to be counted among the plurality of effect modes is caused to appear. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, it is possible to hide the count display from when the count display is started to when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In some cases, the display may be hidden for the first time or the display may be hidden for the second time longer than the first time (timer stagnation effect).

  That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a plurality of presentation modes appears as a count target. Since it may be hidden for a longer second time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until one of the plurality of effect modes occurs, and the tension until the effect to be counted is executed Can be maintained.

  FIG. 194 (a) shows a mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer stagnation effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (refer FIG. 148) corresponding to "the character reach without a timer" are selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), for the sake of convenience, a case where a specific timer type (there may be more than one in the accessory A operation 2) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the timer stagnant effect is not performed, and the timer stagnant effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. Alternatively, the following process may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), assuming that the timer type of “accessory A operation 2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing as Regarding which of the plurality of production modes including the mode of the resurrection timer production (“principal A operation 2-1” or “principal A operation 2-2”), the selected “principal A operation 2” is executed. It is preferable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  194 (a), in the mode of the "accessory A operation 2-1", after the count display having the count value of "30" is started a predetermined time after the start of the symbol change, 30 When the second has elapsed, a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached and the count display is not displayed, and the “target A operation (preliminary A notice)” targeted for the timer is executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the mode of the "accessory A operation 2-2", the count display having the count value of "10" is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol change, and 5 seconds have elapsed after the count display. When the value becomes "5", it is hidden, and when the hidden state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is re-displayed with the count value of "4". When 2 seconds elapse and the count value becomes "2", it is hidden again. When the non-display state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is restarted with the count value of "1". After the display reaches “0” one second after that, the “casing A operation (preliminary A notice)” that is targeted for the timer while the count display is hidden is executed. It has become.

  According to such an aspect of the “character A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the count display having the count value of “10” starts a predetermined time after the start of the symbol change. However, in the same manner as when the count display having the count value of “30” is started, a predetermined value (here, “30”) is elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display. 0 "), the effect for the timer is executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if an effect of hiding the display for a predetermined time (timer stagnant effect) occurs while the count display is being consumed, the count is reduced. Progress speed is stagnated by that time, and it is expected to be executed as a timer effect requiring the same time as when a count display having a relatively large count value appears. . As described above, in the timer effect, the longer the time required for the timer effect, the higher the ratio of the appearance of the effect of the timer object having a high expectation tends to appear, but such a timer during the count digestion is performed. By making it possible to generate a stagnation effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. In addition, since the time as the entire timer effect is extended by adding the time during which the count display is hidden, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest during the execution of the count display. .

  In addition, in the mode of the “character A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the first time (6) is reached until the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). (For a period between the count value “5” → “4”) and a second time (16 seconds) longer than the first time. (The period between the count values “2” and “1”) can appear, but regardless of the length of the times (the first time and the second time), the count display is “non-display”. When returning from the "display state" to the "display state", the count value is made to evolve (change) only for a specific number (here, "1") which is the minimum unit. In other words, in this case, the longer the time that the count display is maintained in the “non-display state”, the longer the count progress speed is stagnated by the time, and thus the higher the appearance ratio of the expected appearance is high. Because it is expected to become, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the mode of the “character A operation 2-2”, as the count value in the timer effect progresses, when the count display is hidden, the time during which the count display is maintained in the “non-display state” is increased. It is set to. In other words, in this case, even if the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed and the count digestion is likely to end (sit to reach the predetermined value in a short time), If a timer stagnation effect appears, the time required for the timer effect will be greatly increased and the degree of expectation will be greatly improved, so that the game entertainment will be appropriately maintained over the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value Will be able to

  In addition, in the mode of the "character A operation 2-2", after the count display is hidden, the count display is displayed again, and the timer target effect is executed after reaching the predetermined value. However, after the count display is hidden, the count display is not necessarily re-displayed, so that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is aborted at this point without executing the timer target effect can also appear. May be. When this effect pattern appears, the rate at which the symbol change is stopped in the big hit symbol is lower than when the predetermined value is reached and the timer target effect is executed. However, by preparing such an effect pattern, the timer effect This can increase the frequency of occurrence itself. Moreover, after the count display is hidden (after the timer effect has been interrupted halfway), while waiting for the count display to be redisplayed, the symbol change may be stopped at the big hit symbol. It is expected that such a stunning effect will be realized, thereby improving the game entertainment.

  Further, in the mode of the "character A operation 2-2", the total time (22 seconds) in which the count display is hidden is longer than the total time (10 seconds) in which the count display is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest while the count display is being executed.

  FIG. 194 (b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is re-displayed (time during which the non-display state is maintained) and the degree of risk that the count display is not re-displayed. 9 is a table H1 showing count values when displayed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the type of the timer effect including the mode of the timer stagnant effect and the execution mode thereof are determined based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of the fluctuation pattern so that the relationship shown in Table H1 appears. It is desirable to perform the processing.

  According to such an aspect shown in Table H1, while the count value progresses (as the count value approaches the predetermined value), the maintenance time when the count value is hidden is likely to be longer, while the count value is not displayed. There is a tendency that the risk that the timer effect is terminated without the count display being re-displayed as it is is gradually increased. That is, in this case, if the count value is not advanced at a stage where the count value has not progressed much, the total time as the timer effect can be extended steadily in a small end risk, although the total time as the timer effect is small, while the count value is large. If it is hidden at the stage of progress, the end risk is large, but the total time as a timer effect can be greatly extended, so the performance as a timer stagnant effect gradually changes as the count value evolves As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest while the count display is being executed.

  In Table H1, one non-display time is made to correspond to each count value. However, a plurality of non-display times are made to correspond to each count value, and the timer is stopped at any of the non-display times. An effect may be generated.

  The timing (count value) during which the count display is executed, the count display is set to the non-display state, and the number of times the display is not displayed depends on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, and the like. It is desirable to make a decision at the start of the symbol change based on the symbol change.

  In such a timer stagnant effect, an effect corresponding to this may be performed while the count display is hidden. For example, in the case of non-display for 6 seconds at the count value “6”, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6” is performed for 6 seconds, and the display is not displayed for 16 seconds at the count value “2”. In this case, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “2” (the effect having a different effect from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6”) is performed for 16 seconds. It is possible to preferably maintain the entertainment interest when the count display is in the non-display state. At this time, an effect of whether or not the count display is re-displayed in the non-display effect may be made to appear, and the count display may be re-displayed or the timer effect may be terminated according to the effect of the effect. .

  More preferably, during the period from when the count display is started to when it reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in the display state, there is no new effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests the jackpot expectation degree. Be careful not to start, and when the count display is in the non-display state, if an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation (an effect different from the timer effect) can be newly started, the remaining count will be taken care of It is possible to enjoy another effect different from the timer effect. Also, in addition to the increase in the degree of expectation due to the occurrence of the timer stagnation effect, it is now possible to enjoy the increase in the degree of expectation due to the fact that the effect is different from the timer effect. It can be even higher.

  Then, another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, the count is advanced at a higher speed than the progress of the count in the non-display state, and a new timer is set before the timing at which the count display in the non-display state is displayed again. It is desirable that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value and the target effect appears. Note that, as a new timer effect target effect, an effect of redisplaying the count display in the non-display state may be performed.

[Advance production that leads to the production for timer]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a count display up to a predetermined value during a period in which a symbol effect is performed, and performs at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as effect candidates corresponding to the count display. A timer effect that makes one appear as a timer target effect is executable. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, a series of effects including the effect of the timer object (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) Is started before the count display reaches the predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches the predetermined value (a development effect that leads to a timer target effect).

  That is, in this case, since a series of timer-related effects corresponding to the timer effect is performed before the count display becomes the predetermined value, it is preferable to have a game entertainment until the count display becomes the predetermined value. Can be maintained.

  FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the progression effect connected to the timer target effect.

  As shown in FIG. 195, a timer effect is being executed with a specific timer type within the symbol fluctuation period, and the count value of the count display reaches the first specific value (here, the count “6”). Assuming that the progress has been made, the peripheral control MPU 1511a firstly makes a progress effect (a series of timer countermeasures) that leads to the effect content of the timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) Production).

  Here, in this explanation example, as shown in FIG. 195, the cut-in by the ally character is used as the timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”). The display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this example, the cut-in by the ally character is performed during the period during which the count value is exhausted before the count value of the count display becomes the predetermined value (here, the count “0”). The circumstances that led to the situation are displayed as an effect image (progress effect that leads to the effect contents of the timer target effect).

  For example, in this illustrative example, the count value of the count display is the first specific value (here, the count “6”) before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”). Is displayed, as an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG1 depicting a person who seeks help from an ally character is displayed.

  Next, when the count value of the count display becomes the second specific value (here, the count “3”) before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”). As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 depicting a state in which an ally character confronts an enemy character by accepting a request from a person seeking help is displayed.

  In other words, by causing such display images SEG1 and SEG2 to appear sequentially while the count display progresses toward the predetermined value, when the count display further progresses and reaches the predetermined value, cut-in by the ally character (here, cut-in). It is possible to expect that the display image SEG3-1 in which the ally character wears an aura to defeat the enemy character) is displayed, and thereby the game entertainment while the count display is being executed. Can be suppressed.

  However, in the description example shown in FIG. 195, even if the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count “3”) appears, the cut by the ally character is performed when the count display reaches the predetermined value. An effect pattern is also provided in which a display image SEG3-2 depicting a state in which an ally character flees in front of an enemy is displayed instead of the display image SEG3-1 in which the in is performed. According to such a configuration, while it is possible to make a star of which effect appears as a target of the timer effect in a period before the count display reaches the predetermined value, the count display is set to the predetermined value. Since it is no longer possible to specify the effect mode that appears when the count value has reached, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained even after the count display reaches the predetermined value. The display image SEG3-2 does not necessarily have to be prepared, and the display image SEG3-1 may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In this regard, in this example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) appears, or the display corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count “3”). After the appearance of the image SEG2, an effect pattern is prepared in which the count display does not advance any further and ends before the count display reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, in the course of such an effect progress appearing before reaching the predetermined value, the progress of the count display while there is a risk that the timer effect ends prematurely without the timer target effect appearing. Will be able to enjoy. It is not always necessary to prepare an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated prematurely, and the count display always reaches a predetermined value, and an effect for the timer may appear.

  Further, in the description example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in by the ally character is performed, Although illustration is omitted, it is configured to be displayed as an effect image that is also connected to a different display image (for example, cut-in by a different character) prepared as an effect for the timer. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 204 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 205 (G) to (I) described later, one of the three ally characters shown in FIG. 204 (D) seeks help. A request from a person is accepted, and the accepted ally character confronts an enemy character and performs a cut-in effect.

  Therefore, in the description example shown in FIG. 195, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, the count “3”) is displayed. )), A display image other than the display image SEG2 may be displayed instead of the display image SEG2. When the other display image is displayed, the display image is displayed when a predetermined value is reached. The effect progresses so as to be connected to a display image different from SEG3-1 (for example, cut-in by a different character). The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that is always connected to the display image SEG3-1 where the cut-in by the ally character is performed.

  In addition, it is desirable to determine on which route the effect is to be advanced while the count display is being performed, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, and the like when the symbol is changed. When an effect pattern in which the effect on the timer is not executed appears, the rate at which the symbol change is stopped in the big hit symbol is lower than when the effect reaches the predetermined value and the effect on the timer is executed. By preparing the timer effect, the frequency of occurrence of the timer effect itself can be increased.

  After the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) appears, the count is continued until the count display reaches the second specific value (here, the count “3”). The display may be hidden. For example, in the description example shown in FIG. 195, when the count “6” is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count “6” is displayed for the time period during which the counts “5” to “4” are consumed. And the count display is not displayed while the display image SEG1 is displayed. Then, after this, the count display is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the count number becomes “3”, and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count “3” is displayed for the time during which the counts “2” to “1” are consumed. And the count display is not displayed while the display image SEG2 is displayed. Then, after this, the count display is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the count number becomes “0”, and the display image SEG3-1 (timer target effect) corresponding to the count “0” is executed. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the production corresponding to the count number without worrying about the count digestion toward the value.

  The display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1, and the like may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image that requires a predetermined time. When displaying as still images, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (first specific value or second specific value).

  Further, a time during which the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value is displayed, a time during which the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value is displayed, and a display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. As for the time, it is desirable that they are set as different times from each other.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the development effect connected to the timer target effect, a plurality of types of progress effect connected to any of the multiple types of timer target effects is prepared, but a specific timer target effect appears. Only at times, a development effect leading to the specific timer target effect may be made executable before the count display becomes a predetermined value.

  Further, in the description example shown in FIG. 195, the development effect connected to the timer target effect is executed from the time when the count number is “6”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the first specific count number (for example, “3”) where the remaining count is relatively small, and when the second specific count number (for example, “6”) where the remaining count is relatively large. When the development effect connected to the timer target effect is made executable, and the progress effect connected to the timer target effect is executed when the remaining count is a second specific count number (for example, “6”) that is relatively large. If the jackpot expectation is relatively high, the effect will be developed more in the presence of a large number of counts as if the jackpot expectation is higher. Can be maintained.

[Operation in timer]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can first perform a count display up to a predetermined value within a period in which a symbol effect is performed, and can execute a count target effect that is a target of the count display. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the effect on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be received during the execution of the count display, and the operation means (for example, the operation button When the operation corresponding to 410) is performed, any one of a plurality of operation-time production modes having a different ratio of appearance of a production mode having a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) as a count target production when the count display becomes a predetermined value. Or generate. Further, as the period in which the effect can be accepted, a first period from when the count display is the first count value to a second count value, and a third count value in which the count display is counted after the second count value The second period from the time of (1) to the time of the fourth count value is prepared as at least a settable period. Then, during this, during the symbol production period in which it is determined that a production mode (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as a production to be counted appears, the count display is changed from the first count value to the second display. When the operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) during the first period up to the count value and the effect is received, and when the count display indicates the third count value, the fourth display starts. When the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed during the second period up to the count value and the effect is received, the effect at the time of the specific operation is obtained as a result of the effect reception. The ratio of occurrence of the aspect (for example, the aspect suggesting that the specific effect having a high degree of expectation appears as the timer target effect is high) is made different ( Timer within the operating performance).

  That is, in this case, even if it is determined that an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count-based effect, the count display is from the first count value to the second count value. A case where the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and a case where the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated from the time when the count display indicates the third count value to the time when the count display indicates the fourth count value are specified. Is different in the likelihood of the effect at the time of operation being generated, it is determined whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated between the time when the count display is the first count value and the time when the count display is the second count value. Should be operated by the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) from the time when the third count value to the time when the fourth count value is obtained, or by both of them. Work unit (e.g., operation buttons 410) it is possible to have fun in game strategies such should manipulating.

  For example, if an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) during a period in which the specific operation mode is likely to occur, it is possible to reduce the production risk that the specific operation mode does not appear. However, even if the specific operation effect mode is more likely to occur, it is difficult to have a high expectation that a high-probability effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) during a period in which the specific operation-time effect mode is unlikely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation-time effect mode does not appear is increased, When the specific operation effect mode is less likely to occur, the effect is more likely to be expected to appear as an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) as a count-based effect.

  Then, during the two periods having different characteristics (from the first count value to the second count value and from the third count value to the fourth count value), the count display becomes the predetermined value. Between the two periods, so that it is interesting how to operate the operating means (for example, the cut-in B) to maintain the interest in the game during the count digestion. Will be expected.

  FIG. 196 (a) shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which a determination is made not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the operation effect in a timer performed when a specific change number (SP reach without a timer) is selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162), the following processing regarding the in-timer operation effect is performed. It is supposed to run. However, in view of the fact that the operation effect in the timer functions as “an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the specific effect appears as the timer target effect”, the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). Instead of performing the following processing relating to the in-timer operation effect when performed, the following processing relating to the in-timer operation effect is also performed when the timer type in which another effect mode appears is determined instead of the cut-in B as the timer target effect. Execute. Note that when the timer type in which an effect with a lower degree of expectation than cut-in B appears as a timer-targeted effect is determined, the effect is larger than when the timer type in which cut-in B appears as a timer-targeted effect is determined. When the reception is made, the rate of occurrence of the specific operation effect mode is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), assuming that the timer type of “cut-in B2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing as the next processing. A determination process is performed as to which one of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-11” and “cut-in B2-12”), including the mode of the in-timer operation effect, performs “cut-in B2”. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  In the example of “cut-in B2-11” in the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change, a count display having a count value of “40” is displayed, and then 40 seconds elapse. When the elapsed time has elapsed, a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached and the count display is not displayed, and “cut-in B (cut B advance notice)” targeted for the timer is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “cut-in B2-12”, the count display having the count value of “40” is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined time from the symbol change, and the predetermined value (40 seconds) elapses after the elapse of 40 seconds. Here, “cut-in B (cut B advance notice)” which is a timer target is executed under the condition that the count display is not displayed after reaching “0”). However, in the mode of “cut-in B2-12”, the first period from when the count value of the count display is “35 (first count value)” to “25 (second count value)” is the same as the first period. In the second period from when the count value is "15 (third count value)" to "5 (fourth count value)", when there is an operation on the operation button 410), the operation effect in the timer Is received, and a display appears to indicate that the reception of the effect is permitted. In addition, as a display that indicates that the effect reception is in an acceptable state, in addition to the method of displaying a specific display image, the display from the time of “35 (first count value)” to “25 (second count value)” , And by changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from “15 (third count value)” to “5 (fourth count value)”. Is also feasible.

  That is, in the mode of “cut-in B2-12”, one of the first period (the count value is “35” to “25”) and the second period (the count value is “15” to “5”) When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the period, an effect reception as an operation effect in the timer is received, and based on the effect reception, the rate of occurrence of a specific effect having a high degree of expectation as a count target effect differs. Any one of a plurality of operation-state effects is generated. Note that the plurality of operation-time production modes can be adopted, for example, as a mode in which a predetermined lamp is turned on in either blue or red (a specific operation-time production mode). When it appears, the rate of occurrence of a specific effect with a high expectation as a count target effect is the lowest, and when a mode that lights up in red (a specific operation effect mode) appears, the ratio of a specific effect with a high expectation as a count target effect appears Can be set to be highest.

  FIG. 196 (b) determines which effect mode to appear as an operation-time effect mode when an effect is received during the first period and when an effect is received during the second period. It is a figure showing an example about the table (table T16) referred when performing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a mode is provided in which the predetermined lamp is turned on in one of blue and red (a specific operation-time production mode) as the operation-time production mode.

  In this regard, in the table T16 illustrated in FIG. 196 (b), in the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which “cut-in B” appears as the timer-targeted effect, if an effect is received during the first period, “ Blue (low expected mode) is selected at a rate of 30/100, and red (high expected mode) is selected at a rate of 70/100, and an effect is received during the second period. Then, blue (low expected mode) is selected at a rate of “70/100”, and red (high expected mode) is selected at a rate of “30/100”. Therefore, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the first period, it is possible to reduce the effect risk that the red (high expected mode) does not appear, but the red (high expected mode) is easily generated. Even if this appears only for the minute, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a counting target effect. On the other hand, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the second period, the effect risk that red (high expected mode) does not appear is increased, but red (high expected mode) is hardly generated. However, when this appears, it is easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect having a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as an effect to be counted.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in an effect pattern in which an effect mode having a lower degree of expectation than “cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect, for example, if an effect is received during the first period, “50/100” ", A blue color (low expected mode) is selected at a rate of" 50/100 ", and a red color (high expected mode) is selected at a rate of" 50/100 ". Blue (low expected mode) is selected at a rate of 90/100, and red (high expected mode) is selected at a rate of 10/100. Therefore, when red (high expected mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have an expectation that an effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which “cut-in B” appears as the timer target effect is selected. become.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods of the first period and the second period are generated within the fluctuation time. At least one of the first period and the second period may be generated based on a pattern type, a timer type, or the like. For example, when only the first period is generated, the risk that red (high expected mode) does not appear when an effect is received is suppressed, but the degree of expectation when red (high expected mode) appears is not so high. The operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that the price does not increase, and when only the second period is generated, the risk that red (high expected mode) does not appear when the effect is received is high. However, an operation opportunity is provided only under a single condition that the degree of expectation when red (high expected mode) appears becomes higher. That is, in this case, depending on the preference of the player, even if the player wants to operate on the first period side, only an operation opportunity is given on the second period side, or if he wants to operate on the second period side, Since the operation opportunity is given only for one period, the count display is executed while the count is exhausted and a conflict arises as to whether or not to operate within the period on the side that is not preferred. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest during the game.

  Further, during the first period or the second period, a display indicating that the effect reception is permitted may not necessarily be performed. In other words, in this case, it is determined in a state where it is unclear which of the first period and the second period the effect reception is allowed, or whether the first stage and the second period allow the effect reception. Since the display is developed, it is possible to make the user more interested in the timer effect, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment while the count display is executed.

  In addition, it is desirable to set the same length of time during which the effect reception is allowed in the first period and the second period. According to such a configuration, the effect can be accepted for the same amount of time in either the first period or the second period, so that the count value is a specific number (here, “10”). ) Can be provided as a “thinking time for performing the operation”, and it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest during the period in which the count display is executed through the addition of such a rendering element. Become like

  Further, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to receive the effect of the operation by the player a plurality of times, and the effect is changed (for example, blue → green → red) through the plurality of effect receptions. The ratio of appearances with high expectations (for example, cut-in B) as the count target effect may be increased. However, in this case, even if the effect is received a plurality of times, in the first period and the second period, the easiness of appearance of the effect mode finally appearing is set to be different from each other.

[Timer concealment effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first executes a count display up to a predetermined value during a period in which a symbol effect is performed, and can execute a timer target effect corresponding to the count display. In this regard, in the present invention, during the execution of the count display, a count forward effect by the decorative body can be executed in front of the count display.

  That is, in this case, in the situation where the count target effect is executed when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the count by the decorative body in a form that makes the count display difficult to visually recognize until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since the forward effect will be performed, the count value by the count display can be grasped only by jumping, and the remaining time until the effect to be counted is executed for a short time (during the count forward effect by the decorative body) This makes it difficult to grasp and makes it possible to increase interest in the count display.

  In addition, instead of making the count display difficult to see, instead of increasing the expectation for the appearance of the big hit symbol through the count forward effect by the decorative body, about the decrease in gaming interest due to the difficulty in viewing the count display Will be expected to suppress this.

  FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (c) show an aspect of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and a determination has been made (NO in step S5507) not to execute a mission effect (show a conversation notice). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of a timer concealment effect performed when a specific variable number is selected in the second processing situation.

  In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), first, a count display having a count of “30” is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation. After the count display becomes “0”, a timer target effect that is a timer target appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (a), at a predetermined timing during execution of the count display, a count forward effect by the decorative body can be executed in front of the count display.

  Here, as the count forward effect by such a decorative body, for example, in the examples of FIGS. 206 (B) and (C) described later, the effect movable body KT is moved to the front of the count display for a predetermined time. It can be realized as a count number erosion effect that positions this over. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be any as long as it makes the count display relatively harder to visually recognize during the effect than during the non-effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed as an effect state (a state in which the count display is difficult to visually recognize) until the count value becomes “10”. In the effect state, the operation mode or the light emission mode of the decorative body indicates the likelihood of occurrence of a specific effect having a high degree of expectation as a timer target effect.

  Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished, the count value changes from "10" to "0" in a state where the count display is easy to visually recognize. After that, any one of a plurality of presentation modes appears as the timer target presentation.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), first, a count having a count of “30” at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. The display is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, a timer target effect that is a timer target appears. 197 (a) is the same as in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a).

  However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished in a relatively short time, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished. The count value progresses from "15" to "0" in a state where the count display is easy to visually recognize, and thereafter, any of a plurality of effect modes appears as the timer target effect.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), first, a count display having a count number of “25” is displayed at a timing after a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol change was started. Once started, after the count display becomes “0”, a timer target effect that is a timer target appears. 197 (a) and (b) is the same as in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) in that the decorative object performs the count forward effect on the front side of the count display during execution of the count display.

  However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), the count forward effect by the decorative body occurs and ends at a relatively early stage, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body ends. The count value progresses from "20" to "0" in a state where the count display is easy to visually recognize, and thereafter, any of a plurality of effect modes appears as the timer target effect.

  By the way, as described above, in the timer effect, as the count value at the time when the count display is started is larger, the rate of appearance of the effect object having a high degree of expectation as the timer object effect is higher. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a count forward effect by the decorative body occurs, the count forward effect ends and the visual recognition is performed, not based on the count value when the count display is started. The relationship is set such that the larger the count value when the effect is made easier, the higher the ratio of appearance of the production target with high expectation as the timer target production appears. The ratio may include 100%.

  For example, in the above-described effect examples of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the count value at the start of the count display is “30” in any of the effect patterns, which is the same as that of FIG. 197 (a). In the effect example of FIG. 197, the count value at the time when the count forward effect ends and the visual recognition is facilitated is “10”, whereas in the effect example of FIG. 197 (b), the count forward effect ends and the visual effect is facilitated. 197 is “15”, so that the effect example with a high expectation as the timer target effect is higher in the effect example of FIG. 197 (b).

  According to such a configuration, when a count forward effect occurs during execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number that appeared at the start of counting is impaired, and the count number when the count forward effect ends. Is re-focused on, so that the entertainment of the game during the execution of the count display can be suitably maintained.

  For example, in the above-described effect example of FIG. 197 (c), a relatively small count value “25” is displayed at the start of counting, but when the count-forward effect ends, the end of the effect is relatively large. The count value “20” is displayed. Compared to the effect examples of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the rate of appearance of the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect is increased. I have.

  That is, in this case, if a count-forward effect occurs, there is a possibility that an effect with a high expectation as a timer target effect appears at a higher rate than when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting. Therefore, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting is suppressed.

  However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, a relatively large count value is displayed at the end of the subsequent count forward effect when compared to when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting. It is desirable to set so that the ratio at which the value appears is high.

  Further, in the above-described effect examples of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), since a plurality of times are prepared from the start of the count display to the start of the count forward effect, the count display is executed. It is possible to maintain the entertainment interest by raising awareness of the possibility that the count forward effect may occur over a long period of time.

  Further, in the above-described effect examples of FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), since a plurality of times are prepared from the start of the count forward effect to the end thereof, the count forward effect is started. At this point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the time of the end, and it is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment of the game until the end of the count forward effect.

  Note that, in addition to the count display effect, in addition to the execution of the count display, the period before the count display is executed, for example, the timer effect that appears when the appearance of the timer effect increases, so that it appears during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect. It may be. However, in view of the configuration according to the present application that makes it difficult to visually recognize the progress of the count by causing the count forward effect to appear during the execution of the count display and aims at the fun as the effect, compared to before the count display is started. It is preferable that the forward display effect is performed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. Also, if the count-forward effect is executed while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed during the period of one symbol change, when the count-forward effect ends, the count display is not started yet and the timer look-ahead effect is performed. Is executed, the rate of appearance of the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect is higher than that in the state where the count display is executed when the count forward effect ends. It is desirable to set as follows.

  Also, if the count-forward effect is executed while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, the timer look-ahead effect and the count display are displayed at different positions, and then the timer look-ahead effect is performed. During the execution of the timer prefetch effect, a count forward effect by the decorative body is executed in front of the display position of the timer prefetch effect, and during the count display, the count forward effect by the decorative body in front of the display position of the timer prefetch effect. It is desirable to execute. That is, in this case, the decorative body moves to a different position depending on, for example, whether the timer prefetch effect is being performed or the count display is being performed. When the timer look-ahead effect ends in the situation where is located, the count display is started at a position different from the timer look-ahead effect that has been difficult to see up to now. According to such a configuration, when a count forward effect occurs while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, the count display is started at a stage where the count forward effect is still being executed and has not been completed. Even so, since the count value of the count display can be made easily visible from the start of the count display, there is a possibility that the staging value as the size of the count number at the start of the count may be damaged. You will be able to enjoy the count forward production while being excluded.

  In addition, for the front-of-count effect, a relatively late stage where a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the count display is compared with a relatively early stage where much time has not elapsed since the start of the count display. It is desirable that the rate at which the count forward effect is executed becomes higher.

  Also, if the count-down effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer-targeted effect is executed, the size of the count value that appears when this is ended cannot be expected. In addition to the above, there is a concern that it may be confused with the timer target effect. In, it is desirable to prevent the count forward effect from being newly executed.

  In addition, the count forward effect may be performed in such a manner that when a plurality of count displays are being executed, the decorative body is positioned in front of the count displays.

  Note that, among the timer effects, a timer of a type that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, a timer target excluded effect, a timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target first effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When an effect is performed, the current count value can be substantially exposed by those related effects even while the decorative object is performing the count forward effect, whereby the count display can be visually recognized. It is possible to predict how much count progress has been made since it was made difficult. However, instead of this, instead of performing a count forward effect by the decorative body only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image when a specific count value is reached (for example, a timer object excluded effect, a timer mode effect, etc.) And a predetermined effect movable body (timer target advance effect) is straddled to the position where the decorative body is positioned in front of the position where the decorative object is positioned, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the count display. It may be difficult to predict how much count progress has been made.

  The number of decorative bodies that perform an effect on the front side of the count display is not limited to one, and a count forward effect may be performed such that a plurality of decorative bodies are all located on the front side of the count display. In this case, in addition to the mode in which all of the plurality of decorative bodies are located on the front side of the count display, any of the multiple modes such as the mode in which only one of the multiple decorative bodies is located in front of the count display In such a case, the count forward effect may be selectively executed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 198 to FIG. 207, details of the various effects of the timer effect itself and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail. Here, the processing example relating to each of the above-described effects is merely an example, and for example, an effect other than the above-described type may be executed as the content of the effect, and the appearance timing and the appearance condition of each effect may be performed. And the like may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the production examples described below, there may be included those that are inconsistent with the production contents related to each of the above-mentioned productions, but within the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are simply changed as appropriate. In addition, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed in the notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning that includes a timer look-ahead effect. Also, as the mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted below, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  FIG. 198 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is variedly displayed (for example, SP reach) on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state. ing. In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY for effect which has been omitted is shown in the drawings. Note that the specific decorative member SDY is, for example, “Movement effect unit 3100 behind the back, left upper motion effect unit 3200, back left motion effect unit 3300, middle motion effect unit 3400, the lower motion effect unit 3500, etc. Movable member "etc.

  FIG. 198 (B) shows that the timer effect is displayed with a count of “70” during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. This shows the production status to be started.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 198 (B), when the timer effect (count number) is displayed and the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value, the timer effect target The effect type candidates that can appear as are displayed, and it is not clear which of those candidates appears as a timer target effect while the count display is executed, but one of those candidates is a timer target effect. It is possible to recognize that it appears as a production. Note that “conversation” in the figure corresponds to a conversation notice, “hold” in the figure corresponds to a change in hold, and “cut A” in the figure corresponds to cut-in A. The "role A" in the figure corresponds to the action of the character A, the "secret" in the figure corresponds to the special timer, the "cut B" in the figure corresponds to the cut-in B, “Combination B” in the drawing corresponds to the combination B operation.

  FIG. 198 (C) shows an effect situation in which the above-described timer target excluded effect is executed when the count number shown in FIG. 198 (B) becomes “60”.

  In addition, as described above, the timer target excluded production is a production mode that is not selected as a timer target while it is unclear which production mode the production of the timer target is. The display can indicate at least one (or more than two) of the effect modes that have not been determined.

  Here, as described above, in the case of the timer effect, usually, each timing (in this example, in this example, prepared as a candidate of the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) and the effect of the timer object can appear) As time passes (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, etc.) from the start of fluctuation, the type of effect that can appear as a timer object is narrowed down. Therefore, in the effect example of FIG. 198 (C), the timing at which the timer-targeted exclusion effect is generated is determined by a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation) prepared as candidates for the timing at which the timer-targeted effect can appear , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.).

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (B), an effect pattern for displaying a timer effect with a count of “70” is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have the count number of “70”, but has another count number such as “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, or “50”. An effect pattern to be displayed on the screen can also be generated. Assuming that a timer effect having a count of “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198 (C). At this timing, the predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached, and, for example, “conversation notice” appears as an effect for the timer. On the other hand, if a timer effect having a count other than “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), it is assumed that “conversation notice” will not appear as an effect for the timer. When the count has passed at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (C) and this has passed, the “conversation notice” is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as timer targets, and the timer target is excluded. It can be said that candidates that can appear as a production have been narrowed down. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (C), the count display is being performed while the count number of “60” is left. It is desirable to perform an effect (a timer target excluded effect) that indicates which of the effect types (conversation notices) are excluded. As a result, it is possible to appropriately represent the production situation where the player is placed.

  However, in the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), at this timing, instead of “conversation notice”, it is suggested that “special timer” is not selected as the timer target effect. I have. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it becomes clear during the count digestion that “the effect that appears to be a big hit decision when it appears” is not selected as the timer target effect, It is possible to incite anxiety about whether a highly promising effect appears as a timer target.

  Note that in the timer target exclusion effects shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display image (confidential) corresponding to the “special timer” is locked among the display images displaying the timer effect target effect candidates. The padlock in the state is displayed in a superimposed manner, and a display such as "Lock !!" is displayed to indicate that the "special timer" is not selected as the effect for the timer.

  FIG. 198 (D) shows an effect state in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display reaches a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer target excluded effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). I have.

  In addition, as described above, the timer mode effect is an effect of the timer target effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). Hell timer mode (first timer mode display) where the rate of appearance of high production styles (production type and production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) is relatively low, and a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value In the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of a high expectation effect is relatively high.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), first, a heaven challenge effect is performed to determine whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress, and the heaven challenge effect appears. At this point, it is indicated that one of the hell timer mode and the heaven timer mode always occurs.

  In the heaven challenge production, the production is likely to shift to the hell timer mode or the transition to the heaven timer mode is high (for example, the devil and the angel perform a push, and which is in the prevailing situation) May be performed, and in this case, after such a performance, it indicates which of the hell timer mode and the heaven timer mode will occur.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed under the effect type excluded in the timer object excluded effect, any of the effect types in the timer object excluded effect is performed. Depending on whether it is excluded (whether the production type with low expectation or the production type with high expectation is excluded), is it in a situation where the hell timer mode is likely to occur, or It can be said that it is in an effect situation in which it is possible to predict with a certain accuracy whether the timer mode is likely to occur.

  FIG. 198 (E) shows the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) as a result of the success of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D) (for example, a result of the angel victory against the devil). This shows the state of the production being performed.

  In this effect situation, it is shown that when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the effect has shifted to the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of the effect mode with high expectation as the effect of the timer is relatively high. It is. Therefore, if the timer target exclusion effect is performed while in the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), an advantageous result for the player (here, the effect with a low expectation among the plurality of effect types is the effect of the timer target) Is not selected), it is possible to increase the sense of expectation when the timer target exclusion effect has occurred.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, the timer object exclusion effect is executed under the condition that the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) appears as a result of the failure of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D). If this is the case, the rate of suggesting a result that is disadvantageous to the player (here, the effect of high expectation is not selected as the effect of the timer among the plurality of effect types) becomes high, so the timer object is excluded. It will be possible to incite anxiety when an effect occurs.

  In the example of FIG. 198 (E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as the mode of the count display, but the mode of the changing decorative pattern SZ or related thereto. In this way, while the remaining count is being consumed, it is possible to recognize that the mode has shifted to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) without overlooking another effect. In this case, the present timer mode can be easily confirmed even when the timer target exclusion effect has occurred.

  FIG. 198 (F) shows the second to fourth times with the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198 (E) displayed after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). When the count display becomes “20”, the fifth timer-targeted exclusion effect is executed, and the fifth timer-targeted exclusion effect is executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), a state in which five of the seven types of effects prepared as timer target effect candidates are locked and displayed by the timer target excluded effect (five types of effects) Is in the state of not being a timer target), and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the remaining two types of effects (hold change, character B operation) occurs. Can be recognized. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, compared to the case where the heaven timer mode is not displayed, the remaining two types of effect candidates (hold change, The proportion of the effect on the side with the higher degree of expectation in the (B-Battery operation) is high, and the sense of expectation until the count display reaches the predetermined value can be suitably maintained.

  At this time, the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden between the appearance of the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F) and the appearance of the timer target effect. According to such a configuration, if it is not remembered that the heaven timer mode is displayed, it is unclear which of the remaining production candidates has a high occurrence rate, and as a compensation for not being concentrated on the production, it is counted. It is possible to give a sense of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

  FIG. 199 (G) shows the state before the timing at which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer-targeted effect appears after the appearance of the fifth timer target excluded effect shown in FIG. 198 (F). During the period, the effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the accessory B) appears, and the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is set as a timer target. This shows an effect state in which the timer object first effect that indicates that the first effect is being executed.

  That is, in this case, since the timer target advance effect is performed while the display related to the timer target exclusion effect appears, any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect may appear as the timer target effect. Can be further provided with information on whether or not is high.

  In this example, since the “action B midway operation (small)” is executed as the timer target advance effect, identification of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer object exclusion effect (change in hold, action B operation) It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility (100% may be performed) that the “accessory B operation” which is an effect using the decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is executed as an effect for the timer. Become like Note that, as described above, the “main part B halfway operation (small)” means that the “target B operation” which is an effect for the timer is “the specific decorative member SDY (main part B) is from the first position to the second position. In the case of "displacement", it means "an effect in which the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) is displaced from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position".

  However, in this example of the description, as the contents of the effect relating to the “operation of the accessory B”, the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, which merely displaces the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) from the first position to the second position. In addition to the contents, in addition to displacing the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) from the first position to the second position, the second relatively relatively high expectation for displacing the accessory A from the third position to the fourth position. The effect contents are prepared, and the effect relating to the “actor B operation” is executed in any of the effect contents.

  In this regard, in the heaven timer mode according to this description example, when the “actor B operation” is selected as the effect of the timer, the effect content is relatively less expected than in the case where the hell timer mode appears. Even if the effect type that appears as a timer target effect is completely narrowed down by the timer target advance effect, the heaven timer mode is set so that the ratio of the high second effect content that appears is high. As a result, useful functions for the player are played.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (G), when the timer target advance effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is counting down. The timer target advance effect is provided in such a manner as to overlap the count display of the timer, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such a timer target advance effect is performed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) used in the timer target effect is in a state where the effect is being executed. Coupled with this, there is an effect situation that is easy to misunderstand that the timer target effect is being executed after the count display reaches a predetermined value and this is not displayed, rather than the timer target advance effect during count digestion Will be created. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is not a timer target effect but a timer target advance effect, the specific decorative member SDY (character B) is used as the timer target advance effect. Can be strongly impressed. After that, even if no display related to the timer target advance effect is performed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (accessory) is regarded as the timer target advance effect. It is expected that a timer target effect is generated based on the fact that B) is used. When the timer target advance effect is executed, the count display may not be made difficult to visually recognize, but may not be displayed until the timer target advance effect ends.

  FIG. 199 (H) shows a specific count value (here, “0”) before the count display is greater than a predetermined value (here, “0”) after the timer target advance effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is executed. 3 "), a new prize is generated after the arriving, and the timer for suppressing the effect corresponding to the prize despite the fact that it is determined that the effect is to be executed (hold change) according to the prize. This shows an effect state in which the object suppression control is being executed.

  That is, as described above, in particular, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (H), it is extremely unlikely that “hold change” is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer target advance effect. However, since there is still a state where “holding change” is still left as an effect candidate for the timer, a holding change corresponding to a new winning may occur near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Then, the held change may be erroneously recognized as an effect directed to the timer, and as a result, a situation in which the effect directed to the timer itself is overlooked may be caused. In the case where “pending change” is executed as an effect for a timer object, since it is executed for “hold 0” in the figure, it is relatively easy to determine whether the effect is a timer object. However, it is considered that there is a great possibility that these pending changes are erroneously recognized in a situation where the remaining count is small and the situation is short.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the timer effect reaches the predetermined value is relatively long (here, the count number is not longer than the first period). If it is in the period until the remaining "3"), a change in hold in accordance with the occurrence of a new prize is permitted, but the remaining time until the first period ends and the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the second period (hereafter, the period after the count number has become "3"), even if a new prize is generated, a change in hold corresponding to this is not allowed. Thus, the above-mentioned concern is eliminated (timer target suppression control).

  FIG. 199 (I) shows that the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the effect state in which the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. After the display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, the effect state in which the effect (the action B operation) to be the effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), it is indicated that the game is in the heaven timer mode, and the action of the accessory B, which is the effect of the timer, is compared with the first effect content having a relatively low degree of expectation. This shows a state in which it is being executed as the second production content with high expectation. However, in this case, as is clear from the fact that the accessory B corresponds to the specific decorative member SDY and the accessory A corresponds to the specific decorative member TGY, it is provided for the effect when the content is the second effect. The specified decorative member TGY is located at a position on the back side in front view of the specific decorative member SDY provided for any of the first effect content and the second effect content, and most (at least) (More than half the area).

  According to such a configuration, which of the first effect content having a relatively low degree of expectation and the second effect content having a relatively high degree of expectation is being executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in the effect state) ) Can be made harder to judge, thereby encouraging the timer target to concentrate on the effect. In order to obtain such an operation and effect, the second effect content may be any as long as it can be effected on the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) and on the back side. The specific display is not a composite effect of the member SDY (accessory B) and the specific decorative member TGY (accessory A), but a specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 instead of the specific decorative member TGY (accessory A). The effect may be executed as a combined effect of the effect and the specific decoration member SDY (combination B).

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is continuously executed, and even if a new prize is generated, a change in hold occurs in accordance with this. This is not done, and the hold display won in FIG. 199 (H) is maintained unchanged.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), of the “hold change” and the “accessory B operation” remaining as the effect candidates for the timer, the “accessory B operation” is executed as the effect for the timer. Is displayed ("Position B" in the figure is blinking) in the figure, and a display ("" in the figure) which can recognize that "holding change" is not a timer target effect (A display with an X mark for “pending”) appears.

  FIG. 199 (J) shows an effect situation in which the timer object suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the timer object effect in FIG. 199 (I).

  In other words, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the effect for the timer, even if the “hold change” is executed, there is no concern that this is an effect for the timer. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), the hold display in which the holding change is determined in accordance with the winning at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (H) but the execution has been carried over is targeted. This is suspended and changed at the timing shown in (J). Accordingly, even when a new winning that is a target of the pending change occurs near the timing at which the production of the timer target is executed, the pending change is appropriately performed while clearly indicating that the production is not the production of the timer target. Will be able to run.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (J), the display is changed to blue for the hold display different from the changing hold display (hold 0). However, in view of the above-mentioned special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the big hit hold (including hold 0) is included, such blue hold display appears. Since the variation indicates that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is higher than that in the case where the red hold display appears, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), even though the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the timer target effect has been executed, which of the effect types has been excluded in the timer target excluded effect is In addition, a display indicating which of the effects of the timer was performed is continuously executed. Further, the display indicating that the heaven timer mode is set is continuously executed.
However, the display suggesting that the mode is the heaven timer mode is a mode in which the decorative symbol SZ is displayed in a reduced size as the reach display mode is displayed.

  Then, in this example of explanation, each display thus continuously executed in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (J) is also continuously executed in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (see FIG. 199 (J)). K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in a state where the symbol is stopped (a state in which the big hit symbol appears), the timer effect has been executed in the effect process up to that time, and the effect targeted in the timer effect. It is possible to recognize that is the “Benefit B operation”.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 and examples of effects other than the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. .

  FIG. 200 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is fluctuated (for example, SP reach) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is four in the normal gaming state. ing.

  FIG. 200 (B) shows an effect in which the timer target exclusion effect is executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200 (A), even though the timer effect is not executed. Indicates the situation.

  In the timer target exclusion effect, it is indicated that “the character B operation” is not a candidate for the timer object, so that when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the candidate for the timer object has a conversation. It becomes possible for the player to know that the notice has been narrowed down to any of the notice, the pending change, the cut-in A, the action of the accessory A, the special timer, and the cut-in B. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), the effect with relatively high expectation is set as the timer target. Since the player can recognize that he / she has deviated from the candidate, the player wishes that the timer effect does not occur within the fluctuation, and the timer effect (count display) is set to a non-executed state. You will be able to stimulate the entertainment when you are there.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, in performing the timer target exclusion effect, a display suggesting various effects prepared as timer target effect candidates. Is not executed, and a display indicating that at least “the accessory B operation” is not selected is displayed as the effect for the timer. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to grasp that the “character B operation” is not a timer target effect, but it is unclear what other effect types exist as timer target effect candidates. The Rukoto.

  In FIG. 200 (C), after the timer target exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count of “15”, and the count display (here, countdown) is started. The production status is shown.

  Here, in the timer target exclusion effect in this description example, after displaying that at least “character B operation” is not selected as the timer target effect (FIG. 200 (B)), the display is changed to the timer effect ( Until the display (count display) is executed, the display is continued without displaying it, and the timer effect (count display) is started while the display is displayed. In such a configuration, from the time when the count display is started, what degree of expectation is this timer effect (here, the timer effect in which the relatively high expectation “action B operation” is not executed)? Can be recognized.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 (B) and (C), when a display indicating that at least “local character B operation” is not selected as the effect for the timer is displayed, this is continuously displayed. Although the appearances of these displays are made different from time to time, they need not always be made different and may be the same.

  FIG. 200 (D) shows a state in which the timer display shown in FIG. 200 (C) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and then the timer display is not displayed. This shows an effect situation in which “conversation notice (first effect mode)” prepared as an effect candidate is being executed.

  That is, in this case, from the player's perspective, the effect such as "may be a chance" as the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is recognized as being executed as the effect object of the timer effect. Become. However, the "conversation notice" shown in FIG. 200 (D) is not executed as the effect form of the timer effect, and as is apparent from the next effect state (FIG. 200 (E)), the conversation notice is not displayed. Upon termination, the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) is redisplayed and further continued (resurrection timer effect).

  That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice (first production mode)" is shown as if it was a timer target (counting target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer production, and the first production Since the second effect mode different from the mode is indicated to be a timer object, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when an effect with relatively low expectation appears, and this is hidden. Even if it is, it becomes possible to become aware of the possibility that the timer object will be changed thereafter, and it is expected that the gaming entertainment will be appropriately maintained.

  FIG. 200 (E) shows a redisplay of the hidden count display after the “conversation notice” executed under the condition that the count display in FIG. 200 (D) is hidden is completed. This shows an effect situation in which this is continued (resurrection timer effect).

  Here, in such a resurrection timer effect, the count digestion is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden (FIG. 200 (D)). In the example of FIG. 200 (E), The count display is redisplayed from the state where the count has been exhausted for the hidden time (here, 2 seconds). That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display is displayed in a minus notation (here, "-2"), and the count display is re-displayed. In this way, it is possible to express a state where the count is not finished and this is continuously being executed, and by extension, the fact that the “conversation notice” appearing in FIG. 200 (D) was not an effect directed at the timer. You will be able to recognize.

  Also, in such a resurrection timer effect, "count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "count display that was hidden and then redisplayed" are different counts. In order to be able to more reliably recognize that the same count digestion is being performed, rather than digesting, the count sound is displayed as "Once" while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the count display that has appeared before the display is hidden and the count display that has been once hidden and then displayed again.

  When the count display is performed in a negative notation (here, “−2”), a display (eg, “−2 (18 remaining)” or the like) capable of recognizing how many counts remain is displayed. It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches “-20 (0 remaining)” as a predetermined value (when minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2”), this is hidden and the effect for the timer is executed. Become so.

  FIG. 200 (F) shows an effect situation in which the heaven challenge effect (not shown) occurs while the count display shown in FIG. 200 (E) is continued, and as a result, the mode shifts to the heaven timer mode. .

  With the appearance of such a timer mode effect (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode), it is more clear that the timer effect has not been finished and is still being continued (the state of executing the count display). Can be recognized. In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating the state of the heaven timer mode is not related to the decorative symbol SZ, but is displayed in the display area. Is displayed in the form of a stamp notation on the left side of.

  FIG. 201 (G) shows another effect that is not related to the timer effect while the count digestion is being executed after the display indicating that the state is in the heaven timer mode is performed in FIG. 200 (F). As the “predetermined production”, the production situation where “cannon chance production” has occurred is shown.

  In other words, in this “cannon chance effect”, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value (here, −20), and the output related to the count display is a predetermined value (here, −20) ) Is not performed until the execution of the “cannon chance effect” is performed. In the middle stage, an effect of stopping the output is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

  More specifically, in the "cannon chance effect", after displaying the cannon image near the center in the display area, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, and the right area in the display area are displayed from the cannon image. An effect of selectively using a vacant (unused) area among the area and the lower area as a bullet firing destination (bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 201 (H)) Is to be performed. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect (FIG. 201 (H)) is other various effects (count display (upper left area), The reach variation (upper right area), the timer mode effect (left area), the timer target exclusion effect (right area), the hold display (lower area)) are all used, and the bullet firing effect (FIG. 201 ( H) is no longer available for a new output (a specific production situation), and if the bullet is fired tentatively in such a specific production situation, the bullet's firing destination Is the effect already in the output state (for example, count display) likely to be broken or destroyed by the bullet that was fired (when a conflict occurs with the effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect) Island ), And more big hit expectation degree or not from being dropped, concerns such as may have occurred as a result.

  Therefore, in this example of description, when a bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, if there is a specific effect condition (a condition shown in FIG. 201 (G)) in which there is no room for the output, Of the areas (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area) that can be used as a bullet firing destination, the output related to the count display using the upper left area is determined by a predetermined value ( Here, this is not performed until -20) is reached, and the output is stopped at an intermediate stage (count output stop control).

  FIG. 201 (H) shows an effect situation in which the output related to the count display is not performed until the output reaches a predetermined value (here, -20), and the bullet firing effect is executed under the condition that the output is stopped at an intermediate stage.

In this way, when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, unlike the case of the resurrection timer effect described above, the output related to the bullet firing effect is different. After the end, the count display of the timer effect is not output again.
On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, internally, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly timed and this is a predetermined value (FIG. When the count reaches the value (−20) at the time when 35 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display at 200 (C), it is determined that the timing at which the count display whose output has been stopped reaches the predetermined value has come, and the timer target The effect is to appear.

  FIG. 201 (I) shows cut-in A (cut-in effect by a teammate character) as a timer-targeted effect after the timing at which the count display whose output has been stopped has reached a predetermined value unless output has been stopped has arrived. Shows the production status that is being executed. In relation to the resurrection timer effect, the cut-in A is executed as a “second effect mode”.

  According to such an effect progression, after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the output value of the count display reaches the predetermined value if the output of the count display is not stopped after the output of the count display is stopped. When the timing that should have been reached arrives, the effect for the timer will appear. In other words, in this case, the timer effect, which appeared to have been terminated as a result of the execution of the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect), was secretly continued. Is expected.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), for example, when the display relating to the timer mode effect is not performed and there is a space in the left area, the count display of the timer effect (upper left area) is performed. With that output maintained, a bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is output using the empty space (left area). That is, in this case, the count display of the timer effect and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) are executed simultaneously, and the count display of the timer effect is displayed even after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) ends. , Until it reaches a predetermined value (here, -20).

  As described above, the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is one in which the output is performed using any one of the plurality of regions, and even when the bullet is fired toward any of those regions, the bullet is fired. There is no change in the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the launching effect (predetermined effect) and the same.

  Also in this example of the description, the display indicates which of the effect types has been excluded in the timer target excluded effect executed in FIG. 200 (B), and the heaven timer mode displayed in FIG. 200 (F). As for the display, the decorative symbols SZ are stopped while they are continuously executed (FIG. 201 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of effects other than the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. .

  FIG. 202 (A) shows an effect situation in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is fluctuated and displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 202 (B) shows that the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “3” during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is performed. This shows the production status to be started.

  FIG. 202 (C) shows that after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 202 (B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, This shows an effect state in which an effect (cut-in B) to be an effect object of the timer effect is being executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (C), “cut-in B” as a timer target effect is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. At this time, since the count display is also in a non-display state, the timer effect is terminated by the appearance of “cut-in B” in a mode (blue aura) of relatively low expectation as a player. It comes to recognize that. However, in this effect example, after the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode (blue aura) having a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is displayed again. The effect of whether or not (the second timer target effect) further appears.

  FIG. 202 (D) shows whether or not to re-display the count display while “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. 2 shows an effect status in which an effect (the second timer target effect) is being executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), as an effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display, an operation-based effect in which an operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time period Is performed, and if an operation is performed by the player within the predetermined time, a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed, or a second effect result indicating that the count display is not redisplayed. The effect (not shown) appears. In addition, as the operation-related effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time, in addition to displaying the operation instruction image SSG that prompts the user to operate the operation button 410, the first operation in the case where the operation button 410 is operated is An operation expectation image SKG indicating the ease (ratio) of the appearance of the effect result is displayed. The ratio may include 100%.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expectation image SKG, the effect mode in which the first effect is most likely to appear (the ally of the good old man) Character) has appeared. Therefore, although the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) has been executed in a mode (blue aura) having a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is displayed again. It can be said that the situation is such that the player can be strongly conscious of the continuation of the timer effect. Moreover, in the timer plus effect according to the present embodiment, a count value larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value “3” shown in FIG. 202B) is provided. Since the count display is re-displayed in the form, it is expected that an effect with a higher expectation will appear further as a timer target effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), while “cut-in B (blue aura)” is displayed as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C). An effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is performed (without hiding the display). However, the timer target effect (the second timer target effect) shown in FIG. After the "cut-in B (blue aura)" as the first timer target effect is not displayed, an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. Is also good. However, in this case, the effect is switched from the effect for the timer (the effect for the first timer) shown in FIG. 202 (C) to the effect for whether or not to redisplay the count display (the effect for the second timer). Is desirably performed in order to make the player recognize that the timer effect has not been finished and is continued (or may be continued).

  FIG. 202 (E) shows the count value of the timer effect being “5” after the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is to be redisplayed in the operation-system effect shown in FIG. 202 (D) appears. And the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed. In addition, in the operation-based effect, in addition to the case where the operation by the player is received within the predetermined time, the case where the operation by the player is not received within the predetermined time, the same effect result as the case where the operation is received (first The effect result and the second effect result) appear after the end of the predetermined time.

  FIG. 202 (F) shows that after the second count display shown in FIG. 202 (E) reaches a predetermined value (here “0”) and a timer-related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, This shows an effect state in which an effect (cut-in B) to be an effect object of the timer effect is being executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (F), “cut in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (red aura) with a relatively high degree of expectation. That is, in this effect example, the target effect is executed as an effect of the same type in the first count display and the re-displayed second count display, and in the second target effect, the first target effect is performed. It is executed in a form of changing (promoting) to a production mode with a higher degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, by performing the same type of effect as the timer target effect, it is recognized that the first count display and the second count display are executed as one timer effect connected. As the number of times the count display is re-displayed increases, the production mode as the timer target production is changed (promoted) to a higher expectation mode, and the timer target production has occurred. It is possible to improve the game entertainment from the time when the count display is redisplayed instead of the time.

  FIG. 203 (G) shows an effect on whether or not to re-display the count display while “cut-in B (red aura)” is displayed as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202 (F). This shows the effect status being executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203 (G), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expectation image SKG, the first effect result is more likely to appear than in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D). Is appearing (a friendly character of a middle age). Therefore, in a situation where “cut-in B” as a timer target effect has been executed in a mode (red aura) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the count display may not be displayed again. It can be said that we are in a situation to raise awareness. As described above, after the count display reaches the predetermined value, the effect (cut-in B) having a mode (red aura) that is relatively advantageous to the player is executed as the timer target effect, On the other hand, an effect (operation expectation image SKG) having a mode relatively disadvantageous to the player (a friendly character of the middle age) is executed. In addition, in such a timer plus effect, as the number of times that the count re-display is repeated on one side and the “cut-in B” changes to an advantageous mode for the player increases, the other side indicates a relative position for the player. Since the operation expectation image SKG having a disadvantageous aspect is more likely to appear and the redisplay ratio is reduced, it is necessary to increase the interest in the game every time the count is redisplayed and to increase the sense of tension. And both of them can be suitably provided.

  Then, as a result of such an effect, if the count display is not displayed again, the timer effect is terminated at that time, and thereafter, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203 (H)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and various effect examples different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. .

  FIG. 204 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is fluctuated and displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 204 (B) shows that the timer effect is displayed with a count of “10” during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is performed. This shows the production status to be started.

  Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for the count digestion is, the higher the rate of appearance of the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect is, so such a small count number (here, If a count display having only “10”) is displayed, there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, in performing the count display, an effect of hiding the count value for a predetermined time is generated, and the progress speed of the count is stagnated by that time, thereby reducing the count. It is possible to execute a timer stagnation effect to maintain the sense of expectation by extending the time required.

  FIGS. 204 (C) and (D) show when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204 (B) has reached the first specific value (here, “5”), and this is not displayed. Shows the production situation at the time.

  That is, in this effect example, when the count display becomes the first specific value (here, “5”), when the count display becomes the predetermined value (here, “0”), any effect type ( At the same time as the announcement of the conversation, the pending change, the cut-in A, the action of the character A, the special timer, the cut-in B, the action of the character B, etc., the effect (progress effect linked to the timer target effect) is started. While the effect is being executed, the count display is hidden. The progression effect connected to the timer target effect may be started after the count display becomes the first specific value and is not displayed.

  In this effect example, a display image SEG11 depicting a person who seeks help for an ally character and a display image SEG12 for accepting a request from a person who seeks help are sequentially displayed as a progression effect that leads to the timer target effect. It has become so. Here, at the time when the display image SEG11 or the display image SEG12 is displayed, it is possible to narrow down to what type of effect as the timer target effect, but to specify which type of effect appears. It is desirable not to be able to do that. For example, the display image SEG12 shows that three ally characters accept a request from a person seeking help, but it is predicted that any of the three ally characters will face the enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it unknown which of the three ally characters will face the enemy character (for example, which of the cut-ins A and B).

  FIG. 204 (E) shows the count display of “4” again after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (C) and (D) ends. Shows the production situation.

  According to such a configuration, while the count value is between "10" and "5", the count value is also advanced by "1" every time one second elapses, whereas the count value is changed from "5" to "5". When the progress is made to "4", until the "progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)" which appears when the count value becomes "5" (6 seconds in this case), The count value does not evolve and can be stagnated. In order to stop the progress of the count value, the count display is not necessarily hidden, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, “5”).

  FIG. 204 (F) and FIG. 205 (G) show when the count display re-displayed in FIG. 204 (E) is advanced to reach the second specific value (here, “2”), and this is not displayed. Shows the production situation when it is set to.

  That is, in this effect example, the count display is hidden a plurality of times until the count display reaches the predetermined value, and each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is started. The development effect connected with is to be executed. As for the development effect connected to the timer target effect, after the count display becomes the second specific value, it may be started under the condition that this is not displayed.

  In this effect example, a display image SEG13 showing the intention of a middle-aged ally character out of the three ally characters depicted in FIG. And a display image SEG14 depicting a state in which the ally character faces the enemy character. At this point, when the display image SEG13 or the display image SEG14 is displayed, it is possible to grasp that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) appears as the timer target effect, but any of the effect contents (blue aura) Or the appearance of a red aura) cannot be specified.

  FIG. 205 (H) shows a state in which the count display indicates the count value of “1” after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (second time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G) is completed. This shows the effect status that is displayed again.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value progresses from “2” to “1”, the “progress effect connected to the timer-targeted effect that appears when the count value becomes“ 2 ”(the second time) Until “)” is completed (here, 14 seconds), the count value does not evolve and can be stagnated.

  In FIG. 205 (I), the count display re-displayed in FIG. 205 (H) is advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed. After that, an effect state in which an effect (cut-in B) to be an effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown.

  According to such a configuration, an effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed before the count display becomes the predetermined value. Can be maintained. In addition, while the effect connected to the timer target effect is being executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value is stagnated, so that the time required for the count digestion can be lengthened by that much. As a result, it is possible to maintain the game entertainment.

  Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and various effect examples different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. . Note that in FIGS. 206 and 207, the movable body KT for effect, which is omitted in other drawings, is illustrated in the drawings for convenience of description. In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, a “rear under rear movable production unit 3100, a back upper left movable production unit 3200, a back left movable production unit 3300, a back upper middle movable production unit 3400, a back under front movable production unit 3500, etc. Movable member "

  FIG. 206 (A) shows an effect situation in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is fluctuated and displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state.

  In FIG. 206 (B), during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206 (A), the timer effect is displayed with a count of “40”, and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. This shows the production status to be started.

  Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for count digestion is, the higher the rate of appearance of the effect having a high expectation as the timer target effect is, so that such a large count number (here, When the count display with “40”) is displayed, the user is relieved, and there is a concern that the tension cannot be appropriately maintained while the count number is consumed. Therefore, in this effect example, during the count display, a count forward effect by the decorative body in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display is generated, and the count forward effect is terminated and the count display is performed. As the count value at the time when the player is easily visually recognized again becomes larger, an effect with a high degree of expectation as a timer target effect is more likely to appear.

  FIG. 206 (C) shows that the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display for a predetermined time while the count display is being executed in the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (B). This shows an effect situation (count forward effect by the decorative body) that continues to stay for a while. FIG. 206 (D) shows an effect situation in which the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative object) shown in FIG. 206 (C) has been completed and the count display has returned to a state where it is easy to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, even if a large count value is displayed once, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body), and it is as if the count display is performed again as a smaller count value. Since the directivity can be provided, there is a concern that it is not possible to appropriately maintain the tension while the count number is digested.

  Also, in such a count forward effect using the movable body KT (decorative object), the longer the time required for the effect, the smaller the count value that is easily viewed when the effect is completed, and thus the expected degree of the timer object effect. It is feared that the entertainment of the game will be reduced due to the difficulty of the appearance of the high performance. Therefore, in the front-of-count effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), on the movable body KT (decorative body) side as well, a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation in a lottery different from the lottery for determining the effect mode of the timer effect. For example, it is desirable that any one of the operation mode and the light emission mode of the movable body KT appears. According to such a configuration, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is unlikely to appear as a timer target effect, it is shown that the jackpot expectation degree is high due to the effect form on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, which is another lottery. If it is done, it will be possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  In this respect, in this effect example, since the count value is returned to a state in which it is easy to visually recognize while maintaining a relatively large count value such as “35”, the expectation for the timer effect is maintained thereafter. It can be expected that the count display is continued in the state in which the count is performed.

  FIG. 206 (E) shows an operation instruction image SSG when the count display reaches the first count value (here, “30”) in the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (D), and operates the player. FIG. 206 (F) shows an effect situation in which an operation by the player has been accepted as an effect at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206 (E), and the effect result has appeared. ing.

  That is, in this effect example, it is effected that the player performs an operation during the first period from when the count display changes from the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”). Acceptance is accepted, and as a result of the effect reception, a plurality of operation-time effect modes having different rates of appearance of effects with high expectations as timer-targeted effects (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, evil, etc., in descending order of appearance rate) ).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 206 (F), the operation by the player is performed when the count value reaches “23”, and the effect at the time of the operation effect ( Since Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment until the count display reaches the predetermined value is maintained. In the first period from when the count display changes from the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”), if an operation by the player has not been accepted, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  FIG. 207 (G) shows the operation instruction image SSG when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. 206 (F) appears, and displays the operation instruction image SSG to the player. FIG. 207 (H) shows the effect of receiving the operation by the player at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207 (G), and the effect is shown. The production status is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, it is effected that the player performs an operation even in the second period from when the count display changes from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). Acceptance is accepted, and as a result of the effect reception, a plurality of operation-time effect modes having different rates of appearance of effects with high expectations as timer-targeted effects (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, evil, etc., in descending order of appearance rate) ).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 207 (G), the operation by the player is performed when the count value becomes “8”, and as a result of the effect, a special operation effect most advantageous to the player. Since the mode (Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment until the count display reaches the predetermined value is maintained. In the second period from when the count display changes from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”), when the operation by the player has not been accepted, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  However, in this production example, when the count display is in the first period from when the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”), the operation means ( For example, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed and the effect is received, and when the count display is from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). When the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed during the second period until the effect is received, the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) is obtained as a result of the effect reception. Are generated at different rates.

  More specifically, if an effect is received during the first period, the rate of occurrence of the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) is relatively high, and the effect is received during the second period. And the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) are relatively low. Therefore, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the first period, it is possible to suppress the effect risk that the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear. Even if this appears as much as it is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation will appear as a timer target effect. On the other hand, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the second period, the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the effect risk that the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear increases. When this appears as much as it is difficult to perform, it is easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation will appear as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, the count display is changed from the first count value (here, “30”) to the first count value according to the player's preference and the effect status such as the degree of expectation indicated in another effect. Whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated firmly in the first period in which the effect risk is low up to the time when the count value is 2 (here, “20”), or whether the count display indicates the third count value (here, “15”) )) To the fourth count value (here, “5”), whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be bullishly operated in the second period with a high production risk, or both. It becomes possible to make the game strategy such as whether to operate the operation button 410 interesting.

  In FIG. 207 (I), after the effect result shown in FIG. 207 (H) appears, the count display is further advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) and a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”). ) Is displayed, showing the effect status in which the effect (cut-in B) to be the effect object of the timer effect is being executed. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207 (J)).

  In each of the count effects described above, the effect to be counted is not immediately executed when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the effect to be counted is executed after a short time. I am trying to be. In this regard, in a period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) to when the count target effect is executed, a display mode indicating which effect is to be executed as the count target effect. May appear. According to such a configuration, even when a situation in which a plurality of effects are performed in parallel occurs when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any one of the effects is a count effect target. It can be enjoyed without misunderstanding that it is being executed.

  In this regard, in the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) to when the count target effect is executed, instead of the above-described display mode, “some one-to-one correspondence with the count target effect is not performed. It is desirable that a specific display mode commonly used in different counting target effects "appears. In this case, when a specific display mode appears, it is not suggested which of the commonly used count target effects appears, but a display mode that should originally appear as the count target effect is performed. It is more desirable to make the rate of appearance of the big hit symbols higher than that. According to such a configuration, although there is a risk of mistaking which effect is being executed as a count effect target, which effect is guaranteed while the appearance rate of the big hit symbol is guaranteed to be high. Since it is possible to give an interest to find out whether the game is being executed as a count effect target, it is expected that an improvement in amusement of a game will be achieved.

  However, assuming that the number of types of productions that can be executed as a production to be counted is N, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) until the production to be counted is executed , Even if a specific display mode appears, it is regarded as a count production target to such an extent that "any of M (two or more) productions less than N is executed as a count production target". It is desirable to be able to narrow down which effect is to be executed in order to provide an interesting way to find out which effect is being executed as a count effect object.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already described sound data creation processing (step S1032 in FIG. 95), a description regarding the automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly described.

  2. Description of the Related Art In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from speakers in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, thereby realizing an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, there are some reach that should improve the player's expectation, and others that output various sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is assigned to a corresponding predetermined It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be able to be allocated to the vacant channel due to the channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound effects because it was not possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, with the aim of realizing a variety of sound effects by effectively utilizing the available channels and increasing the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds). Output means) and each sound to be output from the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) are dynamically allocated and managed, while the number of sound combinations to be output is determined by the number of sounds of each channel. If the maximum number of channels is exceeded (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output through each dynamically allocated channel within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 208 (A) and 208 (B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison object with the present embodiment. FIG. 208A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. It should be noted that the “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 208B shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned to each reproduction channel to be used in advance. Here, as to the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

  In the illustrated “notification sound 1” to “button press sound”, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has been started must not be silenced in any way until the end of the reproduction. As a channel assignment method, a pair of a reproduction channel and a sound is exclusively assigned to prevent a sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem even if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted. As a channel assignment method, assignment is made to the same channel so as to minimize the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the output sound is muted and a new sound is output. For a sound that would interfere with overwriting, an independent channel is assigned, or a sound whose playback timing does not overlap is assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of the reproduction channel number, the left and right pan initial value, the upper and lower pan initial value, the volume initial value, the sound number, the reproduction type setting and the output type setting are managed for each sound division and sound name. I have. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L) is output, and if it is set to, for example, “0x80”, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Indicates the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers, which is a combination of these, Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the game state, and the game state is, for example, “first half of the change”, “second half of the change”, “stop the left symbol”, “stop the right symbol”, “stop the middle symbol”, and “medium hit”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 211 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 211 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 211 (C) shows that each sound cannot be reproduced when trying to reproduce it. An example of the problem is shown. In FIGS. 211 (A) to 211 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 211 (A), the game state is sequentially along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop of left symbol”, “stop of right symbol”, “stop of middle symbol”, and “big hit”. The game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in the problem 1 of FIG. If there is a “prize”, as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the “hold prize sound” is assigned in advance to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”, so that the “first half notice A” Is overwritten with the hold winning sound, and the output of the “first half notice A” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 of FIG. If the “winning” is present, the “holding winning sound” is assigned to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen preview” as shown in FIG. Will be overwritten with the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen preview" sound will be stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 212 (A) and 212 (B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 212A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the above-described sound control using the fixed channel, the channel division as the attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the drawing). Is different. Here, that the channel division is an automatic channel indicates that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated in accordance with a rule described later (see above). Equivalent to "Sound control by automatic channel method").

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. It should be noted that “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 212 (B) shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority. Here, as to the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  In the illustrated “notification sound 1” to “button press sound”, the sound whose reproduction has been started must not be silenced on the way no matter what happens until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem even if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter, abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined in the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sound for the AUTO group.
When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority (priority) for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group.
When a new sound is reproduced, if the sound is defined in the AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group.

  In the above case, when there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel having a lower priority or the same priority as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound when there is no free channel having a lower priority or a non-identical channel than the sound being reproduced in the AUTO group.

  FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in the automatic channel method, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by a fixed channel, a left and right pan initial value, a vertical pan initial value, a volume initial value, Instead of the sound number, the playback type setting and the output type setting, an identifier and a priority (also referred to as “playback priority”) for specifying an AUTO group, a left / right pan initial value, an up / down pan initial value, a volume initial value, a sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings, and output type settings.

  First, an identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among the plurality of AUTO groups in which each sound is to be reproduced. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the sound is to be reproduced with higher priority as the numerical value is higher, while the sound is to be reproduced without priority as the numerical value is lower. In this embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, a notification sound having a priority of “25” (“information sound 1”, “information sound 2”, and “information sound 3”) Sound effect (“big hit decision sound” and “button press sound”) with priority “20”, BGM with priority “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and priority “10” Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first-half notice sound effect" to "second-half notice sound effect"), and hold winning sound with priority "01" And Accordingly, in a state where there is no available channel, for example, when an attempt is made to reproduce the notification sound, it is not necessary to reproduce the notification sound using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) ) Is reproduced with priority using the channel on which the information is reproduced.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) is output, and when set to “0x80”, for example, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L. The volume difference output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the left and right speakers 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes zero, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  As described above, the initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the upper and lower values of the upper speaker 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the lower speaker 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). 3 shows the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of FIG. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers, which is a combination of these, Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, within a setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. In addition, “1” is set at the third byte (0x1FF in the case of 0xFF). ) Is set so that it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine, and the content is always played back at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point indicates a reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set for each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half advance notice A effect sound”, while “second half advance notice A effect sound” and “second half advance notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "sound". When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source is exceeded by such a seek point, the number of sounds that can be registered exceeds the maximum number that can be registered.

  The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the game state, and the game state is, for example, “first half of the change”, “second half of the change”, “stop the left symbol”, “stop the right symbol”, “stop the middle symbol”, and “medium hit”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 215 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 215 (A) and 215 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215 (A), “game first half”, “fluctuation second half”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “medium symbol stop”, and “medium symbol stop” are sequentially set as a game state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis. The game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced throughout the reproduction channels 00 to 01 (see FIG. 215 (B)). (Corresponds to range A). At this point, when the start winning (the “holding winning” in the drawing) has been received and the holding winning sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the reproduction channels 12 and 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved winning sound can be reproduced by using the reproduction channels 12 and 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the retained winning sound (corresponding to "reserved sound reproduction" in the figure). Output of all types of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced throughout the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( (Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, when a start winning prize (corresponding to “holding prize winning” in the drawing) has been received and an attempt is made to reproduce the hold winning prize sound as a new sound, the reproduction channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Therefore, the output of all the other types of sounds continues without overwriting any of the sounds being played back with the winning winning sounds (corresponding to “holding sound reproduction” in the figure).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” in the drawing) is further generated, so that the notification sound with the highest priority “25” as a new sound ( Attempting to reproduce the “report 2” shown in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 215 (B). Therefore, at the start timing, the sound having the lowest priority is searched for among the sounds being reproduced, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the hold winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above. However, the priority order (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the drawing) is Since the priority of the hold winning sound is higher than the priority (01), the hold winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 216 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number being reproduced, an automatic allocation group, a priority at the time of automatic allocation, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a pan control work, and have information corresponding to them.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". If the sound number during reproduction is "-1" at a stop and other than "-1", it indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced.

  In the automatic allocation group, when "0", the channel is fixedly allocated, while when "1", the channel is automatically allocated ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). Equivalent). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, “1” indicates the AUTO group 1 and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment indicates the priority in the case of performing sound control by an automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time since the registration of the desired reproduction sound as "0". In addition, the elapsed time from the registration is the same as the priority at the time of the above automatic assignment, when a new sound is to be reproduced in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority are being reproduced, Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores the pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the up and down pans described above.

  FIG. 217 shows an example of an empty channel search process when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 217, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100A), the effect control program checks the automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A). If the automatic allocation group is “0”, the allocation is fixed. , And reproduction of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that automatic allocation is performed, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to a monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether there is a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) (step S1108A). ) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The rendering control program terminates the process when there is no channel of the reproduction sound equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a currently reproduced (monaural) channel, while ending the processing if it exists. Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  When there are a plurality of the relevant channels, the effect control program is playing the sound having the longest playback time from the registration among the relevant channels based on the elapsed time since the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, when there is one corresponding channel and there is one corresponding channel, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel satisfying a desired condition (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, when the effect control program determines in step S1106A that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1106A). S1120A). If the effect control program determines that there is an empty channel, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts the reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the production control program determines whether or not there is a new sound having the same or lower priority than the new sound in the (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced (step S1). In step S1124A), if there is no sound, the process is terminated, so that the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

  The effect control program starts outputting the new sound on a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition when a plurality of corresponding channels do not exist. Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such an empty channel will be described in a more easily understood manner.

  FIG. 218 (A) and FIG. 218 (B) to FIG. 221 (A) and FIG. 221 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 218 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a normal BGM reproduction request having a priority of 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_A having a priority of 05, and searches for an available channel. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (A), the production control program searches for an available channel when a reproduction request of a button press sound having a priority order of 20 occurs, and searches for a reproduction channel 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the button press sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the production control program searches for an available channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_B having a priority of 05, and searches for an available channel. Since there is a vacancy in −07, the reproduction of the effect sound of the first-half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06 to 07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a jackpot determined sound having a priority order of 20, and searches the reproduction channels 08 to 09 for reproduction channels. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the jackpot determined sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_C having a priority of 05, and searches for an available channel. Since there is a vacancy among the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a hold winning sound having a priority of 01, and makes the reproduction channels 12 to 13 search. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the production control program searches for an available channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  FIGS. 222 (A) and 222 (B) to 225 (A) and 225 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel when a playback request for a reach BGM with a priority of 15 is issued, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and an empty channel is found in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Because of the presence, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the above-described processing, the production control program next generates an empty channel when a reproduction request of a full-screen preview sound having a priority of 10 occurs, as shown in FIG. 223 (A). Is performed, and since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, reproduction of the full-screen preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25, and performs a search for an empty channel. As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacancy)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order 25 is generated, and performs a search for the reproduction channels 04 to 05 ( Since there is a vacancy in the "non-reproduction (vacancy)" shown in the figure, reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the accessory preview sound having the priority order 10, and searches for the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the accessory announcement sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a hold winning sound having a priority of 01, and searches for reproduction channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacancy)” shown in the figure, reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the production control program searches for a free channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 2 with the priority order 25 is made, but no free channel exists. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 that reproduce the “hold winning prize sound” having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 as the desired sound is started.

In this way, each of the sounds to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a reproduction channel having a lower priority is searched for in accordance with the priority of the sound. Will be reproduced on the reproduction channel found by the search.
Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the unused channels be effectively used as described above, but also the sounds to be output can be increased as much as possible using the channels including the empty channels. Since it can be reproduced, various sound effects can be realized and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  FIG. 226 (A) and FIG. 226 (B) to FIG. 227 (A) and FIG. 227 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request for a left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 is issued, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request of a right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 is issued, and searches for an empty channel in reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel when a reproduction request for a medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 is issued, and searches for reproduction channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the medium symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the jackpot BGM having the priority order of 15, and searches for an empty channel in the reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the big hit BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In the case where sound reproduction according to the priority order is performed using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the reproduction is completed. It goes without saying that this may be done.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the case where the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed using all the reproduction channels of the maximum number of channels has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

  FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel systems or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 228 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described above as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by an automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since the sound control based on these two channel assignments has already been described, a detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 228 (C) shows an embodiment in which sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by allocating channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups (corresponding to “PTN2” in the drawing). . FIG. 228 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of reproduction channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed on some of the reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 228 (E) shows an embodiment in which channels are allocated to the maximum number of reproduction channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed on some of the reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). Note that a specific example of the channel method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be described later in detail with reference to drawings after FIG.

  FIG. 228 (F) shows an example in which one automatic channel group is used to allocate channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels to perform sound control by the automatic channel method, and to perform sound control of a part of reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. Control is performed, but is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is secured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (F) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped as one group, an empty channel is allocated or a channel being output is replaced based on a pre-specified criterion. The sound can be output only by determining the priority order. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method of outputting sound by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so that control on sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, the number of channels can be minimized. For example, a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels can be employed, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control method, the automatic channel method dynamically changes the sound assignment to each channel so that the available channels can be effectively used to reproduce many sounds. In diversifying recent gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate sound source management.

  In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in a superimposed manner, it is possible to repeatedly execute a notice effect or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and the plurality of sounds and the reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are reliably output in an overlapping manner. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that the management is facilitated by dividing the sound for each type.

  Further, the sound includes a sound to be output in preference to the effect sound, such as a notification sound, and a sound to be continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), a sound output in priority or a sound that is constantly output is output in a fixed channel method, and a sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

  With the above-described configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize unused channels by the automatic channel system and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from being generated by the fixed channel system. In addition, since it is possible to classify by sound types such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data is facilitated.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228 (C) and 228 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is set to 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by an automatic channel method. . Channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 229 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not to perform automatic allocation to the channel number, “division” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “use purpose” of each channel. Note that “remarks” are added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 229 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of each channel in this embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29 are fixed channel systems. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  The automatic channel type channels from channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the automatic channel type channels from channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  The channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, the sound is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Channel 1 is a channel paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 5 and 7 are channels that are paired with channels 4 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound quality of BGM is improved by outputting not only a stereo output but also a plurality of sounds at the same time. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs simultaneously using up to eight channels (four pairs). Has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for playing back the BGM is set to the fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of the empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing a sound output at the time of executing the notice effect. In the announcement effect, the sound selected by the lottery is output each time according to the result of the fluctuation display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels for outputting the sound at the time of the announcement effect is AUTO group 1.

  When outputting a sound at the time of performing the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for a free channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, two empty channels are searched, and a continuous channel is set as an output channel in principle. At this time, if an empty channel exists, the setting is made so that the designated sound is output from the empty channel. On the other hand, if there is no vacant channel, based on a predetermined condition, the currently used channel is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect output in the automatic channel system.

  Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, like channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the hold sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority when a big hit is determined. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of the start winning are output from the channels 24 to 29 as described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel system is applied. In the channels 24 to 29, a sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning and a sound output when the hold display changes at the start of the fluctuation are reproduced. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in the fixed channel mode, it is possible to output the sound at the time of determining the big hit without fail even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, thereby attracting the player's attention. Can be.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are the channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. In addition, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound relating to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound at the time of occurrence of an abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is allocated when the output is steadily continued like BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably like an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, by using the automatic channel method for sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is possible to prevent the sound from being output while a vacant channel is generated, and to set a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an empty channel search process in the case where control for outputting a sound according to the present embodiment is performed. Although FIG. 217 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, FIG. 230 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 230, in the processing of steps S1108B and S1120B, if the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the same group of channels. That is, even if channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B is “No”.

Further, in the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 230, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, Step S1132B). Hereinafter, the selection condition of the channel for stopping the reproduction of the sound will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel whose sound output is to be replaced (sound reproduction is stopped or released) when a channel is not empty at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. . As specific selection conditions, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and a sound having higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as described later, the reproduction time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume of the volume, the amount of change in the sound being reproduced, and the like. It also includes the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 217, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time from the start of the reproduction in this way, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is ended, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, an effect with a long playback time can be an effect with high expectation, so an effect with a short playback time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling an effect with a long reproduction time, the effect on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total reproduction time regardless of the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

  The condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time. However, in addition to this, for example, sound output of an effect with a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Alternatively, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of the reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the output of the sound can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the effect.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output may be an effect with a higher degree of importance. Therefore, a channel with a small volume of the output sound is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel having a large volume of output sound may be preferentially selected to cause the player to recognize that a new effect is to be executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in volume of a sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect with a higher importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, as an effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sound of the stereo speaker can be a more important effect, consider a channel with a small change in the dynamic sound image localization position. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel in which the dynamic sound image localization position frequently changes may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) sound number is selected. At this time, a priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect that is output as a high-quality stereo sound has a higher degree of expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of available channels is not enough even if the channel for outputting monaural sound is opened, a channel for outputting stereo sound is selected to increase the number of available channels. It may be.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted.
For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may have higher importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment may be performed may have higher importance.

  In addition to the conditions described above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a request to reproduce a new sound may be discarded without changing channels. Also, by assigning a unique priority to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

  The table shown in FIG. 231 shows the conditions 1 to 8 as an example, but these conditions may be applied alone or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition, and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected. Alternatively, a priority may be set for each condition, and the conditions may be sequentially applied.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Subsequently, an example will be described in which control is performed to assign channels based on the priority assigned to newly output sounds. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first-half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, in which (A) shows a timing at which a sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows a channel to which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first-half notice _A occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, an instruction for operating the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, a first-half notice_B is generated. Further, the first-half notice C is generated while the first-half notice_A and the first-half notice_B are being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 233, the priority of the first-half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first-half notice _B and the first-half notice _C, when a low-priority notice effect is repeatedly performed in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppression volume value. Reduced.

  Explaining the contents of each notice, the first notice _A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears. The character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first-half notice _B is an effect executed by operating the effect button. When the button is operated, the button press sound is reproduced (channels 18 and 19), and the first-half notice _B is started, and the effect is provided in stereo from channels 10 and 11. A sound is output.

  In the first-half notice_C, the display of the screen is stopped for a predetermined time together with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and a sound having a lower priority than the first-half notice_C, specifically, another notice effect and BGM are temporarily displayed. Is muted (blackout production). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first-half notice_C is restarted.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each announcement effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of a volume change of the effect sound in the first half variation of the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis indicates the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) indicates the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display starts at time t0, and at time t1, the first-half notice_A starts. At this time, the effect sound effect of the first-half notice_A is output with a preset volume V_A.

  Thereafter, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced by the volume V_T, and the effect sound of the first-half notice_B is output by the volume V_B. Since the priority of the first-half notice_B is higher than the first-half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume does not need to be lowered when the priority of the notification effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notification effect being executed, or when the sound effect output simultaneously is small. There is no need to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be reduced only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first-half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen darkens until time t5, and sound effects other than the first-half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first-half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  The output of the effect sound of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B that has been muted from time t3 is restarted at time t5. Normally, the button press sound is output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B continue until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at the time t8, the first-half notice_C ends, and the first half of the change ends.

  During the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume for controlling the volume of the entire effect sound effect may be set to 0, and the first-half notice_C output of the sound effect May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even when the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first-half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when lowering the volume of the sound being played by outputting a new sound, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel in the channel system (fixed channel system, automatic channel system) may be lowered. Further, the volume of a sound being reproduced on a channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, a sound having a higher priority can be output with priority. The sound with a high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for surely transmitting to a player or an employee of a game hall, or a player who has a high expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and Sound effect to increase the sense of expectation, or a sound effect that has a high stage effect and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily manage the effect data related to the effect sound by classifying the channels used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups.
As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, such as by suppressing the occurrence of bugs due to systematic tests. Also, by enabling a stable game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs a sound effect of a notice effect, and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs a sound effect related to holding. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sounds can be reproduced simultaneously and overlappingly. In particular, in the first half of the change, it is possible that the output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be required, for example, by performing the advance notice of the pending change together with the notice of the change. In such a case, the effect of the game can be maximized by outputting the effect sound with the lower priority in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 while replacing the effect sound with the higher priority. .

  Further, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect effect sound with the change of the hold display of the variable display can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and is desirably executed reliably. . In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound related to such a hold display (hold sound) from a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the sound effect independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the case of the announcement effect in the variable display, the output of the effect effect sound is stopped because the number of effect sound effects output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2. Is less likely to be. Further, even when the sound effect is stopped, the output of the effect sound effect having the lower priority is merely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely executing the effect with the high effect of increasing the expectation of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied and channels to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are used effectively by searching for available channels, and the priority is given to directing effects and sound with high importance by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to a case where sound is continuously output like BGM or a case where sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a game machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of the sound, each channel can be effectively used, and furthermore, appropriate control can be performed in accordance with the output state of the sound. For example, in the control for outputting the BGM, the sound may be output to a channel assigned in advance regardless of the game state. In the control for outputting the alarm sound, the specified channel may be output without searching for an available channel. What is necessary is just to output a sound directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel method, as described above, the available channels can be utilized to the maximum extent, and a sound with a high effect can be output with priority.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. In addition, the effect under execution can be continued while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the low-priority effect that has been executed is continuing even after the high-priority effect ends. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing the specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

  [15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed] In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are set in advance. In this modification, a description will be given of a modification in which the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are variable.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, 9) and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating a screen configuration example of an effect in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 235 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the occurrence of the reach.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and an effect of displaying different scenes on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously.
The selection of the scene may be based on a lottery or may be selected by a player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the above-described embodiment. The assignment of default channels is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in the present modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in the present modification, the channels for outputting the BGM are reallocated, and the arrangement of the channels is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to a modification of the present embodiment, in which (A) illustrates a default configuration, and (B) illustrates a configuration at the time of executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration in FIG. 236 (A) is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 229 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 236 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel type channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels to which the automatic channel type assigned to the AUTO group 1 is adopted is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even a different announcement effect performed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGMs corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output at a normal volume, the volume will be too high. Therefore, the volume is output at a level lower than normal. When a scene is selected, an announcement effect (second half announcement) based on the selected scene is executed, the volume of the BGM of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of other BGM is ended. . Further, when the player selects a scene, for example, a screen divided by an operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be set larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of another scene may be set smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment. FIG. Is shown.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of the change), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 236 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. )). After the end of the first half change (time t11), reach occurs, and the second half change is started. After the start of the second half change, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 236 (B)) is output. At this time, the output is performed at a volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene to continue the production is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, the second half notice _5 corresponding to scene 5 is executed.

  After the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the arrangement of the channels may be returned to the default. When the output of the BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in the present modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next change.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in the present modified example, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the latter half change.

  Further, instead of changing the channel arrangement according to the effect contents, the channel arrangement may be changed when a game state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed channel” in FIG. 228 (F)) for performing sound control by the fixed channel method and the number of automatic channels for performing sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. 228 (F) corresponding to the “variable AUTOch”) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to set a state in which more notification sounds, BGMs, or sound effects can be reproduced depending on the situation. Or the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced in the effect by increasing the number of reproducible notification sounds can be flexibly dealt with.

[16. Control for sound being output on other channels]
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which channels are grouped and sounds to be output are managed by associating the sounds with each group. Further, when the number of sounds that can be simultaneously assigned in the same group is exceeded, based on predetermined conditions, the output of the currently sounding sound is stopped to output a new sound, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control on the output sound belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, a control such as changing the volume of a sound being output on another channel is performed.

  After the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before the occurrence of the reach (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the predetermined sound effect and the output of the sound due to the BGM being reproduced or other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time. As a typical effect for performing such control, there is a blackout effect for regulating the output of sound effects and darkening the screen. In the blackout effect, after a lapse of a predetermined time after regulating the output of the sound effect, the darkness of the screen is released, and the output of the sound by the BGM or another effect is restarted, so that the newly output sound (the sound ), The player's attention can be drawn, and the player's expectation of the change can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described where a new sound is allocated to an empty channel and output, instead of deallocating a channel to which a sound effect is output and allocating a new sound. In this case, in order to return the output of the BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassigning a sound to a channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when different groups of sounds are being output]
In the present embodiment, channels are grouped, and priorities are set for each group. Then, a case will be described where a sound is output on a channel belonging to a group having a lower priority and a sound is newly output on a channel belonging to a group having a higher priority.

[16-1-1. Volume control table for each channel group]
FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating an example of a channel group-by-channel volume control table indicating the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is defined as a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). 3 divided into five groups.

For each group, a group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set.
The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, one or more numerical values are set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another sound being reproduced when the sound is being reproduced on a channel belonging to a group having a lower priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the sound reproduction is continued without changing other sounds being reproduced. If “0” is set, control is performed so that other sounds being reproduced are muted. When a value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of another sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit being%. It should be noted that a numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

  Further, the respective setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 238. In this embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, fixed channel type and automatic channel type channels are mixed. In the fixed channel, sounds that are output with priority, such as notification sounds and BGM, or that are constantly output, are assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of the effect are assigned.

  In the fixed channel 1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when a sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying a player or an employee of a game arcade to the outside as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in a gaming machine, or a notification sound such as a clogged ball. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed channel 1, the output of the effect sound or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output, because of the occurrence of a wrongdoing or failure. While the notification sound is being output from the fixed channel 1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having relatively lower priority is restricted.

  In the fixed channel 2, the group volume priority in FIG. 238 is set to “4”, which is the lowest. In addition, since “−1” is set as the suppression volume value, even if the reproduction of the sound is started on the fixed channel 2, it does not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound reproduced in the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in a game, and in a normal game, a staging effect sound that draws the player's attention in response to execution of a special symbol fluctuating display in a state where the BGM is output. Is output.

In the AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when a sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 are muted.
That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and output alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot determination sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, and the like as shown in the reference reproduction sound. The big hit determination sound is a sound that informs that the result of the fluctuation display becomes a big hit at a predetermined timing such as a start winning prize, and is a staging effect sound that maximizes the sense of expectation for the player. The V prize sound is a sound that informs that a game ball has won a prize in the V zone and that, for example, a transition to a high-probability state has been determined. Like the big hit determination sound, the player's expectation is greatly improved. Can be done.

  The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that suppresses the output of other effect sound effects when the above-described blackout effect is executed, and is output in a silent state. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen together with the output of the blackout sound effect may be executed. The jackpot determination sound and the V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the blackout effect sound, the player's attention is focused on the blackout effect by keeping the effect sound of another effect not being output for a predetermined time after the blackout effect sound is output. Further, after the execution of the blackout effect, an effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the fluctuation. For example, the blackout effect may be executed in the first half fluctuation, and the corresponding effect may be executed in the second half fluctuation. It may be.

  In the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. Further, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the reproduced sounds of the group having the priority of “4” or less are halved (50%). Output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 is halved since the group volume priority is “4” as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely silencing the BGM. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 2 include, for example, a first half effect sound and a second half effect sound.

  In the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Also, as in the case of the AUTO group 2, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group having the priority "3" or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the notice effect sound is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice effect sound is reduced by half. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, or the volume may be further halved (1/4 of the original volume). May be.

  Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a button pressing sound indicating that the effect button has been pressed. is there. In the present embodiment, if the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as it is at the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is regulated, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters the start winning port, a hold winning sound is output even during execution of the blackout effect.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, the procedure of volume control in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to the present embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. Hereinafter, the group volume control processing will be described.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a request for reproducing a new sound (Step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce a new sound (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing after step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request to reproduce a new sound (result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and sets a volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 238, the suppression volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are obtained (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (Step S1403). If the obtained suppression volume value is “−1” (result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, if control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing after step S1406 is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further sets the sound of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered (the result of step S1404 is “Yes”), the processing after step S1406 is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The order is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the currently reproduced highest priority sound are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  Describing the control on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being played back has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set (step S1407).

  The sound control executed after step S1410 will be described. If a sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered (result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a new reproduction request. A comparison is made between the group volume priorities of the existing sounds and the group volume priorities held in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is lower than the group volume priority already stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a issues the new reproduction request. The volume of the affected sound is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the new reproduction. The sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority stored in the work area (result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processing of steps S1415 and S1416 has been executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 ends, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the suppression volume value and the group volume priority to work. It is determined whether or not the area has been registered (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is “No”), the process ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays back the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether the process has been completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this processing ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the work number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority in the work area. Is deleted (step S1422). Lastly, for all the sounds being reproduced, the volume values are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and this processing ends.

The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Subsequently, the volume control of the sound will be described in chronological order.
FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. FIG. 240 illustrates an example in which a notice effect and a blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 238, the fixed channel 2 has a group volume priority of “4” and a suppressed volume value of “−1”. Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value of “−1”, the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the starting winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of the hold winning is omitted), the variation display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half advance notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first-half notice A is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the group volume priority is “3” and the suppression volume value is “50” (results of steps S1402 and S1403 are “No”). . At the start of the first-half notice, since no parameters have been recorded in the work area (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first-half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first-half notice A, the normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first-half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, the group priority of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is the same as the group priority of the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”). The determined volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being reproduced and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is generated based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half announcement A. Is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of the normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, the parameters of the first-half notice A are recorded in the work area, but since the blackout effect has a higher group volume priority (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the contents of the work area are blackout effected. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1413).

  Furthermore, the effect sound effects of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A that are being reproduced have the group priority lower than that of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes") because the group priority of the effect sound of the blackout effect is lower than that of the blackout effect. The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

  Further, the second-half notice B is started during the execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second-half announcement B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the second-half announcement B is started in a muted state, and the blackout effect is started. Until the end of

Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, a hold winning sound is output (time t24).
The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained and output with a predetermined volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect is being executed, the hold winning sound is output as usual.

  When the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameters of the blackout effect recorded in the work area are erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to a predetermined volume (step S1423). . More specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half advance notice A, and the second half advance notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the output of the sounds of the first-half notice A and the second-half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect with a high group priority is being output, a specific effect can be emphasized by suppressing the output of a sound effect with a low group priority. Furthermore, the volume control based on the suppression volume value allows the player to recognize that a plurality of effects are proceeding at the same time. By setting a high priority, it is possible to execute without losing the effect of the effect.

  In the case where a high-priority sound is newly output and the output of the rendering effect sound being reproduced is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the rendering effect sound being reproduced is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. From the timing when the sound with the higher priority is output, gradually lowering the volume of the other effect sound to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) so as to fade out Is also good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being reproduced) and the time to reach the target value and the amount of change may be defined, or the target value may be set based on the effect contents such as the length of the effect sound reproduction time. The reaching time and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the effect sound stand out, or if the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target The time to reach the value may be set long to reduce the sense of discomfort that may occur when the effect sound switches.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a jackpot determination sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during reproduction such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time. The newly output effect sound can be made more prominent without breaking the game tempo.

  Further, when the output of the new effect sound is terminated and the output of another effect sound is restarted, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume under regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first-half notice A is reproduced. However, when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume currently being reproduced. In this example, the volume is controlled to be 50%), and control is performed so as to fade in based on the amount of change and the specified time. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort while making the effect sound switching more prominent, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the effect sound has been described as an example. However, the present invention can be similarly applied to a warning sound and a notification sound. As an example, in the case of outputting a notification sound with a high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraud), not only a staging effect sound but also a notification sound with a relatively low priority (priority). For example, the output of the notification sound of ball clogging may be restricted. On the other hand, if a wrongdoing is performed while the low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, the output of the low-priority notification sound is interrupted, and the high-priority (high-priority) notification sound (alarm) is issued. Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the output time of the warning sound and the notification sound is not set as in the case of the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the warning or the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, a sound having the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another notification sound is output. . At this time, the next highest priority sound may be output to regulate the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)]
As described above, the control of the sounds output repeatedly according to the priority order between the groups has been described. Subsequently, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long and short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table by sound effect]
FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of a volume control table for each sound effect, which indicates volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound according to the present embodiment. A used reproduction channel (ch), a total reproduction time, and a suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 238, the used reproduction channels divide each channel into five groups: fixed channel 1, fixed channel 2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

  The total reproduction time is a time from the start of output of the sound effect to the stop thereof. When the total playback time is set to -1, the effect sound is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the other sound effects to be output. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed.

  When the total playback time is set to 0, the loop playback is repeatedly output, and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the value set for the total playback time is any other number (positive number), it is the playback time of the sound effect. The unit of the total playback time is millisecond (ms).

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another simultaneously output sound effect, as in the example shown in FIG. 238. Specifically, in the case of “−1”, the sound reproduction is continued without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of “0”, the sound effect being reproduced (− (Except for the sound effect for which 1 is set) is suppressed (silenced). In the case of a numerical value other than “0”, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Next, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 241. In this embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, fixed channel type and automatic channel type channels are mixed, and the assigned sound effect is also the same. It is. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch1, when these sound effects are played, the other sound being played is All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced in the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying a player or an employee of a game arcade to the outside, and is a sound effect that is output due to a fraud or occurrence of a failure. Cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects being reproduced is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

  For the sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2, since the total playback time is set to “0” and the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in the game.

  For the sound effect assigned to the AUTO group 1, since the total reproduction time is set to a value (reproduction time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "0", the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and output alone. As shown in FIG. 238, specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot determination sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound.

  In the sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3, the value (reproduction time) set for each sound effect and the suppression volume value are set to "50" for the AUTO group 2 When a sound is reproduced, the outputs of all other sounds being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thereby, for example, as the specific sound output in the AUTO group 2 which can make the effect stand out while continuing the flow of the game by halving the output of the BGM, for example, the first half effect sound and the second half effect effect Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a press of a production button. For example, a button press sound to be notified.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effect that is reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effect. FIGS. 242A and 242B are flowcharts illustrating a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure of the output control of the sound effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no request to reproduce a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “No”), the processing after step S1530A is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request to reproduce a new sound (result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and The suppression volume value and the total playback time are obtained from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (Step S1503A). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, if control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing after step S1506A is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “No”), that is, when performing control on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further performs the control of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time have already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processing after step S1506A is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total reproduction time of the sound requested to be reproduced. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510A.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total playback time of the newly requested sound is “−1”. (Step S1510A). If the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is “−1” (result of step S1510A is “Yes”), as described above, an alarm sound at the time of occurrence of an abnormality or the like is output, and the new sound is output. The suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound is prohibited, and the output of the other sound effects being reproduced is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time for which a new playback request has been made are overwritten on the work area (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

  On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not “−1” (result of step S1510A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is It is determined whether a tone number is set to “−1” or a work area (step S1520A). If the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or a sound number is not set in the work area (result of step S1520A is “Yes”), the processing from step S1530A is executed.

  If the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and a sound number is set in the work area (result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of a sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  If the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound for which the new reproduction request was made. The number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time are overwritten on the work area (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (Step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound requested to be newly played is shorter than or equal to the total playback time held in the work area (result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly played is increased. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound requested to be newly played is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly played is Then, a volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or equal to the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (Step S1526A). If the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of steps S1526A and S1527A for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of step S1530A and thereafter (step S1528A).

  When the volume control for the newly requested sound and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “No”), the process ends.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not has been completed (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), this processing ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erase is performed (step S1532A). Lastly, for all the sounds being reproduced, the volume values are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (step S1533A, step S1534A), and this processing ends.

  The above is the processing of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Subsequently, the sound volume control will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 243 illustrates an example in which the first-half notice effect and the blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started, and normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output on the fixed channel 2, and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” as shown in FIG. The normal BGM is a loop playback in which the playback is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total playback time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the fluctuation display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first-half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first-half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first-half notice A is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the total reproduction time is set to 15000 ms and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is "No").

  At this point, since no parameters are registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first-half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Further, at the start timing of the first-half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first-half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and The parameters of the sound effect of the first-half notice A for which the reproduction request has been made are registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No", the result of step S1521A is "No", and the result of step S1523A is "Yes". ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, at this time, the normal BGM is being reproduced, and the volume has not been suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is “100”, which is larger than the suppression volume value “50” of the first-half notice A already recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half advance notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, the parameters of the sound effect of the first-half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first-half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request of the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total playback time is "8000" and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the sound effect of the first-half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first-half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

  Further, the total playback time of the blackout effect sound for which a new playback request has been made is “8000” (result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total playback time of the first-half notice A held in the work area. Is "15000" (the result of step S1520A is "No").

  Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first-half notice A held in the work area is “50”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction is requested is “0” (step The result of S1521A is "Yes"), and the sound number, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" of the blackout effect sound for which the new reproduction has been requested are overwritten on the work area (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout announcement effect is shorter than the total playback time (15000 ms) of the effect sound of the first half announcement A (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the notice effect sound (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is normally “50” for the BGM, the sound effect of the first-half notice A is “100”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout notice effect sound effect “0” recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527A).

  Thereafter, during the execution of the blackout effect, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, a new sound reproduction request for a hold winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time is "2000" and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the effect sound of the first-half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the sound effects of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A is suppressed.

  Furthermore, the total winning time of the hold winning prize sound for which a new playback request has been made is “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total playing time of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “8000”. (The result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “0” and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is “50” (the result of step S1521A is (“No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playback time (2000 ms; a2) of the hold winning prize sound is shorter than the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is "Yes"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the hold winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even if the output of the hold winning sound ends (time t34), the output of the blackout effect sound is continued because the parameters of the blackout effect sound are recorded in the work area.

  Thereafter, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), and thus the blackout stored in the work area is stopped. The parameters of the effect sound are deleted (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM in which the reproduction of the sound has been suppressed (the volume has been reduced) and the sound effect of the first-half notice A are returned to the predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is suppressed, but the sound volume returns to the normal volume.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of another sound effect being reproduced is muted, and a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) can be emphasized. Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide a production opportunity to the player. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is being executed and the output of the sound effect of another effect is being suppressed. When the output of the sound effect is continued until after the end of the mute period, the output of the effect sound of the effect during the mute period is suppressed, so that the execution of the specific effect is emphasized. be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, when a channel to which sound data is to be allocated has no vacancy (a situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), a new sound is generated. If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the undesired sound output form in the effect design may cause a drop in the game entertainment.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the condition for allocating new sound data is satisfied when there is no available channel (the number of available channels is 0), the pachinko machine 1 is set in advance. By controlling the sound output of lower importance to be selectively discarded on the basis of the determined priority, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design and to reduce the deterioration of the game entertainment. It was suggested to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to take technical measures in terms of how to make it difficult to appear itself when there is no vacant channel (the number of vacant channels is 0).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to make it possible to allocate more channel resources to the effect sound (effect sound), various types of output that are not output as long as an appropriate game is played. As for the notification sound, a channel saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying the details of the abnormality with only a single channel can be adopted. Hereinafter, an example will be described in which a channel saving type control structure is employed for the output of various notification sounds.

  FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter, referred to as a channel X and a specific channel) of a finite number of channels prepared as various types of notification sounds (payout notification sounds and abnormal notification sounds) except for the effect sound as sound control using a fixed channel method. 3) shows an example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing a process of outputting only a sound definition table. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the priority of playback, left / right initial value, upper / lower initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting are managed. are doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of the other notification sounds and effect sounds is omitted. 209. In addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209, the effect sound is defined by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 213 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter used for determining which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output irrespective of the assignment state of the low priority notification sound to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to channel X has priority, and after the output of the notification sound ends, the notification sound is assigned to channel X and output. Will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L) is output, and if it is set to, for example, “0x80”, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Indicates the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers, which is a combination of these, Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244, for each type of notification sound, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition for terminating the notification (release condition).
In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for any notification sound. This is a process for maintaining the state and refraining from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

  As shown in FIG. 245, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which the magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act using a magnet has been performed). It is to notify that there is. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism is detected" and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic is detected" ), And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is 60 seconds (equivalent to six notification sound repetitions) from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are continued until the release condition of “power on again” is satisfied. Has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the state in which the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility that an illegal act due to a sticking action is being performed is high) is high. Sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that the player is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (the first big winning opening sensor or the second big winning sensor, despite not being in the big hit game state (the state in which the big winning opening is opened)). A notification sound that indicates that the detection by the winning opening sensor has been performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of winning the game ball by forcibly opening the closed large winning opening is performed). 3 (large winning prize abnormal) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed. Regarding the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “buzzer vibration was detected” and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and the vibration sensor 2405 detects the notification time as a notification time. 60 seconds (equivalent to six repetitions of the notification sound), the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated, whereas the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and various lamps Will be continued until the release condition “power-on again” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (large winning prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “a booming big prize abnormality has been detected” and a loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are performed. The display (for example, "large winning prize is detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and the notification time is While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (equivalent to six notification sounds) after the detection by the count sensor 4005 ends, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ends. The execution of the display and the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition of “power-on” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. (It does not need to be the mode). The notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing is a notification sound 1 such as “boo-boo” that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed). In this case, a combination of the alarm sound used in any one of the first to third and a message sound (unique sound) playing a role of notifying the individual identification as to the content of the notification is sequentially output. The warning sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning under tense fraudulent situations, and the message sound consists of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alarm sounds. It is desirable to be done.

  In other words, when reporting a member belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that an injustice has been performed), the hall responds to the injustice rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices) are output, and only those that belong to the first notification group (an illegal action is Since it is possible to recognize that the event has been performed, it is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall to a fraud. In addition, a message sound for notifying the notification type is output following the notification sound of “boo-boo”, and display is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that measures after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side will be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door open) indicates a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (possibly a wrongdoing by opening the door is performed). However, it is informed that the door may be opened due to the abnormal response treatment by the hall side). As the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” )), And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is 30 seconds from the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three notification sound repetitions). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are canceled by the door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 switches the main body frame 4 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the condition of "the detection of the closing of the door frame 3)" is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), a state in which the body frame opening switch 619 detects that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 ( A notification sound 5 (frame open) is provided to notify that the body frame has been opened due to anomalous measures taken by the hall, although there is a possibility that the body frame has been opened, but there is a possibility that the body frame has been opened. However, when the possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has occurred is in the middle and cannot be denied, it is regarded as belonging to the second notification group, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are not notified. The mode, notification time, and release condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (open frame), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 ( For example, “frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as a notification time, a body frame opening switch is provided. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 30 seconds (corresponding to three notification sound repetitions) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is terminated. For lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame close detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame open switch 619). Until the detection of it) "I am satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. Regarding the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. (It does not need to be the mode). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing includes a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of the content of the notification, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (an illegal operation). (A state in which the possibility that the event has been performed is in the middle) is to adopt a combination by sequentially outputting an alarm sound used for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 such as “ping-pong ping-pong” which plays the role of notifying that it is performed. I have.

  That is, in the case of notifying a member belonging to the second notification group (a state in which there is a medium possibility that an illegal act has been performed), it is possible to prevent a person playing an appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side to some extent promptly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, first, as in the case where the notification sound belongs to a third notification group to be described later, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as the notification sound. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game hardly feels disgust. On the other hand, a warning sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound although it is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for the person playing a proper game to feel disgust. In order to make it difficult for the person playing the appropriate game to feel disgust, the output is performed when the lighting mode is different from that of the first notification group but belongs to the third notification group. By performing the notification by lighting the various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality countermeasures on the side of the hall will be speeded up to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) indicates that although the game time is in a non-time saving state, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area of the game area 5a that is to the right of the center role 2500. It is in a state in which the passage has been detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a state in which the game is played in a manner that is disadvantageous for the player and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate mode (left-handed)). It is to inform that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Please return to left-handed” )) Are respectively executed. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” and the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. The processing is terminated in 20 seconds (corresponding to two notification sound repetitions) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state where the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full of game balls (lower plate) A notification sound 7 (ball-pulling guide) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where ball-pulling is to be performed is provided as a game guide for appropriately advancing the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is considered that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when it is in a state to be set, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and release condition are all set to be common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (balling guide), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please pull out the ball of the lower plate” and a loop processing in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 are performed. A display process (for example, "Please remove the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and a looping process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball of the lower plate" as the notification time, and a game board Both of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) from the time when the detection by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed. .

  However, as for the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance), those sensors 2401 and 2401 are terminated 20 seconds after detection by the gate sensor 4003 and the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification processing (notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7. More specifically, for example, after the output of the message sound for 5 seconds, the silence for 5 seconds is output. The data is allocated to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to the data is output (silence output), and a loop process of repeating a 10-second notification sound in which the message sound and the silence data are set is performed. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 output silence data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by checking the silence data portion instead of the message sound portion that is difficult to hear in a busy hall. It is desirable that silent data be prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including a message sound, and that the loop processing be performed while the sound data is allocated to the channel X.

  By the way, silence parts may be present in the notification sounds (between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, but these are very short for providing "between". It is clear that the above is a time-based one, and is fundamentally different from the above-described relatively long time silence part (third notification group) having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping-pong ping-pong" is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. It is possible to make a notification about the game guidance without making the player feel disgust.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 244 and FIG. 245, priority is set to the same for notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, loop reproduction for repeatedly reproducing the target sound is adopted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1 SHOT reproduction for reproducing the target sound once may be adopted. . “Booboo”, which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and “ping-pong, ping-pong”, which is commonly used for the notification sounds that belong to the second notification group, have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound at the time of output is created. The channel may be assigned afterwards.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows a process when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (a), assuming that the magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output. The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that magnetic detection has been performed is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed based on the updated state of the notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, and finds information of the magnetic detection. Is recognized, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification mode is set. (In this case, the alarm sound reproduction is started in a loop of “a jerky magnetism was detected”), and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the alarm time of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c to perform the peripheral control. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism is detected” is repeatedly executed from the timing tα1 for 60 seconds, and a display (for example, “Magneto-magnetism is detected”) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. "), And lighting by various lamps provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (a), at the timing tα2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is in a state of loop reproduction, a step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 when the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the reception command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that the information of the vibration detection is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I will not do it. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority order has already been assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side which has already been assigned is preferentially executed and is continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not processed in a state where the sound generation schedule data is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and if the timer (60 seconds) has not timed up when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has ended, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection The schedule data for generation is set, and a notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and a notification sound in the notification mode (here, a loop of “buzzer vibration detected”). Playback is to be performed.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting the extracted data in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and the lamp are performed. These operations are performed for lighting.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from a position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. I have. In the lamp lighting, although the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection has already been set and has the same priority. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection that has already been set will be reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection have the same data content. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  Then, at the timing tα3 after 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is repeated based on the expiration of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality). The loop process to be executed is terminated. In this case, the time required for reproducing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, so that the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed. At the timing tα3, when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism is detected” has been reproduced six times, the loop processing is terminated at a well-cut timing.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) has not yet expired, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and sets the remaining data. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X by the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “boob vibration Has been detected ”loop).

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, but is set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at the timing tα3, it is possible to reproduce the notification sound of “Booboo vibration detected” from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) expires, “Booboo vibration detected. It is possible to prompt the user to end the loop processing and stop the reproduction at an incomplete timing (for example, timing such as “buzzing”) in the notification sound such as “do”.

  According to such a configuration, when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 246 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here, “bubble”) and the sixth message sound (here, “magnetism detected”) have been reproduced, the seventh alarm sound (here In this case, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if the “buzz-boo” were reproduced. As a result, "Booboo magnetism detected" and "Booboo vibration detected" are connected in strange places, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent information in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with “Booboo magnetism” and the notification sound 2 starts with “Motion detected”, meaningless notification such as “Booboo magnetism detected” Content, which may confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is short, and the notification sound 2 times out at the alarm sound of “boo-boo” and ends, and the message sound ends. Even if the reproduction is not performed, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing and the reproduction is stopped, so that it is possible to recognize that some abnormal detection is occurring at the same time (only the magnetic abnormality is detected). In the case of notification, the notification sound is terminated at a well-cut point.) As a result, when the alarm sound is cut off at an incomplete timing, it will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will show `` magnetism detected '' and `` vibration detected '' respectively. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the state in which the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is as shown in FIG. ), The processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), at timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection by the body frame opening switch 619 in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame release has been detected. Next, information indicating that frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) at which no notification sound is output, and as a result, the frame opening detection is performed. When it is determined that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification is made. In addition to starting the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, “frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame opening) is set. .

  When the notification sound 5 (open frame) is assigned to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the open frame is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral data is copied. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 5 (open frame) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Become like

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting the information and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the condition for canceling the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the frame is Open ") and lighting by various lamps provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the second notification group).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), at time tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed from timing tβ1 and a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in a state of loop playback, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 when the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is output to the outside based on the updated state of the notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is provided to the processing related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the reception command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 5 (open frame) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the door open detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (opening frame) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) of the side already assigned is preferentially executed and is continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) not set yet has been set. ) Is set, and when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) has ended, the timer responds to the door opening detection. The sound generation schedule data is set, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, “door is open, ping-pong ping-pong”) is assigned. The notification sound is reproduced.

  Also, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, and The light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Display and lamp lighting are executed.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the opening of the door appears separately at a position different from a position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. I have. When the lamp is turned on, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the detection of the opening of the door is set, but the schedule data for generating the emission mode corresponding to the detection of the opening of the frame is already set and has the same priority. Thus, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection that has already been set is reflected in each lamp emission, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each type of lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection have the same data content. In any case, no change occurs in the lamp lighting.

  Then, at the timing tβ3, which is 30 seconds after the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is generated based on the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (opening the frame). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  Also, at this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has not been timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection, and By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Is open Ping-pong ping-pong "loop) to play the notification sound.

  That is, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, but the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the door open is not set but set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) expires, “the door is open” It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing and stop the playback at an incomplete timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") in the notification sound such as "ping pong ping pong".

  According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 246 (b)) When the third message sound (here, “frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping-pong ping-pong”) have been reproduced, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if "door is open") was reproduced. Due to this, "Ping Pong Ping Pong" and "Ping Pong Ping Pong Open" are connected in strange places, making it impossible to recognize the content of the notification in a tense situation Generation can be suppressed appropriately.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer according to the detection of the door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at an incomplete position, the message sound is reproduced first. As a result, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 246 (c) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is not performed during the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) even though the time is not shortened. If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center role 2500 in the area 5a (the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state), the main The control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that a right-handed operation has been detected in the non-time saving state as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time-saving state) is provided to a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become like In the process of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. 245, the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of “return to left-hand”) and for notifying the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is set. 20 seconds).

  In this embodiment, with respect to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state, in the present embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a. Only information indicating that the ball has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-time saving state. May be performed, and the processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

  When the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to the various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Become like

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is also executed. The execution of the in-liquid crystal display is a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for counting the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance)) which is a condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance). It is continuously executed until Regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the effect, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board effect display device 1600 is performed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, “Please return to left-handed”) is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ2 when 20 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tγ1 and a notification sound such as “Please return to left” is in a loop playback state, the step S110 or It is assumed that the lower tray full sensor is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information indicating that the lower tray full state has been detected, similarly to the case of the timing tγ1 when the right-handed detection has been performed in the non-time saving state.
Thus, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of the lower plate full) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received by the reception command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is grasped that the information of lower plate full detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) shown in FIG. No assignment is made to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority order has already been assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. By doing so, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the lower tray full at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) in a state where the sound generation schedule data is not assigned to the channel X is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the timer (20) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) that has not been set yet. Seconds), this should be set. If the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower plate is full. Set the sound generation schedule data according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball extraction guide) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Remove the ball from the lower plate" ) Is executed.

  At the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full state, but does not set the schedule data for the screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full state. By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal is executed. I have.

  In the display in the liquid crystal, the display according to the ball-pulling guidance is separately displayed at a position different from the position where the display according to the left-handing guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Has become.

After that, at a timing tγ3 at which 20 seconds have elapsed from the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handing” is given based on the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) having timed out. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended.
In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handing" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is set to 10 seconds. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice.

  Also, at this time, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) has not been timed up, so the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full. Then, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds) to the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound is reproduced in the loop of "Please remove the ball of the lower plate".

  That is, at the timing tγ2, the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball-pulling guidance) is set, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower tank full state is not set, and is set when the timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of “Please remove the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball-pulling guidance) times out , So that the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing of the notification sound such as “Please pull out the lower plate ball” (for example, timing such as “Please pull out the lower plate ball”), and the sound is not played back. Be able to encourage.

  According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 246 (c)) After the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please pull out the lower plate") It is possible to realize the smooth switching of the notification sound as if it had been reproduced. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress occurrence of a situation in which "return to left-handing" and "please remove the ball of the lower plate" are connected at an unusual place, and the content of the notification cannot be recognized. Will be able to do it.

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It has become. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, silence data for 5 seconds is interposed. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the warning sound, so that occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized is preferably performed. Can be avoided.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), if there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the processing of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 at which no notification sound is output, Regarding the processing corresponding to the magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 246 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state at the timing t-2. In step S110, it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 244). ), Even if the door opening detection occurs, the process of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  Normally, the processing of the lower priority order is the same as the processing of the same priority order described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to 246 (c) and the notification sound of the lower priority order. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where only the door is opened, and the possibility that some kind of misconduct has been performed is high, It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group having the medium possibility of fraud”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), at timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection nor the schedule data for sound generation is set. Only the flag corresponding to the door open detection is set. Then, at timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the detection of the door opening and the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the door open are respectively set. At the same time, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X, and the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the “door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp in response to the detection of the opening of the door is started from timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism was detected” is displayed while the loop is being reproduced, and the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening, but “Booboo magnetism was detected. From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound is ended, the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is reproduced in a whole for 30 seconds, and the "door is open ping-pong ping-pong" The loop processing is terminated at a well-cut timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. As described above, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more detailed notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority, thereby providing notification belonging to the second notification group. Although it is the content (in this case, the loop of “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong”), it is expected that the recognition of the situation that the possibility of fraud is high is promoted.

  In addition, after the notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism was detected", the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation The notification to which the notification belongs has been completed so that it can be recognized at an early stage. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of “ping-pong ping-pong” after the message sound, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

  FIG. 247 (b) illustrates an example of processing performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (b), suppose that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 at which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing corresponding to the detection of the door opening (the processing at the time of opening the door), the same processing as the “processing according to the detection of the opening of the frame (processing at the time of opening the frame)” described with reference to FIG. Will be Therefore, at the timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is timed tδ3. Then, the information processing sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is terminated at a good timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing which is the condition for releasing the door opening is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is in the state of the loop playback, and the step is performed at the timing tδ2. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed operation in the non-time saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the detection of the right-handing in the non-time saving state. From this (see FIG. 244), even when right-handedness detection occurs in the non-time-saving state, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, regarding the processing with the lower priority, the notification sound with the lower priority is similar to the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. Is set so that the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is set, while the sound generation corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state Schedule data is not set. When the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) has not timed up at the timing tδ3, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is allocated to the channel X by the minute, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-handed”).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times, and the warning sound such as "Please return to left-handing" is not included at a good timing. Is reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while maintaining the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It has become. Therefore, even with such silence data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Become like

  FIG. 247 (c) illustrates an example of processing performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is assumed that at timing tε1 at which no notification sound is output, the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is performed in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). Regarding the processing corresponding to the detection of the door opening (the processing at the time of opening the door), the same processing as the “processing according to the detection of the opening of the frame (processing at the time of opening the frame)” described with reference to FIG. Is Therefore, at the timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) times out at the timing tε3. Then, the information processing sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is terminated at a good timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing which is the condition for releasing the door opening is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback, the step S112 It is assumed that a magnetic detection is performed by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is performed for both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content is not reflected as the operation of each actuator. It should be noted that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 for each notification. Even when a high-priority notification is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound and the lamp lighting, it has been set up to that time at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection from the set state may be performed.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection. Is maintained in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are respectively set. State. The assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the door opening and the content based on the emission mode generation schedule data. By switching to the contents based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed by any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tε2, the process in the execution state with the lower priority (the process when the door is opened) is performed without any operation. It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between the two different processes (the door opening process and the magnetic abnormality process).

  Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “buzzer magnetism detected” is started, and the timer of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. In accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds), the notification process such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times, and the loop processing is terminated at a sharp timing. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection with a high possibility of the misconduct occurring, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed by any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The output contents are also reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense state is immediately transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing t # 1 at which no notification sound is output, the rightward detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 in the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If so, the same processing as described with reference to FIG. 246 (c) is performed for the processing (left-hand guidance processing) according to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore, at the timing t # 1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is started, and the timing t # 3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) times out. In this case, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is the condition for canceling the left-hand guidance, is up.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), 20 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tζ1 and the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is in the loop playback state. It is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opened) according to the door opening detection. From this (see FIG. 244), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is prioritized, and the processing content of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) reflects the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. It should be noted that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 for each notification. Even when a high-priority notification is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, the right-hand detection in the non-time-saving state set up to that time at timing tζ2 May be performed to remove the sound generation schedule data from the set state.

  In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state Are also kept in the set state, and the schedule generation data for screen generation and the light emission mode according to the detection of the door open as well as the schedule data for the sound generation according to the detection of the door open which has a higher priority than this are maintained. The generation schedule data is set to a set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection. In the process of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the detection of the door open, the output content of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the process with the lower priority order in the execution state (left-handed guidance process) without performing any operation. It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-hand guidance process, door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door opening) is started. In accordance with the expiration of the timer (30 seconds), the notification processing such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is ended at a sharp timing. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing detection which is the condition for releasing the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the door opening detection which has a medium possibility of a wrongdoing occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, and lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person playing the appropriate game does not disgust, "Ping-pong ping-pong" is used to provide notification to the second notification group, and it is expected that the hall side will be notified as soon as possible of the switch to the situation where the possibility of fraud has occurred. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 244 are to be output, the above-described processing according to the priority order is performed. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify the details of the abnormality, game guidance, and the like (a channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having the medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of the game machine.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when an abnormality is detected that is likely to have been committed, but also when there is an abnormality that is unlikely to have been committed. is there. In other words, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed, it is required to output an alarm sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors). Therefore, even if the detection state is continued, the notification sound is not necessarily output. It is important that the notification process can be executed more flexibly according to the status of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is not required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. The notification is to be realized in such a manner that it can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification processing will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 at which no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection are also set. It is set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. Plays for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal in response to the detection of the door opening is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is no longer detected by the door frame opening switch 618.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection ends and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority level for the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, with respect to the lamp light emission corresponding to the door open detection started from the timing tα11, the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the above-mentioned timing tα16 arrives. At the timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are set. At this time, by setting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, as for the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp light emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection has been completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some illegal manipulation opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then waits until the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening ends, and It is assumed that the magnet may be momentarily in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when the unauthorized magnet is secretly placed inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Therefore, there is a concern that simply performing the notification sound processing in accordance with the magnetic detection is not sufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, even if any countermeasure is taken, the magnetic detection cannot be used as a trigger.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection ends, the fact that the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continued is used. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data in response to the detection of the door open" which is in the state where the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to the channel X. The special processing to be re-assigned to is performed. In this case as well, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening which has already been completed is reproduced in a form linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. It is hoped that it will bring everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already reassured that if the magnetic notification is over, the notification sound reproduction has been completely terminated, and it is finally possible to make the situation in which the wrongdoing is inconspicuous. By playing the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening that should have been completed, an unexpected notification situation will be created, so it is expected that any further misconduct will have a recognition that the risk is too great Become like

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. A process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound and the other game sounds during the fluctuation of the assigned symbols (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be zero volume. During the period when the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels while the symbol is changing is not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is being performed (the period during which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). State) or the condition that the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, in the period between the timings tα11 to tα13 and the period between the timings tα14 to tα16, the symbol variation is performed based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. The process of suppressing the volume of the middle production sound and the other game sounds (the process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. During the period from timing tα13 to tα14, the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16), both the notification processes by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification process by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. During the period, a process of lowering to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by checking the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side is further speeded up.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα16 at which the door open detection ends, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already been terminated is reproduced in a manner that is linked to the “reproduction of notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, it is possible that an extremely malicious act has been performed. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 when the door open detection ends, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds may not be suppressed, and may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, as is apparent from the processing corresponding to the door opening detection, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is performed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The start period is the same as the period in which the operation is performed and the period in which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door, but the end periods thereof are all different. In this way, by operating them so as to have different roles in the notification sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp emission, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it is possible to appropriately notify the details of the abnormality, the game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example illustrated in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door open detection ends, at timing tα23, the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 248, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious action has been performed, so that the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening already in the end state is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the suppression mode of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds is not changed. Incidentally, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, even if frame opening detection occurs instead of right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since there is a low possibility that such an action has been performed, when the corresponding notification sound ends, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, the point that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door open detection ends is shown in FIG. 248. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is completed at timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. I have.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door open detection that has already been terminated is “the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. They are never played in a connected fashion. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 250, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 248, after a person who intends to perform any unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 to make it open, the door open detection is performed. Waiting for the completion of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is momentarily placed in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when the unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled. It is likely that the situation has entered. However, in view of the fact that the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection has occurred in the non-illegal state after the timing tα34, it is possible to respond to the magnetic detection even in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that only the continuous reproduction of the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is vacated when further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep the state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, FIG. 248 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the above example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251, after the notification sound reproduction according to the detection of the door open is completed, the unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled. Sometimes, the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and despite the fact that the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to this, the magnet is kept within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without being depressed by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is about to be repositioned, and more malicious misconduct may have occurred. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, while the notification sound 1 is output. The processing for resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from the time when the first magnetic detection is performed to the time 60 seconds from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection is performed as a base point elapses. Can be continuously reproduced. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. Finally, a beep sound such as “Booboo magnetism detected” does not end the loop processing at a sharp timing. For example, the loop processing ends at an incomplete timing such as “Booboo magnetism detection”. As a result, it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be caused in the hall and everyone will be noticed.

  Further, at a timing tα44 after a lapse of 60 seconds from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The "sound generation schedule data according to the detection" is set again, and a special process of re-assigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening which has already been terminated is reproduced in a form linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound in response to the magnetic detection”, and in addition to the intermediate sound such as “detecting the bubbling magnetism”. At an odd timing, the loop processing is reproduced in such a manner as to be linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been completed is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in a form of being stopped halfway, and in the hall. It is expected that this will create even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, FIG. 248 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the above example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 at a timing tα54 within a period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 252 as well, when the notification sound reproduction according to the detection of the door opening is completed, the unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled. In spite of the fact that the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response thereto, the pachinko machine 1 is largely shaken without flinching in such a situation. It is possible that more malicious fraud has been committed.
Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form linked to “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door open detection which has been already ended is reproduced in a form further linked to “the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Second), and at a timing tα55 at which reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection ends, schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is set, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a beep sound such as "Boo-boo oscillation detected" is not terminated at a well-cut timing, and for example, the loop process is terminated at an incomplete timing such as "Boo-boo oscillation detection". Since the processing is completed, it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be caused in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered.

  Further, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The "schedule data" is set again, and special processing for re-assigning the notification sound to channel X is performed. In this case as well, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening which has already been completed is further connected to the "reproduction of the notification sound according to the vibration detection" which is linked to the "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection". In addition to the playback of the notification sound, the playback is performed in such a way as to be linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the vibration” at which the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as “detect the vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been completed is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the vibration detection is reproduced in a state of being stopped halfway, and in the hall. It is expected that this will create even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the end of the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame opening detection instead of the door opening detection. I assume.

  In the example shown in FIG. 253 as well, it can be said that a situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame opening detection is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the main body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet to be useful. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the magnet is used on the hole side to eliminate clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 253 as well, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection which has been already ended is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By performing the reproduction in a manner linked to the “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), a great sense of discomfort is generated in the hall, and it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at timing tα66 at which the main frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is terminated, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also the magnetic detection is performed. Special processing for terminating each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, and lamp) is also performed.

  According to such a configuration, while performing a function against fraudulent acts appropriately, when the erroneous detection on the hole side is made, the main body frame 4 is merely closed and the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection ( Since the notification sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp) can all be terminated, it is expected that the response of the hole side to the erroneous detection is promptly performed and the atmosphere in the hole is appropriately maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 253, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the magnetic detection. May be performed.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a player-side volume adjustment function.

For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 has been operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. When it is determined that the speaker volume has been set, a process of reducing the set value (player setting value) by the player is performed on the speaker volume, and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the player volume setting is determined by the player. The value (player setting value) is increased. In addition, when the player setting value is reduced and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is output at the reduced volume value. On the other hand, when the set value of the player is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. In addition, it is possible to grasp the volume to which the volume adjustment has been completed and the volume has been changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when the volume value is increased.
Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20”, which is the same as the button pressing sound) referred to when the vacant channel runs out, and the output sound volume of the effect sound ( (Audible sound volume) can be more reliably transmitted.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed in a period before the game is started because the symbol change according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet (the demo display or the like). (Permissible period), as well as during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the big hit determination is being executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared At times and the like, the setting value of the sound volume can be changed flexibly to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where the channel assignment of various effect sounds is made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol change, the pachinko machine 1 When it is detected that 1 has entered a specific state such as a magnetic anomaly or a door open, a process is performed in which a specific notification sound according to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. Also, at this time, it is possible to execute an effect progress lower notification process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value without canceling the channel allocation itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound ends, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the effect sound in accordance with the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described effect progress notification process, the channel assignment of various effect sounds in accordance with the progress of the display effect is not stopped itself. More channels are used than in the non-broadcast state), and there are no free channels to which sound data has not been allocated at the stage before the end of the specific broadcast sound channel allocation (broadcast state). Risk tends to be higher. If there are no available channels to which no sound data is allocated at a stage before the channel allocation (broadcast state) of the specific notification sound ends, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (reporting state) of a specific notification sound is completed, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to a channel is reproduced. Is not possible, and there is a concern that the entertainment interests of the game will decline.

  Regarding the concerns about the available channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is used for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is used for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Or, or whether to adopt the automatic channel method, since it should be determined from the design point of view of games and effects, even if any channel method is adopted as the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program in order to secure the cost reduction and the improvement in reliability of the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed during the effect progress notification process, the value is reduced to the specific value. The output volume of the produced sound is not made variable, and is maintained. In other words, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("pi!" Or "pipi!") Even if the player performs an operation while the performance progress lower notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel is given a margin by that amount to promote the reduction of the risk of running out of empty channels.

  However, in spite of the pachinko machine 1 that enables a flexible setting change of the volume value when a more important production appears, the output volume is set while the production progress lower notification process is being executed. If the change is not allowed, if the production progress lower notification process is performed due to the erroneous detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.), the sound volume appropriate value according to the content of the production progress is appropriately adjusted. It is inevitable that the gaming entertainment will be reduced due to the inability to change the settings. In addition, if the production progresses during the production progress notification process, as a result of which a large deviation occurs between the proper volume value and the actual set value according to the production content, the output volume ( After the setting change of the volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. There is a concern that even though the production progress notification process has finally been completed, there is not enough available channels to output the production sound properly, which may lead to a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being performed, the pachinko machine 1 decreases to the specific value. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the produced sound is not changed but is maintained, while the change value of the set value (player set value) by the player pertaining to the sound volume is accepted, and When the effect progress lower notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the process is collectively changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations performed so far are reflected.

  According to such a configuration, if the change of the setting value (player setting value) by the player is received in accordance with the progress of the effect while the effect progress notification process is being performed, a new operation is performed. Without performing the process, when the effect progress notification process ends, the output volume (audible sound volume) can be changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected. As described above, the accepting of the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is allowed even during the period in which the effect progress notification processing is being executed, so that the effect progress notification processing ends. It is expected that the game entertainment will not be reduced until the game is completed. Further, immediately after the completion of the effect progress notification process, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages, and a shortage occurs in an empty channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  According to the above configuration, when performing the batch change of the output sound volume to the player setting value when the production progress notification process is completed, the game during the production progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value has been changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. The sound may be output in a special mode sound (for example, “B!”) Different from the above.

  Further, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the effect progress notification processing is completed, the number of times the player set value is changed or the number of changes by the player during the period in which the effect progress notification processing has been executed. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively with the end of the production progress notification process. . According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lower notification processing due to the erroneous detection or the notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) has been finally ended, appropriate production due to lack of available channels. Can be suitably suppressed from occurring such that the user cannot enjoy the game.

  Hereinafter, an example of a process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the change of the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is described.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram for describing the details of the effect progress notification processing according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the processing from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the output volume (audible sound volume) being collectively changed, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. Will be described briefly. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 254, in this description example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the effect sound. For example, in the first sound volume suppression mode, in the change of the set value (player set value) by the player regarding the sound volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among them, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second sound volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first sound volume suppression mode. In this example, particularly, in this example, the processing relating to the output itself is performed, but the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as an example.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, large winning abnormalities) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud are generated. When the notification process relating to any of them is executed, a process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode which is the higher suppression level. In addition, when the notification process regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and winning award abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set in the second volume suppression mode, which is on the higher suppression level. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

  Note that, in this description example, when the notification process relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and winning award abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) The period during which the process of suppressing the sound volume is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, winning award abnormality) is reproduced according to the abnormality detection to when it ends. Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process is performed on any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group having the medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the suppression degree is set. In the first sound volume suppression mode, which is a low sound volume, a process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is performed. However, when the notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) in the first sound volume suppression mode on the lower side of the suppression degree is ended.

  On the other hand, when the notification process is performed on any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball-pulling guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance, out of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the staging effect is obtained. The processing for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not executed at all.

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. Does not necessarily need to be different, and the output volume of the effect sound is controlled in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. (Audible sound volume) may be suppressed. However, the condition for terminating the process to be suppressed is different when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed more strictly than when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important that you do this.

  FIG. 255 shows the contents of the processing related to the volume adjustment associated with the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the processing related to the notification sound has not been executed. FIG.

  In this example, the player setting value is made variable by “1” within the range of “1” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The sound volume of the effect sound is set to be lower as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set by the player in a state in which the above-described suppression modes (the first volume suppression mode and the second volume suppression mode) are not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value of 20 times the value. Therefore, in this example, the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), the player setting value of the volume of the effect sound is “3” of “1” to “5”, and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60”, which is 20 times the output sound volume. Further, if the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination has not been performed and the player is in a state of waiting for a start winning, in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the effect selection left button 331 is displayed. A displayed image 331a and a display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guide display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, a first volume value display OH1 that allows the current player setting value to be recognized as any one of “1” to “5” is also executed. You. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period, such as a super-reach effect, which is a reach effect performed with the background image changed. May be hidden and at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when an operation is performed by the player. Further, as for the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 255 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to “1” each time the operation is performed. Accordingly, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" in accordance with this. Further, each time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which one of the current set values is within the range of the player set values “1” to “5”. Is displayed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH (see FIG. 255 (C)), which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume of the effect sound (the audible sound volume) is reduced, and The user setting value remains at “1” (the output sound volume of the production sound (the audible sound volume) remains at “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or the volume is set to “ It is desirable that audible output be prevented by setting to "0". The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the winning start is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

  In this regard, in the sound volume adjustment processing according to the present embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. The reception by the player is allowed even during the execution period. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

  That is, FIG. 255 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 255 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60” which is 20 times as large as those. With the setting changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel at the changed volume of “80” and played, and the player's setting is changed in the second operation. Under the condition that the value has been changed from “4” to “5” and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) has been changed from “80” to “100” which is 20 times those, Volume adjustment completed at "100", the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Also, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the player setting value is changed from “1” to “5” which is the range of the player setting value. Thus, the second volume value display OH2, which indicates the current set value by the gauge display, is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This clarifies which of the current set values is the range of the player set values “1” to “5” so that even in a tense situation where a more important effect has appeared. The purpose of the present invention is to prevent an operation error such as an operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical range of “1” to “5” is constantly displayed as a block, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to a change in the player setting value. By performing the display, the current player setting value is indicated.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (D), the second volume value display OH2 starts from the time when an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 255 (C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the display is turned off, and thereafter, the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”) Is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Thereby, it is more preferably promoted that an operation error such as an operation of the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed is not generated even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 256 shows that the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door open detection is generated during the symbol change execution period and the processing related to the notification sound is executed in response thereto. It is a figure explaining the contents about the processing regarding volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 256 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (A). In such a situation, when a winning start is generated and a big hit is determined, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), during the symbol variation execution period, the detection of the door opening belonging to the second notification group occurs, and the processing relating to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is being opened "), and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed.

  As described above, during the symbol fluctuation period, when the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door open) is executed according to the detection, the first sound volume suppression mode is set. An effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the effect is produced although the player setting value is maintained at “3” which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (A). The output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player setting value). The effect contents will be developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such an effect progress notification process is being performed, the first specification is performed. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound lowered to the value (here, “10”) is not varied but is maintained, while the set value by the player regarding the sound volume (player set value) The change acceptance of itself is permitted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress notification processing (processing for lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all the operations performed up to that point. Is collectively changed as described above.

  That is, FIG. 256 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 256 (B). Although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains at the original value (game value). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the predetermined value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the operation of the effect selection right button 332 is performed twice by the player, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained until the effect progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect content is developed while maintaining the volume of the first specific value.

  Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specification. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and even in the second operation, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5”. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5” is: This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5”, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Then, after returning to the state in which the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again, the door frame 3 is closed and the processing relating to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the production progress lower notification processing (output volume to a specific value) When the process is completed, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all operations up to that point, as shown in FIG. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” according to the first operation and “5” according to the second operation during the performance progress notification processing. Because of the change, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) should be “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation Should be changed stepwise to "100" according to the above, but it is changed collectively from the first specific value (here, "10") to "100" in which all operations up to that point are reflected.

  As described above, the accepting of the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is allowed even during the period in which the effect progress notification processing is being executed, so that the effect progress notification processing ends. It is expected that the game entertainment will not be reduced until the game is completed. In addition, immediately after the completion of the performance progress notification process, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound may cause shortage or lack of available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound. Such a situation can be suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively (from “10” to “100”) with the end of the effect progress notification process, a change occurs in the output volume. Nevertheless, the channel adjustment of the volume adjustment completed sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lower notification processing due to the erroneous detection or the notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) has been finally ended, appropriate production due to lack of available channels. Can be suitably suppressed from occurring such that the user cannot enjoy the game.

  On the other hand, FIG. 257 shows that, when the state detection that occurred in FIG. 256 is not a door opening but a magnetic abnormality, the processing related to the notification sound is executed, and the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the content of processing related to volume adjustment in response to an operation of a right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 257 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (A). In such a situation, when a winning start is generated and a jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the result of the jackpot determination and the fluctuation are similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), during the symbol variation execution period, the detection of magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed according to the detection. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism detected" and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetism detection") And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Also, as described above, during the symbol fluctuation period, when the detection of the magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the effect is produced even though the player setting value is maintained at “3” which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (A). The output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player setting value). The effect content is developed under the volume value (here, mute).

  In this regard, also in the case where the production progress lower notification process corresponding to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”) )), The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound (silence here)) is not varied but is maintained, while the set value by the player regarding the volume (the player set value) is itself. Is accepted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing for lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all operations up to that point. The fact that they are changed collectively is as described above.

  That is, FIG. 257 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 257 (B). Although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains at the original value (game value). It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the predetermined value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the operation of the effect selection right button 332 is performed twice by the player, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained until the effect progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect content is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the value (here, “0”) is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5” is: This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5”, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  By the way, in this example, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (C), the magnetic detection itself has not been detected yet. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the occurrence of the above is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection is performed under the condition that the volume adjustment guide display OAH is returned to the state where the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Upon completion of the process, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) reflects all operations up to that point, as shown in FIG. 257 (D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” according to the first operation and “5” according to the second operation during the performance progress notification processing. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here, “0”). Should be changed stepwise to "100" according to the above, but it will be changed collectively from the second specific value (here, "0") to "100" which reflects all the operations up to that point.

  Note that, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the opening of the door is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. The display (here, “magnetic detection”) in the display area 1600 and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. I have. In other words, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the effect sound is out of the suppression target and is changed according to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the production sound remains the target for suppression if the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp continue. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being performed. Thus, it is expected that a decrease in the entertainment interest until the end of the production progress notification process is ended is suppressed. In addition, immediately after the completion of the performance progress notification process, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound may cause shortage or lack of available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound. Such a situation can be suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively ("0" → "100") in response to the termination of the production progress lower notification process associated with the magnetic abnormality, and the output is also performed. The channel allocation of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed in spite of the change in volume. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which an appropriate effect cannot be enjoyed due to a shortage of available channels even though the effect progress notification process is finally terminated due to the notification due to an erroneous detection. Can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, the notification sound corresponding to the opening of the door such as “Ping-pong ping-pong is open” and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” are shown in FIG. Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always reproduced at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) is executed, the effect progress lower notification processing is not executed. Both the value and the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) can be appropriately changed. However, as shown in FIG. 244, these notification sounds 6 and 7 are also set to "1" (0x1FF) in the third byte of the volume initial value, so that regardless of the player setting value, Playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value.

  Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) belonging to the third notification group do not set “1” in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the target of volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, regarding the processes described in FIGS. 256 and 257, the state detection is performed not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also in the state before the symbol variation is started, and over the timing of the start and the end of the symbol variation. May be executed in the same manner even when the notification process according to the above is executed.

  In each of the processes described with reference to FIG. 256 and FIG. 257, after the end of the production progress notification process is completed, similarly to before the start of the production progress notification process, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  Further, the processing described in FIG. 256 and the processing described in FIG. 257 are configured such that the effect of suppressing the effect sound during the period in which the effect of the effect of lowering the effect of the effect is being performed is made different. The output sound volume of the production sound (audible sound) may be changed in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the volume of the sound may be performed.

  In the effect progress notification process, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of various game sounds is suppressed. Of these game sounds, a game ball is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as a sound (winning sound) played in response to winning, may be played back at the initial value set volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, the hall can easily grasp whether or not the game is continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) reproduced in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the performance progress notification processing is being executed. It is desirable to reproduce the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not performed.

  As described above, in FIG. 244 to FIG. 257, a situation where there is no available channel is achieved by adopting a channel saving type control structure that allows appropriate notification of abnormality content and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation in which the number of available channels is 0) It has been proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make this difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is employed, there is a situation where there is no vacancy (a situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) in the channel to which the effect sound (effect sound) is allocated, and the effect design is performed. Concerns about the appearance of the above-described unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, various technical techniques are also applied to the channel assignment of the effect sound at a stage prior to the occurrence of a situation where there is no available channel (a situation where the number of available channels is 0). We are trying to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical ideas as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving type control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. In each example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. When the automatic channel method is adopted, the control based on the above-described priority may not necessarily be adopted, and when all the channels are in use, a process of discarding a new sound may be performed. Good. Further, each example described below can be implemented in an appropriate combination.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is to be allocated. In a situation where the number of available channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to a special result being obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that a lack of game output due to the inability to output the special sound may occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an action of praying while holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” is performed. Detection is possible by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action is performed, for example, a predetermined sound that does not show any degree of expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of allocating a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed, as a result of accepting the game ball in the specific winning opening, for example, even if a special production condition such as a jackpot confirmation production or a look-ahead production is established, even if special production conditions are established. At this point, no special sound according to the effect is assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the end of the channel reservation processing, a special sound is assigned to the channel and an effect of reproducing the channel can be executed (later notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which the special sound can be assigned is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any degree of expectation due to the specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to lack of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to the winning.

  For the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot determination sound executed only when a jackpot is won in the jackpot determination according to the prize, a highly expected effect mode in the effect determination based on the jackpot determination according to the prize (for example, , A high-expected announcement sound that is executed when a reach effect is performed, etc.), or a prefetch when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the prefetch judgment according to the winning. It is possible to exemplify a pre-reading notification sound executed as an effect, but the point is that when a special judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the predetermined judgment means according to the winning, it is assigned to the channel and output Anything can be used.

  FIG. 258 shows that, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a special sound (for example, quine) in accordance with a so-called pre-reading effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a state in which a determination to output a special sound (a determination to perform a prefetch effect) has not yet been made). 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process previously reserved from time to time.

  First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation processing, first, a general prefetch effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a prize occurs in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. 134, the first and second starting opening winning processing (steps S5231 to S5234) are performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processing (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a starting opening (first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, processing for increasing the number of reserves on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc., is performed as described above.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second starting opening winning processing (FIG. 134: Steps S5231 to S5234), a prefetching processing for executing a prefetching effect on the winning opening side is also performed (see FIG. 134). 135: Step S5245, FIG. 136: Step S5255).

  Here, the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is, as described above, an effect that suggests the determination result of the first special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) in advance before starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. is there. In the first special figure look-ahead processing, information necessary for the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect, the contents of the effect, and the like (information on a hit for a look-ahead determination, a pattern type for a look-ahead determination, etc.). Information, information on a variable pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.), and store it in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information of a stage before it is finally determined, such as a SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group, and a small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side also suggests the judgment result of the second special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) in advance before starting the variation display of the second special symbol, as described above. It is a production to do. In the second special figure pre-reading process, information (hit information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is performed and the effect content on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated. The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information of a stage before it is finally determined, such as a SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group, and a small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the determination process as to whether or not a big hit has been won or the symbol fluctuation is not exhausted, and when those are put on hold, the information (from the prefetch command) is obtained. Based on the information on the prefetching effect on the first special figure side and the information on the prefetching effect on the second special figure side), it is expected that the jackpot determination put on hold will obtain a special result. A look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and when there is such a situation, performs control relating to a hold display or a pre-reading effect according to the start winning. After that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-described variation start process, variation pattern setting process, variation process, big hit game process, and small hit game shown in FIG. Perform one of the operations. In the control related to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning is provided in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue having a relatively low expectation and red having a relatively high expectation). A determination is made as to whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect that suggests a degree of look-ahead expectation depending on whether or not to be displayed, and in accordance with the result of the determination (for example, when it is determined that a look-ahead effect is not performed In the normal display mode). As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, a look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display indicating a jackpot determination) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, quine) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. Many. However, such a special sound (pre-reading effect) is reproduced at the timing of winning the game ball which occurs irregularly, so that the winning of the game ball occurs at the timing when there is no free space in the channel, and the pre-reading judgment is made. If the player wins, the player cannot recognize that the special sound is not reproduced even though the player has won the pre-reading judgment, and the hold display appears in a highly expected mode (blue or red). It is feared that the entertainment interests of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, prior to causing the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 to win a game ball and output a special sound (prefetching effect), the special sound is output. The channels that can be assigned are changed from the state in which the special sound has not been output (more precisely, the state in which the determination to output the special sound (the determination to perform the prefetching effect) has not yet been made). Can be executed.

  For example, at timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of the jackpot determinations (the number of holds) in the hold state is now 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Assuming that the decorative design is displayed in a state where the decorative symbols are fluctuated, the player usually wins a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Game (handle operation) to be performed. As a result, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, up to four jackpot determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winning, and the jackpot determinations are made. Each time the state is put on hold, processing related to hold display and pre-reading effect according to the winning is performed.

Here, as the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation processing is not executed, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (in the order of winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) Assuming that a second prize (third hold), a fourth prize (fourth hold), and a fourth prize (fourth hold), processing relating to the prefetch effect is performed at each timing when such a hold occurs.
Then, when a prefetching effect is performed by winning the prefetching determination, a special sound (for example, quine) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing at which a win is made and the prefetching determination is performed), and a specific mode is performed. Will be displayed.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first hold) in the order of winning the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, for example. Assuming that a second prize (third hold), a fourth prize (fourth hold), and a fourth prize (fourth hold), processing relating to a prefetch effect is performed at each timing when such a hold occurs. However, when a prefetching effect is performed by winning the prefetching determination, a special sound (for example, quine) is not output at the timing when the corresponding suspension occurs (winning timing), but is maintained in an execution waiting state. Then, a special sound (for example, quine) is output after waiting for a channel targeted for the channel reservation processing to become empty. It should be noted that the hold display having a specific mode may appear at a timing at which a special sound (for example, quine) is output, or may appear at a timing at which a hold that wins the prefetch determination occurs. Good. However, in the case where a hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when a hold that has been won in the pre-read determination is made, a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is being executed and a case where the channel reservation process is not being executed In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a hand is placed in front of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (not shown) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) is provided. Detects this as an object, and starts the channel reservation processing with this as an opportunity.

  For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player is holding his hand over the front of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In the prayer production mode, first, a prayer mode background display in which “Torii of a shrine” is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 is performed, and “countdown of the countdown” is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). "Audio" is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced. Note that the countdown sound starts from, for example, “30” and ends when it counts down every second and becomes “0”. In addition, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed, in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the effect in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

  However, the “shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and the “countdown voice” in a predetermined channel are displayed by the player holding his hand over the front of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. This can only be used as an opportunity (triggered by detection by the sensor) as an opportunity, and it is not related to the production contents (production suggesting the degree of expectation) that are evolving within the running pattern change, It does not depend on the result of the jackpot determination at all. Therefore, the display and sound to be generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to other contents as appropriate, but by performing such processing, a predetermined time (30 seconds) can be obtained. The channel can be maintained in a use state (here, a use state of “countdown sound” that does not show any degree of expectation). Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, This makes it possible to avoid occurrence of a situation in which another sound that is not known when it will end is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed has elapsed, the player plays the game so that the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 receives a game ball. (Handle operation). As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, a first prize (first reservation), a second prize (second reservation), a third prize (third reservation), and a fourth prize (fourth reservation) are generated. Then, the processing related to the prefetching effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown sound” is being reproduced (while the channel reservation processing is being executed), the result of the determination according to the winning, that is, the determination result indicating that the prefetching effect is to be performed (prefetching winning) is performed. Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, quine) is not assigned to a channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (e.g., quine) thus placed in an execution waiting state is to be output as a post notification sound that is output later than at the time of winning at a timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated between the time when the player holds the hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation processing) on his / her own initiative and ends this (timing tY11 to tY12). If no prize is generated, or if a special prize is generated but no special determination result is obtained (the prefetching effect is not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown voice” ends, the special prize has arrived. No sound is played.

  According to such a configuration, during the period from when the player holds the hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation processing) by his / her own intention until the reproduction is completed (timing tY11 to tY12). When a prize is generated and a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained in the determination according to the prize, a special sound (quein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown voice” is output. This will be executed as a post-notification effect in which the output is performed with the end of the timing and a vacancy occurs in the channel. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to lack of an available channel even though a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained. Further, even if a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (quein) corresponding to the special determination result (a quine) is generated at one timing when at least one channel becomes empty. Since the reproduction is performed aiming at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (quein) is generated at the timing tY12, and a special determination result (pre-reading) can be obtained within a relatively long time between the timings tY11 to tY12. (Winning) can be easily recognized.

  When a special sound (quein) is to be output as such a post-announcement sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at the timing tY12 and reproduced. However, if the special sound (quein) is selectively allocated to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown voice” has been allocated, the channel reservation processing and the subsequent announcement effect corresponding to the channel can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it is useful in that it can be realized, and it is possible to expand the range of production in a limited number of channels.

  Further, in this embodiment, with respect to the prayer mode background display in which “Torii of a shrine” is displayed as a background image, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “voice of countdown” ends, and the reproduction of a special sound (Kuin) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request the execution of such channel reservation processing tend to hold their hands so that the channel reservation processing is performed again each time the number of reservations decreases. Considering that it seems that there is a benefit when holding your hand when "Shrine Torii" is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of later notice) from Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation processing is satisfied (for example, a release operation using a button). However, in practice, the player holds his / her hand even when "Shrine Torii" is not displayed as a background image, even when "Shrine Torii" is displayed as a background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state by the predetermined sound (countdown sound) for a predetermined time is only performed, so that the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” ends. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (quein) as the later notification sound is ended.

  Further, when the player holds his hand again during the period from the timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the reproduction time of the “countdown voice” is until a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the detection again. May be extended to output a special sound in accordance with the pre-read winning when the timing comes.

  In addition, such a prayer production mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol change is in a changing state but also when the symbol change is not in a changing state. You may make it. In addition, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact-type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action to be detected by the non-contact-type sensor.

  However, when the special sound (Cuin) is output as such a subsequent announcement sound, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize ( Since it is difficult to determine which of the second prize, the third prize (third prize), and the fourth prize (fourth prize) resulted in a special determination result (prefetched prize), the prefetch prize is obtained. There is a concern that the entertainment of the game may be reduced due to the reservation being exhausted without recognizing that the reservation has been made. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Cuin”) but a first prize (first hold), a second prize (second hold), and a third prize (first It is also conceivable to make it different depending on which of the three winnings and the fourth winning (the fourth holding) wins the prefetching. However, in this case, the content changed from the sound played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process has not been executed (here, “Quine”), so that it is possible to grasp the fact that the look-ahead has been won. It is feared that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a special determination result is obtained at any of the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetching win) is obtained, a process of varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “Quin”) started from timing tY12 is performed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (pre-read winning) is obtained in the first prize (first hold), which wins at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, “Quine”) is reproduced for three seconds from the timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, a case where a special determination result (pre-read winning) is obtained in the second prize (second hold) which has been won at a relatively early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, it is assumed that the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. In this case, the time required to reproduce “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, and when a special sound (here, “Cuin”) is reproduced for 6 seconds, “Cuin” is reproduced twice. Then, a sound in a form such as "quen quinn" is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetched win) is obtained in the third prize (third hold) that has been won at a relatively late timing between timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. In this case, since the time required to reproduce “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here, “Cuin”) is reproduced for 9 seconds, “Cuin” becomes 3 seconds. The sound is reproduced in batches and a sound in the form of “quen quinn quinn” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained in the fourth prize (fourth hold) which is won at an extremely late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. In this case, since the time required to reproduce “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here, “Cuin”) is reproduced for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 times. The sound is reproduced in batches and a sound in a form such as "Kuin Kyuin Kyuin" is output.

  According to such a configuration, when the special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that the special determination result (prefetched winning) has been obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12, and also the timing It is possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetched winning) has been obtained in a winning. In this example, it is suggested that as the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is shorter, a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained in a winning that occurs at an earlier timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is, the longer the time between the timings tY11 and tY12 indicates that a special judgment result (prefetched winning) has been obtained in a prize that occurred at a later timing. .

  Note that, in this example, it may be assumed that only the first prize is generated during the timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained in accordance with the prize. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, in place of this, in consideration of the fact that the number of holds is limited to a maximum of four, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, a special sound "Quine" 1 is obtained regardless of the prize timing. Set the playback time for the second time, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, the special sound is set to the reproduction time for two times of “Quine” regardless of the prize timing, and the special judgment is made in the third prize If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the reproduction time for three times of “Quine” regardless of the winning timing, and if the special judgment result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is performed regardless of the winning timing May be set to the reproduction time for four times of “Cuin”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a prefetching win is obtained, “Kein” is reproduced as a special sound. However, the first judgment result (for example, a relatively The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed depending on which of a low prefetching win and a second determination result (for example, a prefetching with a relatively high expectation) is obtained. For example, when a first determination result (for example, a prefetching win with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetching determination when a prize is won, “Quine” is reproduced as a special sound, whereas If the second determination result (pre-reading winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, any of the timings tY11 to tY12 occurs. In addition to the prediction as to whether a prefetching win was obtained in the prize, the first judgment result (prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) and the second judgment result (prefetching winning with a relatively high expectation) are determined as prefetching wins. It is also possible to make a prediction as to which was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “Kuin” or “Dokan” as a special sound according to the determination result even in the prefetching effect when the channel reservation processing is not executed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first determination result (the prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) in the prefetching determination in the first prize (first hold) winning at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and a second determination result (prefetching winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the prefetching determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) winning at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced in the “Kuin” mode for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the “Dokan” mode for 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Kuin” mode is 3 seconds, the first prize (the first prize won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12) ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetching winning with relatively low expectation) is obtained by the prefetching determination in the (first hold). Also, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the pre-reading was won in the pre-reading determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) which was won at an extremely late timing. It can be grasped. Further, in response to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetching determination in the first winning (first hold) winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound has been reproduced in the mode of “Dokan” after the end of the one “Quin” that has been played back, the second look-ahead determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) It is possible to predict that a determination result (prefetched winning with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when a first determination result (prefetched winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the prefetching determination according to the winning in the first starting port 2002, “Queen” is reproduced as a special sound. In the case where a second determination result (prefetching winning on the second special figure side) is obtained in the prefetching determination according to the winning in the second starting port 2004, “Dokan” may be reproduced as a special sound. . In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning in the second starting opening 2004. It is desirable to reproduce "Cuin" or "Dokan" as a special sound depending on whether there is any.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quine” mode is 3 seconds, the timing tY11 to tY12 The first prize (first hold), which is awarded at an extremely early timing in the interval, is a prize to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first determination result (the first special figure side) in the prefetch determination corresponding thereto. It is possible to predict that a prefetching win has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading is won even in the pre-reading determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) which is won at an extremely late timing. It can be grasped. Further, in response to the fact that the first determination result (the prefetching win on the first special figure side) is obtained in the prefetching determination in the first winning (first hold) winning at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. The fourth prize (fourth hold) is made on the side of the second starting port 2004 by confirming that the special sound is being reproduced in the form of “Dokan” after the end of the one “Quin” that has been reproduced. , And it is possible to predict that a second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special figure side) has been obtained by the pre-reading determination corresponding thereto.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the specific winning opening while executing the channel reservation processing, In this case, the case where the prefetching win in the prefetching effect is obtained is exemplified. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262 is essentially a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and a special process is performed in the determination process. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that has the technical features of itself that can avoid a case where a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained and a shortage of channels prevents output from being caused. Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetching winning in the prefetching effect.

[Channel Restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is to be allocated. In a situation where the number of available channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to a special result being obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that a lack of game output due to the inability to output the special sound may occur.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment monitors the number of available channels during the progress of the game, and when the number of available channels is less than a predetermined number, at least some of the various game sounds are played. The rate at which execution of processing related to output is restricted is increased (channel use restriction). That is, in this case, for at least a part of the game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is restricted from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes zero, and the execution is performed as the number of empty channels approaches zero. Since the rate of restriction becomes higher, it is possible to make it difficult to reduce the number of available channels to zero.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, each time a symbol change corresponding to the jackpot determination in the suspended state is exhausted (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the consumed symbol variation is reduced. The channel availability during the execution period is determined. As a result, when there is room in the channel availability, the rate at which channel use is restricted (the channel restriction level) is reduced until at least the symbol fluctuation, which is the determination target, is terminated, and the channel availability is reduced. When there is no room for the situation, the ratio (channel limit level) at which the use of the channel is restricted is increased until at least the symbol variation determined as the determination target is terminated, and the channel limitation using such symbol variation as one unit is set. By executing, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of empty channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel restriction level, and the higher the level value, the higher the rate of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound.

  FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the process related to the setting of the channel restriction level.

  Now, it is assumed that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, as shown in FIG. 263, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first resets the value of the previously set channel limit level as the process of step S3101. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol change is completed.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern of the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the start of the reach effect, the symbol, Identify "X" which is the number of free channels (minimum number of free channels) based on the timing when the channel becomes the least available within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when symbols are stopped without start of reach effect) I do. In addition, as the process of step S3103, based on the type of the effect pattern of the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel in the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol fluctuation). "Y", which is the number of empty channels (minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing at which the empty channel becomes most empty.

  However, if the effect pattern in which the symbol effect is stopped without starting the reach effect from the symbol change start is selected, the symbol change corresponding to “the latter half of the change” is not performed. In this case, the next step processing is performed without performing the processing in step S3103 itself, or the maximum value that can be set as the number of vacant channels “Y” in the processing in step S3103 (a numerical value that is not subject to channel limitation) Will be set.

  Next, as the process of step S3104, “X” specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with “Y” specified in the process of step S3103, and among these “X” and “Y”, Is set based on the value of the side with the smallest number of available channels (the side with no room for the number of available channels), at least until the symbol fluctuation to be determined is completed at least. As a result, during the period from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation that is the determination target, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. In addition, it is expected that the number of empty channels is hardly reduced to zero, and a decrease in gaming interest due to appearance of an unintended effect is expected.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum number of free channels” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the change (step S3102) and the second half of the change (step S3103). I'm supposed to. This is because the effect contents in the first half of the change (the period from the start of the pattern change to the start of the reach effect) are shared by a plurality of effect patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because the amount of data necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

  However, it is not always necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels to be used for setting the channel limit level separately in the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. The number of vacant channels (minimum vacant channel number) may be specified with one pattern as a unit, based on the timing at which the channel has the least vacancy within the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

  The “minimum number of available channels” here means a sound (BGM-related, a symbol stop related to the big hit determination, a big hit determination, etc.) that is automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined advances. This indicates only how many channels are left empty when they are assigned to each channel only for related sound effects. Therefore, a button pressing sound (a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation, etc.), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (a sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a holding winning sound (a first sound) Production patterns (production contents) to be determined, such as a sound associated with a prize in the starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004), a sound produced by a normal electric power (a sound associated with the production in accordance with a normal pattern determination) is developed. However, various sounds that are not necessarily executed only by sound are not included in the judgment.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram illustrating channel limit level values set separately for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of the content of the limit set separately for the channel limit level. .

  As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, first, among the various game sounds, the block prize sound (the prize to the general prize port) is selected as the target sound of the channel use. ), Hold winning sound (sound associated with winning the first opening 2002 or the second opening 2004), general electric sound (sound associated with the effect according to the normal symbol determination), volume adjustment completion sound Is exemplified. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation in which there is no room in the available channels, at least these game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) out of various game sounds. Restrictions on channel usage can occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “0”. That is, in this case, it is assumed that the symbol fluctuation is executed in a state where the available channels have room, and the sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) targeted for the use of the channel are restricted. None of them is limited, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol change, a block winning sound is allocated to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and the first starting port 2002 or 2002 or If there is a winning in the second starting port 2004, a reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and during the execution of the symbol change, when an effect according to the determination of the ordinary symbol is performed, a general sound corresponding to the effect is obtained. The electric performance sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, a volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is assigned to the predetermined empty channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, if the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction is performed based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to "1". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which the symbol variation is performed in a vacant channel with some margin, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary production sound, volume adjustment completion (Sound), a channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. In other words, in this case, when a prize is received in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, payout of a prize ball in an amount corresponding to the prize is performed, but the block prize sound is changed to a predetermined value. Processing is performed so as not to allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the schedule data for sound generation according to the winning in the general winning opening, and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, if the “minimum vacant channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is one of 2 to 5, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “2”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that the symbol variation is performed in a vacant channel with a relatively small margin, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary electric production sound, volume control Of the two completed sounds, a block prize sound and a hold prize sound are subjected to channel use restriction (50% restriction). That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restriction on the block winning sound, when a winning is detected in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the symbol change, and when this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning is determined. Although the payout of the minute prize balls and the above-described first and second start-up opening prize processing are performed, the processing is performed so that the reserved prize sound is not allocated to a predetermined empty channel. In this case, it is preferable that the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is not set, and the reproduction of the held winning sound is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the “minimum vacant channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, the process of step S3104 determines the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which a symbol variation in which there is no extra space in the empty channel is performed, and four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary electric production sound, volume adjustment completion) which are subject to the use of the channel are restricted. A limit (100% limit) of channel use is generated for all of the sounds. In other words, in this case, in addition to the above-described restrictions on the block winning sound and the restriction on the holding winning sound, even if an effect according to the determination of the ordinary symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol change, the general electric sound is not affected. Is not assigned to a predetermined free channel. Also, if there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, the volume adjustment itself is performed in accordance with the volume adjustment operation, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them and the sound generation completion sound corresponding to them should not be set, and the reproduction of the sound generation completion sound and the sound generation completion sound itself should not be performed. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, in the course of the game, when a symbol change in which the number of vacant channels to which sound is not allocated becomes less than a predetermined number is performed, the number of the vacant channels is reduced to a predetermined number. As compared with the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds becomes higher. In other words, in this case, some of the game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of available channels actually becomes zero. Since the execution of the related processing is restricted, and the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution of symbol fluctuation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be appropriately suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound subject to the channel use restriction is not the most important “production sound related to the jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1 but the other “sound accompanying prize”. "," Production sound related to normal judgment ", and" sound related to volume adjustment ". That is, even if a restriction on the use of the channel is generated during the execution of the symbol change, the effect as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol change is suitably performed without being limited, so during the execution of the symbol change, A decrease in the entertainment interest when the use of the channel is restricted is suppressed.

  In the above-described configuration, a plurality of types of sounds (block winning sounds, holding winning sounds, general electric sound effects, volume adjustment completion sounds) are prepared as types of sounds that are candidates for restriction of channel use among various game sounds. As the channel restriction level becomes higher (the smaller the minimum number of vacant channels, the smaller the symbol variation), the number of types of sounds subject to channel use restriction is increased. However, a method of restricting the execution of processing related to the output from a stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0, and increasing the rate of execution restriction as the number of empty channels decreases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be adopted.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating another example of the limitation content determined for each channel limitation level.

  As shown in FIG. 265, in this alternative example, according to the “minimum vacant channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104, the channel is used. A restriction lottery on whether or not to restrict is performed. However, here, a plurality of sounds which are candidates for the channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) ) Is performed only for the channel use restriction process.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and Restriction processing related to channel use is not executed for a specific game sound to be restricted (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound).

  However, when the channel restriction level becomes 1 or more, the probability that a determination result indicating that restriction is to be made in the restriction lottery is increased as the value increases, and the channel restriction level becomes 1 (minimum vacant channel). When the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100, and when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100, and the channel restriction level is 50/100. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the probability is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that a restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, the restriction process relating to channel use is executed with the same content regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even with such a configuration, if a symbol change in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is allocated becomes less than a predetermined number is performed during the progress of the game, the number of empty channels is reduced. As compared with the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit on the execution of processing related to the output from a stage before the number of available channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution restriction is increased as the number of available channels is reduced and the number of available channels is reduced, it is preferable to prevent occurrence of a situation where the number of available channels becomes zero during execution of symbol fluctuation. It is expected to be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, it is confirmed whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, so that the minimum vacant channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. This makes it possible to estimate the possibility that the number will run out, and promotes the progress of the game (winning, button operation, etc.) in accordance with the estimation.

  In the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, after executing a judgment process related to various announcement effects on the basis of the effect pattern, the minimum number of free channels is identified from the occurrence state of the announcement effects, and the identified minimum idle number is determined. Although the channel limit level is set based on the number of channels, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the maximum number of sounds that can be simultaneously assigned to channels during the symbol fluctuation period can be assumed in advance for each effect pattern. Keep it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the ratio of limiting the channel may be increased as the likelihood of shortage of channels in which the effect pattern is classified in advance is higher. In other words, in this case, when a specific type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, there is no actual button operation or various winnings do not occur, many channels are not used, and empty channels are not used. Even if there is a margin, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound may be restricted during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, but the vacant channel is obtained only by performing the simple processing. This is extremely useful in that it is possible to avoid that the number of symbols becomes zero, and even when such a process is executed, the number of available channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively high. When the number is small, the rate of execution of the processing related to the game sound is restricted, and when the number of available channels is relatively large during the symbol change, the ratio related to the game sound output is high. Phenomena that the execution of the process is restricted is reduced, "and it is expected that it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be appropriately maintained since the player does not feel uncomfortable. become. Also, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is restricted, it is possible to estimate the possibility of an effect pattern in which channel shortage is likely to occur.

  In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, the channel limitation is performed with the symbol variation as one unit. However, the channel is limited while the effect contents are developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be changed, and the channel restriction may be performed in accordance with the channel restriction level in each case. Alternatively, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, such as when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, the channel restriction level is invariable at a specific value over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

  By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted in channel use is not the most important “effect sound related to the jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1 but other sounds. Only "sounds associated with winning", "production sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment" are adopted. However, since these sounds include those having a lower frequency of occurrence than the effect sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that can more effectively secure an empty channel, it is necessary to use " It is desired that the effect sound is also adopted as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “production sound related to the jackpot determination”, there is a concern that the production sound may not be reproduced, resulting in a production lacking in excitement. If the big hit symbol is stopped in a certain situation, there is a possibility that the gaming interest may decrease.

  In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, among the “production sounds related to the jackpot determination”, only the “production relating to the design fluctuation that is on hold and will be consumed in the future”. If the use of the sound channel is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol variation during execution may be reduced. Thus, it is possible to adopt the effect sound having a high frequency of occurrence as a restriction target without any restriction.

  For example, when a prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the period in which the symbol change is being performed and the jackpot determination corresponding to the prize is put on hold, the holding is usually performed. A determination process is performed as to whether to perform a prefetching effect with respect to the jackpot determination in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether the jackpot determination held in the hold state is to win the jackpot is performed. Become.

  However, if the number of used channels becomes large and there is anxiety about the available space (such as a state in which the symbol fluctuation with the minimum available channel number of 0 or 1 is being executed), the channel usage is restricted and the status of “hold status” is set. If the target sound is a “sound effect according to an effect related to a design change that will be consumed in the future”, a prize is generated in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the jackpot determination corresponding thereto is suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination processing for the prefetching effect itself is not executed with respect to the jackpot judgment that has been put on hold, so that both the prefetching effect and the effect sound corresponding thereto are not performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of used channels becomes large and there is anxiety about empty space, the channel portion assigned to the effect related to the future design change which is not the running design change is executed. Because it is possible to supply the effect sound related to the fluctuation of the effect, the effect related to the result of the pattern change during execution is not affected at all, Will be able to In addition, the effect to be restricted is only "effect relating to the change of the symbol for the future in an unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is restricted, it will Since the effect during the change of the design (the effect contents according to the effect pattern) which is not performed is always executed, the decrease in the entertainment interest by limiting the effect to the effect can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, when the “effect sound related to big hit determination” is set as the restriction target, if only the production sound among the productions (production display, production sound) is set as the restriction target (no sound output), the production lacks in excitement. Although it may be a situation that the entertainment interest may be reduced on the contrary, in the above configuration, if the number of used channels becomes large and anxiety arises in the vacancy, the winning is won and the jackpot determination is suspended. Sometimes, the judgment process for the prefetching effect is not executed, and both the effect display and the effect sound for the prefetching effect are not performed. Therefore, a special result (prefetching winning) cannot be obtained in the prefetching judgment. It is only in the same production situation as when the game was played (hold display when the look-ahead production is not executed), and it is preferable to appropriately avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to the production execution lacking in excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when the “sound related to the jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when a prize is won and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the determination process for the look-ahead effect itself is not performed. The sound and both are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the "effect sound related to the jackpot determination" is set as a restriction target, the determination process for the prefetching effect is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, and restricts them, so that when the specific timing during the symbol change arrives, only the effect on the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound May be canceled to perform this. That is, in this case, the effect display related to the pre-reading effect is performed in a special mode (timing) different from when the “effect sound related to the big hit determination” is not set as the restriction target (normal time), and the special effect is performed. Since the look-ahead effect will be executed after the result (look-ahead win) has been obtained as if it had not been obtained, the look-ahead effect can be performed while suppressing a decrease in gaming interest caused by not producing an effect sound corresponding to the look-ahead effect. It can be performed suitably.

In addition, as a process related to a future effect in a situation where channel use is restricted, a determination process for a look-ahead effect is performed when a prize is won, but even when a special result is obtained, a specific timing during a symbol change arrives Until both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed and these are limited, and when the specific timing during the symbol change arrives, the effect display and the effect sound for the effect display A configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed is defined as a first restriction processing,
The game proceeds when the determination processing for the look-ahead effect is not executed when a prize is won, and the configuration in which both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed is the second lower limit process. Among them, when a symbol variation in which the number of empty channels to which sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number is performed, compared to a case where a symbol variation in which the number of the empty channels is not less than a predetermined number is performed. Thus, the ratio of execution of either the first restriction process or the second restriction process is increased, and the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restriction process was performed is determined. Let the expected value of the number of channels used in “A” be “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second limited processing is performed be “B”. When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. In other words, in this case, as the number of used channels increases and the vacancy causes greater anxiety, instead of the first under-limit processing in which only the effect sound is limited, both the effect display and the effect sound are limited. Since the rate at which the channel is restricted is increased by the second restriction sub-process, the feeling of anxiety when the number of used channels is increased is expected to be more appropriately suppressed.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is to be allocated. In a situation where the number of available channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to a special result being obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that a lack of game output due to the inability to output the special sound may occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, In the state where the volume is reduced (suppressed state), a process of ending the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed. Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is completed, a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that has been continuously assigned to the channel can be executed (channel special opening process).

  According to such a configuration, the use state is aimed at at a timing when it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the mode of channel assignment of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)). Is decreased (the number of empty channels is increased). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It is difficult to notice that the game has been performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is not output.

  FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 266, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing tk11, the predetermined effect pattern that is effected by the game board effect display device 1600 is being developed. Of the “normal BGM reproduction” corresponding to the reproduction channel 02, 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and according to the effect A displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. The sound of “effect A playback” is being assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 and played (here, stereo playback).

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), among the sounds in the reproduction state (normal BGM reproduction and effect A reproduction), the sound of "effect A reproduction" is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect. When the timing tk13 is reached (during symbol variation execution), the reproduction channel 08, 09 is removed and the reproduction is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect, by ending the effect sound assignment from the channel and promptly changing it to an empty channel, the effect contents of the predetermined effect pattern can be obtained. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a new sound cannot be allocated and reproduced due to lack of available channels when progressing.

  However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol change), the effect sound is deallocated from the channel and is changed to an empty channel. The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state decreases, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears in the effect pattern is reduced by the decrease.

  Therefore, in this example of the description, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), first, the sound of “effect A playback” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ending timing tk13 is reached. During the period from “timing tk12” to “timing tk14” after the timing tk13, the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 is played. It is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to be in a reproduction (here, stereo reproduction) state. Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B playback” is in the playback state, the timing tk13 at which the playback of “effect A playback” ends. In response to the arrival of the sound, a process of lowering the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” are assigned to channels.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the sound of “production B” in this example is output as a production sound corresponding to a step production that can develop the production content up to four times. After the effect contents have evolved sequentially over three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), it is necessary to perform an effect as to whether the effect contents will further evolve into the effect contents according to step 4. Thus, a process of lowering the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the step effect are assigned to channels. Note that when the volume suppression process is terminated and the volume is returned to the normal volume, if a high-expected effect mode that further develops to the effect content according to step 4 appears (an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation), While a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect content of step 4 is output as the sound of “effect B playback”, the effect content corresponding to step 3 does not evolve into the effect content according to step 4 When a low expected effect mode in which the effect is finished appears (an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation), an effect sound different from the specific effect sound is output as the sound of “effect B playback”.

  According to such a configuration, an effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 with the aim of performing a sound volume suppression process on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is terminated, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “staging A playback” is changed to the non-play state). Has been done).

  In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (c), the effect contents having a relatively high expectation (the effect contents developing to step 4) and the effect contents having a relatively low expectation (the step contents) 4 during the period (the period during which it is unclear whether or not to develop) that the effect content (the effect of whether or not to develop to step 4) appears to be connected to any of the above. The sound volume suppression processing is executed, and the sound of “effect A reproduction” is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to terminate the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only is the situation where the volume of the production sound is reduced, but also the interest itself of the player is strongly attracted to the production B (the sound of “production B reproduction”). Then, the effect A (the sound of "effect A playback") is ended, and thereafter, the volume of the effect sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "effect B playback" was returned. In some cases, even if the sound of “reproduction A is not reproduced”, the production contents having a relatively high degree of expectation (the production contents that develop to step 4) and the production contents having a relatively low degree of expectation ( (The effect content that does not evolve to step 4) appears, and it is possible to make it harder to notice that the sound of “effect A playback” is no longer reproduced.

Moreover, in the volume suppression process according to this example, the volume is reduced while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” are assigned to channels, but all effect sounds are reduced. The sound volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction”) is continuously reproduced at the normal sound volume.
In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of production sounds (sounds of "normal BGM reproduction") is reduced during normal reproduction without suppressing the volume, and thus the sounds are distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of "effect A playback" is terminated while the sound of "effect A playback" is stopped, the sound of "effect A playback" can no longer be noticed. Become like

  Further, in this example of description, the sound reproduction of the sound of “production A reproduction” is not ended immediately after the sound volume suppression processing is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the sound volume suppression processing. After the elapsed timing tk13 arrives, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated. In other words, immediately after the start of the volume suppression process, there is a possibility that the player's interest may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of “volume decrease” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. If the state in which the value does not change at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined period of time, it is assumed that such an interest has already faded. By ending the reproduction of the sound, it is possible to make it more difficult to notice that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

  In particular, in this description example, the effect sound to be subjected to the sound volume suppression process is stepwise decreased in volume, and after the sound volume becomes 0 (silence), the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is ended. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to notice the fact that the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the reproduction of the sound of “production B playback” is started while the sound of “production A reproduction” is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "effect B playback" is being played, the sound of "effect A playback" is started to be played, and while the sound of "effect B playback" is being played in the suppressed state, "effect A playback" May be ended.

  In addition, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be effects accompanied by an effect display on the game board effect display device 1600, and may be executed as, for example, effects with only sounds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 at which the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced comes as the variation pattern (producing pattern) according to the big hit determination is advanced. Not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the sound of “effect B reproduction” is started to be reproduced, and the sound of “effect A reproduction” is reproduced while the sound of “effect B reproduction” is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, the effect sound to be subjected to the sound volume suppression processing does not necessarily have to be made to gradually lower the sound volume. Conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. In addition, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence). If the volume is suppressed to a level lower than normal, it is difficult for the user to notice that the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” has ended. Is possible.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, a specific effect sound (in this case, the sound of “normal BGM playback”) corresponding to the effect pattern is excluded from the volume suppression processing, and the sound volume at the normal time is maintained. Although the reproduction is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be reduced when the volume suppression processing is performed. Conversely, the sound of “reproduction A playback” may be maintained without necessarily lowering the volume when the volume suppression processing is performed. While the player is interested in the sound of "effect B reproduction" in the state of being played, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated, and then the sound of "effect B reproduction" is also included. Even if the sound of “effect A playback” is not reproduced when the volume of a plurality of effect sounds targeted for volume suppression is returned, the effect contents with relatively high expectation (step 4). The sound of "production A reproduction" is reproduced by attracting interest in which one of the production content that has developed into the "A" and the production content with relatively low expectation (the production content that does not develop into step 4) appears. You can make it hard to notice that you are no longer Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the time when the sound volume suppression process is performed during the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the normal value is restored, even if a prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “staging B playback” more appropriately, It is desirable not to reproduce the corresponding hold winning sound. Also, even if a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetching determination when a prize occurs in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetching effect is not reproduced. It is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound reproduction of “production A reproduction” is ended within the period in which the production sound is reduced in volume. Was increased (returned to the original volume value), and in addition to this, at the end of the period, special effect sounds that had not been assigned to the channel were added to the channel. It is also possible to newly assign and play (play at the normal volume). According to such a configuration, the user is interested in whether or not a special effect sound is reproduced when the volume is returned. You can make it difficult. In addition, when the number of channels used after the volume is restored is lower than before the volume is decreased, there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears due to the symbol change is reduced, but a special effect sound is generated. Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (playback at the normal volume), so that before and after the volume is reduced, the same or more (two or more effect sounds are assigned to the channel) (When newly assigned), it is possible to use the channel, so that it is also preferable that the player can feel as if the expectation had decreased. Will be avoided. In this case, when the volume is returned, there is a case where a special effect sound is reproduced and a case where it is not reproduced, so that it is suggested that the expectation degree is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

  When a special effect sound that has not been assigned to a channel when the volume is returned is newly assigned to a channel and played back, the channel that has become empty due to the removal of the sound assignment of “effect A playback” is removed. It is desirable to assign a special sound effect to the sound. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  Further, such channel special opening processing does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, the restriction target in the processing described with reference to FIG. 264 and FIG. "Effect A" is adopted as the symbol, and the symbol variation is smaller when the minimum number of empty channels is smaller (when the minimum number of empty channels in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where the number of available channels is large enough to prevent the user from feeling anxious about lack of channels, the "effect A" can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

[Operation sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is to be allocated. In a situation where the number of available channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to a special result being obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that a lack of game output due to the inability to output the special sound may occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the pachinko machine 1 starts the symbol variation until the symbol variation ends. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of developing a display effect according to a specific effect pattern, and assigns a sound of “BGM playback” according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproduces the sound. Is performed. Then, when the display effect on the game board effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing in the symbol fluctuation period, the sound of “BGM playback” is kept assigned to the predetermined channel, and the sound is output in a suppressed mode or a silent state ( When the volume of “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output, and an operation on a predetermined operation unit (the operation button 410 or the like) is detected in this state, the symbol change causes the big hit symbol (the A special effect sound indicating the degree of expectation that a special display mode (a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested in the special effect may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but the sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage of the channel is likely to have a margin. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a player with an operation opportunity to output a special production sound while removing anxiety such as "maybe there is no available channel and a special production sound cannot be output". Can be performed, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of “BGM playback”) is to be assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the processing of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (processing of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a validity period for effect reception), a sound (““ It is possible to provide the player with an operation opportunity (generate a valid period for effect reception) after setting the "BGM reproduction" sound) in a suppressed state or in a state of outputting in a silent state.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, a validity period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within the validity period. It is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, when an operation (reception of an effect) is performed within the validity period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to the sound is started at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” is switched to the sound data of “BGM reproduction for exclusive use of special effect sound reproduction”, and this is switched. It is also conceivable to perform processing for reproducing. However, the sound of "BGM playback" is reproduced in accordance with the contents of various effects from the stop of the specific effect pattern to the end of the effect, the timing of the stop of the symbol, and the like. If it is determined at which timing the operation (reception of the effect) is performed or not (depends on the player), the operation (reception of the effect) may be used to newly reproduce the sound of “BGM reproduction”. In addition, there is a concern that a so-called sound gap may occur between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that, resulting in a decrease in gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data ("BGM playback") corresponding to the specific effect pattern are stored. For example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super-reach effect, sound data during the second half of the super-reach effect, etc.) are determined in a time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Processing for sequentially assigning to channels is performed. The specific sound data (one sound material) among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is defined by the sound generation schedule data. If the channel is allocated to the predetermined channel in a chronological order, the channel is allocated to the predetermined channel from the timing before the valid period of the effect reception in the specific performance pattern occurs and the reproduction is started, and the valid period ends. Then, the reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state to the predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the reproduction.

  In this regard, in a specific section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, a process in which the sound output is performed in a suppressed manner compared to the other sections, or without sound. Is performed in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in a time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a part of the specific channel (special section) is set. Within the period), there is a time-series relationship in which the effective period of the effect reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the validity period of the effect reception that occurs during the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The special production sound according to the reception of the production is performed over the two sections in the specific sound data after the (partial section) ends (the other section), and the sound of “BGM playback” is output. Playback is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of super reach effect, super The sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) is sequentially allocated to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppression mode or a state in which sound is output without any sound (special period)”. In addition, when an operation performed by the player is accepted in the “suppressed mode or the state in which the sound is output without sound (special period)” created in this way, a special process is performed in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on a predetermined channel is “suppressed or output in a silence state (special period) regardless of the reception of the production. Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after that, in a form in which the special effect sound is being mixed into the reproduced special effect sound, a partial section (suppression mode or silent sound output) of the specific sound data (one sound material) ends. Since the data content of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” can be secretly returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It is possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in a state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output without sound or in a silence state, the special effect sound is not suppressed by a highly immediate process triggered by the operation. Thus, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a sound gap between the timing of the various effects and the symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 267 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such suppressed operation sound output processing is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 267, a specific example when such suppressed operation sound output processing is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 267 (a), during the period in which the symbol change according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ts11, the identification effect that the effect is progressing on the game board effect display device 1600 is specified. In this situation, the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the effect pattern is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of the “BGM reproduction” is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol change from the start to the end of the symbol change when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed. (Sound material) may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of those periods may be May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and are in a reproduction state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267 (a) and (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. At timing ts12, which is before timing ts13 when an operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) at which an operation opportunity as a production sound generation trigger is generated, silence data content is set. It is set to be in a playback state in a partial section. As a result, even if the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not adjusted from the initial value, the sound can be output without sound while being allocated to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is likely to be room in the channel usage status. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special production sound while removing the feeling of anxiety that "there may be no channels available and the special production sound may not be output". It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Moreover, during the operation validity period according to this example, even when there is no operation by the player, a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM reproduction” is ended. At a timing ts15 before the arrival of the game, the period is ended so that the effect of the operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is received at any timing during the operation validity period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” becomes a reproduction state in a partial section set as silent data content. In an atmosphere where there is likely to be room in the use situation of the cage channel, it is possible to generate a special effect sound according to the operation by the player. Note that the operation validity period is ended not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player but also when an operation by the player is accepted. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an effect by the player is received at timing ts14, and based on the reception of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned. , 03, and special effect sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09 for playback.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation valid period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation valid period is ended at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) until the end of the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is “BF”, the operation is within the validity period. Even if the operation by the player is received at any of the timings, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain time of “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even when an operation by the player is received at any timing within the operation validity period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state, The sound of “BGM reproduction” can be output in a non-suppressed manner in such a manner as to be mixed into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, the time from the start of the reproduction of the special effect sound to the output of the “BGM reproduction” sound in the non-suppressed mode in accordance with the timing at which the operation by the player is received is variable. A buffer period for restoring the output period of the special effect sound to the sound of “BGM reproduction” in an unsuppressed manner (the sound of “BGM reproduction” is returned to the special effect sound in an unsuppressed manner. Function is performed as a period during which it is difficult to notice that the sound of “BGM playback” is not returned as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is received, and the uncomfortable feeling caused by returning the sound after a predetermined time has passed. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound of “BGM reproduction” is restored as the data content of the effect sound for BGM reproduction (non-suppression mode), when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is reproduced in the non-suppression mode. In this state, the reproduction of the special effect sound ends.

  In the above description example, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are determined by the operation by the player as shown in FIG. 267 (b). Depending on the accepted timing, it will be variable within the range shown by the dotted arrow, but whatever the timing, the timing ts16 arrives when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is obvious that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set as the sound of “BGM reproduction” is started.

Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 267, the user can further remember “uncomfortable feeling due to returning the sound of“ BGM reproduction ”when the operation by the player is received, and returning the sound after a predetermined time without returning to the non-suppressed mode. To make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section.
According to such a configuration, while attention is being paid to a special effect sound having a large initial volume value, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly shifted to a reproduction state in a normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when an effect by the player is received, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception. However, a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination is given. The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is received only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, even when the specific production condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when an operation by the player is received within the operation valid period, the effect is received. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is reproduced. Regardless of the operation performed at any timing within the operation validity period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly changed to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is in the reproduction state. It is also desirable to shift to the same manner as in the case of the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is set to the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (the failed effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation validity period, the timing at which the sound of the BGM reproduction is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is set to the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Is set to arrive after the process is completed. According to such a configuration, a silence period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. (A period during which the length is variable) can be generated as a buffer period. Also, by setting such that a resurrection effect in which the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) increases during this silent period can be generated, it is expected that the entertainment of games will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the symbol change is stopped in a losing manner without returning the sound of the BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section. Is also good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

  When a special effect sound is to be generated, a movable effect for operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception is also performed, so that the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction is reduced. This is desirable in that the reproduced sound is secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output silently in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM reproduction” in other sections. What is necessary is just what is output by. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered, and a mode in which the frequency of vibration of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to the predetermined channel itself is set in a time-series period in which the suppression mode or silence is set. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or a silent state (special period) only by reproducing the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to the predetermined channel itself is suppressed or silenced. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is not set. Volume adjustment for lowering the volume to a specific value (may be silence) may be performed. That is, in this case, even if an operation performed by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is performed with the reception of the effect. Not to be. Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced when the predetermined timing ts16 comes. Processing (processing for returning to the volume initial value) is performed. On the other hand, when the specific production condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified while the predetermined production sound (failure production sound or the like) is being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. The process of increasing the value from the value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is completed. (A process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the symbol fluctuation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, a restriction process is performed to make it difficult to generate a new sound assignment to an empty channel at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the timing ts12 arrives to a timing ts16. Is desirable.
In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric production sound, an adjustment sound, etc., have nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a change in the symbol being executed. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not reproduced without newly assigning it to a channel.

  When it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol change according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is to be played on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable that the sound is not music but a sound effect such as sound effect or dialogue so that the sound does not overlap with the sound.) While the specific sound effect is being played, the timing ts12 arrives and the BGM playback is performed. Is desirably output in a suppressed mode or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of the specific effect sound is to be ended before the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (at the timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). Is desirable in relieving anxiety that a special sound is not output.

  Also, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol change according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of the BGM reproduction is output from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the effect sound is output on a plurality of channels before the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the silence state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, the sound of the BGM reproduction can be easily mixed into the effect sound, and the sound of the BGM reproduction can be output normally. It is possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIG. 264 and FIG. "Sound of BGM reproduction" is adopted as the restriction target, and the symbol fluctuation is smaller when the minimum number of free channels is smaller (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol fluctuation is smaller than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not smaller than the predetermined number). The rate at which the suppressed operation sound output processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation in which the number of available channels is large enough to prevent a feeling of anxiety that a special effect sound is not output due to lack of channels, the sound of BGM playback is output without suppression or silence. Will be able to do it.

[Channel assignment release operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is to be allocated. In a situation where the number of available channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to a special result being obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that a lack of game output due to the inability to output the special sound may occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is allocated to an empty channel to which no sound data is allocated is triggered by the detection by the detecting unit. Executable (channel assignment cancel operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created by an operation by the player, the operation by the player is performed at a timing immediately before the player's favorite effect sound or special sound occurs, and the empty channel is created. By securing the sound in advance, it is possible to reliably output the effect sound or special sound desired by the player through the vacant channel thus secured in advance.

  The operation (channel assignment canceling operation) in this description example is not limited to the “button operation”, and is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262, such as an act of praying with the hand held over the pachinko machine 1. The specific action may be performed by a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect any state change that occurs when the specific action to be detected (channel assignment canceling operation) is performed. What is necessary is just to perform a process of removing a sound assigned to a channel from the channel and terminating the reproduction in response to the detection.

  FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when a process related to such a channel assignment canceling operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern which is effected by the game board effect display device 1600 is developed. (For example, effect sound reproduced during execution of the super reach effect) assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 and reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction), and A sound of “BGM2 playback” according to the effect mode (for example, one piece of music that is continuously played over a plurality of fluctuations in a time saving game state or the like) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and played (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 268 (a) and (b), among the sounds in these playback states (BGM1 playback and BGM2 playback), the sound of “BGM2 playback” is a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation). Is detected, the channel assignment is forcibly terminated, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is accepted. An allowable reception period can be generated up to the timing tw13. In the reception period from the timing tw12 to the timing tw13, a specific action to be detected (such as “operate a button to secure an empty channel”) (a channel assignment canceling operation) in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Is displayed, prompting the user to perform the operation.

  Here, FIG. 268 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation canceling operation) is not performed during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection is not performed by the predetermined detection unit. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the sound of “BGM2 playback” is removed from the playback channels 02 and 03 if the detection is not performed by the predetermined detection unit until the timing tw13 arrives. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. At the timing tw13 at which the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button and secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, a process of allocating a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determination sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and performing reproduction is performed. In this example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to the empty channels by the detection by the predetermined detecting means, the empty is previously secured in the other channels (the reproduction channels 10 and 11). A predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit sound) is assigned to a channel and can be reproduced. However, if the remaining channels are not previously reserved, there is no available channel to which a predetermined effect sound (in this case, the jackpot determined sound) can be allocated, and it cannot be reproduced and output. Concerns will arise.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation canceling operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, and detection is performed by predetermined detection means. Is shown.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), when the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are detected at the timing tw12a at which the detection is performed. , The sound of “BGM2 playback” is removed. As a result, it is possible to secure in advance an empty channel (reproduction channels 02 and 03) that can function as a target to which a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) is allocated until the timing tw13 arrives. This eliminates the concern that it is not possible to reproduce and output a predetermined effect sound (in this case, the big hit determination sound). Further, at the point in time when the detection by the predetermined detecting means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and in this case, the music or the line as the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is completed (or Playback ends at a halfway point without being played back (up to the point where the cut is good), so the player feels that a vacant channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) by the player. This makes it easier to wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (in this case, the big hit determination sound) is reproduced.

  At the timing tw12a at which the detection by the predetermined detecting means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is displayed. (Operation of a button to secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), at the timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 previously reserved as the empty channels, but other channels (the reproduction channels 10 and 11) is assigned a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determination sound) and is reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in the other channels at the timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit sound) is assigned to the previously secured reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced.

Alternatively, when the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is performed at timing tw12a and the detection is performed by the predetermined detection unit, the other channel has an empty space. Alternatively, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determination sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and reproduced.
That is, in this case, in allocating a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) to a specific channel and reproducing it, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound for the specific channel (here, in this case). , BGM2) are assigned, the assignment state is canceled at that point in time upon detection of a specific action such as a button operation (channel assignment canceling operation), so that one channel (specific channel) is assigned. By simply using it, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined effect sound (in this case, the big hit determination sound) can be reproduced, and the reproduction channel, which is a finite resource, can be effectively used. .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit determination sound) is reproduced, but the timing after the timing tw13 Then, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determination sound) may be reproduced.

  Also, the predetermined effect sound may be a sound effect indicating the degree of expectation of the appearance of the big hit symbol, an effect sound indicating that the player has lost the big hit, or the like, in addition to the big hit determination sound. It is desirable that these effect sounds be selectively output based on the type of effect pattern appearing in the symbol variation. Alternatively, when it is suggested that a jackpot has been lost, no effect sound may be output even if the timing tw13 arrives, and an empty channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, the sound for ending the channel assignment when the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is detected is not a sound output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is overlooked when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted without any trouble. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), when a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation has arrived, a reception period in which the effect reception of the effect of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted is generated. Not limited to For example, at least during the period in which the specific sound to be excluded from the channel assignment is in the reproduction state, the reception of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the reception. May be eliminated. In this case, for example, the state of a previously reserved empty channel is maintained for a predetermined period of time, such as a predetermined timing at which a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the reproduction state, and then another sound is output to the empty channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

  In addition, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, a channel to which the specific sound has been assigned is set to an empty channel at that time, and a predetermined sound (for example, 0. The channel assignment of a specific sound may be canceled by allocating an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound such as one second) over the same channel. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is received and forcibly terminated than when the forcible termination is not performed.

  In addition, at least during a period from when the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted to when the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the effect reception is completed, a new sound is received. To prevent the channel from being wasted by the occurrence of a special game sound (for example, a prize sound, a hold change sound, or a volume adjustment sound) that is not related to the effect of whether a big hit symbol appears in the symbol change. , Pre-reading effect sound, etc.) should not be output.

  Also, the specific sound (the sound of “BGM2 playback”) to be forcibly terminated is reproduced as a non-loop effect sound such as a song or a line that is reproduced only for a predetermined time without looping. This is desirable in order to make it easier to remember the fact that an empty channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) by the player so that the reproduction is terminated at an incomplete part without being reproduced to the end. .

[Abnormality notification during performance according to performance pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is to be allocated. In a situation where the number of available channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to a special result being obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that a lack of game output due to the inability to output the special sound may occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily allocated to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on condition that the notification has occurred in a specific situation. In other words, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily output, thereby promoting a reduction in the risk of leaving a vacant channel by providing a sufficient channel. Will be expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even at the timing when it should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred” or the like) and a game An abnormal state display (for example, “abnormality has occurred in the underside movable effect unit 3200”) in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 can be executed. In addition, it is preferable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has caused the abnormality. A mode may be used to specify which of the movable decorative bodies belonging to the group has an abnormality. For example, as the plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decorative unit 3100 or the like) , The rear middle movable production unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400, the back right movable production unit 3500, the back lower movable production unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable. The abnormal display in the display area is performed in such a manner that which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body has an abnormality can be specified. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies which have different driving sources and are provided separately.

  However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly likely that the player side will not have any fault. Since there is no such event, if the notification process is executed prominently during a period in which various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, the effect during execution is This has an adverse effect on the player, which is awkward for the player. Not only that, there is no room in the number of available channels for the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, which may give the player an uneasy feeling that a new sound cannot be output. However, there is concern that entertainment interest may decline.

  However, on the other hand, the failure of the movable decorative body often occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is a situation in which a sudden failure occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all. In this case, a case where a movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all is an abnormality when the movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a sticking action or an illegal act such as wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in the detected situation, and if it is not possible to output the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality even in such a situation, it may promote fraudulent activities and It is feared that a serious player may lose interest in the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, and this is detected. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a notification process (output of a notification sound, abnormal display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like). However, during a period in which various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, a process of operating the movable decorative body by at least effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (a change pattern (effect pattern)). When a movable body abnormality is detected during the operation of the movable decorative body based on an effect pattern during a jackpot game or the like, a notification processing (output of a notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is performed. , The abnormal display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. It should be noted that the external output of information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (notification on the hall side) is not performed clearly and does not adversely affect the performance, so that it may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, even in a period in which various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, a situation in which the movable decorative body is unlikely to fail even during the period (by the peripheral control board 1510). The movable body is abnormal in the process of operating the movable decorative body under the effect control (the situation in which the movable body driving process of operating the movable decorative body based on a fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) or an effect pattern during a big hit game) is not performed). In the event that a malfunction occurs, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed. In the event of occurrence, the notification processing of the abnormal notification sound and the like by the pachinko machine 1 is not performed, so that the person who commits the wrongdoing is suppressed from performing the wrongdoing. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the performance control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side performance display device 1600, the control of the allocation of the performance sound to the channel, and the occurrence of abnormality Since the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is performed in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, the effect during the execution is adversely affected. The influence will be suppressed. However, even if an effect timing to operate the movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected arrives, the movable decorative body operates the movable decorative body while the movable decorative body has not yet been recovered from the abnormal state. No staging is performed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, when the movable body abnormality is detected, it is determined whether or not the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) on the movable decorative body in order to recover the movable decorative body from the abnormal state. This restoration processing may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, during the symbol variation execution period in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative object is performed, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state at a stage earlier than that, it is possible to execute a specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body.

  Note that despite the execution of a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation of moving to a specific position (origin position)) on the movable decorative body, the movable decorative body is identified within a predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game or effect will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 269 shows an allocation state of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the symbol variation period. 6 is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decorative body side.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing ti11, the game board effect display device 1600 displays The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol change (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur up to a period up to timing ti14. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is terminated with this as a trigger. Thus, the effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is performed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception), effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed after timing ti14. The effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that at timing ti13, an operation performed by the player has been accepted. Therefore, at timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation performed by the player has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed, and the movable effect for producing the specific movable decorative body is performed (see FIG. 269 (b)). ), And an effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to channels 08 and 09, and is reproduced (see FIG. 269 (a)).

Here, in the movable body driving process, for example, when a specific movable decorative body is operated, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormal history is stored, the movable body driving process is terminated without performing any driving because the restoration process has failed and recovery cannot be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving of the specific movable decorative body ends, the information from the predetermined sensor is obtained, When it is determined based on this information that the movable body has been returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body driving process ends. However, when it is determined in the movable body driving process that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position), a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed. After that, the movable body driving process ends.
At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  By such a movable body driving process, a specific movable decorative body performs an effect operation from timing ti13. In this illustrative example, at a timing ti15 in a period during which the effect operation is performed, a specific movable decorative body is activated. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot operate. In FIG. 269 (b), the dotted area indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti17 after the driving of the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). An abnormality is determined), and a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, Since it can be said that the situation is highly likely to have occurred due to the failure of the decorative body, in this example, it is not performed to assign an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality to a channel and reproduce it. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the control of the assignment of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality is detected. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to prevent the effect being performed from being adversely affected.

  At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position). In this case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the storage of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute a normal movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), and the recovery has failed. In this case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoring operation is not performed, and a game or an effect is developed while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, within the same design variation, or within the next and subsequent design variations, even if the timing at which the movable effect using the specific movable decorative body is executed based on the effect pattern arrives, the specific movable decorative body No effect operation is performed, and a display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board effect display device 1600, and an operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light-emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light-emission mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, when the movable decoration itself is not operated, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decoration itself is operated (light-emitting) in an operating state, so that when the movable effect is not performed. It is expected that entertainment will be suppressed.

  As described above, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, at least when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, the movable body is detected. By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the performance being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) in the same variation pattern (specific effect pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When a specific movable decorative body is generated at a timing different from the time when a specific movable decorative body is operated by the production control (production pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 270 shows that during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body abnormality is detected not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, but in another process. It is a time chart which shows an example about the assignment situation of each channel at the time of detection, and the situation on the movable decorative body side.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being performed, at timing ti11, the game board side effect as described above. The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern developed on the display device 1600 has been assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is the maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of up to Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is terminated with this as a trigger. Thus, the effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body moves due to some external force at a timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform a rendering operation (operates without being based on the rendering pattern). It is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 270 (b), the dotted area indicates the period when the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

  At the timing ti13a, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history will be erased, and thereafter, it is possible to execute a normal movable production without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is received within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation validity period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, so that the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed. Not performed, a display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and an operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. The various light-emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body described above emit light only in the light-emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is changed by the restoration processing. If it is eliminated, the effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) as usual is performed, including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. Note that this description example is based on the assumption that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality has been performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including the specific movable decorative body are executing the restoration process, the specific movable decorative body is operated even if the operation by the player is received within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14. The effect operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that at timing ti13a, it has not been detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), and the recovery has failed. are doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoring operation is not performed, and a game or an effect is developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  Also, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing to operate the specific movable decorative body based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination That is, it can be said that there is a possibility that a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to an unfair action such as a sticking action or a wire entry, and an abnormality is detected. In addition, the timing ti13a is a state in which even if the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body has not been solved by any external force, the movable body abnormality has not been eliminated, and there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing.

  Therefore, at this timing ti13a, a notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed while the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to the various effect sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern being assigned and reproduced in accordance with the progress of the effect contents, the abnormal notification sound is reproduced over a predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00 and 01. To be played back. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect according to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, an abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ Abnormality occurs in backside movable effect unit 3200 "). In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the movable body abnormality, some of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are operated in a normal manner in accordance with the progress of the effect contents. It emits light.

  According to the examples of FIG. 269 and FIG. 270, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol change, at least the period during which the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is performed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the production, the possibility that the wrongdoing is being performed is low, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, when the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not performed, it is highly likely that an illegal act has been performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that outputting a notification can be more important.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 270, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, and the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a where the restoration process is performed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. I decided to do. However, at the timing ti11b, a movable body abnormality is detected in spite of the situation where the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the alarm has occurred, the output of the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be started at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may also be performed.

  In short, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, assuming that the specific movable decorative body is not performing an effect operation based on the effect pattern. Is performed as a necessary condition, and "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern." It is important to ensure that the game is not executed as a sufficient condition, so that a person who commits a wrongdoing is prevented from performing the wrongdoing, while a player who is not Is expected to be prevented from being adversely affected. The condition for performing the notification process according to the movable body abnormality during the period in which the symbol change is performed is as follows: “The specific movable decorative body does not perform the production operation based on the production pattern, but the specific movable decoration After adopting at least the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the body, for example, `` failing the restoration process performed in response to the occurrence of the abnormality '' or `` thing that occurred when the abnormality occurred in a specific situation '' Etc. can be adopted as further conditions.

In the examples shown in FIG. 269 and FIG. 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern.
However, if an abnormality occurs when the specific movable decorative body is operated in accordance with the effect pattern, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger, so that the specific movable It may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body during the process of operating the decorative body according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is made at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time during regular visits.

  In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, at timing ti17, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body, and thereby, an abnormality of the movable body is detected. In the example of FIG. 270, an actuator, such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body, is overloaded at the timing ti11b, so that an abnormality of the movable body is detected.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing when the player performs the operation, but the specific movable decorative body is performed at the specific timing determined by the production pattern. May be effected.

  In addition, among the notifications according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel for a predetermined period of time and reproduced. You may make it perform the process which reduces.

  If the abnormality notification is not executed sufficiently on the condition that “an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing an effect operation based on the effect pattern,” However, even if the abnormal state is left unresolved, it is desirable that at least the RAM is not cleared and the abnormality notification is not performed as long as the power supply is continued. Further, it is desirable that a game or an effect be developed while the abnormal state is maintained without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration of multiple movable decorations]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is to be allocated. In a situation where the number of available channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to a special result being obtained cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that a lack of game output due to the inability to output the special sound may occur. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies having different driving sources and being provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormal By assigning sound data) to channels and reproducing them, the number of used channels is prevented from becoming uselessly increased even when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. Was. In addition, the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body can no longer properly operate, and is the same as that exemplified in "Abnormality notification while an effect according to the effect pattern is being performed". is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on a gaming machine has been increasing, and simply associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all the movable decorative bodies is not sufficient for the game. It is becoming difficult to properly report the status of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and a different abnormality notification sound is output to a channel depending on which of the movable decorative bodies belonging to the group has an abnormality. By allocating and reproducible, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  Also in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification during production in accordance with the production pattern” (see FIGS. 269 and 270). Is performed. Therefore, even in this example, even if various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) occur during the period of execution and are detected, the notification processing (output of the notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is performed. , An abnormal display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. In addition, similarly, during a period in which various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, at least a process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (a fluctuation pattern) If a movable body abnormality is detected during the execution of the movable decorative body based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( The output of the notification sound, the display of an abnormal condition in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like are not performed.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, abnormal sound data assigned to a channel and brought into a playback state is changed to only one of the above groups corresponding to a specific group. On the other hand, a process of performing a restoration operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is executed. According to such a configuration, even if a plurality of movable decorative bodies have an abnormality in the movable body, it is expected that the channels are given a margin and the risk of running out of empty channels is reduced. In addition to the above, it becomes possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel use time through the efficiency of the processing itself when abnormalities occur. . It should be noted that the contents of the restoration processing and each processing at the time of success and failure are described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification during production according to production pattern” (see FIGS. 269 and 270). ).

  Here, the mode of dividing the plurality of movable decorative bodies into two or more groups is required to be a mode suitable for reporting the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided, for example, on the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back side) In the case of grouping into two groups: the right movable production unit 3400, the back upper movable production unit 3500, the lower back movable production unit 3700, etc., the frame-side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. It is possible to transmit to the hall side according to the type of the abnormality notification sound whether or not an abnormality has occurred or whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative body, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a high possibility that the wrongdoing has been performed by an amount that is considered to be more difficult than when the abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, depending on the type of the notification sound according to the movable body abnormality, without being noticed by the player side (the unpleasant feeling Without pachinko machine 1), it is possible to secretly inform the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the degree of fraud is high.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a movable body abnormality occurs, the pachinko machine 1 performs notifying of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, As described above, it is possible to execute the abnormal display in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this description example, in the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality, as the notification mode by display on the game board effect display device 1600, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and any of the groups is used. It is desirable to perform different notification displays depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the "notification by display" is inferior to the diffusion function for occurrence of an abnormality than the "notification by sound", but is superior to the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality in more detail. It has the property which was. Therefore, in the above-described “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of performing the “notification by sound” by utilizing the difference in the nature, and in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted. In this case, it is desirable to display differently depending on whether the movable decorative body belonging to any of the groups independently divided has an abnormality.

  That is, in this case, for example, when the movable body A has a movable body abnormality and when the movable body B has a movable body abnormality, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into any group. Depending on whether or not there is, as a notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, although the abnormality notification sound reproduced is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs, Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ", and" a second notification mode in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced and the notification content displayed are the same even when any movable body abnormality occurs. " And the "third notification mode in which the alarm notification sound reproduced and the notification content displayed are different from each other even if any movable body error occurs". Become this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 271 shows an example of an assignment state of each channel and a situation on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing in a period in which a symbol change is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing tj11, the game board effect display device 1600 displays The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol change (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected during this period (a period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this as a trigger. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is thus performed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception), effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed after timing tj15. The effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 271, it is assumed that at timing tj14, an operation performed by the player has been accepted. Therefore, at timing tj14, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, the movable body drive process is executed to perform a movable effect for performing a specific movable decorative body, and the channel effect is performed. The effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 271, at timing tj11, the plurality of movable decorative bodies move due to some external force (operate without being based on the effect pattern), and the timing is higher than the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation. It is assumed that these movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 271 (b) and FIG. 272 (b) to be described later, a dotted area indicates a period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. That is, in relation to this restoration processing, even if the operation by the player is accepted at timing tj14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side The movable body abnormality is detected for the frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Each situation is assumed.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, as for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and simultaneous operation may cause interference due to contact with each other. For this reason, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Since there is no concern about mutual interference including the relationship with the above, restoration processing is performed simultaneously at the timing tj12 so that quick abnormal recovery of each movable decorative body is enabled.

  In such a configuration, the restoration process of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 is performed for a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in, the restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side before the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. It is assumed that neither the restoration process for A, B, and C nor the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 end. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the operation is effective. Even if an effect is received at any timing within the period (effective period of effect reception), processing is performed so that when the effect is received, the effect operation triggered by this is not performed.

  That is, in this case, if an effect reception occurs during the period in which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative object is being executed, it is apparent that the effect of the specific movable decorative object cannot be effected as a trigger. Also, even if an effect reception occurs after the restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed, mutual operation with another board-side movable decorative body in a stage where the restoration processing is still being performed is performed. There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is received at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed on the game board effect display device 1600 is executed, and the channel is displayed. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. In this case, the light is emitted only in the light emission mode when the light is emitted. In short, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after all the restoration processing is completed (all restoration processing is completed successfully), Only when the timing at which the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed arrives, the execution of the effect operation is permitted.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation validity period (effectiveness period of the effect reception) the effect is received, the process is performed such that whether or not the effect operation triggered by this effect is performed when the effect is received is changed. It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, when the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform a staging operation after the restoration processing is completed (the restoration processing is successful). Always arrives, and there is no concern that other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F will interfere with each other even if the restoration processing is being performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted during any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, an effect operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, a display effect when the movable effect is performed on the game board effect display device 1600 is performed, and the movable effect is performed for a channel. Is performed and assigned, and various light-emitting units including a lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred emit light when the movable performance is performed. It will emit light.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing at which the restoration processing ends. Therefore, when an operation by the player is received within a period before the restoration process is completed in the operation valid period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, and thus the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state. The effect of the body is not performed, and a display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Then, the various light-emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light-emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within a period after the end of the restoring process (success in the restoring process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are restored. There is no fear of interference between them even if the process is being performed. Therefore, the normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of specific movable decorations Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not arrive after the restoration processing is completed (the restoration processing is successful). . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, if the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed on the channel. The effect sound at the time (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay.

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, when notifying the notification sound according to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side. , C, and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side. The movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there is a certain notification sound.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 271, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation usually cannot occur during proper game play, and cannot occur as a result of wrongdoing. It is highly likely that you are in a special situation, such as manually tweaking all movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may become troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is detected that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. At the timing tj12, as described above, the restoration processing on the board-side movable decorative body and the restoration processing on the frame-side movable decorative body are started at the same time, whereas the notification sound is output from the frame-side movable decorative body. The abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, and the common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is allocated to the channel. Output.

  That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is eliminated, or a predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as a time until a time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, which is the side that takes longer time to complete the restoration process, “the board-side movable decorative bodies A, By assigning only the board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the "board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C" is obtained. The restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended during the reproduction, and the "common abnormality notification on the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sides" After the output of the “sound” is completed, it is avoided that an output request for “a frame-side common anomaly notification sound corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F” is avoided. The notification process can be completed in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, while the restoration processing is performed on the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, “A common board-side abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is reproduced by being allocated to a channel over a period until a timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are completed. Thus, the "frame-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F" is not reproduced. In this case, as described above, the control of the assignment of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality, the above-described “notification by sound” is performed by utilizing a difference in properties from the above-described notification sound. In a mode different from that described above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and different displays are performed depending on which of the movable decorative bodies belonging to the group thus independently classified has an abnormality. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E ends, this is taken into account. The “notification by display” is maintained, and the “notification by display” ends at the timing when the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body F ends. Similarly, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, The corresponding “notification by display” is maintained, and the “notification by display” is ended at the timing when the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body D ends. Therefore, even if the restoration processing of the specific movable decorative body is completed first, depending on the execution state of the restoration processing of the movable decorative body grouped with the specific movable decorative body, the restoration processing may be performed more than the specific movable decorative body. Later, the "notification by display" corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed may be ended first.

  According to the example of FIG. 271, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the notification sounds corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to the respective notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. Is not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound, and the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. In addition, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the playback state, it is necessary to individually perform restoration processing on these movable decorative bodies in a predetermined order. On the other hand, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, the restoration processing for these movable decorative bodies is performed at the same time. This makes it possible to shorten the total time required for the restoration process for the movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state, as compared with the movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound among the notification sounds is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and the restoration processing corresponding to each of those groups is performed simultaneously. Not limited to The point is that a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated by two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and the panel side) that can operate without being affected by the operation status of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. And the restoring process can be executed independently for each group, and for a plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) belonging to at least one group (the frame side in the above example), Among them, if they are selected as movable ornaments that can operate without being affected by each other's operation status and all of them can be simultaneously restored, refer to FIGS. 271 and 272. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the operation and effect described above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time periodically. In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing when the player performs an operation. However, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the specific timing determined by the production pattern. It may be the one that causes it.

  In addition, among the notifications according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel for a predetermined period of time and reproduced. You may make it perform the process which reduces.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, the movable body abnormalities have occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol change is being performed. Although the description has been made assuming the situation, the symbol change does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution period of the jackpot game, or when the game of the special symbol is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, during a demo screen), the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative body D, Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, restoration processing is performed on all of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. And However, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even when they are simultaneously operated are included in the board-side movable decorative bodies, the movable decorative bodies of the board-side movable decorative bodies are determined based on a predetermined order. During the restoration processing, the restoration processing may be simultaneously performed only on some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the movable body abnormality in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Although it is assumed that the timing for determining whether the occurrence has occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Even if it is determined that the frame-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are restored, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is terminated earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is terminated. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the “common notification sound for the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” ends, the “frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F sides” It is possible to avoid the request for the output of the "common alarm sound common to the corresponding frame side".

  Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It may be configured to have a processing structure in which it is determined that the operation has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F Are not performed, and it is necessary to wait until it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. During the notification process, it is desirable to perform the restoration process of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. It should be noted that as a result of waiting for the determination process of whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this case, while the notification process corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed, the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a case where a plurality of operations (for example, continuous hitting of the operation button 410) on a predetermined operation unit are prompted to perform an operation effect a plurality of times according to each operation.
However, in recent years, in a predetermined validity period in which such an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous tapping) is given, even if the predetermined operation means (the operation button 410) is not operated a plurality of times, the predetermined operation means is not required. Multiple-time operation function (automatic operation) in which the effect mode when multiple operations are performed only by performing a long-time operation (so-called long-pressing or the like) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time appears. It is increasingly equipped with a continuous tapping function.

  In such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function), a single operation (a single operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed. ) May be reminded to the player as if the player were repeatedly performing the action (such as the feeling of a fast repeated hit). It can be said that it is important to suppress a decrease in gaming interest of a player or the like and to encourage various players to use the function. However, if the effect change (for example, operation sound) is made simply when the effect is received every time a relatively short time elapses in the operation state, the same applies to the player. Even if it is intended to perform an operation with a single push, the short operation time (the time during which the operation state is slightly maintained by a single push) becomes slightly longer or shorter, so that the effect reception can be performed multiple times. The number of effect receptions for one single operation is stable because it occurs (multiple operation sounds are generated) or the effect is received only once (one operation sound is generated). There is a concern that the interest in playing games may be reduced due to discomfort caused by not doing so.

  In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous tapping function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, similarly to the case of an operation by a single press, an effect change (for example, an operation sound) due to the reception of the effect is performed. Etc.) only once. After the first effect change (for example, operation sound), a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, an effect change (operation sound) when an effect is received is made every time a predetermined short time elapses. In other words, in this case, a time allowance can be given between the generation of the first effect reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second effect reception (operation sound). While performing the operation according to the above, it is possible to determine whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time just by performing a so-called long-press operation while avoiding a sense of incongruity due to the unstable number of effect receptions. The effect that appears to be feasible is realized.

  However, from the player's point of view, providing time allowance between generating the first effect reception (operation sound) and generating the second effect reception (operation sound) is itself. It is useless in operation effects, and the number of effects reception (operation sound) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (simple continuous hits when performing an operation by a so-called long press) There is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the speed being felt slow.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation on the operation means is long. As in the case of the operation (such as long press), the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, it is as if the single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. (Such as the feeling of a fast repeated hit) can be reminded to the player. Thereby, all operation modes can be adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect when the operation is performed by a single push (whether the effect is a single effect change or a plurality of effect changes). Even if this is the case, it is possible to appropriately maintain the number of times of effect changes (for example, operation sounds) per unit time.

  FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Here, description will be made assuming that the operation button 410 is employed as the operation means. Also, in other drawings including FIG. 273, the specific sound output outlined in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception in response to the operation performed on the button 410, The specific sound output in black in the figure indicates a specific sound generated following the specific sound output in white in the figure when no effect is received when the operation of the operation button 410 is not performed. It is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds be the same without any difference.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), a mode in which the operation state is maintained for only a short time at the timing tx11 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given (single operation). It is assumed that one operation has been performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is performed at the same time. Processing for starting output of a display (display pattern at the time of operation) accompanying the operation is performed.

  Then, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after outputting the specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, the player's hand separates from the operation button 410. Even if a situation where no operation is performed (in the figure, a period from timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure) occurs, in this situation, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently performed. It can be output in a targeted manner.

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from timing tx11 has been completed at timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the completion of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if the operation by the player is not detected at all until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) is given each time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses. )), A specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 can be output intermittently.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), five times (N times) from the start of the grace time TY1 until the lapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length such that a minute specific sound (for example, “picone”) can be output. Thereby, even if an operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound accompanying the operation (a sound corresponding to the effect reception). Is a specific sound that is output at least five times (N times) at the timing of operation detection, and four times (N− times) output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even when there is no operation. (One time) and the total number of specific sounds).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. Even when the timing tx13 at which the time TY1 ends, the specific sound being output is cut off (for example, “pico”) at the timing tx13 (output interruption processing, other processing, etc.). And the specific sound (the first to fourth specific sounds in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a)) that has been output until the timing tx13 arrives. An output (sound waveform) in the same manner appears. In other words, if a specific sound accompanying an operation is interrupted on the way, it becomes unclear whether the operation has been performed multiple times or not, and in the end, the operational feeling as if the operation was performed multiple times. May be difficult for the player to remember (it may make the player think that it is only a specific sound generated in a pseudo manner in the non-operation state). It is expected that it will be solved appropriately.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined validity period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period TY1, the new operation will no longer be accepted for the effect. Until the grace time TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) is output each time the automation time TY2 arrives. In other words, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined validity period ends, it is necessary to avoid that the number of effect receptions becomes unstable when a single-shot operation is performed. Needless to say, it is possible to make the player memorize a feeling as if he / she performed an operation within a period exceeding the predetermined validity period, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In this sense, a display (such as a remaining time display in which the validity period is continued) that allows the player to recognize whether the predetermined validity period is continuing or ended is provided. It can be said that it is more desirable to output the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) of the specific sound under the condition that it is possible to recognize that the state has been ended.

  It should be noted that the “specific sound output accompanying operation” in the figure is not a signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, but rather a volume waveform of a specific sound that is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses (other sound outputs are output). (Removed waveforms) are conceptually shown. As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the specific sound of the last output to finish outputting to the end elapses, and the specific sound of the previous output is On the other hand, sound data of a new specific sound is output in a form overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output a specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a fast continuous tapping operation was performed. It is expected that the player will be able to remember a special feeling.

  Incidentally, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to the mode in which 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the drawing) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is reproduced. Loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” in the drawing) that repeats playback every time the automation time TY2 elapses may be used. Further, a mode in which a plurality of specific sounds output continuously and intermittently as one sound data may be reproduced. In a mode in which a plurality of specific sounds are reproduced as one sound data, all the specific sounds do not necessarily need to be output as the same single sound, but may be sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), with respect to the display output on the game board effect display device 1600, the operation display pattern accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand leaves from and no operation is performed (the period between timings tx12 and tx13 in the figure), the display content of the operation display pattern evolves a plurality of times in this situation. It is something that can be done.

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from timing tx11 has been completed at timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, setting the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length based on the completion of the operation state (detection state) is as described above. It is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order from the timing tx11 to the time until the set grace time TY1 times out. Is executed, the display contents of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

  The content of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, in the form shown in FIG. 274. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 274, “display scene 1” is a moving image depicting the state in which the ally character is about to pull the sword right now, and “display scene 2” is the ally character. This is a moving image depicting a state in which the character draws his sword and cuts off the ia. “Display scene 3” is a moving image depicting a state in which the ally character is fighting with the enemy character with the sword in the first mode. , “Display scene 4” is a moving image depicting a situation in which the ally character is fighting with the enemy character with the sword in the second mode, and “display scene 5” is a moving image in which the ally character is composed of the enemy character and the third character. It is a moving image depicting a situation in which a fight with a sword is performed in an aspect.

  After the operation-time display pattern accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is output intermittently, so that the ally character becomes an enemy character. This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if the effect of fighting with the character is progressing in response to a plurality of operations. The display scenes 1 to 5 do not necessarily need to be moving images, and may be still images. Further, in the game board effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the operation display pattern, various effect displays (such as a hold display and an operation instruction image) may be displayed. One of these effect displays may include an image that changes the effect (color change, etc.) each time an effect is received by the operation of the player, but it is recognized whether or not the effect is received. In order to make the operation difficult, it is important that the image is displayed as an image smaller than the operation display pattern.

  Here, in the operation-time display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), between the start of the grace time TY1 and the lapse of this time. The display is set to have a time length such that at least five (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. Thereby, even if an operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is provided, at least five display contents of the operation display pattern (M ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1) display scenes 2 to 5 sequentially displayed (evolved) even after no operation) And the total number of displayed items).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). Is reached, unlike the case of the specific sound, the operation display pattern is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 without cutting it to the end without cutting it. In other words, unlike the case of a specific sound that has no progression, the display pattern at the time of operation that has progression in the production contents is intentionally interrupted in the middle of the display scene, so that if the operation is continued, the display content is changed. It gives the player the impression that it may have been able to make further progress, and this is expected to encourage further operation by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the operation-time display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace time TY1 starts and ends. It can be said that setting to is more desirable in order to prompt a further operation by the player. In order to encourage the player to perform further operations, only a part of all the display scenes 1 to 5 is displayed between the start and the end of the grace period TY1. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined validity period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the lapse of the period, the new valid operation is stopped and the predetermined validity period is stopped. At the end of the period (a state in which the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and a display showing the result as the operation display pattern is performed. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progress according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode after the display scene 1 is displayed. May be set in advance according to the time from when the specific sound is output to when it is output again (automation time TY2), or may be set irrespective of the time (automation time TY2). It may be something. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or occurrence of a new display in the content of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 274, display scene 1 includes “from the state of holding the sword, There is a display change due to "drawing of a moving image in a state where the sword is drawn", and display scene 3 has a display change due to "an effect occurs when an ally character fights an enemy character"). It is more desirable. If a display scene having such a display change is used, it is possible to make it seem as if the display change in each display scene is caused by the reception of the effect, so that the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of discomfort will be resolved even if they are not strictly adjusted. In addition, a plurality of display scenes need not always be prepared as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (such as continuous hits) is given a plurality of times. It is assumed that the operation is performed in the long mode in which the operation is maintained. Therefore, at the timing tx21, similarly to the case of the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed based on the detection (determination). Processing to start the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) accompanying the operation are performed.

  Also, in the operation maintaining period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, similarly to the case of the above-mentioned non-operation period (the period from the timing tx12 to tx13), the identification is performed every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, a "picone") can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be output sequentially according to a predetermined time and order. The display contents of the hour display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, during the operation maintaining period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Periodically monitor (determine whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, detection of a falling edge in a detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having the predetermined time length is not set, and during the periodical monitoring, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses" A process of outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) ”and a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order” are performed. In other words, during the operation maintaining period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), “Every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and the determination that the operation is detected is made. A process such as outputting a specific sound (e.g., "picone") based on the operation detection state is determined every time the automation time TY2 elapses. No processing such as "display content is advanced based on determination" is performed, and "periodic monitoring (determination) of whether or not operation of operation button 410 is continued (operation state)" is performed. "A process for outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ") every time the automation time TY2 elapses", and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order. Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. The “periodical monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” is executed as a process that is executed a plurality of times during the lapse of the automation time TY2. Is what is done.

  Thereafter, as a result of “periodical monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which the determination that the operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the determination result. The grace time TY1 is set. However, at this time, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) every time the automation time TY2 elapses” and “a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are performed in accordance with a predetermined time and order. The “sequential output process” is executed continuously over the period up to the timing tx23 until the grace period TY1 ends, even after the timing tx22 at which the operation state ends. That is, in this case, from the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22), the state in which the player's hand leaves the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) straddling the timing of the transition, the specific sound can be intermittently output in a single processing mode in which the output is performed again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the operation-time display pattern can be continuously output in a single processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, in producing the specific sound output mode at the time of a single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the specific sound output mode at the time of a long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b), respectively. Thus, the processing mode (program) related to the output of the specific sound can be shared between them. Similarly, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are respectively shown. In creating them, a processing mode (program) related to the output of the operation display pattern can be shared between them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273 (a), at the timing tx12, as a result of “periodical monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed. In addition, the state in which the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) changes to the state in which the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) straddling the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in a single processing mode in which the specific sound is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. The operation display pattern is continuously output in a single processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

  Thus, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as when the operation is performed in a so-called long-press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is output intermittently. In other words, in this case, when the operation is performed on the operation button 410, the single push (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if the action is being performed (such as a feeling as if a rapid continuous hit is being performed). This makes it possible to stabilize the responsiveness of the effect when the single-push operation is performed (whether the effect is a single effect change or a plurality of effect changes) and to determine which operation mode (single-press, Even if “long press” is adopted, it is possible to preferably maintain the number of times of the effect change (specific sound) caused by the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode (FIG. 273 (a)), and the operation is performed in a so-called long-press mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change is caused by (b)), in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), in effect, one effect is received at the timing tx11, and the white outline in the figure is specified accordingly. While the sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the effect is accepted four times each time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11. The specified specific sound output is output for four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined validity period, at least a specific number of production receptions is required, or every time a production is received, a production lottery is performed and a specific lottery is performed according to the result. In the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), when an effect of a type that causes an effect to appear is performed, since only one effect reception has actually occurred, a specific effect is caused to appear. That is not something we can expect. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the effect reception is not occurring, the specific sound output indicated by black in the figure is dared to be performed. Even if it is a situation where it is not expected that a specific production result will appear, it will be operated multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring Even if the player who is not good at (for example, the continuous hitting speed is slow) performs a single operation, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much effect reception has been performed only by confirming the specific sound output one by one. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been performed, it is possible to add a level of attention to how much effect reception has occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after sequentially outputting the display scene 1 to the display scene 5, the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is timed up. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or a specific production result is obtained within the predetermined validity period and the production condition is satisfied, the ally character and the enemy character and the sword are repeatedly output. The depiction that makes the meeting by the mere appears. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific effect is such that the ally character defeats the enemy character as a result of such a fight with the sword, and the specific effect results within a predetermined validity period. Does not appear, it is desirable to display, at the end thereof, a rendering effect result at the time of failure in which a state in which the ally character has been defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword fight is depicted.

  Thus, the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long-press mode (FIG. 273 (b)), the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress. By doing so, even a player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times is encouraged to perform the operation with peace of mind. However, in practice, during the above-mentioned predetermined validity period, the operation on the operation button 410 is often performed as a multiple tap operation in a single-shot mode. It is important to make the player memorize the operational feeling that each of the effect receptions is generated by one operation in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. However, if the operation feeling that the effect is received by one operation at a time is completely reflected as the effect, a player who is good at performing the operation multiple times is more advantageous than a player who is not good at performing the operation multiple times. Since the performance becomes as if it were a certain effect, it is required to achieve both of the performance elements (operating feeling, effect fairness) in such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, in order to secure an operational feeling that an effect is received by one operation at a time, an effect having immediateness to the operation is set as “operated. Paying attention to the fact that "whether a sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "whether the display is generated (or changed) when the operation button is pressed" Each time an operation on the 410 is performed in a single-push mode, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output in accordance with the operation timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hit operation in a single-shot mode during a period from timing tx31 to timing tx32 of a predetermined valid period. Suppose. Then, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment triggers the detection of a new specific sound with respect to the previously output specific sound (specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output so that the sound data is overwritten on the specific channel. As described above, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-shot mode, the specific sound is output intermittently a plurality of times, but such output is performed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again while the player is operating, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is chopped (interrupted) in the middle of the operation so that the operation by the player can be performed. , The specific sound is newly output and it can be explicitly indicated that the effect has been accepted.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode or when the operation is performed by long-pressing, the specific sound of the last output is completely output. The automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the specific sound elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output over the specific channel with respect to the previously output specific sound. This is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automation time TY2), but the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple tapping operation in a single-shot mode. In this case, the specific sound in the output state is cut off every time an irregular player's operation timing arrives, and a new specific sound is output. This makes it possible for the player to appropriately remember the operational feeling that the effect reception is occurring.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), every time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the predetermined validity period, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). A process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this regard, in the period of timings tx31 to tx32 in which the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-shot mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of the periodic monitoring of whether the operation state is in (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state is completed, and a predetermined time length is set accordingly. The grace time TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 until the grace time TY1 ends (time-up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is released. Thus, the state is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period from the timing tx31 to the timing tx32, each time the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state or the non-operation state, the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state is performed. The state transition is made rapidly between the state in which the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), after performing six consecutive tapping operations during the timing tx31 to tx32, the user becomes tired of multiple consecutive tapping operations. It is assumed that the time required is significantly longer. For a player who is not good at performing such multiple operations, since the timing tx32 or later, it is not possible to perform a plurality of repeated hit operations well, so the number of effect receptions is smaller than that of a player who is good at performing multiple operations. There is a concern that the entertainment interest may decrease due to the reduction. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace time TY1 elapses from the end of the operation state. The output processing is performed as described above. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the time required for the repetitive operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, at least the grace period TY1 after the end of the previous operation state. As long as the player can perform a repetitive operation within a shorter period of time, a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, so that the player can feel as if a rapid continuous operation is being performed. Become like

  For example, at timing tx33, if it is determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed as a result of regular monitoring as to whether or not the operation state has been continued from timing tx32, based on the determination, A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, a specific sound is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses while the operation is not performed by the player, although the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly increased. By performing the process of causing the specific sound, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output continuously and intermittently. However, these specific sounds are output as black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the situation where no effect reception has occurred.

  In this regard, the black specific sounds (the seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only until the grace period TY1 has elapsed since the last operation state ended. However, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (the time does not increase) based on the operation. At the same time, at timing tx34, the specific sound in the figure (the tenth specific sound) associated with the occurrence of the effect reception is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is cut off (interrupted). At the same time, the state is returned to the state where the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated at the timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the monitoring. Based on the determination, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is determined. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation in which the player has not performed an operation, the specific sound black (the eleventh to fourteenth specific sounds) in the figure is output again, and the delay is given. When the player finally performs the operation at the timing tx36 before the time TY1 elapses, the specific sound (the fourteenth specific sound) in the output state, which is blacked out in the figure, is cut off (interrupted). In this manner, the specific sound outlined in the figure (the fifteenth specific sound) is output.

  As described above, even if the time required for the repetitive operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, the repetitive operation is performed at least within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 from the end of the previous operation state. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound outlined in the figure at the timing when the operation is performed by the player and the specific sound outlined in the figure periodically in the situation where the operation is not performed by the player Is output, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, so that the player can remember the feeling as if a rapid continuous operation is being performed. Therefore, according to such an aspect relating to the output of the specific sound, it is possible not only to ensure the operational feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, but also to a player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times. Even in the non-operation state, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently by the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state. , And production fairness).

  However, even in the case where the specific sound is output in such an aspect, in the operation display pattern that has a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined validity period, a plurality of times. If the mode of the progress of the display content is made to differ greatly between the player who is good at the operation and the player who is not good at the multiple operations, after all, the player who is not good at the multiple operations is There is a possibility that a player who is good at performing the operation a plurality of times may have an advantageous effect as if it is advantageous, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as for the display pattern during operation, the display time does not evolve in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 increases. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the operation mode.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 275 (a), as described above, it is not assumed that the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly longer after the timing tx32 of the predetermined valid period. However, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again until the set grace time TY1 times out, and the setting of the grace time TY1 is released. Therefore, there is no timing at which the grace time TY1 times up and ends (specified end timing) within the predetermined validity period.

  When the operation is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 275 (a), the display of the operation-time display pattern (the game board-side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. Thereafter, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 as the operation-time display patterns are determined in advance, regardless of the operation state, even though the speed of the continuous operation is greatly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed sequentially according to the set schedule, which makes it appear that the fairness between the player who is not good at performing multiple operations and the player who is good at performing multiple operations is maintained Will be able to do it.

  However, even if the manner in which the display content as the operation display pattern progresses is the same, the number of times that the effect reception accompanying the operation has actually occurred depends on the player who is not good at performing the operation multiple times and the operation It is inevitable that there is a difference between the player who is good at the game. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined validity period, at least a specific number of production receptions is required, or every time a production is received, a production lottery is performed and a specific lottery is performed according to the result. In the case where the type of effect that causes the effect to appear is performed, the player who is good at performing the operation multiple times is more likely to cause the specific effect to appear, and thus, the effect of performing the operation multiple times Significant significance will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining such staging significance, in terms of sound and display effects, stride fairness is maintained between a player who is not good at performing multiple operations and a player who is good at performing multiple operations. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it can be suppressed that the entertainment interest of the player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times is reduced by making it look as if it has been performed.

  Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the effect acceptance interval (automation time TY2) when performing the long-press operation, the mode related to the progress of the operation display pattern is as follows. Since the same is assumed, it is expected that the occurrence of a situation in which the button degradation is accelerated due to an excessively rapid hit operation being performed is avoided.

  By the way, the example shown in FIG. 275 (b) assumes that the operation on the operation button 410 has not been completed before the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, within the predetermined validity period, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 times out and arrives. (The process of sequentially displaying and developing the display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, with respect to the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends when in the output state comes. Even if this is done, processing (such as output interruption processing or processing of interrupting by overwriting with another sound) such that the specific sound in the output state is cut off (for example, “pico”) at the timing tx37 is performed. As described above, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output until then appears after the timing tx37 arrives without performing the above. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is not changed. If the operation on the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, so that the player can feel as if a rapid continuous operation is being performed. It is possible to do so.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), before the black specific sound (the tenth specific sound) output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the specific sound outlined in the figure is generated twice in such a manner that the output of the tenth specific sound is interrupted, the specific sound outlined in the figure is intermittently output again, and the specific sound accompanying the operation is output. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), the specific sound is output continuously and intermittently, whereas in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily stopped at the timing tx37. . After that, it is clear that the display content is advanced from the first display scene (display scene 1) again in accordance with the timing tx38 at which the specific sound outlined in the figure is output again.

  FIG. 276 shows a predetermined validity period in which the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic multiple-stroke function) described with reference to FIGS. 6 is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when an operation is performed within the predetermined valid period (timings tx41 to tx48) when a specific effect pattern that causes the occurrence of is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 276, now, at timing tx41, a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given occurs, and at timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period, the player Assuming that the operation is started, also in this effect example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound associated with the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display (display pattern during operation) associated with the operation are respectively performed. The process for starting is performed.

  However, in this effect example, when an effect on the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined validity period, a specific sound output outlined in the drawing is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. The output process can be executed.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output in black in the figure is generated even in the situation where the operation of the operation button 410 is not performed and the effect reception is not generated. In this embodiment, the black specific sound output is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output generated at the timing of the production reception (in this production example, the same form is used). ) Is output. In addition, as described above, the display content at the time of operation that appears on the game board side effect display device 1600 is designed to evolve according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if an operation is performed by a long press or a plurality of operations within a predetermined validity period, it is possible to recognize how many effects are received by these operations. It can be said that the situation is difficult. Thus, in this effect example, when an effect on the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined validity period, a specific sound output in the figure is generated in addition to a special sound that is different from the specific sound in a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing the process of outputting at 50%, it is possible to predict to some extent how much effect reception has occurred through such special sound output status.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) has elapsed since the start of the predetermined validity period, two consecutive tapping operations at timings tx42 and tx43 and a timing tx44 Each of the long press operations causes the reception of a total of nine effects, and the specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated nine times (for example, the first to ninth in the figure) , The number of production receptions per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) from the start of the predetermined validity period, the operation in the single operation mode requires a long time such that it cannot be said that the operation is repeated, and the timing tx46. , Tx47, the reception of two effects occurs, and the specific sound output outlined in the figure corresponding thereto is generated two times with a time interval (the tenth in the figure). , The eleventh outlined specific sound), the number of times that the effect is accepted per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern at the time of operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined valid period is started due to the output of the above-described black specific sound. It is continuously output in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48). The operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined valid period starts. In any of the very early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), the display scene is only changed in a manner that the display scene can be switched according to a predetermined schedule. Just checking the output status may indicate that the number of production receptions per unit time is high. Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this regard, when the output state of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the specific sound output outlined in the figure occurs, it is confirmed that a relatively early period (timing (tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started. It is possible to predict to a certain extent how many effect receptions have occurred through the output status of. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to keep to a certain degree which of the specific sound output in the drawing and the specific sound output in the drawing is occurring to some extent. Therefore, it is expected that a player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times will appropriately maintain the game entertainment. In this sense, the special sound can be generated when a specific sound output is generated, but is output based on that an output condition different from the generation of the specific sound output is satisfied. For example, it is required that the special sound is not necessarily generated even if the specific sound output is generated.

  In addition, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when an effect reception is generated may be changed according to the number of effect receptions generated within a predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the specific sound output in the drawing and the specific sound output in the drawing is generated.

  In addition, in view of the fact that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, the special sound has a time value from when the specific sound is output to when it is muted or a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as one. In this example, the time value is set to a value twice as long as the “automation time TY2”. In addition, when outputting a new special sound while the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable that the previous special sound be cut off (interrupted) and a new special sound be output.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, the same effect as when multiple operations are performed can be enjoyed only by performing an operation by a long press, so that the number of players performing multiple operations is reduced. However, there is a concern that the effect as an effect requiring a plurality of operations will be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48), at least in a period after the operation by the player is started at the timing tx42, the operation by the player is long-pressed. A state where the operation is performed as a single operation mode between a state where the operation is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state where the operation is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48) Display of a specific image (specific display) can be permitted only when a certain and specific display condition is satisfied.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm the specific image, it is necessary to perform the operation as a mode of a single operation instead of at least an operation by a long press. Performing the round operation (such as repeated hits) can have a meaning in the performance, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In addition, in this effect example, in order to check the specific image, the condition that only the operation is performed as a single operation mode is not a condition, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless a specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself is increased. Therefore, every time a predetermined validity period occurs, the specific image is operated multiple times (such as a continuous operation) without using the automatic continuous operation (automatic multiple operation) function. ), It seems to be challenging to display a specific image that is highly difficult to appear, and it is operated multiple times without using the auto repeated tapping (automatic multiple operations) function It is expected to encourage others to understand what they do.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (in this case, twice as long as the “automation time TY2”) elapses without a new effect reception occurring from the timing at which the previous effect reception occurred. The fact that an effect hit has been obtained in a predetermined effect lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed is set as the “specific display condition” as a display of a specific image within a predetermined validity period. (Specified display). In this regard, in the predetermined effect lottery, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot determination (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined validity period, an effect condition in which a success display can appear (a high jackpot expectation degree is high) Stage)), the effect can be obtained with a 70% probability. On the other hand, if the big hit is determined to be a big hit (or if the operation is performed within a predetermined validity period). Regardless of how much time is given, in a production situation in which a success display cannot be made to appear (a production situation with a low jackpot expectation), a production hit can only be obtained with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display of the specific image (specific display) appears within the predetermined validity period, it is suggested that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol will appear is high, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. The “specific display condition” is not limited to this, but may be “a specific non-operation time (here,“ automation time TY2 ”) without a new effect reception occurring from the timing when the previous effect reception occurred. Time has passed) and only one of the "determined performance lottery wins" has been adopted as the "specific display condition". The display of the specific image (specific display) may be caused to appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the above-described type, the predetermined effect lottery mode is, for example, an effect state (an effect state with a low jackpot expectation degree) in which a success display can appear depending on an operation mode within a predetermined validity period. In some cases, the effect can be obtained with a probability of 0% (or the effect lottery itself is not performed), but no matter how much operation is performed within a predetermined validity period, a success display cannot be displayed. In the case of (the production situation where the big hit expectation is low), the production may be achieved with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined validity period. In this case, as the specific display, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect is received while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the identification is performed at that time. The display is hidden, and its output is continued on condition that a state where no operation is performed by the player (a state where no new effect reception is generated) is maintained. I have.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, at least it is required that at least a certain number of effect receptions occur in order for a specific effect result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48). The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 at which the eleventh effect reception (the eleventh outlined specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( (Interruption) in such a manner that a success display appears as an operation display pattern. The contents of the success display include the effect contents of portions (display scenes 3 to 5) that are repeated in the operation display pattern, such as defeating an enemy character who was fighting with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable to be related. Further, when the success display appears, it is desirable that the big hit determination indicates that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is high.

  When the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 at which the eleventh effect reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined effect period is terminated at that time and a new effect reception is performed. Will not occur. Therefore, at a timing later than the timing tx47, a specific sound or special sound outlined in the figure does not newly occur, nor does a specific display appear.

  FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 276, but the operation in the single-shot operation mode by the player has a shorter interval than the grace time TY1, but the continuous hit is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it is repeated for a long time which cannot be said.

  As shown in FIG. 277, even when the operation in a single operation mode by the player is repeated for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within a predetermined valid period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is output continuously and intermittently, and the display pattern at the time of operation is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such an effect mode, even if the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined validity period, it is possible to create an effect state as if the continuous tapping operation was performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a person who is performing the continuous tapping operation seriously cannot understand the meaning of performing the continuous tapping operation, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the length of the predetermined validity period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace time TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific effect result (success display) within the predetermined validity period is displayed. Assuming that the minimum number of effect receptions required for appearance is “EU”, these numerical values are set such that the relationship [“Tx1 / Tx2” <EU] holds. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeatedly performed at the last moment when the grace time TY1 elapses, and the specific sound and the operation-time display pattern are continuously output, the production situation is produced by these operations. The number of effect receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) that are required to make a specific effect (success display) appear within a predetermined validity period. That is, in this case, it is possible to prevent a specific effect (success display) from appearing when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner. It is expected that the entertainment interests of those who are playing will be maintained appropriately. In order to obtain such an operation and effect more reliably, the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required to produce a specific effect (success display) within a predetermined validity period is as follows: Strictly, it is required to set a numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up to an integer.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required to produce a specific effect (success display) within a predetermined validity period is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”. Since the value is set to “11 times” which is at least twice the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 at which the predetermined validity period ends. Become. In other words, in this case, a failure display appears due to a shortage of the number of operations, so that it is an effect situation where it is not possible to recognize whether the big hit expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment enables the display of a specific image to appear only in a state where the operation is performed as a single operation and when a specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this regard, in this effect example, when the “specific non-operation time” minimum required to display the specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx3” <EU] is established. Each of these numerical values is to be set in such a manner as to be performed. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to make the specific display appear each time the user performs one operation within the predetermined validity period, the number of effects received within the predetermined validity period will be within the predetermined validity period. In the above, the number of effect receptions (EU), which is a minimum required for causing a specific effect (success display) to appear, is reduced. That is, in this case, a direct effect selection function of performing an attempt to cause the specific display result (success display) to appear at a risk that the specific display result does not appear is performed. Since it is not possible to make an attempt to make it appear many times, it is possible to enhance the directivity when making such an attempt, and it is expected to improve the entertainment interest of the game Become like

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( In this case, a process of displaying a failure display as an operation display pattern in the form of “interruption” is performed. The contents of the failure display include the effect contents of portions (display scenes 3 to 5) that are repeated in the operation display pattern, such as losing an enemy character who had been fighting with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable to be related. Further, when a failure display appears, it is desirable that the big hit determination indicates that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is low.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, the specific sound which is in the output state when the predetermined validity period ends when either the success display or the failure display appears. Is not cut off (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted during the success display or failure display, and then the success display or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is set after the operation state of the player ends, and the specific sound output in black in the non-operation state in the non-operation state is set until the grace time TY1 elapses. This is performed at least four or more times, but the number of “specific black sound output in the drawing” generated in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having a length at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the black-out specific sound output in the non-operation state can be output at least twice or more. Since it occurs, it is possible to make the player feel as if the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) is continued even in the non-operation state.

  Also, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character solely makes a fight with the enemy character with the sword appears. Therefore, a specific display indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit may be performed in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2. According to such a configuration, if the specific display is missed, it is not possible to reconfirm unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace period TY1 elapses. Can be provided, which can be selected between a disadvantage of being wastefully consumed and a disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous tapping operation in a mode in which the effect reception is generated at an interval shorter than the interval at which the effect reception is performed when the operation by the long press is performed (the automation time TY2) is allowed. Thus, it is possible to realize an operation effect with a high degree of freedom by the player (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous tapping operation is performed, the progress of the display scene in the operation-time display pattern is the same as that when the operation by long-pressing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform the high-speed continuous tapping operation, thereby suppressing excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reducing the risk of breakage or the like. Will be done.

  In addition, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined validity period, when performing a type of production that requires at least a specific number of times of effect reception, an operation by a long press is performed only within a predetermined validity period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception of the specific number of times or more occurs only by performing the operation by the long press for a half of the predetermined effective period.

  As shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, a time (specific non-operation time) that is twice as long as the “automation time TY2” elapses without a new effect reception from the timing at which the previous effect reception occurred. Although the display of the specific image (specific display) is caused to appear, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as the specific non-operation time, any time value that is at least twice the “automation time TY2” and within a range in which the grace time TY1 is set to the upper limit value (the grace time TY1 or less) is used. In a state where two or more black specific sounds are output in the non-operating state when the specific sound is output (in a state where a continuous tapping operation is performed in the non-operating state), It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appeared based on the fact that the number of pseudo operations in the non-operation state (the number of times of outputting a specific sound with black dots in the figure) reached a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, a description has been given of a gaming machine in which the plate operation unit 400 is provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of performing the pressing operation by the player and presenting the effect image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 278 to 329, a description will be given of a gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's willingness to operate. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 278 is a front view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 279 is a right side view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same components as those described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in front view. The sword production operation unit 5000 stores a sword section 5010 having a blade section 5011, a handle section 5012, a flange section 5013 sandwiched between the blade section 5011 and the handle section 5012, and a blade section 5011 of the sword section 5010. The sword decoration body 5001 is composed of a sheath 5020 that can be used.

  The sword decoration 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 is movable in the left-right direction in front view. Further, the sword section 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword-drawing direction and the sword-drawing direction. The sword section 5010 is usually in a sword-pulling state in which the sword body section 5011 is housed in the sheath section 5020. In the sword-drawing effect, the sword section 5011 enters a sword-drawing state in which the sword body section 5011 becomes visible to a player. Then, the sword unit 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operating means for receiving a sword-pulling operation by the player and returning to the sword-pulling state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, a description will be given of an opportunity to execute a sword-drawing effect accompanied by the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001). FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of a selection table of an effect pattern in an effect mode in which a sword-drawing effect can be executed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect.

  The effect patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is performed after the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, a pattern in which the sword-drawing production effect is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance. There is a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is not performed even though there is a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is not performed or the sword-drawing production is not performed. Further, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing production, Two patterns, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, are provided.

As shown in FIG. 280 (A), whether to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is randomly selected according to the type of the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the plurality of types of variation patterns are classified into variation patterns for large hits at the time of big hits, variation patterns for small hits at the time of small hits, and variation patterns for the change at the time of misses. It is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed increases as the pattern increases. Specifically, the sword-preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of the variation pattern for the small hit variation, and in the case of the variation pattern for the loss variation. Performed with a 20% probability.
In addition, the variation pattern at the time of out-of-change may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is performed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (B), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing main effect is randomly selected according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation effect. Even if the type of the variation pattern is the same, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, it is set so that the probability of executing the sword-drawing main effect is higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern has a result that is advantageous to the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of advantage, the execution of the sword-drawing preparation effect is set such that the probability of executing the sword-drawing effect is increased. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for the loss variation, the probability of executing the sword-drawing main effect is higher than when the sword-preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for the small hit variation. It should be noted that in the case of the big hit variation pattern, the main sword drawing effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword preparation shift effect.

  In addition, when the sword-drawing production is performed, a sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance, and the variation pattern that is a result that is advantageous to the player has a higher probability that the sword-drawing production in the form with the aura member is performed. Is set to Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect in the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of aura member by sword movement of decorative sword)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-preparing transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword unit 5010 (sword unit 5011) itself capable of accepting a sword placing operation by the player, and the sword unit 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281, 282) and the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword 5010 (sword body 5011), and the sword 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case of an integrated decorative body (FIGS. 283 and 284).

  FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) itself. A sword-drawing state, (C) shows a second sword-drawing state. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is pulled out of the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 281 (A), the sword decoration 5001 in the normal state is a sword-inserted state in which a blade 5011 is housed in a sheath 5020. As shown in FIG. 281 (B), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword-drawing operation in the sword-drawing preparation transition effect has only the portion of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade portion 5011 pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 and can be visually recognized by the player. Becomes the first sword drawn state. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (C), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword-drawing operation in the sword-drawing main effect has the blade 5011 further pulled out from the sheath 5020, and the second sword is mostly visible to the player. State. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state can function as operating means capable of receiving a sword-pulling operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade extraction operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 is sheathed when the blade part 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 281 (A)) to the first withdrawn state (FIG. 281 (B)). Inside the unit 5020, the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 282 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)), and the blade unit 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 also in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 281 (C)). Although described later, the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011 even when the aura member 5030 moves to the maximum, so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade part 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. A pinion 5033. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by the driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into the rightward movement of the rack 5031a and the leftward movement of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) projecting outward from the outer shape of the blade part 5011.

  An LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on a blade shaft 5011b is included below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. When these LEDs emit light, the blade 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated.

  Here, the operation timing of the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state. Is deformed, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword removal state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (including a mode in which the operation is stopped midway, not limited to the mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the maximum) ).

  FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath 5020, where (A) sword-drawing state, (B) first sword-drawing state, and (C). The second sword-drawing state is shown. FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is pulled out of the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 283 (A) to 283 (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword 5010 (sword 5011) includes the aforementioned sword 5010 (sword 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 (the sword state (1st sword state ⇔ 2nd sword state) This enables the sword portion 5010 (sword body portion 5011) to be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to be viewed as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5035 is provided such that the upper end thereof is below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in a completely housed state, and is a hollow cylindrical surrounding aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011; , A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated by the driving means (not shown) so that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in front view, and both pinions are engaged with each other. The movement is converted into the upward linear movement of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 284 (B), stops at a position where the surrounding aura member 5036 is combined with the blade part 5011 to form the second bladed state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED board having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be illuminated.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion is maintained while maintaining the relative positional relationship in accordance with the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword placement state ⇔ first sword state ⇔ second sword state). Although an example of merging with 5011 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start operating (coalescing) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set before the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (not only the full appearance state in which the sword decoration body is fully operated but also the halfway appearance in which the operation is stopped halfway) (Including a state with an aura member in a state). In addition, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade part 5011 so that the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by a player in the first sword-drawing state from the sword-pulling state.

(Example of sword-drawing production using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 285 to 290, a sword-drawing effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) will be described. In the following description, there is a case where the sword preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the drawing), and the effect pattern in which the sword drawing effect is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the diagram). The transition of the screen of the rendering display device 1600 and the transition of the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be described with respect to the rendering patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing rendering is performed. FIG. 285 to FIG. 289 are transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect. FIG. 290 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation validity period of the operation unit.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts by forming a reach state (FIG. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the display area, and an effect image indicating execution of the sword effect (movable of the sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the central display area. Specifically, after an image (Fig. 285 (X2)) in which two samurai face each other and start iai (Fig. 285 (X2)) is displayed, an image of one samurai holding a handle and holding a sword in the sheath (Fig. 285 (X3)) is displayed.
Here, an effect indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is movable is performed by an image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 281 (A)).

  Next, in a case where the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of the variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5), the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed. When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes closed of the samurai holding the sword in the above-described image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed with the passage of time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state, so that a sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed. Note that, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the sword-drawing main effect is more likely to be executed thereafter than in the case where it is not performed. Therefore, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect can be said to be an expectation effect in which the expected degree of execution of the sword-drawing main effect is indicated by the movement of the sword decoration 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, the player can expect the sword decoration body 5001 to further change to the second sword-drawing state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decoration 5001 in the first drawn state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the aura member is provided. On the other hand, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration 5001 may maintain the sword-inserted state, and the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) may be kept displayed.

  Here, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the subsequent sword-drawing production is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath 5020 at the timing of this sword-drawing preparation transition production effect (see FIG. 282 (A)). )) To the open state (FIG. 282 (B)), the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade part 5011 is deformed. At this time, in the sword decoration body 5011 in the first sword removal state, the portion from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the habaki 5011a can be visually recognized by the player. Since it is provided below, even if the aura member 5030 moves to the maximum, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 is visually recognized by the player. Further, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state. Therefore, the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operating means capable of accepting a sword placing operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation depends on the form of the operating unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  Then, after the completion of the sword-drawing preparation effect, if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed by lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-preparing transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes into the samurai's forehead (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the image in which the samurai gives up at the timing when the fluctuating display of the center decoration pattern is stopped is displayed. And a stop mode different from the right side decorative pattern, that is, a stop mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the first drawn state to the sword-pulling state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and the sword-pulling state is maintained. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword decoration 5001 functioning as the operation means.

  On the other hand, in the case where the sword-drawing main effect is executed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is finished, an image in which Iai slashing is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the second sword-drawing position. State. Here, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state, the aura member 5030 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is not visible. A form without an aura member that allows the undeformed blade portion 5011 to be visually recognized is provided.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, a case will be described in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state has no aura member. When the sword-drawing effect is started, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the light is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the above-described enlarged image of the warrior's eyes with his eyes closed (FIG. 286 (X5)). 287 (A1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that has been set is drawn and the opponent samurai is cut (FIG. 287 (A2)). At this time, the decorative sword 5001 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized by the player.

  Next, when a predetermined period elapses after the decorative sword 5001 is in the second drawn state, the sword decorative body 5001 is sword-putted by the player, that is, the handle 5012 of the sword 5010 from which the player has jumped out of the sheath 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of holding down and pushing the blade 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect for prompting the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same form as the second drawn sword state of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message of "Place the sword!" (FIG. 287 ( A3)). In addition, the LED of the internal LED board 5011c of the sword decoration body 5001 blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, and the operation effect image is displayed in the foreground so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Iaia slashing scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). (See FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

  Then, during the operation validity period, when the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and performs a sword-putting operation of putting the sword body portion 5011 in the sheath portion 5020, and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-putting state, the player A post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of an advantageous result, and the effect is terminated with a symbol type hit notification (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, a cut effect image is flashy displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the center decoration symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the image of the opponent's samurai is defeated, and the image of the conclusion of Iai is stopped at the center of the screen in the same stop mode as the left and right decorative patterns, that is, in the big hit mode (here, “7”) It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of order, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 288 (D1)), and the center decoration symbol that has been variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the center decorative pattern is different from the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern at the center of the screen together with an image in which the opponent's samurai cannot be defeated at the timing of the stop display, that is, an off mode (here, “6”) Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 288 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 289, a case where the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state is in the form with an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing effect is started, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the above-described enlarged image of the warrior's eyes with his eyes closed in FIG. 286 (X5). 289 (B1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that has been set is drawn and the opponent samurai is cut (FIG. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1), and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. In this case, the blade portion 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 when the state changes from the first sword state to the second sword state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, only the blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized by the player, and after the second blade cutting state, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state to deform the blade portion 5011 to form a form with an aura member. It is sufficient that the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member in the second sword-drawing state before the operation validity period starts. However, since the sword decoration 5001 is already in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can perform a sword placement operation, the appearance of the aura member 5030 makes it possible to reliably recognize a change in the degree of expectation. If the operation requires a long time, there is a concern that the player may cause an erroneous operation. Therefore, when a series of movements from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state are performed as in the present example, the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player, and the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. It is preferable that the operation validity period be started immediately.

  Further, the images in FIGS. 289 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 287 (A1) and (A2), and the player can see whether the sword decoration 5001 has the aura member only by looking at the images. It is not possible to determine whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp which of the form with the aura member and the form without the aura member. Thereby, the sword decoration body 5001 can be noticed before the sword decoration body 5001 functions as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation means, and enjoy the operation effect without being confused. Can be. Note that the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not need to be the same as described above, and may be any image that resembles the player to look at the sword decoration 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in the samurai image (differences in eye color and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation validity period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form as the sword decoration 5001 with an aura member. It will be displayed (FIG. 289 (B3)). Subsequent effects are the same as those in FIG. 288 described above, and a description thereof will not be repeated. In the case of the mode with the aura member, the effect images in the above-mentioned FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) may be displayed more gorgeously than the mode without the aura member.

Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period in the sword-drawing effect in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are performed will be described.
As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), an iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is first shifted from the sword-inserted state as a sword-drawing preparation effect. The state changes to the drawn state (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern with the form with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state. It is provided so as to be invisible to a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword removal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword removal state, and in the case where the sword decoration body 5001 changes, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member. I can't. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and the possibility of the aura member-attached form is further increased, so that the player's sense of expectation can be increased. Even if the main sword-drawing effect is not executed, a sword-movable suggestion effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state can be captured.

  Then, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect ends, the sword-drawing main effect starts, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (time t2). After that, the operation valid period starts after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the sword decoration 5001 functions as the operation means (time t3). When the operation is valid, an operation promoting effect using a sword associated with a series of Iaido effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), a post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 returns from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state by the sword-pulling operation by the player. Then, the preset operation validity period ends and the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby ending a series of Iaido effects. Time t5). Note that the operation validity period may end when a player's operation is detected, as indicated by a dashed line in the figure. If no operation is detected during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-delivery state when the operation validity period ends.

  Here, during a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword state to when the operation validity period starts, the player operates the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (aura member). A period longer than the operation validity period (time t4 to t3) is secured as a mode check period in which it is possible to check whether the mode is the attached mode or the light emission mode. In other words, even when the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operable by the player reaches the operation position (second sword-drawing state) functioning as an operation means, operation acceptance is started immediately (operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final state of the operation unit at the operation position. This allows the player to check the final mode before operating the sword decoration 5001, to increase the expectation for the subsequent deployment (for example, to increase the expectation in the case of the configuration with the aura member), and to prepare for the mind. Because the operation validity period starts as soon as the second sword is in the state and the state of the operation means can not be confirmed and the operation is switched to the operation effect hurriedly, there is a concern that the interest of the game will decrease. Can be dispelled.

  The sword decoration effect of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in a series of Iaido effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and includes a movable effect (time t0 to t3) as a movable body of the sword decoration 5001. An operation effect (time t3 to t4) as an operation means is set as an associated effect. This makes it possible for the player to impress the switching of the function of the sword decoration body 5001 with a surprisingness and a variety of effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest caused by a uniform effect by the conventional operation means. Can be.

  In the above-described production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself and the aura member 5030 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided on the frame 2020 and is combined with a frame-side member (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

  As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deformation or uniting) the aspect of the members (sword part 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the general decorative movable body in appearance. are doing. In addition, the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword-pulling state, first sword-pulling state, second sword-pulling state, the form without the aura member and the form with the aura member) is such that the game ball is sent to the one starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery that is selected by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can indicate the degree of expectation that the variable display will be an advantageous result for the player due to a change in the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, and increase the player's interest in the operation means (sword decoration body 5001). Because of this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, before the decorative sword 5001 changes to the second sword-drawing state (operating position) that can be operated by the player, the degree of expectation is indicated by changing the state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword-drawing state to the first sword-drawing state. are doing. In addition, the appearance of the aura members 5030 and 5035 in the state change from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state indicates the degree of expectation. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 of the present example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the first sword extraction state and the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (operation position). Therefore, the player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operating means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation is high. In this mode, there is a concern that the player may perform an erroneous operation even though the operating means is not yet at an operable position at the time when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001 of this example. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the erroneous operation as described above can be prevented.

  Note that, in the above-described first drawn state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is drawn out of the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot see the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visually recognizable in the one-blade state. At this time, the amount of sword removal in the first sword extraction state is set to be less than the maximum amount of sword extraction in the second sword extraction state (operation position). Here, when the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the second sword-drawing state, it is in a completely appearing state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first sword-drawing state, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword-drawing state, You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, in a case where a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) can be visually recognized by the player in the first sword-drawing state, it is required that the aura member is included in the stage of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect (high expectation). Since the player can understand and place great expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing performance is not executed in the subsequent development becomes extremely large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation effect is performed, the emotion of the player is greatly shaken by the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect, and an effect with a high level of entertainment for the game can be provided.

(Modification 1-Sword-drawing effect using operation buttons)
In the following, referring to FIGS. 291 to 294, a case where a sword-drawing effect is executed in the reach effect, and the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-drawing effect is triggered by a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. 291 to 293 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the first modification. FIG. 294 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 according to the first modification and the operation timing of the operation unit.
In addition, the same description as the above-described sword-drawing effect (FIGS. 285 to 290) will be appropriately omitted.

  Here, an effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the drawing) in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, and after the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect Regarding the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4) in the drawing) in which the sword-drawing effect is performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation buttons 410 The transition and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 will be described.

  When the reach effect is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an Iaido effect is started (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and an effect indicating the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation effective period are performed, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation is performed (FIG. 291 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same luminous mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It should be noted that the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  If the sword-drawing preparation effect and the sword-drawing effect are not performed and the result is a disconnection, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is terminated in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image for notifying the loss result (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001 and the operation buttons 410.

  In the case where the main sword drawing effect is performed after execution of the sword preparation transition effect, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-pulling state. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, white characters of “Tenchu” are displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 292 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which the warrior on his side tries to put his hand on the sword. (FIG. 292 (F2)). Next, a sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (form with an aura member) is started (FIG. 292 (F3), FIG. 293 (G2), and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura member) by the main sword-drawing effect, the immediately preceding FIG. 293 (G1) is different from the samurai Iai image shown in FIG. 293 (G1), an image in which the lightning is running is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 292 (F3). ) And the degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai according to the strength of lightning.

  Subsequent effects are the same as those in FIGS. 287 (A2), (A3) and FIG. 288 described above. When the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state and a predetermined period elapses, the sword decoration 5001 is replaced by the player. In order to function as an operation means that can effectively accept the operation of the sword decoration body 5001, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword placing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is prompted to perform a sword-pulling operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 293 (G2)), and a symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the sword-pulling operation by the player (FIG. 293 (G3) or ( G4)).

  Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), an operation validity period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword decoration 5001 starts to change its state, and changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-pulling state. Here, in the first drawn state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decoration 5001 is operated to function as the operating means. An effective period occurs, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (time t3). When the player operates during the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). If the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the preset operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the final form (first time) when the operation valid period ends. The shape and the state of the aura member may be changed at a stroke. Further, the state change timing from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state is changed in accordance with the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, that is, the state changes to the first sword-drawing state and then to the second sword-drawing state after a certain period of time. It may be. When the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 is switched to the second operation at the end of the operation validity period. The state is returned from the sword-drawing state to the sword-drawing state.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 by the player. The start timing of the sword decoration of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the start timing of the sword decoration of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (time tx). As described above, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword-drawing operation and sword-drawing operation) depending on which of the operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation validity period of one operation means, the operation becomes invalid.

  As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decoration 5001 functions as the operating means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the sword decoration 5001 is deformed and the state is changed to change the state with the aura member). In the second drawn state). Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's willingness to operate can be increased.

  Further, based on the operation of the operation buttons 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an effect image (FIGS. 292 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 293) corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration 5001. Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operation value of the operation buttons 410 can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification 2-Stage Aura Sword Direction Using Operation Buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299, based on the first modification, the appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decoration 5001, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011. A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 295 to FIG. 299 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect in the second modification. The description of the same effects as described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 levels. The aura level 0 indicates a completely accommodated state where the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player (FIG. 284 (A)). The aura level 3 is a completely appearing state (see FIG. 3) that is maximally visible from the player by the aura member 5035 being united with the blade part 5011 in the second drawn state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the sword-inserted state. 284 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears so as to be visible to a player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears visibly to the player by two thirds of the full appearance state.

  In this case, there is no performance pattern (Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the drawing in which the sword-preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, and there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword-drawing main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a final form (a form with an aura member in a complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by one operation of the operation button 410 (in the figure) (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), and a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation buttons 410, and the sword decoration Explanation of the operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described first modification, the final form (the form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by one operation of the operation button 410. A stage operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the sword-preparation transition effect is not performed or the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, that is, in the effect pattern in which the state of the sword decoration 5001 does not change even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → follow the same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (E1) (E2) (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIG. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

  Also, there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect, but the sword-drawing main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), After the same effect as in FIGS. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) of the first modification (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword body part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword body part 5011 in the sword-pulling state, and completely appears when the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 296 (I1)). The sword decoration body 5001 according to the first modification has the aura member 5030 in the form with the aura member 5030, and the second modification has the aura member 5035 in the modification 2. However, other effects are the same as those of the first modification. 292 (F1) (F2) → Follow the same effect transition as FIG. 293 (FIG. 296 (I1) (I2) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  Also, in the case where there is no sword-drawing preparation effect but the sword-drawing effect is performed, a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and in the effect pattern in which the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 changes stepwise, 1 The same effect transition as before is followed until the operation of the first operation button 410 (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) in which the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5035. The image displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as that in FIG. 296 (I1) (FIG. 297 (J1)).

  Next, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 297 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

  First, when the set aura level is “0” (that is, in the case of the mode without the aura member), even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 maintains the completely accommodated state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the stage operation effect is finished (there is no operation request for the operation button 410 thereafter), and a notification is made to return to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state. An image (here, white characters of “Iza” on the blackout screen) is displayed (FIG. 297 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 follows the same transition as FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. 293 of the above-described modification 1 in a rendering mode (color, sound, or the like) according to the aura level 0 in a form without an aura member. (FIG. 297 (J4) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the set aura level is any of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the completely accommodated state to the one-third appearance state. Become. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is illuminated with a green color indicating the aura level 1.

  Next, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed. At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to a preset aura level.

  When the aura level is "1", the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Thereafter, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image (in this case, “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) notifying that the operation returns to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state. (White characters) are displayed, and an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K2)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 1/3 appearance state, and in the effect form (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1 (FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. 293 of the first modification). Following the same effect transition (FIG. 298 (K3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 出現 appearance state to the 出現 appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is illuminated in red to indicate the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promoting effect of illuminating decoration is performed (FIG. 298 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red indicating the aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to a preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the ／ appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Hereinafter, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image (in this case, “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) indicating that the display will return to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state. Is displayed, and an image indicating the aura level is displayed (FIG. 299 (M1)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 2/3 appearance state, and in the effect form (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2 (FIG. 292 (F2) of FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 出現 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating the aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the stage operation effect is terminated (hereinafter, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and a sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state. An image notifying of returning (here, white characters of “Iza” on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 299 (L2)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to FIG. 292 (F2) of FIG. The effect transition is traced (FIG. 299 (L3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  In the above description, the degree of merging with the blade part 5011 of the aura member 5035 is changed each time the operation timing at which the aura level increases increases the range that can be visually recognized by the player (increases the degree of appearance). Not limited to Even if the aura level rises, the aura level determined without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white character “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) is determined. A stock type merging may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is merged with the blade portion 5011 at a stroke so as to have an appearance corresponding to the level. Further, the target of increasing the appearance in a stepwise manner is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011). For example, the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) may be gradually changed from the first sword state to the second sword state.

  As described above, in the second modification, while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in the movable state, the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410. It is possible to provide a simple operation effect, and to further enhance the interest of the game than in the first modification. In addition, since a plurality of operation opportunities are given to the player to develop the effect step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the effect and prevent the interest in the effect from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is notified so as to be recognizable in a subsequent effect, the player can feel the lingering sound of the operation effect.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 300 to FIG. 302 are diagrams illustrating screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points mainly differ from the aforementioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decoration body 5001 in a sword-inserted state functions as an operating means, and detects a sword-drawing operation by a player. Second, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Operable up to the front center.

When the changing symbols form the reach state, the display of the three decorative symbols changes to the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, there is provided a specific decorative member SDY (robin) that can be moved up and down.
In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and is partially stopped above the display area in a state (initial state) in which the player can visually recognize the screen. I have. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sword-inserted state.

  In the princess reach effect, after the image of the princess heading to the back of the screen is displayed (FIG. 300 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image indicating the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation validity period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to perform a sword removal operation of the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. Is also good. Then, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a development pattern or an end pattern set in advance.

  The sword-drawing operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the sword body portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 such that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 in a sword-put state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation in which the player can feel another operation different from his / her own sword-drawing operation via the handle 5012 grasped by the player, such as movement or vibration in which the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moves up and down. Just fine. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after detecting the operation, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, it is possible to reduce unnecessary contact (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) with the sword decoration 5001 and prevent the movable body from being broken or damaged. Can be.

  Although the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear in the player's sword-drawing operation here, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword-drawing operation according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600, and remains stationary above the display area (initial state). State) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) is positioned at the front center (the lower part of the display area below the display area of the effect display device 1600). (D1) (FIG. 301 (D1)) Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the second drawn state (FIG. 301 (D2)) Note that, at this time, a plurality of patterns of princess shadows projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided. The color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed thereafter may be made different to indicate the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (such as the degree of expectation of hitting and the game profit when hitting).

  Then, after the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into the second sword-drawing state by the sword-drawing operation by the player, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword-drawing state The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. The image of the surprised princess is displayed after the screen is removed (FIG. 302 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation has been performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display of this time is a hit, a princess with a smile is notified of the hit. An image is displayed (FIGS. 302 (E1) and (E2)), and an image notifying of the loss is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it is lost (FIGS. 302 (F1) and (F2)).

  Note that, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. However, a movable effect in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front left / right direction. If the player cannot move because he / she is grasping the game, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is displayed. Even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, the production itself proceeds, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is performed at the left-right movable timing of the sword decoration 5001 (FIG. 301 (D 3)). If it is held at the performed position, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, the effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) progress regardless of whether the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration 5001 is executed. The game progress does not stagnate because it is configured to play. It should be noted that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the holding of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is released, or may be configured not to perform the movable effect. You may.

  As described above, in the princess reach effect, the specific decoration member SDY that suggests the operation effect (operation validity) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and movable by the sword operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward by the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (to the operation position). To the left). That is, based on the sword-drawing operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword-drawing operation was performed, thereby increasing the operation value of the player and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since one operation means is configured to be operable in a stepwise different manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right direction after operation) by a player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that the left-right movable movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed for the purpose of performing an effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and an effect integrated with the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Although the operating position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operating position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration operation is performed in a state where the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display 1600, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed to be displaced to the left (left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example by the player is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword removal operation of pulling the sword part 5011 upward from below), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in a direction (the left-right direction or the like as in the present example) different from the operation direction (here, the up-down direction) when the player operates.

  Further, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be determined. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm the detection for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movable performance of the sword decoration body 5001 thereafter, and preventing the movable body from being damaged by unnecessary contact. Furthermore, when the movable effect cannot be performed due to contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and an operation is required during the operation valid period. Even after the end of the detection notification operation, the operation means is prohibited from even touching, so that the operation value of the operation means can be enhanced.

(Other effect pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 303 to 305 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration body 5001 in a reach effect including an operation effect of the operation buttons 410 used in various aspects. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation effect indicating an expectation at which a change during execution is a big hit as an operation effect of the operation button 410 is performed, and an operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303 (A)), first, the operation valid period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is The operation is started, and an operation promoting effect for urging the player to press the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 303 (B)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and operation button 410 to be operated is light-embellished. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword delivery state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an effect indicating a degree of expectation is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, an effect image is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 1600 when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected. After that (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). After that, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 304 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the effect indicating the degree of expectation for the variable display during execution. For example, the effect may be displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image indicating the degree of expectation (FIG. 304 (N2)). Alternatively, a character that changes the currently held display may appear.

  In a pattern in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 are performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 303 (M1) in which an effect image indicating that an operation effect for requesting a sword decoration operation of sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a message of the title “chance of swords” and the operation description “a sword is required”) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivery state to the second sword-drawing state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword-drawing state and the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is moved in the initial state in small increments in the up-down direction to produce the effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the current fluctuation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, when a player's sword placing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 305 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) has been released. The image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “spectacular” message) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, in the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is out of order, when the player's sword-pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft hand) is only stopped at the initial state by the small movement. In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the loss (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting a degree of expectation and developing an operation effect of another operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be performed. At the time of operating, the subsequent deployment cannot be specified. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation, can be suppressed.

  Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword placing operation) are different between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001). (The pressing operation of the operation button 410) is requested by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game, which is a concern due to a monotonous operation instead of shining.

  In the present example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword putting operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means to be effective at the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration body 5001 rather than the operation button 410 having a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable.

(Other effect pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a reach effect. Here, the pattern ((A), (B1), (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decoration member SDY (robin) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is not moved based on the pressing operation and is displayed in the out-of-position mode, the symbol display in the out-of-position mode is changed again and the player is provided with an operation opportunity again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) in the figure → (P1) to (P4) → Q when operation opportunity of sword decoration 5001 is given / R when operation opportunity of operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , A message of “moving the movable body with a single blow of the button” is displayed (FIG. 306 (B)), and then an operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 306 (C)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword delivery state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. In addition, the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one shot (one time), and may be continuous hitting (a plurality of times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is gradually moved up and down in the initial state during the effective period of the operation of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, when the decorative sword 5001 is to be operated later, the decorative sword 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the second drawn state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is movable and a big hit is made, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is completely dropped from the initial state. (FIG. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) has been released is displayed with an image for notifying the big hit (the decorative pattern). The stop mode “777” and the message of “excellent” are displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small decorative component SDY (draft role) is only stopped and the movable movement is performed. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a shifted mode (“767”) is displayed at the center of the screen in a swinging manner (FIG. 308 (P1)). The decorative pattern is developed into a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in an out-of-position mode (“767”) or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image (referred to as “Madja”) indicating that the fluctuating display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative pattern in the out-of-position mode in FIG. The samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 308 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again brought into the reach state and reduced and displayed at the upper right of the screen, and at the center of the screen, either the operation button 410 or the operating means of the sword decoration 5001 Is displayed (FIG. 308 (P4)). Then, as the time elapses, the displayed eyes of the samurai are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is gradually moved up and down in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). As a result, the player increases the expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (draft) will be performed. At this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated and decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration 5001 may be moved up and down by changing the sword decoration state from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-pulling state. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (robin) is performed. It should be noted that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is to be operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern for which the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat permeates the forehead of the warrior of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 309 (R1)). Then, while the specific decoration member SDY (screws) continues to move in small increments, while the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation for prompting the operation button 410 to be pressed is performed. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light emission decoration is stopped.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft hand) is moved from the initial state to the full falling state. (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible to the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), at this point, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol. Next, the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is returned from the full fall state to the initial state again, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (robin) has been released is displayed on the screen. At the center, an image for notifying the big hit (decorative pattern stop mode "777", "spectacular" message) is displayed (FIG. 309 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in a case where the result of the variable display is incorrect, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is stopped in small steps, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, a decorative pattern in a mode shifted from the center of the screen (“767”) is stopped and displayed (FIG. 309 (R5)).

  When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, the image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens the light (sword decoration body) (Decided image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state with the aura member (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can recognize that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is effective instead of the operation button 410 based on the image of the display area. At this point, the player determines whether the sword decoration 5001 has an aura member or not. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (moving hand) is moved in small increments, the predetermined period elapses in the second sword state, and when the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

  Then, in the case where the result of the current fluctuation display is a big hit, if a sword placing operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in the above-described FIGS. 309 (R3) and (R4) is followed (FIG. 310 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, in a case where the fluctuation display result is out of order, if a sword placing operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as that of FIG. 309 (R5) is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

  As described above, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (storage material) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, so that the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. It is possible to provide a suggestion, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, even when the specific decorative member SDY (draft part) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be indicated by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest, which is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect instead of shining.

  Although the above-described FIGS. 300 to 310 show three examples of reach effect patterns using the sword decoration body 5001, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided, and the entertainment interest can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo continuous production using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 311 to FIG. 325, a description will be given of a pseudo continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001 whose form is changed stepwise according to the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-variation). Pseudo continuous production is a production that temporarily stops the display of the change of the decorative pattern and re-fluctuates, and is performed in response to the pseudo continuous fluctuation together with the pseudo continuous fluctuation in which the temporary stop and the re-variation are repeated once or more than once. And so on. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to be stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In the present example, when a variation pattern for performing a pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, a pseudo continuous production of a production pattern that can be selected by lottery of the production content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Will be described.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. As the form of the sword decoration body 5001 up to the above, there are provided two types, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. Are provided.

  FIG. 311 is a diagram illustrating a form of a sword decoration 5001 used for pseudo continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be capable of changing the shape in two stages by the deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020 And an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 similarly to the above-described aura member 5035, but operates in the left-right direction similarly to the above-described aura member 5030. FIGS. 311 (A) to 3 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-inserted state, and show step 0 to step 3 in order. The sword decoration body 5001 is in any of the stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 311 (A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. 281 (A) and 283 (A), and an initial state in which no operation is required for any component. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 311 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the pattern portion 5012 is spread and movable so as to be divided into two from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 311 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. The form is shown. Here, the first to third stages allow the shape to be changed without bringing the sword decoration 5001 into the second drawn state. Further, the sword section 5010 capable of accepting an operation by the player and the non-operating sheath section 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body as an operation section of the operation means, so that a more powerful operation means is provided. Can be.

(Example of pseudo continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 312 to FIG. 325, an example of the effect transition for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 320 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (A), the main control board 1310 controls the sword LV1 weak change pattern, the sword LV1 strong change pattern, the sword LV2 weak change pattern, the sword LV2 strong change pattern, the sword LV3 weak change pattern, and the sword LV3 strong change pattern. When any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. There are basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 strong effect pattern) corresponding to the six types of variation patterns, respectively. In addition to an effect pattern and a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, specific effect patterns (a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) are provided. When the change pattern is the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is selected. When the change pattern is the sword LV2 weak change pattern (sword LV2 strong change pattern), the sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern) is selected, and the change pattern is the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern). ), Any one of the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern) Selected.

  In the effect pattern, the number of continuations (1 to 3 times) of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the presence / absence of an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the case where an operation opportunity is given The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is set (see FIG. 320 (B)). “LV1” to “LV3” in the effect pattern name correspond to one to three times of continuous pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). Further, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). The “pseudo sword LV1” is provided with a selection operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation), and the pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is continued by making a selection not to be operated by the player. Is an effect that can be acquired. Also, the “simulated resurrection sword LV1” follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern for providing the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 for the first time of the pseudo-sequence change (re-variation). This indicates that after the drop effect of the special decoration member SDY (border role) based on the first operation opportunity of the change, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed again. The details of the effect contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set such that the greater the number of times the pseudo-running variation (re-variation) is continued, that is, the more the form of the sword decoration 5001 changes, the higher the degree of expectation becomes. The lower the falling position of the object is, the higher the expectation is set. However, the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (half curtain) is a half-fall and the number of times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation) is 1 The degree of expectation is set to be the same as when the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is a total drop with a small number of effect patterns. Specifically, the simulated continuous change (re-variation) is performed once and the sword LV1 with half-fall is expected to have a weak effect pattern of 29%, the simulated continuous change (re-change) is performed once and the sword is fully dropped. The expected degree of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the continuation number of the pseudo-running variation (re-variation) is 2 times, and the expected degree of the half-fall sword LV2 weak production pattern is 40%, and the continuation number of the pseudo-running variation (re-variation) is 2 The expected degree of the sword LV2 strong production pattern of the single and full fall sword LV2 is 50%, the continuation number of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) 3 times and the half-fall sword LV3 weak production pattern is 50%, the simulated continuous variation (re- The fluctuation degree) is set to be three times and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern of all drops is expected to be 65%. In addition, the specific effect patterns are set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected variation pattern, even for the same effect pattern, and the higher the degree of expectation, the higher the expectation is set. The degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% when the selected change pattern is the sword LV1 weak change pattern and the sword LV3 weak change pattern, respectively. It becomes.
The expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected change pattern is the sword LV1 strong change pattern and the sword LV3 strong change pattern. After following the same transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the degree of expectation of the simulated resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 312 to 319 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition of a pseudo continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIG. 313 to FIG. 315 are diagrams illustrating transition examples of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. FIG. 316 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin)) during the pseudo-running change (re-change) common to all effect patterns. is there. FIG. 317 and FIG. 318 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect transition characteristic of the pseudo-sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo-sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 319 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition characteristic of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. 321 to 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (robin) in the pseudo continuous production. FIG. 321 shows the sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 322 is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern), FIG. 323 is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), and FIG. , FIG. 325 shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. Hereinafter, a description will be given along an effect transition example in a case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect before the reaching of the reach state after the start of the variable display.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 312 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and a part of the screen is visible from the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in the sword-putting state in the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and (C), the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes a start image indicating the start of the pseudo continuous effect (effect information notification “Large chance if 100 bodies can be destroyed” message, warrior Is displayed, which indicates to the player that the pseudo continuous production is to be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (D), the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are again changed for the player. Notify that. Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (the number of pseudo-run times). By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design in the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation). At this time, although there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sword role) and the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo pseudo sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the first pseudo consecutive fluctuation (re-variation). ), A sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed. As described above, the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo-running variations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the pseudo-running variation (re-running) are notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the pseudo-running run-up (rerunning). Can grasp the stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change) at the stage.

  Then, when the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started, as shown in FIG. 312 (E), the effect is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time point of FIG. 312 (D) described above. The simulated continuous sword design is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration design is displayed. Then, the shape of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 at this time is the timing at which the pseudo-running (re-variation) is started and the player's line of sight moves to the sword decoration 5001 from the effect display moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001 , That is, after the start of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-running change (re-change), for example, at the same time as the display of the pseudo-running sword design at the time of FIG. May be started at the same time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312 (F), the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state while being enlarged and displayed. The sword decoration body 5001 changes state from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can perform the sword-pulling operation is enabled as an operating means. No, that is, an operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed. In the subsequent effects, a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is effective (an effect pattern with “LV1” in the name) and a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is not effective (name) And an effect pattern in which “LV2” or “LV3” is appended. In the following, an example of an effect transition will be described for nine effect patterns in order.

(Sword LV1 weak performance pattern / Sword LV1 strong performance pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. The effect transition example in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and an operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the above-described FIG. ), An operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is given (FIG. 313 (T2)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is prompted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 1 form) as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Pay your sword!”. (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, an expectation degree notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) in accordance with the set effect pattern.

  Here, in the case where the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. ) Is moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the second drawn state to the sword placed state by the player's sword putting operation, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (retainer) is returned from the completely dropped state to the initial state. The expected degree notification image (“100 body defeat!”) For notifying the expected degree of the fluctuation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous production shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Here, the display of the expected degree notification image allows the player to grasp the end of the pseudo consecutive fluctuation (re- fluctuation).

  Further, when the set effect pattern is a “weak” effect pattern, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (draft) Is moved from the initial state to a half-fall state. The half-fall state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is dropped to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. . Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the second drawn state to the sword placed state by the player's sword putting operation, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is returned from the half-fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as that of FIG. The expected degree notification image ("50 body defeat!") For displaying the expected degree of the fluctuation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous production shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Then, as in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the display of the expected degree notification image at this time allows the player to grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  If the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, when the operation validity period ends, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the initial form of sword placement. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by a decorative pattern in a normal mode, and a reach effect is started. You. As for the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. By operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword placing operation is requested in this manner, the player grasps the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (border role), and then performs the reach effect. I can welcome you. Therefore, even if the later reach productions are the same, it is possible to have a different feeling of expectation every time, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and further suppressing a decrease in gaming interest for uniform productions. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 321, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (shade) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an operation opportunity. When the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 312 (F)). Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo repetition change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.
Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the entire fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the entire fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak effect pattern / Sword LV2 strong effect pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern for enabling the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition example in the case where there is an effect. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). After tracing the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to 3 (G), no operation opportunity is given to the display area of effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 312 (G). Image (image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-holding state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence mode, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (S2). ). Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (the number of pseudo-run times). By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design in the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second simulated continuous change (re-variation) is displayed in the pseudo sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. As described above, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo-run variations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are changed. Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and recognize which stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change).

  Then, when the second pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) is started, the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-change of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is broken left and right so that the first decorative section 5012a is visible (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually moved from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (FIG. 313 (S4)). Note that the form change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state change timing from the katana state to the second sword removal state may be set to be the same. The effect display displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001. Since the sword decoration 5001 changes at a time when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001, It can impress powerful movements and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state (stage 2 mode) in which the player can perform sword placing operation is enabled as an operation means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether to give an operation opportunity to the user is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

  Here, if the set effect pattern is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed ( (FIG. 314 (V2)). Next, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 314 (V3)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is prompted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 2 mode) as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Place the sword!" (FIG. 314 (V4)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation degree information effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has ended. Further, when the player does not detect a sword placing operation during the operation valid period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, when the operation validity period ends, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the initial form of sword placement. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 322, operations of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (shadow) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, no operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 312 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second drawn state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.
Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the entire fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the entire fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of period T2, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 (FIG. W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern / Sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 314 and FIG. 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern for enabling the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition example in the case where there is an effect. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body is set at the second operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) shown in FIG. 314 (V1). Since the operation opportunity 5001 is not given, the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) is followed by the effect display device 1600. In the display area, a continuation image (an image in which the warrior's eyes are closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. The decorated sword body 5001 is returned to the sword-arranged state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 314 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (FIG. 314 (V6)). ). Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (the number of pseudo-run times). By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design in the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation). Then, in the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo consecutive change (re-change). Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. As described above, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) starts, the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo consecutive change) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) are changed. Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and recognize which stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change).

  Then, when the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) is started, the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 314 (V6) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-change of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the stage 2 form to a stage 3 form in which the second decoration section 5012b projects above the first decoration section 5012a so that both decoration sections can be visually recognized as an integrated decoration body ( (FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 314 (V8)). Note that the form change timing of the sword decoration 5001 from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form and the state change timing from the sword placing state to the second sword removing state may be set to be the same. In addition, the form of the sword decoration 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-run changes, and may be changed in a plurality of steps at the final stage. The effect display displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001. Since the sword decoration 5001 changes at a time when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001, It can impress powerful movements and attract the player's interest.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form) in which the sword-pulling operation by the player has been enabled is enabled as an operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the user is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image in which samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1) is displayed ( FIG. 315 (X2)). Next, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is given (FIG. 315 (X3)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is prompted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 3 form) as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay your sword!" (FIG. 315 (X4)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation degree information effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has ended. In addition, if the player does not detect a katana operation during the operation validity period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600. A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-sequence fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has been completed without performing the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed in the display area of (). FIG. 318 (W2)).
In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, when the operation validity period ends, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword delivery state. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 323, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draft) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 during which the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) are different. In the period T2 in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not operated, no operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Gives the operator an operation opportunity. When the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls completely by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 312 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 313 (S4)). Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is increased (see FIG. 314 (V1)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second drawn state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.
Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the entire fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the entire fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern / pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 317 and FIG. 318, the sword decoration 5001 is made effective as an operating means in the first pseudo-run variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-run variation is selected by the player not performing the operation. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition in the case where the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can obtain the continuation (level-up effect) of (re-fluctuation) is set. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is provided at the first operation opportunity provision timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform a positive operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (T1), the operation area of FIG. 313 (T1) is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. 317. An operation selection image ("Is there an opportunity !? message") indicating that this is a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z1)). )). Then, an operation validity period for generating the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 and an operation selection promotion effect for prompting selection of the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 are performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second drawn sword state (stage 1 form) that is the same as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation validity period are displayed together with the message of “putting or selecting a sword”. The image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern and sword LV3 strong variation pattern). The subsequent effect transition greatly differs depending on whether the effect pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the sword placing operation by the player during the operation validity period is performed. When it is detected, it follows an effect transition (FIG. 316) similar to the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

On the other hand, when the player does not detect a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”), the operation selection promoting effect illustrated in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above. Is completed, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the second sword-drawing state in the stage 1 form to the sword-pulling state in the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Was it an opportunity?”) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (robin).
Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“Enemy, escape!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). ) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

  In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the sword placement operation by the player during the operation validity period is performed. When detected, in the same manner as when an operation is detected at the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 316 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), in the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3), a variable display using a decorative pattern in a normal mode is performed (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode at the same timing as the predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”), the operation selection promoting effect illustrated in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above. When the operation effective period in which is performed is over, the operation pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time indicates that no operation opportunity is provided at the first operation providing timing from the above-described FIG. 317 (Z2), that is, shifts to a continuous image (FIG. 313 (S1)) indicating the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. Then, similarly to the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIG. ) → FIG. 315 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 316 (U5).

  As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) differs greatly in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and start the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, you will not only be able to obtain the level-up effect described below, but also will reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the expected degree that you knew if you originally operated . If the selected change pattern is the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if the operation is performed, the effect (continuous change of the shape of the sword decoration body 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that can be obtained without the operation is overlooked, and the form of the sword decoration body 5001 is initialized. Will return to the form. In the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained in accordance with the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 which cannot be known to the player is exactly reversed, and the operation in the operation valid period during which the operation is effectively received is a game. It provides a novel effect that brings operation results that are disadvantageous to the user. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater effect on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation effect of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation in the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, which causes a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is provided again. Conventionally, a predetermined number of operations are required in the effect pattern, but in this example, two (LV1 and L3) operation opportunities can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player's operation. The award is terminated at the opportunity, and a novel effect reflecting the intention of the player can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate for an operation effect that does not shine instead, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set by the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the operation of the player, the stage form may be changed from the initial form to the stage 1 form. You can only see the changes up to that point, leading to reach production. Since the player can cause the player to make an operation selection regardless of the selected variation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player a real feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (robin). . If the sword decoration 5001 is not operated, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped and the operation ends, or the form is further changed (level-up) and operated at the operation opportunity given after the stage 3 is formed. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Thus, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low.
In FIG. 320 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. Note that, in order to provide a more appropriate effect that matches the player's own selection sensation, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern in accordance with the fluctuation pattern and effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

  Next, referring to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 324, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (shadow material) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is used. As an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls completely by the operation of the player. In addition, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is originally provided three times, the specific decoration is provided. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol change in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns. If the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo-run variations (re-variation) are continued, and the second pseudo-run variation is performed. In the period T2 in which the (re-variation) is performed, no operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated by the operating means. To give the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls completely by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → FIG. 317) (Refer to (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (refer to FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo repetition change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.
Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a full-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), which corresponds to the full-fall state. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) continues (when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is set), the sword is changed. The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 313 (S4)). Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is increased (see FIG. 314 (V1)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second drawn state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.
Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a full-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), which corresponds to the full-fall state. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re- fluctuation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword is set. The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 319, after following the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, it appears as if it enters the reach production as it is, and then the pseudo resurrection in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re- fluctuation) is revived An effect transition example when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  The pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control board 1310 selects the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, similarly to the above-described sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. Follow the production transition. Then, when an operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the fluctuation pattern, the effect is the same as that of FIG. 316 (U3), (U4), and (U5) shown in FIG. After tracing the effect transition of (UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-run variation with the pseudo-sword design is resumed. In the case where the operation by the player is not detected at the first operation opportunity, similarly to other effect patterns, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state to the initial state of the sword delivery state at the end of the operation effective period, Instead of the above-described FIG. 319 (UA1) → (UA2), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-repetitive fluctuation (re-fluctuation) ends without a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft). A runaway image (“Enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

  The resumption of the simulated continuous change (re-change) is based on the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3). Is temporarily not displayed in the pseudo continuous sword design in which the decorative pattern is not prepared in the left and right decorative designs, specifically, the pseudo continuous sword design in a mode indicating the form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the effect level (the number of pseudo continuous changes). By doing so, the player is notified (FIG. 319 (UA4)). At this time, the sword image and the effect level 3 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo continuous sword design. At this point, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001, and the initial form (sword-put state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of temporary stop display (FIG. 319 (UA4)) immediately before the start of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form, the form and the effect level of the sword decoration 5001 in the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo continuous sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the sword decoration body is set so that the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. The display is moved toward 5001 and the re-change of the decorative symbol is displayed.
Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the initial form to a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration section 5012a, and the second decoration section 5012b operate so that both decoration sections can be visually recognized as an integrated decoration body. (FIG. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 is changed at once in a plurality of steps from the initial form to the third form, it is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state (stage 3 mode) in which the player can perform the sword placement operation is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given as described above with reference to FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X5). When an operation by the player is detected after following the effect transition of the specific decoration member SDY (not shown) according to the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of the variation pattern, although not shown. The type of drop production of the “robin” is decided. If the operation has been detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is once in a half-fall state, so that the level is raised and the above-described FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) is reached. → Expectation notification effect by full drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (robin) as in (U5) is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the half-fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) as shown in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5). A notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends.

  In the case where the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation validity period ends as in the case of other effect patterns. Simultaneously, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial form of the sword delivery state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (border hand), but the pseudo continuous change (re-change). Is displayed (refer to FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends.

  As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the above-described sword LV1 weak effect pattern is traced, and when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored again, the level jumps to the step 2 form and the step 3 form. Is performed in the same way as the effect of the first level (the effect of the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) in the basic effect pattern), so that the player can be surprised and reach with a higher sense of expectation than the other effect patterns. You can face. In addition, the player is not distracted even if an operation opportunity is given in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is half-dropped. The game can be enjoyed with the expectation of the revival of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re- fluctuation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 325, a description will be given of the operation execution timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (robin) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set. .

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operation means, An operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, irrespective of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), a drop effect (expected degree notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Direction) is performed.
In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, the period in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is completed, the display temporarily returns to the decorative display of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and then the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword decoration 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, changing the form into the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 3 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, in the case where a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed in the period T1, a drop effect (expected degree notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Direction) is performed. Also, in the period T1, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is not performed in the period T1, the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (border role) half-fall by the operation of the player. An effect (expectation notification effect) is performed. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 325, when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the step 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 312 (F)). Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4)). )reference).

  Then, at the same time as the repetition of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0) to the stage 3 (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 319 (UA6)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is changed from the initial state to the full drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the simulated continuous change (re-change) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage item) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the total drop on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.
In addition, although not shown, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is not performed in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is changed from the initial state. The state is changed to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and an expectation notification image of the degree of expectation corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the simulated continuous change (re-change) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 (W2)). )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous production using the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo continuous fluctuations are performed twice and three times in the sword LV2 production pattern and the sword LV3 production pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times. When the value is less than the above, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state every time the pseudo-running (re-fluctuation) is performed so that the player can operate the sword decoration body 5001, but a valid operation period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the katana state without performing (without giving an operation opportunity to the player). For this reason, the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even if the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, in the pseudo continuous change (re-change), the sword decoration 5001 returns to the initial form when the player performs a sword placing operation on the sword decoration 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect of providing a beneficial effect for the player by the operation of the player. Let the player choose the operation carefully. Therefore, the user can be interested in the operation of the sword decoration 5001, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to operate and a decrease in interest in playing games.

  Further, the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form stepwise until an operation opportunity is given (until an operation validity period is generated), so that the expectation and interest of the player are gradually increased, and the game is played. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. During the period from when the sword decoration 5001 is in the operating state and the second sword-drawing state (operating position) to when the operation valid period is generated, the player operates at the operating position in the operating position (form, light emission, movable). , Etc.) is desirably provided for a period during which confirmation can be sufficiently performed. Accordingly, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decoration 5001. Therefore, as soon as the second sword is drawn, the operation validity period is generated and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to eliminate the concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the transition to the operation effect in a hurry.

  In addition, although the above-mentioned step change of the sword decoration body 5001 was shown by a form, it is not limited to this. Each effect form, such as a change in the light emission form or operation form of the sword decoration 5001, may be made to be able to be changed stepwise in accordance with the number of times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
In the above description, the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-reach-reach effect has been described, but it can also be executed as a prefetch effect. The case where the present invention is applied to the look-ahead effect is described below. Hereinafter, a case will be described as an example where the third hold is a target for a prefetch effect, and a sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

  When the hold to be the prefetch effect is generated as the third hold 3, the same effect as in the above-described FIGS. 312 (B) to 3 (F) is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. It should be noted that the sword decoration 5001 is different in that it is limited to the second drawn state when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as that of FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (S1) to (S4) is performed. Further, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effects as those in FIG. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIG. 315 (X1) to (X3) are performed. Will be As described above, in the pre-reading effect, the change of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period. Here, the operation validity period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 to be prefetched is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. From the second sword-drawing state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetch effect is terminated.

  The state change from the sword decoration state of the sword decoration body 5001 to the second sword removal state is limited to the generation timing of the operation validity period. It may be performed at the start. The same effect as the pseudo-reach-reach effect is achieved in the pre-reading effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, a pre-operation suggestion effect that is executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 among a plurality of operation means is enabled by the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (robin). . Specifically, as the suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (border role), the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is located at the initial position. There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position, and the sword decoration body 5001 (from the operation button 410). When the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) for generating the operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the initial position even during the operation validity period. Is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. Indicates that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation of the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 30%. Hereinafter, an example of an effect transition example according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
326 and 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In the reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326 (A)), it is determined in advance that the operation button is set to be valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operation means of the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated.
As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. This is displayed (FIG. 326 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (main part) maintains the initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (main curtain) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be operation-effective. Let it. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is at the initial position, the operation buttons 410 are enabled at a higher rate than the sword decoration body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the operation button 410 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 326 (C), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) is maintaining the initial position. Let it. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is effective, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326 (D), the operation validity period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for prompting the player to put the sword in the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Also, at this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled.

  When the operation of the effective operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is detected in FIG. 326 (C) or (D) described above, if the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) has been released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “spectacular” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (bold hand) is notified of the loss in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)).

(2nd suggestion pattern)
FIG. 328 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled during the reach effect, as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure showing the example of transition of the reach production performed. Note that FIG. 329 shows that, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled once without the operation of the sword decoration 5001 being enabled, and thereafter the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes operation-effective.

  As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is one of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 that has been determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation effect suggestion image, the specific decoration member SDY (draft material) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. Moved little by little in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration.

  Then, in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (draper) is operated at the suggestion position, the operation validity period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be the operation validity is set. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is valid, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is at the suggestion position, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is valid, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is operating at the suggested position. Generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for prompting the player to put the sword in the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled. In addition, even when the operation button 410 is enabled, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is operating at the suggestion position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when an operation of the player is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is moved from the state in which the specific decorative member is operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decoration member SDY (storage item) may be moved from the state in which it is operated to the suggestion position without returning to the initial state to the entire falling state or the initial state.

  Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) effective for operation is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D) is displayed. Similarly, when the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the entire dropped state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) has been released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “spectacular” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (bold hand) is notified of the loss in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  In the second suggestion pattern, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and may include a plurality of operation patterns. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of operation patterns are provided so that the ratio at which the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective in operation is different, the interest of the player in the operation can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
In a case where the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) is operated to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, Until the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective, in addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition from FIG. 328 (AA1) to (AA3), once the operation button 410 becomes operation effective, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is activated. A step-up pattern is provided to enable the operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is an operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid for operation by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) similar to that in FIG. 328 (AA1) described above is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is moved in small steps (FIG. 329 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (FIG. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 described above is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means. A suggestion image (most blackout images) is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, operating means that is enabled to operate is operated from the operation button 410 through the sword decoration 5001. (A message of "chance of swords" and "I want you to put the sword") is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decoration member SDY (robin role) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promoting effect is the same as the effect transition (FIG. 327) after the operation promoting effect in the above-described second suggestion pattern.

Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without making the operation of the button operation 410 effective (no operation promotion effect) in the case of FIG. 329 (BB2) described above.
It is only necessary that the sword decoration 5001 be operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of the present example, before the operation valid period of the operation means for which one of the plurality of operation means is validated is generated, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is generated. The position of ()) can be changed, and an operation means which is made effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 indicates that the operation is valid. The second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the expected degree of operation is high and the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the suggestion position (in FIG. 328 (AA1), the sword decoration body 5001) Has a high degree of expectation that the operation is effective. For this reason, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, so that the suggestion before the operation is made. Enhance the entertainment of the production.

  Also, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is gradually moved up and down in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (border effect) is also used for reporting the result after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 327), a series of drop effects from the up and down small movement of the suggesting effect before operation is performed. , And a decrease in entertainment interest can be suppressed. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means enabled by the movable body is enabled is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display may be provided to indicate the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is turned on or the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the second sword removal state, but also the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once enabled in the state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) is located at the suggested position (or after it appears that the operation is enabled). Ii) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in operation. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Further, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, there is an expectation that the sword decoration 5001 may become effective after that. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, an operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is enabled is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 326 (B)), similar to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is displayed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (indicating position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move up and down in small increments between the initial position and the suggesting position. After that, when the operation validity period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the operation of the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the operation suggestion to the player by the first suggestion pattern is made. Even when an image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be effective. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (robin) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. The entertainment of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. Perform the effect with the pattern. In a production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for satisfying a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by a player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (an effect indicating the degree of expectation related to privilege provision) based on establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision suggested as a result of the specific operation effect may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operation means provided for such an effect at the time of operation (such as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for granting the privilege when operated), the operation is performed by the operation means. In addition to the button 410, another operating means (such as a sword decoration 5001) can be further provided. In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating the operation button 410), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001), even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity, only the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given occurs, It is configured so that the player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) related to the privilege grant is higher than in the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The expectation degree regarding the privilege provision suggested when an operation opportunity is provided to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest in the stage where the effect has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result indicating that the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is high) does not appear in the operation-time effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001). Even if it is not possible to perform an operation on the operation means within the specified effect reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the entertainment interest through such operation-related effects. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any one of a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) having such a staging characteristic. In this case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunity is given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect accepting period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect accepting is enabled),
-After the "specific operation-related effect", which can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled (allowing to accept the effect), is started, the operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first effect mode in which a valid period (effect accepting period) is generated, and an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (effect accepting is possible) without the effect that “specific operation-related effect” is started. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating a valid period (effect accepting period) are prepared, and by executing any of these effect modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect). The validity period (production accepting period) is set to occur.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where a period occurs in which an effect on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) among a plurality of operation units (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) can be accepted for effect. Regardless of whether or not a period occurs in which an operation unit (for example, a sword decoration 5001) that is different from the specific operation unit can accept the effect, a common (specification) is performed prior to the generation of the period. ) Can be executed, so that it is possible to give an interest as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect, and such an effect can be provided. By performing the operation while the game is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, it corresponds to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001). An effect reception period is to be generated. At least at the time when the effect is started, it is determined which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. Should be kept confidential.

  Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when performing such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following description examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively used as a plurality of operation means targeted for a common (specific) operation-related effect. The types of the operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents in the case where any production acceptance period occurs after the execution of a common (specific) operation-related production, and the common (specific) In the case where any of the effect reception periods occurs without the operation-related effect of (2) being executed, the effect content may be omitted. However, when any of the effect reception periods occurs without performing the common (specific) operation-related effect, the effect content is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and (G). . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword decoration 5001 appears without performing a specific operation-related effect. Further, in each of the following effect examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed when the reach state is formed. May be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the reach operation is performed, or may be generated during the execution of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be appropriately combined with the effects of each of the different examples described later and executed, and can also be executed appropriately in combination with each of the effects described above. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined with a different example effect described later by partially replacing it, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Then, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to effect each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of the different examples described later.

[First production mode]
FIGS. 330 and 331 show that after a specific operation-related effect is started, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive an effect during a period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example (1st effect mode) performed.

  FIG. 330 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 330 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display which moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and it is suggested that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 330 (c) shows both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 as the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330 (b) progresses. In a state in which each of the operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001) is stopped and displayed in the area, an instruction display (here, “operate”) that prompts the user to operate any of these operation means, and an effect reception Bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) has been shown.

  According to such an effect mode, although the operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) It is possible to make it unclear which of these is considered to be able to accept the effect. This is the same effect (FIG. 330 (c)) in both the situation where the effect on the operation button 410 can be effected and the effect on the sword decoration 5001 can be effected. Because it is displayed, nothing else. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), the plurality of operating means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001) are operated before at least one of the plurality of operating means can be accepted. The common (specific) operation related as shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and (c) over a period until after the operation on at least one of the (operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) is enabled to produce an effect. I'm trying to perform a production.

Therefore, in each of the effect examples described below and the other effect examples described below, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect are limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is performed thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect is performed). It is only necessary that it occurs during (middle).
With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) is left unclear as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be rendered. It is possible to indicate that the operation for one is to be able to accept the effect. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily need to be displayed simultaneously, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration may not be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting an effect, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and the effect of the sword ornament 5001 In the case where the reception period occurs, it is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related effect is executed (start of the effect) to when the effect reception period occurs to be the same.

  In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unknown which one of the operation means should be operated, but a display urging operation of any one of the operation means (“Operation "), And always operate a specific one of the plurality of operation means regardless of how the plurality of operation means are capable of accepting effects. May be displayed. In other words, the same effect mode appears as the operation instruction both in the condition in which the effect on the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect and in the condition in which the effect on the sword decoration 5001 can be effected. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity while keeping which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect is kept secret.

  Further, in the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 330 (c), it is confidential whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 can be effected or not. When the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is set to be able to accept the effect, the operation is not enabled when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is set to be able to receive the effect (in any of the first to third situations described later). However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation of the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting unit may be provided on the sword decoration 5001 so that the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are not illuminated. Both may emit light.

  Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect state in which the image shown in FIG. 330 (c) appears is that only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Whether the operation is in the first state in which the effect can be accepted, the operation in the second state in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be effected, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 Are set to be in one of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs in the plurality of situations, a first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410). The expectation of granting a privilege is higher than when the situation occurs. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the second situation (the situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). Is desirably set lower than the rate at which (a situation in which is given) is generated.

  Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), when any of the first condition (the operation button 410) and the third condition (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) is in operation, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. Is performed (whether the “FF” progresses in the figure) or in one of the second situation (sword decoration 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 (when “GG” is advanced in the figure), an effect is received and an operation effect is performed according to the operation (FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f)). Is performed.

  In the operation effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (“Chance!”). In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “extreme heat !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively high. By preparing a plurality of effect modes, and displaying one of these effect modes in response to the reception of the effect, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant may be suggested. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode in which the operation of displacing to the front of the display area is not performed, and by causing any of these effect modes to appear in response to the effect reception, Alternatively, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for granting a privilege. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the effect is accepted by the operation by the player. Then, based on the operation, control for bringing the operation means into an operation state (a state different from the non-operation state before the operation) can be executed.

  More specifically, first, in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (d), despite the fact that the player has performed an operation on the operation button 410, the operation is performed in response to the reception of the production. The control of reciprocating the sword decoration 5001 on the side on which the sword decoration is not performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect reception is generated as a result of the operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and the operation effect on the operation button 410 is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decoration 5001 on the higher expected side is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration 5001 may have been executed. "Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword-drawing operation on the sword decoration 5001 and placing the sword decoration 5001 in the sword placement position in accordance with the reception of the production. It is possible to execute a control for maintaining the sword at the sword position (sword-drawn state) instead of returning to the (sword-drawn state). As a result, the sword decoration 5001 moves from the sword placement position (sword-pulled state) to the sword-drawing position (sword-pulled state) based on an operation by the player, and is in a state of being maintained in such a sword-pulled state. At the time of operation, the effect will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time is executed. By confirming the operation state of the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to make the player feel the feeling that the operation effect is being performed due to the operation of the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, after the operation effect (FIGS. 331 (d) and (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 331 (e). However, during the execution period of the reach effect, there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 may be executed. Therefore, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is performed. Even if it is executed, the state where the sword decoration 5001 is not operated (sword placement position (sword placement state)) when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started) Control to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described operation and effect, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the state of the sword removal) over the period of. Also, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated earlier than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  According to the rendering example (first rendering mode) shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, a specific operating unit (for example, a sword decoration) out of the plurality of operation units (the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001) No. 5001), whether the effect is acceptable or not, a common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) operation is started. While an operation-related effect is being performed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 is set to be able to accept the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) are each produced. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is an effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is set to be capable of accepting the effect without being enabled, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are provided when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed. In combination with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of receiving an effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled to receive an effect. You can be deceived as if you weren't. That is, in this case, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration 5001 which is the side where the production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed when the production is received. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to add interest to which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means on the side which is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period does not occur) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the disadvantage that the effect reception period is consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, if the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period does not occur) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, Although the effect reception required for executing the effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the operation itself is detected, and the operation on the side that can accept the effect based on the detection is performed. Control may be performed to end the effect acceptance period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk of losing an operation opportunity, so that it is possible to urge a user to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect and perform the operation carefully. become able to.

Further, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, a predetermined display effect, and the like) is performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although they are executed, the effects at the time of these operations may be different from each other.
For example, in the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) , A unique effect sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the entertainment interest when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted.

  Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operated, the generation of the other effect mode is involved. The effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), and the effect reception period for the generation of the another effect mode is not set. The effect acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, when the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, and when the first operation means is the sword decoration body 5001, the operation reception period) is set. In either case, when the first operation means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 330 (c), an operation effect may be performed. In other words, in this case, when the common operation (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the another effect mode is set and an operation is performed on the first operation means, While another effect mode is executed as the operation effect, when the effect accepting period related to the occurrence of the another effect mode is not set while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed (No. When the first operation means is operated during the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. At the same operation, the effect will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operating means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operating means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operation means and the first operation means. In the case where another effect mode is caused to appear as the operation-time effect, the second operation mode is not performed in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation-time effect on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as the effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

  Note that, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed is defined by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 among them can be effected, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 can be effected, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set so as to correspond to any of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is made to appear when the effect is received, whereas in the third situation, the operation is performed when the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that an effect or another effect mode described above (different from the operation effect in the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-described effect example, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  Although the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 331 (f), no operation is performed by the player as in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 331 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation has not been performed by the player, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation has been performed by the player is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not. However, as for the control for operating the operation means on the side where the operation has not been performed by the player, the specific decoration member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns at an earlier stage than before returning to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable that the operation state be ended so that the gaze of the player is returned to the game board 5 side naturally.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, a driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and a driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same drive source.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 332 to 335 show that the specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect indicating the progress of the effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears. When the first effect result appears as a result, it is suggested that an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means occurs, and when the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, a plurality of operation means appear. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect (2nd effect mode) which suggests that the effect reception period with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 will generate | occur | produce.

  FIG. 332 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 332 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In which the lightning image IZ is acting on the images BTG and SYG. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and it is suggested that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 332 (c) shows the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 rendered as the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b) progresses. In the display area of the device 1600, an effect is performed in which the opponents are pressed against each other to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are described as follows. Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area? ”, And when a result (first effect) in which the button image BTG is left appears, an effect for the operation button 410 is accepted. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and (c) is determined by the effect of either the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 or the effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001. , A specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of these periods. "

  332 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG is in a predominant state in which it remains in the display area, and the figure on the right shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts a situation where it is predominant to remain in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance status changes every moment as time passes.

  FIG. 333 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), and the button image BTG is left in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to the effect content, an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, the operation of the operation button 410 is urged by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to the light emitting state.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. The effect may be advanced (for example, the effect progresses from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is set higher than that.

  Regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 via a specific operation-related effect is performed, a specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio in which the length of the effect acceptance period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than in the case where an effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without passing through is performed. Is desirable to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a stuttering effect described later when a specific operation-related effect has passed.

  FIG. 333 (e) shows that, as a result of performing an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. It depicts a state in which the production is performed during operation.

  The operation effect at the time shown in FIG. 333 (e) is the same as that of FIG. 331 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. Also, at this time, in spite of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 on the side on which the operation is not performed is moved to the first position and the second position in accordance with the effect reception. This is the same in that control for reciprocating with the position (control for setting the operation state) is executable. In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “extreme heat !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively high. By preparing a plurality of effect modes, and displaying one of these effect modes in response to the reception of the effect, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant may be suggested. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, a production mode that does not perform an operation of displacing to the front side of the display area may be provided, and any of those production modes may appear according to the production reception. Thus, the degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant may be indicated. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 333 (e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 333 (f), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. However, during the execution period of the reach effect, there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 may be executed. In this case, control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to a non-operated state (sword-inserted state). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described operation and effect, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the state of the sword removal) over the period of. Also, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated earlier than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 334 (g), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. An effect depicting the remaining state is being performed (second effect). When progressing to the effect content, an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be effected (the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as "draw a sword" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001). Particularly, in this effect example, only the operation unit including the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be set to the light emission state) is set to the light emission state. By doing so, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is encouraged.

  The effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.), but also without going through the specific operation-related effect. The effect may be advanced (for example, the effect progresses from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is set higher than that. In addition, if the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation of granting a privilege is higher than in the case, and the degree of expectation of granting a privilege may be lower than the case where the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 334 (h) shows that, as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is being performed, an effect is received and the operation is performed in response to the operation. This is a picture of how a production is being performed at the time of operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), and displaces the specific decorative member SDY to the front side of the display area. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, the production mode such as "super heat !!", which indicates that the expectation is relatively high, is displayed according to the reception of the production, but it is suggested that the expectation is relatively low. Is displayed in some cases. Similarly to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which the operation of displacing the display area in the forward direction is not performed is provided, and one of the effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. This may indicate the degree of expectation for granting benefits. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the effect of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described multiple modes ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334 (i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decoration 5001 is not returned to the sword-delivered state, but is kept in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, and thereafter (during a period during which the reach production is performed), the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword-delivery state. An operation opportunity to be operated is further provided, and at that time, an operation effect at the time of operation corresponding to the operation to the katana state can be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) in two stages, and the first-stage operation (operation to change the sword state) and the second-stage operation (Operation to the sword-inserted state), the effect at the time of operation is performed in accordance with each operation of the sword decoration state. Therefore, not only when the operation on the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is performed, but also at the first stage It is expected that the game entertainment for the operation can be suitably maintained even during the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed until the operation at the second stage (the operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation effect according to the second-stage operation have different effect contents.

  In addition, in the case where an operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) according to the first-stage operation is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the drawn state, and is not maintained in the drawn state. In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second stage operation opportunity. In the performance at the time of operation corresponding to the operation of the first stage, whether the sword decoration body 5001 should be maintained at a position (sword extraction state) at which the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawing state to the sword-drawing state) can be given. It may be executed as an effect indicating the degree of expectation of no. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword-pulling state without being maintained in the sword-pulling state, it is practically impossible to provide the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state). Obviously, The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) according to the first stage operation, if the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the drawn state, the predetermined time has elapsed (the reach effect). (Before the start of the operation), the control for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword-inserted state)) is performed. However, in this case, the operation state (reciprocation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is at least half the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword withdrawal state). Also, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated earlier than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 335 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, as in the case shown in FIG. 333 (d). Thus, an effect that depicts a state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect illustrated in FIG. 332 (c) is performed, the effect illustrated in FIG. 333 (d) or the effect illustrated in FIG. Or the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j). Note that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)). (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  333 (d) also shows that the instruction shown in FIG. 335 (j) does not display an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as “press” or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). This is different from the case of the production shown in). As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. Something will be recognizable.

  FIG. 335 (k) shows that the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. The production that is being done is performed.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), all effect elements (button images BTG) that suggest that the operation on the operation button 410 can be effected are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation where it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) appears. This makes it possible to give a doubt as to whether or not the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, in this case, the mode of the lightning image IZ is changing (appearing to disappear), and the remaining time until a clear indication of which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  FIG. 335 (i) shows that the appearance of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG) as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k). There is a production that depicts the situation that has come.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur due to the outer shape of the haze MY. Will be able to

  Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, in this case, the mode of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) than that of FIG. 335 (k), and until it is definitely indicated to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period is generated. Suggests that the time remaining is even less.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i) further progresses and haze MY is hidden, a sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG. 333 (d) and 335 (j), there is a possibility that an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. Will be able to

  Particularly, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 333 (d) and 335 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword decoration 5001 is confirmed. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY (FIG. 335 (k)). When the effect progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect illustrated in FIG. 333 (d) may be performed. If such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 335 (j) and (k) are also kept confidential as to which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, after the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, in the above-described effect example (second effect mode), in the effect condition shown in FIG. In the same manner as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 7, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation has not been performed by the player, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation has been performed by the player is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, a driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and a driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same drive source.

[Third production mode]
336 to 339 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but show another effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  FIG. 336 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 will be able to receive the effect soon.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are employed as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated. In this way, from the state where the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side, it is easy to enable any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to be able to accept the effect soon. Make it recognizable. Note that, here, control for operating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 from the initial position to the operation position is performed, but compared to operating the operation button 410 to the operation position when giving an operation opportunity. They operate at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation means has a time still left before the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means does not generate the effect reception period at all until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) operate respectively. Therefore, when there is still time left before the effect acceptance period occurs, or when the effect acceptance period does not occur at all until the symbol change ends, the game entertainment interest for those operations is It can be maintained suitably.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is produced not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but by each operation (FIG. 336 (b)) using the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. After the start, basically the same effect progress as the second effect mode is performed.

  For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 336 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the state in which the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated from the initial position (the position when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect by such a movable effect.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), the position of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) after a specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with a case where the operation opportunity is immediately given without performing the operation-related effect. In the case where the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation device on the side where the effect can be received at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced by such a delay.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), during a period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are set to the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. At different positions (for example, intermediate positions), they are positioned as operating states (states in which driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred can be operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur It is possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in operation-related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position, so that the effect reception period although it is in the operation state This makes it possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect illustrated in FIG. 336 (c) progresses and the effect illustrated in FIG. 336 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is displayed as “movable operation button”. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to “410”, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332 (c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position. Are positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

  Note that in the effects shown in FIGS. 336 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in an initial position (non-drive position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in an operative state at a position different from the initial position (non-drive position). In this way, by making the form of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the form of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, their matching will be soon established. It can be suggested that the effect to be achieved (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) is generated.

  In addition, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is displayed at the “operation position”. The effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (d), except that it is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410 at a certain time”.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the operation button 410 operates in the operation position, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the initial position. (Position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position are different from each other. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has been moved from the position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Become so.

  Note that, as the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), “display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a form moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an effect display period for the operation button 410 is generated to prompt an operation (a character display such as “press”, an effect display). (A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “moved to the operation position” mode, while the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode in which the user has moved to the operation position”. In this manner, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the operation buttons 410 at that time, the gap between those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position.)

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. The directing contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation button 410 has been returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 337 (f)) is performed, a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 337 (g). This is also as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed by operating the sword decoration 5001. The effect is as described with reference to FIG. 334 (g), except that the instruction content regarding “press” is displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a “moved to operation position” mode. It is content.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. The sword decoration 5001 has been operated at the operation position. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Will be done.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is also “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state where the sword decoration image SYG is moved to the operation position)”. After performing the display effect, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an instruction display for prompting operation (characters such as “push-in”) is performed. Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in a “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword decoration at the time of the display is displayed. The decorative image SYG is in a mode different from the “mode that has been moved to the operation position”. As described above, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG appearing as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the sword decoration 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes is reduced. It will be possible to suggest in advance that the sword decoration 5001 will soon be buried (in this case, the sword decoration 5001 moves to the operation position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 334 (h). The directing contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the time of non-drive) and the operation position. In this state, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position).

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 338 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 338 (j), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410 at a certain time”, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 335 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial position ( (A position at the time of non-driving) and an operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. Will be able to do it.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (k). The directing contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively positioned between the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position. They are operating at different positions.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (l). The directing contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively positioned between the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position. They are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the haze MY be closer to the sword decoration 5001 at the operation position, instead of the sword decoration 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 339 (k) and (l) is also kept secret from which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Note that, in this effect example (third effect mode), a drive source that applies a drive force to the operation button 410 and a drive source that applies a drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. Or the same drive source.

  In each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410” appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, a basic operation is performed. , An operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, and when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, an operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. Also, when a “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” appears as a result of an effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration An operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001 out of the body 5001, and when an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, an effect at the time of the operation of the sword accessory is performed. In this regard, in the operation effect on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) are based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination. Either one of them is to appear, but the production at the time of the operation of the sword role is also a production at the time of success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and a production at the time of failure based on the result of the production lottery according to the jackpot determination. (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated), and the effect contents are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  It should be noted that the operation at the button side and the operation at the sword accessory side operation are the same as the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, and the display effect performed on the effect display device 1600. You may make it content.

  In each of the effect examples described above with respect to a specific operation-related effect, it is assumed that an effect is given to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result is determined. Operation opportunities are given to them. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of an effect that gives an operation opportunity to a specific operation device, regardless of the result of any effect, such as pushing between specific operation devices. There may be.

  For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is drawn to the sword state), or a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is put into the sword-pulling state for one operation means (Operation of (1)), an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is provided may be performed, and the operation opportunity may be provided to the operation means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decoration 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword-pulling state and the sword-drawing state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in the sword-pulling state or the sword-pulling state when the effect result of the sword is displayed.

  Also, when the symbol change in the suspended state is exhausted, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation when the symbol variation is in the suspended state (when the symbol variation is exhausted before this). The effect suggested from within the symbol variation execution period) may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side without the operation opportunity are given. For both of them, it is possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol change in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in a hold state (within the execution period of the symbol change that has been digested earlier than this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable to operate a plurality of operation means provided respectively.

  In the second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, as the specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button images BTG, button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images need not always be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that an effect reception period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the effect acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is not displayed when the specific operation-related effect is ended. One of BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (the image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (the image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) thus displayed is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. In order to execute the effect related to the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ or the like), the specific operation-related effect is determined based on which of the plurality of operation means the effect accepting period occurs. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and By causing the sword decoration image SYG to appear from the rock when lightning falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to make the effect progress to the effect shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 334 (g). .
Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on the rock, one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. 333 (d) and 334 (g). In short, it is desirable that the effect be developed so that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a specific effect is obtained when an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 is generated and when an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. In addition, it is desirable that after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the effect accepting period is generated for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation-time effect) can be generated depends on which of the effect modes performs the effect. The ratio set for the specific operation unit of the plurality of operation units may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, the user did not perform the operation based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operation means on the side (e.g., FIG. 333 (e)), control is performed to return the operation means on the side on which the operation has not been performed to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time based on the operation. It may be. However, based on the timing during which the operation was performed, the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated until the operation is terminated, without using the operation as a reference. It is desirable to make the lengths of time periods different.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the shorter the remaining time of the effect reception period, the more the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has conflicted depending on whether or not to operate the operation means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on at what timing of the effect reception period the operation is performed (according to the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (such as "Even if the operating means on the side indicated in the specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was accepted and the effect was performed at the time of operation") The length of time during which the game is appealed to the player) can be kept different, so that the entertainment of the game can be maintained appropriately.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect has been operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect at the end of the effect reception period. May be operated.

  In addition, from the start of the specific operation-related effect to the display of the effect result (such as the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG), the side with the higher expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is displayed. May be performed to indicate the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. Although a movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed) , The specific movable member different from the specific decorative member SDY) can be operated more reliably by operating the specific movable body based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. Desirable for enabling.

  In addition, during a period from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of an effect result (a button image BTG, a sword decoration image SYG, or the like), the image corresponds to one of the images that can appear in the effect result. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, an effect accepting period is generated only for one of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410). This makes it possible to produce a special effect mode as if the effect were shown and the effect was terminated, even though it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect was performed. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest during the game. When an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to indicate the ratio of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with a high degree of expectation displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation degree is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to enhance the entertainment interest when the player recognizes that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In the case where the effect accepting period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operating means while the specific operation-related effect relating to the plurality of operating means is being performed, if the effect accepting period is within the effect accepting period. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Regardless of which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) appears as an effect, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the reproducibility as the specific operation-related production during a period from the start of the production of the specific operation-related production to the presentation of the production result. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given to the privilege grant more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation unit having the higher degree of expectation among the plurality of operation units. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect reception periods, when an operation is performed by the player, an effect is normally generated based on the operation. However, even if such an operation is not performed, the effect reception period elapses. An automatic button effect state described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation is performed earlier than that, may be set. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated without operating each time the effect accepting period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. If the specific operation-related effect is performed in such an automatic button effect state, the effect accepting period for any one of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operation effect as when the operating means is operated is performed without operating the corresponding operating means during the effect receiving period.

  However, even when the automatic button effect state described later is set, during the stage in which a specific operation-related effect is being performed, only the operation buttons 410 of the operation means are intentionally accepted during the effect acceptance period. Is generated, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (disabling the automatic button function). After that, even if an effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated during the effect reception period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operating means is operated is performed without doing so (making the automatic button function work). According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect based on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. Is expected to be suppressed.

  It is to be noted that the setting change relating to the ON / OFF of the automatic button effect state can be performed, for example, not only during the period when the symbol variation is not executed but also during the period when the symbol variation is executed by operating the operation button 410. It is desirable to make it. For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not occurred while the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect state is in the on state, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated during the effect reception period, an operation effect according to the operation is performed, and in addition, the automatic button effect state is set. The setting can be changed from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an operation-time effect by an operation performed by a player while maintaining the on-state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 at the time, not only the operation button 410 but also the operation for another operation unit other than the operation button 410 is enabled, and when the operation is performed on the other operation unit, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the effect being executed is changed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when the automatic button effect state is changed from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration 5001 is imitated as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. In the state where the displayed sword decoration images SYG are displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among these display modes, an operation opportunity (effect reception) Period) and, when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode as long as it gives an operation opportunity (effect reception period) to the sword decoration 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 337 (e), an effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 340 (g) and effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 334 (g) and 338 (h). Is also good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (a portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) are displayed. Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is displayed). 333 (d), 334 (g), 337 (e), and 338 (h) in the partial display mode (button image BTG, sword). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is performed by using substantially the entire display area (until the other effect images such as the background portion where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). Being done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (a), the first image having the shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) in which the operation button 410 is incorporated into the design is held. The character is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) has a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating a sword decoration 5001. The second character is displayed, and it is implicitly suggested which of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as effect images incorporating at least a part of the operation means such as a shape and a part of design.

  Moreover, as for the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG Depending on which of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may also be performed as an effect indicating a different degree of expectation. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Also, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. May indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when the image is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  For the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as a result of the effect (preferably an effect situation with relatively high expectation), When the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), it is displayed (desirably, it is desirable that the effect situation is a relatively low expectation effect). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is not executed without performing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). If the button image BTG is displayed, the effect reception period is performed not only for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG but also for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) which does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Thus, it is possible to give a different interest to the operation from the case where the button image BTG appears in the effect situation with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the decorative sword 5001.

  Further, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG during the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and It is desirable to indicate that the game is in a production situation with a higher expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button (operation button)) corresponding to the button image BTG during the effect reception period. If 410) is operated, the effect acceptance period for another operating means that is being generated at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation of the operating means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation be performed.

  On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period is as follows. When another operation means is operated, the effect acceptance period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. Instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the special operation effect is not performed. Even when an operation unit different from the unit is being operated, an operation effect at the time when the operation unit (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is obtained. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means, during the effect reception period, the same operation effect as when the operation means was operated without operating the corresponding operation means is executed. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect while the automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. Even if the effect accepting period is generated for both of the operation means and another operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed even if no operation is performed. It is preferable that only the operation effect at the same time as the operation is performed, so that the special operation effect that appears only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

  However, during the effect reception period, another time before the specific timing at which the effect at the time of operation (effect at the time of operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) appears by the above-described automatic button function, When the operation is performed on the operation means and the predetermined production condition is satisfied, the special operation production is performed according to the production reception, and the specific timing is reached. It is also desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect at the time of operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) does not appear. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state even after the end of the effect reception period. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed, each effect described above (operation effect, automatic button function, and the like) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not the specific operation-related effect is executed). In a case where the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, another effect means (for example, the operation button 410, etc.) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is to generate an effect acceptance period. It becomes.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, as a result of an effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating operation button 410” or In the case where any one of the “sword decoration images SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” is displayed, and the effect is received by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative And the first operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates), which is an effect content that suggests a high degree of expectation, and an effect content that suggests a relatively low degree of expectation. The second operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decoration member SDY does not operate) can be caused to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively higher at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. Is performed, the first operation-time effect having the effect content suggesting is performed. However, if the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception during the effect reception period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is generated using the button image BTG (first time). Of the sword decoration body 5001 when the execution is performed based on the reception of the operation for the operation button 410 when the display mode is displayed, and when the sword decoration image SYG (the second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the effect image (the button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high degree of expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed Since no demerit is produced on the effect result as compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIGS. 148 to 207), “giving operation opportunity to operation means” can be set as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes to be timer objects). is there. In other words, in the timer effect for the effect of “giving the operation means to the operation means”, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the operation opportunity is given to the operation means soon. , So that the effect at the time of operation can be enjoyed. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the production target of the timer effect, when an operation on the operation means is performed, an effect result advantageous to the player according to a predetermined effect lottery result. Make sure that any of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, in the case where the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as the production target of the timer production, the ratio of producing the production result advantageous to the player is higher than in the case where the production production of the timer production is not performed. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect is performed with the effect of “giving operation means to operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001)” appears, the “operation opportunity of operation means for operation means” A specific operation-related effect using “giving” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG, a specific operation-related effect as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001). It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the game is played.

  However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously advanced to one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) immediately before that. However, it is difficult to understand which of the effects should be watched, and there is a concern that the attention may be distracted and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed, and the count value It is desirable to start an effect of “specific operation-related effect” after the value has reached a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 341 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001). Note that the following timer effects correspond to the above-described notice-side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  FIG. 341 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 341 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (here, countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 341 (a). Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 341 (b), “specific operation-related effect” has not been executed yet, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is for. I have.

  In other words, in the timer effect according to this example of the effect, while it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed, the count value is first set to the predetermined value ( Here, the count reaches "0") and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), an effect of “specific operation-related effect” is started. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is not displayed.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect regarding which of the above is displayed is executed.
That is, in this case, even though two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), the effects are sometimes different. Since overlapping in a series is avoided, each different effect can be enjoyed.

  However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect is It is not possible to recognize whether the game was performed as a game, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) and before a specific operation-related effect is started. An effect that suggests the effect type (operation opportunity giving to the sword decoration 5001) which is the effect of the timer effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is directed to “giving an operation opportunity (operating opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword decoration 5001”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword sword decoration”). Is given by the player), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be started in the effect condition recognized by the player, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when “sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be displayed continuously.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the sword decoration 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, (Reciprocating operation in the vertical direction) is performed, and this also indicates that “giving an operation opportunity (operating opportunity by“ sword sword ”) to the sword decoration 5001 is a production target of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  The predetermined operation by the decorative sword body 5001 is not only performed when the timer effect is directed to “giving an operation opportunity to the decorative sword body 5001”, but also when other effects are directed. May be performed when becomes zero. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 does not function as an effect indicating the type of effect that the timer effect is directed to, but as an effect indicating that the count display has become 0. Becomes In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the start of the effect to be directed, and the timer effect is set as the directing effect. At the same timing as or before the production that suggests a production type is started, the production that suggests the production type that the timer production is directed to is performed during the execution state. It is important to ensure that

  FIG. 341 (d) shows an effect state in which an effect of “specific operation-related effect” has started.

In this effect situation, as described above, in addition to the effect that the count value has already been hidden, the effect that indicates the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also hidden.
In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 has also been completed. However, it is important that the timer effect suggests the effect type targeted for the effect and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect is started.

  341 (e) to (h) after the “specific operation-related production” is started, and the contents of these productions are shown in FIG. 332 (c). ), 334 (g) to (i), or 336 (d) and 338 (h) to (j), so that the details are omitted.

  In addition, as the timer effect performed in association with the specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 and a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery. You may make it executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point where a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341, but the specific operation-related effect is not The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) in accordance with the timing of starting (strictly, slightly before this), and continues even after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is indicated as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given ( Expectations for big hits are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer production, the specific operation-related production and the timer production will be produced at the same time, but when the production situation where the production is produced at the same time appears, the specific operation-related production Even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are shown as the rendering result, their rendering value is the same (the degree of expectation for privilege grant (big hit) is The same). In other words, in this case, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to understand whether or not the user should pay attention, and the user may be distracted. However, in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are produced at the same time appears, it is more advantageous to give a privilege than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the type of the effect target ( Although “sword sword” is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as an effect target as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is set as a timer among a plurality of effects that can be set as a timer, a display indicating which of the effects is a timer effect may not be displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, an operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect on whether or not to be given. However, prior to providing an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production acceptance period), a first indication effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is provided to the sword decoration 5001. Does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production acceptance period). An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may be made to appear. In the case of performing these predictive effects (first predictive effect, second predictive effect), the time required for the effect (predictive effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when an effect appears, in order to enhance the entertainment interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as the indication effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given, for example, the fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of standing in. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize by overlapping the specific image (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image). Thereafter, the specific image is gradually changed to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed), so that the button image BTG gradually increases. It can be executed as an effect to be exposed to the user. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode related to such an indication effect will be described later.

  Then, at this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, and the like) having different degrees of expectation regarding the privilege grant (big hit), As the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed is developed, it is possible to make the display mode of the button image BTG interesting.

  It should be noted that a first indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and that no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration A second sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. It is important that the contents be executed as different effects. In addition, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect be different.

  Such an indication effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the provision of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that it is a higher concept including. As for the precursor effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, as described below with reference to FIG. 342, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursor effect is performed in any of these effect modes. Depending on whether or not, it is suggested to indicate how long the effect reception period that occurs in response to the precursor effect is to improve the entertainment interest when the precursor effect is performed. It is more desirable to achieve this.

  FIG. 342 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of an effect when a plurality of types (an indication effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as an indication effect.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (a sign effect A), the sign effect A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The indication effect A is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (foreboding effect A), when the foreboding effect A is performed, the same time length is obtained even if any operation means is to be given an operation opportunity. The effect reception period (valid period) T1 that is held occurs.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A is displayed. ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIG. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.), and a process for ending the period T1 at that time. Is being done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (b) (the precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time has elapsed, not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started, An indication effect B1 is to be started. The indication effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation When the indication effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 for a specific operation device (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is caused to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is displayed. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation effect different from the above-described operation effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, processing for terminating the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is, as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) This is generated as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length) from T1. Thus, depending on which mode (the precursor effect A, the precursor effect B1) has performed the precursor effect, it is suggested how long the effect reception period generated corresponding to the precursor effect is. It is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game when the indication effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (c) (sign effect B2), the sign effect B2 is started when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. Like the precursor effect B1, the precursor effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related performance" but is executed prior to the operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Which is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, an effect acceptance period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1. An effect reception period) T3 occurs.

  Note that also in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press") that prompts the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T3, an operation-time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is performed, and a process of terminating the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is, as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) This is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed, despite the fact that the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation relating to the privilege grant (big hit) is executed. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T3 having a length will occur, an effect situation as if a specific operation-related effect has been performed is created, and the precursor effect B2 is generated. It is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest when the game is performed. Note that in this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant be different between when the effect reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

  The indication effects B1 and B2 are specified by causing the same effect mode to appear from the start of the effect to the timing in the middle of the effect, and by causing different effect modes to appear after the timing has elapsed. The operation means may be provided with the effect of determining which of the effect reception period (valid period) T2 and the effect reception period (valid period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such a staging property, and the staging effects B1 and B2 may be set such that the staging is started when a different time elapses after the symbol change starts. The indication effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (the precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (the precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is applied to any of the operation means even if the operation opportunity is given. The effect reception period (valid period) T4 that has is generated.

  Also in the effect reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect C ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.), and a process for ending the period T4 at that time. Is being done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor effect C is, as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) This is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than the precursor effect A, as long as the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related performance” described above. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as in the case of the precursor effect A is generated, the entertainment interest when the precursor effect C is performed is appropriately maintained. Will be able to

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 342, the effect reception period (valid period) is associated with the types of the precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, so that the effect reception period is set. (Effective period) was suggested. However, by setting such that the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period having a predetermined time length (for example, effect reception period T2) differs for each type of precursor effect, the effect reception period (effective period) ) May be suggested.

  In each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 is operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as operating at the operation position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration body 5001 is operating at the operation position (sword-drawing state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as operating at the operation position (sword-drawing state). Have been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating as it looks. Therefore, even though a specific operation-related effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, when displaying the result of the effect, the width of the effect is significantly narrowed, and a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is caused. I am concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410). Regarding (BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 343 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect content when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and an effect content when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 343 (a) to 343 (c) show the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect in which the display of the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in a state where the number of holds is zero. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the state of the effect, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect” but only the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 side only. Assuming that the precursor effect has been executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 soon. In the indication effect (the indication effect in other examples is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given soon is made, an effect image imitating the operation means Need not necessarily be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration body 5001 soon after the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. It will be.

  In the indication effect shown in FIG. 343 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a relatively low expectation blue aura and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a relatively high expectation red aura Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content regarding which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this effect situation, it is recognizable that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration body 5001 soon, but the sword decoration image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decoration image SYG or the sword decoration image SYG having a low degree of expectation is obtained. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 343 (b) shows the rendering result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left, whereby the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation rendering situation. It will be suggested that an effect acceptance period will occur. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (b), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa) is displayed. .

  FIG. 343 (c) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to perform an operation (“press-in”). "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Also, when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also moves from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received during the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sword-inserted state. Will be maintained. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means (here, the operation target side) is operated. The effect image (in this case, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (pull-out state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side are displayed. Are stopped at predetermined positions.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect in which the display of the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in a state where the number of holds is zero. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (d), in the state of the effect, if a precursor effect as a “specific operation-related effect” is started, any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is started. It becomes recognizable that an operation opportunity will be given soon.

  FIG. 343 (e) shows an effect state in which a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this state of production, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 as a production result of “specific operation-related production”. Have been. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (e), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to another effect image (such as the button image BTG) is displayed.

  FIG. 343 (f) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the decorative sword 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to perform an operation (“press-in”). "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Further, when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the drawn state during the effect reception period (the sword decoration image SYG). Is stopped), whereas the sword decoration 5001 is configured to continuously perform the upward displacement slowly over the period until the end of the effect reception period. I am trying to.

  During the effect reception period, no matter where the sword decoration body 5001 is located, an effect is received when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword-put state, and the effect is received. At the time of the predetermined operation effect based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play the role of accurately transmitting the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state during the effect reception period, and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated, and the decorative sword 5001 may be stopped.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed. On the other hand, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the stop state is set for one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG. On the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the effect can be broadened, and the entertainment of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the operation While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the description thereof is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs is greatly improved.

  It should be noted that either the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a sign effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed but also when a specific operation-related effect as a sign effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of determining which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, it is determined whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation. Can be further provided. This technique may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples in addition to the effect example of FIG. 343.

Then, when giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. It is in a state where it appears or is recognizable, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is displayed). (Such as a recognizable display state) is made to appear by the production progress.
Then, after that, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image appearing as the effect of the specific operation-related effect is of high expectation (for example, the outline image of the effect image imitating the operation means) It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed, etc.) in order with further effect development. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed after the progress of the effect, under a predetermined condition, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation (for example, if the operation means is operated). After canceling the outline state of the simulated effect image), the button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined to make a display state in which only the outline can be recognized). And an effect pattern for further effect development may be generated. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as the effect of the specific operation-related effect is of high expectation (for example, the outline state of the sword decoration image SYG) , So that the color can be confirmed). Note that, in this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the higher expectation side (for example, red), it is more than when the display mode on the lower expectation side (for example, blue) is displayed. However, it is desirable that the rate at which such further production progress occurs increases.

  FIGS. 344 (a) to (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 344 (a), the indication effect as “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the indication effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. First character (effect image corresponding to operation button 410) and second character holding sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to sword decoration 5001) Is depicted, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. Like that.

  FIG. 344 (b) shows an effect state in which the effect result of the precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (the effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the second character (the sword decoration) is provided to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is in a non-display state). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) are the same. The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 344 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 344 (c) to (e) show an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 344 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 344 (c), when the effect reception period occurs, the sword decoration 5001 starts operating from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state. As shown in FIG. 344 (d), the sword decoration 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state only after a relatively short time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 344 (e), as long as there is no operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in a sword-drawn state until at least the end of the effect acceptance period, and (The operation from the sword-drawing state to the sword-drawing state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344 (c) to (e), the movement (movement in the rotation direction) is completely different from the movement (movement in the linear direction) of such a sword decoration 5001. In the lowering operation), the second character draws down the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues to be displayed even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the drawn state. The operation is performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this effect example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) within the effect reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the change, and the display change progresses by an amount corresponding to the passage of time. Also, the sword decoration 5001 enters the sword-drawing state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)). Is completed, but even if the loop processing is performed, it is not affected by the loop processing, and the sword is kept in the drawn state. In addition, if the operation to the katana state is performed on the operation target role 141 during the effect reception period, the effect reception will be performed, and the predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sword-inserted state. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period, The operation modes (operations that play the role of accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for the effects) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 ends. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending.
Thus, when an effect reception period (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect continues until after the effect reception period occurs ( The effect can be broadened, for example, by making it possible to execute the game with the background being continued), so that the entertainment interest of the game can be suitably maintained.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 344, the effect contents (display in which characters face each other) appearing when the precursor effect (FIG. 344 (a)) as a specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effects (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in a form in which both the background image and the background image are changed are executed. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this effect example, the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG different from the effect image imitating the operation means are displayed while the special background (full moon) is displayed. The image is displayed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), so that it is possible to improve the performance in the performance reception period. In this sense, in the indication effect, the effect is produced by using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character, so that the indication effect and the effect in the effect acceptance period are performed. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing property.
In addition, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting benefits, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  In the case of a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as the effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of the effect modes appears. A suggestion may be made as to whether or not an aspect having a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when an effect is received during the period. A background image that appears when the precursor effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, when an indication effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image appearing in the indication effect. Although it was decided to perform the effect within the period, but when the above-mentioned sign effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the sign effect are changed The effect at the time when the effect acceptance period occurs may be executed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the effect reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 starts before the effect reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the effect reception period occurs may be completed before the effect reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation may be performed). The performed operation may be completed before the effect reception period occurs), and thereafter, the stopped state may be maintained.

  In addition, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001), a display for changing a background image when an effect acceptance period occurs, and a case where the background image is changed There may be a case where the display to be performed is not performed. Then, in this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period is generated, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period is generated. Is desirable.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception is performed, the specific decoration member SDY (the movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation effect based on the effect reception. In this case, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 331 (d), 333 (e), and 334 (h), as the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side, the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is used. 410) is also operated so as to improve the performance of the operation-time production after a specific operation-related production. In this way, in order to improve the directability of the operation-time production after the specific operation-related production, the operation-time production after the specific operation-related production depends on the result of the production. In this case, an effect state appears when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (the game machine main body side) are activated, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While an unsuccessful performance state in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, an operation-time effect performed without performing a specific operation-related effect (for example, a specific effect) Depending on the result of the effect, either the movable member provided on the game board 5 or the movable member provided on the door frame 3 side, depending on the result of the effect. Only when the success of the production of the operation state appears, or the game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described effect modes and specific operation-related effects according to the other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The degree of expectation related to the grant of the privilege is set higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 345 (a), the button image BTG is added in a mode (specific mode) in which a princess character is added. The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation concerning the privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect. When the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, the manner in which the princess character is displayed (a specific effect manner) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 345 (b). Note that, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation relating to privilege provision is higher than when displayed in a normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 345 (a)) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 345 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of a specific operation-related effect. )) May be prepared. Then, in this case, the degree of expectation related to privilege provision is set to be the same between the case where the first effect pattern appears and the case where the second effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect, and also to provide the button image BTG and the sword. It is possible to provide completely different fun, such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which of the decorative images SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, when such a specific production mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related production, when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345 (c), when the specific effect mode is at a stage where the effect result (which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears) of the specific operation-related effect has not yet appeared. This may be displayed in advance from (for example, during the production of a specific operation-related production). According to such a configuration, although the specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). Appearing), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, and thus, even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed, it may be such as "a foreboding effect by a princess character". It is possible to provide a directing effect having a completely different purpose.

  The sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples thereof has a sword part (stem part 5012, sword body part 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 that can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit is given an operation opportunity. The above-described specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of The sword portion (stem portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are both operably supported by one main body supporting portion (not shown) provided on the door frame 3, and Even if one side of the sword part (handle 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of operation (operation), the other side has a structure that can operate (operation). Is formed.

  However, in the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different irrespective of the effect result, and it is difficult to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even when the operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, the effect image imitating the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001 (and the effect image thereof) (Instruction display for prompting operation) is displayed, there is a possibility that the player side may be more likely to make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, as the remaining time of the effect reception period decreases every moment, the player first performs an operation for correcting an operation error, and then further performs an operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and if the effect reception period ends before the effect is received even though the specific operation-related effect with relatively high expectation has been performed, However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  Further, the sword decoration 5001 includes a mode such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword portion and a mode such as "movement in the horizontal direction" by the sheath portion. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the appropriate side, and the effect acceptance period ends. It can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

  Therefore, when performing the above-described specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is preferable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

  FIGS. 346 and 347 show an example of an effect in a case where an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  FIG. 346 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 346 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), a first effect that simulates a first operation mode of operating the sword portion of the sword decoration 5001 from the sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state. The image OX and the second effect image TX imitating the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword decoration 5001 is moved in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Simultaneously displayed, it is suggested that an operation opportunity in any one of these operation modes will soon be able to accept the effect. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In each of the second effect images TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  FIG. 346 (c) shows a first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and a second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode in which the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect accepting period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

  Note that, in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346 (c), when the first effect image OX is left but becomes predominant, a display such as “press-in” can be visually recognized. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized in a situation where the second effect image TX is predominant but left. The details of the operation content can be easily recognized according to the state of the effect. However, these displays may not necessarily be displayed because there is a risk that the effect is erroneously recognized as prompting the operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 346 (d) shows that as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 346 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is displayed in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to this effect content, even if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and the first operation mode does not occur. An effect is received when the operation is performed, and an effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346 (d), an effect accepting period for a specific operation-time effect occurs only in the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. That is, in the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “push-in” and a time remaining in the effect reception period are shown). Bar display) will be displayed. Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 operates from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  FIG. 347 (e) shows that, although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) according to the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode is performed. This shows the state of production when performed by a player.

  That is, in this effect example, even if the effect accepting period relating to the effect at the time of the specific operation occurs only on the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received is received. (In this case, “just as it is”).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed (here, “calm down and pushed in”) with the lapse of time so that the player can regain calmness. It has become. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be informed is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this can be suitably performed. It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if the operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decoration body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 347 (g) shows that the operation on the appropriate side (first operation mode) is performed in the effect situation (effect accepting period in the erroneous operation state) shown in FIGS. 347 (e) and 347 (f). As a result, a state in which an effect is received and the above-described operation effect is performed in accordance with the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the state of the second operation mode to the non-operation state (the normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains unchanged. Even if it is performed from the state (the state of the operation error), the effect reception is properly performed, so that the decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-described production example, when a player makes an erroneous operation, the user is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. It is not always necessary to perform the detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player has panicked, so that informing of complicated contents may have an adverse effect. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but an effect or a sound only. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation has been performed incorrectly, but a special situation is confirmed in which the specific notification is performed based on the performed operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed. Thus, it can be said that it is possible to sufficiently expect to switch the operation to the operation on the appropriate side.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (especially an elderly player), it may be supposed that a situation may occur in which an operation is performed by mistake before the effect reception period occurs in the specific operation-related effects. For example, when an operation (for example, lateral movement of the sheath portion) on the second operation portion is performed even though an operation instruction on the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, the first It is also conceivable that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period for the effect at the time of a specific operation occurs only on the side of the operation unit (for example, the sword part). In this case as well, how the player operates There is a concern that people may not be able to recognize it.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation unit (sheath part) is given an operation opportunity is performed, Despite the situation where no operation instruction (remaining time bar display) is given to the second operation unit side (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit It is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in a proper mode is accepted even when an operation is performed on. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that the appropriate operation unit to which an operation opportunity is to be given soon while the operation state is maintained is maintained" or a message display. Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or a notification only by sound. In any case, despite performing the operation, by confirming a special situation such that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed, the operation on the appropriate side is thereafter performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect that it will be a good reason to go.

  In this case, for example, while the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (the state in which the sword decoration 5001 has moved to the left), the first operation unit (for example, Even when the effect reception period for the effect at the time of the specific operation occurs only on the side of the sword part, the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is performed (sword decoration body). When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 has been moved to the left, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect is performed according to the operation. It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the original state, the effect reception will be performed properly, so the operation error will occur before the effect reception period occurs When the game has occurred, the decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  However, during a period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is given an operation opportunity is given, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be intermingled with the content of the notification (display of instructions, etc.) during the production reception period, and the player will be further confused. There is a concern. Therefore, the effect result suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is in a specific operation-related effect that is finally displayed, and in a period until the effect result is displayed. The above-described specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and the first period and the second period are sequentially performed after the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described effect example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the above-described effect forms and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the effect form of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 311). From the stage 0 mode to any one of the stage 1 mode to the stage 3 mode). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to one of the above-described modes, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it do. Alternatively, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed to any of the above-described multiple modes.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in”, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), and a sword decoration 5001 Is displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 311). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image 5001 is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the confirmation of the sword decoration image SYG can be made to be interesting. And the production performance during the production reception period is poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a different mode from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure directing performance during the directing reception period.

  At this time, by making the aspect expressed in the sword decoration image SYG have a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to further enhance the production performance during the production reception period. It is desirable in order to ensure it suitably. For example, in the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 mode and the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed in the stage 1 mode but in the stage 2 mode or the stage 3 mode. To be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the effect reception period is appropriately maintained.

  In order to obtain such an effect, it is only necessary that the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration image SYG side be greater than the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of the effect forms on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. In addition, when a plurality of presentation modes are prepared as the sword decoration 5001, the plurality of presentation modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

  However, if the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the mode of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made to differ in this way, some players may have a discomfort that false display is made. There is concern that this could diminish the entertainment interest. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the stage 0 to the stage 3 shown in FIG. 311). Is prepared, and when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, so that the sword decoration image 5001 and the sword decoration image 500 are displayed. It is desirable that the mode of the decorative image SYG be different from the mode of the decorative image SYG. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decoration image SYG is changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG. It may emit light in such a manner that it does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to achieve an appearance that is difficult to achieve due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001 by using the sword decoration image SYG. In addition to being able to do so, by providing a performance that is beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decoration 5001, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be improved.

  Even when the sword decoration image SYG is given a special mode as described above, the sword decoration image SYG is provided in each mode prepared as the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 311). It is desirable that the display in the stage 0 mode to the stage 3 mode can be performed. That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. It is desirable that when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the special mode, it is suggested that the degree of expectation concerning the privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, regarding the method of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect illustrated in FIGS. 312 to 319) is performed. You may make it apply.

  For example, assuming that the production state is as shown in FIG. 315 (X1), the next production progress is to the production state shown in FIG. 348 (a) in addition to the production state shown in FIG. 315 (X2). And the production pattern to produce the production will be prepared. Then, when the effect is advanced to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1). A continuous image indicating that no opportunity is given (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second sword-drawing state is in a sword-pulling state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Will be returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence mode, to notify the player that the decorative symbols are to be re-varied (FIG. 348 (b)). ). Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-sword pattern not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (the number of pseudo-run times). By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design in the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation).

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), the pseudo-sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the fourth pseudo-run variation (re-variation). A sword image indicating (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot be changed. The special mode according to this effect example is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area changes to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 3 mode. Is maintained, the state is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state.

  After that, an operation validity period for generating a sword decoration body 5001 operation validity period and prompting a sword decoration body 5001 sword putting operation in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are performed. Specifically, a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the specially-shaped sword decoration body 5001 is displayed while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second drawn sword state (stage 3 mode), An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pause the sword!" (FIG. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), when a sword placing operation by the player is detected during the operation validity period, a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is performed according to the set effect pattern. While the expectation degree notification effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when a symbol change is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is changed within the symbol change. A first indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given and no operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 can be executed. In addition, when a symbol change is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated within the symbol change. The second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given is executable. In addition, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, a third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this regard, these precursor effects are executed as different effect contents, but as the effect contents, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears,
・ After that, at a position where it is difficult to view the specific image, an effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
・ Then, the specific image gradually changes from the display area to the non-display state (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first predictive effect, a display effect based on the “cloud effect” is performed as a specific image (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means). Effect (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means. In the third predictive effect, a display effect (a effect image imitating the operation means If the type of the specific image is made different, such as by performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize, it is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second predictive effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the “water effect” is used. When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is provided with the operation opportunity is performed. Will be done.

  In the case where a sign effect (at least one of a first sign effect, a second sign effect, and a third sign effect) is performed with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image is used. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize the operation means. When such a configuration is applied to one of the first sign effect and the second sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with a high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since an operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the user is not sure about which of the display modes (for example, blue) is to be displayed, the production during the production acceptance period is performed. Characteristics can be improved. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot have the effect, it is possible to improve the performance in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 350 is an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 349 and FIG. 350, an example of an effect when the first sign effect is performed will be described. It is also possible to apply to an indication effect.

  FIG. 349 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 349 (b) shows an effect state in which the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a “cloud effect” gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 350 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or reducing the area in which the specific image is displayed).

  Then, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 350, at timing t2 when the display production by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 is changed. The generated button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed. FIG. 349 (c)).

  In this presentation example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. When the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the ratio of performing the operation effect in a mode of higher expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), there is a situation in which it is not certain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is performed in such a manner that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode and the The effect can be advanced without being convinced which of the two display modes will be displayed.

  Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), it is not possible to be certain that the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to indicate that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” is displayed while the production acceptance period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 349 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to perform an operation on the operation button 410 while it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the effect contents are switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349 (d).

  According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period from when the button image BTG is displayed to when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). In the case of ()), it is possible to provide the directivity by making the button image BTG relatively hard to visually recognize.

  In order to enhance the directivity during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4) during the entire period, the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (time t3 to t4). , It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period between the timings t2 and t3. In this effect example, a message such as "press" is displayed during a period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period during the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more appropriately enhanced. Will be able to

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize first appears. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the effect acceptance period occurs, the effect pattern (third precursor) in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect in which the value of watching the button image BTG becomes higher as the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG. It can be maintained suitably.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”. However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is not affected by the “cloud effect”. It was decided to display it so that its visibility was maintained. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may also be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether to operate the operation button 410 without being convinced of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period cannot be grasped well. , And it will be possible to provide unprecedented novel performance.

  In the case of applying such an effect to any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, the effect image imitating the operating means after the start of the sign effect is clear. Even if the length of time until the image is visually recognizable (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is imitated after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the same time (the time until the specific image is not displayed) until the image can be visually recognized. In addition, when such a rendition is applied to any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, an effect imitating the operation means after the sign effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare a plurality of these so as to have a plurality of effects with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same for all. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is caused to appear in a display mode (timing t2) in which the effect image imitating the operation means is relatively hard to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. It may be made to gradually change toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance in such a display mode is itself. May be performed as an indication effect, or an effect image imitating the operation means may be made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing another display as an indication effect. Is also good.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. ) May be executed only when the error occurs. That is, at the point in time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is confidential which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect, and as a result of the effect being developed, a plurality of Since an effect reception period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, it may be delayed to determine which one of the plurality of operation means to operate, rather than being operated by the player. The production acceptance period may end before all remaining time has been consumed. In this regard, if the specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later occurs, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any of the operation means appears as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, the operation by the player on the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function Since the effect is received by any one of the above and the effect after the operation is always executed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

[Auto button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is executable, and control is performed in this automatic button effect state. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, Even if the operation by the player is not accepted in the process, the process (automatic production function) for causing the same change as when the operation by the player is accepted for the production within the production acceptance period can be executed. I have. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect will be generated after the operation when the operation is performed without the need to operate each time the effect reception period occurs. Will be able to In addition, regarding the automatic production function, when this function is performed, the same production reception as when the operation is actually performed may be performed, so that the processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed. Instead, the same processing as when an effect is received may be performed.

  In the embodiment relating to the “automatic effect function” described below, the techniques, effects, settings, and the like related to the above-described operation may be appropriately combined or used.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operating unit is operated a plurality of times to automatically switch the button. The setting to the production state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed on the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). Is selected and the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, setting to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation of the operation button 410 alone may be performed a plurality of times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of a different operation unit may be performed a plurality of times.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by being operated once, and such operation is simplified. The setting to the automatic button effect state can be performed while keeping an eye on the effect progress during the symbol change. However, some players may wish to actively operate the operation buttons 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred. If the setting to the automatic button effect state is made simply by operating, the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be changed for a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to operate it once in a mode (so-called “long pressing mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. Accordingly, even if the operation of the operation button 410 is actively performed during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, regardless of whether the valid period has occurred, the automatic button effect state is set. Erroneously set. In addition, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect accepting period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as a method of canceling the automatic button effect state in a state where it has been set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is also used. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  In other words, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be released by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed on the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). Is selected and the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is released.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. The setting of the automatic button effect state can be released while keeping an eye on the effect progress during the symbol change. However, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is set to the automatic button effect state, even if the operation state of the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed), the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state. The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that the button operation has been performed (only by operating in a single operation mode). In other words, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that a desire to perform an operation on the operation button 410 appears. By canceling the state setting and returning to the normal effect state early, it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 etc. is set) Occurs, and even if an operation (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) by the player is not received during the effect reception period, an operation (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) by the player is performed within the effect reception period. It is possible to execute processing (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the effect is received. According to such a configuration, a period occurs in which the effect on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be accepted, or another operation means (for example, In the case where the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) regarding whether or not a period during which an operation on the sword decoration 5001) can be effected is performed, the effect result. Even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled to accept the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate, and such a specific operation-related effect can be enjoyed with confidence. .

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is set as an operation target occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When the operation on the first operation means is not performed within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic directing means),
The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001 or the like) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target when controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when the operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation on the second operation means is performed is performed. Possible (second automatic staging means)
Regardless of whether the first side effect reception period or the second side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period, The automatic processing by the first automatic production means or the automatic processing by the second automatic production means can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first-side effect accepting period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are set as the operation target. Regardless of which of the second side effect reception period set as occurs within the execution period of symbol fluctuation, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of those periods Therefore, you can enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when a first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side effect reception period occurred. The automatic processing by the first automatic production means is performed when the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed and when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. The effect may be made to progress within the symbol variation as occasionally.
According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurred, a different timing from this Since the effect is received and the effect is automatically generated after the operation, it is possible to function as a surprise effect.

  It should be noted that when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operating means within the symbol fluctuation period as compared to when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The ratio at which the effect reception period is performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the effect reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate during the effect reception period also increases. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the function, the effect accepting period can be generated at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in gaming interest due to frequent forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that both the effect accepting period for the first operating means and the effect accepting period for the second operating means be high. However, it is more desirable that the degree of the occurrence ratio be different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the effect acceptance condition is satisfied within the effect acceptance period, the effect after operation can be executed (effect operation execution means after operation),
A process of establishing an effect receiving condition based on an operation performed by a player during an effect receiving period is executable (player operation receiving means);
When the operation by the player is not performed during the effect reception period, a process of establishing the effect reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing during the effect reception period can be executed (automatic effect reception means )
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. You are going to. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player himself to operate before the automatic staging function is provided is given, and an option for causing the staging acceptance by the operation by the player is also left. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game.

  In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. When it is assumed that the effect development within the symbol fluctuation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the `` specific time '' or the `` specific time '' Any of the times different from the above is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side effect reception period.

  Here, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when controlled to the automatic button effect state, and an operation for the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period, Then, a process of generating a post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

  Similarly, during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect acceptance period for an operation means (such as a sword decoration body 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs. Even when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received during the period, a process of generating a post-operation effect in accordance with the reception of the effect and a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, for the “post-operation effect in response to the effect reception”, an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during a period in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled. It is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect executed when the operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced by the player's own operation (normal effect mode) (specific effect mode) (A desire to end the state). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the specific production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button provided with an operation opportunity within the effect reception period The process of terminating the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in effect by performing only one operation on the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (only by operating in a single operation mode) (The process of performing the effect after the operation) is performed, so that the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and to develop the effect depending on the player's own operation is received. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the effect state.

  However, during the period when the demo screen is displayed (symbol change is not executed), the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (change to the automatic button effect state or release of the automatic button effect state) The setting of the sword decoration body 5001 can be changed without requiring an operation. That is, the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with the operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol change, and when the operation opportunity is provided correspondingly, the bigger hit than the operation button 410 is expected. The degree is to be raised. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is prevented from being allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting relating to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the sense of premium when the game is played and maintain the entertainment interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons other than the sword decoration body 5001) among the plurality of operation means is displayed. By operating the control button 410 or other operation means a plurality of times, the automatic button effect state can be set or canceled.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation to the automatic button effect state is not required without the operation on the sword decoration 5001. The setting can be changed. That is, as described above, when the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled. However, only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed for the purpose.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the case where the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 means the symbol when the automatic button effect state is controlled. An effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the change, and an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is effected during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to this is displayed. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. Become like

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the plurality of operating means include, when in the automatic button effect state, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect without operation during the effect reception period." In addition to the operating means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001) that can be targeted by the "draft function", special operating means that is not targeted by the "automatic directing function that generates an operation-time production without operating during the production reception period" May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and when an operation for the special operation means is received during the effect reception period, The post-operation effect according to the effect reception indicates the degree of expectation of the big hit. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if an operation on the special operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect was accepted may appear. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the above-mentioned effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from the time when the above-mentioned effect is received, it may be made to appear.

  Also, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode), an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs during a period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 (the effect reception period in which the degree of expectation is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, or the degree of expectation is suggested in the case where the special operation means is operated) It is desirable that this should not be allowed even if an effect reception period occurs. In other words, if the operation button 410 is operated (operated in a long-press mode) during an effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410, an automatic button effect state is generated. In the middle of the effect reception period, the "automatic effect function for generating an operation-time effect without operation during the effect reception period" is activated, so that the original effect reception (operation of an operation means different from the operation button 410 is performed) May be generated without any operation, and from a player who is ignorant of such an automatic button effect state, whether the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred or the operation button 410 It may be confusing that a production acceptance period for different operation means has occurred, and this may reduce the interest in gaming This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment can execute a precursor effect prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but controls to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the production acceptance period when not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the production acceptance period when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state) It may be configured to be executed as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize in advance whether or not the state is in an effect state in which the automatic effect function can function within the specific effect reception period, and the effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, when the production acceptance period occurs, the specific image is directed to a specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until a specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning falls toward the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (a precursor effect). In other words, in this case, at the time of the production acceptance period, the movement of the production image different from the specific image is confirmed, so that the non-displayed “specific image suggesting the remaining time” is closely watched at the place where it will appear. Can be encouraged, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation by the player is not in time and the specific effect acceptance period ends, and furthermore, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state can be executed by the operation of the player. The state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled in accordance with the progress of the game or the effect based on the game. As an example in which the state setting and the setting release can be performed in accordance with the progress of the game and the effect, for example, "the automatic button effect state is controlled while the normal game state is controlled, but the big hit game state Or the automatic button effect state is canceled when the state is shifted to the high probability time saving state, or the automatic button effect state is generated within the symbol change execution period, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generating an effect pattern to be canceled when a predetermined time has elapsed since the generation of the automatic button effect state" or "generating an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol changes are executed" It is possible to adopt such a control mode and the like. Further, the pachinko machine 1 which is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled.

  In addition, the timing at which the above-described automatic effect function functions may be a time when the remaining time of the effect reception period is consumed, or may be a predetermined timing thereafter, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. The timing may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the above-mentioned automatic production function functions when the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or at a predetermined timing thereafter, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a certain timing (specific timing) where the remaining time of the production reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions as in the case where the operation is actually performed. At that time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends, and the effect after the operation is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur even if no operation is performed while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends ( It is important that the above-described automatic effect function is activated at a specific timing within a period) and the effect after operation is started according to the function. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function even though the specific timing within the production reception period has arrived, the post-operation production is generated by the player himself / herself operating after the specific timing has come. It is also possible to make the user feel uneasy when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, erroneously that the automatic button effect state is controlled even though the automatic button effect state is not controlled). , The effect may not be confirmed after the operation "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and the effect may not be confirmed after the operation ") Will be able to

  The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be sequentially described. They may be used in combination as appropriate.

  In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, the premise is that, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when it is not normally controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), When an effect reception period that can occur also occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if no operation is performed during the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be executed only when controlled in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared. When a specific effective period relating to the specific display effect is performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) (improvement of effect by permitting occurrence of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific production state (automatic button production state) has occurred, the automatic production function may not be able to function during another production reception period that is set when a specific display production is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific validity period when a specific display effect is being performed, it is possible to enjoy a VIP feeling due to the fact that the operation of the automatic effect function can be saved and the trouble of operating can be saved. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately enhanced. In addition, it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from being able to function in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed. If the function cannot be performed, the above-described operation and effect when a specific effective period occurs when a specific display effect is performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions) occurs. It is possible to expect. Also, when such a specific validity period occurs, if the player does not perform an operation until a specific timing within the specific validity period arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is activated at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the effect after the operation according to this.

Further, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination.
-If the first specific validity period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-described automatic effect is performed at a timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific validity period occurred. The function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto,
-If the second specific validity period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific validity period has occurred The automatic production function described above functions at the timing when the time has elapsed, ends the second specific validity period, generates a post-operation production in accordance with this, and further,
-If a third specific validity period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific validity period is controlled despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of the process, each process such that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed cannot appear may be performed when the device is in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is generated from the time that the effect reception period occurs. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described automatic effect function functions, or the above-described automatic effect function does not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed, Even if the effect reception period ends, the above-described automatic effect function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even when controlled in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is checked which type of specific display effect was being performed when the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurred. For example, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, when the second predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described operation can be performed. The effect can be developed with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic effect function of the above functions or whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at all. The first specific validity period, the second specific validity period, and the third specific validity period are all set when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called, “operating button 410”). The effect is received when a single operation is performed, and an effect is generated after the operation.

  It should be noted that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are executable only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. As described above, when the display is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when the control is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Also, a first specific display effect (first specific validity period) and a second specific display effect (second specific validity period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (third specific validity period) is prepared. Need not always be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when an effect is received during the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the timing of the automatic effect function during the effect accepting period (when the effect is accepted, The automatic staging function worked for the bar display (display in which the image changes (in this case, the area changes) as time elapses) indicating the remaining time of the staging available period so that the user can recognize whether only the time has been left. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which this is not displayed but is displayed at the time. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” continuously displayed at the time when the automatic effect function functions, the effect accepting period is set to the first specific effective period ( When the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production acceptance period has elapsed, a period in which the automatic production function functions, and a second specific effective period (relatively after the production reception period has occurred) (The period in which the automatic effect function is activated when the second predetermined time, which is a later stage, has elapsed) can be recognized.

  In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the first predetermined time elapses after the effect reception period occurs and the automatic effect function functions) occurs, and when the second specific effective period ( The big hit expectation is different from when a second predetermined time elapses after the effect reception period occurs and when the automatic effect function functions) (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, in the case where the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit expectation occurs when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In the case where an after-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player during the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the after-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case where the function is operated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the “bar display” is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body. Is also good.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation is performed without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern from the player's side that the automatically generated effect after the operation cannot be grasped to which operation means. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by operating the above-described automatic effect function, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation target operation target) suggesting an operation means to be operated during the effect reception period. Even if the above-described automatic effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect is generated without displaying the operation object suggestion image without displaying the operation object suggestion image. Is desirable. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image is not necessarily the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated. It is only necessary to be able to recognize which of the two is in the state where the effect has occurred after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect occurs due to the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic operation may be performed. Similarly to the case where the effect function is performed, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. When the above-described automatic production function functions, such as when the automatic production function functions within the first specific valid period or when the automatic production function functions within the second specific valid period, The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden.

  Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation object suggestion image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the operation object suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode are provided. Can be checked at the same time, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

Further, when an effect for generating an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any one of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as an “operation effect”, the operation effect is not related to this. May be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a moving object effect, a count effect, or the like) having no character. However, in this case, if the “operational effect” is executed but “another specific effect not related to this” is not executed, the “operational effect” and “another effect not related to this It is desirable that the ratio of the above-described automatic production function to be performed is higher than that in the production situation where “specific production” is performed in parallel. In other words, when the “operation-related effect” and “another specific effect not related to this” are in parallel, the effect is not accepted in the “operation-related effect” and the post-operation effect is not executed. Also, since “another specific effect unrelated to this” is in the execution state, the decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed, while “operational effect” is executed but “another effect unrelated to this” is performed. If there is a stage where the "specific stage" is not executed, and there is a case where the stage is not accepted and the stage after the operation is not executed in the "operational stage", there will be a situation where no stage will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the entertainment interest will decline. Therefore, when the “operational effect” is executed but “another specific effect not related to this” is not executed, the “operational effect” and “another specific effect not related to this By making the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions higher than when the production is in a production situation in which the production is performed in parallel, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest when the operation-related production occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, an indication effect performed before the effect reception period occurs, an effect in which the operation means to be operated is operated, and the like are executed as an “operational effect” or an effect related thereto. It can be said that. In addition, for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect) as “another specific effect”, it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function will increase. Will be able to
In this case, it is desirable to execute the effect as an effect that is ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, assuming that the effect occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect) and is executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a high rate, and it is possible to provide the production in a sense of tension. In this regard, if it is assumed that “another specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect), the “another specific effect” may be performed a plurality of times within one symbol change. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the effect reception period does not occur, so if the ratio of the automatic effect function functions when "another specific effect" is executed is high Thus, it is possible to give a sense of tension as to whether or not an effect reception period will occur.

  Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations are executed, Until the 1000th loss change), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any one of the plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there are cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function and cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not made to function. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations are executed). In the case of the 1000th loss variation, the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached the specific value will cause the operating means (any one of the plurality of operating means) to be operated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player during the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is operated and there is an operation by the player during the effect reception period. The same process as that performed at the time of performing the post-operation effect may be performed. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the losing fluctuation reaches the specific value, “the player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the losing fluctuation is continuously executed. Did not produce any results despite the prompting of the pachinko machine. Even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions automatically Since it is realized as an effect to make the game entertain, the entertainment interest of the game can be suitably maintained. At this time, during the effect reception period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the execution is executed. A special display image (for example, different from a display image (for example, “Operating”) that appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, loss variation up to 999) "If it's troublesome, I'll do it for you." Further, even after the symbol fluctuation (effect pattern) that has reached the specific value is consumed, the symbol fluctuation is performed each time the symbol fluctuation is consumed until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In (effect pattern), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, “ If it is troublesome, I will act on your behalf "), and even if there is no operation by the player during the production acceptance period, the above automatic production function will function and it will respond to the production reception It is desirable to execute a process for always producing an effect after the operation.

  Note that when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations are executed. The number of remaining fluctuations up to the 1000th loss fluctuation) may be displayed.

  In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested until the number of executions reaches a specific value. Both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means are allowed to occur, but in the symbol fluctuation when the loss fluctuation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value, Alternatively, the effect may be developed such that only one of the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means always occurs, and the other side does not occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of the effect reception period from having an expectation for itself. Will be able to gain. However, this production example says, "In spite of losing fluctuations being performed continuously, there has been no result As if the player had felt the responsibility up to now, even if there was no operation by the player, considering that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always functions the automatic effect function, In order not to have any further expectation, an effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001) should not be generated.

  Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The second operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) of the plurality of operation means can be generated both when it is not operated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In the second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user, the event cannot occur when the control is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible to generate when it is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and to increase the effect when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is set. Can be appropriately maintained.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period is generated based on the result of the big hit determination,
Displaying a mimic image imitating the operating means (operating object suggesting image indicating the operating means to be operated) (mimic image displaying means);
-If an operation is performed by the player while the mock image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, a post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation receiving means);
-After the production acceptance period, if a specific timing arrives without operation by the player while the mock image is displayed, the production after operation can be executed without receiving the operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the mimic image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation) at which the post-operation effect is executed in the “advantageous mode for the player” when the effect is received is different. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation reception unit and the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect reception unit. It is possible to generate a post-operation effect in the above.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation is performed without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern from the player's side that the automatically generated effect after the operation cannot be grasped to which operation means. Therefore, in the case where the above-described automatic effect function is caused to function and a post-operation effect is generated, first, a mimic image (an operation object suggestion image suggesting operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the above-described automatic effect function is functioning, it is desirable that the effect is generated after the operation while the mimic image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image is not necessarily the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated. It is only necessary to be able to recognize which of the two is in the state where the effect has occurred after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect occurs due to the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic operation may be performed. Similarly to the case where the effect function is performed, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area in which the mimic image is displayed, or may be light-emitting by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body. May be executed as an operation according to.

  In this case, if the mock image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the expected degree (mim image indicated during the effect reception period even in the state where the effect occurs after the operation is performed) Display mode) can be confirmed.

  The mime image that is continuously displayed in this manner is hidden after the effect after the operation has occurred. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side effect reception period, and the case where the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side effect reception period In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a different time elapses, the time from the execution of the post-operation production to the hiding of the mimic image should be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if it is not, by confirming the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the hiding of the mimic image, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. .

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, and when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed, the big hit is determined by the big hit determination. May be different from each other.

  Further, when a special effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled and an effect accepting period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is generated, during the effect accepting period, two displays are performed. One of the modes (for example, a low-expected display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a high-expected display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed during the effect reception period, the effect is always received (the automatic effect function is always functioning), and the effect is performed after the operation according to the effect reception. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, an effect reception (automatic effect function is performed) is performed, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. And directing Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. In other words, if a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the player forgets to operate, a decline in gaming interest due to the inability to confirm the post-operation effect is unavoidable, When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the player forgets to operate the game, it is assumed that the gaming interest does not decrease so much. Therefore, a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. If the player forgets to operate the game at any time, the automatic presentation function must be activated during the presentation reception period to avoid a decline in the game entertainment caused by forgetting to operate the game, while maintaining a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation mode). If you forget to operate when the image appears), play the game so that you do not forget to operate it by not necessarily making the automatic production function function within the production acceptance period And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. Note that when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expected display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) is displayed. You may not be able to appear. Further, during the effect reception period, any one of three or more display modes may appear.

  In each of the characteristic technologies described below, the other examples relating to the automatic button effect state may be appropriately applied and executed.

[Expectation suggestion by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described another example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), A process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change as when the operation is performed to the effect may be executable. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted. The effect pattern (automatic effect function) that does not execute the effect for the effect may be generated. In this case, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect accepting period during the effect accepting period, when the automatic effecting function does not function, the symbol variation is greater than when the automatic effecting function functions. In the above, a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the expected degree (ratio) of the appearance of the big hit symbol becomes low can be executed. At this time, the expectation degree (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed during the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, “after the operation itself, which could have been confirmed only if effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, the effect itself cannot be confirmed”. While there is a risk that directing disadvantages may occur, a novel directing effect that allows the player to exercise directing selections such as "do not dare to operate the operation buttons 410 during the directing reception period" As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) can be rendered. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 330 to 350) regarding whether a period occurs or whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be performed is generated. See)). In this regard, in the automatic button production state, during the production reception period that occurs in response to such specific operation-related productions, compared to the production reception period that occurs when the specific operation-related productions are not executed, It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function to function when the operation (effect effect reception) is not performed within the reception period is increased. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs also functions as an effect that suggests that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it is possible to perform the game, it is possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 is more than that in the case where the operation result indicates that the operation button 410 is provided with the operation opportunity. It is set so that the expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the symbol fluctuation in the execution state is higher when it is indicated that the symbol is given. However, in the automatic button production state, when the operation (production reception) is not performed within the production reception period generated corresponding to the specific operation-related production, the ratio of the above-described automatic production function to function is determined by the operation button 410. It is more preferable to set the same ratio when the operation opportunity is indicated to be provided and when the operation opportunity is indicated to the sword decoration 5001.

  According to such a configuration, an effect situation in which a relatively low degree of expectation (indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio at which the above-described automatic production function functions is not changed by this (the production result of the specific operation-related production), the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic production function will function should be reduced. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by the effects of each other are performed in parallel, so that the entertainment interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353.

  FIG. 351 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button effect button”). "Setting in progress") appears continuously.

  FIG. 351 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 351 (a). As shown in the drawing, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light-emitting state, and this also prompts an operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is the specific decorative member SDY (draper). And the like, and a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation and “heat” with a relatively high expectation) in which the degree of expectation is different even in the display area. Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect accepting period is ended when the effect is accepted without exhausting the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the specific effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the ratio of 60% Thus, the above-described automatic production function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-mentioned automatic production function did not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), the operation on the operation button 410 was not received within the specific production reception period. As a result, the post-operation effect that would have occurred as long as the effect reception has been performed is not executed. Then, after this, the effect progresses in a state where the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific effect reception period has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. After the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, the post-operation effect having the same contents as when the effect is received is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect is generated in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, when the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same as each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (e), the production progresses in a form in which the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the generation of the specific production reception period.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the specific effect reception period is generated as “the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions” or “the above-described automatic effect function”. Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination when performing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% during the specific effect reception period. , The automatic effect function does not function, and the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the above-described automatic reception function in which the automatic effect function functions. Period) or an `` effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function '' will be generated, and if a large hit is selected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the lost selection is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions" or an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, during a specific effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, and the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, if the specific effect reception period is to be generated as “the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions”, the “ Which of these periods should be generated so that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when it is to be generated as an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function Is determined (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received during an effect reception period in which it is determined that a high expectation aspect (such as "hot heat!") Will appear as an after-operation effect when an effect is received, the automatic effect function is activated. When the effect is accepted, the effect is automatically produced when an effect reception period is determined in which it is determined that when the effect is received, a mode with low expectation (such as “chance!”) Appears as the post-operation effect. The ratio at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, it is determined whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed during the effect reception period. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol change in the running state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, “after the operation itself, which could have been confirmed only if effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, the effect itself cannot be confirmed”. While there is a risk that directing disadvantages may occur, a novel directing effect that allows the player to exercise directing selections such as "do not dare to operate the operation buttons 410 during the directing reception period" As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), even if the automatic production function is activated when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the production acceptance period, the post-operation production is expected. Since a mode with a low degree (such as "chance!") Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic staging function has been performed, the degree of expectation is relatively high. Such continuous suggestion of the degree of expectation (suggestion due to the functioning of the automatic staging function, suggestion according to the mode of the staging after the operation) will realize stunning staging, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the gaming entertainment. Will be as expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), even when the automatic production function does not function when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the production acceptance period, even the production reception is performed. In this case, there is a possibility that in the post-operation effect that should have appeared, a mode with a high degree of expectation has appeared, so that it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.
However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (c) (a situation where the automatic production function did not function and the production did not appear after the operation) appeared, the production situation (automatic production function shown in FIG. 351 (d)) appeared. Has worked, but it is desirable that the degree of expectation is lower than when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect).

  FIGS. 352 and 353 show an effect in which an automatic production function suggests a degree of expectation when a production reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related production (see FIGS. 330 to 350) occurs in the automatic button production state. Specific examples are shown.

  FIG. 352 (a) shows that, in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is three, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, the display is performed). , "Auto button setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 352 (b) shows an effect state in which the effect of the specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335 is started during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ illustrated in FIG. 352 (a). .
That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. , A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity is kept secret. . However, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation appears, As the effect state indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is in a state to be operated appears as the second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation, the operation button 410 having a relatively low degree of expectation and the relatively low degree of expectation Which of the sword decorations 5001 with the highest operability is given the operation opportunity is indicated.

  FIG. 352 (c) shows that, as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b) being performed, the operation button 410 is to be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation. Shows that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for urging the operation of the operation button 410 (here, “press”, etc.) A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light-emitting state, and this also prompts an operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 has been received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a curtain) as an after-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. Any one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation and “heat!” With a relatively high expectation) in which a directing operation is performed and the degree of expectation is different even in the display area. Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect accepting period is ended when the effect is accepted without exhausting the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic production function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused about which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate An operation may not be possible. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 352 (c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. As compared to the reception period (refer to FIG. 351 (b)), the effect in the symbol fluctuation so that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function to be operated when there is no operation (effect reception) during the effect reception period is increased. Can be executed. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as “the appropriate operation cannot be performed during the effect reception period, and an effect corresponding to the operation may not appear”. Interesting as to which of the bodies 5001 will be activated can be provided through the specific operation-related effects. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that indicates the degree of expectation based on whether or not the automatic effect function has functioned.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect accepting period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed after execution. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the effect ratio of the automatic effect function is high is in the effect status (here, "Auto button high accuracy") It has come to appear.

  When the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 352 (d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 has not been received within the production acceptance period. As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that would have occurred is not executed. Then, after this, the effect progresses in a state where the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific effect reception period has occurred. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the production reception period (when the production reception is not performed), the above-described automatic production function does not function. In the case of the effect shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not performed), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is made higher than in the case where the user does not do so.

  Further, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a rate of 80%, the production is performed as shown in FIG. 352 (e) even though the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production acceptance period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the effect was received by the operation being performed during the reception period is performed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect is generated in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, when the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same as each other. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 352 (f), the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific effect reception period.

  On the other hand, FIG. 353 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration 5001 should be operated as a second effect with relatively high expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b). Shows that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ A character display such as "Pause the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period) are displayed. Note that, at this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation of the operating button 410, and also moves the sword decoration 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Operation is allowed.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), an operation on the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c). After the same operation as that performed, the effect is executed. However, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (g), an operation on the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c). Out of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (for example, “chance!” Having a relatively low degree of expectation, “energy!” Having a relatively high degree of expectation), The ratio of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is released and the normal effect state is returned, and the remaining time is consumed during the specific effect reception period. 352 (c) is also the same as in the case of the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed during the effect reception period in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 353 (g) (the effect reception did not occur. In the case, the effect reception is generated in the effect condition shown in FIG. 352 (c) even though the effect condition is higher than expected when the effect condition shown in FIG. 352 (c) occurs. As in the case where the automatic rendering function is not performed, the automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation (FIG. 352). (See (c)), the ratio at which the above-described automatic production function functions is not changed by this (the production result of the specific operation-related production), so that the above-mentioned automatic production function is performed. It is possible to appropriately maintain the expectation that the function will function. As described above, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results in parallel, resulting in an unfavorable effect in one of the effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment at the time.
However, in this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. In this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when no effect reception is performed), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

  When the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 353 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 has not been received within the production reception period. However, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if the effect reception has been performed is not executed. Then, after this, the effect progresses in a state where the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific effect reception period has occurred. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception is not performed), the above-described automatic production function functions. Even if there is no such effect, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when no effect reception is performed), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. It is desirable to make the expectation higher than when it did not work.

  In addition, when the above-described automatic staging function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 353 (i), although the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the staging acceptance period, The post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation was performed and the effect was received during the effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation performed during the effect reception period. In both cases, the case where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same as each other. Then, after that, as shown in FIG. 353 (j), the effect progresses in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect has occurred.

  It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ Is generated as an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function, as in the case of the effect reception period in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 351 (b)). At the time of execution, a decision (selection) is made based on the result of the jackpot determination, and as a result, the above-described automatic production function functions at a rate of 20% during the production acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related production. Instead, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is operated at a rate of 80%. For example, when a jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the above-described automatic reception function in which the automatic effect function functions. Period) or an `` effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function '' will be generated, and if a large hit is selected as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the lost selection is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions" or an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, in the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)), the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and is 80%. The automatic production function described above functions at the ratio of.

  Similarly, an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) is also generated as an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions". In such a case, the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when the symbol change is stopped, as compared to a case where the above-described automatic effect function does not function. Which of these periods is to be determined (selected) based on the result of the above jackpot determination.

  It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs during the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) and without the specific operation-related effect being executed. The effect may be executed as a different effect from the effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)). However, even in the case of executing as a different effect, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, the sword decoration 5001 used in the effect example shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be a sword decoration 5001 of the type shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 352 and 353, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS. 332 to 335 is described. The "effect using functions" may be applied to any of the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect accepting period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button production state from being accepted within the state, the "setting operation to the automatic button production state is not accepted" state is performed before the production acceptance period occurs. 352, it is desirable to start from the time of the effect situation (the effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect has been started) shown in FIG. 352 (b) and to continue this effect until the effect accepting period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform an operation for setting to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has been started, this will not be accepted. Can be provided only for those who are playing games continuously while maintaining the `` automatic production function '', and the game can be continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button production state It will be able to provide directing value for doing.

  In addition, an effect reception period during which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 351 (b)), and an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g)) )), A first display mode (for example, a blue button image BTG or a blue sword decoration image SYG) or a second display mode (for example, a green button image BTG or a green sword decoration) Image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” occurs compared to when the first display mode appears It is desirable to make the ratio in

  In addition, an effect reception period during which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 351 (b)), and an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g)) )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the above-mentioned “automatic effect described above” is displayed. The effect accepting period in which the function functions "may always be in a state of occurring.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is not possible to confirm the post-operation effect itself which should have been confirmed only if the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. Provide the decision material on whether to use the staging selection such as "Do not dare to operate the operation button 410 during the staging acceptance period" given the risk that the staging of the staging may occur. It is expected that the game entertainment will be appropriately maintained.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied, the effect acceptance period corresponding to each “specific operation-related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 330 to 350, and FIGS. Is desirably generated as a period having a longer time than an effect reception period (eg, FIG. 351 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused about which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate Operation may not be able to be performed, but by suppressing the occurrence of such a situation by giving the production acceptance period corresponding to "specific operation-related production" a long time Will be expected.

  In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 352 and 353, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic production function to be set is relatively high in the production reception period corresponding to “specific operation-related production”. For example, it is possible to set the effect reception period so as to have a longer time than the effect reception period in which the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed, whether or not the automatic effect function functions. It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the rendition of the game for a longer time to improve the entertainment interest of the game. Note that, in this case, the timing at which the automatic production function functions is performed when the first time elapses after the generation of the production period during the production reception period in which the “specific operation-related production” is not executed. On the other hand, in the effect accepting period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the automatic effecting function can be realized when the second time longer than the first time elapses after the occurrence of the period. It is important to maintain the performance of whether or not the function is longer.

  In addition, in the effect reception period in which the “specific operation-related effect” occurs without being executed, and in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the time from the start to the end of the period. Even if it is made different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same manner (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is reduced. It is desirable to only vary the speed. In other words, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect” occurs, the period continues for the same time as the effect reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related effect”. It is possible to make it seem that the automatic production function is functioning properly. Will be able to do that.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353, the first effect reception period (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Occurs, and even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated during the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although not necessarily executed, in the effect accepting period that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, a second display that occurs without executing the specific display effect is performed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first effect reception period rather than the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this regard, as such an automatic button effect state, the ratio ("60% -40%", "20% -80%") at which the automatic effect function functions differs depending on the type of the effect reception period as described above. When the automatic button effect state to be set is “first automatic button effect state”, the ratio of the function of the automatic effect function depending on the type of the effect reception period is different from the distribution ratio (“50% −50%”, “10%”). % -90% "), so that the automatic production function always functions regardless of the type of the" second automatic button production state "and the type of the production acceptance period. The third automatic button effect state may be further prepared, and may be set to any of these effect states, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, the normal production state in which the automatic production function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always performed in the automatic button production state (the first automatic button production state, the second automatic button production state, the third automatic button production state). Or an effect may be executed.

  Further, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be modified as follows and executed. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing (first time) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred. At the timing within the effect reception period), the above-described automatic effect function functions to end the first effect reception period and to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing (first time) after the first effect reception period has occurred and the first predetermined time has elapsed. The automatic production function described above does not function at the timing within the first production reception period), and then the first production reception period is terminated without performing the post-operation production (the post-operation production is not executed thereafter). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions in the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect reception period or At the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function functions, and the second effect reception period or the third effect The effect reception period is ended and a post-operation effect is generated accordingly. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect reception period or The automatic effect function described above does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the third effect reception period has occurred, and thereafter, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period without performing the post-operation effect. Ends the effect acceptance period (after that, the effect is not executed after the operation).

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage. Even if it does not function, since there is enough time to allow the player to accept the effect by his / her own operation before the end of the first effect receiving period, You will be able to play games with your mind. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the function of the automatic effect function functions is high, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage. Since there is not much time left for the player to operate himself when it does not function, it is necessary to provide a game with a sense of tension despite the fact that the automatic staging function functions at a high rate Will be able to

  Note that, in the first modification, in the first effect reception period, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the first effect reception period), and when the automatic effect function does not function However, in the second effect reception period and the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second effect reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic staging function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic staging function does not function (by any kind of trouble), the time required for the player to operate himself / herself Since it is considered that the player delusions that a sufficient margin is not left, a similar effect can be expected.

  In addition to the effect examples described above with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353, in other effect examples, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by an operation by the player. For example, the control may be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, or may be constantly controlled as the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Also, the automatic button effect state may not be set itself, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described another example, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the operation of the player himself (want to end the automatic button effect state) Aspirations). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for terminating the automatic button production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when an effect reception period for a specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled, the effect reception is performed. The process of terminating the automatic button effect state by performing only one operation on the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, and the like) to which the operation opportunity is to be given within the period, and the operation in response to the effect reception An effect (a process that can cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if a desire to end the automatic button production state and develop the production depending on the player's own operation occurs during the production reception period, switching of the production mode by avoiding the loss of operation opportunity. Can be performed smoothly.

  In addition, as described above, when setting to the automatic button effect state when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is allowed only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 are not operated when the effect reception period is not generated. An operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in a state in which the effect reception period is occurring, if an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 or the like) to which the operation opportunity is to be given during the effect reception period. Then, the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (the process that may cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the state where the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred, the operation is not received, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, some players perform a game using a selfish game technique such as "operate only when you like while maintaining the automatic button production state (do not generate the production mode switching) and develop the production". It can be assumed that some desire to do so. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 further includes a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration 5001) is operated during the effect reception period for the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect The process of ending the state (specific production state) and the process of causing a change in production are respectively performed (operation unification control in the automatic button production state), but controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state) If the operation on the special operation means is performed during the effect reception period for the specific effect while Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where the automatic button effect state is to be ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation on the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is performed within the effect reception period. If the user wants to rarely perform the operation while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the user may perform an operation on the special operation means within the effect reception period. Only by appropriately using the operation means as described above, a game desired by the player can be realized.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 356.

  FIG. 354 (a) shows that, in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is one, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows a state in which the effect reception period in which the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is received while the reach state is formed occurs in the effect state being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button effect button”). "Setting in progress") appears continuously.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, even during this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a lower display is shown). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light-emitting state, and this also prompts an operation on the operation button 410. However, actually, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also the operation on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 in which no change occurs is allowed.

  FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d) show that the operation of the operation button 410 was not performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 7 shows a state in which a post-operation effect having the same contents as when an operation is performed and an effect is received is performed. At the time when the above-described automatic production function functions, the production acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is ended, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as “PUSH” in the figure) Any operation opportunity for the (operated button) 1410 will be lost.

  That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, the production progresses in stages, and any of the production results (FIG. 354 (c) and FIG. 354 (d)) with different expectations are displayed. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of the symbol change (based on the result of the jackpot determination), first, as shown in FIG. 354 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion Smoke image). After that, when the production progresses to a production result having a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 354 (c), a specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, an effect image (here, a fortune of “Yoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively less expected is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 354 (d), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 354 (b) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (here, a fortune of “Nakayoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively high in expectation is displayed.

  Then, the flow of the production shown in FIGS. 354 (a) to (d) appears as a basic production progress when the production acceptance period occurs in the automatic button production state, and the above-mentioned automatic production function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless an operation is performed by the player. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced by the player's own operation (automatic button effect state (A desire to end). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for terminating the automatic button production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), it is detected that the operation has been performed. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position, a process of ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect according to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in button production state).
At the time when the effect on the operation button 410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect function cannot be operated, and the special operation means ( The operation opportunity for the button 1410 described as “PUSH” in the figure) is also lost.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), as shown in FIG. 355 (e), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect is received. As a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. 355 (f), a specific effect image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e) is displayed. As the smoke image gradually disappears, an effect image (here, a fortune of “Yoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively less expected is displayed. As shown in FIG. 355 (g), when the effect progresses to the effect result with a high degree, the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) illustrated in FIG. 355 (e) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (here, a fortune of “Nakayoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively high in expectation is displayed.

  However, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 355 (e) to (g), after the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The displayed message (here, “auto button is being set”) is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. A suggestive display (here, “auto button release”) is displayed (see FIG. 355 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means in which no change has occurred (in the figure, “PUSH” is described) Button 1410). Then, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 performs the operation by itself only when desired (without switching the production mode) while maintaining the automatic button production state. As described above, it is provided to make possible a selfish game technique such as "produce the effect by making it".

  Therefore, even when an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), as shown in FIG. 356 (h). First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as an after-operation effect in response to the operation being performed during the effect reception period and the effect reception being performed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result having a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), a specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, an effect image (here, a fortune of “Yoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively less expected is displayed. When the effect progresses to a high effect result, as shown in FIG. 356 (j), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (here, a fortune of “Nakayoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively high in expectation is displayed. Note that at the time when the effect on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is accepted, the effect accepting period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect The function cannot be performed, and the opportunity for operating the operation button 410 is also lost.

  However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. Is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 356 (h) to (j), even after the effect on the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (here, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 in the effect reception period generated in FIG. A special operation that cannot appear when the operation is performed, when the above-described automatic staging function functions (FIG. 354 (b)), when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 355 (e)), or the like. Directing can appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 356 (j), the above-described automatic effect function was performed on the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (effect after operation) appearing in the case (FIG. 354 (b)) or the case where the operation of the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 355 (e)), an effect display that shines brilliantly is additionally displayed. I am trying to. An effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be additionally performed instead of the glittering effect display.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the content of the change in the effect caused when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the effect acceptance period for the fortune effect. When the automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the production acceptance period for the fortune production. The content of the effect change produced in the case will be different from each other. Then, in this case, when the above-described special effect (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) appears, "the operation of the operation means is performed and the effect after the operation according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is After the operation, it is possible to recognize that the setting is not canceled and the state is maintained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), even when an effect image (here, a fortune of “Yoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed, a special effect is displayed. The effect (here, a brilliant effect display) can appear.

  In addition, such special effects (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) are made to appear additionally to the above-mentioned post-operation effects at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the jackpot determination, and When an effect is additionally appeared, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol fluctuation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to perform an operation on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 It is feared that the operation for will not be performed. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the special effect (here, it is brilliant) When the effect display does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect accepting period generated in FIG. 354 (a) or by operating the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol change becomes lower than the case where the symbol change occurs.

  According to such a configuration, the operation on the “special operation means (the button described as“ PUSH ”in the figure) 1410 causes the“ operation on the operation means to be performed and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears. In order to create `` a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and is continued, '' there is a staging effect such as `` It can be suggested that the rate of appearance of big hit symbols due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low '' Since there is a risk to be obtained, it is expected that the entertainment interest can be appropriately maintained by causing the player to exercise such a staging selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), although the same effect form as the example shown in FIG. Thus, the situation is such that it is recognizable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol change is lower than the examples shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), while making it possible to recognize that the situation is low in the degree of expectation, the effect form is shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f). By making them the same as in the case, the third party who does not operate the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in the production situation where the production selection failed. It is difficult to grasp the game, and it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which staging effect is selected during the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), FIG. 354 (b) and FIG. e), a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as shown in FIG. 356 (h) and the like, but the specific effect image is relatively displayed as the post-operation effect. The effect may be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio of appearance of a high expectation effect (here, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") appears or the ratio of appearance of a special effect differs.

  In addition, even if any staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), this is omitted without displaying a particular staging image, and staging modes with different degrees of expectation. (Here, the fortune of “yoshi” or “nakayoshi”) may directly appear as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 356 (i)) in which the production selection has failed appears, production modes with different degrees of expectation ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (in this case, a smoke image due to an explosion) when any one of “yoshi” or “nakayoshi” appears as an effect after operation.

  In addition, an effect indicating the degree of expectation can be performed even during the effect reception period generated in FIG. You may.

  Further, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the automatic button effect state when the state is in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, another operation means that is already provided may be responsible.

  In the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), whether a period during which an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be effected is generated, Or, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) on whether or not a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be effected occurs. May be generated as a result.

  Also, in the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity to the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is also given. A reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) and a second effect reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH”) 1410 in the drawing may be included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) occurs, the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) is more effective than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the symbol change appears before the symbol fluctuation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the rate at which the specific operation-related effects described above (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appear depends on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Automatic stabilization process]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described another example, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" Is possible for the production acceptance period. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, and any operation means within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, whether to activate the automatic production function for any of the plurality of operation means (Which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change to the production as when the production was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" When the production acceptance period of 発 生 occurs, it is not 「whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear?’ Processing that activates the automatic production function for an operation means different from the “operation means that can generate a production that may produce a production result with lower expectations” (stable automatic production Process) is executable.

  According to such a configuration, among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when an effect is received for any of the plurality of operation means within the special effect reception period, the effect mode with the lowest expectation is: When the automatic production function is activated, it will not be possible to appear. It can be avoided suitably.

  Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359.

  First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and a normal effect state is provided. In FIG. 357 (a), in the normal effect state, the number of holds is three, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The player can select one of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 in a state where the reach state is formed in the effect situation being performed by the player. An effect display indicating that a special effect reception period is to be started indicates an effect state. Note that, in this effect situation, although the effect reception for the operation button 410 and the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 have not yet been activated, the operation button 410 and the sword have not been activated since that time. The operation button 410 is in a light-emitting state and the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the sword-drawing position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorations 5001 should be operated. Further, on effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

  FIG. 357 (b) shows a special effect reception period (one of a pressing operation of the operation button 410 and a sword putting operation of the sword decoration 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 357 (a). This shows an effect situation in which an effect reception period that can be selected by the user) has occurred. In this effect state, at least a part of the effect display (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG) and the operation buttons on the effect display device 1600 that appeared from the state of the effect shown in FIG. While the state of the sword decoration body 4101 and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained, an instruction display for prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed). A corresponding downward arrow and a bar indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period are displayed.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 357 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “wave” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Have been. However, instead of this, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a special mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means are capable of accepting the effect.

  That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as the post-button operation effect. After the fact that the action has been performed is displayed (FIG. 357 (c)), as the production result, it is suggested that the smaller the number destroyed, the lower the expectation and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the expectation. And an effect (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e)) in which one of “100 defeat” is made to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the effect after button-side operation when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) at a rate of “60%”. 357 (d) appears at a rate of “60%” and a rate of “40%” Thus, it is possible to make the effect form shown in FIG. 357 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when an effect is received for the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, the effect after the sword decoration 5001 is first displayed as the post-sword-side operation effect ( FIG. 358 (f)), as the production results suggesting that the smaller the number destroyed, the lower the expected degree and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the expected degree. An effect (FIGS. 358 (g) to 358 (i)) of causing any one of “777 defeat” to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the effect after the sword-side operation when the big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h) at a rate of “50%”. 358 (i) appears at a rate of “40%”, and a rate of “40%” in the post-sword-side operation when a jackpot is lost. 358 (g) appears, the effect aspect shown in FIG. 358 (h) appears at a rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 358 (i) at a rate of “0%”. It is possible for aspects to appear.

  In addition, in the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, regardless of which one of the rendering after the button-side operation and the rendering after the sword-side operation is performed, the rendering mode in which the number of defeats is small. Has a lower degree of expectation than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. In the case where the number of defeats is the same production mode (for example, the production mode shown in FIG. 357 (e), the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (h), and the production mode shown in FIG. 359 (e) described later). Although the degree of expectation may be different, it is desirable to make them the same.

  In such a configuration, a special effect reception period for permitting the effect reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) is generated, and the special effect reception period is generated. Can operate different operation effects (effects after button-side operation, effects after sword-side operation) depending on the type of operation means operated on the side that was operated during the effect reception period. It is possible to improve the monotonous directing effect as much as possible, and to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In particular, operating the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) does not cause the same degree of expectation to be indicated, but the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means). Only when the second operation means is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 358 (g)) indicating that it is difficult for the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) to cause the big hit symbol to appear easily. Since it is possible to produce the effect of “defeat one body”, it is desirable to see the effect (effect after the operation on the sword side) on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means) until such a risk is taken. It will be expected to maintain the game entertainment by giving conflicts and stimuli about the game.

  In this case, the effect after button-side operation is “a specific effect with the lowest expectation” among the effects that appear when any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period. (Here, the effect of "single-body defeat" shown in FIG. 358 (g)) "is eliminated, so that it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. In addition, the effect after the sword-side operation is “a specific effect with the lowest degree of expectation (here 358 (g), it functions as an after-operation effect that includes relatively turbulence in the sense that it has an appearance risk of “the effect mode of“ single defeat ”shown in FIG. 358 (g)).

  Furthermore, in this effect example, between the time when the effect condition shown in FIG. 357 (a) appears and the time the effect condition shown in FIG. 357 (b) appears (in this case, during the special effect reception period), The production mode shown in FIG. 357 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the production mode appears, it is better than when the production mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the ratio of occurrence of the "specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the production mode of" single defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g))" is low. The production progress is feasible in a certain way. This ratio may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, until the risk that “the specific production mode with the lowest expectation (the production mode of“ single-body destruction ”shown in FIG. 358 (g)) appears) is taken. As a material for determining whether to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it is possible to use the effect of whether or not the effect shown in FIG. 357 (ab) has appeared. 357 (b), it is expected to appropriately improve the game entertainment when the special effect reception period occurs.

  In the normal effect state, if the special effect accepting period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs but no effect is accepted within the special effect accepting period, the above-described automatic effect is performed. The function does not function, and the effect is advanced without executing both the effect after the button-side operation and the effect after the sword-side operation.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 359 (a) to 359 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (a), FIG. 359 (ab), and FIG. 359 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except that a display indicating the effect (here, “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously in the effect display device 1600, an effect display indicating that a special effect reception period is started appears. From the time point till the end of the special effect acceptance period, the effect is the same as in the above-described normal effect state (FIGS. 357 (a), 357 (ab), and 357 (b)). Be advanced.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), the effect result "lower expected effect (here, FIG. The automatic rendering function is enabled for the operation button 410 different from the “sword decoration 5001 on the side that can generate the rendering in which the“ 1 destruction ”rendering mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears). Processing (stable-side automatic effect processing) can be executed.

  That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. Thus, the same change as in the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during the special effect acceptance period is caused in the effect. Therefore, as an effect after the button-side operation, first, it is displayed that the effect has been accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 359 (c)), and then the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeats An effect in which one of “50 defeats” and “100 defeats” appears as an effect result that suggests a higher degree of expectation based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 359 (d) and 359 (e)). ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when an effect is received for any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, the degree of expectation is the lowest. The effect mode (here, the effect mode of “single defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function is activated. In such a case, an effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears due to the automatic effect function. "

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state.
However, as described above, during the special effect reception period, the effect condition shown in FIG. 359 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect condition appears , The production after the sword-side operation while the appearance ratio of the “specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the production mode of“ single defeat ”shown in FIG. 358 (g))” is low. Since an opportunity to be able to enjoy is provided, it is expected that the user is encouraged to appropriately perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, a special period in which a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 is effected and a period in which an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is effected are generated at the same time and ended at the same time. Although the control is performed as the effect reception period, it is not always necessary to simultaneously generate these periods. For example, if the period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is directed and the period in which the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are directed overlap in part of those periods, the periods are separated. It may be generated at a timing.

  In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. Is performed "may be necessarily generated. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from the time when the design variation is started with a specific effect pattern, "which one of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs. Should you perform the setting operation to the automatic button production state before you do it? ", Etc., and you can think about a production strategy that assumes that a special production reception period will occur . For example, it is possible to confirm “how much noticed production was performed in what type of production (expected degree)” until a special production acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a material for determining which of a plurality of operating means should be operated during the special effect reception period, and the game until the special effect reception period occurs It will be possible to appropriately maintain this for entertainment.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, furthermore, an automatic effect function Is determined by a lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot determination at the start of the symbol change or at the time of the effect reception (or at the time of the function of the automatic effect function). It is desirable to do so.

  Further, even in the production situation in which the special production acceptance period has not yet occurred, “the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001. When an effect display (FIG. 357 (a), FIG. 359 (a)) indicating that a special effect reception period is started is being performed, setting to the automatic button effect state is permitted. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to be performed. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that "a special effect reception period in which the player can select any one of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue playing while maintaining the automatic button effect state "Stable automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state" can be provided only for those who are playing, and production for continuously playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state Value can be provided.

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 357 to 359, the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 358 (g)”) that can appear when the effect is performed after the sword-side operation is performed by the button-side operation. Although it was decided to execute as a unique production mode different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production was performed, for the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation”, the production after button-side operation was performed. It may be executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when performed (for example, (“50 defeat” shown in FIG. 357 (d)). Is performed, as a result, even if a “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” appears, the same appearance as the production mode that can appear when the production is performed after the button side operation appears for the purpose of viewing. Operation button It is possible to make it difficult for a third party who does not know which of the 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 has been operated to recognize that there is an effect situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect situation such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” is displayed. However, the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) depends on whether the effect situation is caused by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration 5001. ), The degree of expectation of the appearance of the big hit symbol will be different, so it will have more fun as a production using multiple operation means It becomes possible to.

  However, this is a case where the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-sword-side operation is performed as the same mode as the production mode that may appear when the button-side operation is performed. However, regarding the “special production mode with the highest expectation” in the post-sword-side operation, a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the button-side operation is performed (for example, (“777 defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (i)) is desirably executed.According to such a configuration, “specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation” in the post-sword-side operation effect. Appears, it is difficult to recognize that a third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated has an extremely low level of expectation. However, when the “special production mode with the highest expectation” appears in the production after the sword-side operation, even if the third party does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated, It will be easy to recognize that there is a production situation in which the expectation is significantly higher, so that the player may take the above risk without worrying about the eyes of a third party. It is possible to enjoy the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side (the effect after the operation on the sword side). What is necessary is just to be recognizable. For example, the uniqueness with respect to other effect modes may be ensured by executing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, as a result of the effect (FIG. 358 (f) to FIG. 358 (i)) performed after the sword-side operation, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” (FIG. 358 ( i)) can appear, and when the “777 defeat” effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) appears, any other effect mode (FIGS. 357 (d) and 357 (e)) , FIG. 358 (g), and FIG. 358 (h)), the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than when the symbol variation appears. This percentage may be 100%.
However, it is not always necessary to make the appearance mode of the “defeat 777 body” (FIG. 358 (i)) appear. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h), the appearance rate of the effect form shown in FIG. 358 (e) is made higher than the appearance rate of the effect form shown in FIG. It becomes.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, effects after the button side operation (FIGS. 357 (c) to 357 (e)) and effects after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)) ), A common production mode (here, the production mode of “100 defeats”) can appear, but the common production mode should not appear. Is also good. In addition, in the effect after the button-side operation, only the display change appears, but in the effect after the sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, the movable body operation or the lamp emission may be made executable. Further, the effect after the button-side operation and the effect after the sword-side operation do not have any commonality as the effect content regarding the number of defeats, and the effect content itself may be executed as an effect different from each other.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, when an effect is received, including when an effect is received by the functioning of the automatic effect function, first, any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 Although the display (FIG. 357 (c), FIG. 358 (f), and FIG. 359 (c)) that indicates whether the effect has been accepted has been described here, the degree of expectation is suggested without displaying the display. An effect that causes an effect result to appear may be executed.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the effect mode of FIG. 358 (f) to FIG. 358 (i) is performed as a result of the effect (FIG. 358 (f) to FIG. 358 (i)) being performed. i)) appears, the above-described specific operation-related operations are performed more than when any of the other effects (FIGS. 357 (d), 357 (e), 358 (g), and 358 (h)) appear. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears until the symbol change is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (the sword decoration body) on the higher expectation side It is desirable that the rate at which an operation opportunity is given to 5001) be increased. According to such a configuration, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, it is possible to appropriately encourage the user to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the effect risk is high.

[Direction reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described another example, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed during the effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the first display effect is displayed. And a process of generating a first expected effect (a post-operation effect indicating the degree of expectation) based on the effect received by the operation, and an effect reception that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 During the period, the second display effect can be displayed, and when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is being displayed, the second display effect is displayed based on the reception of the effect by the operation. A process relating to a plurality of different operation effects, such as a process of generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect indicating an expected degree) different from the first expected effect, can be executed. That.

  With such a configuration, the effect type as the expected effect (effect after operation) that appears during operation differs depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed during the effect reception period. Therefore, not only the game entertainment at the time of operation can be enhanced, but also the game entertainment from the time of the effect acceptance period to the time of operation can be appropriately increased.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when at least the automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, the production acceptance period (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted within the production acceptance period. When an effect state in which the first display effect is displayed or an effect state in which the second display effect is displayed appears during an effect accepting period in which an effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted, the effect reception is performed. Processing for generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed even if the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the period Is executable.

  According to such a configuration, when an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, when the effect state in which the first display effect is displayed during the effect accepting period appears, the operation button 410 is operated. The first display effect is executed irrespective of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated. Regardless, the second display effect is executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed during the effect accepting period, the user is concerned about forgetting to operate. It will be possible to enjoy the production without any.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when an effect reception period for generating an after-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when there is no effect reception period for generating an after-operation effect. And
An effect situation in which an effect reception period in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled and an effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted has occurred, and the first display effect is displayed. In the case where an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the above, a process of generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process of ending the automatic button effect state are performed respectively (effect shown in FIG. 360 described later). See progress),
An effect state in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an effect accepting period allowing the effect accepting (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. In the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in, the process of generating the second expected effect (the effect after the operation) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 361 described later). (See production progress),
An effect in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an effect accepting period for allowing effect accepting (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (the effect after the operation) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (the effect after the operation) is performed. The processing for terminating the effect state is also not performed (see effect progress shown in FIG. 362 described later),
The first display effect and the second display effect are controlled in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and no effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred. When an operation on the operation button 410 is performed in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process of generating a first expected effect (effect after operation) and a process of generating a second expected effect (effect after operation) Are not performed, and each process such as a process of ending the automatic button effect state is performed according to each effect state (an effect accepting process corresponding to a display type).

  According to such a configuration, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect has appeared and the second display effect has not appeared, the first display effect appears. Is not performed and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is appearing, the type (second effect) of the expected effect (the effect after the operation) according to the operation (the effect reception) In addition to making the first expected effect and the second expected effect different, the expected effect (effect after operation) itself does not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. There is a possibility that the process for ending the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to appropriately improve the entertainment interest when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the effect receiving process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 364.

  FIG. 360 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 360 (a)) in the symbol change execution period is set to “effect reception (operation) for operation button 410”. Shows an example of an effect when a first effect pattern that can be set as an "effect accepting period in which" allows "is executed is executed.

  In the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 to generate the “effect accepting period in which the effect accepting (operating) for the operation button 410 is permitted” arrives, as shown in FIG. , A button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for urging operation of the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. (First display effect).

  Then, assuming that an effect on the operation button 410 has been received at a timing tb12 before the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (c), the symbol change (in the execution state) based on the effect reception. A first post-operation effect (in the figure, a fortune of “Nakayoshi”) indicating the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears in the symbol change is executed (first expected effect). Also, at this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 is not received without the remaining time being consumed. Will be terminated at that point. Therefore, at the timing tb12 at which the effect was received, the display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, “Auto button is being set”) that has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600. )) Are also hidden.

  However, in this case, regardless of which of the timings tb11 to tb13 the effect is received, at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (d), the first post-operation effect ( The first expected effect) is not finished yet and is in the process of being executed, so that the game entertainment can be appropriately maintained over the period of the timings tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. It is desirable in doing.

  FIG. 361 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 361 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is set to “effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410”. Shows an example of an effect when a second effect pattern that can be set as an effect accepting period in which “allows” is executed.

  In the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 to generate the “effect accepting period in which the effect accepting (operating) for the operation button 410 is permitted” arrives, as shown in FIG. , "Haunted OBK with gift box" appears (second display effect).

  Here, when the “haunted OBK with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated is not necessarily generated. Therefore, an instruction display for urging the user to operate the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

  In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 361, the haunted OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period from timing tb21 to tb23, and the haunted OBK is displayed before the timing tb23 in the period in which the haunted OBK is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed at the timing tb22, the effect is received, and as shown in FIG. 361 (c), the big hit symbol is changed based on the effect reception and the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state). A second post-operation effect (in the figure, a character display of “hot fever”) indicating the degree of expectation to appear is executed (second expected effect).

  However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from timing tb21 ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. This is to be maintained. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here,“ auto button is being set ”)” that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

  Regardless of the effect reception during any of the timing tb21 to tb23, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 361 (d), the second post-operation effect (second operation) generated by the effect reception Is not completed yet, and is in the process of being executed, in order to appropriately maintain the gaming interest over the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. Is desirable.

  FIG. 362 is for generating the second post-operation effect in the period of timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 362 (a)) in the symbol change execution period while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. This shows an example of an effect when the third effect pattern for displaying “a haunted OBK with a present box” is executed even though the effect acceptance period has not occurred.

  In the third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 362 (b), the effect display device 1600 causes a haunted OBK with a present box to appear (second display effect).

  However, as described above, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, in the effect situation where the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, even if the operation button 410 is operated, the post-operation effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested is indicated. Since it is not necessarily generated, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 362, the haunted OBK having the present box can be displayed within the period from the timing tb31 to the timing tb33. However, as illustrated in FIG. In this period, there is no occurrence of the "effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 361 (a) and 361 (c), even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation, The effect (the effect after the first operation, the effect after the second operation) does not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed over the period from timing tb31 to timing tb33.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the effect reception period for the effect after operation has not occurred. In this case, basically, the processing for terminating the automatic button effect state (setting is canceled) is performed. However, even if the effect accepting period for the effect after operation has not been generated, the processing is illustrated in FIG. 362. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in such an effect state (an effect state in which a haunted OBK with a present box is displayed), a process of generating an effect after the operation and an automatic button effect state are performed. The production is to be advanced so that none of the processing for ending is performed.

Therefore, when the mode shown in FIG. 362 (b) (a haunted OBK with a present box) which is the same mode as FIG. 361 (b) is displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. 361 (c) is performed. Even when the operation button 410 is operated in expectation of the occurrence of the second effect (the second expected effect), the effect change does not occur, but the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled. This can be continued. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
・ Even in the state where the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 has been enabled is enabled. If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is “within the period of the timings tb31 to tb33 at which the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed”. When the time is within the period between the times tb31 and tb33 at which the ghost OBK is displayed ", the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the" timing at which the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed " If it is not within the period from tb21 to tb23 ", processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is performed. Approach to (the method to set the period of timing tb31~tb33, as the prohibition period in accordance with the setting release of the automatic button directing state)
In the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23 when the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, a method of detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated or not performing the operation itself is adopted. It is possible to use any method.

  FIG. 363 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 363 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is performed. An example of an effect when the above-described first effect pattern that can be set as the “permissible effect reception period” is executed, but the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13 is shown.

  As described above, in the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 to generate the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” arrives, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display urging the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). Display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 363, the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the period from the timing tb11 to the time tb13, but when the timing tb12 ′ before the timing tb13 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Function, thereby producing the same change in the effect as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363 (c), at the timing tb12 ′, the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function. A suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, a fortune of "Nakayoshi") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being canceled. Become.
Therefore, at the timing tb12 ', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here," automatic button setting in progress ")" which has been displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 is continued. Will be displayed.

  Also, at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 363 (d), the first post-operation effect (first operation) generated by the above-described automatic effect function also occurs when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing tb12 ′. It is desirable that the expected effect of the game is not completed yet and is in the process of being executed, in order to maintain the entertainment of the game appropriately over the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  FIG. 364 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 364 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is performed. This shows an example of an effect when the above-described second effect pattern that can be set as the “permissible effect reception period” is executed, but the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23.

  As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 to generate the “effect accepting period in which the effect accepting (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” arrives, the effect display is performed as shown in FIG. 364 (b). In the device 1600, “a haunted OBK with a present box” appears (second display effect).

  Here, as described above, when “the haunted OBK holding the present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Is not necessarily generated, an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) may appear. There is no.

  In this regard, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 364, the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23, but when the timing tb22 ′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Function, thereby producing the same change in the effect as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364 (c), at timing tb22 ', the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-described automatic effect function has been performed. A second post-operation effect (in the figure, a character display of "hot heat" in the figure) is executed (second expected effect). However, also in this case, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being canceled. It becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22 ', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here," auto button is being set ")" which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. Will be displayed.

  Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22 ′, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 364 (d), the second post-operation effect (second operation effect) generated by the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable that the expected effect is not completed yet and is in the process of being executed, in order to appropriately maintain the game entertainment over the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23.

  Incidentally, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 362) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, since the effect reception period for generating the second post-effect is not generated in the first place, the above-described automatic effect function cannot function, and the automatic button effect state is released. Needless to say, it will be continued (that is, no change will occur).

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, effects that are developed with different contents are executed between the first display effect shown in FIG. 360 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 361 and 362. According to which of the first display effect and the second display effect is being displayed, the type of the post-operation effect (the first In addition to making the expected effect and the second expected effect different, the expected effect (effect after operation) itself may not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. That is, the processing for terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to appropriately improve the entertainment interest when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  Note that the first display effect has a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. Also, the second display effect may have a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having no relation to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first display effect, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button display is performed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. Has become.

  In addition, the first expected effect may include a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. The second expected effect also has a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as effect contents having no relation to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first expected effect, the fortune image is displayed, but in the second expected effect, the fortune image is not displayed, and the degree of expectation by character display is displayed. The suggestion is made. By executing one of the first expected effect and the second expected effect as a movable effect or an effect by lamp display, the contents may have no relation to each other.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the second display effect appears as the effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol change, “effect on the operation button 410” A second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of a symbol change) that the "effect accepting period in which acceptance (operation) is permitted" occurs, and a second display effect appear. The third effect pattern, which is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of a symbol change, etc.) so that the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” does not occur when Was prepared. However, after preparing the second effect pattern in which it is determined that the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” occurs when the second display effect appears, A determination (lottery) as to whether or not to generate the second expected effect is made based on the effect reception being performed within the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted”. By generating a second expected effect when a specific result is obtained in the determination and not generating the second expected effect when a specific result is not obtained in the determination, FIG. 364 may be realized. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect is appearing, the effect accepting period in which the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted may not occur. The above-described third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of a symbol change) may be further prepared.

  When the second expected effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed. The rate of appearance of the big hit symbol in the symbol change (symbol change in the execution state) may be higher than when the first expected effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) performed on the operation button 410. desirable.

  In addition, when the second display effect is performed, the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) is performed more until the symbol change is stopped than when the first display effect is performed. It is desirable that the ratio of occurrences during the period be high. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation is performed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) will be performed, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the interest in the game.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed and the second display effect (FIG. 361 (b), FIG. 362). (See (b)) is displayed, and the automatic production function described above is made to function. However, even if an operation is performed, the second expected effect is not always generated. When the second display effect (see FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic operation is performed. If the effect function is enabled, when the second display effect (see FIG. 361 (b) and FIG. 362 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed according to the above-described automatic effect function. It is feared that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 361 (b), FIG. 362 (b) is displayed). ) Is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is disabled, and when the second display effect is displayed, it is not known whether or not the second expected effect will occur even if it is operated, but at least it must be operated. For example, the second expected effect may not be generated.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when displaying the haunted OBK, an “effect effect receiving period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation means is permitted” is generated while the haunted OBK is displayed. You may do so. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when displaying a haunted OBK, the automatic effect function functions within the “effect accepting period in which effect accepting (operation) is permitted for the operation means”, Even if the operation is performed, the effect that the ghost OBK is displayed may be continued at the timing tb23 or the timing tb33 without hiding the ghost OBK.

[Auto repeat function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described another example, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting of the operation button 410) on a predetermined operation means, generates an effect reception each time the operation is performed, and performs an operation operation corresponding to the operation multiple times. May be asked. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, how to operate the above-described automatic effect function when a specific effect accepting period in which such multiple operation effects are performed occurs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is provided in a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given. An effect when the operation is performed a plurality of times simply by performing a long-time operation (so-called long-pressing or the like) for maintaining the predetermined operation means in an operation state for a relatively long time without having to perform the operation a plurality of times. Equipped with an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous tap function) that makes the mode appear, and an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous tap function) is performed by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in a long operation mode. When a predetermined time has elapsed while the operation state is maintained, an effect is received, and a post-operation effect is generated a plurality of times in accordance with these operations. It is set to be executed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous tapping) is given. If the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation on the operation means is not performed during the specific effect reception period, the operation on the operation means is performed in a long operation mode during the specific effect reception period and the operation is automatically performed. As in the case where the multiple-time operation function (auto-hit function) functions, a process for generating an effect according to the effect reception is performed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

  According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous hitting function is activated when an operation by a so-called long press is performed during a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous tapping) is provided. Thus, when at least the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the long press operation is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even when the automatic production function is activated when a specific production reception period in which multiple operation receptions are required in the automatic button production state occurs, the specific production (operation reception) within the specific production reception period. The player can enjoy the production without complaining about the frequency of occurrences of the game.

  FIG. 365 (a) shows that when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the timing tc11 to tc13 of the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as continuous tapping)”. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect reception period to which the operation button 410 is given” is executed, and the operation of the operation button 410 is performed a plurality of times in a single operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. This shows an example of the effect when performed over a period of time.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in this effect example, every time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the single-shot operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) (the operation button 410 is Each time it is detected that the player has moved from the position to the operation state (in this case, every time a rise is detected), an effect is received in accordance with the operation, and a specific effect (after-operation effect) is executed in accordance with the effect reception. . When the number of times that the operation button 410 has been subjected to the operation detection (acceptance of the effect) reaches a specific number or a specific effect condition such as a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is accepted, is satisfied. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition is made to appear, and the specific production reception period is ended at that time without exhausting the remaining time. .

  Here, although omitted in the figure, during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), a specific time from the start of the specific effect (the post-operation effect) according to the effect reception until the end thereof. In some cases, a new effect reception (operation detection) may be performed. In such a case, the specific effect (the post-operation effect) that is being executed at the time when the effect is received is interrupted, and the specific effect (the post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is newly generated. In this way, it is desirable that the operational feeling (effect responsiveness) when the player operates is appropriately maintained. In addition, unless a new effect reception occurs again during execution of the specific effect, the newly generated specific effect (effect after operation) is to be ended when a specific time has elapsed from the start. Become.

  FIG. 365 (b) shows that when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as continuous hits)”. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which the" is given "is executed, and the operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period. An effect example when an operation is performed on the button 410 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 365 (b), during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), while the operation state of the operation button 410 is maintained in a long press manner, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) has occurred based on the operation detection (effect reception) when the operation has been detected (operation reception). Auto-hit function) is executed.
As this processing (automatic continuous tapping function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed on condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection (effect) A new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the “acceptance”). When the number of times that the operation button 410 has been subjected to the operation detection (reception of the effect) reaches a specific number, or when a specific effect condition such as a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received is satisfied. In addition, an effect mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific effect condition is caused to appear, and the specific effect reception period is ended at that time without exhausting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 366 (a) shows that when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as continuous tapping)”. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect receiving period to which the" is given "is executed, and an example of the effect when no operation is performed during the specific effect receiving period is shown.

  First, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed at all and the timing tc13 is not executed. At that point, the specific effect reception period ends.

  On the other hand, assuming that no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, as shown in FIG. The automatic effect function described above functions at a timing tc12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect reception period occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function performs a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, similarly to the case where the above-described auto continuous hit function functions. After that, a process for producing the effect after the operation is performed.

  In this process (automatic effect function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (effect reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). Generate effect after operation). Further, when the above-described automatic production function is activated at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous hitting function is activated to use the automatic activation function so that “operation detection (production acceptance) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses. (A new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated based on the (effect reception)). When the number of times that the operation button 410 has been subjected to the operation detection (acceptance of the effect) reaches a specific number or a specific effect condition such as a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is accepted, is satisfied. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition is made to appear, and the specific production reception period is ended at that time without exhausting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 366 (b) shows that when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as continuous hits)”. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which the"! Is given "is executed, and in the specific effect reception period, the operation on the operation button 410 is long-pressed while the above-described automatic effect function is functioning. An example of an effect in the case of being performed is shown.

  In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 366 (b), the automatic effect function described above functions at the timing tc12, as in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 366 (a), whereby the first specific effect at the timing tc12. Is generated, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated each time a predetermined time t1 elapses, similarly to the case where the above-described automatic continuous hitting function is performed (or by operating the automatic continuous hitting function). Is performed.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long-press mode at the timing tc12a when the processing by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected while in the automatic button effect state, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). However, in this effect example, the effect is not accepted even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. Then, after the specific effect (the effect after the operation) according to the effect reception is prevented from occurring at the timing tc12a, the process (the predetermined time t1) that has been executed before the automatic button effect state is released from the setting is canceled. Each time elapses, a new specific effect (a process of generating an after-operation effect) is continued without terminating.

  According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-described automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect accepting period, the operation by long-pressing at any timing in the state. Even if is started, the operation does not trigger a change in the rhythm or tempo related to the occurrence of the specific effect (the effect after the operation), and the effect of the effect is not delayed. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is carried out in a manner to be continued until after the operation mode by the long press is started. Therefore, in the automatic button production state, even if the above-mentioned automatic production function is functioning within the specific production reception period, the player can perform the operation without worrying about the adverse effect on the production in the execution state. This allows the player to appropriately perform an operation. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), although the effect state is different from the effect example shown in FIG. The same mode appears as the mode of the specific effect that appears during the specific effect reception period.

  In this way, the processing already in the execution state (processing for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an auto continuous tap function that works when an operation by long press is performed during the specific effect reception period, and a function that is not operated during the specific effect reception period The same processing (processing to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions functions. Nothing else

  However, after the start of the long press operation by the player at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is consumed, and the fact that the operation button 410 is in the operation state is determined. Is continued (processing for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) on the condition that the determination is made. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the specific effect executed last time is consumed, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated at that time. Instead, the processing that has been executed since the automatic button effect state (the process of generating a new specific effect (after-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is ended.

  Note that, in the effect example using the automatic continuous hitting function shown in FIG. 365 (b) and the automatic effecting function shown in FIGS. 366 (a) and (b), the predetermined time t1 is determined with reference to the timing at which the specific effect ends. A process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) (first mode as an automatic continuous hit function and an automatic effect function) is performed after the lapse of time. Alternatively, a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of the predetermined time t2 (automatic continuous hitting function, second mode as an automatic effect function) may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start of the specific effect to the end thereof, but preferably, the predetermined time t2 is from the start of the specific effect to the end thereof. Is set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the process of being executed, a new specific effect is executed in a form of interrupting the specific effect, so that only the operation by long pressing is performed, or Even if no operation is performed, it is possible to have a feeling that the single operation is repeatedly performed at a high speed, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed before the timing tc12 at which the automatic effect function functions (within the period of the timings tc11 to tc12), at that time, The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). Further, at this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long press, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. Processing (auto-hit function) for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is executed, and if the operation is a single-push mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operating state. A new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated each time.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when an effect is received while the specific effect is in the middle of execution, the specific effect in the middle of the execution is interrupted in response to the effect reception. Although the new specific effect is generated, a new specific effect according to the reception of the effect may be generated in parallel with the specific effect in the middle of execution without terminating the specific effect.

  As described above, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 365 and 366, when a new single operation is performed and an effect is received while the previous specific effect generated by the single operation is being executed, When a new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated in response to the effect reception, while the previous specific effect generated by the functioning of the automatic effect function (or auto continuous hit function) is in the process of being executed. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 is changed from the original position to the operation state by a single operation or a long press operation, at the time of the detection, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is not generated and the operation is already in the execution state. (The process of generating a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses) is continued. After that, if the operation state is maintained when a predetermined time based on the previous specific effect has elapsed (in the case of a long-press operation), the processing that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is performed for a predetermined time) (Each time that elapses) is further continued, so that the automatic button effect state is terminated while the operation system effect in the execution state is suitably continued from the automatic button effect state. It is possible to shift to a state in which an operation-based effect is performed by the operation by, and thereby it is expected that the player's awareness of participation is enhanced.

[Setting process for automatic button effect state according to the type of effect pattern]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described another example, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment operates the predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) even during the symbol variation execution period. The setting and cancellation of the automatic button effect state can be made and canceled, and the simplification of such an operation allows the setting and cancellation of the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the effect progression during the symbol change. I can do it.

  However, if the setting or cancellation of the automatic button effect state is performed during the execution period of the symbol change, the processing load increases due to the setting change that was not assumed at the start of the symbol change, and the processing load increases. It is feared that it will have an adverse effect on the decided production progress. In this regard, the types of the “effect pattern executed based on the result of the jackpot determination” include at least “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” and “operation Depending on the type of the effect pattern, the setting and cancellation related to the automatic button effect state are not always executed promptly because the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the prompting instruction display appears cannot be set. However, there may be no problem. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, the pachinko machine 1 is in the execution period of the symbol change. By making the processing mode related to the setting and cancellation of the automatic button effect state different, an increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol change is suppressed.

  FIG. 367 shows the symbol variation in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three. Is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. . Note that the first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

  As shown in FIG. 367, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is in the effect state of three, “the first effect accepting period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation has started in the “effect pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation, the effect progress as the first effect pattern is performed in a state where the automatic button effect state can be released (a state in which the releasing operation is permitted). .

  In this effect example, it is assumed that a release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the drawing, and the automatic button effect state is released from the setting based on the detection of the release operation. (End). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 has been operated. Is done.

  Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is released in this manner, at the timing td12 within the specific effect accepting period shown in FIG. ) Is detected. When an operation on the operation button 410 is detected during the specific effect reception period, an effect reception is performed, a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is performed, and the specific effect reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect is received when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. It is not accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation of the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received, the effect is performed after the operation, and the automatic button effect state is released. The operation is also accepted and the automatic button effect state is released (terminated).

  Further, in this effect example, it is assumed that a setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the drawing after the end of the specific effect reception period in this manner, and although the symbol is changing, The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) while the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It is executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 has been set to the operation state.

  In this effect example, when the symbol change is stopped after the setting to the automatic button effect state is made, after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the stop of the symbol change, the symbol is held. The next symbol change is digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  As described above, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 367, in a state in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed, the specific effect in the period in which the first effect pattern is executed When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol variation has been started in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” in a state where the symbol change is controlled to the automatic button effect state. Also, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, the specific effect reception period can be generated with the automatic button effect state released, and the player can operate it It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest when the desire to do so arises. In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 367, it is assumed that a release operation is received before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period ends and the first operation is performed. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within one effect pattern period.

  Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears can be set”, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed. Is also allowed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the setting operation is received after the specific effect reception period ends, but the setting operation by the player is performed before the specific effect reception period starts. Is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol change is started in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect receiving period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” in a state where the special effect receiving period is not controlled in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect receiving period occurs. By operating the operation button 410 such that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period earlier than the above, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. This is also possible, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when the user wants to enjoy the effect after the operation by the automatic effect function.

  In order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol change, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) concerning the effect contents in the first effect pattern is required. It is desirable that this is always generated during the specific effect reception period even if is obtained. In addition, the specific effect display is allowed to appear during the period of the symbol change, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect reception period always occurs until the symbol change in the execution state ends. It is desirable to make the production progress. According to these configurations, it is possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs by confirming the effect content that appears during the execution period of the symbol change, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. The user can select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Also, at this time, with respect to the specific effect display, it is possible to provide an indication as to whether or not there is a high possibility that the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a highly expected manner when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that the automatic button effect state will be used for the determination on whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Further, the specific effect display includes at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. The setting (or cancellation) of the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player after the time until the specific effect reception period occurs can be permitted, but when the second specific effect display appears, If the setting (or cancellation) of the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player is not allowed between the time when the second specific effect display appears and the time when the specific effect reception period occurs, the specific effect It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment of the game from when the display appears until the specific effect reception period occurs.

  FIG. 368 shows a state in which the special effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set in the second effect pattern (losing variation )), A symbol change is started, and an example of a process performed when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is a time chart shown.

  As shown in FIG. 368, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is in the effect state of three, “the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation has been started in the “2 effect patterns”. Then, in this effect example as well, as in the case shown in FIG. 367, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is permitted), even during the symbol variation execution period. An effect progress is made as the second effect pattern.

  In this effect example, it is assumed that a release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the drawing, and the automatic button effect state is released from the setting based on the detection of the release operation. (End). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 has been operated. Is done.

  In other words, it seems that there is little merit in terminating the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect accepting period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, normally, when the design fluctuations in the suspended state are exhausted, the possibility that the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set” increases. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal production mode in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end a specific production state).

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set but also during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. Also, the automatic button effect state can be ended by an operation by the player. Therefore, it is possible to end the automatic button effect state in advance when the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set” is still in the hold state, and thereby, the “first effect pattern in the first effect pattern” The automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect accepting period is set, and the operation of the operation means (the operation button 410) must be performed without delay, etc., can be avoided.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is performed at timing td23 shown in the figure after the setting of the automatic button effect state is released in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic production effect state is not controlled and the second production pattern in which the specific production reception period is not set is being executed. Is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is changed from the original position to the operation state and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern During the period in which is executed, the setting operation by the player is not received (the automatic button effect state is not set). Note that, instead of this, even when the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is performed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, During the period in which the second effect pattern is executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

  That is, even if “setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state” is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation during the specific effect reception period. Also, even if it is operated, the effect is received and the effect is executed after the operation. In view of such facts, during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed, even if the setting operation is performed, it is necessary to quickly set the automatic button effect state. However, if the automatic button effect state is set before the start of the specific effect reception period that can occur after the next symbol change is consumed, no problem is considered to occur.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set, the setting operation by the player is performed within the period. However, the automatic button effect state is not set until the period ends (while the symbol change is being executed), and the symbol change according to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol is stopped (losing). When in the state of "symbol stop" (in the figure, timing td24), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. As described above, during the period in which the symbol change of the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not allowed even if the player performs the operation, and the set timing is set to the symbol timing. Since the carryover is performed after the stoppage, the processing load increases due to a change in the setting of the effect state, which has not been determined at the start of the change of the symbol, during the execution of the change of the symbol (by an operation by the player). This can be suitably suppressed.

  Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol change was stopped, the automatic button effect state was set, and the state was changed to the hold state. The next design change is digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  Thus, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 368, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is being executed, of the period in which the second effect pattern is in the execution state, Even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to preferably suppress the processing load from increasing due to a change in the setting of the effect state that has not been determined at the start of the symbol change occurring during the execution of the symbol change (by an operation by the player). Become like

  In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 368, it is assumed that after the symbol change of the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped, the next symbol change in the suspended state is started. However, when the design change of the second effect pattern is stopped (losing design stop), even if the next design change is not in the hold state, the automatic button is pressed when the design is stopped (losing design stop). The setting to the effect state is performed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 368, when the setting operation is performed by the player during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set, the second effect pattern Is set to the automatic button effect state when the symbol change is stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the point is that the automatic button effect state is set during the period in which the second effect pattern is executed. Any setting may be used as long as the setting to the effect state is not allowed and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button effect state be made when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop) or during the next symbol change period. In other words, at the time when the next symbol change is started, if there is an effect state such as "the setting change related to the effect state is determined within the symbol change", the effect is produced according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to make progress, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol change.

  In this case, even when the next symbol change is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop) or the next symbol change is executed. It is desirable that the setting to the automatic button effect state be made within the period of time. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the second effect pattern, the determination as to which effect pattern the next symbol change is to be executed is made. , The timing of setting the automatic button effect state after the symbol is stopped can be postponed.

  Further, when the operation button 410 is set to the operating state during the period in which the second effect pattern is executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the second effect pattern. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed only thereafter. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is ended while the next symbol change is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol change, but the next symbol change is performed. When the second effect pattern is terminated while is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop).

  In addition, apart from the “second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears cannot be set (loss variation)”, the “second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set” "3 effect pattern (hit change)" is further prepared, and when a setting operation is performed by the player within a period in which the symbol change is being executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol is stopped or the big hit game is executed. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed within the setting.

[Prohibition period for setting automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described another example, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment operates the predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) even during the symbol variation execution period. The setting relating to the automatic button production state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation allows the setting relating to the automatic button production state to be performed while keeping an eye on the production progress during the symbol change. ing.

  However, if the processing including the setting of the automatic button effect state and the specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting are always permitted by the operation of the player during the execution of the symbol change, the tension may be increased. Inappropriate performance may reduce the entertainment interest. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol fluctuation according to the result of the big hit determination is performed, at least in the state where the specific effect reception period has not occurred, the specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting by the operation by the player is performed. In a permissible gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibition period in which the specific process related to the effect is not permitted can be started between the start of the symbol change and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, so that even if the specific effect reception period does not occur, the operation unit (such as the operation button 410) does not occur during the prohibition period. ) Is required to be performed, and the player's consciousness of participation in games and effects can be appropriately maintained.

  Hereinafter, an effect example in which “setting processing to an automatic button effect state” is adopted as “specific processing relating to an effect” will be described in detail. You may make it apply as other processes, such as the process which changes the production mode in which the 1st character plays the leading role to another production mode (the production mode in which the 2nd character plays the leading role).

  FIG. 369 shows that a symbol change is started in a “third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the symbol is changed. FIG. 370 is a time chart illustrating a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the fluctuation, and FIG. 370 is an effect example when the effect is advanced in the third effect pattern; FIG. The third effect pattern may be either a hit change or a loss change, and may be the same as the above-described first effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (a), when in an effect situation that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the “third effect where a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that a symbol change is started in the “pattern”. Then, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern in a state where the automatic button effect state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is permitted), while the symbol change is being executed. .

  However, in this effect example, when the symbol change is performed in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”, the timing te11 (before the specific effect reception period occurs) In FIG. 369), an operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or a prohibited period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (b), in this prohibition period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed. Note that in the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 370 (b), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is displayed, and a button lock effect in which characters such as "automatic setting invalidity" are displayed is executed. Have been.

  The prohibition period thus generated ends when a timing te12 at which a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 arrives. However, no matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 370 (c) and (d), the specific effect (the prohibited image) ) Is not changed at all.

  Then, when the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (image during prohibition) is hidden, and the process returns to the state in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is permitted. Then, after that, when the above-mentioned “sign effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 370 (e)), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 370 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 370 (f), the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 is set, but the effect reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is provided. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (f), the specific effect reception period is generated in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set. The above-described automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even in the case where the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears in which an instruction display prompting an operation can be set” is executed in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 369, before the prohibition period starts. If the automatic button effect state is set to the special effect accepting period in the state where the automatic button effect state is set, in this case, the specific effect The above-described automatic effect function can be operated at a specific timing during the reception period.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is not performed at the timing when the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state, but when the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after it becomes. However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is operated and maintained for two seconds within a period of less than two seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 369 arrives, if the timing te11 occurs The setting to the automatic button effect state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (image during prohibition) is not generated at the timing te11 at which the prohibition period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. 369, but is generated after the timing te11. Is desirable.

  FIGS. 371 and 372 are diagrams illustrating modified examples of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period for setting the automatic button effect state) related to “specific processing related to effects such as effect settings”.

  That is, as described above, in the effect example described above with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 369), the first specific time (for example, 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed until this operation is completed after the elapse of (sec), not only the setting operation is not accepted, but also the specific effect (prohibited image) Has not been changed in any way.

  However, in the following modified example which will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 371 and 372, the point that the prohibition period is “the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) is required from the occurrence to the end” is described. Is the same, but when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the generation of the prohibition period, an operation by the player (the operation button This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIG. 369 and FIG.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (a), when in an effect state that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, “the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation has started in the “3 effect patterns”. Then, even in this modified example, the effect progression as the third effect pattern in a state in which the automatic button effect state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed), even during the execution period of the symbol variation. Will be performed.

  In addition, at timing te11 (see FIG. 371) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. 369 and FIG. 369. In addition to the start of a prohibited period that is not performed, a specific effect (a prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed in the prohibited period. This is the same as the effect example described above with reference to 370.

  However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 371, of the prohibition period, a period from the timing te11 to a timing te11a at which a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (a period during which release is impossible). Thus, no matter how many operations (operations on the operation buttons 410) are performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (prohibited image) (see FIG. 372 (c)). In the period from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (the timing at which the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the prohibition period) until the arrival (the period during which release is permitted), the operation by the player is performed. When (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, a process in which the prohibition period can be ended early can be executed.

  More specifically, when the timing te11a comes and the prohibition period can be terminated early by an operation (operation on the operation button 410) by the player, first, in the effect display device 1600, the timing te11a comes. The special image that has not appeared in the period up to (the period in which cancellation is impossible) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (d), an image NJG indicating the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

  That is, in the prohibition period according to this modification, when the timing te11a comes, such an image NJG comes to appear (see FIG. 372 (d)), and the prohibition period cannot be released (see FIG. 372 (d)). From the timings te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that the period has shifted to a period (timings te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be released, whereby the prohibition period is indicated in the remaining time. Can be made to function as an effect on whether to end early.

  When the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within a period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the inhibition period is allowed, the operation button 410 is changed to an operation state. Based on this, a process for ending the prohibition period early is executed. Thus, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player is accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

  Here, in this modified example, when the prohibition period is terminated early by the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) by the player, the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect change based on the first operation. Can be executed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (e), an effect in which an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is destroyed and characters such as "successfully released" are displayed to cause an effect change. Accordingly, the specific effect (the image under prohibition) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

  Then, in the state where the prohibition period has been terminated early, if the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for two seconds), the setting processing to the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, on the effect display device 1600, a display (here, “auto button is being set”) appears as the effect setting is performed.

  After that, when the above-mentioned “foreboding effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 372 (f)), a specific effect receiving period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 372 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 372 (g), the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 is set. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (g), since the specific effect reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button effect state is set, the effect within the specific effect reception period is set. If no operation is performed by the player until the specific timing arrives, the above-described automatic effect function will function. However, even if it is the production example shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (g), the first operation is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the invalid period is permitted, and the invalid period is first set. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. It goes without saying that the same production situation will appear.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific effect accepting period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is ended. The specific effect accepting period may be generated immediately after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is completed (in a manner linked to the prohibiting period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect reception period occurs while the setting opportunity to the automatic button effect state remains in the prohibition state. It is possible to increase the player's participation awareness when the effect reception period is not occurring.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, in the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, when an effect is received within a specific effect reception period that occurs thereafter. Any one of a plurality of effect modes having different ratios of an effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation as a post-operation effect and a ratio of a large hit symbol appearing due to a symbol change in the running state may be caused to appear.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, based on the result of the jackpot determination,
In the third state in which the effect image of FIG. 372 (e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, “padlock”) in which the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbol appearing due to the symbol change in the execution state is different. , And multiple rendering modes with different degrees of destruction of images with chains attached to
In the second state in which the effect image of FIG. 372 (d) appears, when the above-mentioned third state is reached, a “specific third effect mode (a plurality of third effect modes) Of the plurality of second production modes (for example, “a plurality of production modes in which the colors of the image NJG are different”), the ratios (expectations) at which the “third production mode most advantageous to the player” appears are different. Spawn one of them,
In the first state in which the effect images shown in FIGS. 372 (b) and (c) appear, when the second state is reached, a “specific second effect mode (multiple Among the first production modes (the second production mode that is most advantageous to the player) among the first production modes (for example, “a plurality of production modes with different background image colors”). ) Is desirably executed. According to such a configuration, while the production progresses within the prohibition period, or the process in which the prohibition period ends early is executed, the degree of expectation can be suggested in stages by the effects related to each other. Therefore, it is expected that not only the entertainment of the game during the prohibition period can be suitably maintained, but also the prompt end of the prohibition period and the awareness of player participation can be enhanced. In this sense, the first and second effects are to be executed as an effect in which the movable decorative body is inoperable, and only the third effect that directly leads to the early end of the prohibition period is movable. It is desirable to be able to execute as an effect mode of operating the decorative body. When a specific third production mode among a plurality of third production modes appears, a predetermined movable decoration body is operated, and when a third production mode different from the specific third production mode appears, a predetermined movable decoration is displayed. The body may not be operated.

  370 (e) and (f), and the effects illustrated in FIGS. 372 (f) and (g), for the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like). The above-described effect (specific operation) regarding whether a period in which an operation can be accepted for an effect or a period in which an operation for another operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is accepted can be performed. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350).

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 369 to 372, it has been described that the specific effect reception period is always generated after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated. However, the specific effect reception period does not necessarily have to occur, and after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” occurs, the symbol change stops without the specific effect reception period occurring An effect pattern that can be performed may be prepared.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, in the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, an effect pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, the super reach state) It is desirable that an effect pattern (for example, an effect pattern in which a super-reach state occurs) having a relatively higher expectation degree of a jackpot has a higher appearance ratio than an effect pattern in which no hit occurs. That is, in this case, despite the appearance of an effect pattern with a relatively high jackpot expectation, an opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state for a predetermined period is forcibly lost. It is possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's awareness of winning the jackpot will increase.

  However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it is inevitable that the interest of the player who wants the automatic button effect state to occur is reduced, so that FIG. 371 and FIG. As shown, when a certain amount of time has elapsed, the prohibition period can be quickly released by the player, and when the prohibition period is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button effect state is returned to a state where it is allowed again. Is desirable.

  Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target set by the operation by the player may be other operation means such as the touch panel, the sword decoration 5001, and the cross key, in addition to the operation button 410. Further, the prohibition period may be ended early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used when setting the automatic button production state, or when setting the automatic button production state. The prohibition period may be ended early by operating the operation target to be used. However, when the prohibition period is ended early by operating the operation target used in setting the automatic button production state, the operation modes (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

  Note that, as described above, FIGS. 369 to 372 show an example of the effect in which the “setting process to the automatic button effect state” is adopted as the “specifying process related to the effect”. Not limited to However, regarding the “specific processing related to the effect”, regardless of which type of symbol change is performed as the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means Desirably, it can be performed by an operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described another example, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment operates the predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) even during the symbol variation execution period. The setting relating to the automatic button production state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation allows the setting relating to the automatic button production state to be performed while keeping an eye on the production progress during the symbol change. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation operably provided between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force as the operation means. Means (here, sword decoration body 5001), and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, sword decoration body 5001). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic production function) of causing the same change as when the operation is performed to the effect can be executed.

  By the way, when an effect reception period for such movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 293 (G2), the movable operation means is moved to the original position by a predetermined driving force. There is a case in which the player is first moved to the operation position from, and an operation opportunity is given to the player to operate the movable operation means in the moved state. At this operation opportunity, the effect may be received by an operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position, instead of an operation of returning from the operation position to the original position.

  However, when such an effect reception period occurs, there is a possibility that the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has some abnormality or failure, and accordingly, the movable operation means (here, If it is impossible to drive the sword decoration 5001) from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) cannot be appropriately given, and the effect reception is not performed. There is a concern that the effect cannot be produced after the corresponding operation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has some abnormality or failure, and as a result, the movable operation means (here, Even if an effect reception period as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) occurs while the sword decoration 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the sword decoration body 5001) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. When the effect is made, a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change as when the specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected in the effect reception period to the effect can be made executable. .

  According to such a configuration, even if any abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the movable operation means cannot operate, the automatic operation function is used to enable the movable operation means. After the operation using the operation means, it is possible to appropriately produce the effect.

  However, when some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the movable operation means cannot operate, the operation itself of the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is performed. Since it is in a difficult situation, if an operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is required to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button It is not possible to set the effect state (specific effect state), and after all, the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect reception on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) cannot be generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) are used. Is generated, the same effect change as when an operation is performed on the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is generated. Processing can be performed (automatic production function). Then, the setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001). I am trying to be.

  That is, in this case, not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the side where there is a concern that the operation cannot be performed when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only the operation on the general push-type operation button 410, An automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) can be generated. Therefore, even if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) during the execution period of the symbol change, the operation of the operation button 410 sets the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Is performed, it is possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001).

  In order to appropriately secure the operability at the time of such an abnormality or a failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is required. It is important that the operating means is basically provided as a non-driven (vibrating even if there is a driving system) operating means which is not a target of the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality or failure. I can say.

  However, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) will be set.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol change. A restoring process for returning the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) to a normal (original position) is executed. Note that the restoration processing can be executed as the above-described processing contents. For example, a restoration operation (operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to the original position is performed. , And is repeatedly executed with a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) as an upper limit until it returns to the original position properly.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the restoration processing is started for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol change, the movable operation is performed. This allows the player to recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is in an abnormal or faulty state. Further, as a result of the execution of the restoration processing, it is confirmed whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position. The player determines whether the restoration processing for the decorative body 5001) has succeeded and the state in which the abnormality or failure has occurred has been resolved, or whether the restoration processing has failed and the state in which the abnormality or failure has occurred continues. You will be able to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality / failure has occurred is continued, the operation on the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Is set, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred, the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be set. An after-operation effect according to the effect reception can be appropriately generated.

  However, after confirming that the restoration process has failed for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) may occur before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that it may not be possible to properly generate an after-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a plurality of special effect reception periods in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) can be generated. No matter which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoring process on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) (the restoring operation (5 (The time when the second operation) is repeated up to the upper limit number (for example, three times) and the time (here, 2 seconds) required for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is possible to execute the process of making the effect progress so that the special effect receiving period is not generated only after the elapse.

  According to such a configuration, when the design change is started in an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001), the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality or the failure has occurred before the special effect reception period occurs. Then, since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed, the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration body 5001) is properly performed. Can be generated. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs while the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the special effect is produced. The same change as in the case where the operation on the movable operation means is performed within the reception period is caused for the effect.

  FIG. 373 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

  As shown in FIG. 373, in the example relating to the effect processing, if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), the movable operation means (here, Thus, a restoration process for returning the sword decoration 5001) to a normal state is performed for a maximum of 15 seconds. The setting operation to the automatic button effect state requires two seconds. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect according to the reception of the operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is performed. It takes 10 seconds.

  In view of such time setting values, first, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect reception A period longer than “30 seconds”, which is obtained by adding the period) and 10 seconds (production after the operation), respectively, and “17” obtained by adding 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation). Unless the effect is advanced so that the special effect reception period is generated at a timing later than “second”, the symbol change (in the state where the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or failure, occurs. It is not possible to ensure the above-described performance when the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period) is started.

  Therefore, in the drawing, as the plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (symbol fluctuation times of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are respectively assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than the above-mentioned additional time “30 seconds” is assigned, only effect development in which a special effect reception period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned additional time “30 seconds” is assigned, a special effect reception period can be generated, but the symbol fluctuation is started. After that, at a timing before "17 seconds (addition time of 15 seconds (restoring process) and 2 seconds (setting operation)"), only the effect development in which the special effect reception period cannot occur can be executed. In order to secure the above-described rendition when a symbol change (an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period) is started in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality or a failure. I have to.

  In the example of the effect processing, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than the above-mentioned additional time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

  However, in reality, if the special effect acceptance period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoring process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation, the restoring process fails. If a setting operation to the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not performed immediately after recognizing that the special button production state has been changed, a special production reception period is generated with the setting changed to the automatic button production state (specific production state). It is not realistic because it cannot be done. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it is usually necessary to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above-mentioned time setting values are not designed on the assumption of such time values, it can be said that there is no effectiveness in the above-mentioned operation and effect.

  In this regard, the design including such a time value is performed in such a manner that a plurality of operations are effected, and each time the effect is received, a multi-operation effective period (for example, 8 Second) or a long press validity period (for example, 10 seconds) for which an effect is received and an effect is generated after the operation is performed when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time or more. In the validity period (production acceptance period), even if the operation is started with a delay from the occurrence of the validity period, the operation or long press is performed a proper number of times and the proper time until the validity period ends. It can be performed over.

  In view of such a fact, among the above-described time settings, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a multiple-operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long-press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) is used. Is desirable. That is, in this case, the effect patterns (fluctuation patterns) that can generate the special effect reception period include “15 seconds (restoration processing)”, “8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)”, A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" obtained by adding "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (effect after operation)", respectively, and "15 seconds" (Restoration process) "and" 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period) "are added, and a special effect reception period is generated at a timing later than" 23 seconds "or" 25 seconds ". As described above, the effect is developed, and only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as an effect pattern satisfying the condition.

  Note that the multiple operation validity period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press validity period (for example, 10 seconds) are not necessarily generated in the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. May be generated in another effect pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, Means that the length of the validity period on the side where the error occurs is set instead of 2 seconds (setting operation). If the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) can generate both a multiple-operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long-press valid period (for example, 10 seconds), the valid periods are set. It is desirable to set the long side of in place of 2 seconds (setting operation).

  Further, in the gaming state in which the time-saving function is enabled, since it is required that the symbol fluctuations are successively digested in a shorter time, in the gaming state in which the time-saving function is enabled, each of the above-mentioned time settings is set. May not necessarily be designed. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect reception period may occur during the period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled by the setting operation by the player. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operation means while the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001). Can be executed, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process and the post-operation effect on the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) is performed in parallel can be realized. Note that this processing is not limited to the game state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to a game state in which the time saving function is not enabled. Will not be performed.

  Further, in the example relating to the effect processing described with reference to FIG. 373, the effect using the movable operation means may be executed as any of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 350. . When a specific operation-related effect is performed, the "effect using the movable operation means" shown in the figure is realized as an effect that sequentially performs a specific operation-related effect, a special effect reception period, and a post-operation effect. The Rukoto.

  Also, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) is controlled only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, an effect may be received for the movable operation means within the special effect reception period even if no operation is performed, and a post-operation effect may appear. When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, at least during the symbol change in the normal game state, an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). A special effect reception period to be given does not occur, but an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (operation button 410 in this case) which is not a target of the above-described restoration process in the case of an abnormality or a failure is generated. Is possible. The effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) which is not a target of the above-described restoration processing in the case of an abnormality or a failure is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state). It can also occur when you are. When such a configuration is adopted, the above-described design for each time setting may be performed. However, even if the above-described design for each time setting is not performed, the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) may be used. It is possible to ensure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or a failure has occurred.

  In the example of the effect processing, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player, but the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. May not necessarily be performed by the operation of the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or the setting to the automatic button production state itself is not performed, and the automatic production function always functions. It may be provided as a playable gaming machine.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of a condition different from the condition of the symbol game]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received in the starting port (the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004), a determination regarding a hit is performed. As a result, when the big hit is won, the big hit symbol is displayed and then the big change game is executed and then the big hit game is enabled to be obtained, and after the big hit game, it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control the game state (time saving state, probable change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a produces an effect (for example, various announcement effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect, in addition to an effect pattern, in accordance with the result of the determination regarding the hit). ) Can be executed, thereby maintaining the game entertainment until the big hit game is performed, as described above.

  However, by simply performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the specific There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (such as a curtain) becomes monotonous and it is difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate for a long period of time.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the display content and the movable state of the effect display device 1600 can be determined even when another condition irrelevant to the determination process relating to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (the condition for starting the symbol game) is satisfied. A process capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decorative body can be executed. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode beyond the category of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operation rate for a long period of time. Can be expected.

Here, when the determination process relating to the progress of the game and another condition irrelevant to the symbol change (the condition for starting the symbol game) corresponding thereto are satisfied, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. For example, the methods listed below can be assumed as the methods for generating. In order to cause a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a technique different from any of the techniques listed below may be adopted. However, a situation where the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. Is in a state of “0”), the above-mentioned another condition must be satisfied. Even if the another condition is satisfied in this situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 or It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body.
-A method of periodically performing a production lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuation, and assuming that the specific result is obtained by this production lottery as "the establishment of another condition".-The cumulative number of operations on specific operation means Is determined to be the above-mentioned “establishment of another condition”. The time is measured by the RTC (real-time clock) function or arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a (or the main control MPU 1310a) (for example, when the power is turned on). The time from this is measured), and when the measured time reaches the predetermined time, the above-mentioned “other condition is satisfied” is used.

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, another condition is assumed to be satisfied, and the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Often adopted. However, regardless of which method is used, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition that is not related to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing comes Because it is common to require a relatively long time (at least a few hours, for example), it is possible to cause a change in the display content or the behavior of the movable decorative body despite such a long time. If an impossible situation occurs, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which a movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as a symbol game start condition. Can be generated based on the satisfaction of another specific condition (for example, that the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). In a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position despite being in the original position) and the specific state has not occurred, the symbol change may occur. When the corresponding restoration operation timing has arrived, it is possible to start processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body, whereas the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time has arrived, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is not started, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at the predetermined time within the specific state can be started. .

  That is, in this case, in the specific state that can be generated based on the satisfaction of a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol changing side is set to the prohibited state. Since it is possible to start a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, the movable body abnormality can be determined in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. By restoring, it is expected that the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 374, an example of the processing content when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 374, for the sake of convenience of description, when the elapsed time from the power-on is determined to have reached the predetermined time using the RTC function, the RTC state (displaying a different display content than before is determined). A specific state), and a process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (the specific state). " As described above, the method for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. As described above, it is also possible to appropriately adopt each technique described below when other techniques are adopted.

  Assuming that the RTC state (specific state) is in a state before the occurrence of the RTC state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time (e.g., until the occurrence of the RTC state) until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. Will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time, and the RTC state (specific state) is generated, and the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on this, a process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed. As described above, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the fulfillment of the condition (the fulfillment of the second condition) irrelevant to the situation of the symbol variation, so that the flow of the game up to now can be improved. It will be possible to give a sense of expectation as if it were changing. At this time, a change may be made to the display content on the effect display device 1600.

  In order to more appropriately increase the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is caused to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), If a jackpot is won after the period (RTC state) occurs until it ends, the production progress by the production character which cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) ( It is more desirable to provide a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, a condition irrelevant to the situation of the symbol fluctuation is established even at the timing Rt1 slightly before (for example, 5 seconds before) such timing Rt2. Based on the fulfillment of the condition (the fulfillment of the first condition), the front display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the fulfillment of the second condition) can be executed. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example determines whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the lapse of time since the power is turned on. Is determined to have arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decorative body) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. . The "previous display" can be executed as, for example, a display such as "RTC state is coming soon" or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations result in a big hit determination. Will be suggested to the player in advance that the game is not based on the game (it does not have any jackpot expectation), so that it is possible to appropriately prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a recognition error by the player. Will be able to

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at least in the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display not according to the symbol variation) showing no expectation is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the decorative pattern (effect pattern) is not displayed so as not to be displayed. That is, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while the display contents on the effect display device 1600 show only a display that does not show any degree of expectation (a display that does not conform to the pattern variation). Since the process for causing the game to start is started, it is expected that the player's interest in the game is prevented from being reduced due to a recognition error by the player, more suitably.

  Here, the “previous display appearing at the timing Rt1” and the “movable body operation appearing at the timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display not conforming to the pattern variation” and correspond to “the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the pattern variation”. Is what you do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated irrespective of the execution state (including the execution or non-execution) of the symbol change at those timings. However, depending on the execution state of the symbol change, a situation in which preparation for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is not completed (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are returned to the original positions despite the arrival of the timing Rt2). There is a possibility that the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may not be sequentially operated even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

  For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, There is a case where a movable effect using the movable decorative body C is executed. However, during the execution of the movable effect, the movable body operation timing in the above-described RTC state (here, when the RTC state occurs) arrives. In some cases, at least a movable decorative body that is in the middle of execution among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation” described above. Can be assumed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change comes, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also the various types of pachinko machine 1 included in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable body is in the original position (normal state). When it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state in the movable abnormality determination (abnormality determination), a predetermined predetermined number of movable decorative bodies are determined for the movable decorative body to be determined in a manner following the abnormality determination processing. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), early restoration of the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is enabled. Therefore, the movable body operation timing in the above-described RTC state may be reached during the execution of the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.) on the movable decorative body. When there is, at least the movable decorative body in the middle of the restoration operation among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation” described above. Can be assumed.

  The “restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation” is, for example, a symbol variation start timing (a timing at which a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a is acquired when the symbol variation is started) or a symbol variation. It can be executed as at least one of the stop timings (the timing at which the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol variation is stopped), and the like (the restoration process is executed based on the command acquisition). It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) illustrated in FIG. 374, first, at least after the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives, the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. In the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the mode, the movable decorative bodies (the movable decorative bodies A and the movable decorative bodies B) used in the period are used. , The movable decorative body C) is prohibited so as not to be used as a movable effect in accordance with the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, whereby the movable member operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration not according to the symbol variation). It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the behavior of the body cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol variation side.

  However, at this time, even if an effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if there is a case where the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern, there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at the timing Rt1, only the display (display not according to the symbol variation) which does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. That was mentioned above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, if there is a symbol variation (B variation (losing) in the figure) in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, “what kind of expected The display (display from timing Rt1) which is not shown at this time is not hidden at this time, but is displayed over the period up to timing Rt2a at which the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 despite the fact that the RTC state (specific state) occurs and the symbol variation is actually performed. The effect pattern by the pattern is hidden, and only the display that does not show any degree of expectation appears. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state progresses. It is expected that a decrease in gaming interest caused by a failure to perform a movable effect according to the effect pattern within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is appropriately expected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, when the symbol variation (in the figure, the B variation (losing) in the drawing) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display not showing any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)” which has been displayed until then is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is changed. The display which shows the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed, the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” comes. At least until the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It goes without saying that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any one of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol changing side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the process of being executed, the game by disabling the movable effect on the symbol changing side is prohibited. Deterioration of interest will be suppressed.

  As such prohibition processing, it is determined whether or not the situation is to be prohibited at the start of the symbol variation (in the figure, C variation), and when it is determined that the situation is to be prohibited, the corresponding symbol variation (FIG. Among them, C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (at least a movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable decorative body is changed according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Even if the period until the operation in the specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed "is completed, the movable effect (the period until the symbol change is completed) is completed. At least the execution of the movable effect using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) is not allowed.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the timing at which the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) appears is the timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. Is a concern. However, the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, but the production bonus due to the occurrence of the RTC state (when a big hit is won from the time the RTC state occurs to the time it ends, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) do not occur at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the symbol fluctuations that were first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to cause a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) to appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, before the symbol variation (in the figure, the B variation (losing) in the drawing) which was in the middle of the execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is completed (stopped) (before the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, A period until the end of the sequential operation by C) is completed. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which “display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)” is maintained. This is in the example shown in FIG. 374. In the example shown in FIG. 374, the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (around timing Rt2) is set as a target of the RTC effect privilege. It is not.

  Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 374, the movable decorative body is specified in the specific mode by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs. In the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed ", the restoration process triggered by this even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived By prohibiting this (processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation) is performed. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the behavior of the movable decorative body) cannot be performed by the restoration process on the symbol variation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol changing side is performed. The process of causing the symbol change is prohibited, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the movable body abnormality can be restored in a predetermined procedure within the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the abnormality, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode can be more reliably performed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state and the symbol is changed in accordance with the big hit determination (in the figure, A is changed). It is assumed that the timing Rt1 comes. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, for example, a display such as "RTC state soon" appears on the background display of the effect display device 1600 as a display not according to the symbol variation. Then, the symbol change (in the figure, the A change (loss) in the figure) is completed after the display such as “RTC state is coming soon” until the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, and a new symbol is displayed. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. The timing Rt2 comes at a stage when the symbol change is being performed, and at this timing Rt2, the three movable shapes of the movable decorative body do not conform to the symbol change. Processing for sequentially operating the decorative bodies A, B, and C is executed. The “display not according to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued over a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, “after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the three movable decorative bodies A, In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and This is prohibited so that neither the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, during the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, even though the symbol variation (in the diagram, the B variation (losing)) is being performed, the effect display (the symbol variation side) is performed. The display is controlled as a period in which none of the display indicating the degree of expectation, the movable effect on the symbol variation side (moving body operation indicating the degree of expectation), and the restoration process on the symbol variation side are not executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 374, during the period of timings Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display (display indicating the degree of expectation) on the symbol variation side is executed, but the movable effect (expected) on the symbol variation side. The control is performed as a period during which neither the movable body operation indicating the degree) nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is executed (second limitation).

  The control at timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both of the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) and the movable effect (moving body operation indicating the degree of expectation) are not executed) This is executed even if the symbol change in the period is not the loss change but the one performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit change). That is, in this case, when no expected effect is executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the stage of being executed at the timing Rt2a, the big hit symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, the player who expected to be in the RTC state can enjoy the surprising effect beyond the expectation. After the big hit symbol appears, a big hit game state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially performing the operation.

  In addition, as described above, with respect to the display from timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decoration symbol does not fluctuate and the degree of expectation is not shown), the symbol fluctuation which was in the middle of the execution when the timing Rt2 arrived is not changed. The display is made non-display at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead, a specific background after the occurrence of the RTC state (such as "during the RTC state") is displayed. Further, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started in a state where a specific background (“RTC state” or the like) is displayed, an effect display (expected degree is indicated) according to the variation pattern. Display) is executed as usual. However, regarding the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the timing after the timing Rt2a arrives unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Is also maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, based on the result of the big hit determination, even if an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol changing side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed is temporarily selected, Although the display in the liquid crystal, the sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the like are executed as usual, the movable decorative body is not operated.

  Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. , C (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) until the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change (here, the start of the symbol change). Timing, stop timing), the restoration process (the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state) triggered by this is prohibited so as not to be performed. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (losing in the figure)). )) Is started (restoration operation time). In these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. No processing is performed.

  However, during the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt5 (when the timing is abnormal, the timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side, first, at the timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A enters the abnormal state. It is determined whether or not. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A means, for example, that the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (first position) and then at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body A to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B means that, for example, the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (second position), and then is at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C means, for example, that the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (third position) and then at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body C to the original position.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (e), when the timing Rt5 after each operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is sequentially completed comes, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. The “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the design variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration process on the design variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state in any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation Is executable. However, during execution of a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, a predetermined state is determined for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. When the player side may feel that the player is performing the restoration operation, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable (Sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C) is not executed independently as a separate operation, but as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. In addition, when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state, it is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in gaming interest.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, an abnormal state including an operation of restoring (restoring) the movable decorative body B instead of a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is performed. The operation (special operation) in the operation mode described above can be executed. After that, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not operated again in the normal operation mode (normal operation), and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Like the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. Note that the time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B may be the same as the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B, or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the occurrence of the RTC state (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred. Until the timing to operate is reached, this is intentionally left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side. Then, when the timing to operate the movable decorative body B comes, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoring operation instead of the normal operation mode. It is possible to restore the abnormally movable movable body B while appropriately maintaining an effect mode when an RTC state such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" occurs. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as an operation at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state has been executed. , The decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is preferably avoided.

  In addition, in the symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. The operation is started at an intermediate stage, and is continued until after the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the figure) arrive. In this case, since the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration processing is performed on the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “special mode including the restoring operation” is referred to as “normal operation. As long as the movable decorative body B is restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the “mode”, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position may be used.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt1, only a display (for example, “RTC state soon” or the like) that does not show any degree of expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives. However, the display is different depending on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC preparation state”). May be switched to. However, even when the display content is switched at timing Rt2 to cause a new display to appear, during the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any degree of expectation (design variation). Is important.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoration operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in the specific mode is set as the occurrence time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 that satisfy the conditions based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the side of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the message "not conform to the symbol variation" Display "and" the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the design fluctuation ". However, instead of this, based on a command transmitted based on a function that does not conform to the pattern variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, “display not conforming to pattern variation” or “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to pattern variation” May be started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 374, “after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, 3 In the period until the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated), the pattern changing side is prohibited from being performed, and the RTC state is thereby prevented. The operation of the movable body in a specific mode in the (specific state) (the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) is made difficult to occur due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration processing for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration processing is set to the execution state. Among them, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and eventually, the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the movable body operation (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed. It is feared that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, even during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration processing for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is not performed. It is desirable to prohibit this from being performed.

  FIG. 375 is a modification example of the example shown in FIG. 374. “During the period between timings Rt1 and Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 are described. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 374 in that “restore processing is not executed”.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 375, in the period (timing Rt1 to Rt2) from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state, the abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or , Restoration processing) itself is not executed. Thus, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display that does not conform to the symbol variation (such as “RTC state is coming soon”) is displayed, this is restored. It is left unattended in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 375, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, prior to executing the processing relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) as to whether any of the above is in an abnormal state is performed.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is determined that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived and FIG. , The processing described above (processing relating to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, an abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is separately performed again. When it is determined, an operation in a normal mode (see FIG. 374 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, an operation in a special mode (see FIG. 374 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is performed.

  On the other hand, prior to executing the processing relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, the abnormality determination is performed, and as a result, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is that "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in the abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the “special mode” described above. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 375 (f), at the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, “the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet come. It is assumed that it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of performing the abnormality determination when “is not yet started”. Then, while maintaining the “state in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal has been maintained. Will be executed.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 375 (e) and (f), all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in the RTC state compared to when it is determined that there is no abnormality. The arrival of the movable body operation timing is delayed (the delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b in the drawing), and a period created by such a delay (the timings Rt2 to Rt2b in the drawing) is used. Thus, it becomes possible to arrive at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after restoring the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal. Thereafter, when the movable body operation timing in the RTC state comes, the processing described above with reference to FIG. 374 is performed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 375 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. are doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 374 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in the normal state, respectively, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the "movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" is generated. Is ended, and the prohibition state (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (g), when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 374 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in a mode (movable decorative bodies A and C are normal states and movable decorative body B is in a special mode) according to each determination result. When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation” at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is ended, and the symbol-variation-side restoration process is inhibited (the inhibition status over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b). ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, if an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (reconstruction operation) corresponding to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. The operations in the special mode are respectively executed.

  According to such a configuration, even when a movable abnormality occurs during the movable body operation immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movable body operations (here, three (The sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately performed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be appropriately maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 375, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration processing for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially performed, and then the RTC state is restored. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased, a series of movable body operations (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially performed) when the RTC state occurs. ) Is delayed for a longer time, but a series of movable body operations when the RTC state occurs can be executed in a normal mode. Restoration operations for a plurality of movable decorations may be performed in parallel. In this case, a delay time until a series of movements of the movable decoration when the RTC state occurs is started can be suppressed. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 375, if the player may feel that a predetermined restoring operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state, the player may feel uncomfortable, and this may cause amusement. Is a concern. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 375 (f) and (g), when the “restoring operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that the series of movable body operations up to timings Rt5a and Rt5b, including the restoration operation appearing at timing Rt2, can be seen as “a series of movable body operations when an RTC state occurs”. This makes it difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormal situations, a display (such as an error code) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 375 (f) and (g) as well as in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), during the period in which the restoration operation (restoration processing) is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination or during the operation of the movable decorative body B in the special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination). No indication (error code, etc.) is displayed. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and FIG. At the timing when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is completed, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings. There is no such thing as change. These facts also make it seem that the “sequence of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state” is merely performed, and that the predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. This is important in making recognition difficult.

  In addition, in FIG. 374 and another example, and in FIG. 375 and another example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed. Not limited to the above, the movable decorative body (one, two, three or more or the like) used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side is determined based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (start condition). What is necessary is just to operate in a specific mode at the movable body operation time in the specific state that occurs.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, operably provided. An operation button 410, a sword decoration body 5001, and the like, and a board-side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movement effecting unit 3200, a specific decoration member SDY (a mattress) )) May be used.

  However, for example, in FIG. 374 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 375 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state), the operating means is used. When a frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, even after the timing Rt2a has arrived, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means is used. A situation in which “operation not according to symbol variation” is being performed may occur.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body in accordance with the occurrence of the RTC state, the display that has been displayed up to that time does not show any degree of expectation (the display from the timing Rt1). Display) is not displayed at this time, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is changed. As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol change (in the figure, C change (loss)) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) which is also used as the operation means is not provided. Despite being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, depending on the effect pattern, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as the operation means, A situation that may cause confusion in the production can occur. In the period between the timings Rt2 and Rt2a (and the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2 before that), only a display that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation (a display that does not show any degree of expectation) appears. Even if a symbol change (in the drawing, a C change (loss)) is performed, no operation opportunity is given within the period.

  In spite of the fact that the specific operation means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state of being subjected to the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operation means is determined according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the case where the production time for the given operation opportunity has arrived, the production display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means. Even if a specific operation means in a state of performing a specific operation is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, it is determined that the specific operating means was originally provided with an operation opportunity. It is possible to suggest to the person appropriately. In addition, since the effect on the specific operation means is not accepted, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a failure or abnormality due to the operation performed on the specific operation means in the operating state. Will be as expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the effect on the specific operation unit is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the user to perform the operation on the specific operation unit is performed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the entertainment of the game may be reduced due to the lack of progress of the effect. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operation buttons 410 operably provided and the sword decorative body 5001) provided on the door frame 3 side, the operation effect in the symbol fluctuation according to the big hit determination is provided. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high occurrence ratio is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the ratio of occurrence of the operation effect in the symbol variation is relatively high. When given, it is desirable that the display relating to the operation instruction image and the reception of the effect when the operation is performed (a predetermined effect corresponding to the reception of the effect) are executed as usual.

  That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 operable (for example, vibrating) or the like and the sword decorative body 5001), the symbol variation according to the big hit determination A specific operating means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) having a relatively low occurrence ratio of the operation effect in the movable decoration in the RTC state (specific state) can be operated at the movable body operation timing. By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) in a state in which the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the movable decorative body ( For example, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which an effect timing for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the big hit determination to the sword decoration 5001) comes.

  In addition, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low operation effect occurrence rate within the symbol variation) provided on the door frame 3 side is moved to the movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When using as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is performed independently of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C described above. It is desirable to perform the operation using the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 374) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 375) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Also, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the pattern variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected (delayed or the like) by performing these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as board-side movable decorative bodies. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performing a restoring operation, the movable decorative body is provided on the door frame 3 side by eliminating the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body. The operation by the frame-side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body) having a relatively low occurrence ratio of the operation effect within the symbol variation When the time required to complete the operation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) according to the symbol change according to 5001)) is “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination has been executed. Even in this case, as long as at least “specific time” has not elapsed since the symbol change started (the production pattern started), a predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the production pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern (internal operation opportunity giving timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 374 and the other examples thereof, and in FIG. 375 and the other examples thereof, even if a symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is not changed. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) Operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, so that the effect of the RTC state can be enhanced without sacrificing the effect on the symbol variation side.

  In addition, as described above, in consideration of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only in a symbol variation after a symbol variation that is first digested after an RTC state occurs, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, The operation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword decoration 5001) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the design variation that is digested first afterwards must be started later, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is delayed by the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ) Can be given a margin to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Also, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. At the time of execution, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoring operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to execute the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) or to perform the restoration operation and then perform the operation in the normal state in the following manner. Note that the “special mode including the restoring operation” in this case also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal state”, “special mode including the restoring operation”, and “after performing the restoring operation”. Unless the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as long as the operation is not completed. It is more desirable to make settings for each effect pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, even when any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is performed in the normal state or in the state when the abnormality is determined, only after the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) In this way, an operation opportunity can be provided.

  Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (RTC) Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is reduced. It is no longer possible to accept productions, and there is a concern that gaming entertainment may decline. Therefore, when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed in the normal state, and the time from the timing Rt2 required until the completion is set as the “special time”, the big hit determination is performed. Even if any of the effect patterns according to the above are executed, as long as neither of the “specific time” nor the “special time” has elapsed since the symbol change started (the effect pattern started), In order to prevent a predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001)), each effect pattern (inside the operation opportunity giving timing). It is desirable to make settings related to.

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration processing for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is performed. Is prohibited, and the timing Rt2 arrives while the abnormal state is intentionally maintained.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A in which the operation sequence is early, or the movable decorative body that requires a long time for the restoring operation) does not have this. When an abnormal state occurs during the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body is prohibited, but the movable decorative body is different from a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body is late in operation order). When the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) or the movable decorative body which requires a short restoring operation is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. The processing (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibition. This is because, for example, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC occurs. This is because if the operation can be completed during the period, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be performed in a normal state.

  The timing at which a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the occurrence of the RTC state, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. The timing may be different.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable performance]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (the peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state in which the specific state has not occurred), the pachinko machine 1 responds to a symbol change. When the restoration operation timing to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol change) arrives, a process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be executed. However, if such a restoration process is executed irrespective of the state of the effect, it is annoying, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may decrease.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned “start time of symbol change” is set as “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol change”. Then, as shown in FIG. 376, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol change is started, an effect pattern corresponding to the symbol change is set, and the set effect pattern is changed. Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the processing for changing the effect and the design change are started, the identification is performed based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the design change. For performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, it is assumed that a “specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect development relating to the “specific effect pattern in which the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation appears in which the processes to be performed are performed in parallel.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern is executable, the effect pattern (relative expectation degree) which has a direct relationship between the specific effect pattern and the specific effect pattern. Low effect pattern) is prepared. Then, in an effect pattern having a paired relationship (an effect pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation" is performed. You. In this way, by preparing two effect patterns that are in a stage relationship with each other in effect (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body, and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body), at the specific timing tm2 (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having an effect of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate). Can be executed, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by such effect.

  However, if the process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation is still in an execution state at the time when the specific timing tm2 comes after the symbol change is started, the specific timing It becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a state where it cannot perform the staging operation even though tm2 has arrived. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol fluctuation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 376, of the effect patterns, the effect on the “specific effect pattern that allows the specific movable decorative body to be operated at the specific timing tm2” and the predetermined progress for the specific movable decorative object When a situation in which the process of performing the restoration operation (the restoration process based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) appears in parallel, the “specific time” is reached until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state. The process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body "is terminated. In addition, various methods can be adopted as “the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body”, but in the following description, “ Until the predetermined upper limit number is reached, a process of repeatedly performing a restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body "will be described.

  More specifically, with respect to the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time it takes to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is resolved and the original movable position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative object, the predetermined restoration operation is performed for the specific movable decorative object. The timing tx at which the “process for performing the operation” is completed also arrives at a relatively early stage, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored) is completed. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is postponed so as to shift to a later time. At the latest, when the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but the restoration operation is performed once more, the timing exceeds the timing tx. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration state is terminated. Become like

  In addition, when it is assumed that performing the restoring operation for a specific movable decorative body once requires x time, one symbol is set such that a relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. An upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and when the upper limit number n is reached, even if the restoration (restoration) has not been performed, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed. By doing so, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state.

  According to such a configuration, the effect development relating to the specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative object to operate at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative object are respectively performed in parallel. When such a situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, at the specific timing tm2, the specific movable decorative body is restored. Since the movable decorative body is brought into a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if the specific movable decorative body is in a stop state at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, this may trigger some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, it is possible to give a hope that the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (when the effect of the movable decorative body is that the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light). .

  However, in actuality, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, the specific movable decorative body has an effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the gaming interest.

  As the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result in which an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When not provided, it is possible to exemplify a "display effect that appears in advance in such a manner as to inspire whether or not a specific display result appears", and the specific movable decorative body is " Which operates based on the effect received by the operation by the player (or the effect is received but does not operate) "," the effect of causing a specific display that prompts the operation by the player "to appear. Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, the specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state (restoration) at the timing tx at which “the process of performing the predetermined restoring operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed. It is assumed that the status is changed to normal. As described above, at the start of the change (or at the “restoring operation time” such as the last stop of the symbol), the specific timing tm2 in the symbol change arrives under the condition that the symbol has been restored to the normal state even if it is in the abnormal state. Then, at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to perform a specific movable decorative body in a staging operation.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot return (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stop state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing arrives. Becomes That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit fluctuation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to include a movable decorative body that performs a multi-step movement with a more complicated structure, and such a movable decorative body requires a longer time until its restoration processing is completed. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, or an effect pattern having a relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol change to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, each time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this leads to hasten deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. It could be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol variation starts, the main control MPU 1310a side. When the special effect pattern is selected based on the transmitted command, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol change corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), the specific movable pattern is required. Control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and (d), as a result of the timing tm11 at which the design change is started in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the production progress according to the special production pattern And a process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (a period until the symbol is stopped). Does not end the restoration process and continues this.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the state is restored (restored) to the original position only by executing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoring process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoring process for the specific movable decorative body is performed over the entire period.

According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, a restoration process in a more full-scale mode (for example, a normal diagnosis is performed even after the restoration, aiming at a time when the special effect pattern is performed). Since the special effect pattern can be performed, the special effect pattern functions as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player is also carefully restored as described above. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with peace of mind while watching the situation. In this regard, in this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the player loses in the big hit determination.
In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as “the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and (d), the timing tm11 comes when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Thus, when the special effect pattern is performed, the restoring process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and continued after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that “even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration processing must be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated. Therefore, the restoration process can be performed in a more full-scale manner.

  However, at timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case where the effect of the holding is not interrupted and an effect pattern corresponding to a new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation timing (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) comes. At this time, if it is assumed that the restoration process started at timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not being located at the original position). Will be done. When the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the processing content naturally has a limit, and failure to adequately cope with abnormalities may accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (b) and (d), the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes, when the next restoring operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing) has arrived, the restoring process in the execution state is not terminated but is continued over the next restoring operation timing. . According to such a configuration, even if the suspension during the execution of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is in any state, the message “Even though the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, The restriction that the restoration process must be performed for each unit in which the symbol change is performed is removed, so that a more full-scale restoration process can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 377 (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol change being started when the restoration process is being performed on a specific movable decorative body, the new symbol change is started. As an example, there may be a case where a “specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in a symbol change” appears. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) to (c), the processing is started from timing tm11 irrespective of the state of the game or the effect (and the state of the restoration, etc.) after the end of the special effect pattern. As for the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 in the next symbol change arrives (more preferably, It is desirable to end the processing within a time shorter than the time required for performing the predetermined effect). Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of the timings tm11 to tm12 (the time required for digestion of the special effect pattern), the specific movement can be performed for a relatively long time until the time of the timings tm12 to tx ends. The restoration process for the decorative body can be continuously performed.

  After the special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is terminated, if a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed, the situation is changed. After the restoring process is finished within a new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoring / diagnosis) and straddling three or more symbol variations (effect patterns) (after one restoring process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process extends over two or more restoration operation timings).

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 377, at the timing tx at which “the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and becomes normal. It is assumed that the state is reached. As described above, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol change start timing), a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally can be obtained. However, this can be restored, and a specific movable decorative body can be effected at a specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing), at timing tx, a specific movable decorative body is abnormal. If the state cannot be restored (restored), the symbol change is terminated from the timing tx and the stopped state is maintained until the next restoring operation time further arrives. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit fluctuation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body has not been executed, each time the restoration operation timing (in this case, the symbol change start time) arrives, the identification is performed. In some cases, the restoration process for the movable decorative body is started many times. If the specific movable decorative body is broken to such an extent that it cannot be restored, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced by simply repeating the restoration process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, the number of times of execution of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number. However, when the restoration is not performed from the abnormal state, it is desirable that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, the special effect patterns for a predetermined upper limit number and the special effect patterns are displayed. One restoration process may be continued so as to straddle the next effect pattern. That is, in this case, since the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body has been brought into the abnormal state, it has not been restored from the abnormal state. Even when the “+1” th restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued without ending. As described above, regarding the aspect in which one restoration process is continued over the restoration operation timing, the predetermined upper limit number is set regardless of how many times the restoration operation timing arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat the count as a single restoration process so as not to end it, so as not to prevent the restoration process from being performed in a more full-scale manner.

  By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation timing corresponding to a symbol change), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back front decoration unit 3100, In addition to the middle movable effecting unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain), and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side, it is basically executed in the manner described above. You. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 operably provided and the sword decorative body 5001) are used. The restoration (return) may be performed in a mode different from that of the above-described specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body).

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbol change is performed, the operation operation giving effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is performed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. Then, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, "the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341 (f))" “Process for generating an effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))” and further “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”, bar display indicating remaining time of effect reception period) ) (See FIG. 341 (f)) "). Then, as a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of being moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, pushed in operation) and the effect is received, based on the effect reception, the “special decorative member SDY (draft material) ) And a process of producing a change in display content (see FIG. 341 (g)) and a process of effecting a panel-side movable decorative body (see FIG. 341 (g)). Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body effected in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 376 and 377.

  However, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, and is not performed normally. While being executable when in the state, the “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001” and the “processing for prompting the operation” are in the normal state. It can be executed both in a certain time and in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player who has viewed the “display prompting the operation” and the effect is received, “Processing for effecting a production operation of a board-side movable decorative body such as a specific decoration member SDY (draft material)” and “processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600” are performed. In addition, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 is subjected to an external force by the operation of the player and the operation part is operated, thereby causing the abnormal state. May naturally disappear.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 operably provided or a sword decorative body 5001) which is also used as an operating means is provided. In the case of an abnormal state, a return process of applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377). Restoration processing) at the respective timings of “the above-described restoration operation timing (in this case, the start timing of the symbol change)” and “after the effect is received by the player in the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. Executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decorative body is aimed at timing such as at the time of starting or stopping the pattern change (more precisely, after starting or stopping). While the process of restoring the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing such as the start and stop of the symbol variation, but also another unique timing (during the variation period) Of these, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) is aimed at a timing at which an external force (operation by a player) is applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation by the player) and the abnormal state may be eliminated. ) Is restored, it is expected that the original position of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in the abnormal state can be quickly restored. .

  FIG. 378 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 378, an effect pattern of the movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 during the period in which the symbol variation is performed) is executed. It is assumed that “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is located at the operation position, “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”, or effect reception period) When the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 and the effect is received (timing tm22) during the execution of the bar display indicating the remaining time of the game (timing tm22), the "sword decoration body 5001" The process of effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body and the process of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 378, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 376 and 377 is rendered as a board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the performance.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 378, at this timing tm22 when the effect is received, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 does not return to the original position, and the specific movable decoration that has performed the effect operation based on the effect reception. It is assumed that another abnormality has occurred in the body (the board-side movable decorative body) and cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, the judgment that the abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and the judgment that the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body are respectively performed, but the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying the determination is performed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is performed along with the specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notification is performed. This means that the sword decoration 5001 is "placed in a place where the player can reach it (the door frame 3)". If the sword decoration 5001 is notified of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)", and this is an abnormal state. This is because, as a result, the player cannot help anything, and merely emphasizes that the mobile effect is not being executed, which may promote a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 378, while performing the “process of performing a specific movable decorative body effecting operation” based on the reception of the effect at timing tm22, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body. Although it will occur, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing the process for causing the display content on the effect display device 1600 to change as usual. It is desirable to make it difficult. Then, after this, the effect pattern of the movable operation system will be developed while both the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body remain in the abnormal state, and the pattern change will be stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, at the timing tm23, the already-suspended symbol variation is immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is used. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 376 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol change. ), The timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration state). As described above, the process is ended before the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, at the start of symbol change) for the sword decoration 5001, the "specific movable decoration" A process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on the body "and a process of applying (driving force) such that at least a part of the operation is returned to the original position in a parallel manner. In addition, the timing at which the “processing for causing the sword decoration 5001 to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 regardless of the restoration state (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it starts).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated and the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since the continuation does not occur, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of annoying when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is started / terminated and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is started / terminated are the same. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  As for “the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 377, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue even after the special effect pattern ends, the design fluctuations in the hold state after the end of the special effect pattern are immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoring operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled, the process (one restoring process) can be executed without ending the process. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation ”can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 377). That is, in this case, the “processing for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform the predetermined restoration operation” also crosses the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) when a special effect pattern appears. It is executed in the form of the following, but before the time required to reach the timing tm2 from the start of the next symbol change, the process is finished regardless of the restoration state. Become.

  After the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into the abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, the effect pattern is straddled over a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern. One restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 may be continued.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that at the timing tx, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 are respectively ended, but the restoration has failed. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is advanced while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. The symbol change is stopped at the timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific movable decorative body is subjected to an external force (no driving force by a motor or the like is applied) within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state), the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body during the period from the timing tx to tm2 is an abnormal situation itself. In such low reliability situations, even if a specific movable decorative body performs a staging operation, there is a high possibility that it will fail, so it is important not to do this to reduce the decline in gaming interest. It can be said that it is desirable in doing.

Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 has failed and the state becomes abnormal again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed.
That is, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the notification is performed each time the abnormal state is returned again, a misunderstanding is given as if the player is liable that the abnormal state is not resolved. Because it is possible, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so as to encourage the repair work by the player. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are restored by the restoration processing triggered by any restoration operation timing (here, the symbol variation start timing) arriving after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state. And now, only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again. As shown in FIG. 378, the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is removed. Assuming that the effect has been accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the operation of the player, the sword decoration 5001 is thereafter replaced with the original. Driving force can be applied so as to return to the original position (to stay at the original position). At this time, in consideration of the fact that the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect, a period in which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (one time) Is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body returns to the original position). It is desirable to end the process before the return is performed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being performed. However, in view of the fact that the possibility of return of the sword decoration body 5001 that has not been able to be restored by such an external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decoration body 5001 has been returned to its original position. When the process of applying the driving force to return to the normal state (return operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is restored to the original state until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is finished. The process of applying the driving force to return to the position is continuously performed (return operation for the sword decoration 5001 is performed again) so that the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, so that the player can recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if the return process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the return processing (return to the original position) to the sword decoration 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter, Thus, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the normal state, and the symbol change is stopped at the timing tm26.

  Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 378, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is set for the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol change), a restoration operation timing (timing after the effect is received) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state due to direct contact by the player, but even if the abnormal state occurs, the original state is maintained. Since an opportunity to return to the position is given more and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying the driving force, a mode of returning using at least external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is eliminated. The likelihood of a game becoming more entertained can be suppressed, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation of the player has been started. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration process performed when the timing (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decoration 5001 is returned using the external force (operation by the player) in the process, it is necessary to perform the process differently from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is performed in a simple manner such that the return process is completed within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, the recovery process becomes more full-scale at the next recovery operation timing. It is desirable to perform a proper return process.

In the example shown in FIG. 378, the restoration operation timing (in this case, the symbol change start timing) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed by that number of times. Nevertheless, even if a new restoration operation time (in this case, a symbol change start time) arrives and the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started, the movable state is set. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the operation of the player, after the effect is received, the sword decoration body 5001 is removed. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the effect is received is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration 5001 that has not been able to be restored by external force (operation by the player) is increased. It can be said that it is desirable to execute the process without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force has been abandoned.
Therefore, “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”), and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period (See FIG. 341 (f)) ", it is important that the process is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without any external force is abandoned.

  In addition, the first operation opportunity is provided so that the sword decoration 5001 is pushed in the state where the sword decoration body 500 is located at the operation position (operates to the specific detection position), and is pushed when the sword decoration body 5001 is at the original position (to the specific detection position). If the operation means is provided so that the second operation opportunity may be given to the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state, the effect may be received even if the effect is received at the second operation opportunity. The driving force for returning to the original position is not provided, and the driving force for returning to the original position is provided only when an effect reception is generated at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the operation amount of the operation part is relatively small, and it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally low.

  In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation by the player, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily performed. It may not be executed on the condition that it has been performed, and may be executed, for example, after the end of the effect reception period.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 374 to 378, the symbol change start time (and further, the timing after accepting the effect) is exemplified as the restore operation timing corresponding to the symbol change. The timing may be a predetermined timing that comes at least on condition that the symbol change is executed, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. If the symbol change stop time is used as the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change, the restoring process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol change is stopped. The restored processing that is performed is terminated before the timing tm2 in the held specific effect pattern arrives, or executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern that is stored and consumed. Will be performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable that the game can be played so that the frequency of appearance of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than in the case of (1).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) or a specific movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 377, the abnormal state is maintained for a period after the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol change. , One restoration process for the movable decorative body can be continuously executed. However, in this case, even if a new restoring operation timing (for example, a symbol change start timing) arrives while one restoring process is continuously executed, the restoring process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is newly performed. Since it is not started, it is continued without ending one restoration process that is already in the execution state, so that the movable decoration body different from the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is When the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state, there is a problem as to when to start the restoration processing for the other movable decorative body.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 377, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after a new restoration operation timing (the next (The start time of symbol fluctuation). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body before the new restoration operation timing (start timing of the next symbol change) arrives after the timing tm11 has elapsed. In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both methods 1 and 2”, or “both methods 1 and 3” is employed to restore the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

  Method 1: At least when there is a relationship such as “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body”, When a new restoring operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoring process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoring operation time (start time of the next symbol change) ), The restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed is treated as being effective, and the other movable decorative body is triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing). The restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and the restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are performed simultaneously. There is no concern that interference occurs between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of the movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: At least when there is a relationship such as “both a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration operation is not started. After one restoration process for the movable decorative body is completed, another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is determined based on the arrival of the new restoring operation time (the start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process is not yet executed is treated as being effective. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body), the process waits for one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body to be completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies will be expected.

  Method 3: At least when there is a relationship such as “both a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoring operation time (a next symbol change start time). Without performing the restoration process on the other movable decorative body (frame-side movable body). The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration body that is not in the execution state yet. Will be treated as invalid for any of the restoring processes for the specified movable decorative body, and unless a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, unless one restoring process for the specific movable decorative body is completed. No processing is performed for the abnormal state. In other words, in this case, even if another movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected that the speed at which these movable decorative bodies deteriorate is reduced.

(Operation check period of operation button)
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), an operation by driving the operation button 410 or the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) is possible as an effect corresponding to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, the effect at the time of operation using the drive-type operation means (the effect at which the degree of expectation related to the privilege provision is suggested by the drive as well as the operation) can be executed. However, even though such an operation effect can be performed, if an abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the operation effect can be experienced by the player in a manner intended by the designer. There is a concern that it will be difficult to make the game fun, and as a result, the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, as a part of the maintenance regarding whether or not the operation-time effect can be performed, an operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By confirming that the player can experience the operation effect in the mode intended by the designer, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Specifically, an operation check period in which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be checked will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, for convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation buttons 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described. However, a similar operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword decoration 5001 in the sword rendering operation unit 5000. Note that the operation check period for the operation button 410 and the operation check period for the sword decoration 5001 may be generated in parallel or may be sequentially generated. In addition, in order to realize a more reliable checking operation for each member, no overlapping period is provided between the operation checking period for the operation button 410 and the operation checking period for the sword decoration 5001 (a period overlap is avoided). ), It is preferable to generate them sequentially. FIG. 379 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation check periods (arbitrary operation check period and automatic operation check period).

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being protruded by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push the operation button 410 to the normal position, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projecting state to a normal state. In the case where the operation button 410 is not operated to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 operates the normal operation button 410 by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor determines that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be located in a protruding state. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is protruded by the protrusion position sensor. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 has been pressed. By the detection of the press detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. .

Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided.
In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, during execution of the effect on the game board effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly pressed according to the instruction, The pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state during the execution of the effect on the game board effect display device 1600. By pressing the protruding operation button 410 to a normal state according to an instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. The effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher degree of expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with more expectation than in a normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 379, in the optional operation checking period of the operation checking period, the operation check is performed to determine whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state where the operation button 410 protrudes from the normal state (the player or the hall). It can be realized by the administrator). Specifically, when a condition for generating an operation check period described later is satisfied, an arbitrary operation check period is started, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is maintained for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) as the occurrence period. The press detection status (operation detection status) is monitored, and when the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 is projected based on the press detection (operation detection). To change. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation check period is satisfied (while the arbitrary operation check period is generated), the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is not detected for a predetermined time. In this case, the optional operation check period is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the occurrence of the arbitrary operation check period. It is possible to provide confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, and to execute and provide an operation effect using the operation button 410 with confidence.

  Then, when it is detected that the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed and the normal state is pressed before the predetermined time has elapsed after the operation button 410 is pressed to be in the protruded state. Then, the normal state is returned again, and the arbitrary operation check period is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the pressing of the protruding operation button 410 is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcibly driven to the normal state by the drive after the predetermined time elapses. Will be returned. After the arbitrary operation check period has been generated, the operation button 410 is pressed down to protrude, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation check period ends. In such a case, unnecessary time until a predetermined time elapses after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be prevented.

  The above-described operation check period (arbitrary operation check period) is generated when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In the present example, as a condition for generating the operation confirmation period, the generation condition is satisfied at the time of execution of the demonstration effect, in order to avoid occurrence of an operation-time effect. Specifically, in the demonstration effect, there is no ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain time after the end of the effect set in the fluctuation pattern, and the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not performed. This is an effect of waiting for the customer when it is not started (information on the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received by the peripheral control MPU 1511a for a certain period of time), and is suitable for avoiding overlapping with the operation effect. As described above, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect and generating the arbitrary operation check period of the check operation period, the boring time that the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not started can be reduced by the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time of whether or not is normally detected and operated.

  Note that the demonstration effect is started when the main control MPU 1310a issues an instruction (eg, demonstration effect) when there is no ball entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for a certain period of time while the symbol game is not progressing. The confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) may be generated on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side by transmitting the start command) to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side and receiving it. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) from the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and by receiving the instruction, the peripheral control MPU 1511a side performs a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation check). Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding the overlap with the production at the time of operation and confirming whether the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. Thus, the effect at the time of operation using the operation button 410 can be executed and provided with more assurance.

  An LED (each LED of the decoration member 432 in the operation button) is mounted on the operation button 410 to determine whether or not an arbitrary operation check period has occurred, and to determine the progress of the arbitrary operation check period (optional operation check period). (The state of the operation button 410 in FIG. 3), the light emission mode is changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, when the optional operation check period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is set to a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined light amount (a confirmation period light emission mode A indicating that the arbitrary operation is possible). ) To emit light. Thus, it is possible to notify outside that the arbitrary operation check period has occurred and that the pressing of the operation button 410 has been requested. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed down and protruded after the arbitrary operation check period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is the same color as when the operation button 410 has not been pressed even once. However, the light is emitted in a mode in which the light amount is increased by one step (a light emission mode B for a confirmation period indicating that an arbitrary operation is being performed). Thus, even after the operation button 410 is pressed to make it protrude, it is possible to notify the outside that the operation button 410 is required to be further pressed. Thereafter, when the operation button 410 is brought into a normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 is set to at least once until at least the remaining arbitrary operation check period (predetermined time) elapses. The light is emitted in the mode (lighting mode C for the confirmation period indicating that the arbitrary operation has been completed) in which the light amount is weaker than that of the above-described light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period, while having the same color as when the button is not pressed. Thus, it is possible to notify the outside that the checking operation in the arbitrary operation checking period has been normally performed. The operation button 410 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner even when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred. For example, the operation button 410 may be caused to emit light in a mode different from any of the operation confirmation period light emission modes A to C. And the like.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 379, after a predetermined standby period has elapsed after the end of the arbitrary operation check period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing, and the operation button 410 is moved to a normal position. There is provided an automatic operation check period for checking the origin so as to be located at. In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and the operation is returned from the protruding state to a normal state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to know that the operation button 410 is operating at a normal position. According to this, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates in a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation button 410 from being shifted when an effect using the operation button 410 is executed.

  Further, the arbitrary operation check period is set to a period longer than the automatic operation check period. Specifically, as described above, the predetermined time of “10 seconds” is set as the arbitrary operation check period, whereas the automatic operation check period is a short time of “5 seconds” as the time required for a series of operations. Is set. During the automatic operation check period, the operation button 410 operates to check the origin without being pressed by the player. In other words, the operation check of the drive system automatically proceeds. On the other hand, during the optional operation check period, if the player does not press down, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the protruding state, and unless the player presses down in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation check period elapses. For this reason, by setting the arbitrary operation check period longer than the automatic operation period, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 is not missed and to change the appearance state of the operation button 410 in the protruding state by driving. It is possible to let players and hall managers check carefully over a long period of time without any conditions, but to quickly end the drive system operation check (automatic operation period) that does not require such a long-term check It is possible, and it is possible to increase the efficiency of a series of checking operations of the driving operation means.

  In the standby period between the arbitrary operation check period and the automatic operation check period, the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 causes the frame side lens 417 and the second A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (each LED of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423) is turned on. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and can accept a player's operation when presenting an effect. In addition, in the peripheral confirmation period, when one of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are lit. The manner in which the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b are lit (e.g., the manner of light emission such as brightness and color) differs depending on the situation. For this reason, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it can be checked whether or not the press is normally recognized, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button can be checked. It is possible to confirm whether the two-button decoration part 411b is normally lit or not, and to confirm the drive-type operating means itself by a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). Not only that, it is also possible to execute the confirmation of the related members around it.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation check period and is not in the protruding state, the peripheral check period may not be provided thereafter. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b do not light up, and a series of operation check periods is shortened. It becomes.

  Further, before a series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the staging operation unit 400 operates by operating the operation button 410. I have. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. For this reason, in the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 normally vibrates. In addition, by generating a series of operation check periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration check period, it is possible to prevent the check of the series of operation check periods from being hindered by the vibration of the vibration check period, and to efficiently perform various check operations. realizable.

  When the predetermined protrusion start condition that is satisfied in the progress of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. There is a case where the normal state is not detected and the operation button 410 is not in a normal position. As a cause, for example, when returning the operation button 410 to the normal state when the predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, if a problem occurs, or the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state. And so on. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 380 (A), during a period other than a series of operation check periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of a symbol game (at the start of an effect based on the variation pattern), and a special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the time of the end of the fluctuation of the symbol (at the end of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above (the timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods). It is determined whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in a normal position) or not (if not in a normal position). Is According to this, even when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing irrespective of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern Is prevented from being mistaken as to whether or not the operation button 410 is operated as part of the effect based on. Further, even after the operation using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates normally, and a decrease in interest in the effect occurs. To prevent them from doing so.

  In addition, as described above, if it is set to generate an arbitrary operation check period of the check operation period by using the time of execution of the demonstration effect, the operation button 410 is abnormal when starting the demonstration effect. When the operation button 410 is in a protruding state and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation confirmation periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), the operation check period even at the start timing of the series of operation check periods Is performed, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is performed with priority, and the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (returns to the normal position). Alternatively, a series of operation check periods may be started in a delayed manner based on the above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 380 (B), in a series of operation check periods, the special game corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts changing (at the start of the effect based on the changing pattern), and the symbol game ends. At the time of the end of the change of the special symbol (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), it is not determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). Even in a protruding state (not a normal position), control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state is not performed at that time. This is to give priority to the operation check of whether or not the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded during the arbitrary operation check period described above, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation check period This is for maintaining the protruding state of 410 so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. In this way, when the state in which the operation button 410 abnormally protrudes during the operation check period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation check period in the same manner as when the player presses and protrudes. Control for returning the button 410 will be performed. Note that if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to a normal state before the predetermined period as the operation check period has elapsed, the abnormal state can be maintained without waiting for the predetermined period to elapse. The protruding operation button 410 is returned to a normal state.

(Abnormal detection of decorative sword)
Next, although the blade part 5011 (see FIGS. 278 to 281) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword rendering operation unit 5000 described above is in a state where it should be in a sword-pulling state, an abnormality in a case where it is not in a sword-pulling state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 381 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 and the abnormality detection.

The sword decoration body 5001 can be changed between a sword delivery state in which the blade part 5011 is stored and a drawn state in which the blade part 5011 is exposed (second sword drawn state). In the above-described effect example, the state between the sword-pulling state and the sword-pulling state (first sword-pulling state) is used as the effect using the sword decoration 5001. Not used. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 is provided with a sword position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in a sword state, and a sword position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in a sword state. ing.
Further, the sword decoration 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the drawn state to the cut-out state. In this example, the sword-pulling state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can pull out the blade portion 5011, and the sword-pulling state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot pull out the blade portion 5011. .

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the sword decoration 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 381 (A), in the effect using the sword decoration 5001, an operation reception period during which the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-put state can be removed is generated within the effect time. During the operation reception period, the blade unit 5011 in the sword-pulling state is drawn in accordance with an instruction in the display area or the like of the gaming-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “draw sword”) or the like, thereby providing a predetermined effect. The result can be obtained. When the player removes the sword decoration 5001 and puts the blade 5011 in the sword-drawing state during the operation reception period, control for returning the blade 5011 to the sword-delivery state at the end of the production time is performed. Done. If the player does not remove the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period and the blade section 5011 is kept in the sword-pulled state, the sword-drawing state of the blade section 5011 is completed at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. The effect using the sword decoration 5001 is an effect that has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than at least the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation buttons 410 described above. I have. That is, when the effect using the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the sword decoration 5001 can be removed with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

  As shown in FIG. 381 (B), the blade section 5011 should be in the sword-putting state outside the operation receiving period, but a period other than the operation receiving period and not in the sword-putting state is a predetermined period (in this example, (2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, and sword restoration control for returning the sword body 5011 to the sword state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 during the period other than the operation reception period, when the blade section 5011 is in the sword-drawing state or between the sword-drawing state and the sword-drawing state. It has become. In this example, the detection state of the sword placement position sensor is turned OFF (the blade section 5011 is not in the sword placement state) from the detection state of the sword placement position sensor until the sword placement state in the predetermined period (other than the operation reception period). Measurement is not started).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 381 (C), during the operation reception period, the blade section 5011 should be in the sword-inserted state unless the player removes the sword-decorated body 5001, but during the non-sword-inserted state. If it is determined that a predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds) has been reached, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001, and sword-box restoration control for returning the blade section 5011 to the katana state is performed. Done. That is, during the operation reception period, when the player removes the sword decoration body 5001, the blade section 5011 is positioned in the sword removal state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword placement position sensor is in the ON state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is in the sword placement state). . In the present example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade 5011 to the sword-storing state in the sword-storing restoration control is set to “0.5 seconds”.

In addition, the operation reception period is set to a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001. In the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword-inserted state is performed. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and in the remaining period, the player can pull out the sword decoration 5001.
Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of drawing the sword decoration 5001 from being hindered.

  As described above, whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is not at a normal position) is determined at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the change pattern). At the start of the demonstration), at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), only at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above. That is, during the operation reception period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether the operation button 410 is not in a normal position). Not. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is also performed during an operation reception period during which the sword decoration 5001 can be removed. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period, it is possible to avoid as much as possible a situation in which the player cannot remove the sword decoration 5001. The effect using the sword decoration 5001 is an effect that has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than at least the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation buttons 410. In this way, it is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the effect of the effect with such a high expectation.

  In the present example, a period during which the blade section 5011 is not in the sword-arriving state has reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), except for a case where the player has removed the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, but only when the blade section 5011 is not in the sword-put state at the start of the operation reception period, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. You may make it determine. For example, at the start of the operation reception period, the blade portion 5011 is in the sword-put state, and after the start of the operation reception period, it is not known whether the player should completely remove the sword decoration 5001 and the blade portion 5011 is removed. There is a possibility that the sword decoration body 5001 may be left unattended for a predetermined period in the state between the sword decoration state and the sword decoration state. .

  Further, in performing an instruction on the sword decoration of the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area or the like of the gaming-side effect display device 1600, the instruction is continuously performed regardless of occurrence or elimination of the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 during the operation reception period. It may be executed. For example, during the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, sword restoration control for returning the blade part 5011 to the sword state is performed. In the “until you do” and “the remaining period of the operation reception period after returning the blade unit 5011 to the sword-arranged state”, the instruction in the display area or the like of the gaming-side effect display device 1600 is continued. Further, if the player removes the sword decoration 5001 in accordance with the instruction before “until the sword restoration control is completed”, the sword body 5011 is in the sword-drawing state, and the sword restoration is performed. The control is forcibly terminated, and the instruction is terminated. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 from hindering the timing of participating in the effect of drawing the sword decoration body 5001.

  In addition, although the sword restoration control for returning the blade section 5011 to the sword state in the present example is performed, it is possible that the blade section 5011 cannot return to the sword state due to a foreign matter being caught or the like. In this case, the one-cycle sword restoration control which should be completed in "0.5 seconds" may be repeated a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the blade unit 5011 to the sword-storing state will continue beyond the operation reception period. In such a case, the operation is performed while the sword-snap restoration control is being performed. The result effect may be derived at the end of the reception period, and the sword restoration control may be continued after the result effect is derived. Thereby, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 cannot be eliminated, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the interest in the game is reduced without hindering the progress of the effect.

(Operation button abnormality judgment timing)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 382 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation buttons 410 and the movable decoration provided on the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that cannot be operated by the player.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. ) And can be changed to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being protruded by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push the operation button 410 to the normal position, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 382 (A), at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), and at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (the change pattern). At the time of the start of the demonstration effect described above, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state without the predetermined protrusion start condition being satisfied, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not in a normal position). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in a normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Is returned to the normal state. As described above, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, since the normal state is returned at least at the start of the change of the special symbol, an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the change pattern. In this case, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered.

  On the gaming board 5, around the gaming board side effect display device 1600, the back lower movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (not touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) around the gaming-side effect display device 1600 and a gaming-side effect display device. It can be changed to an operation state (exposed position) displayed on the front of the display area 1600. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operation state to an operation state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  It should be noted that each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear underside movable rendering unit 3100, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back left movable rendering unit 3300, the back upper middle movable rendering unit 3400, and the back lower front movable rendering unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting an operation state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the rear-facing rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the rear left movable production unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the lower back front movable production unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating state and the operating state.

  As shown in FIG. 382 (B), at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), and at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (the change pattern). At the time of the start of the demonstration effect described above, at the time of the start of the demonstration effect described above, the predetermined operation start condition should not be satisfied and the movable decorative body should be located in the non-operation state. It is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position). If it is determined that the movable decorative body is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Judgment is performed, and control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operation state is performed. As described above, when the movable decorative body is not in the inactive state due to the occurrence of the abnormality, since the movable decorative body is returned to the inactive state at least at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect using the movable decorative body as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern. Is performed, the movable decorative body does not move, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from being lost. Further, during the performance of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, if the movable decorative body is still positioned in front of the display area of the gaming-side effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the visual recognition of the display area is hindered. However, such a situation can be prevented by returning to the non-operation state at least at the start of the change of the special symbol.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and at the time of controlling the normal state or the protruding state, the change to that state can be hindered by the player, whereas the movable decorative body is The member cannot be touched by the player, and the player cannot hinder the change to that state at the timing of controlling the state to the non-operation state or the operation state. Therefore, the operation button 410 is more likely to cause an abnormality than the movable decorative body. In this regard, the operation button 410 increases the chances of abnormality determination for determining whether an abnormality has occurred compared to the movable decorative body, so that even if the operation button 410 has an abnormality, It is possible to return to the normal position. Therefore, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern is performed. It can be prevented from being hindered.

  In addition, as an effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, and an effect using a movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation buttons 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, when the operation button 410 is controlled to a normal state or a protruding state, a malfunction occurs in the operation button 410. The possibility of occurrence of an abnormality increases. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination for determining whether an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. For this reason, even when the operation button 410 is frequently used, when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the abnormality from hindering the participation in the effect. Can be prevented.

(Abnormal operation of operation buttons in the operation effect)
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384, of an operation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400. FIG. 383 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. FIG. 384 is an operation effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. 5 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 in FIG.

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being protruded by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push the operation button 410 to the normal position, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projecting state to a normal state. In the case where the operation button 410 is not operated to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 operates the normal operation button 410 by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor determines that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be located in a protruding state. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is protruded by the protrusion position sensor. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 has been pressed. By the detection of the press detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. .

Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided.
The effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher degree of expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with more expectation than in a normal state.

  First, at the time of performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 383 (A), when the operation button 410 is determined to be in a normal state (a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state is determined. 410 is changed to a protruding state. In the operation accepting period, as an instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the projecting state, an instruction by display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, A display that simulates the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of “press the protruding operation button!”, And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, a voice of “press the protruding operation button!”) Are performed in combination.

In the operation reception period described above, by pressing the protruding operation button 410 to a normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived.
As described above, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 383 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not in a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 has been operated, and the state in which the operation button 410 is abnormally projected is maintained. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality occurs. The instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is to inform the player that the position is the same as the regular projecting, though it is an abnormal projecting. (For example, a display that duplicates the operation button 410 that is in a protruding state, a message display that “This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying about it!”), Or a voice instruction from a speaker (for example, , "This is a protruding real thing! Press the operation button without worrying!" As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation of changing the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is not performed. It is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the certain operation button 410 is being performed or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and furthermore, the operation in the protruding state. There is a possibility that the player may hesitate to operate the button 410. However, by performing the display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 or the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation by the sound from the speaker, the operation button 410 at least protruding from the display or the sound is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the effect used is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the degree of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those having different effect contents as described above, and that the player is informed that the position is the same as the regular protrusion although the protrusion is abnormal. If so, the directed effects A and B may be configured with the same effect contents.

  Also, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 has an abnormality, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to a normal state. By doing so, the press (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is reset to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. Control for returning to the state is performed. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  Next, when an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state is performed, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of the operation, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 384 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. In the operation accepting period, as an instruction effect C at the time of a normal operation for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in a normal state, an instruction by display in the display area of the gaming-side effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal operation). The operation button 410 in the state is replicated, a message "Press the operation button!" Is displayed, and a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the sound "Press the operation button!") Is combined. Is In the operation accepting period, by pressing the operation button 410 in a normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be ended.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not in a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 has been operated, and the state in which the operation button 410 is abnormally projected is maintained. In addition, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when the abnormality does not occur.
The instruction effect D for the normal operation informs the player that the current projection is not positioned at the same level as the regular projection. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the gaming-side effect display device 1600 (FIG. For example, a display that duplicates the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display of “This operation is not relevant but the operation button is pressed!”, Or a voice instruction from a speaker (for example, “This operation does not matter Press the operation button! "). As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation in which the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state occurs, but the operation button 410 is displayed on the display area of the game effect display device 1600. In addition, by performing the instruction effect at the time of the normal operation using the sound from the speaker, it is possible to recognize from the display and the sound that at least the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. . Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above may be ended. Note that the instruction effects C and D during the normal operation are not limited to those composed of different effect contents as described above, and the player can be notified that the current projection is not positioned equivalently to the regular projection. In this case, the instruction effects C and D during the normal operation may be configured with the same effect contents.

  Also, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if the operation button 410 is abnormal, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation is not performed. The button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally projected state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation acceptance period, control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed.

  As described above, in the case where an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is set within the operation reception period. When the button is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism, and is returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked. Without being locked by the mechanism, the abnormally protruding state is maintained. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state, it is determined whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. Although it is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is being performed, depending on whether the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state returns to the normal state when the operation button 410 is pressed, Can be recognized whether or not the effect is being performed.

  When an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in an abnormally protruding state other than the operation reception period is set in the same manner as in the operation reception period when executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even if the button is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this manner, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as described later, at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), At the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect at the time of the normal operation is performed during the operation reception period when the effect is performed using the operation button 410 in the normal state. However, such an instruction effect at the time of the normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state has a lower degree of expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. This is because even if the player is not able to confirm the degree of expectation for the effect due to the absence, the player hardly suffers a disadvantage.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is set to the normal state during the operation reception period when the effect using the protruding operation button 410 is executed. When pressed down, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. However, even when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism. May be prevented from being locked, and the abnormally protruding state may be maintained. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the abnormal projection occurs regardless of whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is performed. When the pressed operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not be returned to the normal state. This is because, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, by leaving a trace that the state where the operation button 410 has abnormally protruded, it is possible to prevent such an actor. Can alert you.

(Notification when an operation button error occurs)
Next, a description will be given of a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 with reference to FIG. FIG. 385 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between the operation state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. ) And can be changed to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being protruded by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push the operation button 410 to the normal position, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 385 (A), when an effect is performed using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. When the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  However, if the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, the normal state is set. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed. Note that even when the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is not performed. Done.

  Also, at the end of the operation acceptance period, even if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality despite the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state, Does not return to the state. In this manner, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the end of the operation accepting period, as described later, at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the change pattern). At the start of the effect), at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), at the time of the start of the demonstration effect described above (the timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods). Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. Done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect for notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 as described later is not performed. In other words, during the operation reception period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and it is highly likely that the operation button 410 is not intentional. An attempt is made to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence noticeable.

  On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during a period other than the operation reception period, the response is made different from when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. For example, other than the operation reception period, when the above-described demonstration effect is performed, the above-described automatic operation check period is also provided, and during the automatic operation check period, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player. The origin is checked so that the operation button 410 is located at a normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 385 (B), in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is turned off. The origin is checked by a normal position sensor so that it can be detected that it is at a normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruded state, and the operation button 410 is operated to return to the normal state from the protruded state, whereby the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism.

  However, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation check period, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality. Does not return to normal state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state, the operation button 410 that has abnormally protruded is returned to the normal state. Is repeatedly performed. If the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state at the time when the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), The automatic operation check period is ended, and after the automatic operation check period is ended, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to a normal state is not performed. In other words, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period and the abnormality continues after the automatic operation check period ends, the symbol as in the case after the end of the operation reception period described above is used. At the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), at the end of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the design game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed.

  Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period, an effect for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. Specifically, a notification by display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, a display such as "An error has occurred in the operation button") or blinking of a lamp or LED provided on the main body frame 4 (For example, the lamp / LED blinks more vigorously than in a normal effect), the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is appealed to the outside.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period, control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to a normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation check period. Not done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period, an effect is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. That is, during the period other than the operation confirmation period, even though the operation of the operation button 410 is not requested as in the automatic operation confirmation period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred by the player operating the operation button 410, Since there is a high possibility that the player has intentional intention, a mark indicating that an abnormally protruding state has occurred in the operation button 410 is left to warn such an actor.

  In this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is performed. It may be. However, in such a case, in the automatic operation check period, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appeal to the outside is suppressed rather than the effect to be notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. Thus, even after the end of the operation accepting period, the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not hindered, and the effect related to the progress of the game (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) can be noticed. it can.

(Confirmation effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative member provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 386 is a time chart showing a flow of the effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

  On the gaming board 5, around the gaming board side effect display device 1600, the back lower movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (not touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) around the gaming-side effect display device 1600 and a gaming-side effect display device. It can be changed to an operation state (exposed position) displayed on the front of the display area 1600. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operation state to an operation state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  It should be noted that each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear underside movable rendering unit 3100, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back left movable rendering unit 3300, the back upper middle movable rendering unit 3400, and the back lower front movable rendering unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting an operation state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the rear-facing rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the rear left movable production unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the lower back front movable production unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating state and the operating state.

  As shown in FIG. 386, at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), and at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (based on the change pattern). At the time of the end of the effect) and at the time of the start of the demonstration effect described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the movable operation body should be in the non-operation state without a predetermined operation start condition being satisfied. However, at those timings, it was determined whether the movable decorative body was in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and it was determined that the movable decorative body was not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position). In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control is performed to return the movable decorative body to a non-operating state.

  However, in the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body may be moved. An effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body is performed. Specifically, the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the displayed contents such as the decorative symbols and the background image are changed to non-display. Also, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is made to blink violently. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the fact that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

  In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operation state, in addition to the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, it is determined whether or not to proceed with the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. A confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600, a display such as "Press the operation button to end the abnormality notification and continue the game" is displayed. Unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also the display contents such as the decorative design and the background image remain hidden in the display area of the gaming-side effect display device 1600. In addition, effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker are not performed according to display contents.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. To end. Then, after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but display contents such as a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600. As a result, effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker are performed according to display contents. For example, when an effect of operating the movable decorative body is performed after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, the display of the display area, the display of the lamp, Although the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker do not change, the movable decorative body does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decorative body. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game proceeds after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the inability of the movable decorative body to operate. The same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decorative body in the operation state does not return to the non-operation state but also when an abnormality such as the movable decoration body stops operating from the non-operation state. Has been done.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect in which the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, during the operation acceptance period in the effect using the operation button 410 (the period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes valid when the operation button 410 is pressed), the operation is performed. Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Also in such a case, the operation button 410 is notified by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body or a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect used is performed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that can derive a predetermined effect result without depressing the operation button 410 to operate the movable decorative body is also performed. Even when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body as described above, the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected. If there is no effect, the same effect as when no abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body can be performed.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is controlled. The effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred and the confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred are performed. May be performed. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operation state.For example, when the movable decoration body returns to the non-operation state during execution of the confirmation effect, The confirmation effect may be ended even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Operation to avoid interference of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoiding operation in the case where an abnormality has occurred in one of the plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 387 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between the operation state of the operation button cover 419 and the operation state of the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the operation button 410 in a normal state. The operation button cover 419 operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state to the closed state.

  The operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400, similarly to the operation buttons 410 other than this example. Has become. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being protruded by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push the operation button 410 to the normal position, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

In addition, an effect using the operation button 410 is set as the effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 387 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state.
When it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. In the operation reception period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state in accordance with an instruction.

  When the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation returns to the normal state, but the protruding operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. If the operation button 410 has not been pressed, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. At the end of the operation reception period, if it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the open operation button cover 419 to the closed state.

  In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is made to protrude, and the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is set to the open state, there may be a problem that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the open state. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 have a relationship of interfering with each other when operated at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be protruded without opening the operation button cover 419, the operation button 410 to be protruded and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other, and the operation button Further trouble may occur between the operation button cover 410 and the operation button cover 419. For this reason, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control is performed to avoid the interference so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 387 (B), control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. When it is determined that the operation button 410 is not present, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and the control for making the operation button 410 in the normal state protrude is not performed (the control for making the operation button 410 protrude). Is banned). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation buttons 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not become the open state at the time when the operation reception period occurs. Does not perform control to make the operation button 410 in a normal state protrude (prohibit control to make the operation button 410 protrude).

  Also, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened afterwards by the player's own touch, Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is controlled to be in the protruded state while allowing the operation button 410 to be in the protruded state. As described above, even though the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a state of interfering with each other, if the interfering state is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state. Thus, in the remaining period of the operation reception period, the protruding operation button 410 can be pressed. For this reason, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, the effect of pressing down the protruding operation button 410 by the self-help of the player is provided. Participation can be prevented from being hindered. After the protruding operation button 410 is pressed, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to a normal state. The situation in which the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented from occurring again.

  Note that, when the operation button cover 419 is not forcibly opened by the player's own finger even though the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, the normal operation is performed. The operation button 410 in the state of is protruded, but if the operation button 410 in the protruded state is not pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially turned on at the end of the operation reception period. The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, at the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Thereafter, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, the operation button Control for returning the cover 419 to the closed state is performed. This prevents the situation in which the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere again later.

  On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period and the player is left in that state thereafter, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not made to protrude. In such a case, the user cannot participate in the effect of pressing the protruding operation button 410. At the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state, so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is eliminated. And the operation button cover 419 are prevented from interfering with each other.

(Operation when an error occurs in the operation button according to the gaming state)
Next, an operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 388 is a time chart illustrating an operation state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the operation button 410 in a normal state. The operation button cover 419 operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state to the closed state.

  The operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400, similarly to the operation buttons 410 other than this example. Has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In the present example, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, and is in the normal state. The operation button 410 is located in a state in which the operation button 410 is protruded by the spring mechanism. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

  In this example, an effect using the operation buttons 410 in the normal state can be performed in the non-time saving state (normal state). In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and when the operation reception period occurs, the operation in the closed state is performed. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state can be pressed. Then, in the operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state in accordance with the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation reception period. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, only control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to the closed state is performed. Is performed. In addition, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is, as in the case other than the present example, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts changing (at the start of the effect based on the variable pattern) and when the symbol game ends. This is the timing when the fluctuation ends (when the effect based on the fluctuation pattern ends) and when the above-described demonstration effect starts.

  On the other hand, in the time reduction state, an effect using the protruding operation button 410 can be performed. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, the operation is in the protruding state. By pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. In addition, as long as it is in the time saving state, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

  In the time reduction state, the operation button cover 419 should be in an open state, and the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is returned to the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in a normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in an open state, control for returning the normal operation button 410 to a protruding state is performed. Only done.

  As described above, in the non-time reduction state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state, and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, whereas in the time reduction state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. And the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 wait at different positions in the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state, but one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is determined. When an abnormality occurs as described above, by changing the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred, when the effect using the operation button 410 at the position corresponding to the game state is performed, the operation button It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of operating the 410 from being hindered.

[18. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lighting / flashing of a lamp, display of an image, and the like. In order to enhance the interest of the game, various effects have been attempted. As described above, the gaming machine controls the plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510 which is the effect control device based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes the effect according to the game state of the game. I do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

  In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique for realizing various effect displays using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially specified in a time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with the scenario data, there is an advantage that various effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data can also include BGM designation. In this case, it is possible for the sound source IC to output the designated BGM, thereby outputting the sound corresponding to the display screen.

  However, in gaming machines, more elaborate effects are required. In the above-described related art, it was difficult to perform various effects by linking a plurality of effect devices, such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, the BGM cannot be changed while the image display according to the scenario data is being executed. When outputting a sound effect in response to a user operation during image display, the display of the image and the output of the BGM are stopped, and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect ends, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning, regardless of how far the BGM has been played, and the effect gives a feeling of strangeness. Regarding the lighting / flashing of the lamp, it is controlled by an individual program, regardless of the content of the image display, depending on the game state, and it is difficult to realize various lighting / flashing linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a main command from the main control board 1310, and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each component for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of the functions for implementing the effect control in the present embodiment, the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and outline of each function]
FIG. 389 is a functional block diagram illustrating a configuration and an outline of a function for executing effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. Effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). To explain the layers, in the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as a background and a character, and each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in a superimposed manner. Is output. As a result, for example, if only the background is different and the display (action) of the character is the same, it is possible to use a common layer for displaying the character. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of effect data (scheduler data) and improve development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and obtains effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required according to the rendering device in order to be performed in order to control the rendering in each rendering device. Data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal pattern block data” for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of “sub-effect block data” for controlling a lamp, an accessory, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each effect device is called, and the effect device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information.
Each effect device performs an operation based on the effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured as software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. Has been realized. Note that the effect control unit 5020 and another arithmetic circuit may be used, and may be configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of modules and the like that realize the above-described functions will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a driving device module 5700, and the like, as modules relating to effects. Further, an effect control unit 5020 for creating effect device control information for driving each effect device based on the main command is included.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is a 3-byte one-set information, and has a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and the mode value in order from the first byte. The main command buffer 5110 receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command and replaces it with the correct command. If it is determined, it is transferred to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information indicating the contents related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include the presence / absence of a game ball winning in the starting winning opening and the like, the result of a special figure lottery, a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and the like. When the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the output of a door and other sensors, the operation of a start lever and a stop button, the rotation and stop of a reel, the success or failure of a stop, and the like are listed. In addition, the commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included according to the model of the gaming machine and the contents of the effect.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is a command related to an effect. When it is determined that the command is related to the effect, the command is transferred to the effect control unit 5020.

  The effect control unit 5020 specifies a target layer for effect control from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, a block data number (effect block number) is obtained from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting / flashing of a lamp, operation of an accessory, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing a liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, a background, a character, an identification pattern, and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 corresponding to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and a character, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

  The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is transferred to the effect display device (game board effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated by, for example, a method of expanding character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command at a specified position on a frame buffer.

  When the effect block number is determined, sub effect block control section 5320 executes sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub-effect block data is block data for executing each effect of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub-effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data.

  The sub-effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of various effect devices, and executes the sub-effect scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data. The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at one frame interval and the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect device at 1 millisecond interval are included in the scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices. included. As described above, by providing the scheduler execution unit corresponding to the execution interval, it is possible to execute an effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, if 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly respond to a malfunction in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes the effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, as an example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lighting / flashing of a lamp, and operation of an accessory are described. explain. The effect control by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described without any particular distinction as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of the control according to the type of the effect device will be described.

  First, a description will be given of a case where an effect is produced by sound output. If the sub-effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output, and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameters. A plurality of schedulers can be activated. For example, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel by controlling the output of the BGM and the effect sound effect by different schedulers, and the sound can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs the sound source data from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, a case where an effect by a lamp is executed will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes scheduler data for ramp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the ramp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a lamp control function (for example, HP PLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. Note that a plurality of schedulers can be activated as in the case of sound output, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates the lamp drive data every cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously generate and output lamp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the output of the lamp data is output to the next operation of the lamp data generation in response to an increase in the lamp system or an increase in the lamp control processing time due to the overlapping of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, the processing related to the creation of the lamp data only needs to be completed within the processing cycle.

  Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated lamp driving data is stored in the buffer A, the buffer B stores the data for the next cycle. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and the respective lamps are turned on and off. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. Note that the same applies to the case of controlling the lighting and blinking of the LED as with the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

  Finally, a case will be described in which a driving device (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating the accessory is controlled. When the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for controlling the drive unit, the scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler for the drive unit (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for controlling the driving device (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the driving device module 5700 generates the lamp driving data based on the designated parameters. Note that a plurality of schedulers can be activated as in the case of sound output, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The drive module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In the present embodiment, the creation and output of the motor drive data are performed at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using the DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, and the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. Output. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the completion of serial transmission of all motor data, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame period Is not enough. In the present embodiment, the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission is shifted so that the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission is set to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and a latch signal is output by a DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission can be similarly set to zero. At the same time as the output of the motor drive data, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data configuration]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can take various structures. For example, a call function for capturing other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, temporarily executes another scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues processing of the original scheduler data. And run it. This makes it possible to use general-purpose effect contents in various situations, in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players may be able to find subtle differences in the contents of the performance during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general effect contents can be utilized in various situations by the call function, so that such a subtle difference can be resolved, and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. This can prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled.

  As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function for switching effect contents according to a game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the conditional branch function, determines the game state based on the main command, and executes the effect contents according to the game state. . By doing so, it is possible to cope with a variety of various game states with one scheduler data. The game state used for the conditional branch includes, for example, a result of a lottery performed during the game, presence / absence of operation of a button or the like by a player, and the like. In the case of a spinning-type gaming machine, a stopped state of a rotating reel may be used, and in a pachinko machine, a winning state of a start winning opening may be used. Further, a conditional branch may be made depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

  The effect contents after the conditional branching can also have various configurations. For example, after the conditional branch, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by a conditional branch, the process may return to the process before the branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

  As described above, the gaming machine can include various effect devices, and for example, can include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display, can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on a display device. For example, it can be constituted by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like in which characters and the like to be displayed on the screen are prepared in a bitmap.

[18-3. Basic concept of staging control]
FIG. 391 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a description will be given of a case where the main effect control is a sub-effect performed by executing scheduler data including a function, and particularly, a sound (sound) output will be described as an example.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 (the sub effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the type and number of schedulers 5502 according to the effect device at the time of effect execution. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes a function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

  The sound functions executed at the time of sound output include “PLAY” for playing back a phrase, “STOP_PH” for stopping a phrase being played back, and “VOL_PH” for setting a volume level during phrase playback. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control specified by parameters or the like is executed. When receiving the execution of the sound function, sound module 5500 generates sound source driving data and outputs the sound source driving data to VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

  The output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel is controlled by the function processed by the sound module 5500. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the description will be made on the assumption that the number of channels is 4 for easy understanding. The sound output from each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right part of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not to perform stereo output. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a specification of whether or not to repeat playback.
These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

  As described above, FIG. 391 shows the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment, taking sound (sound) output control as an example. The sub-effect scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler specified by the sub-effect block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each rendering device is called and processed by a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device.

[18-4. Data flow in staging control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of the effect control from the reception of the main command to the acquisition of the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for staging control]
FIG. 392A is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquiring data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Upon receiving the main command from main control board 1310, effect control unit 5020 analyzes the command using command analysis module 5200 and notifies effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result, as described with reference to FIG. 390.

  The effect control unit 5020, based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer for performing an effect related to the variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer for performing an effect related to the hold effect), a game instruction layer (a game instruction Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each of a communication error layer (a layer for reporting a communication error), a notification layer (a layer for performing various notifications), and an abnormality notification layer (a layer for performing abnormality notification). Acquisition of the effect block data number corresponding to each layer and update management are performed. Also, the acquired effect block data number is transferred to the effect block control unit 5040. If the effect block number is, for example, a variable pattern layer, based on the variable pattern number, a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variable pattern, a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each variable pattern, and a sub effect block data for each variable pattern Determined from the combination number table. The unit of the division of the effect block is divided into a predetermined unit (block) that is a common effect in a series of effects (for example, an effect executed from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect contents and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect in units of effect blocks based on the effect block number, it is possible to synchronize the effects by each effect device. In addition, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern layer is on the rearmost side, and the abnormality notification layer is on the frontmost side. It is a configuration for.

  When receiving the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, effect block control section 5040 controls the scheduler control section (liquid crystal effect block control section 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control section 5311, sub effect block) corresponding to each layer. The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal design block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing an effect.

  For example, when the main command is the start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start win are provided. 5053 is obtained. At the start of the change of the special symbol, a change start command or the like is transmitted, and the change pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, a command is also transmitted when an error or a warning is notified, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. In addition, by performing an effect for each layer, a plurality of effects can be simultaneously performed.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect The effect 1f scheduler is started. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When the liquid crystal design block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal design block data 5052 from the liquid crystal design block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal design block data number, the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 Starts the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol scheduler 1f scheduler, the processing of the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 is instructed to the liquid crystal module 5400. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  Upon acquiring the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053 and the like. Then, when the execution cycle is one frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler is started by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 executes the sub-effect 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-effect schedule data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. As a result, it becomes possible to create scheduler data commonly used by schedulers having different execution periods, thereby reducing the data capacity. Further, it is possible to quickly respond to a change in the execution cycle of the effect device.
In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, thereby enabling scheduler data to be shared, preventing the same kind of trouble from occurring at a plurality of locations, and realizing a reduction in data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is executed simultaneously by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 392B is a diagram illustrating the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. For the step-up notice, four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed, and by performing an effect that develops the effect contents step by step, the player is expected to see the fluctuation display result of the symbol. Suggest degree.

  In the step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the step-up 2 effect ends. The effect is similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the end of the step-up three effects and the step-up four effects, the notice effect ends.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound effect, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up effect, so four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage (stage) of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, in order to display the same lamp pattern at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  In addition, when the LCD production of the step-up notice evolves to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the current step-up notice, so that a plurality of step-up effects are simultaneously performed simultaneously. There is a period to be done. As described above, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect in the lamp effect. However, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a plurality of schedulers can execute the same scheduler data simultaneously. Has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed in each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the effect execution periods overlap.

  Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 effect starts just before the end of the step-up 1 effect. The notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). With this configuration, the same scheduler data is executed at the same time (duplicately) without defining the same scheduler data redundantly. To be able to execute.

  The sub-production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control-targeted production device, and defines it in the sub-production schedule data 5073. Instruct the processing of the specified function. Each module processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 393 is a view for explaining the flow when the scheduler data of the present embodiment is executed.
The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and controls various effect devices by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 393 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number specified by the effect block control unit 5040, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. The effect management pointers are prepared in a number corresponding to the effect number, but here, only five are exemplified. In the example of the drawing, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the head address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 393, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent the storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may have a configuration in which the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other. The scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data in the scheduler data. What is necessary is just to perform a process. Also, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search is not required, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 393, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is composed of functions and parameters in principle. The function is, as described above, a command for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module of the operation of the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify a parameter may be provided.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (drives), and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing effect control, and the lamp, sound, and motor are functions for controlling each effect device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. The specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398.

  In the example shown in FIG. 393, the “call” function is specified at the address A2. The “call” function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer. After temporarily moving to the address specified by the parameter and processing the scheduler data, the scheduler execution unit 5060 can return to the previous processing based on the saved pointer value described above.

  After the address A2, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the effect command ends these processes, the “call” returns to the specified address A2, and shifts to the process of the next address A3.

  As described above, by utilizing the “call” function, the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by the addresses A31 to A3n can be taken into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced, and the creation load can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players may be able to find subtle differences in the contents of the performance during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present invention, the general effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by calling, so that such a subtle difference can be eliminated, and it is difficult to predict a lottery result or the like. That is, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled.

  Although the “call” function can be used as described above, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as “character action number set”, “voice operation number set”, and “lamp operation number set”. This is because it merely indicates a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  In the example shown in FIG. 393, a NOP (wait) is next executed at the address A3. In the "NOP" function, the process waits for the specified number of frames and continues processing the scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As described later, in the present embodiment, the processing is repeatedly executed by a timer interrupt. Therefore, in the “NOP” function, if the value of the parameter Prm [031] is not 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 ends the scheduler data processing once without performing the subsequent processing. Then, processing for shifting to the function at the next address is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the designation of the voice action number and the like is performed using a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 392A. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are separately prepared, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. The layer specified by effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 392A). In the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

  Similarly, the scheduler data after the address A11 of the conditional branch is defined by the function and the parameter. In the example shown in FIG. 393, the conditional branch is not provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the above-described block BL1, it is possible to specify an accessory command (address A22), a voice operation number (address A21), and the like without considering a conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, a block BL3 or the like may be fetched by a “call” function.

  In the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect content may be generated, and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 393, if the condition of “random number value ≦ Th1?” Is given to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. Further, after the address A2 (address A2 + 1), if the address A41 (not shown) is called under the condition of “Th1 <random number value ≦ Th2?”, The address A31 and the subsequent addresses are read according to the random number value. Is performed differently. In this way, if different addresses are called in conditional branches corresponding to random numbers, the effect contents can be switched at random with random numbers, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the effect content in this manner is referred to as “effect lottery” in this specification.

  In the production lottery, all of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device may be switched, or only some of them may be switched. When switching all, the contents of the display, the sound, and the lamp may all be specified in the scheduler data called by the “call” function. To switch only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and unify the other parts after returning from the "call" function do it.

  Further, it may be specified that different scheduler data is called according to a random number for effect lottery by using a conditional branch and a “call” function in the scheduler data. In this case, the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device independently perform an effect lottery. As a result, there is an advantage that the effect mode realized by the combination is very diversified and the interest can be further enhanced.

  However, regardless of the result of the effect lottery of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device, it is preferable that these effects be simultaneously terminated in order to realize an effect without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected for the production lottery has contents in which the production ends at the same time. It is not an essential requirement that the production ends at the same time, and these production times may not be the same.

The effect lottery based on the scheduler data has the advantage that the effect content can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the driving device.
For example, at the time when the production lottery is instructed, when the driving device is performing the eight-character distribution operation and other operations are restricted, the driving device module 5700 prohibits the production lottery relating to the driving device. You may. Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect drawing may be prohibited according to the situation at the time when the effect drawing is instructed. Also, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery is to switch the effect content by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to further enhance interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound (sound) output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the output of sound will be described. FIG. 394 is an explanatory diagram illustrating functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified in a function included in the scheduler data, and outputs a sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for audio.
In addition, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  When specifying the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. Although any identification information can be used as the voice operation number, as in the case of the above-mentioned effect number, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice operation number table and the processing load when referring to the table. There is an advantage that it is possible.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505.
In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 includes functions and parameters.
The function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398.

  In the example shown in FIG. 394, a “call” function is defined at the address SA2. After executing a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs processing of the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter, and reproduces it.

  394 shows a structural example of the phrase data 5508 on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information given to each phrase data. In this embodiment, any identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as a phrase number. In this case, it is possible to omit the phrase number from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is an output channel specified at the time of phrase playback. The left and right panpots and the upper and lower panpots are the left / right / upper / lower output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of a sound to be reproduced.
When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces sound.
The loop is a specification of whether or not to reproduce the sound repeatedly. “Stereo” is a designation of whether or not to output stereo.

Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether each layer is operating. The voice number indicates the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5505 is used.
The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 394, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3 as the processing proceeds. The timer value indicates a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially reduced as the time elapses. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes 0.

  The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of the call and the loop multiplexed by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the process after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nest The number is two. When returning to the first call after finishing the second call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same applies to loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Subsequently, a function of the lamp module for controlling the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 395 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified in a function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lighting / flashing control of the lamp. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for a lamp. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When specifying the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed with reference to the lamp operation number table. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, the storage address is used to reduce the capacity of the lamp operation number table and the processing load when referring to the table, as in the case of the above-described effect number. There is an advantage of making it possible.

  The ramp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters, like the effect data (FIG. 393). Functions used in scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

  In the example shown in FIG. 395, a “call” function is defined at the address LA2. After executing a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown), the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs processing of the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

  At the address LA3, a gradation pattern setting is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. The lamp scheduler 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 in association with the lamp scheduler 5602. The lamp is turned on with the designated gradation data 1 and the lamp is switched with the gradation data 2 when the time designated by the timer value elapses. Lights up. Here, an example is shown in which two types of gradation data are specified. However, when three or more gradation data are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the timer value for switching between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processing of the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp ends. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until it stops (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the figure. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number indicates the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In the present embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer indicates a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is sequentially subtracted as the time elapses. The lamp executes the next function when this value becomes 0. The gradation data timer indicates a waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 395, when executing the gradation data specified in the address LA11, when the timer value set to the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data is shifted from gradation data 1 to gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 ends, and the processing shifts to processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of scheduler data 5601 that is being executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 395, the value of the ramp pointer sequentially changes to LA1, LA2, and LA3 as the processing proceeds. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example shown in the figure, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12 as the processing proceeds.
The number of loops is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive device control]
Subsequently, a function of the driving device module 5700 for controlling the operation of the driving device will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. Drive device module 5700 receives an instruction from scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified in a function included in scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive device. The driving device module 5700 can also perform processing by receiving requests from a plurality of schedulers.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, a movement amount (rotation step angle of the stepping motor), a movement time, a movement speed (motor rotation speed), an excitation method, a trapezoid drive, a rotation direction, and the like.
Furthermore, an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the home position and an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop the device in a state where it is biased to the limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function when the rotation starts and stops.

  The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive are described below with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. FIG. 396 to FIG. 398 are diagrams showing examples of functions in effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As described above, the functions are classified into groups of sequence control, lamp, sound, motor, and user. Hereinafter, functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of the effect. FIG. 396 shows an example of a sequence control function. Hereinafter, an outline of each function will be described.

  “STOP” is a function indicating the end of scheduler data. “NOP” is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by designating the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of times of execution differs depending on the processing cycle at which the “NOP” function is executed. If the execution is performed at the frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment. If 30 is designated, it waits for about 1 second, and if it is executed in a 1 ms cycle, if the number of executions is also designated as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. “NOP_F_VALUE” is a parameter that uses the number of executions (the number of frames), the scheduler memory number, the mask value, and the comparison value as parameters. If the condition is not satisfied, the conditional wait function waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters and writes the specified value to the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing a repetitive processing (loop), and designates the head of the loop and sets the number of loops as a parameter. When “0” is set to the number of loops, an infinite loop is performed. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of the repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the “call” function is set in the effect management table. “CALL” is the above-mentioned “call” function, which executes processing from a specified address (block), and sets information such as an address value and a label that specifies a call destination such as a label. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the call destination, the address saved by the above-mentioned “RET” function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  The “SUBC” selects a process to be called (a block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “call” function is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of the callee is completed by the “SUBC” function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the process next to the “SUBC” function).

  “SUBJ” selects a process to be called (a block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, a “JUMP” function to be described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. The process of the caller who executed the “SUBJ” function does not return to the process of the caller, but continues the process of the callee. “JUMP” sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues the processing from the specified address or label.

  “REQ” is a function for activating another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. “REQF” is a function for activating another scheduler specified by the parameter, similarly to “REQ”, and the other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite inhibition time specified by the parameter elapses. Prohibit booting. With “REQ”, control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, the “REQF” allows the scheduler data to be executed to be executed independently for a designated period, and, for example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, another scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It can be prevented from becoming disabled.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The function belonging to the lamp group is a function for controlling the flow of the lamp effect. FIG. 397 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process of lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In “HPPLAY”, the lamp is reset even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is designated by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

  "KPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for turning on a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter, similarly to "HPPLAY". In "KPLAY", when a lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, reproduction of the lamp being executed is continued without resetting.

  “HPPLAY2” is a function for executing ramp gradation data reproduction processing by specifying a layer in addition to gradation data with a parameter. The processing is the same as “HPPLAY”. “KPLAY2”, like “HPPLAY2”, is a function for executing ramp gradation data reproduction processing by specifying a layer in addition to gradation data with parameters. The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  “HPPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute a specified ramp gradation data reproduction process of reproducing the ramp gradation data designated by the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by "HPPLAY" and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the head, and the reproduction of the lamp gradation data by "KPLAY" is performed. Continue playback without interruption. In other words, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using “KPLAY” while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

  The process of “HPPLAY2” is the same as the process of “HPPLAY” except that in addition to the function of “HPPLAY” described above, a layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is designated by a parameter, and the layer is designated by a parameter.

  The processing of “KPLAY2” is the same as that of “KPLAY” except that in addition to the function of “KPLAY” described above, a layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is designated by a parameter, and a layer is designated by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound (sound))]
The functions belonging to the sound group are functions for controlling sound output. FIGS. 397 and 398 show examples of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if a sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. “SXPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter, like “SPPLAY”. In "SXPLAY", when the sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing a phrase stop process for stopping sound reproduction based on a phrase number designated by a parameter.

  “PAN_PH” is used to calculate the phrase being reproduced from the voice output coordinate position at the start of execution of the “PAN_PH” function using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position also specified by the parameter. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the designated transition time. “PAN_PH2” can specify the panpot start coordinate position by a parameter in addition to the function of the “PAN_PH” function. Similarly to the “PAN_PH” function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of the function execution This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the specified transition time.

  "VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of the execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This function is used to increase or decrease the volume value in the transition time. “VOL_FADE_PH2” can specify the fade start volume value by a parameter in addition to the function of the “VOL_FADE_PH” function. As with the “VOL_FADE_PH” function, the volume value of the target phrase is set to the parameter at the start of the function execution. This is a function for increasing or decreasing the volume value at the specified transition time from the fade start volume value to the fade end volume value specified by.

  “VOL_PH” is a function for increasing or decreasing the volume value of the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter using the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function to mute the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

“SCPPLAY” and “SXCPPLAY” execute a specified ch tune reproduction process for reproducing a phrase corresponding to a phrase number specified in a parameter on a specified channel.
If the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted during reproduction by "SCPPLAY" and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption during reproduction by "SXCPPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed using “SXCPPLAY” while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

  “PAN_CH” performs a panpot for a ch (channel) while “PAN_PH” performs a panpot for a phrase. The ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to a ch. Other than the above, the processing is the same as “PAN_PH”. Regarding “PAN_CH2”, the above-mentioned “PAN_PH2” performs a panpot for a phrase, while performing a panpot for a ch. The ch is specified by a parameter, except that the phrase is changed to a ch. "And the processing does not change.

  The “VOL_FADE_CH” is different from the “VOL_FADE_PH” in that the above-mentioned “VOL_FADE_PH” performs fade for a phrase, but performs fade for a channel. Processing does not change. Regarding “VOL_FADE_CH2”, while the above-mentioned “VOL_FADE_PH2” performs fade for a phrase, it performs fade for a ch. The ch is designated by a parameter and the phrase is changed to “ch” except that the phrase is changed to ch. Processing does not change.

  “VOL_CH” increases / decreases a volume value targeting a ch, while “VOL_PH” increases / decreases a volume value targeting a phrase. The ch is designated by a parameter and the phrase is changed to a ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as “VOL_PH”. Regarding “VOL_MUTE_ON_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” performs mute (mute) for a phrase, but performs mute (mute) for a ch. The ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH”. Regarding “VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” cancels mute for a phrase, whereas cancels mute for ch. The ch is a phrase specified by a parameter. The processing does not change from “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)
The functions belonging to the motor group are functions for controlling the outputs of the motor and the solenoid. FIG. 398 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  "MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor specified in the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process for causing the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes a solenoid OFF process for causing the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function Details (User)]
The function belonging to the user group is a function for executing control that does not belong to the group described above. FIG. 398 shows an example of these functions, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In “COMMAND”, a command is issued to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a and the like. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes a scheduler memory copy process of copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary for executing a series of processes are defined in an execution order. One or more schedulers are provided for each application in terms of management, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers, functions related to lamps are executed by a scheduler for sound, and a scheduler for an accessory is used. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each application capable of executing the sound function, and it is possible to execute all functions in a mixed manner. There is no limit on the number of schedulers to be executed, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

  FIG. 399 is a diagram illustrating an example of the scheduler definition according to the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition or the device to be controlled. The outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

  First, an example of a scheduler relating to state transition will be described. There are special figure state schedulers (special figure states SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the game state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  There is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data for controlling transition of an internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the player operates a production button, wins a performance execution lottery, or transitions to another state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation I do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  To the scheduler for sounds, a background for controlling the output of sounds output with the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbols, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the symbol sound scheduler data, and output at the time of executing the notice effect There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) for controlling the output of the sound to be played, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) for controlling the output of the sound when the notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the scheduler related to the lamp includes a background for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp in accordance with the background display and the change display of the symbol, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH01) for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data. ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp when the notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the lamp is 1f (frame).

  In addition, a scheduler that controls the sound and the lamp in association with each other is also defined. Such a scheduler includes a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound and turns on / flashes a lamp in order to notify the outside of a broken or clogged ball or an alarm by detecting an abnormality with a magnetic sensor. There are schedulers (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. There is also a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lighting / flashing of a lamp are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing a system operation, and a scheduler for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for performing a setting at the time of RAM clear. MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing a motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of the accessory, and the like, for executing a motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory. (MOTOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the effect or the like.

  A general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the operation of a particular accessory and a general-purpose scheduler that is used without depending on the type of the accessory, etc. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (millisecond), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the management of the game state, the sound and the lamp (1f in this embodiment: about 33.334 ms). Has become.

  Although the number of schedulers for controlling each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled so as to dynamically increase or decrease in accordance with a game state or a notice. This makes it possible to activate each scheduler without depending on the number of bonuses and the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce restrictions for executing effects.

[18-7. Example of application of scheduler data (Direction 1)]
The functions used in the effect control and the outline of the types and functions of the schedulers that perform a series of controls by combining these functions have been described above. Hereinafter, scheduler data and specific application examples of the functions will be described with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Production outline]
FIG. 400A is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 400A, the gaming board 5 of this embodiment has a logo role 5001, a star role 5002 (a left star role 5002a, a middle star role 5002b, a right star role 5002c) and a hatchet role 5003. Is arranged.

  The logo combination 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the end of the effect. Furthermore, in addition to the vertical movement, the logo role 5001 can perform an effect of vibrating up and down and left and right before and after the movement.

  The star role 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star role 5002a is disposed on the left side, the middle star role 5002b is disposed in the center, and the right star role 5002c is disposed on the right side. Each star character 5002 can operate independently, and one or more star characters 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the effect contents.

  The left star role object 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Also, the middle star role 5002b moves downward, and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star role 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. In addition, each star role 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to the intermediate position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The hatchet 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hatchet role 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player or the lottery result of the hatchet announcement notice production, etc., it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position, stops temporarily, then moves to the lower position, or moves from the initial position to the lower position at a stroke Operation mode is set. As with the logo role 5001, the hatch role 5003 can also perform an effect of vibrating up, down, left and right before and after movement.

  Subsequently, a flow of a notice effect performed by one symbol change will be described. First, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star accessory notice, and a button (BTN) logo accessory drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 400B. The flow of the announcement effect including the hatch effect effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 400B is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of a notice effect performed in a series of fluctuation display from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol according to the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. is there. In the series of change display shown in FIG. 400B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. Thereafter, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star accessory notice, and a button (BTN) logo accessory drop notice are executed. In each announcement effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, output of sound, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like are executed.

  Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each announcement effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice (FIG. 401), the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice (FIG. 402), and the star character in the star character notice The motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 403 to 405) for controlling the operation of the 5002 and the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 406) for controlling the operation of the logo combination 5001 in the button logo combination fall notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 400B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01, and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

  FIG. 401 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, the function “SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”, and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed. By preparing a dummy call address, the lamp is turned off at the time of non-winning of the advance notice. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the number of step-ups (1 to 4).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores a lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with a step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by specifying gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the processing. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on / off in a corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH01”.

  Thereafter, by executing the function “RET” in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, the process returns to the process of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP” ends.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores a lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with a step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by specifying ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up, and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step Is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on / off in a corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven by using the notice group 01 ramp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, by executing the function “RET” in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, the process returns to the next process of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” ends.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” will be described. First, the scheduler data for the lottery result can be called in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the preliminary lottery result value). is there. Depending on the content of the notice, there is a case where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of a two-branch such as an IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the judgment increases and becomes complicated, so that it becomes difficult to manage correction and the like. On the other hand, in "SUBC", the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one each. However, it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by setting both to a plurality. Secondly, since the format is “CALL”, it is possible to execute the common scheduler data after executing the “SUBC” function, and there is no need to describe the scheduler data after branching for the number of branches. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to cope with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branch processing may not be performed and the “SUBC” function may be terminated.

  That is, the function “SUBC” can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in the table format in advance, and can call the selected scheduler data. In a mere conditional branch, it is necessary to define a condition according to the number of branches and set scheduler data of the branch destination, respectively. In addition, it is possible to easily respond to the addition or change of the production contents, and to improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the notice is executed to the end by receiving the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is driven by notice group 02 ramp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) “LMP_SCH03” as shown in FIG. 400B. It belongs to a different notice group from the step-up notice, and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, so that the notice can be executed in parallel.

  FIG. 402 is a view for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is started, first, the function “KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA” is executed, and then the wait processing “NOP: 30” of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp is turned on (flashes) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, the lamp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one frame, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, functions from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop are executed a maximum number of times. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” is executed 90 times at the maximum.

  Describing the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, and when the effect button is operated, “1: button ON”. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. The contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” are rewritten by a button processing program outside the scheduler data.

  While “0: Button OFF” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” when the button cut-in notice button is OFF is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. You. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” of the caller scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (function “LOOP”). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the process exits from the loop process, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” displays the button cut-in notice button ON lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” in the button cut-in notice button. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” is the function “SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT”, and the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” has the target scheduler work number “YKK_CUT” and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT”. Is executed with the parameters as parameters.

  The button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT” stores the address of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the addresses of the scheduler data are stored. SUBJ_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed. By preparing a dummy call address, the lamp is turned off at the time of non-winning of the advance notice. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4 is stored in the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT”, and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by the ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the weight processing of 150 frames is executed to continue for 5 seconds. Let it. At this time, the scheduler data is driven using the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03”. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the scheduler “LMP_SCH03” for the notice group 02 ramp scheduler data.

  Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and returns to the caller scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT". do not do. Therefore, the scheduler “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is terminated in two cases: when the “STOP” function included in the “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is executed and when the “STOP” function included in the “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed from the schedulers “SUBJ_LMP_CUT1”. There is.

  The button cut-in notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. The first is that scheduler data can be called for a lottery result with a single action for a plurality of lottery results based on dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in this embodiment). Depending on the contents of the notice, there is a case where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as an IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the judgment increases and becomes too complicated to manage the correction and the like. . In “SUBJ”, the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one each. However, it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by setting both to a plurality. Secondly, since the “JUMP” format is used, different processing can be executed for each of the branched scheduler data after execution of the “SUBJ” function. Similarly to "SUBC", in order to cope with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branch processing is not performed, and the "SUBC" function ends. You may do so.

  That is, the function “SUBJ”, like the function “SUBC”, selects the branch destination scheduler data based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in a table format in advance, and selects the selected scheduler data. , And the same effect as that of the function “SUBC” can be obtained.

  Further, unlike the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the processing of the call source. ing. For example, when the effect content to be executed is different depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, by using the function “SUBJ”, it is possible to prevent the effect from being executed repeatedly. On the other hand, in the function “SUBC”, the process returns to the process based on the scheduler data of the caller, so that after the process of the callee has been executed, it is possible to execute a common post-process, thereby simplifying the process.

  Therefore, by using the function “SUBC” and the function “SUBJ”, it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and make the structure flexible to the processing branch. Further, since it is easy to cope with additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination in the table format, development efficiency is improved and it is also easy to cope with changes in specifications of gaming machines.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star character announcement]
Subsequently, the control of the star accessory announcement performed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When the special symbol change display reaches a reach and shifts to the latter half of the change, a group announcement occurs, and a star character announcement is executed independently of the group announcement. The notice of the star role is a plurality of types of star roles 5002 (three types of a left star role 5002a, a middle star role 5002b, and a right star role 5002c in this embodiment) that can be operated by a driving body (motor). By operating, it notifies the degree of expectation of the design fluctuation. Specifically, the higher the number of appearances of the star combination 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 400B, the star auditors' notice of this embodiment is executed by driving the star auditors' notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star auditors' scheduler data scheduler). Is done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also be used. .

  FIGS. 403 to 405 are views for explaining the contents of the scheduler data for performing the motor control in the star accessory notice according to the present embodiment. 403 is scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” for controlling the overall flow and the left star role 5002a, FIG. 404 is scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” for controlling the right star role 5002c, and FIG. 405 is a scheduler for controlling the middle star role 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, the function “SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed.
This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_HYA” and the star accessory announcement branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star auditors announcement notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”, and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the star auditors notice notice work area “YKK_HYA”. . In the star auditors' notice work area "YKK_HYA", the lottery result value of the star auditors' notice announcement is stored, and it corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star auditors' notice announcement call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

  The star character announcement notice call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA” stores the address of the star character appearance scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed. By preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to realize that the accessory is made inactive at the time of non-winning of the advance notice. I have. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a star character announcement. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only the left star character 5002a, the SUBC_MOT_HY500a is the left star character 5002a, and the SUBC_MOT_HY2a is the left star character 500a. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star character 5002.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that a star role announcement that causes the left star role 5002a, the middle star role 5002b, and the right star role 5002c to appear is executed in the star role preview notice work area “YKK_HYA”. “3” is stored, and the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” is executed. In addition, when operating only the left star role 5002a, the lottery result value of the star role preview is “1”. When the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star role preview is performed. “2” is set as the result value.

  The scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” first executes a function “MPLAY” corresponding to the motor reproduction process by specifying a parameter “PTA_HYA_LEF” indicating a pattern of an appearance operation of the left star accessory 5002a. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” by the function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler also specified by the parameter. Here, the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the function “REQ” is used to execute the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” of the medium star character 5002b using the scheduler “MOT_SHC04” for the medium star character 5002b scheduler data. In the present embodiment, the motor reproduction process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star role 5002c and the middle star role 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor reproduction process for the left star role 5002a. ing. As described above, by executing the scheduler data for operating each star role 5002 by a different scheduler, each star role 5002 can be controlled in parallel.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in a specified manner. After the completion of the wait processing, the function “RET” is executed, the process returns to the caller star announcement notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1”, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is ended by the function “stop”.

  Next, control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 404, the parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c is specified, and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the right star role 5002c. After completion of the wait processing, the processing is terminated by executing the function “STOP” without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

  Finally, the control of the medium star role 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. The medium star character 5002b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the medium star character 5002b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 405, the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the medium star character 5002b is designated, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the medium star role 5002b. After completion of the wait processing, the processing is terminated by executing the function “STOP” without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role 5002b are defined by the function “REQ”. , It is possible to operate the respective accessories in parallel. In other words, the operation of each accessory can be executed in parallel without performing any special control by executing scheduler data individually defined as needed. The advantage of executing the scheduler data in parallel is that, first, a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Further, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, so that the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which three types of characters are operated in parallel. However, if there is no problem with the operation of the character, more characters can be executed in parallel. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of characters in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control for logo drop announcement]
Next, the control of the logo accessory falling notice executed in the latter half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. The announcement of the drop of the logo accessory is executed independently of the announcement of the group and the announcement of the star accessory. The logo role drop notice is a notice effect in which the logo role 5001 imitating the logo of a gaming machine is operated to drop vertically in front of the game board effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a bigger hit than usual is given. Is high.

  As shown in FIG. 400B, the logo accessory fall notice is driven by driving the logo accessory fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo accessory scheduler data scheduler). Be executed. Note that the general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also operate the logo accessory 5001.

  FIG. 406 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for controlling the motor in the logo accessory fall notice according to the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is started, first, the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT” is executed, and then the wait processing “NOP: 30” of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_LGO_GAT”. Specifically, the logo combination 5001 rattles and vibrates. At this time, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” is executed 90 times at the maximum.

  Describing the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_LGO” and the button logo role drop announcement lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” as parameters. You.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” and, based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”, determines the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to. Identify.
The result of the lottery execution of the button logo role drop notice is stored in the button logo role notice work area “YKK_LGO”. When the lottery for the execution of the logo character fall notice has been won, "1: Logo drop notice execution" is set. The result of the lottery execution of the button logo role drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo role drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  As long as “0: Not Executed” is set in the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”, the motor logo scheduler when the logo accessory drop notice is not executed is executed in the button logo accessory drop announcement lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”. The data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" of the caller's scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, when the lottery of the button logo role drop announcement is missed, the loop processing is executed 90 times, then the process exits from the loop processing, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends. .

  On the other hand, when "1: Logo drop notice execution" is set in the button logo role notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo role drop notice execution lottery is selected, the button logo role drop is executed. In the announcement lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” at the time of executing the logo accessory fall announcement is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” is the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO”, and the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” has the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button logo role fall notice button branch call address table. This is executed using “TBL_MOT_LGO” as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the head address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” with reference to the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. When the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF” and the effect button are operated. In this case, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button logo role drop notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While “0: Button OFF” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” when the logo role drop notification button is OFF in the button logo role drop notification button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” of the caller (function “RET”). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Therefore, even when the lottery for the button logo role drop notice is executed, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the process exits the loop process and the function “STOP” is executed. Then, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the motor scheduler when the logo item fall notification button is ON is set in the button logo item fall notification button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”. The data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON”. The function “COMMAND” is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, a command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as when the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, a wait process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”. At this time, the logo role 5001 performs the dropping operation over 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Further, by executing the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI”, the operation of moving the logo combination item 5001 from the drop position to the initial position is performed. Subsequently, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After completion of the wait processing, the execution of the logo character dropping operation has been completed, so the function “MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0” is executed, the button logo character preview lottery result is rewritten to “0: not executed”, and the caller's scheduler is executed. The process returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” of the data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” (function “RET”). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. The function returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". However, since the button logo role announcement lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" for dropping the button logo role is executed. Instead, the remaining loop number processing is performed, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is ended by the function “STOP”.

  As described above, the command is issued internally when the logo role 5001 is dropped, so that the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo role 5001 falls and at the timing when the logo role 5001 falls. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect devices in cooperation with each other at an appropriate timing as needed, and to execute a more interesting effect. .

  In the present embodiment, the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal on the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a using the function “COMMAND”. However, by processing the command issued by the function “COMMAND” on the program side, control is performed from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result to a work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that cannot be controlled by the function command can be performed. An advantage of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuance timing is used as the processing timing, so that time management and execution determination by a program are not required. Further, it becomes possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touchpads) by the user which are not determined in advance at the start of the change, issue commands using the function “COMMAND”, and perform the processing.

  In the present embodiment, the function “COMMAND” has a function of transmitting a command of a fixed value. However, instead of a fixed value, a work area is designated and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. You may.

[18-8. Example of applying scheduler data (when power is turned on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, a description will be given of control from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on to the time when the game is started until the first variable display is started.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 407 is a view for explaining scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of this embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Upon receiving the power-on command, the scheduler execution unit 5060 drives the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” with the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub game state (sub internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” progresses, the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc. as shown in FIG. Is done. At this time, the main gaming state is in a standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when a game ball wins the starting winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state transit to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 408 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and a relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is activated or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control on the main control board 1310. You. As described with reference to FIG. 390, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis processing in the command analysis module. The command analysis module specifies a type of an event generated by the main command analysis process, activates a corresponding scheduler, and executes scheduler data.

  Also, when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 397) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 in the same manner as the main command, and analyzed by the main command analysis process. Is done.

  When a main command or a command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control in the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated command includes a command for starting the scheduler and a command for controlling various effect devices (sub internal output command).

  The command to activate the scheduler includes, for example, scheduler data for performing control corresponding to a change in the game state on the main control board 1310 and a change in the sub internal state due to the progress of the control on the peripheral control board 1510, a main control board such as a start winning, The scheduler data for executing an effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, the scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, besides directly starting a scheduler from a command, it is possible to start another scheduler by a function “REQ” included in scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command (command for sub-internal output) for controlling the rendering device is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the rendering device is output by a function “COMMAND” included in the scheduler data, in addition to being output based on the result of analyzing the main command. Commands for controlling the rendering device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order stored from the top of the buffer.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by activating another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical combination by receiving one main command. Thereby, various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining the schedulers, a plurality of types of effects can be implemented in parallel while realizing various effect controls. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine, for example, by increasing the efficiency of the debugging work.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the command output processing by the function “COMMAND0” makes it possible to standardize the command analysis processing. This makes it possible to share the logic for selecting scheduler data by command analysis and the logic for determining function parameters, resulting in a problem that an enormous number of combinations of scheduler data must be managed in a table. Can be suppressed.

  Next, activation of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 409 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on in the present embodiment.

  As described with reference to FIG. 408, when the gaming machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis processing, and the scheduler is executed. The sub-status scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed and a command is issued to create a sub internal state, and further, a lamp or a sound corresponding to the sub internal state is output as necessary. .

  Describing the executed scheduler specifically, first, the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”. In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state by the function "COMMANDO" is issued, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. After that, by executing the function “NOP: 900”, the apparatus enters a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the command “COM_STS_MDEMO” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed in “main command analysis processing”, and the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” in the manufacturer demonstration state. Thereafter, by executing the function “NOP: 300”, the apparatus enters a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the command “COM_STS_KDEMO” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in “main command analysis processing”, and the state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” is executed. Thus, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” in the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function “NOP: 900”, the apparatus enters a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command “COM_STS_GOTO” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis processing”, and the status goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the status GOT prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub-status scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data “PTA_LAMP_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. Further, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, sound reproduction is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. Thereafter, by executing the function “NOP: 450”, the standby state is established for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command “COM_STS_TAIKI” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine is in a playable state, the game is started, and the game machine loops in this standby state until a game ball wins.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function “COMMAND0” can control as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting a command with the function “COMMAND0” instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. The number of main commands can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, and is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (Direction 2)]
Subsequently, an example in which a hatchet role drop notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo role drop notice will be described. The hatchet role fall notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as taking over the parameters used for the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Production outline]
FIG. 410 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notice effect in a series of change display from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the scheduler data for performing an effect, and the scheduler which is performed, and (B) is a figure explaining the position of the hatchet role 5003 in the hatchet role fall notice.

  In a series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 410 (A), a button (BTN) hatcher role first half fall notification, which is a first half of a step-up notice and a hatchet role fall notice, is executed in the first half of the change. After that, a reach occurs. In the latter half of the fluctuation, the group notice, the button hatcher role first half fall notification continued from the first half, and the hatchet role latter half fall notification are executed. In each announcement effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, output of sound, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like are executed. The details of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. As described above, the hatchet role drop notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatch role first half fall notice and a hatch role late fall notice.

  In the first half of the button hatcher role drop notice, the notice effect proceeds by operating the effect button. For this reason, even if the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatcher role is won, the fall effect of the hatchet role 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the latter half of the hatchet role late notice, an effect is performed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatter late fall notification regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  If the player wins the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatcher role and operates the production button at a predetermined timing, the hatcher role 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, when the hatchet role 5003 is dropped to the middle position and the lottery for the latter half fall notice is won, the hatchet role 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the hatchet role 5003 falls from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the notice of the fall of the hatcher role, and falls to the lower part (lower position) in the latter half. In addition, when the lottery for the latter half fall notice is won, regardless of the position of the hatcher 5003, it falls to the lower part. When the notice of the drop of the hatchet role ends, the hatchet role 5003 returns to the upper portion (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 410 (B), the effect of the hatchet role drop announcement is executed in six types of patterns. More specifically, if the result of the lottery execution of the first half fall notification of the button hatcher role is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the directing button, and the second half fall notification of the hatchet role article is not won (pattern 1). And winning (pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button hatcher role first half fall notice and the hatchet role late fall notice are not elected, the hatchet role 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from above. In the case of the pattern 2, the hatchet role 5003 is located at the upper part without dropping in the hatchet role drop notice, while the hatchet role 5003 is won from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half fall notice because the winning lottery was won. Fall at a stretch.

  When the lottery for the execution of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice is won, the effect mode of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, in the hatchet role drop announcement, four patterns of effect modes can be executed according to the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet role late notice.

  If the result of the lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet role is not won and the directing button is not operated, and the result of the lottery of the second half fall notice of the hatch role is non-winning, the hatch 5003 does not fall At the top (pattern 3). If the result of the lottery of the first half fall notification of the button hatch actor is won and the production button is operated, and if the result of the execution lottery of the second half fall notice of the hatch actor is non-winning, at the time of operation of the production button, the hatch role 5003 Falls from the top to the middle, and remains at the middle until the notice of the fall of the hatchet object ends (pattern 4).

  If you win the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet role and do not operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery of the second half fall notice of the hatchet role, you do not operate the production button, The hatchet role 5003 does not fall until the notice of the latter half fall is started, and is located at the upper part, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the notice of the latter half fall (pattern 5). Button hatchet role first half fall announcement execution lottery is won, the production button is operated, furthermore, if the hatchet role second half fall announcement execution lottery is elected, at the time of production button operation, the hatchet role 5003 from the top It falls to the middle, and further falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half fall notice (pattern 6).

  As described above, in the hatchet role drop notice of the present embodiment, six patterns of effect forms can appear. Hereinafter, scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hatchet role 5003 in the hatchet role drop notice will be described. More specifically, a button hatcher role first half fall notification motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” and a hatcher role second half that control the operation of the hatchet role component 5003 in the button hatcher role first half fall notification shown in FIG. A description will be given of the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for the latter half of the hatch role, which controls the operation of the hatch role 5003 in the fall notification.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the notice of the fall of the hatchet role]
FIG. 411 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for performing motor control in the first half of the button hatcher role fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet role-fall notice of the present embodiment. . As described above, when the lottery for the first half fall notification of the button hatcher role is won, the operation of the production button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function “LOOP”, and the hatcher role 5003 is operated when the production button is operated. Perform the effect to make it. If the lottery for the first half fall notification of the button hatcher role is not won, and the staging button is not operated even after the winning, the process ends without operating the hatchet role 5003. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for the first half of the button hatcher role drop notice.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect when the gaming board effect display device 1600 rattles the hatchet object 5003.
After that, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait processing “NOP: 30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the hatchet object 5003 rattles and vibrates.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1” is executed 90 times at the maximum.

  Describing the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” uses the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA1” and the button hatcher role first-half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” as parameters. Be executed.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet role first-half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and based on the contents of the button hatchet role first-half fall notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, scheduler data to be branched to. Specify the start address of In the work area “YKK_NTA1”, the result of the execution of the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatcher role is stored, and “0: In the case where the lottery has been won for the "non-winning" and the button hatcher role first-half fall notice execution execution, "1: hatchet role first-half fall notice execution" is set. The result of the lottery execution of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”.

  If “0: Not Win” is set in the work area “YKK_NTA1” for the button hatcher role first half drop notice work area, the button hatchet role item in the button call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” will be displayed in the button hatcher role first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” when the first-half fall notice is not executed is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” is only the function “STOP”, and the result of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice lottery is “non-winning”. Terminates execution of.

  On the other hand, when "1: Hatchet role first-half fall notice execution" is set in the button hatch role first-half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button hatch role first-half fall notice execution lottery is won. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” at the time of execution of the hatchet role drop advance notice is selected in the button call “TBL_YKK_NTA1” for the first half drop announcement lottery result notice button. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is a function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1”, and the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” includes the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button hatcher first-half fall notice button branch call address. This is executed using the table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the head address of the scheduler data that is the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” with reference to the button hatch accessory first half fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo material fall notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, and “0: button off” when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet role first half fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the motor scheduler when the button hatcher role is in the OFF state is displayed in the button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”. The data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the caller's scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). Thereby, the process returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”. Therefore, even if the lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatch role is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the process exits from the loop process and returns to the function “STOP”. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the button hatcher role first-half fall notice button is turned on in the button hatcher role first-half fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”. Hour motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID” and issue the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the gaming-board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the hatchet object falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID” in the same frame as the issuance of the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatcher 5003 to an intermediate position. Further, the weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”, during which the hatcher 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

  Finally, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, and the fact that the hatch role 5003 has moved to the intermediate position is recorded. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

  When the first half of the button hatcher role, which is the first half of the notice of the fall of the hatchet role, ends, the second half of the fall notification of the hatchet role, which is the second half, is started. FIG. 412 and FIG. 413 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the hatcher role late fall notification scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the latter half of the hatchet role fall notification of the present embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the hatcher role late fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, similarly to the button hatch role first fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect indicating whether or not the hatchet object 5003 is dropped on the game board effect display device 1600. . Thereafter, a wait process “NOP: 90” for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed.
Since the expectation of the big hit becomes large when the hatchet role 5003 drops, the effect drawing of the effect for three seconds enhances the expectation of the player.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”. In the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA2” and the hatch agent late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” as parameters. .

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatch half late fall announcement lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”, and based on the contents of the hatch half late fall notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination. Specify the start address. Hatcher role late fall notice 2 Work area “YKK_NTA2” stores the result of the execution of the hatchet role late fall notice execution lottery. In the case where the lottery for winning the execution of the latter half fall notice of the hatter role is set to "1: the later execution of the fall notice of the latter part". The result of the lottery execution of the second half fall notification of the hatcher role corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the second half fall notification lottery result.

  Hatena role late fall notice 2 If “0: non-winning” is set in the work area “YKK_NTA2”, the hatch role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” at the time when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” is executed, and the value of the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the hatcher role second-half fall announcement lottery result non-elected branch call address table K_N_TBL_NBL Branch based on

  If “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the hatch role late fall notification is not provided in the hatch role late drop announcement lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. The execution-time motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed, and the process returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

  When “0: initial position” is set, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected when the hatch role late fall notification is not executed in the hatch role late drop announcement lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. You. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed, and the process returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". Thereafter, the value of the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten with “0: initial position”, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” ends.

  On the other hand, if "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatch role first half fall in the hatch role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected when the notice is executed and the latter half fall notice is not won.

  In the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” at the time of the execution of the first half fall notice and the second half fall notice of the hatchet role, the weight processing “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the weight processing executed here, as described later, when the hatchet object 5003 is at the lower position, the waiting time is for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the hatchet object 5003 is originally located at the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

  After the completion of the weight processing, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the hatcher 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the hatchet object 5003, a wait process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is returned by the function "RET".

  When “1: Hatchet late fall notice” is set in the work area “YKK_NTA2” of the hatchet role late notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2”, the hatch in the hatch role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” is selected at the time of winning the second half fall notice of the role item. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler and the branch call address table “TBL_DOK” are divided based on the value of the hatcher fall notice 2 branch call address table “TBL_YK”. .

  If “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the hatch role first half fall notification is not performed in the hatch role late drop announcement lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” is selected at the time of the execution and the latter half fall notice winning.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 413), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the gaming board effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as the issuance of the command “COM_NTA_STA-END”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatcher 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 240”, during which the hatcher 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the hatchet role 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 has reached the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and drawing of the effect is continued on the game board effect display device 1600.

  After that, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the hatchet object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed to call the above-described scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON”, thereby returning the hatcher 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” by the function “RET”.

  On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatch role first half fall in the hatch role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN". The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected at the time of the execution of the notice and the second-half fall notice.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 413), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the gaming board effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as the issuance of the command “COM_NTA_STA-END”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatcher 5003 to the lower position. Further, weight processing of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”, during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the hatchet role 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 has reached the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and drawing of the effect is continued on the game board effect display device 1600.

  Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet role 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position with the timing when the operation of returning the hatchet role 5003 to the initial position is started, the function “NOP: 120” is used to make 120 frames (approximately). (4 seconds). This time is a time required for the hatchet part 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

  After that, similarly to the case of “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed to return the hatcher 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed to return the hatcher 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” by the function “RET”.

  When the hatchet role 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed and the value of the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. And ends the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  In the hatchet role drop notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hatchet role 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, by writing the position of the hatchet part 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half part and acquiring the written position information in the second half part, the position of the hatch part 5003 can be specified. . This makes it possible to determine the amount of movement of the motor for each position of the hatchet 5003, and to call the corresponding scheduler data to execute an effect according to the operation result of the effect button.

  Also, in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the hatchet part 5003, since the common scheduler data is called by moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area at the time of executing scheduler data and referencing it at the time of executing other scheduler data. As a result, a value indicating a state or the like that changes due to execution of a plurality of scheduler data can be specified at the time of execution of each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data. This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, and to efficiently create and debug scheduler data and facilitate management. In the present embodiment, a function for writing a fixed value is used. However, by specifying a work name with a function parameter instead of a fixed value, data transfer from the program side and processing based on command information are performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. The unique feature of the function "MEMW" is that even if the information including the function "MEMW" is not determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data, the processing can be performed if the information is determined before the execution of the function "MEMW". This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (fluctuation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of announcement effects has been described above. The contents of execution of such a series of announcement effects are randomly selected based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Further, specific effect contents are drawn for each notice effect.

  Hereinafter, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview effects, and a basic effect relating to the series of preview effects and the variation pattern (regardless of the lottery other than the preview effect). A description will be given of the configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect or a symbol effect that is one-to-one with an effect and a fluctuation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (effect sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation until the reach occurs, or until the symbol stops when the reach does not occur (first half fluctuation), or from the occurrence of the reach until the symbol stops (second half fluctuation). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Further, a time corresponding to the variation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and execution time of the announcement effect within the assigned time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are combined into block data.

  Also, when comparing basic effects related to fluctuations in multiple fluctuation patterns, the rules for block division are such that the same basic effect part is used as common block data, and the part where the basic effect of the liquid crystal display differs is divided as block data. I do. Referring to FIG. 414A, in the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each change pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in the present embodiment, the change pattern “10H01H” has a normal change of 6 seconds. Loss has occurred, normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a loss symbol effect is performed. The normal fluctuation 6-second effect and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns. Therefore, the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) for the normal fluctuation 6 seconds and the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) for the loss stop are divided.

  The fluctuation pattern “10H02H” is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the loss symbol design is performed. Since the 12-second effect of the normal fluctuation is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) for the 12-second normal fluctuation, and the lost symbol design is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern “10H01H”. As the liquid crystal effect block data of the stoppage, the liquid crystal effect block data of the stoppage (LCD02_BLK) divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the variation pattern “10H01H” is used in common. Similarly, with respect to other variation patterns, similarly, portions that have already been made into block data for the basic effect are used in common, and portions that have differences are newly made into block data.

  As described above, by performing blocking, the common basic rendering part becomes a unique number of block data, and all the variation patterns and the basic rendering such as big hits other than the variation are made by combining the unique liquid crystal rendering block data. Thus, it is possible to realize the basic effects such as all the variation patterns and the big hits other than the variation. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the main purpose of blocking is to produce a liquid crystal production that includes a specific basic production when a specific basic production changes. That is, the change is reflected in all the fluctuation patterns using the block data.

  The liquid crystal display in this embodiment has a completely different format and function from the scheduler data of sounds, lamps, and accessories in this embodiment to control the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preview rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub-rendering block data that controls sounds, lamps, and other useful objects. The drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image or moving image material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, and color related to effects related to pictures, movies, and designs displayed on the background. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, such as information, alpha information, and the like. The information to be shown is embedded.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for causing the liquid crystal display device to change and display the identification symbol is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for changing the display of the identification symbol independent of the control of the other liquid crystal effects.For example, even when the display of the identification symbol is changed and displayed in a different manner, a common announcement effect is provided. This can be performed by a liquid crystal display device. Note that the drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effect. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for the notice effect relating to the design are combined for each block data is the same as the above-described sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and additionally, information for specifying the variation display mode of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 414A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores a combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to a fluctuation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 414B is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to a variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram illustrating a sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores a combination of sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, a unique number for specifying the constituent liquid crystal effect block data is stored in chronological order with respect to the variation pattern number. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, the first half variation includes “LCD03_BLK” indicating a normal variation for 12 seconds, the second half variation includes “LCD04_BLK” indicating a normal short reach, and the second half variation includes “LCD02_BLK” indicating an outage stop time. Is done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. In this way, by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, the configuration of the basic effect and the notice effect can be defined (realized).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used in the same effect period. For example, when the first half fluctuation is the normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, “LCD03_BLK” is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized with a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 414B, the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. . The sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same production time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 415, the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) contains information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. Hold. The sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same production time) corresponding one-to-one with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal design block data having the same variation pattern number.

  Next, an execution procedure of a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the announcement effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for executing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal design block data, and effect control based on sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 416 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 Notice.

  As described with reference to FIG. 392A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and assigns each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data numbers are obtained from the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the variation pattern liquid crystal design block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the variation pattern sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO). I do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device to the same number, it is possible to execute all effects of each effect device in synchronization.

  Then, effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for all layers to liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and sub-effect block control unit 5320.

  Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal design block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1ms) scheduler execution unit. By 5333 (5334), block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs the normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 performs the normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal design block data “ZUG03_BLK”. The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” of 12-second normal fluctuation.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or more liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are started, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect contents is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the effect contents, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, so that drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data corresponding to the variable display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing liquid crystal effect block data.

  On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effects 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the content of the effect is executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or the execution cycle may be set at the time of startup as a common use.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designating function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specifying function in a defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to a module (a lamp module 5600, a sound module 5500, a driving device (motor) module 5700, and the like) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects by various effect devices are executed by each module.

  Further, other scheduler data can be called from the scheduler data by the function “REQ, REQF”. By executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various effect devices. Further, by using the command transmission function “COMMAND” or “COMMAND0”, control can be performed not by a function but by a command. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designating function for controlling the operation of the accessory, the operation of the accessory and the drawing cooperate as in the above-mentioned hatchet accessory drop announcement effect. Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start process for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer according to the present embodiment.

  The effect block control unit 5040 selects a variation pattern layer by the effect control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and varies the control of the variation pattern-specific block data number corresponding to the variation pattern. Control is started using the sub effect block data combination number table for each pattern (FIG. 415). The row position of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 415) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 415, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set to the variation-specific sub-effect block data combination number table row index, and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the row index of the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

  Next, effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern to “0” (step S7002). The process starts from the sub-effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). Thus, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 418 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table by variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table by variation pattern based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to “0” (step S7012).
As a result, the process is started from the first record of the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data number table specified from the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data number table.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 420 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is extracted from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or a plurality of scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and a corresponding scheduler is defined for each scheduler data. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are made to correspond based on a lottery result of a notice or the like.

  Further, when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data is completed, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index, and sets the sub-effect block data number table row index to the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub-effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). If the number of elements in the row of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern has been exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub-effect block data control activation process ends. On the other hand, when the number does not exceed the number of row elements in the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (the result of step S7014 is “NO”), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

  FIG. 419 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control updating process for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each of the effects (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) configuring the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern When the execution of all the scheduler data is completed, this is processing for executing the next sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. The sub-effect block data control updating process for each variation pattern is periodically executed, and the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is monitored.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 first obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table by variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table by variation pattern using the row and column index of the sub-effect block data combination number table by variation pattern. (Step S7021). By this, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) configuring the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is specified, and the sub-effect block data is defined. It is determined whether or not the executed scheduler is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is “YES”), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub-effect block data control update processing ends.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all schedulers of the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined by the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. Is completed (the result of step S7022 is "NO"), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is end data ("DATA_END") is determined. Is determined (step S7023). If the data is end data (the result of step S7023 is “YES”), since a series of effects has been completed, the sub-effect block data control updating process for each variation pattern ends.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not end data (the result of step S7023 is “NO”), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data corresponding to the next column data. Then, a sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

  As described with reference to FIGS. 414A, 414B, and 415, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal design block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by performing the blocking, if the same fluctuation pattern, regardless of the combination of effects and the presence or absence of the effect, the activation block and the scheduler defined by the effect block always start up the same number of times, and the program Can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-effects schedulers, it is possible to cooperate the operations of various effect devices, and execute a variety of effects without discomfort. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, it is necessary to independently develop and check scheduler data for controlling various production devices in units of production devices and block data. And development efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 420 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of executing a basic effect and a notice effect of the variable display corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. (B) shows the configuration of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and notice sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the announcement effect. Although FIG. 420 (B) shows a combination of two types of sub-effect block data, that is, background block data and notice block data, the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 420, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern constituting the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” is “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The variation effect sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of the variation until the left symbol and the right symbol stop. The variation effect-specific sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation effect-specific sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the variation display result is determined to be lost, and the determined symbol is displayed.

  In the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 420 (A), sub-effect block data related to step-up notice, BTN logo character fall notice and notice of design stop notice, and sub-effect related to background. Block data is defined. In the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, sub-effect block data of cut-in notice and group notice and sub-effect block data relating to the background are defined. Further, in the sub-effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub-effect block data relating to the background is defined without defining the announcement effect sub-effect block data. In the figure, the execution of the notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of notice block data may be defined and executed so as to overlap a plurality of notice effects. The contents of each announcement effect shown in FIG. 420 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, the effect control based on each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 420 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described.

  In the sub-effects scheduler data relating to the background, normal fluctuation 12 seconds background sub-effects block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined. The normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

  In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice, a function “NOP”, step-up notice sub-effect block data, BTN logo character fall notice sub-effect block data, and symbol stop notice sub-effect block effect data are defined. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the BTN logo role drop notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo role drop notice are defined. The BTN logo role drop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo role drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the symbol stop notice sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub-effect block data.

  By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. Will be.

  At this time, from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect and the next liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal effect effect , And until the execution of the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends after the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal announcement effect (symbol stop announcement) ends. A "NOP" is executed and waits for a specified time. As described above, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the schedule block for each variation pattern by the function “NOP”, the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each announcement effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal announcement effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function “NOP” of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern need not be provided.

  The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as a lamp, a sound, and an accessory is defined as a common time for each notice effect. Thereby, the time from the start of the control based on the sub-effect block data to the execution of each announcement effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

  In addition, the time information at the time of executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is managed not by the start of the variation but by a relative value from the start of the execution of the sub-effect block data by variation pattern. With this, when the same variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, for each variation pattern, each of the effects in the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data has an effect start time from the variation start time. Although different, the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern, so that the processing can be performed without any problem. Similarly, in the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern is also managed. It is managed by a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to the normal short reach. At this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

  In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined. In the normal short reach background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the normal short reach background are defined. The normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK”. Therefore, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is continuously executed until the end.

  In the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice, a function “NOP”, cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and group notice sub-effect block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group announcement sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the group announcement are defined. The group announcement sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the group liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub-effect block data.

  By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. Will be.

  Further, in the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern, the number of sub-effect block data columns is the same as the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern “SCH03_BLK”. no problem.

Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”, since an effect related to the notice is not performed, only the loss stop background sub-effect block data is executed.
Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. In the loss stop background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to a normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined. The loss stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” ends.

  FIG. 421 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data for each variation pattern, only the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is different from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described using the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 392B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an image in which a step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment is created by a video synthesis / motion creation graphic tool in step-up effect units (step-up 1 effect to 4 effects) to create a drawing data file. is there.

  The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. As shown in FIG. 422, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment in units of step-up effect.

  The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal announcement effects (step-up announcements 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up one effect is changed, four types of step-up announcements are performed as in the present embodiment. Can be executed, it is necessary to change four drawing data files. Considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data files are created in a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice in combination.

  FIG. 423 is a view for explaining the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in the present embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In the step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up three effects and step-up four effects are executed at predetermined timing.

  To explain the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, it is determined whether any one of the step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice obtained at the start of the change. You. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the process ends without executing the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, so that the step-up notice is not executed and drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice Step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected.
The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  When the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 executes the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 ends.

  Further, the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 executes the function "NOP", waits for the time designated by the parameter, and executes the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Step 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed, the data to be executed next is "DATA_END", and thus the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single advance notice can be realized by combining the effect scheduler data of the advance notice in the minimum configuration unit.

  Next, the step-up notice sub effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 423 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured to correspond to the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data in a one-to-one correspondence with the block configuration and the execution time. This makes it possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices with respect to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, thereby realizing an effect with a sense of unity.

  The step-up notice sub-effect block data is different from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the order of data access is acquired from the variation-specific sub-effect block data combination table “SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO”. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the obtained sub-effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the announcement effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling the various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is thereafter performed at a timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, by simply executing the corresponding block data based on the information that specifies the effect content such as the fluctuation pattern, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically acquired and the effect is executed at the defined timing It is possible to do.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of schedulers can be started and the schedule data can be independently executed by each scheduler, so that it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, and to improve the development efficiency. Can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included therein) is updated, the common schedule is provided by installing the scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to effect control of a gaming machine for a long time.

  Note that the scheduler in the present embodiment may be realized by software or may be realized by hardware. When the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler started when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the used area of the memory may be released. Stopping the scheduler can reduce the amount of memory used. For example, the schedule data may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the schedule data is completed, or when the gaming machine enters a customer waiting state, the scheduler may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler.

[19. Production control using LCD production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is configured by a combination of functions for controlling an effect target, similarly to the sub effect block data. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the driving device, and the like are to be controlled. However, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is to be controlled.

[19-1. LCD production scheduler function]
First, a function (scheduler function for liquid crystal effect) constituting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an instruction (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the above-described liquid crystal effect block data. Send and execute the production. Also, when executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler function, the attributes (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. LCD production scheduler function]
FIG. 424 is a diagram illustrating an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the outline of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In the present embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub-scheduler setting.

  First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is, for example, to specify the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and set the liquid crystal display target. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX” specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY” specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

  Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image or moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area that specifies enlargement or reduction when displayed on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or a moving image stored in a CGROM, or converting a coordinate unit. Or By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing the drawing process, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

Functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object.
The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY” specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle at which a liquid crystal display object is rotated and displayed will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and designating the angle for display, there is no need to store a plurality of rotated liquid crystal display objects, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  Functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX” specifies the X-axis value, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY” specifies the Y-axis value, and the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ” specifies the Z-axis value, and rotates the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display object by specifying an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value.

  Next, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is an α setting process. Specifically, the α value is designated to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating the degree of transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass through the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and specifically sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during the animation processing.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX” sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the screen in front or moved to the back. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that the object is drawn on the rearmost side.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information related to effect SW.
The effect SW, which will be described in detail later, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch the effect content. , Or perform another production. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets the effect SW information in the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information defining information of special control described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH” is a function for calling a sub-scheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a sub-scheduler and calling it back at a predetermined timing, the process can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. LCD production scheduler function parameters]
In the foregoing, an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Next, parameters specified when executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described with reference to examples. FIGS. 425 and 426 are diagrams illustrating an example of parameters for a liquid crystal effect scheduler function in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function are managed for each group, similarly to the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect and the group of the parameter are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement, a sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

  The sequence control parameter group includes “AAD_FRAME” “AAD_POS” “AAD_POS2” “AAD_POS3” “AAD_ALPHA” “AAD_ANGLE” “AAD_ENTRY” “AAD_ENTRY_B” “AAD_SKIP” “AAD_SKIP_B” “AAD_SCALE” “AAD_SCALE” “AAD_ASCALE” And so on. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for specifying a frame value, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying an α value that is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for specifying the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter for specifying the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for specifying a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the effect SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM”, and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of effect SWs registered, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter for specifying the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two numerical values having a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters for the footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT”, and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter for designating an index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes “AAD_ZUGARA” and the like. “AAD_ZUGARA” is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function includes “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for specifying a subscheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, effect control in a gaming machine has been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs are described by a program code representing the operation contents of the effector and the control procedure for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and have been created by a programmer having advanced technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in a frame where the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, design, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent years, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, various types of effects have been required to be executed, and complicated effect control has been required. As a result, a high level of technology is required for the individual programmers, and the number of development steps is increased, and it is difficult to secure necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of steps required for testing for the purpose of checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality has also increased.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) is not realized by the program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

  Specifically, a tool that can create data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order is used. With this tool, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect blocks are grouped for each state such as fluctuation patterns and big hits to create effect common blocks. By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a fluctuation pattern and a big hit is realized.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, the display or non-display of the effects related to the lottery, the effects and the replacement of the symbols, and the interactive effects on the external input by the player occur. Then, it is impossible to realize all the effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating an effect common block by the above-described tool, an effect switch (effect SW) for executing an effect at a predetermined timing or calling a program for executing a predetermined control. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for performing drawing is set, a callback always occurs regardless of whether the effect SW is “ON” or “OFF”. If the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, a predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and, when detecting the installed effect SW, dynamically calls a program function based on the detected effect SW (callback). Do). Then, a display list command is created on the basis of the information processed by the called-back program function, and it is possible to realize the ON / OFF of the effect display and the replacement of the effect. It should be noted that the program function called by the callback can also perform effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.). In addition, it is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag or updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize the display or non-display of the drawing by the plurality of effect blocks, the effect and the replacement of the design, and the interactive effect to the external input by the player. .

  A program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect and replacing the effect, which is called by the callback, is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, a designer or a plan creator who does not have a high level of program knowledge sets up the stage effect SW such that a predefined program function is called while setting stage effects such as images and moving images at the stage of stage design. Complex production specifications can be realized. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for each effect component, the development period can be significantly reduced. In addition, the effect contents can be edited based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be significantly reduced.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 427 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect switch according to the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  The effect SW number is associated with an effect SW group ID, an effect SW reset group ID, an effect SW attribute, an effect SW activation command address, an effect replacement information table address, and the like.

  The effect SW group is a set of effect SWs grouped according to the effect execution mode, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group belongs. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group. By designating the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group collectively are set. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be designated.

  Drawing 428 is a figure showing an example of composition of a production SW group of this embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group includes one or more active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, it includes the head group number of active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SWs, and the head group number of passive effect SWs and the number of passive effect SWs.

  The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW reset information is information for specifying whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether or not to call up a callback function for effect replacement when the effect SW is evaluated. The special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the effect SW. In the passive mode, the effect SW is statically evaluated. In the active mode, the effect SW is dynamically evaluated.

The effect SW activation command address is an address of the effect SW activation command table.
The effect SW activation command is a command string for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table.
FIG. 429 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect SW activation command table according to the present embodiment. FIG. 429 illustrates an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of the number of commands and data for the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by stage switch in step-up notice stage]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 430 is a diagram illustrating an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, in which (A) illustrates steps in which a step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) illustrates a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device in each step. An example is shown below.

  As shown in FIG. 430 (A), the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to a maximum of four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each step, an advanced effect to the next step is executed. . If the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and if not, the step-up notice ends as it is.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, an effect in which the display screen is filled with black ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the ink and the pattern of the filling. For example, when the black color is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow. Further, as the filling pattern, the expectation is higher as the number of positions where the painting is started is increased, and the expectation may be changed at the position itself where the painting is started. For example, when the filling is started from only the lower left corner, the degree of expectation is low, when the filling is started from the lower left and upper left two places, when the filling is started from the lower left, the upper left and the upper right three places. The degree of expectation increases in order, and the highest degree of expectation occurs when filling is started from four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, an extended effect to the next step-up notice is executed. The development effect is performed in a common manner halfway in order to increase the player's sense of expectation regardless of whether or not it actually develops to the next stage. The case of the step-up notice 1 will be described. First, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with a combination of the black color and the fill pattern determined by lottery. Thereafter, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (thinks), and characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 emerge. In the case of developing into the step-up notice 2, the ink is applied as it is and the display of the characters becomes dark, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not darkened and are blackened and are not displayed.

  In step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. As for the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of “change”, “opinion”, “spirit”, “continuation”, and “kill one hit”. In the production mode of the step-up notice 2, the screen is first filled while enlarging an area to be painted with a combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1 with the characters displayed. Thereafter, when the screen is completely filled with black ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink is gradually applied before the screen is completely filled with ink, and eventually the ink is completely removed, and the displayed characters disappear. Will be lost.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black ink by the step-up notice 2, and an effect of gradually applying black ink from this state is executed.
At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern in which ink is applied. For example, when ink is applied only from the lower left corner, the degree of expectation is low.When ink is applied from the lower left and upper left corners, ink is applied from the lower left corner, the upper left corner, and the upper right corner. The degree of expectation increases in the order of going, and the highest expectation occurs when ink is applied from the four corners. If the characters are displayed during the process of ink removal and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all of the ink is removed, the development effect is successful, and the process proceeds to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all of the black ink has been removed, the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the contents (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, in the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of "game", "opportunity", "development", "enthusiasm", "hot fever", and "happiness".
As for the character color, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

  Subsequently, a procedure for executing the above-described step-up notice by the effect SW will be described. 431 to 433 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 431 is a diagram showing correspondence between all effect contents and effect SW in step-up notice 1. FIG. 432 (A) is a step-up notice 1 for executing step-up notice 1 for filling with black ink from four directions on the screen. LCD production scheduler data and a drawing image, and (B) is red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. 5 shows a liquid crystal effect scheduler data and a drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 for executing step-up notice 1 to be painted. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

  FIG. 431 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1, and is classified according to each drawing (lower left drawing ink, upper left drawing ink, lower right drawing ink, upper right drawing ink, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the effect content are described in association with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects in each of four effects for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing sections, and 10 effects in total for each of the five effects for character failure and character success drawing sections, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, the effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing section is always one, and only one of the drawing sections “character failure” and “character success” is executed. The number is 5 effects in total of the drawing section "lower left", the drawing section "upper left", the drawing section "lower right", the drawing section "upper right", the drawing section "character failure" or the drawing section "character success".

  In addition, a method for determining the effect of each drawing section will be specifically described in accordance with the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1. First, the lottery of the step-up notice 1 is performed, and the effect contents related to the ink drawing are determined. The effect contents related to black drawing are, specifically, the selection of the position where black appears from the drawing section `` lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right '' and the color of black appearing from the selected black appearing location. Become. In addition, either the drawing section “character failure” or the drawing section “character success” and the contents of the character displayed at this time are displayed.

  Next, the structure of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without performing any control will be described with reference to FIG. . As described above, the total number of effects in the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success drawing sections. Is defined only. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without performing any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. At the same time, black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, and the characters of “change” are displayed in the drawing category “character failure” and the drawing category “character success” in light. The character of "change" is erased in "failure", and the character of "change" is clearly displayed in the drawing category "character success".

  Further, in FIG. 432 (B), the drawing section “lower left” is “red”, the drawing section “upper left” is “none”, the drawing section “lower right” is “none”, and the drawing A command is issued in which the section "upper right" is "red", the drawing section "character failure" is "spirit", and the drawing section "character success" is "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing section “lower left”, and red ink spreads from the drawing section “upper right”. In the drawing category "character failure", the character of "spirit" is erased.

  At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to “ON” for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “lower left” and “red”, and “upper right” is set to “red” for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section. Then, “LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED” is set to ON, and “LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA” is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “Character failure”. On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “character success” is “none”. Command is not effected, so that none of the effect SWs is set to ON, but to an OFF state.

  From the above, red ink spreads from the drawing section “lower left” and red ink spreads from the drawing section “upper right” in all of the effects of the step-up notice 1, and “screaming” in the drawing section “character failure”. The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying the character is set to ON in accordance with the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 433, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 432 (A), an effect for performing an effect in accordance with the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. A mechanism for performing a production replacement will be described.

  FIG. 433 is a view for explaining master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing section in the present embodiment, and effect SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data. 433 will be described in detail with reference to the lower left ink production replacement group in FIG. 433. The production SW corresponding to the master data of the liquid crystal production scheduler data is an index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. And an effect SW corresponding to “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left is “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED”. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. The effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

  The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating the display list command for drawing the effect, and defines the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. With the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” as a trigger (detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  The replacement program function called by the callback refers to the lower left ink production replacement table, determines all the production SWs registered in the lower left ink production replacement table, and specifies the production SW set to ON. I do. In the present embodiment, since the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “lower left” is “red” and the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, “from the lower left” corresponding to the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” The moving image number on the CGROM of “red ink” is specified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback passes the specified moving image number on the CGROM of red ink from the lower left to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 executes the CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black black appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, a display list command is created using the movie number on the CGROM corresponding to the movie in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

  The feature of the effect replacement by the callback according to the present embodiment is that a low-level control structure (a liquid crystal effect scheduler data in this embodiment, a data structure that is easy to change and is suitable for tooling) is changed to a high-level control structure (the present embodiment In the embodiment, the program function for replacement and the program function that is not suitable for change but that can execute complicated processing) are called back by callback, so that it is possible to separate the detection of the replacement timing and the replacement control, thereby simplifying the operation. A complicated process is realized using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data which is a data structure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the process is always performed by the callback regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of the present embodiment by callback, a structure for performing complicated control is adopted on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, and a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler is executed on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side. When effect control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code processed by the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and when adding a new function or changing the function, the program code must be executed. It is necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, which not only causes a problem due to the control change, but also affects the functions that were operating normally before the change, causing a new problem. There is a risk that it will.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback always executes the processing by the callback, regardless of the identifier (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW) for the callback, and the plurality of executions by the callback are performed. Judge whether or not execution is possible and the contents of processing in the callback function of. By creating the corresponding callback function to realize a single function, even when adding a new function or changing the function, there is no need to change the LCD production scheduler data structure, and the call corresponding to the new function This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the range of influence due to the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing a failure is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is performed centrally by a single large program, the execution analysis using multiple callback functions for realizing each function and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data However, the structure and configuration of the program can be further simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been made specifically for the replacement of the effect, but the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not limited to the replacement of the effect, but also the replacement of the design, the control of the display or non-display of the effect, and the control of the drawing target. The present invention is also applicable to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of another effect display device, and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. When the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is always a liquid crystal effect scheduler. The index SW on the CGROM corresponding to the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master and the replacement SW corresponding to the master exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined in the order of thousands. In situations where game specifications are frequently changed or game specifications are added between the planning and development of a gaming machine and its introduction into the market, the consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the production SW Is extremely difficult to maintain.

  In the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW of the master may be erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement may be incorrectly defined. It is possible that the above index number is erroneously registered in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the data number of the index SW on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and replacement is performed in an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. . Since the degree of expectation is set for each of the effects, it is possible that an effect dedicated to the big hit that does not appear due to a change in the loss may appear, which is a fatal malfunction as a gaming machine. As in the present embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the effect SW of the master and the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master, the consistency can be confirmed by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. Further, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data operates without any problem even if any data in the replacement table is defined, so that the control method is extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In the present embodiment, even if the effect of the master defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and must be replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and the effect is drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, black is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the painted state, and characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the black ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In either case of success or failure, an effect is performed in which black is gradually erased from the vertices of the display area. Therefore, an effect SW flag for four types of drawing patterns for gradually erasing black at each vertex is provided. (Layer) is defined. Also, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the results of the extended effects are defined.

  The configuration and control method of the upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group described in FIG. 433 are the same as those of the lower left ink replacement group. It is.

  In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, an effect SW flag (layer) corresponding to the mode may be defined in the animation of the displayed character, or one type of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by a parameter.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different rendering effects are defined by individually defining the rendering effect pattern for each appearance position or character content of black and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. Can be executed or a combined effect can be executed. Since the switching and combination of the productions only switch the setting of the production SW flag individually, the planners who compose the productions simply set the parameters with the tool without the need for new programs or other techniques. A variety of effects can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, dozens of types of drawing patterns can be realized only by combining four types of drawing patterns depending on the appearance position of black and two types of result display patterns of the development effect. This minimizes the types of programs to be developed, improves the development efficiency of production control programs for gaming machines, and improves the efficiency of inspection of the developed production control programs, thereby improving quality. Can be.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switch]
Next, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 434 is a diagram illustrating a control procedure using the effect switch of the present embodiment, and particularly illustrates an evaluation procedure for setting the effect switch to ON. In the present embodiment, first, upon receiving a main command (main control command) that triggers the effect from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues a peripheral control internal command issued to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing a preliminary lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub internal issued command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data that matches the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data. If there is data that matches, the peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

  The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW determination command string is not of fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, a main control command value and a sub internal command value, or a peripheral control internal issued command value and a peripheral control internal command value. . For example, the command to specify the start of fluctuation and the command to specify the probability state transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the command to specify the background of the peripheral control internal issued command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining a plurality of commands side-by-side, for example, even if the same mini-character notice has different mini-characters displayed for different backgrounds, the background command value is determined, and the mini-character command value is determined after specifying the background. For the first time, it is possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it is necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini-character notice in a row, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini-character corresponding to the background, There is no need to make multiple determinations, and for an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, a corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as an effect defined by a single command. Also, since a plurality of effect SWs can be defined for the same command value, a plurality of effect SWs can be activated simultaneously with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, and is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all effect SWs by a combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  From the above, as shown in FIG. 434, when the command “0x103001” is received, the effect SW flag stored in the RAM is stored because the “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 431 to 433, a predetermined process is called at the time of executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding notice effect. It is.

  In the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, examples of these functions will be described. FIG. 435 is a view for explaining an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function has an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON based on a regular program or a callback program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a regular program or a program that is called back, instead of starting the effect SW by a command.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function for turning off the effect SW from a regular program or a callback program. If the attribute of the effect SW is defined as “all reset”, the effect SW to be reset is determined based on the “reset target effect SW group ID” in the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. All effect switches belonging to the group are set to OFF.

  LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of a target effect SW from a regular program or a callback program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for acquiring a frame time from the start of the active effect SW from a regular program or a callback program.

[20-4. Example of effect switch implementation]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. FIG. 436 to FIG. 441 are diagrams each showing a part of a program code for executing control using the effect switch according to the present embodiment. The program code shown in each figure is described in C language.

  As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, a determination is made in the callback function not to perform the specific process, and the callback function is terminated.

  FIG. 436 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment. (A) is an example of a program code that defines the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of the effect SW control information. (C) is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group

  The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and includes effect SW group ID, effect SW group ID to be reset, effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), effect SW. It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW groups are grouped according to functions such as effect SW for performing the same (same kind) notice effect, effect SW for hold display, effect SW for notification, and the like. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

  The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for specifying an effect SW group for setting the effect SW to OFF when "reset effect SW all" is specified in "attrib bit assignment" described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively designate the effect SWs for which the processing is stopped (reset) at the same time when the effect SW is switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is represented by a bit similarly to the effect SW group ID, and a plurality of groups can be designated.

  The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the effect SW functions are as shown in FIG. 436 (B), and the contents will be described below.

  The passive (PASSIVE) / active (ACTIVE) information indicates a method for evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is “0”, the information is “PASSIVE”, and when the bit is “1”, the information is “ACTIVE”. In the passive mode, even if a command to activate the effect switch is received a plurality of times during the period in which the effect switch is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the effect switch is performed only once. If a command to activate the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect has been received. Active is used, for example, when a button is pressed a plurality of times within the button valid period to display a rendering effect corresponding to the button press.

  The special control information (special control behavior) is information for specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for rendering replacement at the time of evaluating the rendering SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a predefined replacement callback function is called at the time of effect SW evaluation defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. It is.

  The liquid crystal effect SW reset information is information for specifying whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, at the time of effect SW evaluation, effect SWs belonging to all the groups set by “reset target effect SW group ID” are set to OFF.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. As for the effect SW command information address, defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and executes a new effect SW control or effect by the output command.

  The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in the bit of the replacement information of the effect SW control information (when “with replacement” is specified). Is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG. 439.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In this embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as effect groups. The effect group includes an effect SW group ID, an active effect SW head ID, an active effect SW number, a passive effect SW head ID, and a passive effect SW number.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effect SWs is the number of active effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the passive effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID to the effect SW group ID to be reset, if “reset effect SW all reset” is designated in the “attrib bit assignment”, the continuous SW group ID belonging to the effect SW group ID is specified. It is possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect switches and the plurality of continuous active effect switches to OFF.

  FIG. 437 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code defining an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 437, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the effect SW numbers in an enumerated type in this way, when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in a program, it is not necessary to directly deal with the numerical values, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 438 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, wherein (A) illustrates the effect SW flag and (B) illustrates the effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether a process based on the corresponding effect SW is to be executed (ON / OFF) on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, “1” (ON) is set, and when not executed, “0” (OFF) is set.

  The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 436 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. The effect SW information table is stored in an array using an effect SW number as an index, similarly to the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all effect SWs is stored.

  Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for performing the effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. FIG. 439 is a diagram showing an example of effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment and program data defining the effect SW replacement table. ) Shows a production SW replacement table.

  FIG. 439 (A) is program data showing the configuration of effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material numbers are stored.

  The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”, this corresponds to the case where the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the rendering SW is evaluated to replace the material information with the corresponding replacement data.

FIG. 439 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material number defined in the replacement table are defined. In the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored.
In the present embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure does not matter.

A specific replacement method first refers to the effect SW replacement table information, and evaluates all effect SW effect switch master data and effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by a command issued according to the result of the effect lottery. Here, the description will be made assuming that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same line in the effect SW replacement table is specified using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The line corresponding to the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data is the material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material number to be replaced is specified.
The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer Configuration]
Next, a layer for displaying an image or a moving image will be described. The layers can be used for general purposes by displaying the liquid crystal display object by dividing the object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and drawing. For example, by dividing the background layer, even if the displayed character is changed, it is possible to draw with a common method.

  In the present embodiment, a table for storing layer information (layer information table) is individually stored and managed, so that a change in one layer does not affect other layers. Can be.

  FIG. 440 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data that defines the layer information table according to the present embodiment. (A) is a list that stores addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background). Indicates the contents of The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and it is determined whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table in the callback function based on the information of the effect SW. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 441 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data that defines the layer information table according to the present embodiment. (A) illustrates the contents of the layer information table (first half of the preliminary notice), and (B) illustrates the layer information table (preliminary notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half and the second half of the notice both determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, similarly to the layer information table for the background.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 440 (A), layer information tables for background, design display, first-half notice, big hit effect, character action, hold display, etc. are defined.

  FIG. 440 (B) shows a background layer information table. In the effect according to the present embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background, and a river background are defined. Medium background, high-probability middle background) are also defined. Further, a variation can be added, such as partially changing the background color, by the effect SW.

  FIG. 441 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the advance notice, in which a roulette advance notice, a blackout advance notice, a window advance notice are defined, and a notice clear command is also defined. FIG. 441 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the advance notice, in which a step-up advance notice, a button mini-character advance notice, and a conversation advance notice are defined. Is also defined. The notice clearing layer table is used to end the drawing of the notice to be executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the effect target SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “reset all effect SW” is defined by “attrib bit assignment”. When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the effect SWs of the advance notice belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the reset target effect SW group ID are set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW is performed. Ends, and the display is hidden. The notice clearing layer table is empty because no effect is performed.

  At the end of the area allocated to the list that stores the layer table or the table that stores the layer information, a termination determination record is stored. When the termination determination record is detected, it is determined that data reading has been completed. It is possible to do. As a result, the data amount (the number of records) can be dynamically changed without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Next, an implementation example of a notice effect using liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described using a step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Direction Layer Table / LCD Direction Block Data]
FIG. 442 is a diagram showing an example of the program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block according to the present embodiment. FIG. 442 shows a liquid crystal layer table for a step-up notice effect, and FIG. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 442 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks are the same as the number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined in pairs with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In the present embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580), the effect switch “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. A callback is executed based on the effect switch “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether or not to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the callback function based on the information of the effect switch “LCDSW_STEPUP”.

  The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect switch, total number of drawn frames, loop start frame position, reproduction time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 442 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and it is configured so that the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting a liquid crystal effect block. For example, when adding the step-up notice 5, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the terminal.

  The effect SW controls the execution of the corresponding liquid crystal effect block based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The drawing total frame number defines the total rendering frame number of the liquid crystal rendering block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 in the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced by (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” on the first line.

  The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block `` LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 '', so after the completion of the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block `` LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 '', the liquid crystal effect block `` LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 '' When loop playback is performed from the beginning or in the middle, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added frame number is defined as the total playback time. Step-up notice 1 Since the reproduction time of the liquid crystal effect block of “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” is (150) frames, if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, the reproduction is performed during the total reproduction time. This can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at loop start frame positions. An effect in which the symbols fluctuate without being determined at the time of the pseudo continuous effect can be realized by using a loop playback function.

  Further, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of the reproduction even though the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment are the same is due to some trouble. If the next effect common block is not executed, the drawing is not updated, and in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping, the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded.

  In the present embodiment, the control by the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the case where the effects from the step-up notice 1 to the step-up notice 3 are executed is performed by executing the lottery of the notice related to the effect on the peripheral control board 1530 and then performing the step-up. A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command, and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice effect are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect switch “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect switch “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect switch “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because no step-up notice 4 command has been issued.

  After setting the effect switch, a callback is executed based on all effect switches defined in the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and a callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect switch is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect switch set to ON is executed. In the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON, the liquid crystal effect blocks “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, “LCD_YSU_STEPUP_SUPP. On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, since a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks are defined in the liquid crystal effect common block and it is possible to control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect blocks using the effect switch, it is necessary to execute a plurality of notices in combination. , And display / non-display of each effect can be switched.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block in each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 443 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  In the content of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block serving as the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function indicating the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect block will be specifically described. Explaining with reference to the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the first (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, since the number of execution frames (120) is “LCD_NOP”, the wait is performed for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of executed frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” ends.

  As described with reference to FIG. 430, at the end of the step-up notice of each step of the step-up notice, this is realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” to realize the execution of the development effect to the next step-up notice. are doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not wait, and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” executes the wait by “LCD_NOP”, waits for (120) frames, and then starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2”, so that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” The liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” starts executing when (120) frames have elapsed since the start of the execution. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the next step-up notice 2.

  In addition, a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data can be defined in the liquid crystal effect block in chronological order. When the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined continuously, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the number of execution frames is defined. To execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the next line.

  After the total number of functions is defined in the effect scheduler data of step-up notice 2, function NOP to wait while executing step-up notice effect 1, function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 to execute step-up notice effect 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of the scheduler data is defined. Step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4 are described in the same manner.

[23. Button mini character production implementation example]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data of the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which the operation of the effect button is encouraged while the symbol is changing, and the effect is such that the mini-character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Button mini character production mode]
FIG. 444 is a view for explaining the outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini-character effect is executed when a main command is received or when a change is started, and a lottery is performed. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the reception period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. The first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the reception period of the button operation input, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  More specifically, if the player wins the execution lottery of the button mini character effect and 90 frames (f) elapse from the start of the change, the button mini character first half valid period is set. The first effective period of the button mini character is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) prompting the user to press a button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the first effective period of the button mini character. When you operate the button during the first half period of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed. As will be described later in detail, when a button is operated during the first half of the valid period of the button mini-character, the effect SW for displaying the mini-character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by callback.

  When the button is operated during the second half valid period of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed in the same manner as in the first half valid period of the button mini character. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character. However, the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

  When the button is operated during the second half valid period of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed as in the first half valid period of the button mini character. In FIG. 444, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character. However, the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 445 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 445, the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” corresponding to the button mini-character effect has the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the total number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined in pairs with numbers and effect SW. In the present embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180), the effect switch “LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” are defined. Subsequently, a total drawing frame number (150) frames, an effect switch “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and a liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is first executed for (180) frames. Thereafter, during the (150) frame, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is completed.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 446 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 446 are the same as the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call the callback function for determining whether to execute the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects that define the active attribute in the effect SW control information. SW. Therefore, a rendering effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 447 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing a button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 447 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 377. First, in the first half of the effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the head of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is executed, and weighting is performed for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. . Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” corresponding to the first half effective period of the button mini-character is executed (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” ends. In the second half of the effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the head of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” corresponding to the second half valid period of the button mini character is executed, and the wait is performed for (30) frames from the start of the change. After that, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” corresponding to the second half valid period of the button mini character is executed (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” is ended.

As described above, the effect switches “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are active effect switches. If the command to be issued is issued a plurality of times, the rendering effects corresponding to the effect SWs “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed by the number of times issued. In addition, a callback is always generated every frame by the effect SW, and the corresponding callback function is called.
The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed for each frame even after the button pressing control is completed and until the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for effect rendering during the button effective period is created and controlled by the active effect switch, so that the period during which the callback is executed without separately determining the button effective period is set as the button effective period. Becomes possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting the button, the number of hits can be counted, and an effect corresponding to the count can be executed. Also, by calling sub-effect scheduler data including a function for controlling the lamp in the callback function, the lamp can be turned on in response to a button operation. Further, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory, the operation corresponding to the number of button operations can be performed, and the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation effective period ends can be executed. In the procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position, for example, an effect block including a function of returning the accessory to the initial position by executing a standby by “LCD_NOP” until the button operation valid period ends is executed.

[24. LCD production scheduler for design]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when executing the announcement effect, it is possible to replace the drawn content according to the gaming state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be announced. Similarly, it is also possible to replace an identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variably displayed game when a predetermined condition such as a game state is satisfied. Hereinafter, an outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the change display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and a reel on which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order is assigned to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a mode corresponding to the game state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated for each frame similarly to the announcement effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the index number of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification symbol on the CGROM and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. . A reel number is defined for the effect SW for identification symbol replacement. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game state or effect. For example, when the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, the river background, and the sea background are different from each other, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, the left symbol on the river background is R3, and the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol on the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of the identification symbol. The reel arrangement means that the identification symbols are displayed in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, and 0 is returned to 1 after 0, and the identification symbol design and identification symbol are displayed. What defines the total number and the display order of the identification symbols is defined as a reel index.
A plurality of reel indexes can be defined.

  In addition, the table for replacing the identification symbol includes an identification symbol replacement table corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, an index number on the CGROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. In the reel index replacement work number table, a work number for reel replacement on one or a plurality of RAMs corresponding to each reel index is defined. The reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol can be recognized as stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-run variation or the fixed symbol number value of the identification symbol. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of the change in accordance with the effect contents.

  The identification of the data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When the callback is executed based on the rendering SW for the identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is set in the callback function for the identification symbol replacement. The target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table based on the table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is extracted, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is specified in the replacement table of the identification symbol, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Identify using the index replacement work number.

  In addition, even when the effect of the master defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected in the same manner as the effect replacement, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used. The display list command is always created using the index numbers on the master CGROM defined in the replacement table, and the effect contents are drawn.

  Further, by performing the replacement of the identification symbol every frame, even if an incorrect identification symbol is displayed due to noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to a normal display. Also, by setting the reels according to the game state, even if a problem occurs in replacement of the identification symbol due to an error, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, a description will be given of the timing of the occurrence of the callback when the effect SW is detected. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing section based on the parameters passed to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 448 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing section that can be determined in the callback function when the callback is performed by the effect SW according to the present embodiment.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A” generates a callback before the liquid crystal A drawing starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” generates a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B are separate liquid crystals, and before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, it is possible to determine whether the drawing is completed. It is possible to draw on the liquid crystal A with the trigger.

  For "LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM", a callback occurs before all drawing is started, and for "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM", a callback occurs after all drawing is completed. By performing the judgment before starting drawing, it is possible to initialize the frame buffer with the required background color before drawing, or to judge the end of drawing, so that it is possible to instruct another effect device to execute the effect when drawing is completed. It becomes possible.

  For “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM”, a callback occurs before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and for “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM”, a callback occurs after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be executed before or after drawing of a specific layer is completed. For example, if a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by performing the determination before the start of the layer drawing, the display of the notification with the higher priority can be drawn in an enlarged manner. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of the layer drawing, the effect is drawn around the symbol drawn in synchronization with the timing at which the symbol with the high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, so that the symbol with the high expectation can be obtained. It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when stops.

  As described above, it is possible to specify a drawing section and execute a predetermined process before or after the start of drawing. Further, it is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 448, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before the common block drawing starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. By performing a judgment before starting the common block drawing, it is possible to stop the execution of the specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to the single rendering constituting the liquid crystal rendering common block and stop rendering the rendering, or to perform the liquid crystal rendering common block By performing the determination after the end of the drawing, it becomes possible to execute a liquid crystal effect common block different from the liquid crystal effect common block scheduled to be executed at the time of starting the fluctuation.

  In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the liquid crystal effect block drawing in the liquid crystal effect common block starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after the liquid crystal effect block drawing is completed. By performing the determination before the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed based on the result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing the determination after the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it is possible to add a new drawing to the contents drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing contents of the liquid crystal effect block for drawing a single effect. Further, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback before the start of drawing a still image and a moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can generate a callback after the completion of drawing a still image and a moving image. By performing the determination before starting the drawing of a still image or a moving image, various effects can be replaced. Further, by performing determination after drawing of a still image or a moving image is completed, it is possible to add a drawing of an effect according to the content of replacement of various effects.

  As described above, achievable control differs depending on the drawing section. Therefore, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Direction switch group management]
As described so far, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect schedule data for each liquid crystal effect block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine or the division of the effect. Is done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

  When the effect is performed, images and the like are drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, the drawing based on the step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (notice_first half one layer). FIG. 449 is a diagram illustrating an example of the drawing results of the individual layers and the drawing results of all the layers at the time of performing the announcement effect of the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer. However, if these effect SWs are individually managed, the processing may be complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SWs are grouped and managed for each layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the effect.

  For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449, the effect SW group background, effect SW group design, and effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and effect SWs may be managed for each state of the gaming machine or effect classification.

  In this way, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, individual effect elements can be controlled collectively. For example, when the currently displayed background and the symbol display and the hold display according to the background are changed to another background when a new change is started, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer are classified according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. As a result, it is possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display according to the current background together with the background, and to perform the symbol display and the hold display according to the new background on the corresponding layer. It is possible to switch the drawing only for a required effect display from among a plurality of effect displays displayed in layers.

  Also, in an effect that spans the gaming state, for example, in a jackpot effect after the start of the change and after the end of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the effect of the big hit. It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the above-described effect group to be hidden is defined as a reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which all effect SW resets have been designated is designated as a liquid crystal effect common block at the start of a change. It can be realized by defining it in the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, all the effects are managed as a common block in units of blocks of a fixed length in order to efficiently control the complicated game effects. Thus, by selecting a production block according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the preliminary lottery, and drawing based on the selected production block, it is possible to realize a series of productions such as fluctuation display of symbols and big hits, and complicated control. Without performing, the control which synchronizes the sub-production such as an accessory, a lamp, and a sound output with the drawing content was realized. In the common block, a period that is delimited at a predetermined timing from the start of the symbol change to the symbol determination is set, and these periods correspond to, for example, the first half change and the second half change, and are assigned to the change pattern. Was set according to the fluctuation time of the symbol.

  With such a configuration, the common block can be used for general purposes in a plurality of types of variation patterns. Furthermore, by ensuring the independence of the notice effect performed in the first half variation and the notice effect performed in the second half change, the degree of freedom of the combination of the common blocks can be increased.

  However, as described above, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period, it is difficult to achieve an effect that continues from the start to the end of the change only by combining effect blocks of a fixed length. When performing such an effect that spans a plurality of periods, the preceding common block and the following common block are associated with each other, and the versatility is reduced.In addition, each common block is independently executed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the effect. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it was necessary to create and control program codes individually instead of setting program data.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, in the present embodiment, in addition to performing a variable display of symbols and a series of big hits by combining effect blocks of a fixed length in all effects, the length of the effect block Is exceptionally not a fixed length, but a production block length adapted to the production period is allowed. Furthermore, by rendering effect blocks having different rendering times in combination, and rendering at the same time a rendering block that straddles the combined rendering block, a rendering effect that continues from the start to the end of the variation is realized.

  An effect that spans a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown effect in which a number is displayed in a countdown manner when a symbol starts to change, and the countdown display is continued from the first half change to the second half change. FIGS. 450A and 450B are diagrams illustrating an example of a common block over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment. FIG. The configuration of a liquid crystal announcement effect block by a common block over a plurality of periods is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 450, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”, the first half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds”, and the second half fluctuation is “normal short reach”. As shown in FIG. 450 (A), in the first half change, a step-up notice and a BTN logo role item fall notice are executed, and in the second half change, a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed. The content of each announcement production is as described above. Also, a countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

  In FIG. 450 (B), liquid crystal effect block data of a notice effect using a common block (step-up notice, BTN logo item fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice), and group notice from the start of the step-up notice The structure of the effect block of the countdown notice performed during the period until the end is shown. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

  The effect block of the countdown notice is constituted by a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a function NOP that waits until the second half change ends after the liquid crystal effect notice block data, and the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data is started is a NOP that is executed before the step-up notice is started, and the function NOP that waits until the second half change is completed is a NOP that is executed after the group notice ends. The same waiting time is set.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception during the execution period of the effect block, the operation of the common block can be performed more flexibly. In addition, by setting the standby time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of, for example, the execution timing of another effect block being shifted due to the exception setting. The control of the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
To enhance the interest of the game and to shorten the processing time related to drawing, drawing data for one LCD screen is taken out of the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. Thus, processing such as reuse of an image, deformation, and additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various effect expressions have been efficiently realized.

  FIG. 451 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image written in each layer is written to write an image in a frame buffer. As shown in FIG. 451, conventionally, an image drawn on each layer is written in a frame buffer so as to be superimposed and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, the moving image or the still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Further, the moving image and the still image displayed on the notice layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Finally, the moving image and the still image related to the reserved layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command, and the drawing data for one frame is created.

  After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. After a new effect is applied around the design to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, the drawing data is written back to the frame buffer, and one frame of drawing data for the next display is created.

  In this way, the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, such image conversion according to the related art can realize only image conversion for one frame of drawing data. In addition to addition of a new drawing element to one frame of a liquid crystal drawing screen, one frame of drawing data is added. It is limited to enlargement or reduction of the entire liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on a drawing element drawn on each layer or each drawing element in a layer on a capture buffer.

  The reason why image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that drawing elements in each effect, for example, backgrounds, designs, and notices, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order. Is overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since a drawing element is a set of colored dots (points) when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to extract a drawing element in a rectangle, it will be overwritten by another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element in the overwritten portion has been lost.

  At present, the need for reusing image data for one screen of a liquid crystal display that has been drawn has been reduced due to the improvement in the processing capability of the VDP. However, the expression of effects has been diversified for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. Therefore, the load is expected to increase due to the complicated drawing process.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problem and perform more diverse effects, image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When rendering image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display instead of adding the image data, it is possible to dynamically change the image during rendering in each effect display unit that composes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display. A complex rendering expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

  Specifically, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW for each effect block is included in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of drawing the liquid crystal, and the process (program function) is dynamically called based on the information of the effect switch incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (callback).

  When changing the image, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the corresponding effect block in the called back program function are not drawn on the frame buffer, but are allocated on the RAM of the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after the image is changed or a new image is added to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image of a specific notice only, adding a new image, replacing the effect of only the background, changing the image for an image in which multiple effects are superimposed, and adding a new image Additional can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a specific description will be given of a configuration in which the image drawn on each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the converted image is written in the frame buffer. FIG. 452 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and writing the converted image file to the frame buffer according to the present embodiment.

  As described above, one or more image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers, which are different from the frame buffers, are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, the image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and the image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer are combined to enable complicated image conversion.

  More specifically, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when a display list command is created at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the rendered effect SW, and the callback function performs image conversion.

  In FIG. 452, first, before starting drawing the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before the drawing of the symbol layer is started, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is applied to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before the drawing of the notice layer is started, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the rendering of all the effect elements related to the notice layer is completed, a display list command for rotating the notice drawing of each effect element of the notice layer in the function called back based on the effect SW is provided. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all effect elements of the suspension layer are written in the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

  By the above procedure, unlike the above-described conventional image conversion, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on each layer drawing unit, drawing element unit constituting a layer, and regardless of the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that callbacks based on the same effect SW are performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the type of drawing timing are as described with reference to FIG. 448 described above.

  Further, by performing the image conversion by the callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the object of the image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, the timing of creating a display list command for drawing an image to be converted is based on a lottery result value of a notice lottery or a result of an interactive operation by a user's external input. It is possible to determine a conversion method.

[29. RAM-less transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created on the basis of animation data stored on a CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source to draw a game effect. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in a buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the creation of the display list command for one screen, the external request DMA (transfer means) Was used to transmit the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

  However, at present, the effect specifications become complicated and the processing load increases, so that the processing time such as the preliminary lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesizing processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems, the motor system The processing time of the motor data creation processing is also increasing due to the increase in the number. Since the processing time of the peripheral control such as the effect is performed at a predetermined cycle, when the processing having a high load as described above is performed repeatedly, the processing may not be completed within the cycle. .

  Synchronize game control by the main control unit and production control by the peripheral control unit based on the processing cycle, unless the processing can be completed within the cycle, except when the processing cannot be completed within the cycle in exceptional cases. Cannot be performed, and the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device are separated from each other, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, it has been necessary to reduce the processing time of the peripheral control processing by reducing the time required for processing with a high load in the peripheral control processing such as the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the peripheral control process, a relatively high-load drawing process, in particular, the above-described animation data on the CGROM is analyzed, and the processing time for generating a native display list command that can be processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a is reduced. Means for reducing the processing time and reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 453 is a view for explaining the procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 453, first, the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module acquires various liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and analyzes and converts the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information (display parameter values corresponding to VDP register numbers and register numbers) related to display list commands to be transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command executable by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when the callback function called by the effect switch is executed when executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary, and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Then, in the process in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a processes the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, display list transfer setting is performed for the external request DMA. As a result, the VDP native display list commands stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c are acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA, and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  Upon receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a using the external request DMA in the processing cycle following the creation of the display list command group. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting a huge amount of liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into a group of VDP native display list commands imposes a large processing load. In the case where a plurality of VDPs of different manufacturers are mounted on one gaming machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which some or all of the display list command groups can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 454 is a view for explaining a procedure for transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in the present embodiment.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 454, first, the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module performs display list transfer setting for the external request DMA. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b in a manner similar to the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is a converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the specified liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers the data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts a VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed, and a transfer interrupt request is issued to the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  When detecting the interruption from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the interruption factor is an interruption by the interruption display list command in the interruption processing module, and executes the callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and performs effect replacement and symbol replacement. The effect replacement method is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 439 and the like, and the design replacement method is also the same as that described with reference to FIG. 439 and the like. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data correspondence callback information table, effect SWs corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data are defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command to restart display list analysis to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for display list analysis restart, generates a transfer restart request for the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

  By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without any conversion of the VDP native display list relating to all effects other than replacement. Instead, the transfer can be performed from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

  With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a associated with the display of an image, and to speed up image processing. In addition, since the used area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

  The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only a frequently used VDP native display list command group, and may process a less frequently used VDP native display list command in a conventional procedure. As a result, the processing speed of the display list command that is frequently used can be shortened, so that the overall processing speed can be increased and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. In addition, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (moving image) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and processing of images different depending on models and versions is performed in a conventional procedure, thereby improving development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
Processors (CPU, MPU) used in game control of gaming machines and peripheral control (effect control) can basically handle integer and floating-point data types. The integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are a char (character, character) type, an int (integer) type, and a long (long integer) type, and have a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes, respectively. .
The floating-point types are a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and have a size of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

  Regardless of the CISC processor or the RISC processor, the processor used for the peripheral control of the gaming machine can read and write the data stored in the memory (ROM, RAM) in units of one byte at all addresses. Machine. Note that addresses for reading and writing a plurality of bytes of data are not limited to this. When the processor reads data of a plurality of bytes, the data is always read from a byte boundary, and when the processor accesses the data beyond the byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, the execution of the program is delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or the processing is interrupted due to a runtime exception. Roll around.

  However, in the current development of gaming machines, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur during execution of the program, and the execution speed of the program may be reduced. In the peripheral control of the gaming machine, since it is necessary to complete all the processes within a predetermined processing cycle, a decrease in the execution speed of the program may be a serious problem. In particular, since the effects of the gaming machine are configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. A data structure is adopted.

  In order to solve the above problem, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a data structure including a plurality of pieces of information used for game control, when storing data corresponding to the data structure on a memory, each information Explicitly embeds empty data between the areas where the By adjusting the data access start position by the processor and arranging the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of alignment violation and prevent the execution speed of the program from decreasing. Can be. Since it is a huge task to adjust the alignment of the data structures on all ROMs and RAMs, the load on the processor is large and the processing time is long. It is desirable to perform alignment adjustment using a data structure on a ROM or a RAM related to a conversion process, a control process related to drawing of a liquid crystal, a lamp control process, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the above-described processing.

[31. Configuration for displaying multiple identification symbols]
By the way, in recent years, a variety of effects have been required in order to enhance the interest of the game, so that the effect contents on the effect display device have become complicated and the drawing contents have been diversified. In the embodiment described so far, only one set of identification symbols for notifying the result of the variable display is displayed, and relatively various effects are added to the variable display of this set of identification symbols to play the game. Although it was mainly to progress, some players do not like a wide variety of productions, and while developing a gaming machine that meets a wide range of player needs is an issue, In a configuration in which a variety of effects frequently appear, there is a possibility that the entertainment interest of the game is reduced. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine that meets a wide range of player needs, a configuration capable of displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in a unique mode will be described below. More specifically, a plurality of display areas for performing the variable display of the identification symbol on the effect display device 1600 are assigned to one or a plurality of display devices (display screens). In order to cope with the above, the variable display of another set of identification symbols is simultaneously performed. Each display area is common in that the result of the variable display is reported by the identification symbol, but is displayed in a different presentation mode such as the variation mode of the identification symbol.

[31-1. Aspect of Display Area of Identification Symbol]
FIG. 455 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the identification symbols when the plurality of sets of identification symbols are variably displayed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a in the present embodiment; (A) is a configuration example in which a display area A and a display area B of an identification symbol are provided on one display screen of the effect display device 1600, and (B) is a configuration example in which the identification symbol is displayed on each display screen when having two display screens. This is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B.

  In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol are provided on one screen, and the display area A is allocated to the upper part of the screen and the display area B is allocated to the lower part of the screen. A first identification symbol 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and a second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), the display area A and the display area B are configured as display areas having the same size, and the display area A and the display area B are separated by a wavy boundary extending in the central horizontal direction. Have been. In addition, the first identification symbol 8010 is configured by a three-digit symbol of a first left symbol 8010a, a first middle symbol 8010b, and a first right symbol 8010c. Similarly, the second identification symbol 8020 is formed by a three-digit symbol of a second left symbol 8020a, a second middle symbol 8020b, and a second right symbol 8020c according to the fact that the first identification symbol 8010 is a three-digit symbol. Be composed. The sizes of the display areas A and B are not limited to the same size, but may be different sizes.

For the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, the variable display starts at the same time and stops at the same time. The stop timing of each symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is arbitrary, but the timing at which the stop modes of all identification symbols are finally determined is the same.
Further, the final stop symbol is a combination of the same stop symbols (lottery result) so that the player does not mistakenly recognize any of the identification symbols and does not give a sense of incongruity. For example, when a winning result is derived as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 are all in the same symbol combination (eg, “777”) and are synchronized with the second symbol. All individual identification symbols of the identification symbol 8020 also have the same symbol combination (eg, “777” equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). In addition, in the case of deriving the result without the reach as a result of the lottery, the symbol combination in which the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 do not constitute the reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) (for example, “135”, "224"), and the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 do not constitute the reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) in synchronization with the symbol combination (equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). "135", "224", etc.). In addition, in the case of deriving the result with or without reach as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 constitute the reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), but not all the symbols are the same. Combinations (for example, “131”, “242”, etc.), and the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 do not constitute the reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) in a form synchronized with them ( "135", "224", etc. equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010).

  Note that the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B may be any symbol display mode that allows the player to recognize that the symbols are the same symbol combination. For example, one of the display areas is configured to display a symbol combination in a symbol display mode (such as “123”) composed of “Kanji numerals”, while the other display area is composed of a symbol composed of “alphanumeric characters” or the like. You may be comprised so that a symbol combination may be displayed by a display mode ("123" etc.). Further, the symbol combination may be displayed in the same type of symbol display mode in both display areas (for example, “123” is displayed in both display areas). In displaying the same type of symbol display mode, the display style (font) may be the same or different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is set to three. However, if a symbol combination equivalent to the finally derived symbol combination can be shown to the player, the other symbols are used. The first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may each be composed of two digits, or the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may each have four digits. It may be configured with the same number of digits or more. Although details will be described later, in the first identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 when the stop state of the second identification symbol 8020 is finally determined. In the process of changing and displaying the one identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be temporarily changed to a number different from the final number of digits.

  In the present embodiment, the same type of symbol display mode (alphanumeric numeral symbol in this embodiment) is adopted in both display areas of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, but the number of each identification symbol is not changed. The mode of the additional decoration display added to each symbol is different. Specifically, in the first identification symbol 8010, an additional decoration is displayed for each of the identification symbols, an impact is given to each of the identification symbols, and various effects are executed by the additional decorations. High decorative dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 does not have the additional decoration display like the first identification symbol 8010, or at least has the additional decoration display simpler than the first identification symbol 8010 (low). Decoration dynamic display).

  Further, the types of the symbols constituting the first identification symbol 8010 and the types of the symbols constituting the second identification symbol 8020 do not necessarily have to correspond exactly or exactly one to one. For example, the first identification symbol 8010 has a numeric symbol (0 to 9) and a character symbol (for example, a symbol imitating an airplane) as symbols variably displayed in each identification symbol according to the effect mode. The second symbol may be only a numeral symbol (0-9). Also, in this case, when the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped at the character symbol, the symbol is changed again so that the final stopped symbol is controlled to be a numeric symbol, and so on. It is conceivable that the character design includes a special game element different from the numeric design, and the numeric design is directly linked to the final lottery result, while the character design is not the final lottery result but exclusively It can be positioned as being used specifically for production in the process of variable display.

  In the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed (high-decoration dynamic display) until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variable display (design variation). For example, in the variable display of the identification symbol, the display is switched from a high-speed display mode in which the player cannot easily recognize the content of the identification symbol to a low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the content of the identification symbol at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as described above, by executing the callback based on the effect SW for identification symbol replacement, the identification symbol replacement timing based on the stop symbol or the symbol stop timing at the switching timing of the identification symbol. In addition, the identification symbol is replaced using the reel index replacement work number table, the decoration on the identification symbol is finely decorated just before the stop, and the player who pays attention to the first identification symbol 8010 is given an interesting feature until the stop. And

  It should be noted that the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A can change all or a part of the identification symbol constituting the first identification symbol 8010 depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. The first identification symbol 8010 is variously changed in the progress of the game depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of symbol row data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A are provided (for example, symbol row data of 0 to 9 and symbol row data of 0 to 9). At the time of switching, at the time of effect mode switching, or at the time of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol, a symbol line data selection effect SW (for example, a symbol corresponding to the symbol line data of 0 to 9) individually corresponding to the plurality of symbol line data types. By setting the column data selection effect SW1 and the symbol sequence data selection effect SW2) corresponding to the symbol sequence data of zero to nine to ON and setting the other effect SWs to OFF, it is used for displaying the first identification symbol 8010. The pattern sequence data can be changed variously, and various effects can be executed.

  Further, as described above, in the first identification symbol 8010, it is assumed that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 when finalized. You may comprise so that it may change temporarily to the number of digits different from a number. For example, although the final display will be 3 digits, the display will be 2 digits only for a specific period during the variable display (for example, the reach-inducing period that determines whether or not to reach after the left symbol stops). Etc. can be exemplified. This may be performed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern and the like. For example, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern and the like may be used. As the effect SW to be defined, a digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to the digit number data (for example, a digit number data selection effect SW1 corresponding to three digit number data, a digit number data corresponding to two digit number data) When two digits are displayed by using the selection effect SW2), various effects can be executed by setting the digit number data selection effect SW2 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF. .

  In the first identification symbol 8010, not only the identification symbol itself is changed to change the display mode, but also an effect using the additional decoration display made on the identification symbol as described above is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 455 (A), by displaying a star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010, an advantageous lottery result (such as a hit) in the variable display during execution is obtained. It may be suggested that there is a high possibility of being derived. At this time, the degree of expectation may be notified according to the number and color of the additional decorations 8011 or the type of motion (for example, the number of the additional decorations 8011 is changed from 1 to 3 to 5 in the order of expectation). The degree of expectation may be increased, or the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of white → blue → red in the color of the additional decoration 8011, or the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of stationary → vibration → rotational operation of the additional decoration 8011. Or). Also, by displaying the same additional decoration 8011 on the right identification symbol 8010c, the effect of the first identification symbol 8010 is further noticed by the player, so as to more clearly indicate that the degree of expectation has increased. Is also good. Further, a different additional decoration may be applied to each of the identification symbols, and the degree of expectation to derive an advantageous lottery result from any of the first identification symbols 8010 may be notified.

  Further, as another example, effect display control for superimposing a flame effect image (white, blue, red) as an additional decoration display different from the above-described star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on each symbol included in the first identification symbol 8010 is performed. Then, an effect of changing the color of the flame according to the degree of expectation may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of white → blue → red). As described above, when a plurality of additional decoration displays are provided for the first identification symbol 8010, a lottery or the like is performed based on the result of the winning lottery to determine whether the peripheral control board 1510 displays any of the additional decoration displays. The determination result may be reflected and executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like.

  In the display area A, the additional decoration display to be added to the first identification symbol 8010 is drawn on a layer different from the layer displaying the identification symbol. As a result, the display control of the identification symbol can be common control irrespective of the presence or absence and the type of the additional decoration display. In addition, by drawing the identification symbol and the additional decoration display on separate layers, it is possible to specify whether the additional decoration display is to be displayed on the front side or the rear side of the identification symbol, and set by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. If this is done, it can be controlled automatically when the performance is performed. Further, as described above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern and the like, and the corresponding process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more effective effect without complicating the effect control.

  Further, in the display area A where the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, a character effect display may be executed independently of the identification symbol. For example, in a reach state in which the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, an effect of displaying a character corresponding to the degree of expectation (the possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived depending on the type and action of the character). (Design suggestion) may be executed.

  Further, the background display of the display area A may be changed in accordance with the degree of expectation of the lottery result in the variable display (a symbol effect suggesting a possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived depending on the type of the background display). Further, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect of changing only the background display color may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red).

  As described above, in the display area A, the character effect display and the background display are also drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn, so that the character symbol display and the background display are displayed on the front side of the identification symbol. It is possible to specify whether to display on the back side or display on the back side (for example, the character effect display is the front side, the background display is the back side, etc.), and if they are set in advance in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, Can be controlled automatically. This makes it possible to make the control for performing the variable display of the identification symbol independent of the character effect display mode, whether or not the background display has changed, and the type of the background display.

  As another effect mode in the display area A, an operation instruction image of the operation unit is displayed on the front layer of the first identification symbol 8010 independently of the first identification symbol 8010, and the operation of the operation unit by the player is performed. An operation effect according to the mode is executed (a symbol effect suggesting a possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived from an operation corresponding image or the like). For example, when the player presses the effect button after the display of the button operation instruction image, an operation effect of displaying a character and performing a specific action according to the degree of expectation is executed.

  Further, in the display area A, an effect may be executed in conjunction with the movable body provided on the game board 5a (an effect indicating a possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived by the operation of the movable body). For example, by moving the movable body disposed above the game area 5a to a position where part or all of the first identification symbol 8010 blocks the player's line of sight, it indicates that the degree of expectation is high. Is also good.

  Next, the display area B will be described. The second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B, when the variation start command is received and the variation display of the identification symbol is started, after the variation stop command is received or after the variation time elapses, the variation display of the identification symbol is changed. It ends and stops at the specified stop symbol. While the identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the display is in a high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the identification symbol, and in a simple effect mode in which a stop symbol is displayed after the elapse of the variation time (low). Decoration dynamic display).

In the display area B, an additional decoration display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the change display of the identification symbol, and an operation effect are executed. There is no. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, control for changing the display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode is not executed.
Further, even when the first identification symbol 8010 temporarily stops and changes again, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued.

  Therefore, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for controlling the display of the second identification symbol 8020, the effect SW for changing the display mode such as replacement of the symbol is not defined, and the scheduler data is extremely simple. Since the effect control program only executes the contents defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data sequentially, even with such simple scheduler data, the same effect control as in the case of performing the high decoration dynamic display is executed. Only the execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is skipped.

  In addition, unless the display mode is changed during the variable display, the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 may be changed. For example, the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 corresponding to the game state or the effect mode may be prepared in advance, and the mode corresponding to the start of the change may be selected.

  As for the background display, a background display for the display area B (a background other than the display area A) may be drawn. In this case, a background corresponding to the game state or the effect mode may be prepared. In order to simplify the control aspect, the background portion of the display area B is made transparent and the background display of the display area A is enlarged so that the background display common to the display area A is performed. You may.

  As described above, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, the variable display of the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is different from the first identification symbol 8010, in that the callback is executed based on the effect SW for the identification symbol replacement or the additional decoration after the start of the variation. Various effects by display or the like are not performed, but a simple one that specializes in waiting for which symbol combination is stopped and displayed. For this reason, in the display area B, the player does not feel delighted with the type of various effects and the like, and the game proceeds with a game property in which one of the symbol combinations is stopped and displayed, and the user watches with swallowing.

  In the display area B, an additional decoration display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the change display of the identification symbol, or an operation effect is executed. It is only necessary to make settings so that the background display is also transparent, so that various layer settings such as the first identification symbol 8010 (display area A) are not required.

  Further, a fourth symbol 8030 different from the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the upper left portion of the screen shown in FIG. 455. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop thereof, and during the change display of the special symbol, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are displayed. During the variable display, a special symbol change explicit display indicating that the special symbol is being displayed is performed, and when the change of the special symbol is stopped or stopped, the first identification symbol is displayed. While the 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are stopped and displayed, a special symbol stop explicit display indicating that the special symbol is being stopped is performed. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), the special symbol variation clear display is performed in the fourth symbol 8030 until the variation display result display is completed. While the special symbol change explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is rotated by 90 degrees at predetermined intervals and displayed as vertical stripes. In addition, while the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state of being filled with a predetermined color. The fourth symbol 8030 is drawn on an upper layer independent of the above-described layer for drawing on the display area A or the display area B. Also, the fourth symbol 8030 in the present embodiment is different from the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, and is displayed so as to be externally recognizable in all situations including a customer waiting state. In the example shown in FIG. 455, the fourth design 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area A. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the fourth design 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area B. Alternatively, a control corresponding to the special symbol change explicit display and the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 may be performed on a display device (lamp device) other than the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, the first discrimination symbol 8010 and the second discrimination symbol 8020 provide the player with what kind of lottery result has been included up to the details (hit, no reach, no reach, no reach, etc.). While the fourth symbol plays the role of transmitting information, the fourth symbol indicates what kind of game status is being displayed (whether the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, whether it is being displayed in a stopped state, or in a waiting state for a customer). It plays a role of transmitting information to a designer or a gaming machine manager (or a player). In other words, although the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 have similar roles, they have a role that the fourth symbol cannot fulfill in transmitting the details of the lottery result to the player. I have. Although details will be described later, there is a possibility that the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are temporarily deleted or concealed during the change display of the special symbol or during the waiting state for the customer. On the other hand, the fourth symbol, which always transmits the status of the game to the player, is likely to be temporarily erased or concealed while the special symbol is being displayed or the customer is waiting. It has a role that cannot be played by the first identification symbol 8010 or the second identification symbol 8020.

  A hold storage display 8040 is drawn at the bottom of the screen shown in FIG. 455. In the present embodiment, the reserved storage display of the first special symbol is drawn in the lower left portion of the screen, and the reserved storage display of the second special symbol is drawn in the lower right portion of the screen (not shown). Also, in FIG. 455 (A), the hold storage display 8040 overlaps the display area B, but there is no problem if it does not overlap the identification symbol. Note that the hold storage display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer and is arranged on the front side of the layer corresponding to the display area B as described above. Note that, similarly to the fourth symbol 8030, the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the hold storage display 8040 may be replaced with a display device (lamp device) different from the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a layer is defined for each display area. Thereby, it is possible to independently execute a rendering effect for each display area, and a high decorative dynamic display having a high effect of the effect performed in the display area A and a low decorative dynamic display performed in the display area B. Can be performed in any combination. The combination of the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display can be defined by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, so that it is not necessary to change the effect control program itself, and the effect structure can be easily created and changed. .

  Next, an example in which a display area A and a display area B of an identification symbol are provided on each display screen when two display screens are provided will be described with reference to FIG. 455 (B). In FIG. 455 (B), display regions are respectively assigned to physically different display devices, and the display region A and the display region B are constituted by display devices having the same size. Note that components having the same functions as those in the example shown in FIG. The sizes of the display area A and the display area B are not limited to the same size, but may be different sizes.

In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), a plurality of effect display devices are provided on the game board 5, a display region A is allocated to the main liquid crystal display device, and a display region B is allocated to the sub liquid crystal display device.
In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, and the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, in the display area B, a second identification symbol 8020 is displayed.

The entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device is not limited to the display area A, and the area for displaying the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be different from the display area A.
Further, the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be assigned to the display area B.

  In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is drawn on the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c. Further, a preview image 8050 indicating that there is a high possibility that an advantageous lottery result is derived in the fluctuation is displayed.

  In the second identification symbol 8020, all the identification symbols are in the high-speed display mode during the variable display, so that the player cannot recognize all the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and a preview effect such as the display of a preview image 8050 is performed. Only the low decorative dynamic display of 8020 is continued.

[31-2. Display Area Emphasis Mode]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbol is performed in the display areas A and B in different display modes. In the following, while the variable display of the identification symbol displayed in each display area is performed in parallel, a selection operation by the player is performed (a switching operation unit (not shown) is operated), thereby causing one of the two. (Variable setting, large setting) in which the variable display executed in the display area is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the other display area will be described.

  FIG. 456 is a diagram for explaining an emphasizing mode of the display area for performing the variable display of the identification symbol according to the present embodiment. FIG. 456A shows the display area A and the display area B in a standard mode (specified size). A normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is an emphasis pattern A for displaying the display area A in an emphasis mode, and (C) is an emphasis pattern B for displaying the display area B in an emphasis mode. In the present embodiment, the display area on the non-emphasized side is set to a reduced wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the non-emphasized side is in a state that the player can recognize in the progress of the game. I have. The display area to be highlighted can be switched by operating a predetermined switching operation unit (switching button or the like). Even when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol is not changed. Switching is possible even during display.

  By operating the switching operation section, the player can sequentially switch (A) the normal pattern, (B) the emphasis pattern A, and (C) the emphasis pattern B. In addition, as a switching mode, every time the player operates the switching operation unit, (A) the normal pattern, (B) the emphasis pattern A, and (C) the emphasis pattern B may be switched in a predetermined order. Alternatively, the player may be able to immediately select a desired display pattern. As a configuration that allows the player to immediately select a desired display pattern, for example, a display pattern of a switching destination is set so as to correspond to each of a plurality of types of operation modes of the switching operation unit by the player, According to the operation mode of the switching operation unit, the display mode desired by the player can be immediately switched to the display mode. Specifically, a normal pattern is set as a display pattern of a switching destination in response to a first operation (for example, a long press of 5 seconds or more) on the switching operation unit, and a second operation (for example, less than 2 seconds) on the switching operation unit (A short press), the display pattern of the switching destination is set to an emphasis pattern A, and further, the switching destination is displayed in response to a third operation (for example, a long press of 2 seconds to less than 5 seconds) on the switching operation unit. The emphasis pattern B is set for the pattern. For example, by performing the third operation on the switching operation unit, when the game is progressing in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of the display area B shown in FIG. The symbol fluctuation due to will progress. At this time, as shown in FIG. 456 (C), in the display area A displayed by the wipe, a display corresponding to the high decorative dynamic display is performed, and a “rare effect” is performed. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit when the player recognizes that the player is playing the game, it is possible to immediately change to the emphasis pattern A with the intention of the player. An example of the “rare effect” is a notice effect in which the character design (airplane) temporarily stops at the middle identification design 8010b. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit, it is possible to immediately change the display area A to the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern A). Note that, when shifting to the emphasis pattern A, a character effect or an accessory operation not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIG. 456 (C) → (B)).

  Further, even when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is displayed in a reduced size (wipe), an operation effect requiring a player operation may be executed in the display area A. . When the display area A is displayed in a reduced (wiped) state, it is considered that the operation has been performed a specified time after the start of the operation effect even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation unit. Alternatively, the operation effect may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation unit is operated. On the other hand, when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is displayed in a reduced size (wipe), an effect of driving the accessory corresponding to the display area A, for example, temporarily displaying the identification symbol The effect of blocking and making it visible at a predetermined timing is required to change the operation mode of the accessory, and the control becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 456 (B), when the mode of emphasizing the display area A (emphasis pattern A) is selected, the reduced (wipe) display area B is displayed in the low decorative dynamic display with the symbol variation. Progresses, so that the above-mentioned “rare effect” is not performed. For this reason, when the emphasis pattern A is selected, the effect of the display area A is made transparent by making the background of the display area B transparent or executing the effect in the display area A together with the background of the display area B. May be improved. Note that, even when the display area B is wiped, the visibility of the identification symbol in the display area B needs to be maintained. It is preferable to set the upper layer than the displayed layer.

  In the present embodiment, the effect sound is output in response to the change display of the identification symbol in each display area. More specifically, since the first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A is displayed in a fluctuating manner with various effects, the effect sound based on the effect mode, the game state, the fluctuating pattern, etc. is output according to the effects. Is done. Here, the sound (BGM, effect sound effect) output along with the change display of the identification symbol in the display area A and the effect performed is managed as one AUTO group, and the sound control is performed by the automatic channel method. Thereby, even when the effects in the display area A are performed repeatedly, the upper limit of the channels to be used is limited, so that it is possible to suppress the resource consumption due to the effect of the effects of the gaming machine. Further, since it is possible to automatically output a sound having a high priority, it is possible to suppress the effect control from being complicated.

  On the other hand, in the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B, the variable display is executed in the high-speed display mode, and the effect sound to be output is also simple (only the variable BGM and the stop sound). Therefore, when both the display area A and the display area B have the normal pattern (FIG. 456 (A)) in which the display area A and the display area B are not reduced (wiped), the effect sound corresponding to the display area B is not output, or The control is performed in such a manner that the output of the effect sound corresponding to the display area B is suppressed by reducing the output sound. When one of the display areas is displayed in the emphasized pattern, only the effect sound in the display area displayed in the emphasized pattern is output, and the effect sound in the display area displayed in a reduced (wipe) manner is output. Is not output, or the output sound is reduced, for example, in such a manner that the output of the effect sound corresponding to the display area displayed in a reduced (wipe) manner is suppressed.

  In the case of the standby state in which the change display of the symbol is not performed (the start memory is not held), one display area is not reduced (wiped) as shown in FIGS. 456 (B) and (C). Each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. This is because the significance of emphasizing one of the display areas in a state in which the identification symbol is not fluctuated is small, and the screen for the customer approach display is designed on the assumption of full screen display.

  Further, when the power is turned off while the special symbol is being changed and the power is turned on after that, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner. For example, the highlight pattern A for highlighting the display area A may be used, or a normal pattern may be used. At this time, the combination of symbols to be displayed is set to a symbol combination for the initial state (for example, “123”) regardless of the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation. In addition, when the power is turned off in a state where the symbol is not changed and the power is turned on after that, the symbol is not changed to the normal pattern without the wipe display (not displayed in the emphasis patterns A and B) until the symbol change starts. Displays the identification symbol. This is because, as described above, in a state where the symbols are not variably displayed, the significance of highlighting one display area is poor.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, each display area is configured by a different layer. In each display area, the area to be drawn differs depending on whether the image is drawn in the emphasized mode or the reduced display. Specifically, the size of each layer as a whole is the same as the size of the entire display screen, and drawing is performed in a designated display area (for example, display area A). At this time, by converting the coordinate system of the drawing area, it is possible to draw by common means even if the sizes of the areas are different. Therefore, in any case of displaying in a predetermined size (normal pattern), enlarging (in an emphasized manner), reducing (wiping), and displaying, if the drawing content is the same in any case, Can be drawn by common means (programs and data) even if their actual sizes are different.

  Therefore, a new object may be drawn only when a specific object (for example, a decorative image) is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, only the emphasis mode). For example, when a decorative image is provided to an identification pattern, a layer for drawing the decoration image may be newly prepared and combined with the layer for drawing the identification pattern. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer for drawing the decoration image to be higher than the priority of the layer for drawing the identification symbol, the decoration image can be arranged on the front side of the identification symbol when each layer is synthesized. it can.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, objects (for example, identification symbols) displayed in the same image are displayed using the same program or data regardless of whether the display is performed in the emphasized mode or the reduced display mode. On the other hand, when a decorative image is superimposed on the identification symbol and displayed, a layer having a higher priority than the identification symbol is prepared, and the decoration image is drawn on the layer and the decoration image is drawn in front of the identification symbol layer. By arranging, the emphasis mode is drawn. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a program or data for each display mode for an object having a common drawing content in each display mode such as an identification symbol, and it is possible to use a common program or data. What is necessary is just to prepare the minimum program and data which become the difference. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in image data due to diversification of the effect contents, to suppress the complexity of the effect control, and to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Next, a description will be given of an aspect of the change display of the identification symbol from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 457 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of a configuration in which the change of the identification symbol of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B. In the display area A, the change of a part of the identification symbol stops. An example in which the change of the identification symbol in the display area B is stopped in conjunction with the case where it is performed. FIG. 458 is a view for explaining an example of screen transition of a configuration in which the identification symbol of the present embodiment is changed and displayed in the display area A and the display area B. Regardless of the display mode of the display area A, when the change is stopped. An example in which all stop symbols are displayed in the display area B will be described. Each screen shown in FIGS. 457 and 458 is a screen showing the same state, and both are displayed in a normal mode. Hereinafter, each screen will be described.

  (A) shows a state immediately after the variation display of the symbol is finished in a state where the number of stored memories is three. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is stopped and displayed in a filled state. Further, the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are both stopped and displayed in a state where the identification symbol is “125”.

  (B) is a state in which the start memory is exhausted (the number of start memories is 3 → 2) and the symbol variation display is started. The first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B are displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variable display of the symbol is started, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 changes from being filled to vertical stripes, and is rotated and displayed.

  (C) shows a state where the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 has stopped. In FIG. 457 (C), when the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 stops, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 458 (C), even if the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed continuously. In addition, after the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 changes from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, the variable display stops. On the other hand, when stopping the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020, the display is stopped without shifting to the low-speed display mode. This is because the change display of the identification symbol in the display area B is intended to notify the player that the change is being made and to clearly display the stop symbol rather than to enhance the effect.

  (D) shows a state where the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, and are in the reach state. In the display area A, a reach effect according to the change pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the change display of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued without executing a special effect.

  (E) shows a state in which the middle identification symbol 8010b of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the character (airplane) symbol in the reach state. Here, the symbol of the airplane is a symbol indicating that the fluctuation display is to be restarted, and indicates the execution of so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation. Therefore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 8030 continues even when the middle identification symbol 8010b is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 457 (E), the middle identification symbol 8020b is The variable display is continued in the high-speed display mode. When the state in which the first identification symbol 8010 is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time is continued, thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 458, the variable display in the high-speed display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued regardless of the display mode such as the re-change of the first identification symbol 8010.

  (G) shows a state where the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 has stopped after the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010 has started. At this time, the decoration 8011 is drawn over the left identification symbol 8010a, and it is notified that there is a high possibility (expectation) that an advantageous lottery result can be obtained in the variation. The effect corresponding to the degree of expectation is not particularly executed for the second identification symbol 8020. In FIG. 457 (G), the left identification symbol 8010a of the second identification symbol 8020 is a symbol corresponding to the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010. The symbol 8020a stops, and in FIG. 458 (G), the variable display in the high-speed display mode is continued.

  (H) shows a state where the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c stop at the same symbol ("5") to enter the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification symbol 8010c. Thereafter, as shown in (I), the middle identification symbol 8010b also stops at the same symbol ("5") as the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c. Stop at the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol 8010, and the big hit effect is executed.

  In the case where the identification symbol is displayed by the high decoration dynamic display, it is possible to realize a variety of effects and enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the identification symbol is displayed by the low decoration dynamic display, it is possible to avoid a gorgeous effect and maximize the sense of expectation for the symbol variation. In the present embodiment, a display area A in which the identification symbol is variably displayed in the high decoration dynamic display and a display area B in which the identification symbol is variably displayed in the low decoration dynamic display are provided, and either one of them is selected, or both are selected. By executing the variable display in the display mode in parallel, the player can play the game in a mode that suits his / her preference.

  In addition, since it is possible for the player to freely switch between the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display during the fluctuation display, for example, a display for notifying the expectation when a reach occurs is performed. By highlighting the area A and highlighting the display area B in other states, it is possible to play a game according to the situation.

  In the above-described embodiment, the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game is made to proceed in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player. You may. For example, while performing the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display in parallel, the player can display the display on the other side so that the player can visually recognize only the display on one side desired by the player. It is also possible to provide a movable body or the like (one-side concealing means) having a function of concealing the image so that it is not visible or difficult to visually recognize, and the display on the other side may be hidden by such a movable body. For example, in FIG. 455 (A), the covering position that overlaps all or at least a part of the display area A, and the area where the movable body overlaps the display area A is smaller than the covering position, and the effect display performed in the display area A is easily visible. 455, an upper covering movable body movable to a retracted position (a position above the display area A), a covering position overlapping all or at least a part of the display area B in FIG. 455 (A), and a display area larger than the covering position. B has a configuration in which the movable body is overlapped with the movable body and the lower covering movable body is provided at a retracted position (a position below the display area B) where the effect display performed in the display area B is easily visible. When the covering condition A that hides the area A is satisfied (such as a first specific operation on the switching operation unit by the player), the upper covering movable body is moved to the covering position, and the covering condition B that hides the display area B is satisfied. (Second specific operation on the switch operation section by the player, etc.) by, we like to move the undercoat movable body covering position can be exemplified. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to concentrate on only one side display desired by the player and progress the game without complicated control such as switching of the effect display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel in the course of the game. However, a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. It is not necessary to execute the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display in parallel during the period during which the high-decoration dynamic display is active. The decorative dynamic display may be deleted. For example, as shown in FIG. 456 (A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progress in the normal pattern in which the display area A and the display area B are displayed in a standard mode (specified size) is completed, and the customer waits after a predetermined time. When shifting to the state, the display area B may be erased while the display area A remains, or the display area A may be enlarged to a large area by erasing the display area B. In addition, when a new start condition is satisfied in the customer waiting state, the display of the display area B that is the low decorative dynamic display may be restored.

[32. Applying production blocks to productions that continue over multiple changes]
Next, an example in which an effect block is applied to an effect that continues over a plurality of changes will be described. In the above-described example, the period from the start to the stop of the symbol change is divided into predetermined periods, and the effect blocks corresponding to each period are defined. And by combining these effect blocks, it was possible to suppress the complication of effect control while realizing various effects. Also, an example was described in which it was possible to define an effect block that exceeds a predetermined period, but it is limited to effect blocks that fall within one change, It was not enough to apply the effect block.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which an effect block is applied to a series of effects performed over a plurality of variations. Here, a timer effect and a background effect, which are executed as a look-ahead effect (advance notification effect) at the time of a start winning as a series of effects performed over a plurality of fluctuations, are executed at the time of switching the effect mode, and a mini character effect that continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Will be described.

[32-1. Control of prefetching effect (advance notification effect)]
Before describing the timer effect and the background effect executed as the prefetch effect at the time of the start winning, a supplementary explanation will be given on the control of the prefetch effect.

  When the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passage processing (FIG. 135) or the second starting opening passing processing (FIG. 136) according to the starting winning opening, and starts. A random value is extracted (acquired) as a storage (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure prefetching process (S5245) or the second special figure prefetching process (S5255), based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching rendering command or the special symbol A 2 memory look-ahead effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter, “special figure look-ahead effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Upon receiving the special figure pre-reading effect command, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether to execute the pre-reading effect based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 98). The received command is analyzed by the received command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95).

  When receiving the special figure prefetch effect command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a prefetch effect control process in the received command analysis process. In the pre-reading effect control process, a process for executing a normal pre-reading effect for changing the start storage display and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. In the pre-reading effect control process, a flag indicating that the pre-reading effect command has been received in the received command analysis process is set, and the pre-reading effect control process may be called in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95). Good.

  In the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display, the lottery is performed based on the special figure look-ahead effect command, and the changed start memory display mode is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the start storage display may be changed only when shifting to the reach state in the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure pre-reading effect command. The mode of the start storage display changes, for example, the color and the shape. Then, a normal prefetch effect setting process for changing the mode of the start storage display is executed. In the normal pre-reading effect setting process, the setting for changing the display color of the start memory display is performed, and the setting for outputting the sound effect, turning on the lamp, and moving the accessory at the timing of the change is performed. . Processing for executing the timer effect and the background effect will be described later.

[32-2. Timer production]
The timer effect is a preliminary suggestion effect that indicates by a countdown display that the execution time of the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result or the hit possibility for a specific start memory is approaching. Two types of timer effects are provided, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned pre-reading effects, and the fluctuation display for the specific start memory is started before the fluctuation display for the specific start memory is started. And a timer effect (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) that spans a plurality of variations that counts down and displays a period up to a predetermined timing. A timer effect that does not straddle a plurality of variations (hereinafter referred to as a “timer within variation”) that counts down and displays a period from a predetermined timing after the variation display for the specified start memory to another timing of the variation display for the specific start memory. ,have. In other words, the look-ahead timer effect and the in-fluctuation timer effect are both advance notification effects in which the symbol change with respect to a specific start memory has not been completed. , The pre-reading timer effect is different from the in-fluctuation timer effect because it performs a countdown display on the display screen over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. Also, the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the fluctuation-in-time timer effect may be set to various values. The value becomes relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the fluctuation timer effect. In the present embodiment, since a characteristic element is included in the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the process for executing the look-ahead timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Since the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed over a plurality of variations as described above, it is sufficient to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variation display corresponding to the received special figure look-ahead effect command is started. It is determined whether an appropriate time is secured.
That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the fluctuation times of all the start memories held before the fluctuation starts is equal to or longer than a specific time (40 seconds or more in the present embodiment). Further, the effect contents are determined along with the possibility of execution of the look-ahead timer effect, based on the hitting of the effect execution target with respect to the start memory and the variation pattern of the start memory. In addition, when the effect contents are determined, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is also determined. The execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is, for example, at the time of a change start corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead effect object, or before the start memory of the look-ahead effect object. Either when the reach of the change corresponding to the stored start memory is started, or when the change corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the prefetching effect is completed, is set.

  The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer counting effect for performing a countdown display and a timer end effect that is executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer ending effect are continuously executed. Also, the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect, varies depending on the length of the timer counting effect, but is fluctuating with respect to the start-up memory targeted for prefetching, and before the occurrence of the reach or after the occurrence of the reach. There are various timings.

  When the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer counting effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the change corresponding to the starting memory of the prefetch effect. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds are added to the sum of the fluctuation times of the start memory held before the start memory of the prefetch effect, and the time is set as the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetch timer effect. The predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the time is set as the execution time of the timer counting effect (the initial value of the countdown display). Further, the contents of the effect executed as the timer counting effect (effect pattern during countdown) are set. As the effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the light emission mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to a high-speed blinking with the progress of the countdown display, or a specific pattern provided on the game board 5 A pattern 2 for changing the emission color of the lamp with the progress of the countdown display, a pattern 3 for operating a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 with the progress of the countdown display, and the like can be exemplified. This corresponds to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation of the production target, and is set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the hit expectation increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern, and pattern 1 is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit than in the case of a hit, and pattern 2 is out of the case of a hit. In both cases, the pattern 3 is selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit than in the case of a loss.

  After the contents of the effect executed as the timer counting effect (the effect pattern during the countdown) are set, the contents of the timer end effect (the effect pattern after the countdown) are set. In the timer end effect, for example, the character “End !!” is superimposed on the identification symbol in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation on the display screen (for example, the expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red). It is displayed for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can reliably recognize that the time is up. As the effect pattern after the countdown, for example, pattern 1 in which the character color of “End !!” is black, pattern 2 in which the character color of “End !!” is blue, and character color of “End !!” Pattern 3 which is red can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the expected hit degree of the fluctuation of the prefetch effect, and are set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the hit expectation is increased in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern, and pattern 1 is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit than in the case of a hit. In both cases, pattern 3 is selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of a hit than in the case of a loss. The effect pattern after the countdown is not limited to this. Not only the character color, but also the character may be decorated or the character may be displayed, or the content of the message may be different, and You may be made to correspond to a different expectation degree.

  As described above, after performing various settings related to the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect is executed (started) based on a predetermined start condition (arrival of the start time of the look-ahead timer effect). As described above, the look-ahead timer effect is constituted by the timer counting effect and the timer ending effect, and the effect blocks corresponding to the timer counting effect and the timer ending effect are individually defined. These effect blocks are defined in advance, and when the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected based on the execution time and the degree of expectation of the timer counting effect. The effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer ending effect may be individually selected, or the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer ending effect may be managed as a set, and selected for each set. It may be. When the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected, the effect block of the timer counting effect is executed, and after the end of the effect block, the effect block of the timer end effect is executed.

  In the effect block of the timer counting effect, only the effect contents are defined, and the execution time can be set variably. As a result, it is not necessary to redundantly hold the effect blocks having the same content but different execution times, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity due to diversification of the effect content. The look-ahead timer effect is not an effect in which the execution timing and the end timing are strictly determined as in the effect block corresponding to the above-described fluctuation time, but based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with the calculated execution time of the effect. Specifically, the calculated execution time of the effect may be stored in a predetermined storage area, and the execution time of the effect stored in the predetermined storage area may be read at the start of the effect block of the timer counting effect.

  If the execution time of the timer counting effect can be covered, an effect block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer counting effect. Since the execution time of the timer counting effect only needs to be within a predetermined range, there may be a case where the effect blocks can be limited to a realistic number of effect blocks even if all the patterns are covered based on the number of reservations and the changing pattern (the changing time). is there. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning to the start of the change of the object of the look-ahead effect is set as the lower limit, and the change time of the change is added to this time. Furthermore, by setting the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect as the upper limit, the range of the execution time of the timer counting effect can be specified. Since it is sufficient that at least one effect block having an execution time included in this range exists, there is a possibility that a minimum number of effect blocks may be prepared. Alternatively, only the effect blocks with high execution frequency may be prepared in advance, and the effect blocks with low execution frequency may be set as the effect blocks whose variable time can be set variably, and the number of the effect blocks to be managed may be suppressed.

  FIG. 459 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of an effect block of the look-ahead timer effect according to the present embodiment. FIG. 460 is a diagram illustrating an execution example of the look-ahead timer effect of the present embodiment. The execution example of the look-ahead timer effect shown in FIG. 460 corresponds to FIG.

  FIG. 459 and FIG. 460 show an example in which the prefetch timer effect is executed over the fluctuation 1 and the fluctuation 2. Fluctuation 1 has a first half fluctuation of “normal fluctuation” and no reach, and fluctuation 2 has a first half fluctuation of “normal fluctuation” and a big hit after the occurrence of reach. Note that the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, and the description is omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 460 (A), when the variation 1 is started, the variation display of all the identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is zero. Note that, as described above, the fluctuation 1 is a normal fluctuation in which no reach occurs.

  Further, the variable display of the symbol is continued, and the variable display of the left symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing. Thereafter, a start winning is generated, and the number of pending symbols change becomes one. At the time of the start winning, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Here, the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, and the timer count effect block and the timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 460 (B), only the left symbol is stopped and other symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the timer display section is arranged at the lower right of the screen (time t1). In FIG. 460 (B), “START” indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the prefetch timer effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 460 (C), the fluctuation 1 ends, and the stop symbols of all the identification symbols are determined (time t2). At this time, the timer counting effect is continuing, and the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect (timer counting effect) is displayed on the timer display unit.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 460 (D), the fluctuation 2 to be prefetched is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display unit is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (E), when the execution of the timer counting effect ends, the remaining time “0.00” is displayed on the timer display unit, and the timer end effect block is executed to start the timer end effect. (Time t3). At this time, as a timer end effect, a message “end !!” indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a notice image of a character or the like is displayed. In the message displayed here, the character color is set according to the degree of expectation of the change, as described above. Further, the content of the message may be set according to the degree of expectation of the change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (F), in the state where the timer end effect continues, the stop occurs at the same symbol “5” of the left symbol and the right symbol, and reach occurs. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 460 (G), the fluctuation of the middle symbol stops after the timer end effect ends, and all symbols are determined. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 460 (H), the state shifts to the big hit state.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the timer end effect is executed before the reach occurs, but the timer end effect may be executed after the reach occurs. At this time, since the reach effect and the timer end effect are performed in an overlapping manner, the contents of the timer end effect may be determined based on the contents of the reach effect of the fluctuation. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced due to the effect being performed repeatedly.

  As described above, it is possible to define an effect to be executed over a plurality of variations by using an effect block, and it is possible to more flexibly operate a common block. By defining an effect that is executed as a look-ahead effect at the time of a winning start, such as a look-ahead timer effect, as in the above-described common block, it is possible to standardize and simplify the effect control, thereby improving the development of the gaming machine. Can be

  The control of the effect block over a plurality of fluctuations is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to other common blocks. Thereby, it becomes possible to move the character and output sound in accordance with the progress of the look-ahead timer effect, and it is possible to realize various effects.

[32-3. Background production]
Next, similarly to the look-ahead timer effect, a background effect that is a preliminary notification effect indicating a lottery result for a start memory in which the symbol change is not completed will be described. As an outline of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of symbol changes, and the background effect ends at a predetermined timing during the change of the prefetch target. In the present embodiment, the background is restored when the reach is developed while the prefetch target is changing.

  FIG. 461 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of an effect block of a background effect according to the present embodiment. FIG. 462 is a diagram illustrating an execution example of the background effect of the present embodiment. The example of executing the background effect shown in FIG. 462 corresponds to FIG.

  FIG. 461 and FIG. 462 show examples in which the background effect is executed over the fluctuation 1, the fluctuation 2, and the fluctuation 3. Fluctuation 1 and Fluctuation 2 have a first half fluctuation of “normal fluctuation” and no reach, and fluctuation 3 has a first half fluctuation of “Normal fluctuation” and reach. The description of the latter half of the fluctuation 3 is omitted. Note that, as in the case of the prefetch timer effect, the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, and thus the description is omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 462 (A), when the variation 1 is started, the variation display of all the identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is one. As described above, the fluctuation 1 is a normal fluctuation in which no reach occurs. After that, the fluctuation display of the symbol is continued, and the left symbol stops. Then, at time t1, a start winning is generated, and the number of pending symbols changes becomes two. Here, the execution of the background effect is determined at the time of the start winning, and the background effect block is selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 462 (B), the background is changed from “mountain” to “sea”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 462 (C), the fluctuation 1 ends, and the stop symbol is determined (time t2). Further, as shown in FIG. 462 (D), the fluctuation 2 is started, and the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (E), the fluctuation 2 ends, and the stop symbol is determined (time t3). During this time, the background changed by the execution of the background effect is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 462 (F), a variation 3 to be prefetched is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (G), the reach develops in the symbol fluctuation, the background effect ends, and the background of “sea” returns to the background of “mountain” (time t4).

  An effect block for executing a background effect is selected and executed when a start winning prize to be prefetched occurs, similarly to the timer effect. The ending timing is the timing at which the fluctuation develops to reach in the fluctuation to be prefetched, that is, the remaining time of the fluctuation being executed at the time of the start winning, the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation executed until the fluctuation of the prefetching object starts, and the prefetching. The total value of the first half fluctuation time of the target fluctuation may be calculated and set. In addition, the execution time may not be set in the effect block for executing the background effect, and the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. The end condition in this case is to detect that the state has developed into the reach state due to the fluctuation of the prefetch target. The determination of the end condition is performed by callback, and when the end condition is satisfied, a process for ending the background effect is called.

  As described above, in the background effect according to the present embodiment, the background display is continuously changed from the start of the background effect to the development of the reach in the variation targeted for the prefetch effect. The player recognizes that the expectation degree of the change is high by the background being restored at the time of the reach development, and the degree of attention to the second half change is increased.

  On the other hand, if reach occurs due to a change before the start of the change targeted for the look-ahead effect, the background is temporarily restored to the original when the reach occurs, and after the change is completed, the background display is switched, and the background is switched. Resume the production. Thus, even if the player is disappointed after the occurrence of the reach and becomes discouraged, the sense of expectation can be increased again, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini-character production]
Next, a description will be given of a mini-character effect that is started when the effect mode is switched. The mini character effect is an effect in which a character (mini character) corresponding to the effect mode appears.
At this time, the displayed mini-character is displayed only while the symbol is being changed. Therefore, when the number of the held changes becomes zero and the symbol change ends in a state, the mini-character is not displayed. The non-displayed mini-character may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the mini-character is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations until it shifts to the customer waiting state. Hereinafter, the mini-character effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 463 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mini-character effect of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 463 (A), the game is continued in the “mountain” mode. In this state, as shown in FIG. 463 (B), when the mode is changed from the “mountain” mode to the “sea” mode, a mini-character “whale” is displayed at the left center of the screen. To change the mode, the mode is switched by operating an operation unit (effect button) (not shown).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 463 (C) and FIG. 463 (D), the suspended symbol change is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 463 (E), when all of the suspended symbol changes are completed, the process shifts to a customer waiting state, and the displayed mini-character is not displayed.

  Since the execution condition of the mini-chara effect is that the symbol change is continuing, the mini-chara effect is continued if the symbol is being changed even if there is no suspended change. The execution condition of the mini-character effect may be, for example, a case where a start winning is generated after the customer waiting state has continued for a predetermined period other than the time of mode change. By controlling in this manner, mini-characters appear at times other than when the mode is changed, giving unexpectedness to the player and increasing interest. Further, a game state may be added to the determination condition as a condition for executing the mini-character effect. For example, in a game state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, if the state is a high probability state, it is possible to suggest the current game state to the player by making it easier for mini characters to appear.

  The condition for terminating the mini-character effect may be, for example, a case where the display of the mini-character continues for a predetermined time, in addition to the case where the state shifts to the customer waiting state. With this configuration, the appearance of the mini-character can have a premier feeling.

  The mini-character effect is defined by an effect block. During the execution of the mini-character effect, the end condition of the mini-character effect is determined by the callback, and when the end condition is satisfied, the mini-character effect is ended. With this configuration, it is not necessary to preset the duration of the mini-character production, and it is possible to flexibly determine whether or not to continue the mini-chara production depending on conditions such as transition to a customer waiting state and a game state. As described above, since the termination condition of the mini-character production can be dynamically determined by the callback, it is not necessary to individually define the production block corresponding to the execution time of the mini-character production, and the production block is defined for each character. Management can be facilitated.

  It should be noted that the effect blocks for effects that can span multiple changes such as the look-ahead timer effect, background effect, and mini-character effect described above may be set in duplicate, in which case, the look-ahead timer effect, background effect, mini-character effect, etc. Will be executed. Also, a plurality of effect blocks for an effect that may extend over a plurality of fluctuations may be overlapped at different timings. However, it is possible to make the start timing of each effect different. This makes it possible to maintain a sense of expectation for a subsequent change even after one of the effects has ended, and to further enhance the sense of expectation for the change when the same start-up memory is to be prefetched. be able to.

  Also, in the case where the effect effect sound is output by applying the automatic channel method in the effect that spans a plurality of variations, the effect effect sound that is output in the effect performed by one variation (for example, the reach effect) is different. An AUTO group may be assigned. For example, by setting the effect sound of the effect executed by one variation to an AUTO group that can be assigned to more channels, the output of the effect sound of the variation can be prioritized, while the output is composed of fewer channels. Sound effects (for example, the sound of "Start!" Which is the start sound of the look-ahead timer effect, the count sound (such as a click sound) which is a sound during the countdown), and the timer end effect sound , Etc.), it is possible to prevent many channels from being occupied for a long time.

  Further, a different AUTO group may be set for each type of the effect over a plurality of variations. For example, an AUTO group consisting of two channels for a look-ahead timer effect and an AUTO group consisting of two channels for a mini-character effect are defined. Thereby, even if the pre-reading timer effect and the mini-character effect are executed in parallel, it is possible to output the effect sound of each effect without being disturbed. Since the effect sound in the background effect is output constantly during the continuation of the effect as in BGM, or is only output when the background is switched, the background effect AUTO group is not set and the BGM effect sound is not set. Channel (AUTO group).

  The control of the output of the effect sound, the operation of the movable role, and the lighting of the lamp in the effect that covers multiple fluctuations such as the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini-character effect can be executed according to the liquid crystal display by the effect switch. It is. In particular, if the end timing of the effect cannot be specified at the start of the effect, it is difficult to control the effect device at the timing set in advance by the sub-effect block data. By controlling, it is possible to realize an effect with a sense of unity. In addition, when the production effect sound of the production whose production end timing is not specified at the production start time, the sub production block data for outputting the corresponding production effect sound is repeatedly executed during the production continuation, and at the production end time. The execution of the sub effect block data may be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is possible to specify the end timing of the effect at the start of the effect, such as a look-ahead timer effect, the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the display effect and the sub-effect block data for effecting the sound, the character, etc. are performed in parallel. It is possible to execute. As a result, it is possible to independently define the display effect and the effect by sound, character, or the like, and to configure the effect by freely combining various effect block data. For example, a plurality of types of liquid crystal effect block data defining the display mode of the timer in the timer counting effect and sub-effect block data defining the notification sound output during execution of the timer counting effect are prepared, and these are freely combined. Can diversify the production variations.

[33. Configuration 2 for displaying a plurality of identification symbols]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, a variety of effects are executed in the effect display device 1600 in order to enhance the interest of the game. There is a possibility that the effect area may be narrowed by the set area. In order to prevent this, the area for displaying the identification symbol has been temporarily reduced. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display region of the identification symbol may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. In addition, it is necessary to suppress the interest of the game from being reduced by setting the mode of reducing or enlarging the identification symbol to be suitable for the effect content.

  In view of this, a plurality of display areas for performing the variable display of the identification symbol are provided on the effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the plurality of sets of the identification symbol is simultaneously performed. The configuration for displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in different modes (high-decorative dynamic display, low-decorative dynamic display) in order to meet the needs of the player has been described with reference to FIG. 455 and the like. In the embodiment, the configuration is such that the player can visually recognize the change display of the identification symbol in at least one of the display areas during the change of the symbol. At this time, the decoration style of the identification symbol in each display area may be the same or different.

[33-1. An example of a configuration in which identification symbols are simultaneously displayed in a plurality of regions]
FIG. 464A is a diagram illustrating an example in which the identification symbols are fluctuated and displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment. The display area A occupies about 70% of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 from the top. The display area B occupies the lower right area when viewed from the front of the entire display area. The hold display is arranged at the lower left of the screen. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitting element such as an LED or a lamp (not shown).

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, first, as shown in (A), the start memory is exhausted, and the variable display of the identification symbol is started. At this time, variable display of the first identification symbol is started in the display area A (first display area), and variable display of the second identification symbol is started in the display area B (second display area).
In the present embodiment, the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol displayed in the display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A The second identification symbol displayed in the display area B may be any symbol display mode that allows the player to recognize that the symbols are the same symbol combination.

  In addition, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol start to fluctuate at the same time and stop at the same time, and the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification symbols is finally determined becomes the same. In the present embodiment, the stop timing of each symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is also simultaneous, but if the symbol confirmation timing is the same, the individual symbol stop timing is arbitrary. Is also good.

  The layer of the screen illustrated in FIG. 464A is configured by a background layer, a symbol layer (first identification symbol), a symbol layer (second identification symbol), a notice layer, and the like. In the present embodiment, since the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to change the coordinates, size, and the like for displaying the identification symbol and to use other drawing information. As a result, the drawing data can be shared, and the data capacity can be reduced. Further, it is possible to use a common drawing process, and it is possible to suppress the program structure from becoming complicated.

  In the same manner as in the above-described example, various effects are performed on the first identification symbol until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variable display (symbol change, dynamic display). For example, when the identification symbol is switched from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, it is possible to replace the identification symbol by executing a callback based on the effect SW for the identification symbol replacement, and decorate the identification symbol until just before the stop. it can. In the present embodiment, the second identification symbol is also variably displayed in the same effect as the first identification symbol, but the effect content can be changed according to the display area. Furthermore, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined for the first identification symbol. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly perform the interlocking between the variable display of the first identification symbol and the variable display of the second identification symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the symbols is started, the symbols stop in the order of the left identification symbol, the right identification symbol, and the middle identification symbol. FIG. 464A (B) shows a state where the left identification symbol of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol has stopped. At this time, a notice character in the shape of an airplane is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and a notice character in the shape of a tree is displayed in the lower part of the display area. Each preview character is drawn on a different layer, and the image can be individually changed or deleted. This makes it possible to independently execute a plurality of announcement effects in accordance with the degree of expectation of the variable display.

  The effect is displayed in such a manner that the character of the airplane displayed as the announcement effect is visually recognized so as to approach the front of the screen according to the degree of expectation of the big hit, and is displayed while being enlarged. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 464A (B), the airplane character is displayed in a reduced state at the upper left of the display area, and is gradually enlarged in accordance with the progress of the variable display. FIG. 464A (C) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of the right identification symbol has stopped and reach has occurred. The character of the airplane moves to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 464A (B). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), in the reach state, a notice effect in which an additional decoration is displayed on the first identification symbol is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 464A (E), the display of the character of the airplane is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification symbol. At this time, the middle identification symbol of the first identification symbol is hidden by the character of the airplane, and thereafter, the character of the airplane further expands, and as shown in FIG. 464A (F), the display of the first identification symbol is interrupted. Is done. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol may be continuously displayed on the back side of the enlarged airplane character without being stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 464A (G), the change display of the identification symbol ends, and the display becomes finalized. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A (H), the result of the fluctuation display becomes a big hit, and the state shifts to a big hit gaming state.

  Subsequently, the second identification symbol will be further described. As shown in FIGS. 464A (A) and 464A (B), the second identification symbol is also subjected to the variable display similarly to the first identification symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A (C), when the left identification symbol and the right identification symbol stop at the same identification symbol “5” and reach occurs, the first identification symbol as shown in FIG. 464A (D). Similarly, the additional decoration display is also performed on the second identification symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 464A (E) and 464A (F), even if the player cannot visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the notice effect in the variation display after the occurrence of the reach, the variation display of the second identification symbol. Is in a state where the player can visually recognize it.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the player can visually recognize at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol during the variable display of the identification symbol. For this reason, even when the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol cannot be visually recognized, the additional decoration display is performed on the second identification symbol in the same manner as the first identification symbol. It is possible to reliably inform the player of the expectation of the jackpot.

  Further, the additional decoration of the first identification symbol may be different from the additional decoration of the second identification symbol. For example, the number of stars of the additional decoration is 5 for the first identification symbol having a wide display area and the display area is narrow. In the second identification symbol, the maximum number of additional decoration stars may be set to three so that the player can easily recognize the stars. The player can also determine that a preview image with a high degree of expectation is displayed such that the first identification symbol is hidden while only the second identification symbol is displayed, and the second identification symbol is also displayed. In the case where there is no additional decoration of the symbol, it may be determined that it is a so-called gaseous effect with a low degree of expectation even if a preview image in which the first identification symbol is hidden is displayed.

  For the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol, common image data may be used and drawn on a layer corresponding to each display area, and additional decoration may be set for each display area. In this way, by changing the display of the identification symbol in a plurality of areas and sharing a part of the image data necessary for the variable display, it is possible to save the capacity for storing the image data and to achieve a variety of effects. Can be.

  Further, not only the image data but also the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for variably displaying the identification symbol in each display area may be shared. For example, the display position (coordinates) of identification symbols, layer-related information, etc. are parameterized and processed in a common procedure to improve the development efficiency of production-related programs and flexibly respond to changes in production specifications. Becomes possible. Further, whether or not to display the additional decoration is determined only at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern and the like, and the corresponding process is executed. A more effective effect can be realized without complicating the effect control.

  In the example shown in FIG. 464A, the preview image (character) is configured to be displayed on the front side of the identification symbol so that the recognition of the identification symbol is impaired. The same applies to the case where the visual recognition of the change display of the identification symbol is hindered by the operation of the accessory. For example, the movable area of the accessory may be set such that the display area B is visible even when the accessory moves to the front side of the display area and becomes difficult to view except for the lower part of the screen.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a period in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the notice effect, and only the second identification symbol can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the callback is executed based on the identification symbol replacement effect SW of the second identification symbol, and the identification symbol replacement table and the reel index replacement work number based on the stop symbol or the symbol stop timing at the switching timing of the identification symbol. By using the table to replace not only the second identification symbol but also the first identification symbol, decoration of the identification symbol is performed until just before the stop. This makes it possible to execute the decoration for the first identification symbol and the decoration for the second identification symbol at the same timing or in conjunction with each other, thereby increasing the effect of the effect and improving the interest of the game.

  Further, the display area B for displaying the second identification symbol need not be fixed. The arrangement of the display area B may be changed according to the type of the announcement effect, and the position where the second identification symbol is displayed may be changed. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to the display area B are set to values according to the announcement effect. Further, a plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, a plurality of types of layers are prepared corresponding to the position where the second identification symbol is displayed, a parameter for displaying the corresponding layer is set to ON according to the type of the announcement effect, and a parameter for the layer not to be displayed is set. Is set to OFF. With this configuration, the second identification symbol can be displayed at a preset position, and the identification symbol can be displayed separately from the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol. By setting the parameters of all the layers to OFF, it is also possible to display only the first identification symbol.

  The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the notice effect, and the like. For example, if the movable character moves to the left front of the screen, making it difficult to visually recognize the left side of the screen, the effect SW for setting the display area B on the right side of the screen is set to ON and the second identification symbol is displayed. Then, the effect SW displayed at another position may be set to OFF.

  In addition, the effect sound is output corresponding to the change display of the identification symbol in each display area. In the present embodiment, the change display of the first identification symbol and the change display of the second identification symbol are executed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common effect sound may be output. When only the display area B having a small area is displayed, for example, when the notice effect is executed on the front, the volume of the effect sound is reduced, or the output of the effect sound is stopped. Alternatively, the output related to the fluctuating display may be suppressed by giving priority to the output related to the notice effect.

  Further, the sound (BGM, effect sound) related to the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is managed as one AUTO group, and the sound (BGM, effect sound) related to the notice effect is managed as another AUTO group, and the automatic channel method is used. To control the sound. At this time, by setting the priority of the AUTO group that outputs the sound related to the notice effect to be higher, it is possible to automatically prioritize the output of the sound output by the notice effect, which complicates the effect control. Can be suppressed. As described above, by setting parameters such as sound output availability and volume suppression value, it is possible to suppress the output of other effect sound output while the sound related to the notice effect is being output. it can.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner due to a notice effect or the like, the fluctuating display of the identification symbol is performed in a plurality of display areas, and thus any one of Since it is only necessary that the player can visually recognize the change display of the identification symbol, it is possible to relax the restriction on the area where the notice effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the restriction on the range in which the movable accessory operates.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the variable display in the plurality of display areas is executed in the same manner, it is possible to draw using a common program and image data. On the other hand, even when the decorative image is superimposed on the identification symbol for each display area, a layer to be displayed on the front side of the identification symbol is prepared for each display area, and only the program and image data corresponding to the decoration image are provided. It can be realized by. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare the minimum programs and data that are the differences, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the image data due to the diversification of the effect contents, to suppress the complexity of the effect control, and to suppress the increase in the storage capacity. Or you can.

[33-2. Modified example 1 of configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification symbols in a plurality of regions]
In the above-described configuration example, the identification symbol is variably displayed in the display area A and the display area B in the same manner from the start to the stop of the variation of the identification symbol. An example will be described in which an identification symbol is variably displayed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variably displayed is performed in the same manner (synchronously) in each display area.

  FIG. 464B is a diagram illustrating an example in which the identification symbols are independently variably displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment, and variably displayed at a predetermined timing in an equivalent manner. In this modification, the change display of the identification symbol is started simultaneously in each display area. However, as shown in (B), even if the left symbol is stopped in the display area A, the left symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area B. Instead, the variable display is continued. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol stops in the display area A and the left and right symbols form the reach mode, the variable display of all the identification symbols is continued in the display area B.

  Subsequently, after the reach mode is formed in (C), after the reach effect for a predetermined period has progressed, in order to re-change all the symbols in the middle left and right again, as shown in FIG. (“Next”) is displayed in the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all the identification symbols is started again. Subsequently, as shown in (F), the left and right symbols are stopped so as to form a reach mode. Note that, at the timing of the reach, the reach mode is not formed in the second identification symbol in the display area B. As described above, after the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A forms the reach mode, the symbol indicating the re-variation of the identification symbol is displayed in the middle symbol, whereby the re-variation is performed. Therefore, at the timing when the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A has reached the reach mode, the second identification symbol does not form the reach mode if it changes again, and the second identification symbol if it does not change again. When the symbols form the reach mode, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is changed again by looking at the display of the second identification symbol, which may cause a decrease in interest (especially when the symbol is changed). It is necessary to maintain as much as possible the interest that the player may be changed again because of the game specifications that increase the expectation of big hits by stopping and repeating the change.) For this reason, in the present modified example, such a problem is solved by not forming the reach mode with the second identification symbol at the timing when the first identification symbol forms the reach mode. Then, after a predetermined period elapses after the reach mode is formed in the first identification symbol (for example, when a high-expected-effect-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is performed after reaching the reach), as shown in FIG. The display of the identification symbol is the reach mode similarly to the first identification symbol, and thereafter, the display area B is displayed with the additional decoration in the same manner as the display area A, and the display area B is displayed in the same display mode as the display area A. The identification symbol is displayed. (H) and (I) are the same as (G) and (H) in FIG. 464A. In FIG. 464B, for example, after the timing at which the high expected reach effect is performed, the display of the second identification symbol in the display area B is the same as that of the first identification symbol (in other words, the first identification symbol is displayed). For the predetermined period after reaching the reach, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol have different display modes.) In the display area B, the additional decoration display is performed similarly to the display area A. However, this timing can be triggered by another predetermined condition.

  The predetermined condition may be, for example, the time when the last re-variation is started during the repeated execution of the temporary stop of the identification symbol, or the start timing of the re-change after the last temporary stop in the pseudo series. You can also. Further, the start timing of the reach effect may be set to a timing at which the display mode of each display area is equivalent.

  As another predetermined condition, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a noticeable effect is performed by a specific movable auditorium, for example, when there is a possibility that a part of the display area may not be visible. At this time, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied from the start of the change, the display mode of each display area may be made equal from the beginning, or may be adjusted to the execution timing of a notice effect by a specific movable character. The execution timing of the notice effect is, for example, an elapsed time from a specific timing such as a start of a change. Further, when the movable accessory is operated by the operation of the effect button, the operation of the effect button may be controlled under a predetermined condition so that the display modes of the respective display areas are equalized.

  Further, when the expectation of the big hit is high, the predetermined condition may be satisfied. This is because there is a high possibility that a flashy effect is executed in addition to the effect by the movable character. Also in this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied from the start of the change. Further, the various timings described above may be combined. For example, the timing at which a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed or the timing at which the last temporary change is started when an effect with a movable character is executed may be used. .

  As described above, according to the present modification, similar to the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the identification symbol in each display area is made equal while maintaining the effect of relaxing the restriction on the area where the notice effect is executed. By adjusting (synchronizing) timing, various effects can be realized. Further, in the first half, in which the effect by the movable character or the like is less frequently executed, the display mode of some display areas is simplified (low decoration mode) to reduce the control load. By setting the same display mode (high decoration mode) in all display areas, it is possible to suppress the effect contents from being limited, such as the movement range of the movable auditorium being restricted, and to enhance the interest of the game. Can be.

[33-3. Modified example 2 of configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification symbols in a plurality of regions]
In the example described above, the identification symbol is variably displayed in the same display mode in each display area, and then is stopped and displayed with the same symbol. On the other hand, in the modified example described here, it is possible to stop and display the identification symbol in a different mode (symbol) after performing the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area.

  FIG. 464C is a diagram illustrating an example in which the identification symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment and stopped at different symbols. Since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 464A, illustration is omitted from (C) to (E). It should be noted that, similarly to the first modification shown in FIG. 464B, the identification symbol may be variably displayed, and the gaming machine may be configured such that the stop symbols of each display area are different as in the second modification.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of hits are prepared, and when the display is stopped and displayed in the same manner (identifying symbol) in each display area, "first hit" is indicated while different forms are used in each display area. When stopped and displayed with (identification symbol), it indicates a "second hit" (for example, "small hit") different from the "first hit". As shown in FIG. 464C (G), in the display area A, the identification symbols are all stopped at the same “5”, “5” and “5”, while in the display area B, the middle symbol is different and the identification symbol “5” is displayed. , "V" and "5". In the present modified example, when a small hit is prepared as the second hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 464C (H), the symbol change result is “second hit” and when the “second hit” is won, A game ball can be received in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball wins in the V zone, for example, it is possible to shift to a high probability state.

  As described above, according to the present modification, it is possible to notify the player of the details of the hit by indicating the type of the hit by the combination of the identification symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of display areas. . For example, the stop symbol in the display area A may indicate whether or not "hit", and the stop symbol in the display area B may indicate the type of "hit".

  Further, the combination of the stop symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to mistakenly recognize the result of the variable display. More specifically, when the stop symbol in the display area A indicates "hit", the stop symbol is displayed with the same identification symbol so that the player can clearly recognize the hit. It is better that the display area B is not misunderstood by the player. For example, when the result of the variable display is "out", the display may be stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol so that the player does not misunderstand. In the case of a so-called "big hit", stop display is performed with the same identification symbol in the display area A. On the other hand, in the case of a "small hit", which has a smaller game value than the "big hit", the same identification is performed only in the display area B. You may make it stop display with a symbol.

  When the type of “hit” is suggested by the display mode of the display area B, for example, when the display is stopped with the same identification symbol as that of the display area A, “probable change big hit” or the same In the case where the stop display is performed with the identification symbol, a “normal jackpot” that does not shift to the certain change state may be set. Furthermore, only the middle symbol may be recognized as another identification symbol to recognize the type of big hit, and as described above, if the middle symbol is “V”, it indicates that the game ball can be accepted in the V zone. Alternatively, the number of rounds may be suggested by stopping symbols corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the middle symbol.

  Furthermore, the display area B may be hidden when the identification symbol is stopped, and the player may have a sense of expectation without notifying the type of “hit” while notifying the “hit”. For example, it may be possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player by obscuring whether or not the state is in the probability fluctuation state after the big hit. In addition, the display area B may indicate an advantageous game state (probability variation state, time reduction state, or the like) generated after the end of the big hit game.

  After notifying the player of the big hit in the display mode in the display area A, the display of the identification symbol may be continued only in the display area B. If the display of the display area B is continued, the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and after notifying the big hit, hides the identification symbol in the display area A to perform a subsequent effect. An area can be secured. Also, in this case, the display that was "5", "V", and "5" at the start of the big hit in the display area B was changed to "5", "5", and "5" that were displayed in the display area A from the middle of the big hit game. May be displayed so as to match. Also, this display may be displayed until the big hit game ends and the identification symbol starts to change in the game after the big hit game ends, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing during the big hit game. . However, even if the display is stopped in the middle of the big hit game, it is preferable that the display corresponding to the hit symbol is displayed in the display area A or the display area B when the game after the big hit game is started is started. In this case, for example, “5”, “V”, and “5” are displayed at the hit timing in the display area B, but may be “5”, “V”, and “5” after the big hit game. The display may be changed to “5”, “5”, or “5” across the game.

  According to the present modification, similarly to the above-described embodiment, by performing the variable display of the identification symbol in a plurality of display areas, it is possible to relax the restriction on the area in which the notice effect is performed, and to stop symbols in the plurality of display areas. It is possible to notify the player of the result of the game in detail by the combination of the above, and further, it is possible to realize various notification modes. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[34. Substrate to be a component of decorative body]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, in order to realize various effects, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the gaming machine has been increased, and the gaming entertainment has been improved by increasing the size or deformation.
However, since the size of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined size, the game area is limited, and the size and arrangement of the accessory are limited due to factors such as an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device. For this reason, there is a risk that the effect will be monotonous and the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced. The embodiments to be described hereinafter have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for increasing the size of an accessory and improving flexibility in arrangement.

  The accessory provided in the gaming machine is visible from the front side of the player or the player, and a decorative part with a rich decorative property is arranged to enhance the interest of the game, and a luminous body such as an LED is provided inside. Light is emitted in a mode according to the game state, the degree of expectation of the variable display, and the like. If the luminous body is arranged on a substrate like an LED, the decorative portion includes a transmitting portion capable of transmitting light output from the luminous body. The transmitting portion may be, for example, a transparent member capable of transmitting light, or may be a member formed with a mesh-like hole through which light passes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, a board on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted can be visually recognized by a player via the transmissive portion. Usually, the board is mounted with electronic components necessary for exhibiting the effect, and is not premised on being visually recognized by a player. However, in a decorative part having a transmitting part through which light can pass, a substrate disposed inside the decorative part may be visually recognized by a player, and the decorative effect may be reduced.
On the other hand, if the transmittance of the transmission part is reduced or the substrate is made invisible by using a material that reflects external light on the surface of the transmission part, the expected effect may not be obtained. is there. Further, when the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the outside of the decorative portion or the transparent portion, the size of the decorative portion may be unintentionally increased.

  In view of the above, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the decorative effect even when the substrate is visually recognized from the transparent portion constituting the decorative portion.

[34-1. Game board]
FIG. 465 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the gaming board 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 465, the effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a (on the game board side). Although not shown, in the game area 5a, similarly to the above-described game board 5, a plurality of general winning openings which are always open so as to be able to receive a hit game ball, and a plurality of general winnings are provided. The opening is a starting port which is always open so as to accept a game ball at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first starting port or the second starting port. , A large winning prize hole, etc., in which game balls can be received depending on the result of the lottery.

Further, in the upper right portion of the gaming area 5a, a character combination 9100 having a character shape of "hot heat" is arranged. FIG. 466 is a perspective view showing the shape of character combination 9100 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 466, the character character 9100 is a plate-like character that imitates the character shape of “hot heat”. The effect by the character combination 9100 is executed in a manner corresponding to the degree of expectation of the symbol change.
For example, light emission may be performed in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation, or the light emission mode may be changed, such as repeating lighting and extinguishing in a predetermined pattern. In addition, the so-called “gase” effect that turns on “hot” and “heat” alternately, and when the degree of expectation is high, turns on both characters to notify the big hit and finally turn off both characters Or you may.

  As will be described later, the character role object 9100 includes a cover member (cover body) 9110 which is visually recognized by a player and includes a transparent portion 9111 and a non-transmissive portion 9112, and is configured in accordance with the progress of the game and the effect contents. The light-emitting body provided inside the light-emitting device is configured to emit light from the transmission portion 9111. In the present embodiment, the transmissive portion (first region) 9111 is a portion corresponding to the character, the non-transmissive portion (second region) 9112 is the outer edge portion of the character, and the transmissive portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. . The non-transmissive portion 9112 may also have transparency, and for example, may be colored with a different transmittance from the transmissive portion 9111. The details of the character combination 9100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, a part of the character combination 9100 overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is applied to the back side of the character combination 9100. At this time, by making the back side of the character combination 9100 a reflective member, it is also possible to execute an effect combined with the effect performed by the effect display device 1600. In addition, a part of the character combination 9100 may be configured to transmit light, and an effect may be performed in which light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 transmits the character combination 9100.

  In addition, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a on the front side, and a snowman character 9200 imitating the shape of a “snowman” is provided on the lower left front side of the effect display device 1600. Is arranged. The snowman role 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and a player can visually recognize a part of the side and the back side of the snowball role 9200 from the side.

  FIG. 467 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 in the present embodiment, where (A) is a view from the front and (B) is a view from the back. The snowman role 9200 is formed of a member having a transparent appearance, and exhibits an effect by transmitting light of a light emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

  The snowman role 9200 is externally constituted by a hat, a head, and a body. The head and the body are made of a transmissive member so that the player can visually recognize the inside. The hat has a bucket shape and is provided above the head. The hat portion is formed of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, light emitted from a light-emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted. Details of the snowman role 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings in FIG. 480 and thereafter.

  The snowman role 9200 is executed in a manner corresponding to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation, similarly to the character role 9100. For example, light may be emitted in a color according to the degree of expectation, or lighting and extinguishing may be repeated. Alternatively, only the head may be turned on, or only the trunk may be turned on. Alternatively, only the hat portion may be turned on at the first stage of the notice effect to enhance the player's expectation, and the head portion may be turned on sequentially from the head to the body.

[34-2. Characters (fever)
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the character combination 9100 will be described. FIG. 468 is an exploded perspective view of the character combination 9100 of the present embodiment. The character role 9100 includes a cover member (cover body) 9110 disposed on the front side visible to the player, and a character position substrate mounted on the back side of the cover member 9110 and having a light-emitting body 9301 such as an LED mounted thereon. 9120, and a base member 9130 attached to the back surface of the cover member 9110 and the character substrate 9120.

[34-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 has a peripheral wall portion 9113 protruding rearward on the outer periphery, and a character character substrate 9120 can be accommodated in a space on the back surface surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 469 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character combination 9100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. The state where the character role substrate 9120 is stored will be described later with reference to FIG. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed by the transmissive portion 9111 capable of transmitting light imitating the character of “intense heat” and the non-transmissive portion 9112 formed on the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111 and hardly transmitting light. ing.

  Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character role object 9100 is formed of a material that does not easily transmit light similarly to the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. When the characters are individually lit, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to distinguish between the characters. At this time, the character role substrate 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the substrate may be integrated.

  The transmissive portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and allows the inside of the character combination 9100 to be visually recognized. At the time of performing the effect, the illuminant 9301 provided inside transmits the light to the transmitting portion 9111 and blocks the light by the non-transmitting portion 9112, thereby highlighting the character of "hot heat" and increasing the expectation of the player. be able to. Further, not only can light from a light-emitting body (LED) 9301 disposed on the character role substrate 9120 be transmitted, but also the character role substrate 9120 itself can be visually recognized by a player. .

  In the present embodiment, a light diffusion portion for diffusing light is formed in the non-transmission portion 9112 on the back surface side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusion portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character substrate 9120, and the diffusion member is provided by guiding light from the light emitter 9301 to the transmission portion 9111. In this case, the same effect as in the case of the above can be obtained. A modification using the light guide member will be described later.

  With the above-described configuration, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently concentrated with a small number of light-emitting members, so that the number of light-emitting members 9301 arranged on the character and character substrate 9120 can be reduced, and light emission can be reduced. The degree of freedom in the arrangement of the body 9301 can be increased.

  Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transmissive material having a lower transmittance than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming the light diffusion portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the character role object 9100 is made to emit light as a whole, and a rendering effect different from that in the case of using the light diffusing portion while making the character portion stand out by a difference in transmittance is exerted. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character substrate]
FIG. 470 is a diagram illustrating a front surface side of the character character substrate 9120 of the character character object 9100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 471 is a diagram illustrating a state where the character role substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character role 9100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the back side of the character role substrate 9120.

  As shown in FIGS. 470 and 471, the character role substrate 9120 has a shape of the character role 9100 according to the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110, instead of a general rectangular shape. It has a similar shape. Further, a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) is applied to the surface of the character role substrate 9120. Various information is displayed on the character role substrate 9120, but may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

In addition, the back side of the character role substrate 9120 is closed by the base member 9130 when attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot see it.
Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate to a specific color. You only have to decide.

  As described above, the character role substrate 9120 is visible from the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. Therefore, when the color of the substrate does not match the decoration mode of the accessory, the decoration effect may be reduced, or the decoration effect may be impaired by electronic components arranged on the substrate. Therefore, in this embodiment, the character role substrate 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character role substrate 9120 is colored in a color (specific color) in accordance with the decoration mode of the character, instead of general green, or the electronic component mounted on the character role substrate 9120 changes the pattern of the role. Arrange them in a way. The color according to the decoration mode of the accessory is, for example, a color related to a character or theme that appears in the production of the accessory (game machine). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

  First, a specific mode for using the shape, color, and the like of a substrate provided in a decorative body such as an accessory as a decorative element will be described. As described above, the character role object 9100 of the present embodiment has the transmissive portion 9111, so that the character role substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, the color of the character role object 9100 is configured by coloring the color of the character role substrate 9120 to a specific color according to the decorative aspect of the character role object 9100. For example, in the case where the surface of the character role substrate 9120 is blue, the entire role is blue when the luminous body 9301 is not luminous, and the luminous color of the luminous body 9301 is luminous when luminous. Can be given to others. In particular, when the area occupied by the transmission portion 9111 is large in the entire accessory, a greater effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Luminous body / electronic parts]
A plurality of light-emitting bodies (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the front (front) side of the character role substrate 9120. The luminous bodies 9301 may all be of the same luminescent color, or a plurality of different types of luminescent colors may be prepared. The luminous body 9301 may be lit according to the progress of the game, and the illuminated portion may be different depending on the effect content. When there are different types of light emission colors, the light emission may be performed in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation, or different types of light emission colors may be simultaneously turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the color of the character role substrate 9120 is colored to a specific color as described above. Therefore, the color also changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character role substrate 9120 and the luminescent color of the luminous body 9301, so that various effects can be realized by causing the luminous body 9301 to emit light in a plurality of colors. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the light-emitting body 9301 is turned off, a specific color colored on the character role substrate 9120 is recognized. The specific color colored in 9120 and the luminescent color of the luminous body 9301 can be alternately recognized as different colors. For example, as described above, when the color of the character role substrate 9120 is colored in blue, the light-emitting body 9301 blinks slowly in red. Can be recognized as an accessory of a completely different color.

  Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back side of the character role substrate 9120. Specifically, a resistor 9302, an IC 9303, and a connector 9304 are provided. In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, any arrangement that does not cause any technical problem may be used. Further, as shown in FIG. 471, information on the luminous body 9301 disposed on the front side is printed on the back side of the character role substrate 9120, and the electronic component disposed on the front side even from the back side. Information about the system. Information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is indicated by a dotted line in order to prevent erroneous recognition.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 470, only the luminous body 9301 is arranged on the front surface side, and information about the electronic component is not displayed. This is to prevent the characters printed on the silk-screen (for example, the component number of the electronic component (eg, “LED1” in FIG. 471)) from being visually recognized by the player, thereby preventing the decoration effect from being reduced. The information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, if necessary, such as efficiency of the game. For example, when the color of the character role substrate 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color such as light blue and a color whose density is adjusted so as to be identifiable is adopted as an information display, and silk printing is performed. Just fine. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

  In the character combination 9100 according to the present embodiment, electronic components other than the light-emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back side of the substrate that cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the electronic components such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. . When the electronic component must be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic component such as the rear side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is arranged so as to be hard to be seen by the player, or a color or color that is hardly seen by the player. An electronic component having a shape may be employed. For example, electronic components having the same color as the specific color may be arranged on the front side.

  On the other hand, as described above, the present invention has a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the board provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example will be described in which an electronic component arranged on a substrate is used as a decorative element of an accessory.

  The electronic component is arranged on the front side of the character substrate 9120 at a position where the player can visually recognize the electronic component from the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form a character pattern displayed by the character combination 9100. For example, electronic components are arranged at regular positions so as to decorate characters.

  The arrangement of the light emitters 9301 may prevent a player from recognizing a character pattern during light emission. Furthermore, the light emitting body 9301 located at a position where the electronic component can be recognized even during light emission and the light emitting body 9301 located at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized during light emission are selected to emit light. The presence or absence may be switchable.

  Alternatively, a decorative element may be provided by disposing an electronic component other than black on the front side. Although the transmitting portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may transmit light as a lens member or a diffusing member, but may make it difficult for a player to recognize the electronic component as a pattern by not being able to clearly identify the electronic component. Note that another specific example of a mode in which a decoration effect is exerted by disposing the electronic components will be described with reference to a snowman role 9200 described later.

  Further, characters printed on the front surface side of the substrate can be used as patterns. Instead of printing characters in a color that is difficult for players to recognize to prevent the decorative effect from being disturbed, characters that indicate information on electronic components and boards can be recognized by the player as decorative elements. You may print in an aspect (color, shape). This makes it possible to make the pattern of the accessory more complicated, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, so that the decorative effect can be enhanced. In addition, the characters printed on the board are aggregated so that the player recognizes that the cover member 9110 or an area of a color different from other parts on the board is formed on the board. You may make it raise.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of light emitters]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmitting portion 9111 and the non-transmitting portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 472 is a view for explaining the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character combination 9100 of the present embodiment.

  In this embodiment, the luminous bodies 9301 are also arranged at positions that are visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at positions behind the non-transmissive portion 9112 that are difficult for the player to visually recognize. Here, the luminous body 9301 arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is referred to as a luminous body 9301a, and the luminous body 9301b arranged behind the non-transmissive portion 9112.

  For example, when strong light emission is desired, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmission portion 9111 so that light is directly emitted to the outside. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 469, since the light diffusing portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112, light is diffused by disposing the light emitting body 9301b on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112, so that the light is softened. It is possible to emit light.

  In this manner, the position of the light emitting body 9301a may be determined according to the type of the accessory, and the light emitting mode can be switched by one accessory by selecting the light emitting body 9301 to emit light. Specifically, only the light emitter 9301a or all of the light emitters 9301 need to emit light when it is desired to emit light intensely as a whole, and only light emitter 9301b is emitted when soft light is desired to emit light to diffuse light. Just do it.

  In addition, the transmittance of the transmitting portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the luminous body 9301a is slightly hard to visually recognize without being completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmissive portion 9111 may have a slightly lower transmittance (colored transparent, for example, light blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmissive portion 9111 may be processed (e.g., textured) to diffuse light. In this way, the inside may be made difficult to see. With this configuration, the luminous body itself is difficult to visually recognize, but can emit light more intensely than the luminous body is arranged behind the non-transmissive portion 9112. Further, since the degree of freedom of the position of the light emitting body 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom of design is increased, and the development efficiency can be improved.

  The character effect substrate 9120 itself may not be used as a direct decorative element, but may be an indirectly enhancing effect. For example, in the case where the specific color of the character role substrate 9120 is white, the reflectance can be increased even when the arranged light emitting body 9301 is not turned on. Of course, by reflecting light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character role object 9100 from becoming too dark.

  In addition, since the specific color of the character role substrate 9120 is white, the character color of the character role 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the light is turned off. In this case, when a full-color LED (LED of R, G, and B colors) is used as the light-emitting body 9301, the character color can be expressed as various colors. However, the light from the light-emitting body 9301 and the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 The light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusion unit provided on the substrate and the light reflected from the substrate surface overlap and fuse to perform a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed by a single type of light emitting body 9301. it can. At this time, a variety of effects can be realized without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, so that costs can be reduced.

  As described above, the character role of the present embodiment is configured so as to be visually recognized by a player by using the color of the board and the mounted electronic components as decorative elements. Since there is no need to perform this, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Also, electronic components that do not become decorative elements may be arranged on the back side of the substrate, and electronic components other than light-emitting elements such as LEDs may be arranged on the back side, so that only the color of the substrate may be used as a decorative element.

[34-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when attached. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is brought into contact with the base member 9130, and is fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character role substrate 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character role substrate 9120 may be accommodated in a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may make it. Wiring for transmitting a signal or supplying power to the character substrate 9120 is not shown. For example, a wiring hole is formed in the base member 9130 and the peripheral wall 9113 of the cover member 9110. It may be formed.

  Note that the cover member 9110 may be provided with an attachment portion without using the base member 9130, so that the cover member 9110 is directly attached to the game board 5. In this case, the character substrate 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[34-3. Modification 1 of character character]
Subsequently, the shape of the character role substrate 9120 does not completely resemble the shape of the character role substrate 9100, and the outer edge of the character role substrate 9120 matches the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. The case in which it is not performed will be described. In this case, since the luminous body 9301 cannot be arranged on the entire character role 9100, the light guide member 9140 is disposed between the cover member 9110 and the character role substrate 9120, and the light is diffused. The shortage of the light amount in the portion where 9301 is not arranged is compensated. Note that the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as in the above-described example.

  FIG. 473 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses light from the light emitting body 9301 in the character combination 9100 according to the present embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 in order to diffuse light to the entire back surface side of the cover member 9110 of the character member 9100, similarly to the shape of the character member substrate 9120 described above. The shape is similar to the shape of the character role 9100 according to the outer shape of the space.

  FIG. 474 is a diagram illustrating the front side of the character role substrate 9120 of the character role 9100 according to the first modification of the embodiment. FIG. 475 shows a state where the character role substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character role 9100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the back side of the character role substrate 9120. The configuration other than the shape of the character role substrate 9120 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 474 and 475, the character role substrate 9120 is formed with a cutout portion 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. Further, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the center of the character substrate 9120. As shown in FIG. 475, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is attached to the base member 9130 through the attachment hole 9121.

  Similarly, a mounting hole is formed in the light guide member 9140 so that the mounting portion of the base member 9130 is inserted therethrough. Note that if the proportion of the cutout 9122 is small and the position of the substrate is not shifted, the mounting structure may not be provided and the substrate may be sandwiched and fixed between the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130.

FIG. 476 is a view for explaining the positional relationship between the light-emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character combination 9100 according to the modification of the present embodiment.
In this modification, the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged in the cutout 9122, and thus the light guide member 9140 guides the light so that the entire character role object 9100 emits light. At this time, a light diffusion portion may be provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

  Therefore, in the character role 9100 of the present modified example, a portion to be decorated by the character role substrate 9120 by using the color of the character role substrate 9120 or an electronic component as a decoration element, and a cutout portion 9122 are formed. Therefore, a part that is not decorated by the character role substrate 9120 is mixed. At this time, the decoration effect can be maintained by performing light decoration by the light diffusion member provided on the back surface side of the light guide member 9140 and the non-transmission part 9112 of the cover member 9110.

  As described in this modification, the shape of the character role substrate 9120 does not need to be similar to the character role substrate 9100, and the portion that is not decorated by the character role substrate 9120 includes the light guide member 9140 and the light diffusion portion. The light decoration may be provided to suppress the reduction of the decoration effect. Also, the color of the base member 9130 may be made the same as the specific color of the character role substrate 9120 to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect. This makes it possible to make the shape of the character role substrate 9120 a relatively simple shape without making it complicated, or to increase the degree of freedom in the size of the substrate to reduce the manufacturing cost of processing the substrate and the like. The increase can be suppressed.

  In addition, without using the base member 9130, the light emitting decorative portion disposed on the back surface side of the character combination 9100 allows the light from the decorative portion to pass through the cutout portion 9122 to produce the effect. Good. For example, when the character combination 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, an image is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character combination are performed. An effect in which the light emission effect by the object 9100 is integrated may be executed. A similar effect can be performed by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[34-4. Modification 2 of character character]
In the first modification, the cutout portion 9122 is formed in a part of the substrate. In the second modification, an example will be described in which the above-described character role substrate 9120 is about half the size of the character role 9100.
In addition, the cover member 9110 is configured to directly attach the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the configuration of the character role 9100 in the present modified example includes the cover member 9110, the character role substrate 9120, and the light guide. It is constituted by a member 9140.

  In this modification, similarly to the first modification, light is guided to a portion where the light-emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged by the light guide member 9140, and light decoration is performed. In the present modification, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a light-emitting body is provided on the back surface side of the character role object 9100, light of the light-emitting body can be transmitted.

  FIG. 477 is a diagram showing the front side of the character role substrate 9120 of the character role 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment, and the character role substrate 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap. The state is shown. FIG. 478 shows a state where the character role substrate 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character role 9100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing the back side of the character role substrate 9120.

  As shown in FIGS. 477 and 478, the character role substrate 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character role 9100. Therefore, when the character role 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with the specific color colored on the character role substrate 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character role substrate 9120. It becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character combination 9100 can be transmitted through the transmission portion 9111, the back side of the character combination 9100 may be set to a specific color to suppress the sense of discomfort.

  Further, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower regions. For example, in the case of a character combination in which characters are described in two stages, a character combination substrate 9120 is arranged on the upper side, and a light-emitting body is arranged on the lower surface side of the lower stage to perform different effects in the upper stage and the lower stage. In addition, if the accessory is movable, different effects can be executed for each stop position by arranging a different light emitting body on the back side for each stop position.

  Further, the luminous body is not limited to the LED and the lamp, but may be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. For example, an LED is disposed as a luminous body on the upper part of the game board 5 and the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 In the case of moving downward, the effect can be executed by transmitting light from the lower part of the accessory by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Note that the image displayed on the back side of the character combination 9100 is the same color (character combination) as that of the character combination 9100 including the lower half (the cutout in Modification 1) regardless of the transparent portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112. (A portion showing the object substrate 9120 is the same color as the specific color), and an image of the same shape may be displayed. This is because an image is displayed even if any failure occurs in the character combination 9100, so that the player can proceed with the game without giving the player anxiety due to the failure.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of effects with one accessory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 479, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by a player via a character combination 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, light by an image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back side of the character role object 9100, and the light emission effect by the character role substrate 9120. Then, the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be executed in cooperation. With such a configuration, the lower side portion of the character role object substrate 9120 becomes a boundary, and can be one element constituting a decoration.

  FIG. 479 is a diagram illustrating a state where the character role item 9100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The light from the luminous body 9301 mounted on the character role substrate 9120 is diffused by the light guide member 9140 at the upper part of the character role substrate 9100. On the other hand, the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 is diffused by the light guide member 9140 at the lower portion of the character combination 9100. At this time, by combining the light from the light emitter 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to execute an effect in which the effect by the character combination 9100 and the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 are integrated.

  Note that effects other than the character combination 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member, and a luminous body is arranged on the back side or a sticker is attached to enhance the decoration effect, the game board 5 is visually recognized through the transmission part of the accessory and combined. Thereby, the decoration effect can be further enhanced.

[34-5. Snowman character]
Next, the snowman role 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 467, the snowman role 9200 is a role (decorative body) imitating a snowman, in which a spherical head is placed on a spherical body part slightly larger than the head. It has become. Further, a bucket-shaped hat portion is mounted on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is formed of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light-emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted.

  FIG. 480 is a diagram illustrating a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. The snowman role 9200 houses a board (snowman board 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED are mounted inside a cover member 9210 divided into a front cover member 9210a and a back cover member 9210b. Is done.

  The snowman accessory 9200 is used in an effect performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, an effect such as causing an internal light emitting element to emit light in accordance with the degree of expectation of a symbol change is executed. In addition, since the cover member 9210 is formed of a material that allows light to pass therethrough and is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is performed. Is also good. Hereinafter, each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 481 is a view of the front side cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIG. 482 is a diagram illustrating the back surface side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. FIG. 483 is a diagram illustrating the front surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. FIG. 484 is a diagram illustrating the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman role 9200 according to the present embodiment.

  The cover member 9210 (the front cover member 9210a, the back cover member 9210b) of the snowman role 9200 is almost colorless and transparent except for a part and has transparency, and a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) housed inside from the front. ) Is visible on the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the snowman substrate 9220 has the shape of a snowman role 9200, and has a very rich design. The snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color), like the character role substrate 9120. In addition, the configuration of the substrate itself is the same as that of the character substrate 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front side and the back side. In addition, the code | symbol of the electronic component on a board | substrate uses the code | symbol common to the character role 9100.

  In the present embodiment, the shape of the snowman substrate 9220 is such that the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 is occupied so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be seen from the front. As a result, the entire snowman role 9200 is recognized as a specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire role is determined. On the other hand, a cutout or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back side of the snowman role 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 from behind the snowman role 9200, or a decorative body such as a light emitting body may be arranged to enhance the variety of the effect.

  Also, the snowman role 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side surface of the snowman role 9200 by only slightly tilting his / her line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 has transparency, the player can view the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface. In the character role 9100 that is configured so that the substrate cannot be seen from the back side, it is not necessary to make the specific color up to the back side of the substrate, but the snowman substrate 9220 is also colored in the specific color on the back side. Thereby, even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman role 9200 from the side, it is possible to suppress the decoration effect from being reduced. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the form of the accessory can be improved, and the effect of the game can be improved, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  Since the player can visually recognize the back surface beyond the side surface of the snowman substrate 9220, the luminous body 9301 may be arranged on the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220, and the entirety of the snowman role 9200 may emit light from the back surface side. . Further, by coloring the rear surface of the snowman substrate 9220 in a color different from that of the front surface, it is possible to give a different impression to the player than when only the light emitter 9301 on the front surface emits light. Note that a similar effect can be expected by arranging the luminous bodies 9301 of the same color of the snowman substrate 9220 and different luminescent colors. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the accessory and enhance the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 480, an opening is provided in a hat portion of the snowman role 9200, and a cord for transmitting power or a signal is inserted into a snowman board 9220 housed in the snowman role 9200. I have. Various effects are executed by causing the light-emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 to emit light by the supplied power and a signal from the effect control device.

  In addition, the hat of the snowman role 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency as described above. The permeability of the hat portion is lower than that of the other portions of the snowman role 9200, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside. Therefore, by arranging the connector 9304 disposed on the snowman board 9220 and the cord connected to the connector 9304 in the hat portion, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the connector.

In the cover member 9210 (the front cover member 9210a), a transparent portion B9211b having a different transmittance is formed at a portion corresponding to a snowman's eye when the player sees from the front.
In addition, other transmission parts except the hat part are referred to as transmission parts A9211a. In the present embodiment, the transmission portion B9211b is configured such that the inside of the snowman role 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred state while leaving aberration like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the outline of the electronic component arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 accommodated in the snowman role 9200 can be blurred and visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 483, in the present embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are collectively arranged on a snowman substrate 9220 corresponding to a portion corresponding to the eyes of the snowman role 9200. The resistors 9302 are black electronic components and are densely arranged in a circle. When looking at the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, the player visually recognizes the outline of the electronic component through the transparent portion B9211b, so that the outline of the electronic component appears blurred. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) arranged and arranged on the board are recognized as the black eyes of the snowman, and the decorative element can be formed.

  In addition, the component number of the electronic component (the component number printed with silk such as “R1”) is silk-printed with yellow of the same system as white, which is the same color as the resist of the snowman substrate 9220, so that it can be identified. I have. In this embodiment, since the resistors are densely printed similarly to the resistor 9302, they are identifiable and function as reflecting light because of the densely printed portions.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the component number of the electronic component (the component number printed with silk such as “R1”) may also be printed with black silk in the same manner as the resistor. As described above, both the resistance 9302 and the eyes of the snowman can be recognized by the effect of the lens.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 484, an electronic component (IC 9303) that does not constitute a decorative element is located on the back side of the snowman substrate 9220 and at the position outside when the snowman role 9200 is installed on the game board 5. Etc.). This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize an electronic component having a low decorative effect or a possibility that the decorative effect may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entertainment effect from being reduced due to the reduced effect of the effect. . At this time, by directing the snowman substrate 9220 toward the center of the gaming machine, the electronic components disposed on the back side can be made more difficult to visually recognize.

  Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described focusing on the cover member 9210 (the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b). The front-side cover member 9210a and the rear-side cover member 9210b do not need to be equally divided in the front-rear direction. For example, one of the front-side cover members 9210a may be formed rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220. Good. Hereinafter, an example in which one side (inside) of the front side cover member 9210a is formed rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 485 is a view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 485, when the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed to extend backward beyond the side surface of the snowman substrate 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman role 9200 visually recognized by the player Is constituted by the front cover member 9210a. Accordingly, the mounting position of the front cover member 9210a with respect to the back cover member 9210b (the joint between the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b) is deeper behind the snowman board 9220, so that decorativeness is high. You can realize the role.

  In addition, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored white (specific color) has a snowman role 9200 on not only the front surface but also the back surface. Is decorated in white. It is desirable that both sides be white as in the present embodiment, but the player may mainly view the front side, and only the front side may be white.

  Although FIG. 485 shows a mode in which only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220, depending on the decoration of the accessory to be employed, only the outer side extends rearward of the substrate. A mode that extends to the rear of the substrate on both the inside and the outside may be adopted.

  Further, a configuration for attaching each component of the accessory and attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 485, the snowman substrate 9220 is attached by a substrate attachment portion 9213 and an attachment member 9214 formed on the back cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable that the board mounting portion 9213 be provided outside the snowman role 9200 which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Furthermore, the front side cover member 9210a is attached to the back side cover member 9210b by a cover attaching portion (not shown), but it is preferable that the cover attaching portion be provided outside the snowman role 9200 like the substrate attaching portion 9213. Also, the back cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and the attachment portion to the structure is preferably provided outside the snowman role 9200, like the substrate attachment portion 9213. In this way, by arranging the mounting portion of each component of the accessory and the mounting portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to suppress the decorativeness of the accessory from being hindered. Can be.

  In addition, not only the outside of the accessory, but also a portion that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a portion made of a colored member (a hat portion in the snowman role 9200 of the present embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc., so that the visibility is improved). Attachment parts are provided at a place where the part is lowered or a part that is bent in the accessory shape (the boundary between the head and the body in the case of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment). Can be prevented from being impaired.

  In the example shown in FIG. 485, the front cover member 9210a and the back cover member 9210b constitute the snowman role 9200. However, as shown in FIG. 486, one cover member 9210 forms the shape of the snowman. You may do so. FIG. 486 is a view in which a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 in the modification of the present embodiment is viewed from above.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 486, the cover member 9210 and the snowman substrate 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230. In this modification as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 485, the snowman substrate 9220 is preferably white on both sides, but may be white only on the front side.

  In this modification, not only the snowman substrate 9220 but also the base member 9230 are provided so that the inner cover member extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and also beyond the base member 9230. Will be visible from. For this reason, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using a specific color (for example, white) similar to that of the snowman substrate 9220. Note that, as described above, the cover member 9210 and the snowman substrate 9220 are attached to the base body 9230 by providing an attachment portion at a place where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize and attaching the attachment member or the like. Deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In this modification, the cover member 9210 has a configuration in which only the inside extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and the base body 9230. A mode extending only to the rear of the substrate or the base body or a mode extending to the rear of the substrate or the base body on both the inside and the outside may be adopted.

[34-6. Effects etc.]
In general, electronic circuit boards include a raw board of a basic size, and the cost is greatly affected by how many boards can be obtained from one raw board based on the raw board. Although it is designed to be a square shape when considered very simply, the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman role 9200 of the present embodiment has a shape that is very rich in design. In other words, it can be said that all the elements constituting the substrate, from the color of the resist and the substrate to the electronic components, are used as the decoration performance of the accessory.

  The character character substrate 9120 of the character character described above has a substantially square shape. Although it has a shape that falls within a simple design as compared to the snowman substrate 9220, it can be said that the cover body that covers the substrate has more functions to have design properties.

  As described above, not only the light-emitting body (LED) but also the substrate on which the electronic circuit including the electronic components for controlling the light-emitting body is formed is formed in the inside of the accessory which has been seen in recent years. It is provided together. In the first place, a wiring on an electronic circuit is formed on a substrate on which an electronic circuit is formed by electrically connecting electronic components constituting the electronic circuit to each other. In order to prevent oxidation of the wiring, a protective film ( (Resist).

  Therefore, the color of the resist, which is the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate was focused on as the coloring of the accessory. Nevertheless, when the transmission part is provided on the front side, the electronic component mounted on the substrate may be visually recognized from the transmission part, so that the decoration effect as the accessory may be reduced. As exemplified by the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, the color of the board is reduced, and furthermore, all elements constituting the board and the mounted electronic components themselves are also used as decoration elements, thereby preventing a reduction in the decoration effect, and It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

  In a gaming machine, a plurality of substrates on which electronic components are mounted are mounted. Of these, the main board, the payout control board, and the like provided on the back side of the gaming machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, and inspection and confirmation thereof are easy. On the other hand, in a light-emitting decorative substrate used for a movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on a game board panel, a lens that reflects and scatters light from the light-emitting decorative substrate on a surface facing the player side on the front side. Members and the like are provided, and the rear side is attached to the game board panel in a state facing the effect display device attached to the game board panel. In addition, on the rear side of the light-emitting decoration board, a connector for connecting a flat cable for receiving a control signal or the like from peripheral control means, a control element, a driver, a resistor, a capacitor, etc. Electronic components are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it has been difficult to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the light emitting decorative board in the installed gaming machine. . This is because the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate is in a state facing the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, means for solving such a problem will be described below.

FIG. 487 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in the present embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side effect display device 1600.
The game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the game panel 1100. A space is formed between the game panel side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side, and a plurality of accessories are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the near side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, a board back grass part 6800, a first big tree part 6600, a second big tree part 6650, a first cloud part 6700, a second cloud part 6700 A cloud role 6750 is provided. The first giant tree feature 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree role 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant leaf substrate 6680. I have. In addition, a first grass character 6470 and a second grass character 6475 are provided behind them, a rabbit character 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain character 6500 is provided behind them. The game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind the 6500. By arranging a plurality of characters in layers in this manner, a sense of depth can be obtained.

  FIG. 488 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the near side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b as a face light emitting portion 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. The left and right front legs of the rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover section 6010, and a first arm section 6016 and a second arm section 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body part 6030 which is a plate-like member made of a white opaque synthetic resin is provided, imitating a body part of a rabbit.

  FIG. 489 (A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. 489 (B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-shaped member formed of a printed circuit board, and the front and rear surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting an electric circuit provided on the surface. . An LED constituting the first face light emitting portion 6023a and an LED constituting the second face light emitting portion 6023b are provided on the front side of the face board 6020, and the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the first The resistors 6027a to 6027f, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 489 (A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has two rectangular portions extending upward as a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 on the upper side of the rectangle. It has a shaped shape. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates a rabbit face, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 imitate rabbit ears. In a state where the face cover 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are not covered by the face cover 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

  The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a simulating the inside of a rabbit ear, respectively. The first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing with a brown ink on a white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are formed as brown visible regions. ing. In the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the above-described white protective film. Further, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and are regions where the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. .

  The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b. Specifically, the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are each configured by an LED mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, but the details will be described later.

  The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration portion 6024. Specifically, the mouth decoration part 6024 is formed by applying printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating the mouth of the rabbit is visible in pink. It has become. The front surface of the face substrate 6020 is configured such that the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is pink, and the other regions are white and visible.

  FIG. 489 (B) is a diagram showing the rear side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is also covered with the white protective film for protecting the circuit, similarly to the front surface of the face substrate 6020. Above the left and right sides of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are provided at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b provided on the front side. And the character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the names of the mounted components are formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film, respectively. . A driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character strings “LED1” and “LED2”. Under the driver 6026, a character string “DR1” is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

  A capacitor 6028 (a first capacitor 6028a and a second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting position of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting position of the second face light emitting unit 6023b. In addition, corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b, character strings “C1” and “C2” are formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

  A resistor 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) is surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. In addition, corresponding to the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f, character strings “R1” to “R6” are formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

  On the right side of the area where the resistor 6027 is mounted, a control element 6025 composed of a microcomputer is surface-mounted. Further, in correspondence with the control element 6025, a character string “IC1” is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and performs lighting control of the LED forming the first face light emitting section 6023a and the LED forming the second face light emitting section 6023b.

  A connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. In addition, a character string “CN1” is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film corresponding to the connector 6029. A control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the control element 6025 via the connector 6029, and power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020. The power supplied to the face substrate 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs constituting the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b, and the like.

  The control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 each have a black main body and a metal terminal. Further, metal terminals of the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the face board 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 489 (B), the main parts of these electronic components are represented in black, and the metal terminals and the solder included in these electronic components are represented in white.

  FIG. 490 is a perspective view of the face cover unit 6010. The face cover portion 6010 has a box-like shape with an open rear, and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover portion front portion 6011 forming a front surface, a face cover upper surface portion 6012 forming an upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 forming a right surface, and a face cover forming a lower surface. The lower surface 6014 and the left side 6015 of the face cover constituting the left side.

  As shown in FIGS. 488 to 490, a first face light scattering portion 6011a imitating rabbit eyes and a second face light scattering portion A face light scattering unit 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering portion 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first face light emitting portion 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in a front view. Further, the second face light scattering section 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second face light emitting section 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in a front view. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 488 (A), the first face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering section 6011b are respectively more viewed from the front than the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b. The first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b respectively surround the outer shapes of the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b in front view. It is configured as follows.

  The first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b form the first face light by forming a fine lens cut or a matte finish on the front side of the face cover front portion 6011. When light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, the light is formed by a rough surface capable of irregularly reflecting the light. The front part 6011 of the face cover portion has light incident on portions other than the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b as the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b. There is no structure for irregularly reflecting light, and the face substrate 6020 located at the rear is directly visible from the front. In the face substrate 6020, the rectangular portion forming the region excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangle forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flows, and they just overlap in front view. Position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind into screw holes provided in the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, the face cover left surface 6015, and the like. It is attached with.

  The rear surface of the face cover front part 6011 and the face light emitting part 6023 are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, the heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023 can be easily radiated, and the occurrence of a situation in which the face light emitting unit 6023 breaks down due to the heat generated by itself can be suppressed. Become. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted also in the relationship between the light emitting unit and members such as covers provided corresponding to the light emitting unit.

  As described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 includes the face substrate 6020, the face cover portion 6010 that covers the front of the face substrate 6020, and the body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. On the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs functioning as a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b are surface-mounted, and face cover portions constituting the front side of a face cover portion 6010 covering the front, respectively. The first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b provided on the front portion 6011 are configured to emit light. Electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020.

  A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029, and receives a control signal for driving an LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 from the peripheral control board 1510. Power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face board 6020 is supplied from the flat cable. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emission mode of the LED forming the face light emitting unit 6023.

  The LEDs constituting the face light emitting portion 6023 are formed by enclosing three of an LED chip capable of emitting red light, an LED chip capable of emitting green light, and an LED chip capable of emitting blue light with a colorless and transparent resin. . The LED constituting the face light emitting portion 6023 is provided with three metal terminals serving as anodes and three metal terminals serving as cathodes of each LED chip. Further, when a current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, each LED chip can emit light. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, red, green, and blue light can be emitted independently.

  Further, between the circuit connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip, a resistor 6027 is provided as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, a first resistor 6027a to a third resistor 6027c are respectively provided between the driver 2026 and the circuit connecting the anodes of the LED chips included in the LEDs constituting the face light emitting portion 6023a to form the driver 2026 and the face light emitting portion 6023b. A fourth resistor 6027d to a sixth resistor 6027f are provided between circuits connecting the anodes of the respective LED chips included in the LED. By providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip in this way, the current flowing through each LED chip is adjusted, and if a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit is overloaded. Prevents current from flowing.

  Further, the first capacitor 6028a is provided in a power supply terminal provided in the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is provided in parallel with the power supply terminal provided in the driver 6026 in terms of an electric circuit, so that the control element 6025 and the driver 6026 can be stably provided. It has a function to operate it.

  The rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled to be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) between a standby position below the game board side effect display device 1600 and a movement position near the center on the front side of the game board effect display device 1600. It is possible to do. This driving mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. A predetermined game content is notified to the player according to the movement mode and the light emission mode of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the movement position, and the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face board 6020 are in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the movement position. Is turned on in red, and the first face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering section 6011b are turned on in red, so that the stop pattern of the changing decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit. It may be configured to indicate that the degree of expectation is higher than usual. Note that, in the other embodiments, examples in which the accessory and a part of the member constituting the accessory are moved or the light emitting unit provided in the accessory is controlled to a predetermined light emitting mode are described. May be used as an effect, and the effect may indicate that the degree of expectation of the stop display of the changing decorative symbol in a state indicating a big hit is higher than usual.

  As described above, in the light-emitting decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) provided in such a decorative member (rabbit accessory 6000), a problem may occur in the light-emitting function. For example, in the step of performing surface mounting on a printed board constituting the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and the electrical connection between the circuit on the printed board and the mounted electronic component was not performed properly. In some cases, the electronic components mounted on the back surface side of the printed circuit board during assembly at the factory may come into contact with other members or tools, and the mounted electronic components may be lost. In addition, there is a possibility that a failure may occur in the electronic component due to aged deterioration or the like after the gaming machine is installed in the game store.

For example, in an LED functioning as a face light emitting portion 6023 capable of emitting full-color light by emitting three colors of red, blue, and green by a driver 6026, one of six metal terminals is electrically connected. When the connection is lost, only one of the three colors is intended to emit light in a controlled manner, but in reality only two colors are emitted and only one color is emitted. As a result, a non-light emitting state occurs. Such a state may occur when the LED chip breaks down and current stops flowing, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is dropped from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit is disconnected. .
Such a situation may give the player playing the game the impression that the movable decorative member has a poor appearance. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light in the same color, a situation may occur in which only the failed LED emits light in a different emission color.
Further, there is a possibility that a situation may be caused in which a player misunderstands the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  In addition, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face substrate 6020 bends many times due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, and the strength of a predetermined portion of the flat cable deteriorates. In addition, a situation may occur in which the flat cable is disconnected, and signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit accessory 6000 are not properly performed. Alternatively, it may be assumed that the connector 6029 is broken due to repeated stress applied to a part of the connector 6029 due to repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit accessory 6000, and an unintended light emission mode is indicated to the player, or power supply is not completely performed. In this case, the face light emitting portion 6023 of the rabbit character 6000 does not take on the lighting mode, and moves from the standby position to the moving position in the light-off state, or from the moving position to the standby position. May have a bad appearance.

  Therefore, in the present invention, when the gaming machine is turned off, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 located in front is reflected on the surface thereof. It is configured to be reflected. Specifically, it is preferable that the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 be configured so that incident light is specularly reflected. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflection plate (reflection sheet) is installed close to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The reflector may be configured to specularly reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, if there is any abnormality in the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 located in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 located behind. By visually checking, the content of the abnormality can be confirmed. Alternatively, it is possible to confirm whether an abnormality has occurred.

  FIG. 491 (A) is a perspective view showing a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position. In FIG. 491 (A), a rabbit role 6000 is provided on a gaming machine such that electronic components mounted on a face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown.

  In this example, a rabbit accessory 6000 is arranged in front of the game board effect display device 1600, and a front substrate forming a display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and a face substrate 6020 provided on the rabbit accessory 6000 are provided. It is configured such that it is located at a predetermined distance (specifically, about several cm) from the back surface. In the example shown in FIG. 49A, a part of the driver 6026 and the whole of the first resistor 6027a and the second resistor 6027b mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are entirely in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. The state shown in is shown.

  Note that FIG. 491 (A) shows a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed obliquely from the upper right, but it is also possible to visually recognize the mounting mode of another electronic component by looking into the rabbit accessory 6000 from another angle. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is viewed from the top in the center in the left-right direction, the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b can be visually recognized. Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, the entire connector 6029 and the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 can be viewed. In this example, it is difficult to confirm how the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are mounted, but this will be described later.

  FIG. 491 (B) is a perspective view showing a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position. In FIG. 491 (B), the rabbit role 6000 is provided on the gaming machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In this example, it is difficult to visually recognize the electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first to sixth resistors 6027a to 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face board 6020, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a It is possible to confirm the mounting mode only for a part and only a part of the second capacitor 6028b. A method of visually recognizing the electronic component mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

  As described above, in the gaming machine in the power-off state, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 as the decoration means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 can be checked even after the gaming machine has been installed in the game arcade. In addition, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and can be visually recognized in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 which is visually recognized in black is visually recognized. It is configured to be easy.

  Although an example is shown in which the entire surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film, the configuration is not limited to white, and the circuit on the face substrate 6020 may be covered with a light-colored protective film such as cream. You may. This is because the difference in brightness between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black is more evident in the case where the bright protective film is employed than in the case where the dark protective film is employed. This is because the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily recognized.

As a process of coloring the face substrate 6020, after forming a circuit structure by copper plating on a printed circuit board, a white protective agent is employed as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, and a place where a through hole is provided. Except for this, it is desirable that the protective agent be applied to both sides of the printed board to form a white protective film and that the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 be white. When a protective agent other than white is used as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, a white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. May be.
Alternatively, by combining these embodiments and applying a white protective agent to form a protective film, and then applying white ink on the white protective film, the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes more white. It may be configured as follows. By forming the face substrate 6020 in such a mode, the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized in white. Note that the same method can be adopted not only when the substrate is made white, but also when it is desired to be visible in another color such as black or green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate is set to a specific color.
Although an example has been shown in which the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 is white, only a part of the region where the color of the face substrate 6020 is white may be used. Alternatively, only a predetermined area on the rear surface where electronic components are mounted may be white. In addition, the rear of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a thin plate-shaped cover, and a punched opening is provided in the cover so that an electronic component whose mounting state is to be checked can be visually recognized. Thus, the rear surface of the face board 6020 and a specific electronic component whose mounting mode is desired to be checked may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. When a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is irregularly reflected on the cover surface, and the visibility of electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reduced. In the case where a colored and opaque cover is used as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, and it is extremely difficult to confirm the mounting manner. . Therefore, a punched opening may be provided so that at least a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is visible. With such a configuration, the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be protected by the cover, and the electronic component whose mounting mode is desired to be checked can be checked from the opening provided in the cover. it can. Further, by providing such an opening, heat generated from the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be released to the outside, and the mounted electronic components may be damaged or deteriorated by the heat. The occurrence can be suppressed. It is preferable that the electronic component is configured so as not to protrude from the opening in a state where the electronic component protrudes backward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. The color of the cover may be black or opaque or dark opaque. With such a configuration, it is easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

  It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a difference in brightness from the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a light color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. With such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 can be easily viewed with respect to the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 that is black. Further, since the face substrate 6020 is light and the mounted electronic components are dark, the face substrate 6020 reflected on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face substrate 6020 and the face substrate 6020. The electronic components are distinguished from each other and can be visually recognized.

In addition, the LED capable of multicolor light emission is formed of a white member in order to increase the reflectance.
In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting mode of the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. As described above, when the electronic component to be mounted is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, although the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is difficult to see, the LEDs mounted on the face board 6020 are easy to see. Alternatively, black or dark ink may be applied to the mounted electronic component or the electronic component before mounting, and the electronic component may be mounted on a white or light color face substrate.

  In the specification of the present application, the term white refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly and substantially (approximately 100 to 80%) diffusely reflects visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light. The light color refers to a color that becomes visible, such as cream or light gray, by absorbing a specific wavelength region to some extent and diffusely reflecting the remaining wavelength region. On the other hand, black refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and partially (about 20 to several percent) diffusely reflects. I have. In addition, the dark color means that the visible light of all wavelengths is uniformly absorbed, and only a part of the light is diffusely reflected (about 20 to several percent). A near color, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as a dark blue color.

  The rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 491 (A) and 491 (B) may be configured so that it can be manually moved from the standby position to the upward movement position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not disabled by the lock mechanism when the power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. It is configured as follows.

  First, an immovable state will be described as a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be manually moved. In general, when the movable decorative body is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, when a large acceleration is applied to the movable decorative body at the time of transporting the gaming machine or installing the movable decorative body at the game store, etc. In addition, the movable decorative body may be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided for locking when the movable decorative body is in the standby position while the power is on, and when the power is turned off while the movable decorative body is locked, the movable decorative body is locked by the lock mechanism. A method of disabling the body has been considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it is difficult to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, by arranging such a lock mechanism not to be provided, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved by hand.

  Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be manually moved. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that makes light incident on the side surface irregularly reflected in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface, so that a player can visually recognize an aspect in which the predetermined pattern is shining. In addition, such a light emitting pattern is configured to be visible to a player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, it is difficult or impossible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body. Therefore, by configuring such a game panel opening 1100a not to include such a light guide plate, it becomes possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for the clerk to directly move the rabbit role 6000 by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 at the time of a power cut, A different area on the rear surface of the game console 6020 can be reflected on the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, after the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved upward by hand, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized so that the rabbit accessory 6000 is looked down from below. This makes it easy to confirm the mounting state of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which have been difficult to recognize until then. In the example shown in FIG. 491B, by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was not visible until then, Electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f can be visually recognized.

  Although the example in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is shown, when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a is covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is located below and forward of the game board effect display device 1600 and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in front of the center of the game board effect display device 1600, The light plate may be disposed so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. As described above, even if the light guide plate is provided, the game panel opening 1100a is configured so as not to be partially covered with the light guide plate. By manually moving the 6000, both functions such that the area where the face substrate 6020 is reflected can be changed with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The example in which the area where the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit accessory 6000 with the hand has been described. However, the guide is so large that the hand cannot be inserted in the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate. The light plate may be enlarged, and in this case, the rabbit accessory may be moved by an article smaller than the hand. For example, a rabbit member 6000 can be moved by inserting a rod-shaped member having a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member having a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm into an area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be made large enough to insert such a bar-shaped member or a plate-shaped member. An opening of about 0.0 cm and a length of about 1.0 cm may be provided. With such a configuration, the area of the game panel opening 1100a covered by the light guide plate can be increased, and the area where the effect using the light guide plate can be performed can be increased.

  In the event of a power failure, if the rabbit accessory 6000 at the standby position is not provided with a lock mechanism that cannot be moved, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the clerk can use a hand or an elongated The example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 can be directly moved by the member has been described. However, when the power is cut off, the accessory at the standby position is immovable by the lock mechanism or completely covers the game panel opening 1100a. When the light guide plate is provided as described above, the rabbit character 6000 cannot be moved manually, and the area where the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. I can't. Such a problem is a serious problem in an example in which the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are not or rarely reflected in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when the rabbit character is at the standby position. Becomes

  Therefore, in such an example, the control unit and the driving unit of the gaming machine are turned off by turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine during the initial check of the movable decorative body executed at the time of power-on. When the state where power supply is not performed is forcibly created, the movable decorative body in a position other than the standby position does not return to the standby position by its own weight, and the power switch is turned off or the power switch is turned off. It may be configured to stop at a position slightly moved by its own weight from a position where is turned off. Specific examples are shown below.

  At the time of the initial check, first, the lock of the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is released by the lock mechanism, and the rabbit character 6000 starts moving from the immovable state to the movable state, and then starts moving to the upper moving position. I do. After completing the movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 to the upper moving position, after staying at the moving position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), the rabbit accessory 6000 starts to move to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 waits. At the position, the lock mechanism changes the state from the movable state to the non-movable state, and the initial check is completed. When the game is started and the rabbit character 6000 is moved as an effect in response to a start winning, etc., the rabbit character 6000 at the standby position is first changed from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit character 6000 is moved. Is controlled between the standby position and the movement position in a predetermined movement mode, and then the control is performed to move the rabbit character 6000 to the standby position. Thereafter, the rabbit character 6000 is changed from the unlocked state to the locked state. And

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, by intentionally generating a power cut-off state, the clerk does not directly move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand, and is mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000. Electronic components can be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Also, at the time of the initial check, since the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to stay at the moving position for a predetermined time, the rabbit accessory 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit accessory 6000 remains at the moving position. Can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing at which the power switch provided in the gaming machine is turned off and the power is cut off does not become severe. Further, since it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the operation of confirming the face substrate 6020.

  In addition, in the initial check, not only staying at the moving position for a predetermined time, but also performing a movement from the standby position to the moving position, a predetermined position between the standby position and the moving position (for example, an intermediate position between the standby position and the moving position). The rabbit character 6000 is configured to move to the moving position after a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) at the position, and when the rabbit character 6000 is at the predetermined position, the power switch provided on the gaming machine is turned off to turn off the power. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to remain at a predetermined position. With such a configuration, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be easily stopped at different positions, and the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from different angles. It becomes. Further, since it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the operation of confirming the face substrate 6020.

  At the time of the initial check, an example has been shown in which the rabbit character 6000 is kept at the moving position or the predetermined position for a predetermined time. In these examples, when the rabbit character 6000 remains at the moving position or the predetermined position, the face substrate 6020 The first face light-emitting unit 6023a and the second face light-emitting unit 6023b included in may be configured to light up in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, at the start of the initial check, the first character light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are illuminated in a predetermined manner before the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position and starts moving to the moving position. May be. For example, as the light emission mode, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be turned on in the same color. In this case, it is desirable that the emission color be white. With such a configuration, the clerk can check whether there is any abnormality in the light emitting mode of the first face light emitting unit 6023a or the second face light emitting unit 6023b. With the gaming machine in which the accessory 6000 is located at the predetermined position or the moving position, the gaming machine can be turned off to visually check the back side of the face substrate 6020 to check what kind of abnormality has occurred. In addition, when a player complains about the light emission mode, the cause of the abnormality can be quickly specified.

  Although the example in which the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are turned on in the same color has been described, three or more face light emitting portions 6023 may be provided, and each may emit light in the same color. In this case, it is preferable that the emission color includes at least white. In the case of such a configuration, if one of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. It emits light in different colors (for example, if a resistor provided in series with an LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can emit only blue and red light, and is a mixed color of those colors) This makes it possible to visually recognize the mode of emitting red-violet light.) Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the face light-emitting portion having a defect based on the emission color.

  If the power interruption state is forcibly generated, the rabbit accessory 6000 is located at a position not at the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be temporarily moved to the standby position, and then the above-described initial operation check may be restarted from the beginning. With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is easily visible.

  Various embodiments can be considered for the aspect of the rabbit accessory 6000 itself, the movement mode of the rabbit accessory 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit accessory 6000 and the game board effect display device 1600. Hereinafter, a plurality of embodiments will be described.

  FIG. 492 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 changes as the rabbit character moves from the lower standby position to the upper movement position. In this example, a rabbit accessory 6000 is constituted by the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020, and can move between the standby position and the movement position, but the body portion 6030 has a game panel. It is configured not to move with respect to 1100. FIG. 492 (A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board effect display device 1600. . The control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 492 (B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the movement position. In this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate is reflected in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. I have.

  Note that, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to rotate slowly about the front-rear direction by a driving mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be manually rotated around the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f which are originally located below the face substrate 6020 and whose mounting state is difficult to confirm. Become.

  FIG. 493 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 are provided separately from a face substrate 6020 constituting a rabbit accessory 6000. The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a vertically long rectangular shape. During the operation of the rabbit accessory 6000, the face cover unit 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear unit 6021 and the second ear unit 6022 move to the upper movement position, thereby executing a predetermined effect. Will do.

FIG. 493 (A) shows a state where the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are at the standby position. In this state, the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6021 are displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. Only a part of the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face board 6020 is hidden in the second ear 6022. FIG. 493 (B) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are at the movement position. In this state, the game board-side effect display device 1600 displays almost the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. The whole area is reflected. In this way, by moving the member between the member for which the mounting mode of the electronic component is to be checked and the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the visual recognition mode of the member for which the mounting mode of the electronic component is to be checked is changed. Becomes possible. In addition, although the aspect about the rabbit accessory 6000 was described in other examples, these aspects may be applied to the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 in the example shown in FIG. 493.

  FIG. 494 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the body 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be vertically long. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position, the electronic parts mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 are configured to be invisible by the body 6030. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the moving position, the body is not movable. Rabbit role 6000 will be located above 6030. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

  In the embodiments described so far, the area of the face cover portion 6010 of the rabbit accessory 6000 does not change, but a member corresponding to the face cover portion 6010 is formed of an opaque member when moved to the moving position. In addition, in the movable decorative member having a larger area as viewed from the front as it is expanded in a horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100, the area as viewed from the front is increased, so that the game board-side effect display device 1600 becomes larger. A situation may occur in which the reflection of the substrate on the display area becomes difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is employed, the configuration may be such that the area in front view can be manually reduced in a state where the power is forcibly turned off at the time of the initial check. Alternatively, when moving to the moving position at the time of the initial check, the state before the area when viewed from the front is increased is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front is not increased. Later, the configuration may be such that the area when viewed from the front is increased. With such a configuration, it is easy to confirm that the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

  The example in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 has been described. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected is visually recognized by the player. For example, in a case where an effect that darkens almost the entire display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is performed as an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high, an electronic device mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 by the player is performed. The component is visually recognized, and there is a possibility that the player may be in a disturbed state even though he is trying to excite himself by executing the effect. In addition, when a so-called out-of-reach occurs, the decorative pattern stops in a mode showing a loss after forming a reach state, and for the purpose of setting a break in the game, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is provided. Even when performing the effect of darkening almost the entire surface, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be visually recognized by the player, and when the player is in a state of disappointment that the reach has been lost, Furthermore, there is a possibility that the player will be in a state of being awkward.

  Therefore, when the rabbit character 6000 is located at the standby position at the timing of performing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, such reflection is visually recognized. It is advisable to adopt a configuration that suppresses this. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are located at intermediate positions between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. It is hidden by the ears 6022, and the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, since the body 6030 is located at a position intermediate between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the body part 6030 is hidden by these members, and the game board effect display device 1600 is hidden. The reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area is suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492, when performing an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the like are provided to the player. There is a risk of being visually recognized. Therefore, by performing some display only in the lower front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player gets upset in accordance with the effect of dimming the display area. It becomes. In the lower front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, it may be configured to display a decorative symbol, display the number of holds, or display the hold image indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit related to the change. . In this case, usually, the color of the image may be darkened or the size of the image may be reduced as compared with the case of displaying the decorative design, the number of reserved images, or the reserved image. Instead of displaying them statically, they may be displayed dynamically like animation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection generated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

In addition, after the dark turning effect starts, while the dark turning effect is being performed, the rabbit character 6000 is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 492 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 492 (B). The first ear 6021 and the first ear 6022 are moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 493 (A) to the movement position shown in FIG. 493 (B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. 494 (A) to FIG. 494 (B). The effect of moving the rabbit accessory 6000 to the movement position shown in FIG.
However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 become easily visible.

  Therefore, when performing an effect of moving the rabbit character 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper movement position, the display portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 overlaps the rabbit character 6000 in a front view. You may comprise so that the reflection suppression image which suppresses reflection may be displayed. In this way, when the rabbit character 6600 moves, an image in which it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is displayed on the game board effect display. By displaying the information in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player gets upset.

  The size of the reflection suppressing image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view, or one size (about 1-2 cm) larger than the rabbit accessory. It is assumed that the outer shape of the reflection preventing image completely overlaps with the outer shape of the rabbit character 6000 in front view, or that the reflection suppressing image protrudes about 1-2 mm around the rabbit character in front view. Good to do. Further, the reflection suppressing image may be configured in white or bright colors. By making the color white or bright, it is possible to make the reflection less noticeable. Note that the reflection suppressing image may be configured using black or dark colors in addition to white or bright colors. Further, the reflection suppressing image may be an image dynamically displayed.

  The timing to start displaying the reflection suppressing image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit character 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the movement position, the reflection suppressing image may be moved while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit accessory 6000. The display of the reflection suppressing image may be displayed until the darkening effect ends. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, the reflection suppression image may be continuously displayed. Thereafter, even when the rabbit accessory 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, the reflection suppression image may be continuously displayed as long as the darkening effect is being performed.

  It is to be noted that, in addition to preparing a plurality of such reflection suppression image modes, assigning different jackpot expectation degrees to the reflection suppression image modes, and displaying one of the reflection suppression images when the rabbit character moves. Thus, it may be configured to function as an effect indicating the degree of expectation of big hits. For example, it is preferable that blue and red are prepared as colors of the reflection suppressing image, and the red reflection suppressing image is configured to indicate that the expectation of the big hit is higher. In this case, since the player also pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, even if the electronic component is slightly reflected, it is possible to make the reflection less likely to be noticed. .

  In addition, although the point of displaying the reflection suppressing image when moving the rabbit accessory 6000 has been described, even when the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 are moved, the above-described embodiment is applied. Good.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 be black or dark. Further, it is desirable that no electronic components be mounted on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. When electronic components are mounted on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, it is desirable that the electronic components be dark. With such a configuration, the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are provided on the game board. Even if the image is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, the reflection can be made difficult for the player to notice.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the body 6030 be dark. Also, it is desirable that no electronic components be mounted on the back of the body 6030. In the case where electronic components are mounted on the back surface of the body 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player due to the reflection is provided. The effect on can be reduced.

  The moving position of the rabbit character 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the center of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. In this case, the reflection on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions, up, down, left, and right, and the entire area on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, when performing the above-described effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the rabbit character 6000 is moved forward in the center of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. It may be configured to execute this effect after being moved to the position. In this case, the rabbit character 6000 is located exactly in the middle between the direction of the player's eyes and the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, and the player moves the face and forcibly reflects the rabbit character 6000. As long as the mode is not visually recognized, it is possible to suppress the situation where the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized by the player. In the case where the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is ended, the rabbit character 6000 waits from the moving position after the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is brightened. By moving to the position, the influence on the player due to the reflection can be reduced.

  As an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown, but the rear surface of the member other than the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is played. By reflecting the image on the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the state of the rear surface of the member may be confirmed. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and supplying power from the power supply board 931 is a game board side effect display. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600. In addition, a connector, a control element, and the like to which a flat cable used for transmitting a control signal and supplying power are connected are mounted on the rear surface of the relay board. It is good to be constituted so that these may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

  The example of the relationship between the standby position and the movement position of the rabbit accessory 6000 in the vertical direction has been described. However, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and between the rear standby position and the forward movement position. You may comprise so that it may move. Alternatively, the rabbit character 6000 provided below the front surface of the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is rotated about a rotation axis provided below the rabbit character 6000, thereby providing a rabbit character. The upper portion of the 6000 may be configured to be movable so as to move forward. The rabbit character 6000 is movable between a standby position in which the position is parallel to the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 and a moving position in which the upper part of the rabbit character 6000 is tilted forward. May be. Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the movement position, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be increased. Becomes possible.

  The game board-side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided, and the example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board-side effect display device 1600 is shown. The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable about a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board-side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the up, down, left, and right directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 fixedly provided in the moving direction may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, even for a fixedly provided rabbit character. Become.

  An example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided, and the rabbit role 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable has been described, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to move backward, and the rabbit accessory 6000 may move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 which are not overlapped in a front view may move so as to approach each other in the horizontal direction, and may be in an overlapped state in a front view. Good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600.

  Although the example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided has been described, a configuration in which a plurality of effect display devices are provided may be employed. Then, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be configured to be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. In addition, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display area of another effect display device are configured to face different directions, and the rabbit character 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. You may comprise. In the case of such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected in the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices from different angles, and it becomes easy to find the cause of the abnormality.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect display devices are provided, and by moving the effect display device, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character object 6000 has at least one display area of the effect display device or a plurality of effect displays. You may comprise so that it may be reflected in the display area of a display device.

  An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off, but during a so-called demonstration in which the player has not played for a predetermined time. The rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 by darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 495 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 487 to 494 is provided is not at the lower center of the game board side effect display device 1600 but at the lower left side of the game board effect display device 1600. Has become. In addition, a stump accessory 6100 having a shape imitating a stump is provided on the lower right side in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 487, a space is formed between the game board 5 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board-side effect display device 1600 as a whole. Are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the near side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, a board back grass part 6800, a first big tree part 6600, a second big tree part 6650, a first cloud part 6700, a second cloud part 6700 A cloud role 6750 is provided. The first giant tree feature 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree role 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant leaf substrate 6680. I have. In addition, a first grass role 6470 and a second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, and a third grass role 6480 is provided behind these, so that the third grass role 6480 overlaps with the third grass role 6480 behind. A fourth grass character 6485 is provided, a rabbit character 6000 and a stump character 6100 are provided behind the fourth grass character 6485, and a mountain character 6500 is provided behind these. An apparatus 1600 is provided. By arranging a plurality of characters in layers in this manner, a sense of depth can be obtained.

  A stump section 6200 shaped like a stump and a first grass movable section 6360 and a second grass movable section 6370 shaped like a grass are provided on the lower right side in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 constitute a stump role product 6100 as a unit.

  FIG. 496 shows the stump accessory 6100. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200, and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are each formed of a plate-like, green and transparent synthetic resin. The first grass movable portion 6360 has a surface formed of a green transparent synthetic resin exposed at an outer edge portion excluding a lower end portion thereof, and is visible through a member located rearward. On the other hand, a portion other than the lower end portion and the outer edge is provided with a first grass decoration portion 6360a to which green ink is applied, and the rear portion of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not visible. . The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360, and includes a second grass decorative portion 6370a.

  The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. As shown in 496 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves leftward from the state in which it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves rightward from the state in which it is located in front of the stump portion 6200. Can be taken. The first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

  In the state shown in FIG. 496 (A), the end surface forming the right end of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end surface forming the left end of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 located behind The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a part of the area of the stump opening 6210a is provided with a region where the first grass decorative portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decorative portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized through the area that is not in use. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 that constitute the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 A part of the wall light emitting portion 6354 is configured to be visible.

  In this state, as the first light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is set to the light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is not provided in the first grass decorative portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360. The region and the region where the second grass decorative portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370 is not provided are irradiated, and the region where the first grass decorative portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and the region where the second grass movable portion 6360a is provided are movable. The portion 6370 may be configured to be able to pass through a region where the second grass decorative portion 6370a is not provided and to irradiate the player with light.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 496 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves leftward from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is located in front of the stump portion 6200. Since the state has been shifted rightward from the state of the stump, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is improved. In this state, the stump box portion 6300 is visible from the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump portion 6200.
In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356 which constitute a box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and a rear wall provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light emitting unit 6354 changes from a state that is difficult to view to a state that is easily viewable, as compared to a state before the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 move.

  In this state, as the second light-emitting effect, the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 is in a light-emitting mode, and light emitted from the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed toward the front where the player is located. You may comprise so that the state irradiated directly may be taken. In the second light emitting effect, the first grass movable portion 6360 passes through a region where the first grass decorative portion 6360a is not provided and a region of the second grass movable portion 6370 where the second grass decorative portion 6370a is not provided. Compared with the first light emission effect in which light is emitted to the player, it is possible to give a visually stronger stimulus to the player.

  It should be noted that the first gaming state and a second gaming state (for example, a probable change gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a big hitting gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state) ), In the first gaming state, the period during which the first light-emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period during which the second light-emitting effect is executed. In this case, the period during which the second light-emitting effect is executed may be configured to be longer than the period during which the first light-emitting effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emission effect is executed for a relatively longer period in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, and the second gaming state is relatively longer than in the first gaming state. During the period, the second light emission effect may be configured to be executed. Also, in the first game state, only the first light emission effect is performed, and in the second game state, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect or only the second light emission effect is performed. Good. The second light-emitting effect, which is visually more stimulating than the first light-emitting effect, functions as an effect that gives the player an interest (an effect that gives a special feeling), and is used only when the player is in an advantageous gaming state. Or, when the player is in an advantageous gaming state, the effect period is used for a longer time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the second game state that is advantageous to the player, the player can experience a visually strong stimulus for a longer period of time than in the first game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Thus, it is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of the advantageous state.

  FIG. 497 (A) shows a stump portion 6200. The stump portion 6200 includes a stump plate portion 6210, which is a colored opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side, and a box-shaped stump box portion 6300 provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-shaped member, and has an outer shape imitating a tree stump, and a stump opening portion 6210a is provided at the center thereof.

  FIG. 497 (B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 in a front view. In the drawing, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening 6210a are indicated by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening portion 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, and simulates a state in which a hole is opened in the side surface of the stump.

  FIG. 498 (A) shows a stump box portion 6300. The stump box section 6300 includes a box upper wall section 6310 forming the upper wall, a box right wall section 6320 forming the right wall, a box lower wall section 6330 forming the lower wall, and a box forming the left wall. It is constituted by a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 constituting a rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a trapezoidal shape in plan view, and the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than the length of the back side. It is long configured. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided such that the front side is inclined outward. The box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box lower wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340 are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, a sense of depth can be obtained.

  FIG. 498 (B) is a diagram showing a state where the stump box section 6300 is disassembled. The box rear wall portion 6350 includes a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352 schematically shows a position where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 of the rear wall cover 6356 is located.

  FIG. 498 (C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. On the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356, a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 shaped like a root vegetable is formed. The rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 includes a first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a shaped like a root vegetable root and a second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b shaped like a root vegetable leaf.

  FIG. 498 (D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall board 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. On the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352, a rear wall light emitting unit 6354 configured by surface mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided. The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 in a front view. The light emitted from the LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is radiated forward and vertically to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided at a position overlapping the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 in a front view. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of the root vegetable, and the second rear wall cover light scattering having a shape imitating the root vegetable leaf. A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to portion 6358b. In a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. 496 (A), each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is The first grass movable portion 6360 is provided at a position where the first grass decorative portion 6360a is not provided and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided at a position not overlapping with the region where the second grass decorative portion 6370a is not provided in a front view. Good to do. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is in the light emitting mode as a performance, the player is not directly irradiated with light, and thus a visually weak stimulus is given to the player.

  The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the interval between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b do not contact the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, it is easy to radiate the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 fails due to the heat generated by itself. It becomes possible.

  The stump role item 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the jackpot expectation degree in the gaming machine. Specifically, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right from the state where the stump opening 6210a is difficult to visually recognize, and the stump opening 6210a is in a state where the stump opening 6210a is easily visible. Whether or not the stump opening 6210a is easily visible, the light emission of the box rear wall portion 6350 located on the back side of the stump box portion 6300 that can be visually recognized through the stump opening 6210a. What the aspect is (for example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 appears to glow red or white, or is turned off and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located behind Is displayed in a white color) to indicate that the expectation of the stop display of the changing decorative symbol in a mode indicating the big hit is higher than usual. For example, in each of the light emission modes of the rear wall substrate 6352, the degree of expectation of stop display of the changing decorative pattern in a mode indicating a big hit may be set to be different. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352.

  Although the example in which the expectation of stopping and displaying the changing decorative pattern in a manner indicating the big hit is notified by the light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 has been described, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting are shown. Such notification may be performed by setting the light emitting mode of the unit 6354b to be different from that of the unit 6354b.

  For example, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a is not made to emit light, and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b is lightly emitted in green, so that the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of a root vegetable is white. Then, the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b having a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf becomes green and can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a emits weakly white light and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits weakly green light, so that the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating a root of a root vegetable is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a emits weakly red light in red and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b emits weak light in green, so that the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating roots of root vegetables is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

  The reason why the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a emits light weakly is that light emitted from the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a does not strongly decorate portions other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a. That's why. Also, the reason why the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits light weakly is that the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b does not strongly decorate portions other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. That's why. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if substantially only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in the light emission mode.

  By adopting such a light emission mode, an expression imitating root vegetable radish in the first light emission example and the second light emission example, and an expression imitating root vegetable ginseng in the third light emission example can be realized. Further, in the first light emitting example, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the color of the first rear wall light are not reflected by the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (the root portion of the radish in this example). Further, in the relationship between the second light emission example and the third light emission example, a plurality of motifs (radish and ginseng in this example) are expressed by making the light emission colors of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a different. It is possible to do.

  An example in which the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b can be weakly light-emitted to realize an effect as if substantially only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in a light-emitting mode. However, in such an effect, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit light intensely so that the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 has the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. You may comprise so that the light from the light emitting part 6354b may reach strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be configured to emit light of the same color (for example, white).

  Even if the light from the rear wall substrate 6352 is reflected on the box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box lower wall 6330, and the box left wall 6340, the light can be visually recognized by the player. Good. For example, in a transparent synthetic resin forming the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering portion capable of scattering each inner surface forming the stump box portion 6300. May be configured as follows. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, plating such as forming a metal thin film of aluminum or the like on at least each inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 is performed. The reflection unit may be configured by performing processing. With such a configuration, light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and applied to the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 can be efficiently reflected toward the player. In this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

  The rear wall substrate 6352 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white via a colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are moved to the respective movement positions and the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting portion is provided. Even when 6354 is in the unlit state, the player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. Further, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 imitating a root vegetable shape, and even when the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not caused to emit light, the shape of the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 allows The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by a player in a state where the box rear wall portion 6350 is decorated.

  Although the example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape imitating the shape of a root vegetable is shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, without providing a portion for scattering the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is made smooth, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is formed. May pass through as it is. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as being decorated by the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above-described example.

  Although the example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 includes the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, the box rear wall portion 6350 is replaced with a box upper wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, A configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided in any of the box lower wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340. Alternatively, with respect to at least one of the box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box lower wall 6330, the box left wall 6340, and the box rear wall 6350 constituting the stump box 6300, A configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided. For example, a box upper wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, and a box lower wall portion 6330 which constitute the stump box portion 6300 The box left wall 6340 and the box rear wall 6350 may all be provided with a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, in these examples, when a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided on a predetermined wall portion, a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not provided on other wall portions, Only the configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided.

  The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 which constitute the stump box portion 6300 are formed of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is formed of a transparent or translucent resin. When the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are in the standby position, so that the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 The rear surface of the stump plate 6210 may be configured to be illuminated by the irradiated light. With such a configuration, light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize a state in which the stump plate portion 6210 is decorated with light. The box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box lower wall 6330, the box left wall 6340, and the stump plate 6210 that constitute the stump box 6300 may be formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. Good. For example, they may be formed of a brown synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be printed with brown ink in the shape of a tree to form an opaque or translucent region in a part of the stump plate portion.

  Although the example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white has been described, other colors may be adopted. For example, similarly to the stump plate portion 6210, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown. In this case, by turning off the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a, the root vegetables to which the soil adheres in the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 can be expressed.

  When the first grass movable portion 6360 moves leftward and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves rightward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall portion located rearward. Although the example in which 6350 is visible is shown, the left and right directions of the lower ends of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are used as rotation axes, and the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are The upper part of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 is configured to be drivable so that the upper part falls forward, and the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed when the upper parts of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 fall forward. The rear wall portion 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

  Although the example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200 has been described, only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is located in front of the stump portion 6200. And the stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are configured as an integral member, and this member moves to the right or left movement position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. You may comprise.

  Although the box rear wall portion 6350 includes the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356, the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotatable. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) is used to rotate the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 so as to contact the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310, The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated by a driving source (not shown) so as to contact the inner surface of the left wall portion 6340 of the box. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is located in front of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by a player via the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player in any one of the modes in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not located in front of the 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. Also, from the player's point of view, the stump role item 6100 is located at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that by rotating the rear wall cover 6356 about the upper side or the left side as an axis, the rear wall after movement is moved. The cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. In addition, you may make it rotate about a right side and a variable as an axis | shaft.

  The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a shape larger than the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210 so that the outer edges of the rear wall substrate 6352 overlap each other in a front view. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is enlarged from the original shape to the periphery. In this case, at a portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light is emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion The light reflected backward by the portion 6340 or the like can be reflected again toward the player ahead.

Further, the light emitting section may be provided in a portion other than the area covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, a light-emitting unit may be provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind a portion imitating a root or a cut portion of a tree in the stump plate portion 6210, and light may be emitted at the same time as the rear light-emitting portion 6354 emits light. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to further excite the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to emit light.
Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured so that no light emitting portion other than the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided. Also in this case, in a portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, light reflected backward by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the like. It is possible to reflect again toward the player in front.

  In the example shown in FIG. 498, the box rear wall portion 6350 includes a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the back side. On the other hand, in the example shown below with reference to FIG. And it was made to consist of. In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating a root vegetable, a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an external shape imitating the root of a root vegetable, and a second rear surface having an external shape imitating a leaf of a root vegetable. A wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear is visible.

  The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape imitating root vegetables as a whole, and includes a first rear wall substrate 6352a imitating roots of root vegetables and a second rear wall substrate 6352b imitating leaves of root vegetables. A white protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the first rear wall substrate 6352a using a white protective agent. Further, a green protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b using a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. Further, two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as a second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to a front surface thereof. In this example, the rear wall plate 6380 forms the rear wall of the stump box 6300.

  Note that the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be configured as separate printed substrates, and may be configured to function as the rear wall substrate 6352 by attaching them to the rear wall plate portion 6380, respectively. Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed by separately applying one printed circuit board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

  In the stump box section 6300 having such a configuration, an effect of moving the first grass movable section 6360 or the second grass movable section 6370 to the movement position as described above may be executed. Also, in this embodiment, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are used as a light emission mode for producing an effect. A strong light emission mode in which the stump box portion 6300 can be visually recognized as if the entire stump box portion 6300 emits light may be adopted.

  Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, the stump box portion 6300 may be used depending on the colors and shapes of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white through the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a imitating the root portion, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is imitating the leaf portion. The rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green. In this manner, one decorative body can be constituted only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

  In this example, a plurality of weeds 6400 are provided on the front side below the gaming board effect display device 1600 on the front side of the rabbit and stumps on the front side.

  In the example shown in FIG. 495, as described above, the first herbaceous object 6470 to the fourth herbaceous object 6485 are provided as the herbaceous object 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a. I have. The following shows a plurality of embodiments of such a herbaceous object 6400.

  The grass object 6400 shown in FIG. 500A is a colored and opaque plate-shaped grass substrate 6420 having an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. The grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the grass functioning object 6400 illustrated in FIG. 500B includes a grass substrate 6420 having a color and opacity, a plate shape, and an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In the example shown in FIGS. 500A and 500B, the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 is a model of grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit green or brown light. The color of the grass substrate 6420 may be green or brown. Green can represent the color of living grass, and brown can represent the color of withered grass. Thereby, the decoration imitating grass can be realized by both the color and the shape of the grass substrate 6420.

  Further, as the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420, LEDs of the same color as the grass substrate 6420 are employed. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, a white LED is used as the mounted LED. With such a configuration, the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when an LED is provided as a light emitting portion on a substrate.

  Light emitted from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated vertically forward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize an effect that gives a visually strong image. When the grass front cover 6440 described later is provided, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is connected to the grass substrate 6420 such that light is irradiated horizontally upward to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. May be implemented. With this configuration, light is emitted toward the upper end of the grass front cover 6440, so that the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440. Thus, an effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 shines can be visually recognized by the player. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when a light emitting unit is provided on a substrate.

  On the other hand, light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated horizontally and upward on the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect as if the back light shines on the grass substrate 6420. When the rear cover 6460 described later is provided, light is irradiated toward the upper end of the rear cover 6460. Therefore, the rear light emitting portion 6424 of the rear substrate extends to the upper end of the rear cover 6460. Is transmitted, and the player can visually recognize an effect as if the entire rear cover 6460 shines. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when a light emitting unit is provided on a substrate.

  On the front and rear surfaces of the grass substrate 6420, through holes (not shown) forming an electronic circuit are provided. In addition, the metal constituting the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through hole, and when copper is adopted as the metal, the through hole will be visually recognized in a brown color which is the color of copper. . Here, if at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible to the player, there is a possibility that the through hole may be visible to the player. In particular, when white is adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420, the brown color, which is the color of the through hole provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, is visually recognized by the player, and the function of the grass substrate 6420 as a decoration is provided. There is a problem that is lost. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted to solve such a problem. For example, the through holes may be arranged so as not to be concentrated at a predetermined position on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 but to be scattered entirely on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, the through-holes are arranged along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, or are arranged on an extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, so that the through-holes have the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It is possible to visually recognize as if it is a part. A decorative shape imitating grass may be formed by linearly arranging through holes inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 in the same shape as the outer shape. In addition, one or more patterns of the same color as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, when the through holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. The above-described example is desirably applied to all the through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but may be applied to at least a part of the through holes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the function as a decoration is lost. In another example, a through-hole may be provided on a substrate included in the accessory and an embodiment relating to such a through-hole may be applied.

  FIGS. 500C to 500E show an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of a grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 constitute a grass part 6400. FIG. The grass front cover 6440 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a decorative shape imitating grass. In addition, a part where the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is covered with the grass front cover 6440 in a front view.

  In the example shown in FIG. 500C, the grass front cover 6440 is smaller in size than the grass board 6420, and a part of the front surface of the grass board 6420 is covered with the grass cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500D, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 have the same size, and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is entirely covered with the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (E), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is located outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The front cover 6440 is in a protruding state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 500C, the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 both realize a decorative mode imitating grass. Also, a sense of depth can be provided. In the examples shown in FIGS. 500D and 500E, the grass substrate 6420 located behind can be visually recognized by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin. It may be. In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440. Also, a sense of depth can be provided.

  FIGS. 500F to 500H illustrate an example in which a grass cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6460 form a herbaceous object 6400. The grass rear cover 6460 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a decorative shape imitating grass. The grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 of the grass substrate 6420 is mounted on the grass substrate 6420 so as to be covered with the grass cover 6460.

  In the example shown in FIG. 500 (F), the size of the grass cover 6460 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (G), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6460 have the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (H), the size of the grass cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6460, and the grass is located outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 is in a protruding state. In this example, the outer shape of the grass rear cover 6460 is visible in a front view.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 500 (F) and 500 (G), the grass function 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, it may be configured such that an effect can be executed such that the grass functioning object 6400 is rotated by 180 degrees by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear cover 6460 faces forward. With such a structure, the viewing mode is as shown in FIGS. 500C and 500D, and the same effects as those in the examples shown in FIGS. 500C and 500D can be obtained. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 500H, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass rear cover 6460. Also, a sense of depth can be provided.

  FIGS. 501A to 501G show examples in which the example shown in FIG. 500C is modified. In these examples, the grass front cover 6440 is configured to be smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420, but further modifications of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501A, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to processing such as lens cutting or satin finish and is formed smoothly, so that light passing through the grass front cover 6440 is passed without diffuse reflection. I have. Note that a grass front cover transparent portion 6442 described later is also configured to have a similar configuration so that light passing therethrough is not diffusely reflected. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover 6440 can be directly viewed.

  In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 in a light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. For example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 emits green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501B, a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. A grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin. The grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and grass front formed in this manner are formed. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 is entirely formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent seal is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, or colored transparent printing is applied, so that the grass front cover is colored and transparent. The portion 6442b may be formed. Although an example is shown in which a colored transparent seal is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or printed with a color transparent to form the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 is shown. The grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be formed by pasting a colored transparent seal or performing colored transparent printing on a part of the. Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 a printed board less noticeable. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing a colored transparent portion.

  In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. In addition, since the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is located in front of the white grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can appear green. In addition, since the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is located in front of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are in a state in which it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the grass substrate front light-emitting portion. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player directly looks at the light-emitting portion 6422 and the player becomes mockery. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the intensity of light from the light source is reduced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, so that a situation in which the player feels dazzling may occur. Deterrence becomes possible. Further, by causing the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be in a state of being decorated with the emission color.

  FIG. 501C shows the example shown in FIG. 501B in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is a modified example. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white modes from above in a front view.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501D, a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 in this example. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a provided at an upper portion and a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided at a lower portion. Have been. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 to lens cutting or satin finish. Preferably, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on the front surface or both the front and rear surfaces of the grass front cover 6440. Since the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made semi-transparent by lens cutting and satin finish, the shape of the member located behind is difficult or impossible to see, but its color Is visible to the player without change. Although the example in which the light scattering portion is formed on the colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been described, the light scattering portion may be formed on the colored and transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the member located on the rear side can be visually recognized in a state in which the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin located on the front side is mixed. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 a printed board less noticeable. Further, in the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the outer peripheral edge in the front view. In this case, light from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light-emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the ends of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460. Can be made to stand out. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the light scattering portion.

  In this example, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is located in front of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, so that the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are difficult to see from the player, and are turned off. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player directly looks at the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 and the player is disturbed. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the player feels dazzling. Can be suppressed.

  Although the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, this configuration allows the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to be formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Since the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the grass substrate) appear blurred, the presence of the electronic components becomes less noticeable and the player It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user is disturbed. When the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440, the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422). ) Can be made less noticeable. Also, the color of the grass substrate 6420 at the rear can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the shape of the electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is blurred, while the color of the grass substrate 6420 is utilized as decoration. This is a mode in which the function of

  FIG. 501E shows the example shown in FIG. 501D in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is replaced by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced by the grass front cover colorless and transparent. This is an example modified to a part 6442a. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white modes from the top when viewed from the front.

  The example shown in FIG. 501 (F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B) is modified. In this example, a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided instead of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. A grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, and a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are grass front. The cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 is entirely formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a seal or printing is applied to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear is not visible, thereby forming the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. You may. In addition, by applying a seal or printing on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear portion is not visible, instead of forming the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the rear portion of the grass front cover 6440 has a rear portion. A grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed by applying a seal or printing that becomes invisible. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440, the mode can be visually recognized on the front side of the portion on which the seal or the print is performed. For example, in the case where the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible while making the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible. . When a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the rear portion of the grass front cover 6440 is made invisible while the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is visible. Becomes possible. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow or brown. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be employed when providing the opaque portion.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white, and the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is indirect via the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is visually recognizable. On the other hand, with respect to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420.
Although the example in which yellow or brown is used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 has been described, in this embodiment, it is possible to express a mode in which snow is piled on dead grass.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a with green by the emission color of the grass substrate front emission portion 6422, and the grass is growing. Can be expressed.

  As the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be employed. For example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is made of a synthetic resin which is entirely plated with an aluminum thin film, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 thus configured and the grass front cover colorless and transparent made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the portion 6442a. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 is pasted with a silver seal, printed with silver paint, or plated with an aluminum thin film. The provision of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be performed by providing the cover. The opaque portion formed in silver as described above has a function of reflecting light. In addition, you may comprise so that a colored paint may be apply | coated to the opaque part shape formed in silver, or a colored transparent seal may be stuck. For example, it is possible to make the opaque portion visible in gold by applying a yellow paint thinly. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing an opaque portion or a reflective portion.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501 (F), the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 becomes silver, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 become visible in white. It is possible to express a mode in which frost has fallen or snow has fallen on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, light emitted from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 forward is reflected back by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446.
Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected backward in the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is scattered by being incident on the grass substrate 6420, and finally, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Will be decorated. In this manner, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 can be efficiently used for decoration. Note that by providing a colored transparent layer as the foremost layer of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be made visible in silver and in a predetermined color.

  FIG. 501 (G) is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 501 (F) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, it is possible to express grass in a white, silver, or white mode from the top when viewed from the front.

  FIG. 502 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in a light-off state, grass can be expressed by a portion that can be visually recognized white by the grass substrate 6420 and a green mode by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Has become.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, it is preferable that the light emission color be the same as or the same as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, for example, green or yellow-green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in a dynamic mode while keeping the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as it is. In addition, light reflected without passing through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b decorates the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be viewed in green.

  FIG. 502B is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is modified into a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 502A. The color of the grass front cover 6440 may be green. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in white, green, and green forms can be expressed from above. Further, since the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b can be visually recognized in a mixed color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b and the white color. The grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 itself is configured to be hardly visible.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, light emitted from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated. It becomes possible to be an aspect. In addition, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422.

  FIG. 502C shows the example shown in FIG. 502B in which the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced by the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is replaced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion. This is an example modified to 6442b. The color of the grass front cover 6440 may be green. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in white, green, and green forms can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 passes through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and some light does not pass. The light is reflected and scattered in the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 can be set in a decorative mode. In addition, light diffusely reflected reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422.

  FIG. 502D is an example in which the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is changed to a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 502B. The color of the grass front cover 6440 may be green. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white, green, yellow, brown, or silver form can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, light emitted from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed. It becomes possible to set it as a decoration mode. By decorating the white grass substrate 6420 where the reflected light is exposed, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 in green. , Can express a mode in which grass grows.

  FIG. 502E shows an example shown in FIG. 502D in which the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. The color of the grass front cover 6440 may be green. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white, yellow, brown, silver, or green mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be set to the decorative mode. In addition, light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b or reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, so that the exposed white color is exposed. By decorating the grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 in green. , Can express a mode in which grass grows.

  FIG. 503 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in white or white can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-emitting mode, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a can be in the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate can be decorated. 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emission portion 6422. It can be expressed that the grass is growing.

  FIG. 503 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503 (A). The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white, white, yellow, brown, or silver color can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can make the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 a decorative mode. In addition, since the light is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. It becomes. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and the mode in which grass is growing Can be expressed.

  FIG. 503 (C) shows the example shown in FIG. 503 (B) in which the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is used as the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is used as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. FIG. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white, yellow, brown, silver, or white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the white grass The substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and the mode in which grass is growing Can be expressed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 503 (A) to 503 (C), the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover colored light scattering is performed instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The section 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  FIG. 503 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is modified into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503 (C). The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white, yellow, brown, or silver form can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can decorate the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and form the white grass. The substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with green, and a mode in which grass is growing can be expressed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 501A to 503D, the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 whose outer shape is larger than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized as a decorative shape by the player. Is configured. The grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Is provided at a position where only one of the members is covered when viewed from the front, but the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind a position forming a boundary between these members. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it less noticeable to the player that the LED configuring the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the light-off state.

  For example, in the grass part 6400 shown in FIG. 501B, an LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is provided behind the boundary between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In the case of the arrangement, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 are less noticeable, so that the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is white, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is green. This makes it possible for the player to clearly see.

  Similarly, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored Relationship with light scattering portion 6444b, relationship between grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and grass front cover opaque portion 6446, relationship between grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and grass front cover opaque portion 6446, grass front cover colored light Also in the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundaries, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is provided. Can be made less noticeable.

  In addition, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the relationship between the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover color transparent portion 6442b are exposed. The relationship between the portion where the grass substrate is covered and the grassless cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front. In the case where the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundaries in relation to the cover opaque portion 6446, the presence of the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 exists. Can be made less noticeable.

  In the above-described combination, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is used. Combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 enables efficient transmission to the members forming the boundary line.

  The light from the LED forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 may be irradiated perpendicularly to the grass substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LED forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted. Irradiation may be performed in a direction perpendicular to the tangent line of.

  For example, as in the case of a combination of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, when both are members capable of transmitting light, the light from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 The irradiation direction of the light may be configured to irradiate the grass substrate 6420 vertically. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the border in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the border line at the position where the LED forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is described. It is preferable to irradiate light in the direction of a member that is perpendicular to the tangent line and that forms a boundary in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446.

  In the case where a rectangular LED is employed as the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the longitudinal direction of the LED matches the direction of the boundary line or the close battle of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. It is good to arrange as follows.

  In the case where the two portions forming the boundary are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 does not protrude in the portion corresponding to the boundary in the front view, and has the same width. You may comprise so that a V-shaped groove may be provided. With such a configuration, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is visually recognized from the front, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is refracted and visually recognized by the V-shaped groove. As a result, it is possible to make the existence of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 less noticeable. The shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove, but may be any structure that can be bent. On the other hand, when a boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is refracted and visually recognized without providing such a groove. It becomes possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the front surface light emitting portion 6422 less noticeable.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 501A to 503D, the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass board 6420 whose outer shape is larger than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized as a decorative shape by the player. Is configured. Thereby, a sense of depth can be provided. In the grass front cover 6440, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

  In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the decoration of the grass substrate 6420 is also performed by the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Is In particular, in the case where the grass substrate 6420 is set to white and light of a color other than white is emitted from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color and made visible.

  Further, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so that it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. In addition, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off and when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, each member constituting the grass character 6400 can be in a decorative mode in different colors. Note that, by mounting an LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 on the grass substrate 6420 so that light is emitted horizontally upward to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the above the grass substrate 6420 The light can reach the end more.

  FIGS. 504 (A) to 506 (D) show examples in which the example shown in FIG. 500 (D) is modified. In these examples, the size of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 are configured to be the same, but a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 504 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to processing such as lens cutting or satin finish and is formed smoothly, so that light passing through the grass front cover 6440 is passed without diffuse reflection. I have. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly viewed. In addition, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white form can be expressed by the entire grass functioning object 6400.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and express a mode in which grass is growing. it can.

  FIG. 504 (B) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 504 (A) in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white or green mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass is growing can be expressed.

  FIG. 504 (C) shows the example shown in FIG. 504 (B) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to: Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, green and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass is growing can be expressed.

  FIG. 504 (D) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 504 (A) in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in white or white can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 504 (E) shows an example shown in FIG. 504 (D) in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is replaced by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced by the grass front cover colorless and transparent. This is an example in which a portion 6442a is modified. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in white or white can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 504 (F) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 504 (A) in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white, yellow, brown, or silver form can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 504 (G) is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 504 (F) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 505 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, green grass can be expressed by the entire grass functioning object 6400.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 505 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, green and green grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 505 (C) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 504 (E) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, green and green grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440 can be obtained. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass is growing can be expressed.

  FIG. 505 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a green, yellow, brown, or silver form can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 505 (E) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or green mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 506 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, the grass functioning object 6400 can express grass in a white form as a whole.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 506 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a white, green, yellow, brown, or silver form can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 506 (C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 506 (A) to 506 (C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover colored light scattering is performed instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The section 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  FIG. 506 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed by the entire grass functioning object 6400.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to reach the end that forms the outer periphery of the grass character 6400. The light reaches, and it becomes possible to decorate the end of the grass character 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, since the end of grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed when viewing grass member 6400 from an oblique direction, the exposed portion can be visually recognized in a state of being lit with a predetermined emission color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the outer edge of the grass functioning object 6400 with green, and to express a mode in which grass is growing.
In addition, even in the example in which another grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it can be made visible in such a mode.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 504 (A) to 506 (D), the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. It is configured. In the grass front cover 6440, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

  In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. At the same time, decoration on the grass substrate 6420 is also performed by light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the grass front cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 are visible. Is decorated with a color in which both are mixed, and the decoration on the grass substrate 6420 is also performed by the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422.

  Further, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so that it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. In addition, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off and when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, each member constituting the grass character 6400 can be in a decorative mode in different colors.

  FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D) show modifications of the example shown in FIG. 500 (E). In these examples, the grass front cover 6440 is larger in size than the grass board 6420, and the front surface of the grass board 6420 is covered with the grass front cover 6440, and the grass front cover 6440 is located outside the outer shape of the grass board 6420. Although it is configured so as to protrude, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 507 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to processing such as lens cutting or satin finish and is formed smoothly, so that light passing through the grass front cover 6440 is passed without diffuse reflection. I have. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly viewed. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a colorless, transparent, and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and express a mode in which grass is growing. it can.

  FIG. 507 (B) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 507 (A) in which part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a colorless, transparent, white, and green mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass is growing can be expressed.

  FIG. 507 (C) shows the example shown in FIG. 507 (B) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to: Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the unlit state, grass in a green transparent, green, and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass is growing can be expressed.

  FIG. 507 (D) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 507 (A) in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a colorless, transparent, white, and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and a grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass is growing can be expressed.

  FIG. 507 (E) shows the example shown in FIG. 507 (D) in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is used as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is used as the grass front cover colorless and transparent. This is an example modified to a part 6442a. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a colorless, translucent, white, or white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 507 (F) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 507 (A), in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in a light-off state, grass in a colorless, transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver color can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 507 (G) shows an example shown in FIG. 507 (F), in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 508 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, green transparent and green grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 508 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the unlit state, grass in a green transparent, green, and green mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 508 (C) shows the example shown in FIG. 508 (B) in which the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is used as the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is used as the grass front cover colored transparent. This is an example modified to a part 6442b. Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a translucent green, green, and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored light diffusion portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 508 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in a light-off state, grass in a green transparent, green, yellow, brown, or silver form can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 508 (E) shows the example shown in FIG. 508 (D) in which the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. Green may be used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in yellow, brown, silver, or green can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated with green. Is possible, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  FIG. 509 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a mode of being colorless, transparent, and white can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 509 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is changed to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in a light-off state, grass in a colorless, transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver color can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  FIG. 509 (C) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 507 (G) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 509 (A) to 509 (C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover colored light scattering is performed instead of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The section 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  FIG. 509 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed by the entire grass functioning object 6400.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. At the upper end of the grass substrate 6420 so that light can be emitted upward or backward. This makes it possible to decorate another member with light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 with green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not for decorating the grass part 6400 itself but for decorating other members.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), the external shape of at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visually recognizable by a player as a decorative shape. In the grass front cover 6440, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

  In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, Decoration on the grass substrate 6420 is also performed by the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so that it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. In addition, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off and when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, each member constituting the grass character 6400 can be in a decorative mode in different colors.

  FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D) show modifications of the example shown in FIG. 500 (H). In these examples, a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the size of the grass cover 6460 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass cover 6460 is covered by the grass substrate 6420, and the grass cover 6460 protrudes outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although it is configured, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 510 (A), a colorless and transparent rear cover 6460 is provided behind the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass rear cover 6460 is not subjected to processing such as lens cutting and satin finish, and is formed smoothly. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With this configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass cover located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly viewed. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a colorless, transparent, and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light, the grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462a in front view with green, and the grass is growing. The mode can be expressed.

  FIG. 510 (B) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 510 (A) in which the grassless cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is transformed into a grassy cover colored transparent portion 6462b. Green may be used as the color of the grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the unlit state, grass in a green transparent and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light, the grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b in front view with green color, and the grass is growing. The mode can be expressed.

  FIG. 510 (C) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 510 (A) in which the grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is transformed into a grass rear cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a colorless, translucent, and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light, the grass rear cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the grass rear cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a in front view with green, and the grass grows. Can be expressed.

  FIG. 510 (D) is an example of the example shown in FIG. 510 (A) in which the grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is transformed into a grass rear cover opaque portion 6466. The color of the grass opaque portion 6466 may be yellow, brown, or silver. It is preferable to use white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light-off state, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, so that light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. Is reached, and the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 with green, and to express a mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the rear cover 6460 having a larger outer shape than the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as a decorative shape by the player. It is configured. Thereby, a sense of depth can be provided.
In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. When the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 has a light emission mode of a predetermined color, light from the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 reaches the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460, and the upper end of the grass rear cover 6460. Is visually recognizable in a mode in which is decorated with a predetermined color.

  FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G) show modifications of the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 501 (G). Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 511 (A) and 511 (B), a grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head is provided in the grass substrate 6420. The rear is configured to be visible through the substrate opening 6426.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (C) to 511 (E) and FIGS. 512 (A) to 512 (G), the grass front cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover 6440 Is provided with a decorative grass front cover opening 6448 imitating the head of a rabbit, and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible through the grass front cover opening 6448.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 511 (F) to 511 (H), the grass rear cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative grass having a head shape of a rabbit. A substrate opening 6426 is provided. The grass rear cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426.

  FIG. 511 (A) is an example in which the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the rear can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

  FIG. 511 (B) is an example in which the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a form in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and a member located at the rear through the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. I have. The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape imitating a rabbit head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the rear can be directly visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

  FIG. 511 (C) is an example in which a foreground cover opening 6448 is provided in the foreground cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in a form in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass front cover 6440, and the grass substrate 6420 located behind via the grass front cover opening 6448 is directly visible. It is configured to be possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided. In this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

  The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a constituting a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in a front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a. The grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible via the. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is located at a position that does not overlap with the grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c that constitute a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view. Is provided. With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 but also in the grass front cover opening 6448. Further, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the grass front cover opening 6448. The shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 seen from the grass front cover opening 6448 can be used. Decoration is done.

  When the grass substrate front first light-emitting portion 6422a is in a light-emitting mode, an end surface of the grass front cover 6440 that forms the grass front cover first opening 6448a and grass exposed at a portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c are in the light emission mode, the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b is provided for the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b. This is a mode decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, as for the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. This is a mode decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c.

  FIG. 511 (D) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). FIG. 511 (E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). In these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C).

  FIG. 511 (F) is an example in which the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a form in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420 so that the grass rear cover 6460 located at the rear through the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the left and right sides of the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

  With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the grass rear cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, decoration is performed according to the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass cover 6460 visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

  When the grass substrate rear first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear second light emitting portion 6424b are in a light emitting mode, the grass rear cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b is connected to the grass substrate rear first light emitting portion 6424a. Decorated with light emitted from the second light emitting portion 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, the grass rear cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate rear first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear second light emitting portion 6424b. The amount of light that reaches is smaller than that of the portion exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b. Therefore, the portion of the grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion of the grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

  Note that an effect may be provided in which the first light emitting portion 6424a on the rear surface of the grass substrate is turned off, and only the second light emitting portion 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate is turned on in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion of the rear grass cover 6460 that is exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is not substantially in a decorative state because light hardly reaches, and the grass substrate second opening portion of the grass rear cover 6460 is not covered. Only the portion exposed from 6426b can be in the decorative mode.

  FIG. 511 (G) is an example in which the size of the rear cover 6460 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). FIG. 511 (H) is an example in which the size of the rear cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). Also in these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 512A illustrates an example in which a foreground cover opening 6448 is provided in the foreground cover 6440 in the example illustrated in FIG. 501A. In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a constituting a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in a front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a. The grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible via the. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b does not overlap with the grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c which constitute a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in a front view. , Are provided at positions overlapping the grass front cover 6440.

  In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in a light-off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white via the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is By passing through, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. Therefore, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the rabbit-like shape formed by the grass front cover opening 6448 does not stand out. In addition, the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is made up of a white LED having the same color as the grass substrate 6420, so that the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player notices the existence of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422.

  When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is formed. This is a mode in which the light is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a that are exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are formed. Although the end face formed is in a decorative form in brown, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c are in the light emission mode, the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b is provided for the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b. This is a mode decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated. This is a mode decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, when green is used as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c, the end face of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420.

  FIG. 512B illustrates an example in which a foreground cover opening 6448 is provided in the foreground cover 6440 in the example illustrated in FIG. 501B. In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, but the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b has the grass front cover opening. 6448 are provided. Green may be adopted as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the unlit state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the green grass front cover colored transparent portion. By passing through the 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as green. Thus, it is possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in the green grass.

  When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is formed. This is a mode in which the light is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a that are exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are formed. The end face formed is in a decorative form in brown, but the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as a white grass substrate 6420 as green. Alternatively, when the green color that is the same color as the colored transparent portion of the grass front cover is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end surface forming the substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is in a decorative mode with a green emission color, and has the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent portion, so that the rabbit is represented as if hidden by grass. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c are in the light emission mode, the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b is provided for the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b. This is a mode decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, as for the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. This is a mode decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, when green is used as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c, the end face of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as the white color of the substrate.

  FIG. 512 (C) shows the example shown in FIG. 512 (B) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to: In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white aspects from the top when viewed from the front. Regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, a similar effect can be obtained by employing the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512 (A).

  FIG. 512D illustrates an example in which a foreground cover opening 6448 is provided in the foreground cover 6440 in the example illustrated in FIG. 501D. In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white via the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. , The white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. This makes it possible to express a mode as if a white rabbit is hidden in white grass.

  When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is formed. This is a mode in which the light is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, when green is employed as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a that are exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are formed. Although the end face formed has a decorative form in green, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized as white by a player in a portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c are in the light emission mode, the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b is provided for the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b. This is a mode decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, as for the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. This is a mode decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, when green is used as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c, the end face of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as the white color of the substrate. Thereby, it is possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is in the green grass.

  FIG. 512 (E) shows the example shown in FIG. 512 (D) in which the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is used as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is used as the grass front cover colorless and transparent. This is an example modified to a part 6442a. In this example, white, white, and white grass can be expressed from the top in a front view. Regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, a similar effect can be obtained by employing the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512 (A).

FIG. 512 (F) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (F). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Provided. The color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be yellow, brown, or silver.
In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in a light-off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is yellow. Or brown or silver. Thus, it is possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is hidden in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

  When the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is formed. This is a mode in which the light is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting portion 6422a. For example, in the case where yellow or brown is used as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, or in the case where a white blinking mode is adopted as the light emission mode, the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The exposed grass substrate 6420 and the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are in a decorative manner in a blinking manner of yellow, brown or white. The portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. As a result, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 have the same decorative mode, and when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-described light-off state, it is as if the white rabbit has disappeared. An aspect can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is used as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a that are exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are formed. The end surface to be formed has a decorative form in white. The portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Accordingly, in the case of such a light emission mode from the above-described light-off state, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a provided as white only in the color of the substrate is provided. White light can also be obtained by the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a more emphasized manner.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c are in the light emission mode, the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b is provided for the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b. This is a mode decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, as for the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. This is a mode decorated with light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, when white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front second light-emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light-emitting portion 6422c, the opening of the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is edged. The grass substrate 6420 exposed in the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate, although it is in a decorative mode in white. As a result, it is possible to express the aspect as if a white rabbit is hidden in yellow, brown, or silver grass in a more emphasized manner.

  FIG. 512 (G) shows the example shown in FIG. 512 (F) in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, it is possible to represent grass in a white, yellow or brown or silver or white mode from above when viewed from the front. Regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, a similar effect can be obtained by employing the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512 (A).

In the example shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G), the decorative member provided on the front side (grass substrate 6420 or grass front cover 6440) has a decorative opening (grass substrate opening 6426 or grass). By providing the front cover opening 6448) so that the member provided behind can be visually recognized, the decoratively shaped opening can be visually recognized by the player in a prominent state. In addition, since the color and the transparency are different between the member provided on the front side and the member provided on the rear side, the shape of the opening can be made more distinctive. Further, it may be configured such that such an opening is in a decorative state is used as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 500 (H) and FIGS. 501 (A) to 501 (G), modified examples in which openings are provided are shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G). However, in the example shown in FIGS. 502 (A) to 510 (D), an opening may be similarly provided.

  Although an example is shown in which a physical opening is formed in the grass front cover 6440 in a punched shape to form the grass front cover opening 6448 to form a region that allows the rear to be visually recognized. Instead of the provision method, the outer shape of the visible region may be formed by a boundary line between a region where the rear is not visible or difficult to visually recognize and a region where the rear is relatively easily visible.

  For example, the outside invisible area may be constituted by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inside easily visible region may be constituted by the grass front cover transparent portion 6442. Alternatively, the outside hard-to-see area is constituted by a colored grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the inside easy-to-view area is constituted by the grass front cover light scattering section 6444, and the outside hard-to-see area is colored grass. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 is used, and the inside easily visible region is formed by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the outside hardly visible region is formed by the colorless grass front cover light scattering portion 6444. Of the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a, the outside hardly visible region of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inside easily visible region of the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a. Or may be configured. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 includes the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. And at least two of them may be provided, and an inner easily visible region may be provided over two or more of these regions. Even with such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a region having a decorative shape and an easily visible rear portion.

In FIGS. 512 (B) to 512 (G), the location where the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided is one of a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although only the region is provided, the front cover opening 6448 may be provided over a plurality of regions constituting the front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion. At least two of the 6446 may be provided, and the foreground cover opening 6448 may be provided over two or more of the regions.
FIG. 500 (A) to FIG. 512 (G) show an example in which the herbarium 6400 can be visually recognized as a decoration mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, but these states are used as an effect in a game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify a player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined event is notified to the player by changing when these states change from the above-described certain state to the above-described other state. The predetermined event may be, for example, a jackpot expectation degree, a notice indicating that the operation button 410 can be operated, or the like.

  In FIGS. 500 (C) to 500 (E), FIGS. 501 (A) to 509 (D), and FIGS. 511 (C) to 512 (G), examples in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. Further, in FIGS. 500 (F) to 500 (H) and FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D), an example in which the rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 is shown. The embodiment is configured to combine any one of the embodiments in which the front cover 6440 is provided with the rear cover 6460 behind the grass substrate 6420 in the embodiment. You may.

  When combining the embodiments, it is preferable to adopt the same size as the shape of the grass substrate 6420. When the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are each made smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (F), the grass front cover 6440 The rear cover 6460 may have the same size, and the embodiments may be combined. In this case, the front edge of the grass front cover 6440 and the outer edge of the grass rear cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. When the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 500D and 500G, they are set to the same size. It is preferable to combine the embodiments. In this case, the front edge of the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the outer edge of the grass rear cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. When the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are each configured to be larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 500 (E) and 500 (H), the grass front cover 6440 The rear cover 6460 may have the same size, and the embodiments may be combined. In this case, the front edge of the grass front cover 6440 and the outer edge of the grass rear cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. Further, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 may be made of the same color synthetic resin. When the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the grass rear cover 6460 may be made colorless and transparent. It is good to form with synthetic resin of. When the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a green transparent synthetic resin, the grass rear cover 6460 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  In the case of combining the embodiments, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424. It may be configured not to include one of them. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (E) and 500 (H) are combined, the front cover 6440 and the rear cover 6460 are larger in front view than the grass substrate 6420. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the rear cover 6460 with the light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Also, the grass front cover 6440 can be decorated with light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424. In this case, it is desirable to provide a light-scattering portion in the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460 so as to border the outer peripheral edge in front view. The grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 may not be provided. In this case, for example, the grass board 6420 may be configured to have a function of relaying a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to another accessory.

  Any one example of the above-mentioned herbaceous object 6400 may be applied to each of first grass movable portion 6360 and second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. 496. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the outer shape of the first grass movable portion 6360 other than the first grass decorative portion 6360a is formed. In contrast to the first grass decorative portion 6360a forming the inner region in the first grass movable portion 6360, the member forming the outer region in any one example of the grass functioning object 6400 and the inner region are formed. It is good to apply a member. In addition, a region other than the second grass decorative portion 6370a forming the outer region in the second grass movable portion 6370 and a second grass decorative portion 6370a forming the inner region in the second grass movable portion 6370 are compared with the grass. The member constituting the outer region and the member constituting the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400 may be applied.

  Further, any one example of the weeds 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 510 (B) may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. In addition, the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 are in contact with each other, thereby forming one decorative body. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green grass rear covers 6460 each form one decorative body as a single body. are doing.

  In FIG. 495, a third grass role 6480 is provided, and a fourth grass role 6485 is provided behind the third grass role 6480. The left half of the fourth grass role 6485 in the front view is the third half located in front. It is constituted so that it may be hidden by the weeds 6480. Here, any one of the examples of the above-described grass-role 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass-role 6480 and the fourth grass-role 6485. At this time, it is preferable that the grass substrates 6420 included in the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 have the same size. In addition, one or both of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light-emitting portion 6424 that can be included in the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role material 6485 simultaneously produce a light emitting mode as in the above-described example. You may comprise.

  In the following, an example is shown in which the herbaceous material 6400 shown in FIG. 510 (A) is employed as the third herbaceous material 6480, and the herbaceous material 6400 shown in FIG. In this case, when the grass substrate rear light-emitting portion 6424 of the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass character 6480 provided in front is made to emit light, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the fourth grass character 6485, The grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 can be illuminated from the front side. In addition, the fourth grass role object 6485 efficiently diffuses the light emitted from the third grass role object 6480 forward and makes it possible to enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

  On the other hand, by irradiating light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided in the fourth grass role 6485, the grass rear cover 6460 of the third grass role 6480 can be decorated. At this time, only the peripheral portion, such as above the rear grass cover 6460, becomes visible as a decorated mode from the player. The irregularly reflected light is emitted toward the fourth grass role 6485 and decorates the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a included in the fourth grass role 6485.

  As described above, the light is alternately reflected between the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the back, so that the position of the light source is in a position invisible to the player. Light can be efficiently reflected forward while being arranged. In particular, when a silver member capable of mirror-reflecting light is employed as the front cover opaque portion 6446 or the rear cover opaque portion 6466, light can be reflected more efficiently.

  Although the third grass role 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear are partially overlapped in a front view, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role are shown. 6485 may be completely overlapped in a front view. Further, the third grass role 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass role 6485. And you may comprise so that the 4th grass role thing 6485 may be completely hidden behind the 3rd grass role thing 6480 in front view. Or you may comprise so that it may adjoin, but it does not overlap in front view.

  One or both of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 provided behind may be configured to be movable as a performance. For example, although the example in which the third grass role 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the back are partially overlapped in a front view is shown, the third grass role 6480 is shown from this state. The fourth grass role 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, when one of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 moves in the left-right direction, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 completely overlap in a front view. The third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may move in the left-right direction so that the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 are viewed from the front. May be configured to completely overlap. Note that, in this case, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured to be able to move from a state where they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state where they overlap. The moving direction may be configured to be movable not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. In this case, it may be configured to be able to move upward or downward by the height of the herbaceous material itself. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 can move from a state where they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state where they overlap. Then, in a state where the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 are overlapped in a front view, it is preferable that the light emitting mode as in each of the above-described examples can be obtained.

  Although the example in which the grass part 6400 is movable is shown, the movement of the grass part 6400 also causes the opening (grass substrate opening 6426 or grass front cover opening 6448) to be difficult or invisible. Changing to a visually recognizable state may be adopted as the effect. Specifically, in the relationship between the third grass role 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear and having the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448, as viewed from the front. From the state in which the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 of the fourth grass role 6485 are located behind the third grass role 6480, the third grass role 6480 is located behind the third grass role 6480 in front view. The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 of the four grass character object 6485 are changed to a state where they are not located, and the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 are visible from the player in front view. It is good to constitute so that it becomes.

  Although the example in which the grasswork 6400 is movable is shown, the grasswork 6400 may be configured to be able to move as a performance to a position overlapping with the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. At this time, a predetermined image may be displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 as an effect. More specifically, when the herbaceous object 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the herbaceous object 6400 is modeled in accordance with the movement of the herbaceous object 6400. The displayed image may be configured to be moved upward and displayed. At this time, it is desirable that the image display device be configured to move while displaying an image simulating the outline of the grass role object 6400 slightly above the grass role object 6400 in front view. With such a configuration, an image simulating the outline of the herbaceous object 6400, the outer shape of the herbaceous object 6400 including the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6422, or the rear grass cover 6460, and the grass front cover 6440 are formed. The shape simulating grass represented by a grass substrate 6420 or the like which is smaller than the boundary line between the plurality of members or the transparent grass front cover 6440 and which is visible through the grass front cover 6440 has a plurality of shapes from top to bottom in front view. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. As described above, one decoration mode can be realized as an effect by three of the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the accessory, and the shape provided in the accessory. Note that in the case where the grass object 6400 has two shapes in a front view as shown in FIGS. 502 (B) and 507 (B), etc., one decoration mode is realized as an effect by a total of four shapes. be able to.

  The rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as those of the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. Similarly, the wiring may be attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so that the wiring is difficult for a player to see. In such a case, the LED and the wiring may be located behind them. In addition, by applying a pattern having the same shape as the LED and the wiring to the transparent grass substrate 6420 by printing, engraving, or the like, the transparency of the grass substrate 6420 is ensured, and the LEDs and the wiring are difficult to see from a player. You may comprise. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED A pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, both the function of hiding the existence of the LED and the wiring and the function of decoration can be realized by these members.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (C) to 512 (G), one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, or one grass substrate 6420 and one grass rear cover 6460, or one grass substrate 6420 An example is shown in which the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 and the grass back cover 6460 constitute one grass object 6400. The at least one member may be increased to a plurality of members to form one herbaceous object 6400. For example, two grass front covers 6440 may be attached to one grass board 6420 to form one grass character 6400, or two grass boards 6420 may be attached to one grass front cover 6440, The first herbal object 6400 may be configured. When a plurality of grass substrates 6420, front grass covers 6440, and rear grass covers 6460 are provided, the embodiments in the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (C) to 512 (G) are independently performed for each of the plurality of members. May be applied. For example, a mountain work 6500, which will be described later, has two front covers provided on one substrate, and an opening is provided in one of the front covers so that a substrate located behind can be visually recognized, and an opening is also provided on the substrate. This is an example in which a unit is provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), a grass front cover 6440 which is larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440, but the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is viewed from the front so that the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is difficult or invisible. The grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided in at least a part of the front of the grass substrate 6420 when viewed from the front. 6442a and a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even in such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 in a band shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is enlarged upward, and the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is grass front cover colorless light scattering. You may comprise so that it may be covered with the part 6444b. In the example shown in FIG. 507 (E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is reduced upward, and the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover colorless light. You may comprise so that it may be covered with the scattering part 6444b. Similarly, in FIGS. 507 (F) and 507 (G), the area occupied by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is enlarged or reduced upward, so that the front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 becomes grass front cover. You may comprise so that it may be covered with the opaque part 6446. Alternatively, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and grass front cover opacity such that at least a part of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and grass front cover opaque portion 6446 having a decorative shape. The same effect can be obtained even when the configuration is such that the portion 6446 is provided.

  In FIGS. 487 and 495, the example in which the grasswork 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 is shown, but the grasswork 6400 is provided in other positions. It may be configured as follows. For example, an arrangement may be made in which the weeds 6400 are provided in an area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the grass member 6400 is provided on a member constituting the door frame 3. For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured so as to provide the herbaceous materials. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the grass role 6400, and may be configured such that another role is provided at the same position as the grass role 6400.

  As described above, in the herbaceous object 6400, it is possible to execute an effect of being visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, and the like by the plurality of members constituting the herbaceous object 6400. It is possible to express the appearance of frost, snow, etc. on lush grass, withered grass, and withered grass. Further, it is possible to express a state in which the grass changes from one of these modes to another.

  In the example shown in FIG. 495, a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of a mountain accessory 6500. In these examples, the rabbit accessory 6000 has a face light emitting portion 6023, and the stump accessory 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. Is illuminated in the front, and it is possible to take an effect state. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting unit is irregularly reflected by a member provided around the light emitting unit, and a part of the light emitted from the light emitting unit goes backward, so that the light from the light emitting unit There is a problem that the light cannot be efficiently radiated forward, and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is reduced. Therefore, an example in which the light utilization efficiency of the light from the light-emitting unit can be improved by reflecting the light that has been directed backward on the front side of the mountain object 6500, which is a decorative body, forward.

FIG. 513 shows a modification of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like.
FIG. 513 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000.
The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover part 6010 on the near side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover part 6010, and a body part 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b as a face light emitting portion 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. The left and right front legs of the rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and a first arm portion 6016 and a second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body part 6030 which is a plate-like member made of a white opaque synthetic resin is provided, imitating a body part of a rabbit. The face cover portion 6010 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. A part 6011b is provided. Up to here, the configuration is the same as the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 513 (A), the face substrate 6020 does not include the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. In addition, the face substrate 6020 is concave toward the rear formed by the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, and the face cover left surface 6015 included in the face cover 6010. It is attached so that it fits in the part which has. In the face cover part 6010, the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 are formed by the upper surface of the face cover part upper part 6012 projecting upward at two places on the left and right. Further, the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are formed by printing the front surface of the face cover part 6010 with brown ink.

  When the rabbit accessory 6000 adopts such an aspect, light from the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is irregularly reflected by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b. After that, the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, the face cover left surface 6015, the first ear 6021, the first ear decoration 6021a, and the second ear 6022. In the second ear decoration portion 6022a and the like, light may be reflected many times and light may travel backward.

  Also, when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump character object 6100 shown in FIG. 496 to FIG. 499 emit light, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall After the light from the light emitting section 6354b is diffusely reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b, the box upper wall section 6310, the box right wall section 6320, and the box lower wall section 6330. On the left wall 6340 of the box, there is a possibility that light may be reflected and directed backward.

  Therefore, an example will be described below in which the light that has been directed backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 is again reflected forward on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 to increase the light use efficiency.

  FIG. 514 (A) illustrates a mountain object 6500. The dotted line in the figure indicates the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided. Regarding the rabbit accessory 6000, the outline of the face substrate 6020 is also indicated by a dotted line. The mountain accessory 6500 includes a mountain substrate 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain substrate 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right of the mountain substrate 6520.

  The mountain substrate 6520 is formed of a printed circuit board whose front and rear surfaces are white. On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 are mounted. A mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided substantially at the center of the mountain substrate 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain substrate opening 6524 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the mountain substrate 6520. The member located at the rear is visible through the mountain substrate opening 6524.

  The first mountain front cover 6540 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin and includes a first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542, a first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544, and a first mountain front cover opening 6548. I have. With this configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized in the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. The color of the first mountain front cover 6540 may be specifically blue. In this case, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow piles up on the mountain or the mountain has a glacier. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the first mountain front cover 6540. Further, the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed over the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. The mountain substrate 6520 located behind via the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second mountain front cover 6560 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. With such a configuration, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on a mountain or a mountain has a glacier. Each of the mountain substrate opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 decoratively expresses a mode in which there is a cave in the mountain by its shape.

  On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, a mountain substrate front first light emitting portion 6522a to a mountain substrate front ninth light emitting portion 6522i are provided as a mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a. In front of the mountain substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6522b, a first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the third front light emitting portion 6522c of the mountain substrate front surface, and a face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is further in front of the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. are doing. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the fourth front light emitting portion 6522d of the mountain substrate front surface, and a face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is further in front of the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542. I have. In front of the fifth light emitting portion 6522e on the front side of the mountain substrate, a stump accessory 6100 is located. In front of the sixth light-emitting portion 6522f on the front of the mountain substrate, a stump accessory 6100 is located. A colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover is provided in front of the seventh light emitting portion 6522g on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and further, a stump character 6100 is located in front of the colorless transparent portion 6562. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface eighth light emitting portion 6522h. In front of the ninth light emitting portion 6522i on the front surface of the mountain substrate, a colorless light scattering portion 6564 for the second mountain front cover is provided.

  In the front view, the mountain auditorium 6500 has a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and is visually recognized as white, and a region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and is visually recognized as light blue. , The front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and is visible in light blue, and the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and is blue transparent. , A region in which the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6542b, and is visible in a semi-transparent blue color, and a region in which the mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided. A region where the rear member is visible in the shape of a hole, a region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is visible with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 being visible in white, and a region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is visible in white. 2 mountain front cover colorless light scattering A region which is visible in white covered in 6564, mountain board 6520 behind the second crests front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is composed of the transparent visually recognized region not located.

  FIG. 514 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned rabbit role 6000 and stump role 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain role 6500. Behind the rabbit character 6000, an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized as white, and a region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and is visually recognized as light blue. In addition, the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544, and there are provided regions which are visible in light blue. In these regions, the first rabbit component 6000 provided in the front is provided. Light from the face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is diffusely reflected forward, so that the light use efficiency can be increased. In addition, behind the stump role item 6100, a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and is visually recognized as white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visually recognized as white. And light from the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b of the stump character object 6100 provided forward is irregularly reflected in these regions. Thus, it is possible to increase the light use efficiency. As described above, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to include the plurality of reflection regions corresponding to the plurality of members including the light emitting unit.

  When the light from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected forward by the mountain substrate 6520 located behind the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 in this manner, the rabbit It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the substrate area hidden by the object 6000 and the stump object 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to use white or light color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520. Also, in the substrate area hidden by the rabbit character 6000 or the stump character 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is configured to be exposed without providing a cover in front, or a colorless and transparent cover is provided when a cover is provided. It is good to be constituted so that. In the example shown in FIG. 514 (A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in a region corresponding to the right side of the rabbit accessory 6000 in a front view. Further, in a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed, an electronic component such as the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 is not mounted on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. In addition, in the region corresponding to the stump role 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is either exposed or covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to further increase the efficiency of reflecting light forward.

  Among the mountain substrate front light emitting portions 6522 provided on the mountain substrate 6520, the mountain substrate front first light emitting portion 6522a and the mountain substrate front fourth light emitting portion 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front thereof. The front second light-emitting portion 6522b and the third front light-emitting portion 6522c on the mountain substrate have a first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 in front, and the ninth light-emitting portion 6522i on the front of the mountain substrate has a second front mountain cover on the front. A colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided. In this way, by providing a cover that is colored or scatters light in front of the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522, the light from the light emitting portion is not directly irradiated to the eyes of the player. On the other hand, the fifth front light emitting unit 6522e and the sixth front light emitting unit 6522f on the mountain substrate do not have a cover in front, and are exposed on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. This is used for illuminating the stump role object 6100 located forward with the light from the mountain substrate front fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain substrate front sixth light emitting portion 6522f. This is because the light from the mountain substrate front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f is not directly irradiated to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the existence of the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portion 6522 inconspicuous. As described above, in the mountain role object 6500, the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 is not evenly arranged on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6500, but the first mountain front cover 6540 located in front of the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522, The second mountain front cover 6560, the rabbit accessory 6000, and the stump accessory 6100 are eccentrically arranged corresponding to each other.

  FIG. 514 (C) shows the rabbit role 6000 moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. In this state, the mountain substrate front third light-emitting portion 6522c and the mountain substrate front fourth light-emitting portion 6522d, which have been positioned so as to overlap behind the rabbit accessory 6000 in the front view, can be visually recognized by the player in the front view. Have been. The rabbit accessory 6000 not only emits light in the standby position as described above, but also emits light in a predetermined color as an effect even in the state of being moved. At this time, in the game board effect display device 1600, an effect display using the same emission color as the emission color of the rabbit accessory 6000 may be performed. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 emits white light, the game board effect display device 1600 is configured to execute an effect of displaying a white line extending radially from a position where the rabbit character 6000 is located. Is also good.

  FIG. 514 (C) shows the rabbit role 6000 moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. Behind the rabbit accessory 6000 in a front view, a mountain substrate front third light emitting portion 6522c and a mountain substrate front fourth light emitting portion 6522d are provided, and even when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory can be used. Even when 6000 is at the movement position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the movement position, the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 may be configured to emit white light simultaneously with the display of the white line on the game board effect display device 1600.

  If the third light emitting portion 6522c and the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front of the mountain substrate are in the light emitting mode as a production in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the upper surface of the face cover portion of the rabbit accessory 6000 6012, the right face 6013 of the face cover, the lower face 6014 of the face cover, and the left face 6015 of the face cover pass through the light emitted from the third light emitting portion 6522c on the front of the mountain substrate and the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front of the mountain substrate. The outline of the face of the rabbit is in a light emitting mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit character 6000, the light emitted from the third front light emitting portion 6522c of the mountain substrate front and the fourth light emitting portion 6522d of the front mountain substrate and diffused forward is irregularly reflected backward. This light is diffusely reflected forward again on the front of the mountain object 6500. With such a configuration, the utilization efficiency of the emitted light can be increased.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 514, the mountain role 6500 is configured to be larger than the rabbit role 6000 or the stump role 6100 in area when viewed from the front. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 to perform the same function as the mountain accessory 6500. For example, such an accessory may be arranged so as to fit within the area formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 in a front view. In addition, as such an accessory, for example, white as a grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500A, 501A, 504A, and 510A to 510D. May be adopted such that the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is exposed or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Even in the case of such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a allows the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100 to be separated. Light can be diffusely reflected forward.

  The rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 513 is configured such that the entire face substrate 6020 completely fits into the face cover portion 6010 in a front view. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the above-mentioned grass character 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 fits into the grass front cover 6440 in a front view. Alternatively, the present invention may be applied to the relationship between the grass cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass character 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 fits in the rear cover 6460 in a front view. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates in the shape of a flower is not overlapped with the rear surface of the front cover 6440 or the front surface of the rear cover 6460 in a front view. Each substrate may be attached to the cover 6440 or the rear cover 6460 so that the whole of the board is completely contained. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to realize decoration by a combination of the board and the front cover 6440 or a combination of the board and the rear cover 6460. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the substrate and the cover.

  As shown in FIG. 495, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board effect display device 1600. A plurality of accessories are provided in the space. Among these roles, a first giant tree role 6600, a second giant tree role 6650, a first cloud role 6700, a second cloud role 6750, and a board back grass role are located at positions near the back surface of the game panel 1100. 6800 are provided. These are visible through a game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have a function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The first big tree role 6600 and the second big tree role 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, the game panel 1100 includes a first giant tree role 6600 located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree role 6650 located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree accessory 6600 includes a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630. The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is formed of a brown printed board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is formed of a green printed board. On the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant leaf substrate 6630, a plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged, and the direction of these light sources is rightward. The second giant tree role 6650 includes a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is a green substrate. A plurality of LED light sources are arranged on the rear surface of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, and these light sources are oriented leftward. The first giant tree feature 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree role 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant leaf substrate 6680. However, a structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass functioning object 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) may be adopted for each of these substrates.

  The first cloud role 6700 and the second cloud role 6750 are provided so as to cover the upper portion of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first cloud role 6700 and the second cloud role 6750 are each formed of a white printed circuit board. Each of these substrates may be configured to adopt the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass functioning object 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G).

A first giant leaf substrate 6630 constituting the first giant tree accessory 6600 and a second giant leaf substrate 6680 constituting the second giant tree accessory 6650 are from the end of the game panel 1100 to the inside of the game area 5a and further from the game. It is configured to be continuously visible from the player over the panel opening 1100a. The second cloud role object 6750 is configured to be continuously visible from the player from outside the game area 5a to inside the game area 5a and further to the game panel opening 1100a.
On the other hand, the first giant leaf substrate 6630 forming the first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant leaf substrate 6680 forming the second giant tree role 6650 are overlaid on the upper left and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. And the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured not to look like a square. The mountain role object 6500 is also provided so as to be overlaid on the lower left and lower right of the game board effect display device 1600, and is configured so that the game board effect display device 1600 does not look like a square. In addition, the mountain role product 6500 is provided at a position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the respective role providing devices provided in front of the game board effect display device 1600.

FIG. 515 shows a board back grass part 6800. The board back grass part 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower part of the back surface of the game panel 1100.
The board back grass role 6800 includes a board back grass board 6820 and a board back grass front cover 6840. The back hay front cover 6840 may be made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and more specifically, may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the board back grass substrate 6820 and the board back grass front cover 6840, the structure according to the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass character 6400 shown in FIGS. 500A to 512G is adopted. May be configured.
Similarly, the structure related to the rear cover 6460 may be adopted for the back grass part 6800.

  A passing part for passing a game ball that has won a winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located on the front side of the board back grass part 6800 and passed through an opening provided on the game panel 1100. As shown, a circular board back grass substrate opening 6824 and a board back grass front cover opening 6848 are provided. The game ball that has passed through the board hay grass substrate opening 6824 and the board hay grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the board hay grass role 6800. Further, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached below each passing portion and on the back surface of the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the presence of the sensor. In addition, as shown below, the board back grass substrate opening 6824a through the board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d as the board back grass substrate opening 6824, and the board back grass front cover as the board back grass front cover opening 6848. The first opening 6848a to the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d are provided.

  The board back grass first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a are circular in the same size, respectively, and are provided at positions overlapping in the board back grass role 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball moved to the back side of the game panel 1100 by winning a winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the first opening 6824a of the board back grass substrate and the first opening 6848a of the front cover of the board back grass. Is formed to pass through.

  The board back grass substrate second opening 6824b does not have its front surface covered with the board back grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passage portion for allowing game balls to pass directly through the exposed board back grass substrate 6820.

  The board hay turf front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board hay turf board 6820 behind it, and constitutes a passage portion for directly passing game balls only with the board hay turf front cover second opening 6848b. are doing. In this example, the board back grass substrate 6820 has a shape along the contour below the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b. With such a configuration, the path for guiding the game ball that has passed through the second opening 6848b of the front cover of the board to the sensor located below is made while the shape of the board behind the grass 6820 has a decorative outer shape. Can be made harder to see as much as possible.

  The board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c are circular with the same size, respectively, and are provided at positions overlapping the board back grass part 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball moved to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 by winning the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the third opening 6824c of the board back grass substrate and the third opening 6848c of the front cover of the board back grass. Is formed to pass through. In this example, two elliptical regions are formed in the front grass hay cover 6840 above the passage formed by the third grass hay substrate third opening 6824c and the third grass hay front cover opening 6848c. By doing so, the decorative shape imitating the rabbit's head is made visible. As described above, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made less noticeable, and the decorative function of the board back grass part 6800 is provided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation that the data is lost.

  The board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d have the same size and shape, respectively, and have a shape in which two elliptical portions protrude above the circular outer shape. No. In addition, these are provided at positions that overlap with each other when viewed from the front side in the board back grass part 6800. Then, the game ball having moved to the back side of the game panel 1100 by winning a winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the fourth opening 6824d of the board back grass substrate and the fourth opening 6848d of the front cover of the board back grass. Is formed to pass through. In this example, the shape of the third opening 6824c of the board back grass substrate and the third opening 6848c of the board back grass front cover are configured to be visually recognizable as a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head. As described above, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made less noticeable, and the decorative function of the board back grass part 6800 is provided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation that the data is lost.

  It should be noted that a tubular member formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin may be disposed in a passage portion through which the game ball passes, so that the game ball passes therethrough. Further, the tubular member may be formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin, and the synthetic resin may have the same color as that of the front cover 6840 of the board or the same color as the board 6820 of the board. With such a configuration, the presence of the tubular member can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the back grass part 6800 is impaired. .

  The first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the board back grass role 6800 are respectively attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. It is located behind the game panel 1100 so as to straddle the rail member 5950. This makes it possible to visually recognize each accessory as a decorative item without being aware of the existence of the rail member 5950. Note that the entire rail member 5950 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be formed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, and at least one of the members may be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located behind is improved, and it is possible to widen the range in which decoration is performed. Further, the rail member 5950 may be formed of a synthetic resin of the same color as the accessory positioned at the rear. For example, when the back grass part 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping with the back grass part 6800 in a front view may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  When the game ball driven into the game area 5a is charged, a discharge is generated at an unintended location, the electronic component is damaged by a high voltage, or the control element is unintentionally illegitimate due to an electromagnetic pulse generated by the discharge. Control may be performed. In particular, a role provided with a printed circuit board on which electronic components are mounted, such as a first giant tree role 6600, a second giant tree role 6650, a first cloud role 6700, a second cloud role 6750, and a back grass role 6800. When an object is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the possibility that such a situation will occur is higher in electronic components mounted on these substrates.

  In view of this, in these accessories, in a mode having a front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be configured to include a silver opaque portion formed by the above-described metal thin film. More specifically, the front cover may be provided so that such an opaque portion is located in front of a place where the electronic component is mounted on the board. In addition, it may be configured such that each role is provided so that the front surface of each role that may be affected by such charged game balls does not contact the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, at least in the area overlapping the game area 5a in which the charged game ball rolls and falls in a front view, at least the front face of each role is provided with each role so that it does not contact the back side of the game panel 1100. You may comprise.

  Further, it is desirable that the ground path of a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the ground path of a ground wire (not shown) provided on each accessory be as different as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 may be finally installed on the island equipment via a ground circuit provided on each accessory, or conversely, an earth wire of each accessory may be provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to finally install the equipment on an island facility via a grounding circuit. Therefore, a ground circuit board having a static elimination function may be provided at a predetermined position on the back of the gaming machine, and the ground path from the gaming panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory may be combined at the ground circuit board. . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of charged game balls hit into the game area 5a.

  In FIGS. 487 and 495, an example is shown in which the board back grass role 6800 is provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100. Instead of the board back grass role 6800, a mountain role 6500, a rabbit role 6000, and a stump role. The object 6100 may be provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also in this case, the light diffusely reflected rearward from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected forward again to increase the light use efficiency. By utilizing the reflection function of the mountain substrate 6520, a winning opening unit having other decorations or a winning opening may be arranged in front of the mountain playing in the same manner as the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100. May be configured. Also in this case, it is possible to reflect light emitted from the light emitting unit provided in the decoration accessory or the winning school unit and diffusely reflected rearward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520.

In addition, by providing a plurality of columnar spacers on the back surface of the front cover that constitutes these accessories, the front surface of the substrate is in contact with the top of the spacer and is not directly in contact with the back surface of the front cover. May be. Specifically, as the structure of each spacer, a columnar structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm vertically from the back surface of the front cover may be employed. Further, the spacer may be formed by integrally molding the front cover with the same material. When the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacer may be provided in a region where the rear is more difficult to visually recognize. For example, the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover may be integrally molded with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes green and transparent.
In this case, it is preferable that the spacer is not provided in the colored transparent portion, but the spacer is provided in the colored light scattering portion. By providing the spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with the height of the spacer being separated. With such a configuration, decoration is performed by the front cover in the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100, and decoration by the board is performed at a position several mm behind the front cover. At this time, the board is located at the rear as compared with the case where the decoration is performed by the board in the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the presence of through holes and electronic components provided on the substrate. Further, since the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the substrate are separated from each other, it is possible to reduce the influence of the discharge from the charged game balls and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

  The board back grass part 6800, the first big tree part 6600, the second big tree part 6650, the first cloud part 6700, and the second cloud part 6750 are respectively provided near the back surface of the game panel 1100. . Specifically, it is arranged on the nearer side than the middle position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, in the space between the board back grass part 6800, the first big tree part 6600, the second big tree part 6650, the first cloud part 6700, the second cloud part 6750 and the game board side effect display device 1600. Is provided with a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 as movable accessories. Note that the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 600 may be provided on the lower part of the game panel 1100 on which the panel back grass character 6800 is provided.

  A light emitting unit is provided on a front surface of a substrate in a role that does not have a front cover, such as the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant role, 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750. In this case, a scattering portion for scattering the light emitted from the light emitting unit may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 overlapping the light emitting unit in a front view. Alternatively, even in the case where a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting portion in a front view, a scattering portion is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. May be.

  FIGS. 496 to 499 show an example in which the stump accessory 6100 is provided, but a member constituting the stump accessory 6100 may be configured to be movable as an effect. For example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the stump box portion 6300 may be configured to be movable as an effect.

  FIGS. 516 (A) to 516 (D) show the stump box section 6300 shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A), in which the box upper wall section 6310 and the box left wall section 6340 are respectively moved from the standby position. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a state where the camera is moved to a position. FIG. 516 (A) shows an example in which the box upper wall 6310 is moved backward until the front end of the box upper wall 6310 contacts the upper end of the box rear wall 6350. FIG. 516 (B) shows an example in which the box right wall 6320 is moved to the left rear until the front end of the box right wall 6320 contacts the right end of the box rear wall 6350. FIG. 516 (C) shows an example in which the box lower wall portion 6330 is moved backward until the front end of the box lower wall portion 6330 contacts the lower end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516 (D) shows an example in which the box right wall 6320 is moved to the right rear until the front end of the box right wall 6320 is in contact with the left end of the box rear wall 6350. Note that only one of the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable as illustrated, and the other wall portion may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall portions of the portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable. For example, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable.

  With such a configuration, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall to the stump plate portion 6210, the first grass movable portion 6360, and the second grass movable portion 6370 provided in front of the stump box portion 6300 are provided. The irradiation mode of light from the light-emitting portion 6354b can be changed. For example, before the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, when the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved backward, light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected on the box upper wall portion 6310, so that the rear wall light emitting portion is not reflected. The light emitted obliquely upward from the portion 6354 goes straight as it is to illuminate the back side of the stump plate portion 6210. Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in an area above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. As described above, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the illuminated area can be changed. Even when the box right wall 6320 to the box left wall 6340 is slid rearward instead of the box upper wall 6310, the area to be illuminated is changed in accordance with each moved wall. It is possible to do.

  Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A), the upper end of the box rear wall 6350 is located at the front end of the box upper wall 6310, and the lower end of the box rear wall 6350 is located at the bottom of the box lower wall 6330. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front end. Further, a configuration in which the state shown in FIG. 498 (A) can be moved backward may be employed.

  Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350. For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the sides formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350, the box left wall portion 6340 It may be configured to be rotatable about a side formed by the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box. By rotating the box right wall 6320 and the box left wall 6340 inward, the box right wall 6320 and the box left wall 6340 cover the front surface of the box rear wall 6350. By rotating the right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 outward, the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be in a parallel state. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box rear wall portion 6350 has the same form as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. May be configured to be rotatable with respect to.

  Although an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is movable is shown, in the examples shown in FIGS. 498 (A) to 498 (D), the rear wall substrate 6352 including the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is fixedly provided, and The rear wall cover 6356 constituting the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction similarly to the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be directly applied to the stump opening 6210a without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, there is a distance between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially and the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially. The entire cover 6356 can be illuminated. When such an aspect is adopted, a region other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b in the rear wall cover 6356 may be a scattering portion. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction, so that a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state in which the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. Can be made visible to the player.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 499 (A) to 499 (D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 in the above-described box. The rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction similarly to the rear wall portion 6350.

  Although examples in which the member provided fixedly may be made movable have been described, in these examples, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the The second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b may be configured to continue to maintain a predetermined light-emitting mode. As the predetermined light emitting mode, for example, a mode in which the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b keeps lighting, or periodically flashes, or an extinguished state in which no light is emitted is adopted. You may make it. Further, in the case of performing the light emission mode in which the light is continuously turned on or periodically flashed, the light may be continuously emitted in the same color. With such a configuration, instead of changing the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are provided. By moving such a member, it is possible to change the presentation mode visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be changed in a period from the timing when the movement of the member is started to the timing when the movement of the member is finished. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a more complicated presentation mode.

  Note that an example in which members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved from the state shown in FIGS. By moving the members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, the moved one predetermined member may be configured to be in the state shown in FIGS. 498 and 499. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode visually recognized by the player.

  Although the example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move in the left-right direction and the like has been described, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured not to move. Even in such a configuration, the light emission mode of the stump role product 6100 can be diversified by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the first grass decorative portion 6360a and the second grass decorative portion 6370a may be configured as one decorative portion, or may be configured as a plurality of decorative portions. Further, the first grass decorative portion 6360a and the second grass decorative portion 6370a are colored and translucent by a method such as painting or sticking a seal, and when the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is irradiated forward, The decorative portion 6360a and the second grass decorative portion 6370a may be configured to be in the effect state by being illuminated with light.

  Further, as shown below, the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381 constitute the stump accessory 6100 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. May be configured.

  FIG. 517 is an example in which a stump plate portion 6381 is provided in front of the stump box portion 6300 without the stump plate portion 6210, instead of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. Is shown. The grass plate portion may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, a green grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a imitating the outer shape of grass, a grass plate center decoration portion 6382a imitating the shape of an animal face, a grass plate decoration portion 6382b, a grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, It includes a grass-plate-less decorative portion 6382d, a grass-plate left decorative portion 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass-plate colorless and transparent portion 6381b, which is an area other than these. The grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a, the grass plate center decoration portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e are each a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is constructed by printing or sticking a sticker on the front or rear surface of the grass plate 6381 to be constructed. Note that the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a has the shape of the animal's face and ears formed in a linear shape, and the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear is visible. On the other hand, the decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate, the right decorative portion 6382c on the grass plate, the decorative portion 6382d under the grass plate, and the decorative portion 6382e on the grass plate have a shape imitating an animal's face, and are translucent or colored transparent that can transmit light. Is configured.

  In such a configuration, as described above, the members such as the box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box lower wall 6330, the box left wall 6340, the box rear wall 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved. By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode of the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e. In particular, the grass-plate decorative portion 6382b, the grass-plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass-plate decorative portion 6382d, and the grass-plate left decorative portion 6382e were irradiated with light from a state where almost no light had been irradiated until then. It can be changed to a mode, and a shape imitating the face of each animal can be configured to be visible to the player.

  The stump box section 6300 has a box upper wall section 6310, a box right wall section 6320, a box lower wall section 6330, a box left wall section 6340, a box rear wall section 6350, and a box-shaped box without a front surface. Although it has a shape, the position, size, and shape of at least one of these members may be changed.

  FIG. 518 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape having the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350. By providing at a right angle, the stump box portion 6300 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided, and the grass plate portion 6381 is positioned close to the front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. are doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to emit light, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed. By rotating or sliding in the front-rear direction, it is possible to change the manner in which the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is applied to the grass plate portion 6381. In addition, as the stump box portion 6300 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c is moved to the left and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e is moved to the right in comparison with the example shown in FIG. It is provided in the position where it was.

519 to 521 show modifications of the example shown in FIG. 518. In the examples shown in FIG. 519 to FIG. 521, the shape and the mounting manner of the box rear wall portion 6350 are different from each other.
In the example shown in FIG. 519 (A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided at a position shifted halfway leftward when viewed from the front. FIG. 519 (B) shows a state where the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 519 (A) is enlarged.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be doubled to the left in a front view. FIG. 520 (B) shows a state where the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A) is enlarged. FIG. 522 (A) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modification shown in FIG. 520 (A). FIG. 522 (B) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modification shown in FIG. 520 (A).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 521 (A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be reduced in half to the left in the front view. FIG. 521 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 521 (A). FIG. 522 (C) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modification shown in FIG. 521 (A). FIG. 522 (D) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modification shown in FIG. 521 (A).

  Under such a premise, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 519 (A) and 520 (A) (for details, see FIG. 499 (A), When the state shown in FIGS. 499 (B), 522 (A), and 522 (B) is in a light-emitting state, a grass decorative panel 6382a and a grass decorative panel 6382e are illuminated from the rear. It becomes possible. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 backward, the decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate can also be in the light emitting decoration state. On the other hand, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light emitted is reduced. When the box right wall 6320 and the box lower wall 6330 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d are in the light emitting decorative state. can do. Although an example in which both the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emit light is shown, in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A), the left side from the stump box portion 6300 in a front view. In the protruding region, light may not be emitted. In this case, only the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be in the light emitting decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, and the box lower wall 6330 may be configured to move backward.

  Further, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIG. 521 (A) emit light (for details, see FIGS. 522 (C) and 522 (D)). In this state, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a can be in a light emitting decorative state in which the decorative portion 6382a is illuminated from behind. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 backward, the decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate can also be in the light emitting decoration state. On the other hand, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light emitted is reduced. When the box right wall section 6320, the box lower wall section 6330, and the box left wall section 6340 are moved backward instead of the box upper wall section 6310, the grass board right decoration section 6382c, the grass board bottom decoration section 6382d and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e can be in a light emitting decorative state.

  In this way, in the state where the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is light-emitting decorated, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 backward, the grass The on-board decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the under grass decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e can be in a light emitting decorative state. Also, at this time, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a enters the light emitting decorative state with a weaker light amount than before. In this manner, by setting the grass-plate decorative portion 6382b, the grass-plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass-plate decorative portion 6382d, and the grass-plate left decorative portion 6382e in the light-emitting decorative state, a certain state in the gaming machine is indicated or reported. It may be configured as follows. For example, when four states having different degrees of advantage for the player have occurred or are in a possible state, the decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate is set to the luminous decoration state corresponding to the most advantageous state, and the second advantage is obtained. In response to the third state, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c corresponds to the third advantageous state, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e corresponds to the fourth advantageous state. The decorative part 6382d under the grass plate may be configured to be in a light emitting decorative state. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation as to which wall portion is to be moved in a state where the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is illuminated and decorated.

  Alternatively, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are turned off, and the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is not light-emission-decorated. First, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 After a predetermined time has elapsed by moving one of the box lower wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340 backward, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are also set to the light emitting state. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to determine which of the grass-plate decorative portion 6382b, the grass-plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass-plate decorative portion 6382d, and the grass-plate left decorative portion 6382e becomes visible. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall is provided upright with respect to the front direction, so that the player cannot always notice that each wall has moved. Therefore, the player who has noticed the movement of any of the wall portions has a great expectation and will watch the subsequent change of any of the decorative portions to the luminous decoration mode, thereby improving the interest of the game. Becomes possible.

  In addition, for example, in a game state disadvantageous to the player (a so-called normal game state or the like), the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 are set to the front position (non-operation position), and the front grass plate central decoration portion 6382a. Only the box is in the shipping decoration mode, and the box upper wall section 6310 and the box left wall section only when the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a probability fluctuation state, a time saving game state, a jackpot game state). 6340 may be moved rearward, and light may be applied to decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate to decorative portion 6382e on the grass plate to increase the area in the light emitting decoration mode. As a result, the appearance of the light emitting area can be changed in accordance with the interest of the player who shifts from the disadvantageous game state to the advantageous game state and improves.

  Note that in the example shown with reference to FIGS. 519 (A) and 521 (A), an opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall portion 6350. In this case, for example, The moving decorative member may be configured to protrude and retract from the opening.

  With reference to FIGS. 519 (A) to 522 (D), an example is shown in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is shifted leftward or enlarged or reduced. However, it may be configured to be shifted or enlarged or reduced similarly. Further, the structure of the stump box section 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 498, and may be an example shown in FIG.

  498 to 499 show an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A configuration related to light emission such as a light emitting unit or a light scattering unit may be provided on at least one wall of the box left wall 6340.

  In a specific example, in the modification shown with reference to FIGS. 517 (A) to 522 (D), the light emitting portion and the light scattering portion described with reference to FIGS. May be provided to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381. At this time, at least one wall portion of the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 is moved backward as in the examples shown in FIGS. 516 (A) to 516 (D). It is good to constitute. With such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, only the front region corresponding to the opening portion of the stump box portion 6300 is mainly illuminated, and then the front portion of the opening portion of the stump box portion 6300 is added. It is also possible to illuminate right, downward and left. Although an example in which a light emitting unit and a light scattering unit are provided in the box upper wall 6310 to illuminate the inside of the stump box 6300 has been described, a box right wall 6320 may be used instead of the box upper wall 6310. A light emitting unit and a light scattering unit may be provided in the box lower wall 6330 and the box left wall 6340 so that the illumination mode can be changed by moving each wall.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each configured in a plate shape having the same thickness. May be structured such that the inner wall of the wall is inclined outwardly so that the thickness of the wall becomes thinner.
With such a configuration, light reflected in the stump box portion 6300 can be further reflected forward.

  In order to move the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 to change the light irradiation mode to the grass plate portion 6381 as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 are colored and opaque. It is preferable to form a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light or a scattering portion capable of scattering light by forming the inner wall with a thin material or plating the inner wall with an aluminum thin film. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the manner in which the light irradiation mode of the grass plate portion 6381 changes is more prominent. In addition, even when the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed of a colorless transparent and colored transparent material, and the inner wall and the outer wall have a smooth mode, the light irradiation mode to the grass plate section 6381 is changed. It is possible.

  As described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movably deformed. Alternatively, any of a plurality of members may be movable, or all members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall 6310 may be movable, and another member may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. Further, the box upper wall 6310 and the box right wall 6320 may be movable, and another member may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. . Further, all of the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even in the case of such a configuration, the light emitting decoration mode for the grass plate portion 6381 can be changed.

The box upper wall 6310, the box rear wall 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be moved by the peripheral control board 1510 by a driving unit (not shown).
Further, it is preferable that the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, and the like be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

  487 to 522, various movable bodies (rabbit role 6000, stump role 6100, etc.) used for staging and decoration with respect to the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1; The following describes an embodiment in which a movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body) used for effects and decorations on the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1. The embodiment provided is shown.

  FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E) show a right frame movable body 7100 that imitates an animal (specifically, a rabbit) ear as a frame movable body of the door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3. An embodiment in which a left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 can be moved in the vertical direction, but the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

  FIGS. 523 (A) and 523 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 523 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 523 (D) and 523 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 523 (A), 523 (C), and 523 (D) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIGS. 523 (B) and 523 (E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 523 (D) shows a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided at the center of the door frame 3, and through the glass unit 190, a game area 5a located behind, a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, various movable bodies in the game board. (Rabbit role 6000, stump role 6100, etc.) are visible. A plate unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided below the door frame 3. Further, the effect operation unit 400 includes operation buttons 410, and can receive an operation input by the player. In the figure, the upper plate 321, the lower plate 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the like are not shown.

  The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the upper surface, the right side surface, and the left side surface are the upper surface, the right side surface, and the left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 that forms the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are provided so as to overlap in a front view. The door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several mm, and can transmit light. The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to the right ear frame movable body 7100 movable in the vertical direction, and a door corresponding to the left ear frame movable body 7200 movable in the vertical direction. And a frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010.

  As shown in FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. I have. Hereinafter, specific structures and operation modes of these will be described. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, in the following description, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative.

  The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. ing. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is made of a right inner ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. And a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. Surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are outside the right ear frame movable body first surface. It is formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

  Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7116 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 in a front view. Further, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 in a front view. The light emitting portion 7116 inside the right ear frame movable body is specifically composed of a printed circuit board having a white protective film applied on both sides, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on the surface thereof. Have been. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7118 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode toward the front under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 can decorate the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112, and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 can emit the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. It is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

  The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 523 (A), 523 (C), and 523 (D), respectively. 523 (B) and 523 (E) from the state stored at the standby position in the simple door frame top unit 570 upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) that protrudes to the front. The upper surfaces of the right and left ear frame movable members 7100 and 7200 are flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right and left ear frame movable members 7100 and 7200 are in the standby position. Have been. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal ear, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking this state, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ear has moved.

  In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 523 (A), in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame When the movable body outer light-emitting unit 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting unit 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting unit 7218 emit light in a predetermined mode, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated. In this state, the player can visually recognize the player. Note that the same structure may be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in other embodiments. In this case as well, the light emitted from the light emitting unit provided corresponding to the frame movable body receives the light from the door frame top unit. The light is reflected and scattered in the unit 570, and the front and side surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a state where the front and side surfaces are dimly lit.

  On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7118, the left ear frame When the movable body inner light emitting unit 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7218 emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 inner decoration part included in the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is provided. 7112, the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210, the left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7212, and the left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7214 can be visually recognized by a player in a predetermined light emission effect state.

  As described above, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as frame movable bodies) move, a part of the frame movable body moves to the outer frame 2 or the door frame base unit 100. Because it is located above the upper surface, the area occupied by the player in the field of view when looking up increases, and the volume of the housing seems to increase, giving the player unprecedented surprise and fun. Can be given.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), the game board side according to the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit) A player's operation reception mode, right ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7216, left ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7218 (hereinafter, frame) An example of an effect is shown in which a light emitting mode and the like are combined in a movable light emitting unit.

  FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B) respectively show an operation mode of the frame movable body and display of a frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart which showed the state, the reception state of the operation part, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting part.

  In the time charts shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), t0, t1 to t34, t35 and the like are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points are described in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), and FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B), which will be described later. The same applies to each of the drawings and the like obtained by modifying.

  FIG. 524 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 524 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 525 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 525 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 524 (A) to FIG. 525 (B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the manner in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which operation reception on the operation unit is enabled, and the operation instruction display are shown. The start timing and the timing at which the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is turned off from the light emitting effect state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body changes from the light-off state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific effect examples in each effect pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). (Hereinafter, also referred to as a first state and a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 simultaneously rise. Is started (timing t7).

  At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation image includes an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulation image rises in accordance with the actual rise of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise It is dynamically displayed in such a manner as to be displayed. The frame movable body simulation image is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable at the timing (timing t9) at which the rise of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 ends. The raising of the image imitating the body 7200 ends, and thereafter, the image is continued to be displayed in a state indicating the stopped state (after timing t9). A state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have finished rising at a timing t9 two seconds after the start of the rising at a timing t7 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state and a rising state). Become.

  On the other hand, at timing t9, operation reception on the operation unit is enabled, and display of an image instructing operation on the operation unit on the game board effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, also referred to as operation instruction display) is started. You. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!”) May be displayed. You may. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example described below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the state in which the light emitting effect is performed.

  FIGS. 524 (A) and 524 (B) show an effect mode in which an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after a period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid (timing t9). Is shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 524 (A) is an effect pattern in a case where the special lottery result is a big hit. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is turned from the light-off state to the normal state. The specific light emission effect state is different from the light emission effect state. As described above, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the specific light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 524 (B) is an effect pattern in a case where the special lottery result is out of order. It becomes a light emission effect state. As described above, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, the special lottery result is indicated to the player as a loss.

  In the specific light emission effect state, as compared with the light emission condition in the normal light emission effect state, the flashing state of the light is faster, the light amount is stronger, or the number of colors is larger, so that the player feels more stimulation. It is preferable to adopt a light emitting mode. In this way, when the effect state of a specific light emission mode different from the normal state is visually recognized by the player, the special lottery result is indicated to the player as a big hit. Note that, specifically, in the specific light emission effect state, a portion inside the frame movable body and a portion outside the frame movable body may be configured to be in a light emission effect state in different modes. For example, the inner part of the frame movable body may be configured to be visually recognizable in a light emission mode that is more stimulating than the outer part of the frame movable body. In addition, you may comprise so that this definition about a specific light emission effect state and a normal light emission effect state may be applied to another embodiment.

  525 (A) and 525 (B) show that the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit during the operation valid period after the period during which the operation on the operation unit is valid (timing t9). This shows an effect mode in a case where the operation validity period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 525 (A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. At the timing (timing t18) when the operation effective period ends, the specific light emission of the frame movable body light emitting unit is different from the normal light emission effect state. It will be in the production state. As described above, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the specific light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 525 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the operation effective period ends (timing t18), the light emitting section of the frame movable body enters a normal light emitting effect state. . As described above, when the light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, the special lottery result is indicated to the player as a loss.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation effective period, the decorative pattern that has changed corresponds to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) and 525 (A), the special lottery results are in the form of a staggered pattern indicating that the result is a big hit (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”). The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (B) and 525 (B), the reach loss mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a loss ) Stops the decorative design.

  At a timing (timing t22) when two seconds have elapsed from when the decorative symbol stopped, the frame movable body is raised to the raised position (second state) while maintaining either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. ) To the storage position (first state). At the same time, the frame movable body simulation image has a display mode of descending in accordance with the actual descending operation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. At the timing when the movement of the frame movable body to the storage position is completed (timing t24), the frame movable body simulated image has a display mode in which the lowering is completely completed in accordance with the actual operation of lowering the frame movable body. The display ends.

  When the special lottery result is a big hit, the light emitting state of the frame movable body may be changed from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. When the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the change of the next decorative pattern is started.

  FIGS. 526 (A) to 526 (C) show a moving state of the frame movable body when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 524 (A) is executed, a display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, and reception of the operation unit. 7 schematically shows a state, a state of an operation instruction display, and a change in a state of the frame movable body over time in a light emission effect state. As described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 524 (A) is an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big hit.

  FIG. 526 (A) shows a state at timing t5, where the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the normal light emission effect state, The frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

  FIG. 526 (B) shows the state at timing t8, in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating in the reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting effect state from the storage position (first state) to the ascending position (second state). , The frame movable body simulation image is a display simulating the state of moving from the storage position (first state) to the ascending position (second state), and the operation unit is disabled. It is a period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

  FIG. 526 (C) shows a state at timing t11, in which the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) in the unlit state, and the frame movable body simulation image is The display simulates the frame movable body located at the ascending position (second state), the operation valid period is started in the operation unit, and an image simulating the operation unit is displayed as an instruction display as an operation instruction display. ing.

  FIG. 527 (A) shows the state at timing t19, where the decorative symbol is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) in the special light emission effect state, and the frame movable body simulation is performed. The image is a display imitating the ascending position (second state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

  FIG. 527 (B) shows the state at the timing t23, in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a sloping manner (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The movable frame is moving from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, and the frame movable body simulation image is moved from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (second state). The first state) is simulated, and the operation unit is in an operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

  FIG. 527 (C) shows the state at timing t28, in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the form of a slash (eg, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is located at the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. .

  As described above, the frame movable body simulation image is displayed at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, so that the light emission mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. Can be suppressed. In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that has not existed in the past in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of the reach effect), which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. In addition, by changing the light emitting mode of the frame movable body light emitting unit in response to the operation of the operation unit by the player, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she decided the special lottery result. It becomes.

  FIGS. 528 (A) to 528 (F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). FIGS. 528 (A) and 528 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 528 (C) and 528 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 528 (E) and 528 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 528 (A), 528 (C), and 528 (E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). Is shown. FIGS. 528 (B), 528 (D), and 528 (F) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 528 (C) and FIG. 528 (E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). Side has a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240, and can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees when viewed from the right side, thereby turning the right ear frame movable body. The moving state (second state) in which the state 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved from the state at the standby position (first state) to the moving position. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  FIGS. 529 (A) to 529 (F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 528 (A) to 528 (F). FIGS. 529 (A) and 529 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 529 (C) and 529 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 529 (E) and 529 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 529 (A), 529 (C), and 529 (E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. ing. FIGS. 529 (B), 529 (D), and 529 (F) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 529 (C) and 529 (E), the frame movable body has a rotation axis on the back side, and rotates clockwise by 90 degrees when viewed from the right side. As a result, the state in which the frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is moved to the moving position (second state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  FIGS. 530 (A) to 530 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). 530 (A) and 530 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 530 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 530 (D) and 530 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 530 (A), 530 (C), and 530 (D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. ing. FIGS. 530 (B) and 530 (E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

  In this embodiment, the upper part of the frame movable body is visible in a standby state (first state) in a front view. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this way, in the standby state, since a part of the frame movable body is visible in the front view, it is possible to remind the player that the frame movable body moves. Also, during a normal game, only the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are set to the normal light emitting effect state, and only when the specific light emitting effect state is set, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion is set. The light emitting section 7116 and the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7216 may also be configured to emit light. Further, a similar light emission pattern may be adopted in a frame movable body having another structure.

  531 (A) to 531 (F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 530 (A) to 530 (E). 531 (A) and 531 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 531 (C) and 531 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 531 (E) and 531 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 531 (A), 531 (C), and 531 (E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). ing. FIGS. 531 (B), 531 (D), and 531 (F) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

  In this embodiment, in the state at the standby position (first state), the left and right frame movable bodies are adjacent to each other, and the upper part of the frame movable body is visible in a front view. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the both ear openings 7040 on the door frame top unit. The frame movable bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state (second state) where the player has moved to the movement position, the player can visually recognize the same state as in FIG. 523 (B). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E) show another embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided in a door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3. FIG. In this embodiment, the frame movable body is rotatable, but a specific structure and an operation mode will be described later.

  FIGS. 532 (A) and 532 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 532 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 532 (D) and 532 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 clockwise as viewed from the right from the states shown in FIGS. 532 (A) and 532 (D). It shows a state where it is rotated 90 degrees and protrudes above the door frame top unit 570.

  The door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin, and in a stored state shown in FIG. 532 (A), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are viewed from the player in front view. It is configured to be invisible. On the other hand, when the player visually recognizes the door frame top unit 570 from an obliquely upper front, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 532 (C).

  As shown in FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010. The shape of the upper right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit and the upper left ear opening 7010 on the door frame top unit are vertically elongated rectangles when viewed in plan. Also, inside the door frame top unit 570, a right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200 Is provided. Except for these points, the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has basically the same structure as the structure described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). .

  As shown in FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. I have. Hereinafter, specific structures and operation modes of these will be described. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, in the following description, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative.

  FIGS. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D) show the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 is in the housed state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in plan view, and the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing downward and the right ear frame movable body second surface facing upward. 7120. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is made of a right inner ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. And a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. On the other hand, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 is entirely formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the outer decorative portion 7114 of the right ear frame movable body first surface. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

  The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140. The right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 is attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The right ear frame movable member 7100 can rotate around the left and right directions by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable member rotation shaft 7140. It is. The left ear frame movable member 7200 also has a left ear frame movable member rotating shaft 7240 having a similar structure, and the power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the left ear frame movable member rotating shaft. By being transmitted to 7240, it is possible to rotate around the left-right direction as an axis. The right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 can be independently rotated clockwise or counterclockwise as viewed from the right by controlling a pulse motor (not shown). It is possible to stop at any angle.

  As shown in FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), inside the door frame top unit 570, a right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit for illuminating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is provided. The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed so as to rotate about 30 degrees clockwise from a horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically formed of a printed circuit board having a white protective film applied to both sides thereof, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to be located at the rear of the right ear frame movable body. A light emitting diode capable of irradiating the first surface 7110 with light is mounted on the upper surface thereof. By causing the light emitting diode to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to set the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 to a predetermined light emitting effect mode. The left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit.

  The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a driving mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D), respectively. From the state stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, the state can be changed to a state stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E) are examples of such a case, in which the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 are rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right from the stored state, and In this state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face the front and stop. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal ear, and are stored in the door frame top unit 570 and perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking this, it is possible to decoratively express the state where the animal's ear is standing.

  In addition, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is. When rotating in this manner, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be rotated a plurality of times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E) can be said to show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise multiple times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise multiple times when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 become alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately visible to the player.

  The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stop or rotate at a predetermined position, and are irradiated from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit. Although the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into a predetermined decorative state by light, a specific example will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D), the right ear frame movable body 7100 has the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 has the left ear When light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in a state where the frame movable body first surface 7210 faces downward, the inside of the door frame top unit 570 is set. It is possible to make the entirety of the door frame top unit 570 vaguely emit light by the light reflected by. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 has the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 has the left ear frame movable body When light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in a state where the one surface 7210 faces forward, the light causes the right ear frame movable body The state in which the one surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are decorated can be visually recognized by the player. Also in this case, part of the light emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is transmitted to the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200. Since the door frame top unit 570 is reflected from the inside by the reflected light, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a state where the entire door frame top unit 570 emits light slightly.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in a state where the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 are rotated, the irradiation is performed. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210, and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately illuminated by the emitted light. It will be in the state that was done. In addition, the entirety of the door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a state where the light is slightly dimly emitted.

  As described above, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned or rotated above the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 in a stopped state. When the player occupies a larger area in the field of view when looking up, and looks as if the volume of the housing has increased, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprise and fun.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), the game board side according to the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit) An effect example in which the operation reception mode of the player, the light emitting mode in the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the light emitting mode in the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit are combined is shown.

  FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B) show an operation mode of the frame movable body and display of a frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the reception state of the operation part, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the irradiation mode of light to the frame movable body.

  FIG. 533 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 533 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 534 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 534 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), display of a frame movable body simulation image The timing, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode of the frame movable body is changed from the light emission effect state to the light-off state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, the light irradiation mode from the light-off state to the frame movable body, the light emission effect state, or the specific light emission effect state May vary depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific effect examples in each effect pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D) as shown in FIG. 532 (A), FIG. 532 (C), and FIG. 532 (D). The body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a state of facing downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved at timing t9. At the same time, a state where the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotation state). The rotation direction is clockwise as viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is a speed of one rotation per second.

  At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulation image includes an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulation image is the same as the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. It continues to be displayed dynamically in a manner that rotates in the direction. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also rotated at the same speed (the speed of one rotation per second) as the actual rotation speed of the frame movable body. Is displayed. Thereby, when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a rotating state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E), the right ear An image simulating the frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also images simulating the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear included in the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, respectively. An image simulating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 included in the image simulating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulated image in a manner facing the front.

  On the other hand, at timing t9, operation reception on the operation unit is enabled, and display of an image instructing operation on the operation unit on the game board effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, also referred to as operation instruction display) is started. You. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!”) May be displayed. You may. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example described below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). At the timing t9, the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit that irradiate light to the frame movable body are turned off from the state in which the light emitting effect is performed.

  FIGS. 533 (A) and 533 (B) show an effect mode in which an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after a period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9). Is shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light on the frame movable body is The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 533 (A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is moved to the right ear frame movable body first. A state in which the surface 7110 is vertically stopped with the front side facing forward and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 facing forward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). Become. At the same time, the light emission mode for the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the normal light emission effect state. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 533 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is out of order. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is moved to the right ear frame movable body. A state in which the second surface 7120 is stopped vertically with the left side facing forward and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 facing forward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a fourth state). ). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 is changed from the light-off state to the normal light emission effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is in the normal light emission effect state, the special lottery result is indicated to the player as a loss.

  534 (A) and 534 (B) show that the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit during the operation valid period after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid (timing t9). This shows an effect mode in a case where the operation validity period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating up to that point automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body is stopped. Becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 534 (A) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a big hit. At the timing (timing t18) when the operation effective period ends, the right ear frame movable body 7100 moves the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110. This is a state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 facing the front side (third state). At the same time, the light emission mode for the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the normal light emission effect state. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 534 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the operation validity period ends (timing t18), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is moved to the right ear frame movable body second surface. 7120 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body 7200 stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 as the near side (fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 is changed from the light-off state to the normal light emission effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is in the normal light emission effect state, the special lottery result is indicated to the player as a loss.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 533 (A) to FIG. 534 (B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation validity period, the decoration pattern that has changed corresponds to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 533 (A) and FIG. 534 (A), the special lottery results indicate a big hit, for example, “7”, “7”, “7”. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (B) and 534 (B), a reach loss mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a loss ) Stops the decoration design.

  At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have elapsed since the decoration symbol stopped, the frame movable body is kept in one of the specific light emission effect state and the normal light emission effect state, and the right ear frame movable member is maintained. The first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face forward (third state), or the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to a state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image ends.

  When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable that the state of light irradiation on the frame movable body is changed from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. When the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the change of the next decorative pattern is started.

  As described above, the frame movable body is configured to display the frame movable body simulation image at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (the first state) to the rotating state (the second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of the reach effect), the frame movable body appears at a position that has not existed in the past, so that the player can feel great surprise and fun. . Further, triggered by the operation of the operation unit by the player, the frame movable body is stopped in a predetermined stop state (the third state or the fourth state) and the light irradiation mode of the frame movable body is changed. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she has decided the special lottery result.

  FIGS. 535 (A) to 535 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E). FIGS. 535 (A) and 535 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 535 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 535 (D) and 535 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 535 (A), 535 (C), and 535 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position (first state). FIGS. 535 (B) and 535 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating (second state).

  In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a right ear frame movable body rotation axis 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7240 at the lower part, respectively. The vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E). Further, the right ear frame movable body rotation axis 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7240 are provided to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. The upper halves of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are located at positions higher than the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100.

  In a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotating state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. For example, FIGS. 535 (B) and 535 (E) show that the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is seen in plan view. It can also be said that it shows a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed in FIG. With such a rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is watched in plan view. Compared to the case of rotating around, even if a player or a store clerk inadvertently brings his or her hand or face closer to the movable frame, the hand or face may be dragged behind the gaming machine and cause injury. Can be suppressed. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  FIGS. 536 (A) to 536 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 535 (A) to 535 (E). FIGS. 536 (A) and 536 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 536 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 536 (D) and 536 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 536 (A), 536 (C), and 536 (D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. FIGS. 536 (B) and 536 (E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

  Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 projects upward so as to cover the upper, left, right, and rear portions of the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200. are doing. In addition, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 each have a colored (specifically, pink) transparent composite. It is formed of resin. Further, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 535 (A) to 535 (E). . By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk of the game store carelessly approaches his or her hand or face to the frame movable body, the hand or face will be behind the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as being dragged and causing injury. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  FIGS. 537 (A) to 537 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 536 (A) to 536 (E). FIGS. 537 (A) and 537 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 537 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 537 (D) and 537 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 537 (A), 537 (C), and 537 (D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. FIGS. 537 (B) and 537 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

  Also in this embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 has a portion projecting upward so as to cover the upper, left, right, and rear portions of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the part projecting upward and the right ear frame movable body 7100 or the part projecting upward and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrally formed, and after they are moved forward. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to start rotating. FIG. 537 (D) shows a state before starting the forward movement, and FIG. 537 (E) shows a state where the forward movement is completed.

  Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 535 (A) to 535 (E). . By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk of the game store carelessly approaches his or her hand or face to the frame movable body, the hand or face will be behind the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as being dragged and causing injury. In addition, by covering the front of the part protruding upward with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, but a player or a store clerk of the game store cannot contact. It may be configured as follows.

  The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). In this case, the upwardly projecting part and the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the upwardly projecting part and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to timing t7. The process may be performed until timing t9. Further, an image simulating a part projecting upward may be displayed as a frame movable body simulation image in accordance with a timing at which the part projecting upward starts to move. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  With reference to FIGS. 523 to 525, an embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulation image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 has been described. FIG. 540 shows an embodiment obtained by modifying this embodiment. In the embodiment described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. And a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

  538 (A) and 538 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 538 (C) and 538 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 538 (E) and 538 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 538 (A), 538 (C), and 538 (E) show the inside of the door frame top unit 570 in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left A state in which the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is stored (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state) is shown. 538 (B), 538 (D), and 538 (F) show the door frame top unit 570 from the right ear inner frame movable member 7300, the right ear outer frame movable member 7350, the left ear inner frame movable member 7400, A state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, also referred to as a second state) is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Hereinafter, specific structures and operation modes of these will be described. Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure. Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 will be described as a representative.

  In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F) and FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E) described later, the right ear inner frame movable member 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable member are provided. 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be referred to as frame movable bodies. In addition, a case in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are referred to as an inner frame movable body, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as an outer frame movable body. There is.

  The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a vertically-long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction when the stored state is viewed in plan. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 faces upward in the housed state (first state) and forwards in the protruding state (second state), and the housed state (first state). And the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 facing downward in the protruding state (second state). The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is formed of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) other than the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 are white translucent synthetic resin. Is formed. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 also has the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300.

  The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a vertically elongated rectangular movable body when viewed from the front, and includes a right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 facing forward and a right ear outer frame movable body second facing backward. Surface 7370. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are translucent white. It is formed of a synthetic resin. Note that the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 also has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable member 7350.

  Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 is provided. Further, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 is provided.

  The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are specifically configured by a printed circuit board having a white protective film applied on both sides. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player in a protruding state (second state) is mounted on the surface thereof. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

  The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 and the left ear inner frame movable body. By rotating the shaft 7440 by 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right as a rotation axis, the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 538 (A), 538 (C), and 538 (E) respectively. 538 (B), 538 (D), and 538 (F) from the state stored in the standby position (first state) vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to control to a state (second state) that protrudes to the front.

  On the other hand, the right-ear outer frame movable member 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable member 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and thus are respectively shown in FIGS. 538 (A) and 538 (C). 538), (538), (538), (538), (538), (538), (538), (538), (538), (538). It is possible to control to the state (second state) vertically protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown.

  The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. In the state (second state), as shown in FIG. 538 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 The player can visually recognize the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 located inside. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape imitating an animal ear. By taking the stored state (the first state) and the state vertically protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (the second state), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move. It is possible.

  Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame top unit 570. Can be in a state of protruding vertically upward from the upper surface (second state).

  In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 projecting vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. When the door frame is in the closed state (second state), the state is stored in the door frame top unit 570 independently (first state) by the control of the peripheral control board 1510, and The state can be changed to a state of projecting vertically upward (second state).

  In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 538 (A), with the right ear outer frame movable member 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 stored in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable member light emitting portion 7380, When the outer ear frame movable body light emitting portion 7480 emits light in a predetermined mode, it is possible for a player to visually recognize the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 in a state in which the front surface is dimly emitted.

  On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable When the body light emitting section 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting section 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7480 emit light in a predetermined mode, the right ear inner frame is provided. The player can visually recognize the movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 in a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible to make it.

  In the state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 covers the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 behind, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 covers the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 behind. The light radiated forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7480 receives the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. , The light is irregularly reflected rearward on the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and finally, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, Left ear outer frame movable body first surface Since light is diffusely reflected forward by 460, it is possible to increase the use efficiency of the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480. .

  As described above, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to move the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is located above the upper surface, it is possible to give the player a surprise and an unprecedented sensation which has not existed in the past compared with the case where the movable body in the game board is moved.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are formed. A specific operation mode, a display mode of a frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in accordance with the operation mode of the frame movable body, an operation button 410 (hereinafter, referred to as an operation button) The operation acceptance of the player for the operation unit), the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430, the left ear outer frame movable An effect example in which a light emission mode and the like in a body light emitting unit 7480 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a frame movable body light emitting unit) are combined will be described.

  FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) show an operation mode of the frame movable body and display of a frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the reception state of the operation part, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting part.

  FIG. 539 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 539 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 540 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when a special lottery result is a big hit and an operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during a period in which operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 540 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the timing at which the inner frame movable body changes from the housed state (first state) to the projecting state (second state), the frame movable body The display mode of the simulation image, the timing at which operation reception on the operation unit is valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit is turned off from the light emitting effect state are the same. On the other hand, the presence / absence of the operation of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the light-off state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific effect examples in each effect pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door is housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are moved. The rotation starts in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right (timing t7).

  At the same time, display of a part of the frame movable body simulation image is started in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. The frame movable body simulation image is, specifically, an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, a left ear outer side. And an image imitating the frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulation image is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The imitated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Note that, of the frame movable body simulation images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not yet displayed at this stage. An image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, in synchronization with the timing (timing t9) when the rising of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends. The display of the image in a rotating manner is finished, and thereafter, the image is continued to be displayed in a state indicating the stopped state (after timing t9). The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed rotation at timing t9 two seconds after starting to rise at timing t7 (hereinafter, referred to as a second state and a rising state). Is).

  On the other hand, at timing t9, operation reception on the operation unit is enabled, and display of an image instructing operation on the operation unit on the game board effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, also referred to as operation instruction display) is started. You. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!”) May be displayed. You may. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example described below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the light emitting effect state.

  FIG. 539 (A) and FIG. 539 (B) show an effect mode in which an operation on the operation unit is performed at a timing t14 after a period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid (timing t9). Is shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 539 (A) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a big hit. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit switches from the light-off state to the normal light emitting effect. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start rising from a state where they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and after two seconds (timing t16), the rising operation is started. The state is completed (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in a stopped state, As a new frame movable body simulation image, display of an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided in the same manner as the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in the ascending operation. From the timing t14 to the timing t16, the display mode indicating the stored state changes to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed. As described above, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete the rotation operation (the second state), the light emission state changes from the light-off state to the specific light emission effect state, and the light emission state changes from the specific light emission effect state. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in the state are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (the first state) to a state where the ascent operation is completed (the second state). The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in an ascending manner, so that a special lottery is performed for the player. The result will be shown to be a jackpot.

  On the other hand, FIG. 539 (B) is an effect pattern in a case where the special lottery result is out of order. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from a light-off state to a normal light emission. It will be in a production state. In this case, the stored state (first state) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is maintained, and no operation is performed. Further, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 or an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is not displayed. As described above, the special lottery result is given to the player due to the fact that the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a loss.

  FIGS. 540 (A) and 540 (B) show that the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit during the operation valid period after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid (timing t9). This shows an effect mode in the case where the operation validity period ends at a timing t18 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 540 (A) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a big hit. At the timing (timing t18) at which the operation valid period ends, the specific light emission of the frame movable body light emitting unit is different from the normal light emission effect state. It will be in a production state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start rising from a state where they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and after two seconds (timing t16), the rising operation is started. The state is completed (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in a stopped state, As a new frame movable body simulation image, display of an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided in the same manner as the actual rising operation of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, From the timing t18 to the timing t20, the display mode indicating the stored state changes to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed.

  As described above, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete the rotation operation (the second state), the light emission state changes from the light-off state to the specific light emission effect state, and the light emission state changes from the specific light emission effect state. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in the state are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (the first state) to a state where the ascent operation is completed (the second state). The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in an ascending manner, so that a special lottery is performed for the player. The result will be shown to be a jackpot.

  On the other hand, FIG. 540 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at a timing (timing t18) at which the operation effective period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a normal light emitting effect state. In this case, the stored state (first state) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is maintained, and no operation is performed. Further, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 or an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is not displayed. As described above, the special lottery result is given to the player due to the fact that the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a loss.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 539 (A) to FIG. 540 (B), at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the end of the operation validity period, the changing decorative symbol corresponds to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 539 (A) and FIG. 540 (A), the special lottery results are in the form of a double stitch indicating that the result is a big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”). The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539 (B) and 540 (B), a reach loss mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a loss ) Stops the decorative design.

  At a timing (timing t26) when two seconds have elapsed after the decoration symbol stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. The movement from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) is started while maintaining the light emitting mode. At the same time, an image simulating the right-ear outer frame movable member 7350 and the left-ear outer frame among the frame movable-body simulated images in accordance with the actual lowering operation of the right ear outer frame movable member 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450. An image simulating the movable body 7450 has a display mode of descending. At the timing when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed (timing t28), an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. In accordance with the actual lowering operation of the right outer ear frame movable member 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450, the image that simulates the image has a display mode in which the lowering has been completed, and the display ends.

  At a timing (timing t30) two seconds after the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position (timing t30), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame are moved. The movable body 7400 starts moving from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining the light emission mode of either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. At the same time, the right-ear inner-frame movable body 7300 in the frame-movable-body simulated image was simulated in accordance with the actual right-ear inner-frame movable body 7300 and the left-ear inner-frame movable body 7400 moving downward while rotating. The image and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are in a display mode in which the image moves down while rotating. At a timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage position is completed (timing t32), an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 Is displayed in a display mode in which the lowering has been completed in accordance with the actual lowering operation of the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner inner frame movable body 7400, and the display ends.

  When the special lottery result is a big hit, the light emitting state of the frame movable body may be changed from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. When the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the change of the next decorative pattern is started.

  As described above, the frame movable body simulation image is displayed at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, so that the light emission mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. Can be suppressed. In addition, in response to the special lottery result, the frame movable body appears at an unprecedented position, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. Further, after the inner frame movable body has changed from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body is in the standby state (first state) triggered by the operation of the operation unit by the player. The state may change from the moving state (the second state) to the moving state (the second state), so that it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she decided the special lottery result. Also, in a situation where the player can notice that the inner frame movable body is in the moving state (the second state) first and has entered the moving state, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. This allows the player to operate the operation unit while expecting whether or not the outer frame movable body is in the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

  FIGS. 541 (A) to 541 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F). FIGS. 541 (A) and 541 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 541 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 541 (D) and 541 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 541 (A), 541 (C), and 541 (D) show the inside of the door frame top unit 570 in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear A state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. FIGS. 541 (B) and 541 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 from the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right outer ear frame movable body 7350, the left inner ear frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state which projected upward (2nd state) is shown.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 541 (A), 541 (C), and 541 (D) by being moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown), respectively, at a standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. From the first state), it is possible to control to a state (second state) vertically protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 541 (B) and 541 (E). is there.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300. The first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 at a position where the second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at the position. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. As shown with reference to FIGS. 530 (A) to 530 (E), in the frame movable body having the structure according to the present embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is also provided. May be configured to protrude from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in the first state.

  FIGS. 542 (A) to 542 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 541 (A) to 541 (E). FIGS. 542 (A) and 542 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 542 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 542 (D) and 542 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 542 (A), 542 (C), and 542 (D) show inside the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, A state (first state) in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. FIGS. 542 (B) and 542 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 from the right ear inner frame movable member 7300, the right ear outer frame movable member 7350, the left ear inner frame movable member 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450. The state which projected upward (2nd state) is shown.

  In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 542 (A), FIG. 542 (C), and FIG. 542 (D), respectively, from the state (first state) of being stored at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. As shown in FIG. 542 (E), the state can be controlled so as to project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 or downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). is there.

  Note that on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a door frame is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is provided. On the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a door frame is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A top unit lower left ear opening 7030 is provided.

  The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery is performed. Is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of the game store. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, since the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, the player feels annoyance and embarrassment that the special lottery result is lost. Can be reduced. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F), the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body decoratively represent the animal's ear. In the embodiment described with reference to (A) to FIG. 542 (E), the ear of the animal is represented by the outer frame movable body projecting upward, and the eye of the animal is represented by the inner frame movable body. I have.

  FIGS. 543 (A) to 543 (E) and 544 (A) to 544 (E) show FIGS. 541 (A) to 541 (E) and FIGS. 542 (A) to 542 (E). 13 shows a modified example of the frame movable body described above. 543 (A), 543 (B), 544 (A), and 544 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 543 (C) and 544 (C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 543 (D), 543 (E), 544 (D), and 544 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In the present embodiment, each frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take

  FIGS. 543 (A), 543 (C), and 543 (D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body project downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. I have. FIGS. 543 (B) and 543 (E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), and the outer frame movable body has the door frame top unit 570. 2 shows a state (a first state) that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the liquid crystal display. FIGS. 544 (A), 544 (C), and 544 (D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body projects downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and an outer frame movable body. Indicates a state (second state) in which the upper part protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. FIGS. 544 (B) and 544 (E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body project upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

  In this embodiment, the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are driven by a peripheral control board 1510 and are not shown. Each mechanism can be moved to any position from the first state to the second state and stopped.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300. The first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 at a position where the second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at the position.

  Also, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7022 under the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7350 at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300. The door frame top unit lower second right ear opening 7024 corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7032 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The door frame top unit lower second left ear opening 7034 is provided at the position.

  The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from a state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. (Timing t7), the movement is completed at timing t9. FIGS. 543 (B) and 543 (E) show a state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body has been completed. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). . FIGS. 544 (B) and 544 (E) show a state in which the movement of the outer frame movable body has been completed (second state). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of the game store. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, since the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, the player feels annoyance and embarrassment that the special lottery result is lost. Can be reduced.

  Although the example in which the outer frame movable body protrudes upward to enter the second state after the inner frame movable body protrudes upward to the second state has been described, the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the operation in which the outer frame movable body protrudes upward at timing t7 starts. Thereafter, in the state where the movement is completed (timing t9), the state shown in FIGS. 544 (A) and 544 (D) is obtained. Further, at timing t14 or timing 18, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start moving upward. It may be configured such that two effect patterns in which the order in which the frame movable bodies operate are reversed are executable. Furthermore, it is good to set the expectation degree of the big hit of the effect pattern in which the outer frame movable body operates first than the effect pattern in which the inner frame movable body operates first, for example, when the outer frame movable body operates first You may be comprised so that it may be a big hit.

  FIGS. 545 (A) to 546 (B) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F). 545 (A) and 545 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 545 (C) and 545 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 546 (A) and 546 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 545 (A), 545 (C) and 546 (A) show the inside of the door frame top unit 570 in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left A state (first state) in which the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. 545 (B), 545 (D), and 546 (B) show the door frame top unit 570 from the right inner frame movable body 7300, right outer outer frame movable body 7350, left inner inner frame movable body 7400, left ear. The state in which the outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (second state) is shown.

  In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is configured to be able to move upward by turning 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right by a drive mechanism that does not.

  The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), after the inner frame movable body is in the second state, the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 545 (A) to 546 (B), the moving order of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from timing t7 to timing t9. After changing the state from the first state to the second state in the above, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t14 or the timing t18. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  With reference to FIGS. 532 to 534, an embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulation image is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 has been described. FIG. 549 shows an embodiment in which this embodiment is modified. In the embodiment described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. And a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

  FIGS. 547 (A) and 547 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 547 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 547 (D) and 547 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 547 (A), 547 (C), and 547 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable member 7300, the right ear outer frame movable member 7350, the left ear inner frame movable member 7400, and the left ear inner frame movable member 7300 in the door frame top unit 570. A state in which the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is stored (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state) is shown. FIGS. 547 (B) and 547 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 from the right inner ear frame movable member 7300, the right outer ear frame movable member 7350, the left inner ear frame movable member 7400, the left ear outer frame movable member. 7450 shows a state in which it protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state).

  As shown in FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000, a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010, and a right side inside the door frame top unit. A light emitting section 7050 and a left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided. Note that the specific structures and functions thereof are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Hereinafter, specific structures and operation modes of these will be described. Note that the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure. Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 will be described as a representative.

  FIGS. 547 (A), 547 (C), and 547 (D) show a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the housed state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in plan view, and the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing downward and the right ear inner frame movable body facing upward. It has two surfaces 7320. The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is formed of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 is formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in which the vicinity of the center is cut out so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a plan view, and the right ear outer side facing downward. It has a frame movable body first surface 7360 and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 is formed of a translucent white synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 is formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

  The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 on the right side (inside) in plan view. Further, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in plan view. The right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 are located on the same axis. In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 are attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are driven by a right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body, which are controlled by a peripheral control board 1510, from a pulse motor (not shown). By being transmitted to the rotating shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate around the left-right direction as an axis. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7490 having the same structure. The power from the pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490, thereby rotating about the left and right directions. It is possible. The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are each independently controlled from a right side by controlling a pulse motor (not shown). It is possible to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at an arbitrary angle, or to stop at an arbitrary angle.

  As shown in FIG. 547 (A) to FIG. 547 (E), the right side inside the door frame top unit illuminating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is provided in the door frame top unit 570. A light emitting section 7050, and a left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures of the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. I do.

  The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are each driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. (A), from the state stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 547 (C) and 547 (D), the state is stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. Is possible. FIG. 547 (B) and FIG. 547 (E) show an example thereof, in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed. From the state, when rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body One surface 7410 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face the front and are stopped. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape imitating an animal ear. By taking the stored state and the state perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the state in which the animal's ear has moved can be expressed decoratively.

  Also, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are connected to a driving mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible for the player to visually recognize the rotating state by driving the player. When rotating in this manner, the right ear inner frame movable member 7300, the right ear outer frame movable member 7350, the left ear inner frame movable member 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 are rotated at a speed of about one rotation per second. It is good to rotate the same direction several times. FIGS. 547 (B) and 547 (E) show the rotating state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It can also be said that it shows. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise multiple times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise multiple times when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 can be visually recognized alternately by the player. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 are alternately visible to the player. Further, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 become alternately visible to the player. Further, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

  The point where the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, in the door frame top unit. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable by the light emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. Although it has been shown that each of the bodies 7450 can be in a predetermined decorative state, a specific example will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 547 (A), 547 (C) and 547 (D), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 have Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 has left ear outer frame movable body first surface When light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in a state where the 7460 faces downward, the light reflected in the door frame top unit 570 causes the door It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 vaguely emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 547 (B) and 547 (E), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer surface of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 The frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 included in the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 included in the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are positioned in front. When light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in the facing state, the light causes the right ear inner frame of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 to be illuminated. Movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body 7350 included in right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 included in left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer Frame movable body 7450 is available Left ear outer frame movable member first surface 7460 is can be viewed by the player a state of being decorated that. In this case, also in this case, part of the light emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from inside. Thus, the entirety of the door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by a player in a state where the light is slightly dimly emitted.

  On the other hand, with the right ear inner frame movable member 7300, the right ear outer frame movable member 7350, the left ear inner frame movable member 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 rotated, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door are moved. When light is emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit, the emitted light causes the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, and the right ear outer frame to move. Body first surface 7360 and right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is alternately illuminated.

  As described above, above the outer frame 2 and the upper surface of the door frame base unit 100, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body Since the 7450 is positioned or rotated in a stopped state, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprise and fun compared to the case where the movable body in the game board is moved. .

  Next, referring to FIG. 548 (A) to FIG. 549 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ( A frame movable body simulation which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in accordance with the specific operation mode of the frame movable body) and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the image, the operation reception mode of the player with respect to the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit), the light emission mode of the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, the light emission mode of the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, and the like. Here is an example of a combined effect.

  FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B) respectively show the operation modes of the frame movable bodies (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside, and the game board side effect display. A display state of a frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable bodies (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside displayed on the device 1600, and provided inside. Operating state of the frame movable body (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body (the right ear inner side) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The display state of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image imitating the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the reception state of the operation unit, and the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 Display state and the frame movable body Is a time chart showing an irradiation manner of.

  FIG. 548 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 548 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 549 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 549 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B), the frame movable body provided on the outside and the frame movable body provided on the inside are rotated from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). ), The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, the timing at which the operation of the operation unit is accepted, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the light irradiation mode of the frame movable body are turned off from the light emission effect state. The timing of the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the second state (rotating state) to another state, the light irradiation mode from the light-off state to the frame movable body to the light emission effect state or the specific light emission effect state May differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific effect examples in each effect pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door is housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, also referred to as a first state or a standby state). Specifically, FIG. 547 (A) and FIG. 547 (C), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer side as shown in FIG. 547 (D). The frame movable body first surface 7460 faces downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) between timing t0 and timing t5, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable The body first surface 7460 starts rotating at the same time at the timing t5, and enters a state where the rotation is continued (hereinafter, also referred to as a second state or a rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is a speed of one rotation per second.

  At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, display of a door frame top unit simulation image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. The frame movable body simulation image is, specifically, an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, a left ear outer side. And an image imitating the frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulation image is an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The displayed image continues to be dynamically displayed in a manner of rotating in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also rotated at the same speed (the speed of one rotation per second) as the actual outer frame movable body. Will be displayed. Accordingly, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotating state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 547 (B) and 547 (E), The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, respectively. A game board side effect display device as a frame movable body simulated image in a mode in which an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 included in the model image or the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 faces the front. 1600.

  After the rotation state (second state) of the outer frame movable body is continued from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable bodies (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400). Start rotating at the same time, and a state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). The rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of an image simulating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, and thus description thereof is omitted. On the other hand, at timing t9, operation reception on the operation unit is enabled, and display of an image instructing operation on the operation unit on the game board effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, also referred to as operation instruction display) is started. You. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!”) May be displayed. You may. Note that the operation validity period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example described below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). At the timing t9, the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit that irradiate light to the frame movable body are turned off from the state in which the light emitting effect is performed.

  FIGS. 548 (A) and 548 (B) show an effect state in which an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after a period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid (timing t9). Is shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light on the frame movable body is The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 548 (A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. When an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body are displayed. 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first The surface 7410 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a state of being stopped vertically with the front surface 7460 facing forward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). At the same time, the specific light emission production in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emission production state State. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 548 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame are displayed. The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively a right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and a left ear inner frame movable body. The two surfaces 7420 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are in a state of being stopped vertically with the front side facing forward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the light-off state to the normal light emission effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is in the normal light emission effect state, the special lottery result is indicated to the player as a loss.

  549 (A) and 549 (B) show that the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit during the operation valid period after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid (timing t9). This shows an effect mode in a case where the operation valid period ends at a timing t18 after a predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating up to that point automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body is stopped. Becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

  FIG. 549 (A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. At the timing (timing t18) at which the operation effective period ends, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, a right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, a left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, This is a state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is vertically stopped with the first surface 7460 facing forward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). At the same time, the specific light emission production in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emission production state State. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 549 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) at which the operation effective period ends, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. In this state, the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is brought to a front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, may be referred to as a fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the light-off state to the normal light emission effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is in the normal light emission effect state, the special lottery result is indicated to the player as a loss.

  As described above, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, each frame movable body is stopped in the third state to indicate that it is a big hit, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, The frame movable body stops in the fourth state, which indicates a loss.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 548 (A) to FIG. 549 (B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation validity period, the changing decorative symbol corresponds to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 548 (A) and FIG. 549 (A), the special lottery results are in a staggered manner (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating a big hit The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548 (B) and 549 (B), the reach loss mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a loss ) Stops the decorative design.

  At a timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have elapsed after the decoration symbol stopped, the frame movable body is movable in the right ear inner frame while maintaining the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. A state in which the body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward (third state) or The state in which the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 face forward ( From the fourth state), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are lowered. State to the state (first state) facingAt the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulation image ends.

  When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable that the state of light irradiation on the frame movable body is changed from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. When the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the change of the next decorative pattern is started.

  As described above, the frame movable body is configured to display the frame movable body simulation image at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (the first state) to the rotating state (the second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, in response to the special lottery result, the frame movable body appears at an unprecedented position, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. Further, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the operation valid period. State (second state), and further, when the player operates the operation unit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body are in a third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big hit or By changing to the fourth state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she has decided the special lottery result.

  FIGS. 550 (A) to 550 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E). FIGS. 550 (A) and 550 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 550 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 550 (D) and 550 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 550 (A), 550 (C), and 550 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state at the standby position (first state) is shown. FIGS. 550 (B) and 550 (E) show a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating ( 2nd state).

  In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), and the right ear inner frame is movable. The body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

  Near the front end of the door frame top unit, a right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. In addition, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable member 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450. The right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit can irradiate light backward. This makes it possible to set the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 located at the rear in a predetermined light emitting state. is there.

  The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7460 be in a state (third state) in which the movable body first surface 7460 faces the front and stops as shown in FIGS. 550 (B) and 550 (E). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the movable body second surface 7470 face the front and stop (fourth state). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  FIGS. 551 (A) to 552 (B) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E). FIGS. 551 (A) and 551 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 551 (C) and 551 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 552 (A) and 552 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 551 (A), 551 (C), and 552 (A) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state at the standby position (first state) is shown. FIGS. 551 (B), 551 (D), and 552 (B) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. This shows a rotating state (second state).

  In this embodiment, the central part of the door frame top unit 570 is shaped like a hollow in the left-right direction, and can be visually recognized in a U-shape when viewed from the right side. At the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left and right direction, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are located above the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left and right direction. Are provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 551 (A), 551 (C), and 552 (A), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 move in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. The frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 face each other.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape obtained by inverting a bottomed cylindrical shape in which a part of a cylindrical side surface is cut, in the vertical direction. As shown in FIGS. 551 (A), 551 (C), and 552 (A), in the standby state (first state), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are in front of each other. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are It is configured to be invisible in front view. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are viewed from obliquely below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame located inside are viewed. The lower part of the movable body 7400 can be visually recognized.

  At the lower part of the door frame top unit 570, a right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. In addition, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable member 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450. The right side light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit can irradiate light forward and obliquely upward. Thereby, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 located diagonally on the front upper side can be set to a predetermined light emitting effect state. It is possible.

  The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B). When the special lottery result is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 551 (B), 551 (D), and 552 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the left ear inner frame It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7410 faces the front and stops (third state). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 should be in a state where they face toward the front and stop (fourth state). . On the other hand, as for the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the movable body second surface 7470 faces the player. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

  FIGS. 553 (A) to 553 (D) and FIGS. 554 (A) to 554 (B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). I have. FIGS. 553 (A) and 553 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 553 (C) and 553 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 554 (A) and 554 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 553 (A), FIG. 553 (C), and FIG. 554 (A) show a state (first state) in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are stored at the standby position. FIG. 553 (B), FIG. 553 (D), and FIG. 554 (B) show a state (second state) in which the plurality of frame movable bodies have moved to the movement positions.

  In the embodiment described below, a door frame top unit face decoration unit 7500 is provided instead of the door frame top unit 570, and a door frame side unit right arm unit 7600, a door frame side unit left arm unit 7650, and a curtain plate bottom unit It has a right foot movable body 7700 and a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750.

  The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating a box composed of two members with a lid, and the right and left sides thereof constitute the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. The door frame base unit 100 is provided so as to overlap the right side surface and the left side surface thereof in a front view. The upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration unit 7500 is always located above the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit face decoration unit 7500 includes a door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 which corresponds to a lid box to be put on a box formed of two members with a lid, and a lid in a box formed of two members with a lid. And a lower part 7520 of the door frame top unit which corresponds to a body box on which the user can put the information.

  The door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 is a lid box shape without a side surface portion on the back side, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so that it can move up and down by a drive mechanism that does not. The right side decoration of the door frame top unit on the front side surface of the door frame top unit 7510 on the front side thereof has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and imitates the eyes of an animal robot. A part 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration part 7514 are provided. The door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 that simulate an animal's ear similarly to the door frame top unit 570. Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The lower part 7520 of the door frame top unit face has a body shape having a recess capable of storing the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the door frame is similar to the door frame top unit 570. 3 is provided in a fixed state. The door frame top unit lower face 7520 includes a door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit lower face lower mouth movable body 7524.

  The door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the lower part 7520 of the door frame top unit near the center in the left-right direction on the front side surface of the lower part 7520 of the door frame top unit. The door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but has a box-like shape with the lower surface opened as if the sliding door of the closet was upside down. The door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body imitating the nose and mouth of an animal robot.

  The door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered by a side portion on the near side of the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510. Therefore, in a state where the front side movable portion of the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is covered (first state), the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 is invisible. In addition, the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 cannot move forward.

  When the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 moves upward to be in the second state, the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 provided so as to be embedded in the lower part 7520 of the door frame top unit face. The front side surface becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

  The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the near side of the bottom surface of the door frame top unit lower face 7520. The door frame top unit lower face lower movable body 7524 has a shape like a cylinder cut into a fan shape, and has a fan shape when viewed from the right side as shown in FIGS. 554 (A) and 554 (B). The sides forming the central angle are provided so as to be located on the right side. The door frame top unit lower face lower movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range around a side forming a fan-shaped central angle as a rotation axis. Further, the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the near side. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 553 (B) and 554 (B), when the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is turned about 35 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right side, The inside is configured to be visible.

  The door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 changes from a state (first state) provided to be embedded in the lower part of the door frame top unit face 7520 to a state moved forward (second state), The state in which the door frame top unit lower face lower movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right side (first state) from the state stored in the lower part of the door frame top unit face 7520 (first state). 2), it is possible to decoratively represent a state in which the animal robot has opened its mouth.

  The door frame side unit right arm part 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm part 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 so as to protrude forward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100, respectively. ing.

  The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 includes a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630.

  The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 has a box shape with a gap inside, and inside the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 can move. It is. The thickness of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 is about several mm, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 that move inside are configured to be visible.

  The door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 is formed of a flexible synthetic resin into a pipe shape. The length of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 is about 50 cm, and by rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) provided in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, It can be rolled up and down. FIGS. 553 (A) and 554 (A) show a state where the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) (first state).

  The door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is formed of two members in the shape of the letter L and a columnar member that imitates a shaft for locking them, as viewed from the side, and simulates a manipulator of a robot. It has a shape. The end of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 is attached to this cylindrical member, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 is wound up by the above-mentioned reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) ( In the first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 is located in the upper part of the door frame side unit right arm case 7610.

  By rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in a direction opposite to the winding direction, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is lowered in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, so that the door frame side unit right arm The lower arm portion 7630 is located at a lower portion in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 by its own weight. FIG. 553 (B) shows a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located in the lower part inside the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610. In the second state, the right upper arm 7620 of the door frame side unit, which was not visible until then, becomes visible.

  The door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, which is bilaterally symmetric. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 is the door frame side unit right arm upper arm. The door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 has the same structure and function as the portion 7620, and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630. For this reason, detailed description of each member constituting the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 is omitted.

  Also, the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 is in a state (first state) in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown), like the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600. By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in the direction opposite to the direction in which the reel is wound, a state in which the reel-shaped drive mechanism is located below (second state) can be obtained. For example, FIG. 553 (B) and FIG. 554 (B) show a state where the door frame side unit left arm / lower arm 7680 is located at the lower part (second state). In the second state, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, which was not visible until then, becomes visible.

  The whole or a part of the outside (the left side in the front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 and the whole or a part of the outside (the right side in the front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case part 7660 are made of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, after being formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, a colored opaque seal or the like may be attached. The entire inside of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 (right side in front view) and the entire inside of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 (left side in front view) may be formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  With this configuration, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 have moved. It becomes difficult for the left and right players to visually recognize the action, and it is possible for only the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 to enjoy the game without knowing that the action has been performed by other players. Also, as described later, when these frame movable bodies are operated for the purpose of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation, even if the special lottery result is lost after the operation of these frame movable bodies, Is less likely to be visually recognized by another player, and the other players are less likely to feel embarrassed.

  The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 on the left side in front view, and a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 on the right side in front view. The plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. 553 (A) and 554 (A), and the plate unit 320 is in the standby position. Each is located below the handle unit 300.

  The curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 includes a curtain plate bottom unit right foot snare portion 7710 and a curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720. The shape of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snare portion 7710 is cylindrical. Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right toe portion 7720 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating the shape of a foot, and has two circular concave portions in a portion corresponding to the sole. A curtain plate bottom unit right toe portion 7720 is attached to a front surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snap portion 7710. For this reason, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snare portion 7710 and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 operate integrally.

  A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided below the outer frame 2, and can move the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake portion 7710 in the front-rear direction. In addition, it is possible to rotate the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snap part 7710 by a predetermined angle around the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snap part 7710 as an axis.

  For example, the shutter plate bottom unit right foot snake portion 7710 is moved a predetermined distance forward from the standby position shown in FIG. 553 (A) and FIG. 554 (A) (first state), and then viewed from the front. It may be configured to rotate 90 degrees clockwise and operate in a stopped state (second state). FIGS. 553 (B) and 554 (B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snare portion 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this manner.

  The curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 has the same structure and function as the left and right symmetry of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. Specifically, the curtain plate bottom unit left foot snare portion 7760 has the same structure and function as the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake portion 7710, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip portion 7770 includes the curtain plate bottom unit right foot It has the same structure and function as the tip portion 7720. For this reason, detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 is omitted.

  By providing the frame movable body below the gaming machine in this way, instead of the player visually recognizing that the frame movable body has operated as in the conventional case, it is attached to a part of the body such as the arm of the player. The contact of the frame movable body can provide the player with an unprecedented perceptual experience in which the player recognizes that the frame movable body has moved.

  With reference to FIG. 553 and FIG. 554, an embodiment has been described in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are provided in the pachinko machine 1 and they operate. Specifically, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit lower face lower nose movable body 7522, the door frame top unit lower face lower face movable body 7524 , Door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate The bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 is a frame movable body from the state (first state) in the standby position shown in FIG. 553 (A), FIG. 553 (C), and FIG. 554 (A), to FIG. 553 (B). ), The state (second state) at the movement position shown in FIG. 553 (D) and FIG. 554 (B). In addition, each frame movable body can take the first state and the second state by controlling the driving means (not shown) provided corresponding to each frame movable body by the peripheral control board 1510. .

  Further, a light-emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 may be provided in each frame movable body so that the normal light-emitting effect state and the specific light-emitting effect state as described above can be taken.

  The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), or the effects obtained by deforming the effect patterns shown in FIGS. It may be configured to operate or emit light by applying to a pattern.

  Note that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided on the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510. After the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 is in the second state located above, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear stored in the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 (first state) The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to protrude upward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of the modifications. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

  Alternatively, after the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is placed in the second state positioned above, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body stored in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state). The 7522 may be configured to protrude forward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of the modifications. More specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is operated in response to an operation to the operation unit or the like. 7522 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, after the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit lower face face lower lip movable body 7524 is configured to change from the first state to the second state. Is also good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of the modifications.

  Alternatively, after the door frame top unit lower face lower movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit lower face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state. Is also good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of the modifications.

  FIGS. 555 (A) to 555 (K) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulation image adaptable to the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). It is a thing. FIG. 555 (A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B).

  FIG. 555 (B) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is completed at timing t6. Thereafter, at timing t7, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is started.

  By configuring such an operation / display pattern to be executable as an effect, the display of the frame movable body simulation image serves as a notice that the frame movable body will operate. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates, and the player who has viewed such a frame movable body simulation image has a frame The operation of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the operation. Thereby, occurrence of a situation where the player misses the operation of the frame movable body can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured with a finger or the like. Also, it can be shown that a player who has placed lightweight luggage or the like on the frame movable body moves them to another position. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the load is dropped and the player is injured, or a load is applied to the driving unit that moves the frame movable body.

  FIG. 555 (C) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the raising operation of the ear frame movable body is completed at timing t9, and thereafter, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t10, and dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed at timing t12. Is completed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the rising position (moving position). Therefore, if the player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, the player is immediately surprised because the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the ascending position is immediately visible to such a player. Can be given to the person. In addition, since the frame movable body simulation image is displayed after moving to the ascending position, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the moved frame movable body. Also, the player can know how the frame movable body has moved.

  FIG. 555 (D) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t6, and then, the rising operation of the frame movable body is started at timing t7, and dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed at timing t8. Is completed, and the lifting operation of the frame movable body is completed at timing t9.

  With such a configuration, the display of the frame movable body simulation image serves as a notice that the frame movable body moves. This allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates. The movement of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured by a finger or the like.

  FIG. 555 (E) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the raising operation of the frame movable body is started at timing t7, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t8, and the raising operation of the frame movable body is completed at timing t9, At timing t10, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is completed.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player can be surprised by the movement of the frame movable body somehow. Further, the player can be notified that the frame movable body has started moving.

  FIG. 555 (F) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulation image is dynamically displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

  FIG. 555 (G) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulation image is dynamically displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

  FIG. 555 (H) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, after the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). Is The frame movable body simulation image is dynamically displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

  FIG. 555 (I) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 (two seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed again from the timing t7 to the timing t9. Done. On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image may be performed from timing t3 to timing t5.

  With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body moves.

  FIG. 555 (J) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed again from timing t9 to timing t11. Done. On the other hand, the raising operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image may be performed at timings t11 to t13.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body has moved.

  FIG. 555 (K) is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, a total of three times from the timing t4 to the timing t5, from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and from the timing t6 to the timing t7, which are timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, are performed in total. The frame movable body simulation image is changed from the display mode in the state simulating the first state to the display mode in the state simulating the second state at twice the speed of the frame movable body. Note that such display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6, from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body moves in a short time. Also, since the frame movable body simulation image is quickly displayed, the eyes become accustomed to see the operation of the actual frame movable body, and the player can fully enjoy the operation mode of the actual frame movable body. Becomes possible. Further, by performing the display a plurality of times, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the operation mode more.

  Each of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 555 (A) to 555 (K) may be configured to be executed corresponding to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the big hit and the appearance frequency thereof differ for each effect pattern. For example, when a predetermined reach effect is generated, one of the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 555 (A) to 555 (K) is selected and executed. Good. The effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 555 (A) has the highest appearance frequency, and the frequency of appearance gradually decreases as the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555 (B) to 555 (K) is obtained. Thus, the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 555 (A) has the lowest degree of expectation with respect to the jackpot, and gradually increases as the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555 (B) to 555 (K) is reached. May be configured such that the effect pattern to be executed is selected based on the jackpot lottery result so that the game result is higher. Also, each of the modifications described below may be similarly configured to be executed with a predetermined degree of expectation and appearance frequency.

  With such a configuration, when an effect pattern for the frame movable body different from the normal appears, the degree of expectation for the jackpot for the player is not greater than the effect pattern for the normal frame movable body. It is possible to make them feel as if.

  555 (A) to 555 (K) may be configured to be combined and executed as an effect. In this case, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be combined so that a plurality of frame movable body simulation images are not displayed at the same time. For example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 555 (K) is executed from timing t4 to timing t7, and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 555 (J) is executed from timing t7 to timing t11. Can be performed.

  FIGS. 556 (A) to 556 (E) show modified examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting portion of the frame movable body adaptable to the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). It is shown. FIG. 556 (A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B).

  FIG. 556 (B) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off at the timing (timing t7) at which the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position to the movement position. FIG. 556 (C) shows that the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off at a timing (timing t5) before the timing (timing t7) at which the movable frame moves from the standby position to the moving position (timing t7). It shows an effect pattern.

  In this way, at a timing before the frame movable body enters the second state, the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is turned off, and the state is maintained until an operation is performed on the operation unit or until the operation valid period ends. By being maintained, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body has moved from the standby position to the movement position. In such a situation, when the player performs an operation on the operation unit, the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the movement position suddenly emits light from the unlit state (special light emission effect state or light emission effect state). State), it is possible to give the player a great surprise.

  FIG. 556 (D) shows an effect pattern in which light emission is suppressed in place of turning off the light emitting portion of the frame movable body at timing t9 at timing t9. The state in which light emission is suppressed may be, for example, such that light is emitted so as to have a longer blinking cycle or light amount is smaller than in the light emission effect state.

  Thus, instead of turning off the light, the same effect as when turning off the light can be obtained by setting the light emission to a suppressed state.

  FIG. 556 (E) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is set to the specific light emission effect state instead of turning off the light emission portion at timing t9. This effect pattern may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit. At timing t9 when the frame movable body enters the second state, an example has been described in which the effect pattern is such that the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is set to the specific light emission effect state. At a timing t5, which is a timing before the body starts operating, the light emitting unit of the frame movable body may be set to the specific light emitting effect state.

  By setting the state of the light emitting unit of the frame movable body to the specific light emitting effect state instead of turning off the light, the player can have a great sense of expectation for the big hit.

  FIGS. 557 (A) to 557 (E) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulation image adaptable to the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). It is a thing. FIG. 557 (A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B).

  FIG. 557 (B) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image starts at timing t7, and thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 at the standby position (first state). Starts rotating and enters a rotating state (second state).

  As described above, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate. Is displayed. Therefore, after the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated twice from the timing t7 to the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 is displayed. Then, the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts rotating. The timing at which the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started may be earlier. For example, if the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t5, a display in which the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate four times is executed. Thereafter, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start to rotate.

  As described above, by displaying the frame movable body simulation image before the frame movable body starts operating, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is a notice that the frame movable body operates. . Also, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates. Then, the player who sees such a frame movable body simulation image can visually recognize the operation of the frame movable body from the start of the operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player misses the operation of the frame movable body. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is repeatedly performed before the frame movable body starts operating, so that the player can reliably recognize how the frame movable body operates. It becomes. In addition, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured by a finger or the like. Also, it can be shown that a player who has placed lightweight luggage or the like on the frame movable body moves them to another position. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the load is dropped and the player is injured, or a load is applied to the driving unit that moves the frame movable body.

  FIG. 557 (C) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, at a timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 at the standby position (the first state) start rotating to be in the rotating state (the second state). At t11, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started.

  In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulation image to be displayed after the frame movable body starts operating, the player notices that the frame movable body has changed to the rotating state (second state). It becomes possible to make it difficult to be performed. Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the movable frame, the rotated frame can be immediately seen by the player, which can give the player a great surprise. It becomes.

  FIG. 557 (D) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t7. The dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed at a high speed (two rotations per second) from timing t7 to timing t9. Thereafter, at a timing t9, the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 at the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter a rotating state (second state).

  As described above, before the frame movable body starts operating, the frame movable body simulation image is configured to be rotated and displayed at a speed (twice the speed) higher than that of the actual frame movable body. It becomes possible to familiarize the user with the operation mode when changes to the rotation state (second state).

  FIG. 557 (E) is a time chart showing an operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and a display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t5. From the timing t5 to the timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed at a low speed (half a rotation per second). Thereafter, at a timing t9, the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 at the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter a rotating state (second state).

  As described above, the frame movable body simulation image is rotated and displayed at a lower speed (half the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts operating, so that the frame movable body can be moved. A player who feels that the operation mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotation state (second state) can be informed of the operation mode of the frame movable body.

  Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 538 to 540 and the modifications of the display modes of the frame movable body simulation images shown in FIGS. 555 (B) to 555 (E) and modifications of those embodiments. May be appropriately applied to the inner frame movable body and may be configured to be executable as an effect pattern.

  Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 547 to 549 and the like, and modifications of those embodiments, regarding the display modes of the frame movable body simulation images shown in FIGS. 557 (B) to 557 (E). May be applied to one of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body, or may be applied to both in the same manner to be executable as an effect pattern.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 539 and 540 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the state is maintained for a certain period of time. Thereafter, the second frame movable body is configured to change from the first state to the second state. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 539 and 540, a predetermined time is also taken when changing the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks a mode in which the state of the frame movable body changes.

  In the effects described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as the timing, the frame movable body simulation image is configured to be dynamically displayed on the gaming board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the actual manner of changing the frame movable body. C), 555 (E), 555 (H), and 557 (C), as described above with reference to FIG. The operation of changing the movable body from the first state to the second state may be started, or the movable body may be changed from the first state to the second state.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player who has seen the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image can easily find the moving frame movable body without noticing that the actual frame movable body is operating. It is possible to do.

  In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 548 and 549, the result of the special lottery is that the operation of the player on the operation unit is performed during the operation valid period. In some cases, the state of the frame movable body may change from the first state to the second state, or the state may be changed from the second state to one of the third state and the fourth state. .

  By adopting such a configuration, the player determines the position of the operation unit and the position of the frame movable body where the state may change, and then operates the player with his / her eyes aligned with the frame movable body. The player can operate the operation unit at a desired timing without looking at the unit. Thus, whether or not the state of the frame movable body changes, and if the state of the frame movable body changes, what state will be changed can be reliably visually recognized.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 548 and 549, an image instructing an operation to the operation unit is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. Although configured, an effect pattern for displaying a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be configured to be executable in addition to the above-described example. For example, the image of the movable frame may be displayed simultaneously as the operation instruction image in a mode included in the image of the operation unit.

  With such a configuration, when the player visually recognizes the special operation instruction image, the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the player can recognize that the frame movable body always moves when the operation unit is operated. This makes it possible to operate the operation unit while keeping the line of sight with the frame movable body, and to enjoy the operation of the frame movable body.

  In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body has a light emitting unit, A light emitting unit that can irradiate light is provided separately from the frame movable body, and after the frame movable body changes state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation valid period starts, and operation to the operation unit It is configured to be in a light emission effect state according to a predetermined light emission mode according to the timing or the end of the operation valid period. However, as described with reference to FIGS. 556 (D) and 556 (E), the operation valid period is set. It is not always necessary to set the light emitting state in the light emitting state, and the light emitting state may be configured to be distinguishable from the normal light emitting state. For example, only the outer frame movable body is turned off, the inner frame movable body is set to a specific light emission effect state, or the right frame movable body is turned off, and the left frame movable object is set to a specific light emission effect state, a big hit. May be configured to be notified that the error occurs. Alternatively, all the frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation valid period, and the inner frame movable body is set to the light emission effect state according to the occurrence of the operation valid period to notify that the operation valid period is occurring, and thereafter, the operation unit is operated. The light emitting effect state of all the frame-side movable bodies may be set to the light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result in response to the operation of the button or the end of the operation effective period.

  As described above, by changing the light emitting state of the frame movable body to a different state according to the change of the state of the frame movable body, it becomes easier to grasp that the frame movable body has operated by the change of the light emission mode. Also, if at least a part of the frame movable body is illuminated, the effect that the player is less likely to be injured when the frame movable body moves than in the case where the frame movable body is turned off. is there

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as that of FIG. 555 (B), the frame movable body simulation image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the actual mode of movement of the frame movable body. ), 555 (D), 555 (F), 555 (G), 555 (I), 555 (K), 557 (B), 557 (D), and 557 (E). As described above with reference to the drawings, the operation of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state is started or at the timing before the timing of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state. Starts dynamic display of movable frame simulation images It may be configured to so that.

  By adopting such a configuration, the frame movable body can be visually recognized in a state in which the operation of the frame movable body is grasped in advance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In particular, such a configuration is effective when the frame movable body operates in a complicated manner as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 539 and 540 or FIGS. 548 and 549.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525 and FIGS. 539 and 540, respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The simulation image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the actual change mode of the frame movable body. However, as described above with reference to FIG. The speed at which the display mode imitating the first state is changed to the display mode imitating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

  As described above, the frame movable body simulation image is changed from the display mode in a state in which the frame movable body simulation image imitates the first state in a time (1 second) shorter than the time (2 seconds) in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to be a display mode imitating the second state, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulation image, so that the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. In that case, it is possible to fully enjoy the movement.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body is configured to make one rotation per second in the second state. As described above with reference to the above, the frame movable body simulation image may be dynamically displayed in a mode of rotating at a faster speed before the frame movable body enters the second state. For example, the frame movable body simulation image may be displayed such that the frame movable body makes one or more rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, and then the frame movable body may be set to the second state.

  In this manner, the dynamic display is performed such that the frame movable body simulation image makes one rotation in a time (0.5 second) shorter than the time (1 second) required for the frame movable body to make one rotation. By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulation image, so that it is possible to fully enjoy the rotating operation of the actual frame movable body in the second state.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525 and FIGS. 539 and 540, respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the actual changing mode of the frame movable body, but with reference to FIGS. 555 (F), 555 (G), and 555 (H). As described above, the speed at which the frame movable body simulation image changes from the display mode in the state simulating the first state to the display mode in the state simulating the second state is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be slower than the changing speed.

  In this manner, the display of the state in which the frame movable body simulation image imitates the first state takes a longer time (4 seconds) than the time (2 seconds) in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring from the aspect to the display aspect of the state imitating the second state, even if the operation of the frame movable body is felt to be too fast for the player, the user can see the frame movable body simulation image This allows the player to recognize the operation mode.

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body is configured to make one rotation per second in the second state. As described above with reference to the above, before the frame movable body enters the second state, the frame movable body simulation image may be dynamically displayed in a mode in which the image is rotated at a slower speed. For example, the frame movable body simulation image may be displayed so as to make one or more rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, and then the frame movable body may be set to the second state.
As described above, the dynamic display is performed in such a manner that the frame movable body simulation image makes one rotation over a time (2 seconds) longer than the time (1 second) required for the frame movable body to make one rotation. By doing so, the player recognizes the mode of operation by looking at the frame movable body simulation image, even if the rotating motion of the actual frame movable body in the second state is too fast for the player. It becomes possible.

  In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525 and FIGS. 539 and 540, respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is the same as the mode in which the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. However, it is configured such that a display dynamically changing from an image showing a state imitating the first state to an image showing a state imitating the second state is performed only once, as shown in FIG. 555 (I). As described with reference to FIGS. 555 (J) and 555 (K), such a display of the frame movable body simulation image may be performed a plurality of times.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body simulation image is displayed at the same timing as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. Is started, and during the period when the actual frame movable body continues in the second state (rotation state), the frame movable body simulation image is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the change mode of the actual frame movable body. It is configured. Therefore, the frame movable body simulation image is repeatedly rotated and displayed in a loop.

  As described above, the mode in which the state of the frame movable body changes is dynamically displayed multiple times as a frame movable body simulation image, and when the frame movable body is in a state of periodically changing, it is adjusted to the state. By dynamically displaying the frame movable body simulation image repeatedly in a manner of periodically changing the frame movable body simulation image, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a player does not overlook that the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state. Becomes possible.

  FIGS. 558 (A) to 559 (B) show modifications of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). In the present embodiment, the change from the state in which the frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) is started at the start of the operation valid period (timing t9). Point, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the precursor display is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 before the operation valid period occurs, and the operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or the operation is performed. The effect pattern is different from the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends without being performed (timing t18). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative design), the effect form is basically common, and therefore, the description of the parts having the common effect form is omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

  FIG. 558 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 558 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 559 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 559 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and no operation is performed on the operation unit by the player during the period in which operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 558 (A) to FIG. 559 (B), a precursor display, which is a display indicating that an operation valid period occurs, is started from timing t7 on the game board effect display device 1600. . As the precursor display, the character "Push?" Is displayed as an image, and is continued until timing t9 when the operation valid period starts. At timing t9, the operation validity period is started, and the character “push !!” is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the operation is not performed and the operation validity period ends (timing t18). Instead, “!!” is displayed as the post-operation display. Display characters as images. The display after the operation is terminated after continuing for 2 seconds (timing t16 or timing t20).

  On the other hand, at the timing t9, the frame movable body is turned off and starts moving from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (the first state), and at the timing t11, the state where the movement is completed (the second state). Become.

  As described above, before or during the movement of the frame movable body, the player performs a display (a precursor display or an operation instruction display) that distracts the consciousness from the frame movable body. Is performed, the frame movable body changes from the light-off state to the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state, whereby the line of sight of the player is guided to the frame movable body. Then, since the player feels as if the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state sometime, it is possible to give a great surprise to the player. Further, even when it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the player is notified that the frame movable body will be in the second state by the precursor display or operation instruction display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an irritated feeling is felt. In addition, since the frame movable body can be operated slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of injuries to the player who has carelessly touched the frame movable body.

  FIGS. 560 (A) to 561 (B) show modified examples of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 558 (A) to 559 (B). In the present embodiment, the state in which the frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is synchronized with the timing (t14) at which an operation is performed on the operation unit or the timing (timing t9) at which the operation valid period ends. FIG. 558 (A) to FIG. 558 (A) show that the movement to the state where the movement is completed (the second state) is started, and that the frame movable body changes to the second state only when the special lottery result is a big hit. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative design), the effect form is basically common, and therefore, the description of the parts having the common effect form is omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

  FIG. 560 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 560 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 561 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 561 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 560 (A) and 560 (B), an operation valid period occurs, and the player performs an operation on the operation unit in a state where the operation instruction is displayed (timing t14). When the special lottery result is a big hit, the moving from the state in which the frame movable body is at the standby position (the first state) to the state where the movement is completed (the second state) is performed, and the post-operation display is performed ( From timing t14 to timing t16), when the special lottery result is a loss, an effect pattern in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state where the frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is shown. I have.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIG. 561 (A) and FIG. 561 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t18) at which the operation effective period ends, the state where the frame movable body is at the standby position The movement from the (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) is performed, and the display after the operation is performed (timing t18 to timing t20). If the special lottery result is a loss, the frame movable body Shows an effect pattern in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state where the is at the standby position (first state).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 560 (A) and 561 (A), at the timing t22, the state where the movement of the frame movable body is completed (the second state) is changed to the state at the standby position (the first state). The movement is started, and the movement to the standby position is completed at timing t24.

  As described above, even after the player performs an operation on the operation unit, the post-operation display is performed instead of the operation instruction display, so that the game can be performed from the frame movable body that changes the state from the first state to the second state. It is possible to divert the consciousness of the person. Then, by ending the display after the operation at the timing when the change of the frame movable body to the second state is completed, the player finally notices that the frame movable body has been in the second state, and the player has a large effect. It is possible to give a surprise. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the player is frustrated that the frame movable body will be in the second state by the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress occurrence of situations such as feeling emotions. In addition, since the frame movable body can be operated slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of injuries to the player who has carelessly touched the frame movable body.

  The timing of changing the frame movable body from the light-off state to the specific light emission effecting state is configured to be performed at a timing (timing t16) at which the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. You may. With such a configuration, the player is less likely to notice a change in the state of the frame movable body.

  FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) show modifications of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). In the present embodiment, in response to the start of the operation valid period (timing t7), the state in which the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is changed to the state in which the movement is completed (second state). The point at which the operation starts, the point at which the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the point at which the precursor is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 before the operation validity period occurs, and the operation at the operation unit (timing t11) or the operation Is different from the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends (timing t16) without performing the operation. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative design), the effect form is basically common, and therefore, the description of the parts having the common effect form is omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

  FIG. 562 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 562 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 563 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during the period when the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 563 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit during a period in which operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B), a precursor display, which is a display indicating that an operation validity period is to occur, is started from timing t5 on the game board effect display device 1600. . As the precursor display, the character "Push?" Is displayed as an image, and is continued until timing t7 when the operation valid period starts. At the timing t7, the operation valid period is started, and the character “push !!” is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation is not performed and the operation validity period ends (timing t16). Display characters as images. The display after the operation is terminated after continuing for 2 seconds (timing t13 or timing t18).

  On the other hand, at timing t7, the inner frame movable body is turned off and starts moving from a state in which the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state). At timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). It becomes.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIG. 562 (A) and FIG. 562 (B), an operation valid period occurs, and the player performs an operation on the operation unit in a state where the operation instruction is displayed (timing t11). When the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body is moved from the state in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position (the first state) to the state where the movement is completed (the second state), and the post-operation display is performed. (Timing t11 to timing t13), when the special lottery result is a loss, an effect pattern in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is shown. Have been.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 563 (A) and 563 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) at which the operation effective period ends, the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. Move from the state (the first state) to the state where the movement is completed (the second state), display after the operation is performed (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is lost, the frame is moved. An effect pattern in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state in which the body is at the standby position (first state) is shown.

  Thereafter, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) and 563 (A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies is formed. Operation ends.

  As described above, before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body, the player performs a display (a precursor display or an operation instruction display) that distracts the consciousness from the frame movable body, thereby increasing the player's consciousness. It concentrates on the game board side effect display device 1600. Also, during the movement of the outer frame movable body after the player performs an operation on the operation unit, the post-operation display is performed instead of the operation instruction display that has been performed so far, so that the player's consciousness is It will continue to be directed to the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is felt by the player that both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state sometime, so that the player is greatly surprised. It is possible to give. Further, even when it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame is movable by the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player feels frustrated when the body or the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In addition, since the frame movable body can be operated slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of injuries to the player who has carelessly touched the frame movable body.

  In addition, about the timing which changes a frame movable body from an extinguishing state to a specific light emission production state, it is performed at the timing (timing t13 or timing t18) when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player is less likely to notice a change in the state of the frame movable body.

  FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) show modified examples of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). In the present embodiment, when the operation of the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or at the end of the operation valid period (timing t16), the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state). Starting the change to the state in which the movement is completed (the second state), thereafter, the point at which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the point that the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, and the operation validity period The precursor display is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 before the occurrence, and the post-operation display is performed when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or when the operation is not performed and the operation valid period ends (timing t16). Is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative design), the effect form is basically common, and therefore, the description of the parts having the common effect form is omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

  FIG. 564 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 564 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period in which the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception on the operation unit is valid. I have. FIG. 565 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when a special lottery result is a big hit and an operation on the operation unit is not performed by the player during a period in which operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 565 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit during a period in which operation reception on the operation unit is valid. ing.

  In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B), a precursor display, which is a display indicating that an operation effective period is to occur, is started from timing t5 on the game board effect display device 1600. . As the precursor display, the character "Push?" Is displayed as an image, and is continued until timing t7 when the operation valid period starts. At the timing t7, the operation valid period is started, and the character “push !!” is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation is not performed and the operation validity period ends (timing t16). Display characters as images. The display after the operation is terminated after continuing for 2 seconds (timing t13 or timing t18).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) and 564 (B), an operation valid period occurs, and the player performs an operation on the operation unit in a state where the operation instruction is displayed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the state is changed from the state where the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) to the state where the movement is completed (second state) (timing t11 to timing t13). When the state where the outer frame movable body is at the standby position (the first state) is changed to the state where the movement is completed (the second state) (timing t15 to timing t17) and the special lottery result is lost, The effect pattern which does not change from the state where the outer frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is shown.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 565 (A) and 565 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) at which the operation effective period ends, the inner frame movable body is at the standby position. After changing from the state (the first state) to the state where the movement is completed (the second state) (timing t16 to timing t18), the movement is completed from the state where the outer frame movable body is at the standby position (the first state). The state changes to the state (second state) (timing t20 to timing t22), and when the special lottery result is a loss, an effect pattern that does not change from the state in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is changed. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) and 565 (A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) and 565 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies is formed. Operation ends.

  As described above, when the player performs an operation on the operation unit, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and thereafter, the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing to the state, the mode in which the frame movable body changes the state is slowly observed by the player, and the degree of excitement gradually increases with time from the player.

  The effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) are executed according to the game state. You may comprise.

  For example, in a normal gaming state (during non-probability fluctuation, during non-time saving, during non-electric support, etc.), the average fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is relatively long, and FIG. 564 (A) to FIG. 565 (B). The effect pattern described with reference to the above may be executed. In this case, the effect is performed in a state in which a big hit hardly occurs, so that the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body.

  On the other hand, this is a state that can occur after a big hit has occurred once, and the average fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is relatively short compared to the normal game state, and the game state (probability fluctuation In this case, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) may be executed. In this case, the time from when the operation unit is operated to when the frame movable body enters the second state is short, and it is possible to shift to the big hit gaming state with a good tempo.

In the normal game state, only the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) can be executed, and in the state advantageous to the player, FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) ) May be executable only.
Alternatively, in the normal gaming state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is more effective than the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B). When the execution ratio is high and the player is in an advantageous state, the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) are more effective than the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to increase the execution ratio of the effect pattern described with reference to.

  Further, the timing for executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage, not immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. Is also good. For example, before the decorative symbol forms the reach state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is executed without stopping the decorative symbol, and the inner frame movable body and the outer frame are controlled. When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative pattern may be configured to form a reach state. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the mode in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time gradually gives the player a sense of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit. It is possible to increase. It is desirable that the timing at which the decorative symbol forms the reach state is performed when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

  Also, after the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is executed as an effect of whether or not the reach state is formed, immediately before the decorative symbol stops. At the timing, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) or the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) may be executed. Good.

  As described above, after the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is executed as an effect of whether or not the reach state is formed, at the timing immediately before the decorative symbol stops. When configured to execute the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B), As a modification of FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) as an effect pattern as to whether or not the reach state is formed, the frame movable body is simply an effect without receiving an operation on the operation unit by the player. An effect pattern that operates may be configured to be executed. In this case, the operation invalid period is continued as the reception state of the operation unit, and the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display are naturally not performed. By executing the effect pattern of such a modified mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels troublesome to operate the operation unit in a state where the expectation of the big hit is not so high.

  In the effect patterns described with reference to FIG. 562 (A) to FIG. 563 (B), an example has been shown in which the character “push?” Is displayed as an image as a precursor display, but an operation instruction display is performed on this image. It may be displayed to be moved to a position. Further, it is preferable to move the frame movable body away from a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed at the center of the game board effect display device 1600, the sign is displayed from the position directly above or diagonally above the game board effect display device 1600 toward the center as a precursor display. It is preferable that the characters "push?" Be displayed in a moving manner and stopped at the center. Further, as the post-operation display, the character “!!” may be configured to move from the center of the game board effect display 1600 to a position directly below or diagonally below the game board effect display 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to further divert the player's consciousness from the upper frame movable body. In addition, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side effect display device 1600 as described later, the sign display and the post-operation display may be configured to be moved upward in a reverse manner.

  In the effect patterns described with reference to FIG. 564 (A) to FIG. 565 (B), an example is shown in which the character “Push?” Is displayed as an image as a precursor display, but an operation instruction is displayed on this image. It may be displayed to be moved to a position. Further, it is preferable to move the frame movable body so as to approach a position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board effect display device 1600, the character “Push?” Is moved and displayed from the lower portion of the game board effect display device 1600 to the center portion as a precursor display. It is good to constitute so that. Further, as the post-operation display, the character “!!” may be configured to move from the center of the game board effect display device 1600 to the upper portion of the game board effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to the frame movable body, and the player can visually recognize the entire frame movable body through a series of changes.

  In addition, as the operation instruction display, the character "!! Push !!" may be displayed as a special operation instruction display that is generated only when the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, in place of the character "!!!" as the display after the operation, the character "Push !!" as the operation instruction display and the character "!! Push !!" as the special operation instruction display are continuously displayed. You may. In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display “!! Push !!!!”, the characters “!? Push ?!” are displayed as a special precursor display, and “!!!!! "!" May be displayed. In this way, the special characters that are displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit are displayed continuously before the operation validity period and after the operation of the operation unit, thereby giving a great satisfaction to the player. It becomes possible.

  FIGS. 566 (A) to 566 (D), FIGS. 567 (A) to 567 (C), and FIGS. 568 (A) to 568 (C) refer to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). It is a modification of the effect pattern described above. In these modified examples, only one of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a first frame movable body) and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second frame movable body) is provided. May be moved, the timing of moving both the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may be different, and the first frame movable body is modeled as the first frame movable body. Frame movable body simulation image is displayed, but the frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body is not basically displayed for the second frame movable body, and the frame movable body is independent of the operation on the operation unit. And that the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing immediately before the decorative symbol stops.

  The effect patterns shown in FIG. 566 (A) to FIG. 566 (D), FIG. 567 (A) to FIG. 567 (C), and FIG. 568 (A) to FIG. This is a pattern, and shows a state in which a predetermined number of seconds has elapsed since the start of the change of the decorative symbol (for example, it is assumed that 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change of the decorative symbol at timing t0).

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A), the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and maintains the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). After that (from timing t7 to timing t15), the state changes from the second state to the first state (from timing t15 to timing t17). Further, in accordance with the operation of the first frame movable body, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. Then, the state changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Further, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

  On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing From t7 to timing t15), the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Note that when the second frame movable body operates, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Further, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

  Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A), a frame movable body simulation imitating the first frame movable body is performed. Since the image is displayed, the player can easily notice that the first frame movable body has operated. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed even when the second frame movable body is operated. It is difficult for the player to notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

  When the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern is a big hit is determined by the fact that the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate. It is preferable that the effect pattern is selected so as to be higher than the case where no effect is made. For example, the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates and the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates may be set to 10%. In the case of such a configuration, the frame movable body simulation image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed, and the first frame movable body is in an operating state with the eyes turned on the first frame movable body. The player who has noticed has a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  On the other hand, in order to notice the operation of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look far away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which the decorative symbol is displayed, and look at the second frame movable body. Therefore, when the second frame movable body is frequently checked whether it is operating or when the face is accidentally turned in the direction in which the second frame movable body is provided, the second frame movable body operates. You will notice that In this case, the player feels that he / she was able to know that the expectation for the jackpot was high with his / her own power, and as a part of the effect such that a frame movable body simulation image imitating the first frame movable body was displayed. A greater sense of accomplishment is felt as compared to the case where one frame movable body is visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, the player's interest in the frame movable body can be further increased, and the player's interest, which has conventionally been within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, is directed more outward. It becomes possible to spread.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIG. 566 (A) and FIG. 566 (B), an example is shown in which the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate is the same 10%. ), The degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566A may be set higher than the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. . For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. In the case of such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

  The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B). In this effect pattern, the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state (timing t7 to timing t21) is 14 seconds, and in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), the second frame movable body is in the second state. It is longer than 8 seconds, which is the state time (timing t7 to timing t15). By making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time when the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player can move the second frame movable body to the second state. Being in two states makes it easier to notice.

  The expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C) may be higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B) becomes 15% and the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C) becomes 25%. . In such a configuration, the player feels a greater sense of expectation as to how long the second state is maintained from the moment when he or she notices that the second frame movable body is operating. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and there is a case where it is not known when the second state has been in the second state. The more they continue, the greater the expectations of the player.

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C), as the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state is longer, the special lottery result is a big hit. Has been described above, but three or more effect patterns having different times during the second state may be provided. For example, an effect pattern that maintains the second state from the timing t7 to the timing t27 may be executable, and the degree of expectation of this effect pattern may be 30%.

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C), as the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state is longer, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is increased. Although it is configured to be higher, it is configured not to indicate the duration of the second frame movable body being in the second state but to indicate the degree of expectation by the number of times the second frame movable body is in the second state. Is also good. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (D) shows an example thereof. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body has operated twice from the first state to the second state, but an effect pattern in which the second frame movable body does not perform the second operation. Alternatively, an effect pattern in which the third operation is performed next to the second operation may be configured to be executable. Also in this case, it is preferable that the expectation is increased as the number of operations increases. For example, the expectation when the second frame movable body operates only once is 15%, the expectation when the second frame movable body operates twice is 25%, and the second frame movable body is three times. It is preferable that the degree of expectation in the case of operation is 35%. As described above, by increasing the number of times the second frame movable body is operated, the expectation is increased, so that the player who has noticed that the second frame movable body is operating at an early timing can perform the second operation. The user will visually recognize the second frame movable body while having a great expectation about how many times the two frame movable body operates.

  The effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A). In this effect pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulation image imitating the first frame movable body are the same as the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) (until timing t20). There is no difference in the production style). On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t21, and becomes the second state from the timing t23 to the timing t33. It is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A), when moving the second frame movable body, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

  In the gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A), when one of the effect patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the change of the decorative symbol After the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state, the second frame movable body switches to the first state at a timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed. In the case where the second state is maintained and is not in the second state (when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) is selected), and in the case where the second frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state (FIG. 567 (A)). (When the indicated effect pattern is selected).

  With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight once faces the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, Since the two-frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player who has little gaming experience recognize that the second-frame movable body may operate.

  The expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) may be higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A). For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) is 25% and the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) is 10%. . With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

  The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 567 (B) and 567 (C) are effect patterns obtained by modifying the effect patterns shown in FIG. 566 (A). This effect pattern is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566A in that the operation of the first frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are performed a plurality of times.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 567 (B) and 567 (C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t2, and the first frame movable body moves from the timing t4 to the timing t6. After the state returns to the first state at the timing t8, the change from the first state to the second state is started again at the timing t11, and the second state is reached from the timing t13 to the timing t15. The state returns to state 1. Also, a dynamic display of a frame movable body simulation image imitating the first frame movable body is performed in synchronization with the operation of the first frame movable body.

  Thereafter, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t21, and enters the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. The state returns to the first state at t35. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B), the operation of the second frame movable body is not performed.

  In a gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C), when one of the effect patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the change of the decorative symbol. After the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (timing t17), the second frame moves at a timing (timing t21) after a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed. There may be a case where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and a case where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not change to the second state.

  With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight is continuously directed to the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player with little experience of the game recognize that the second frame movable body may operate.

  The expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C) may be higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected such that the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B) is 25% and the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C) is 35%. . With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

  The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568 (A) to 568 (C) are effect patterns obtained by modifying the effect patterns shown in FIG. 566 (A). This effect pattern is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) in that the second frame movable body may operate at a timing before the operation of the first frame movable body.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568 (A) to 568 (C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed are the same. . Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t21 to timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (from timing t23 to timing t31). ), The state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). Further, in accordance with the operation of the first frame movable body, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. Then, the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

  On the other hand, in each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568 (A) to 568 (C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different as described below.

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A), the second frame movable body keeps the first state in the period from t0 to t39, and does not enter the second state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, and enters the second state from timing t7 to timing t15, and at timing t17. The state returns to the first state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, and enters the second state from timing t7 to timing t33, and at timing t35 The state returns to the first state. Note that, in any of the effect patterns, the display of the frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is not performed.

  The expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C) is made higher than the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B), and the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. ) May be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. For example, the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A) is 10%, the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B) is 20%, and the expectation degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C) is 30%. It is preferable that the effect pattern is selected so as to be%.

  Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B), when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B) is executed, the player may miss the operation of the second frame movable body. is there. The player who has visually recognized the operation of the second frame movable body can recognize that the degree of expectation is 20% by subsequently operating the first frame movable body. On the other hand, for a player who has not noticed that the second frame movable body has operated, even if the first frame movable body operates, it is difficult to accurately understand the degree of expectation.

  Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), after the first frame movable body moves, the second frame The movable body is kept at the moving position (second state). For this reason, the player who noticed that the first frame movable body was in the second state by looking at the frame movable body simulation image imitating the first frame movable body confirmed the state of the second frame movable body. If the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is not so high. On the other hand, when the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

  Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), when the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating and is in the second state, the second The player is interested in whether the first frame movable body moves while the frame movable body is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body operates to enter the second state, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is in the first state before the first frame movable body is in the first state, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation is relatively low. It becomes.

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), after the first frame movable body is in the first state, the second frame movable body is in the first state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to enjoy a state that the degree of expectation is high for the player for a long time.

  Although the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 have been described as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern as a first frame movable body and a second frame movable body, respectively.

  Although the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 have been described as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, the embodiments are described in FIGS. 538 and 547. One or both of the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 as the first frame movable body, and one of the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 Alternatively, both may be the second frame movable bodies. Then, a state in which one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are in the second state is referred to as a second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body is provided. The state in which one or both of the 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the second state may be configured as the second state of the second frame movable body to execute the above-described effect pattern. .

  When the above-described effect pattern is executed in the embodiment shown in FIG. 538 or the like or FIG. 547 or the like, one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is moved from the first state to the second state. After that, setting the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the first state to the second state is referred to as changing the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state. It may be adopted as an operation to perform. After the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the second state to the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 Changing one of them from the second state to the first state may be adopted as an operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

  Similarly, when the above-described effect pattern is executed in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 538 or the like, or the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 547 or the like, one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state. After the second state, the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state to the second state by changing the second frame movable body from the first state to the second state. You may employ | adopt as operation | movement which makes two states. After the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the second state to the first state, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved out of the second state. Changing one of the two from the second state to the first state may be adopted as an operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

  In this manner, the change in the state due to the continuous operation by the plurality of frame movable bodies may be combined into a change in the state of one frame movable body.

  The right ear inner frame movable member 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable member 7350 are changed to a first frame movable member, and the left ear inner frame movable member 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 are set to a second frame movable member. Although an example in which the state is changed is shown, only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is in a standby state. You may comprise so that it may remain. Alternatively, only one of the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is configured to remain in the standby state. You may.

  For example, of the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, only the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 is used as the first frame movable body, and the state is changed. The outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change the state as a second frame movable body.

  In this case, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body have different areas visually recognized in front view and side view. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the area that can be visually recognized is relatively small, and the second frame movable body is the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the area to be visually recognized becomes relatively large.

  With such a configuration, when the state of the relatively small first frame movable body changes, a frame movable body simulation image corresponding to the change in the state of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where a player overlooks a change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the relatively large second frame movable body changes, the state of the second frame movable body is changed by not displaying the frame movable body simulation image corresponding to the second frame movable body. When the player notices that the game is being performed, it is possible to give a greater surprise to the player.

  The structure of the plurality of frame movable bodies described with reference to FIGS. 553 and 554 may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern.

  For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 may be a first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 may be a second frame movable body. Further, the state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are at the standby positions shown in FIGS. 553 (A), 553 (C), and 554 (A) is referred to as a first state. 553 (B), 553 (D), and 554 (B) as the second state, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed.

  Alternatively, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 are the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 are the second frame. It may be a movable body. Further, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 are shown in FIGS. 553 (A) and 553 ( C), the state at the standby position shown in FIG. 554 (A) is a first state, and the state at the movement position shown in FIGS. 553 (B), 553 (D), and 554 (B) is a second state. , The above-described effect patterns may be executed.

  For example, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) is executed, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 are connected to the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 and the door frame. After changing from the state at the standby position (the first state) to the state at the moving position (the second state) with the display of the frame movable body simulation image imitating the side unit right arm and lower arm 7630, the state is changed to the standby position. The state changes to a certain state (first state), and then the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 are connected to the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm. Without the display of the frame movable body simulation image imitating 7680, the state changes from the state at the standby position (first state) to the state at the moving position (second state), and then the standby position So that the change to a certain state (first state).

  Alternatively, one or both of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face decoration unit 7500 is movable on the face of the door frame top unit. At least one of the body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit lower face lower nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit lower face lower face movable body 7524 is a second frame movable body. It may be. Furthermore, a curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750, a door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, a right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a door frame top unit lower face 553 (A), 553 (C), and 554 (A) are set to the first state, and the nose movable body 7522 and the door frame top unit lower face lower mouth movable body 7524 are in the first state. B), the state at the movement position shown in FIGS. 553 (D) and 554 (B) may be set as the second state, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed.

  For example, the effect pattern described above may be executed by using the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 as the first frame movable body and the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 as the second frame movable body. In this case, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed for the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 that is larger than the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. With such a configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing the state, the player is more surprised. Can be given.

  In addition to the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also second frame movable bodies, and the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 is housed below. After the upward movement from the closed position is completed, the movement from the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510 to the upward movement is completed. The state performed may be a second state of the second frame movable body.

  As described above, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are provided at a position opposed to each other with the game area 5a and the game board side effect display device 1600 interposed therebetween, so that the player Is configured such that it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the other frame movable body while viewing one frame movable body. In particular, when an effect pattern as shown in FIG. 567 (A) is executed, the consciousness of the player is concentrated on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body located at a position farther from the viewing angle becomes visible. It will not enter. Then, it is possible to give a great surprise to the player who has noticed the state after the operation of the second frame movable body that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state.

  When the second frame movable body is operated, an effect pattern that does not display the frame movable body simulated image that simulates the second frame movable body has been shown. However, the frame movable body that simulates the second frame movable body for a short time. You may comprise so that a simulation image may be displayed. In this case, a frame movable body simulation image imitating the second frame movable body is displayed for a short period (for example, one second) in the second half of the predetermined period in which the second frame movable body is in the second state. May be displayed. For example, it may be configured to display a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body from timing t30 to timing t31 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

  Alternatively, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t33 to timing t34 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A).

  In the case of such a configuration, the player visually recognizes the state in which the second frame movable body is changing the state from the second state to the first state, and the player can see that the second frame movable body is in the first state. You will feel regret that you could not enjoy the second state. Thereby, in the subsequent games, it is possible to increase the awareness of whether or not the second frame movable body is operating at any time.

  Although the effect pattern in which the frame movable body operates is shown with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), when the frame movable body is moved in this manner, the player may be in an unexpected position. The position of the frame movable body after the movement may cause the player to bring his or her hand or head into intense contact with the frame movable body, thereby injuring the player or damaging the frame movable body. On the other hand, in a gaming machine capable of operating the frame movable body, in addition to the operation of the frame movable body, various effects are performed on the gaming board 5 side, and the effect is executed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk that it will. The embodiment described below aims at solving such a problem. 569 and 570, FIGS. 571 and 572, FIGS. 573 and 574, FIGS. 575 and 576 respectively show FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, FIG. 539 and FIGS. 540, 548 and 549, respectively. It shows a modification of the effect pattern described with reference to each.

  In each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 569 and 570, FIGS. 571 and 572, FIGS. 573 and 574, and FIGS. 575 and 576, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is reduced from the normal state at a predetermined timing. It is configured to be in the suppressed state. The fluctuation effect sound is a sound in which a predetermined music is reproduced in accordance with the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, and is recognized by the player as background music. For example, a music composed of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (for example, the fluctuation result of the decorative pattern is non-reach loss, and the fluctuation time is 10 minutes on average) Is performed several times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve interest in the game. A plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the playback of a different song may be started at the timing when the playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with a change in the game state, the music being played back may be faded out during playback, and another music different from the music played back up until then may be played back. In the present embodiment, the state in which the effect is excessive is suppressed by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing at which the frame movable body operates.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the timing at which the frame movable body operates, it is configured such that a special sound that evokes the player that the frame movable body operates or operates is reproduced for a short time. . As a special sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as “ping-pong”) is played in one second, instead of a sound that is recognized as a series of music pieces played for a long time, such as a fluctuating sound effect. For example, it is preferable to reproduce a song whose reproduction is completed in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds), or to reproduce a sound (for example, a sound such as "sounding") for a few seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sound constituting the special sounding sound does not include a musical instrument sound used as a part of the fluctuation effect sound. The special sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the fluctuating effect sound. For example, even in a normal state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed, or in a suppressed state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed, the special sounding sound is output at a predetermined volume. Further, the volume of the special sound is preferably higher than the volume of the fluctuating sound in the suppressed state. In the effect pattern described later, the state in which the special sound is output may be maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, such a sound effect or a music piece whose reproduction is completed in a short period of time may be repeatedly reproduced to maintain a state in which a special sound is output.

  In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the operation of the frame movable body, and by generating a special sound, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the frame movable body from being damaged by the player coming into contact with the movable frame body.

  In the effect patterns shown in FIG. 569 (A) to FIG. 570 (B), the variable effect is generated at the timing (timing t7) at which the movement of the frame movable body from the state at the standby position (first state) to the movement position is started. The sound state is set to the suppressed state, and the special sounding sound is output. Further, the output of the special sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Also, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIG. 571 (A) to FIG. 572 (B), the timing (timing t9) at which the frame movable body changes from the state where the frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) to the state where rotation starts (second state). ), The state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the special sounding sound is output. Further, the output of the special sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Also, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) to 574 (B), the fluctuation occurs at the timing (timing t7) at which the inner frame movable body starts moving from the state where the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) to the moving position. The state of the production sound is set to the suppressed state, and the special sound is output. Further, the output of the special sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Also, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

  In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 575 (A) and 576 (B), the timing (timing) at which the inner frame movable body changes from the state in which the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) to the state in which rotation starts (second state). At t5), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the special sounding sound is output. Further, the output of the special sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Also, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is configured to end at a timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at a timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

  In this way, at the timing when the frame movable body starts operating, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state, and the special sound is output from the non-output state to the output state, so that the effect state becomes excessive. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, as shown with reference to FIGS. 573 (A) to 574 (B), when a plurality of frame movable bodies can operate in order, the second movable frame movable body starts operating at the timing. The output state of the fluctuation effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect sound required for the effect from being excessively stopped.

  The timing for returning the output state of the fluctuation sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing for turning off the output state of the special sounding sound are when the player performs an operation on the operation unit or the operation valid period ends. Timing. This is because the predetermined time has passed since the movement of the frame movable body, so it is less meaningful to suppress the fluctuating effect sound, and the frame movable body simulation image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the frame is displayed. This is because the player notices that the movable body has operated.

  On the other hand, the timing of returning the output state of the fluctuation effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state or the timing of changing the output state of the special sounding sound from the output state to the non-output state may be the time when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the frame movable body from being damaged by the player coming into contact with the movable frame body. In the case of an effect pattern in which a plurality of frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the frame movable body in the first state returns to the first state at the latest. The state may be returned to the normal state and the output state of the special sound may be changed from the output state to the non-output state.

  Alternatively, when the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is returned from the suppressed state to the normal state at the timing when an operation is performed on the operation unit or when the operation effective period ends, the timing at which the special sounding sound is switched from the output state to the non-output state. May be set when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the frame movable body from being damaged by the player coming into contact with the movable frame body.

  Alternatively, the special sounding sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state at the timing when the operation is performed on the operation unit or at the timing when the operation effective period ends, and the timing for returning the output state of the fluctuation effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state is set. The frame movable body may be returned to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the frame movable body from being damaged by the player coming into contact with the movable frame body.

  When there are a plurality of frame movable bodies and there are a plurality of timings at which the frame movable bodies start to operate, as in the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574 and FIGS. May be configured to output different special sounding sounds in response to each of the above.

  In the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). In the above example, the normal state is changed from the normal state, and the special sound is not output. However, the suppression state of the fluctuation sound and the special sound after the operation of the operation unit or the end of the operation validity period. You may comprise so that a sound output state may be continued.

  For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573 (A), the timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position, the timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the movement position, or the outer frame movable body is moved. It may be configured such that the fluctuation effect sound suppression state and the special sounding output state are continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. .

  In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 574 (A), the outer frame movable body moves to the movement position at timing t19, the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the movement position t20, or the outer frame movable body moves. It may be configured such that the fluctuation effect sound suppression state and the special sounding output state are continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. .

  On the other hand, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (B) and 574 (B), the effect patterns are not deformed. In the effect patterns shown in FIG. 573 (B), at the timing t14, the effect shown in FIG. In the pattern, at timing t18, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special sound is set to the non-output state.

  As described above, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a big hit), the state of suppressing the fluctuation effect sound and the output state of the special sounding sound are changed according to the operation of the outer frame movable body. By configuring so as to continue, the player may be injured when the player comes into contact with the outer frame movable body during the movement to the movement position or in the state (the second state) moved to the movement position, It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, since the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when the special lottery result is determined to be a big hit, the excitement felt by the player becomes very large, but according to such an embodiment, It is possible to make the player recognize that the outer frame movable body is operating without making the player awake.

  The timing at which the special sound is output may be limited. For example, a special sound is output only during at least one of a period in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state and a period in which the frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state. You may.

  For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the period in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9), the frame movable body Output the special sound only during at least one of the periods during which the second state is changed from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t22 to timing t24), and do not output the special sound in other periods. You may comprise. Also in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

  Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) and 574 (B), the period in which the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame A special sound is output only during at least one of the periods during which the movable body changes from the second state to the first state (a period from timing t30 to timing t32), and no special sound is output in other periods. It may be configured as follows. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

  Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) and 574 (A), the period in which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573 (A), timing t14). From the timing t16 to the timing t20 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 574 (A)), and the period from the timing t26 to the timing t28 when the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state. A configuration may be adopted in which a special sound is output only in at least one of the periods, and no special sound is output in the other periods. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

  Further, a period in which the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (a period from timing t7 to timing t9), and a period in which the inner frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing) During the period in which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from t30 to timing t32) (in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573 (A), the period from timing t14 to timing t16, in FIG. 574 (A)). In the effect pattern shown, the special sound is generated only in at least one of the periods (from timing t26 to timing t28) in which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (period from timing t18 to timing t20). It may be configured to output the sound and not output the special sound in other periods. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

  In each of the effect patterns described above, the special sound may be output with a slight delay after the state of the variable effect sound is set to the suppressed state. For example, a special sound may be output two seconds after the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIG. 569 (A) to FIG. 570 (B), it is preferable that after the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t7, a special sound is output at the timing t9. By adopting such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the fluctuating effect sound is in the suppressed state and that the special sound is different from the fluctuating effect sound.

  Alternatively, in each of the above-described effect patterns, the state of the fluctuating effect sound may be set to the suppressed state at a timing that is a predetermined time before the timing at which the special sound is output. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed two seconds before the timing of outputting the special sounding sound. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIG. 569 (A) to FIG. 570 (B), it is preferable that after the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t5, a special sound is output at the timing t7. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly recognize that the fluctuating effect sound is in the suppressed state and that the special sound is different in characteristic from the fluctuating effect sound.

  The timing for ending the output of the special sounding sound may be a predetermined timing. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a special sound is output only for the first two seconds after the frame movable body starts moving. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t7, the output of the special sound is started, and the output of the special sound is started at the timing t9. It may be configured to end. The fluctuating effect sound may end when the operation of the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). By adopting such a configuration, the state in which the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed continues even after the timing at which the output of the special sounding sound ends, so that the player can easily recognize that the special sounding sound has been output.

  You may be comprised so that the suppression of fluctuation | variation production sound and the output of special sounding sound may be performed before the operation | movement start of a frame movable body. For example, the configuration may be such that the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed and the special sounding sound is output at a timing two seconds before the operation of the frame movable body starts. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t5, and the output of the special sounding sound is started. At the timing t7, the state of the frame movable body is changed. May be configured to start the operation of changing the state from the first state to the second state. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

  The operation validity period may be generated in accordance with the start of the operation of the frame movable body and the timing at which the fluctuating sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) to 574 (B), an operation valid period is generated at timing t7, an operation instruction display is started, and the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body is turned off. It is good to be constituted as follows. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

  The time chart shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B) is obtained by slowly rotating the frame movable body in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 532, 535, 536 and 537 by a predetermined angle. Or you may operate like the frame movable body in the modification of the time chart shown to FIG. 524 (A) -FIG. 525 (B). For example, the frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 532 may be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. When moving the frame movable body to the standby position, it is preferable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds.

  In addition, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 547, 550, 551 and 552, respectively, are shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 and 540 or FIGS. 539 and 540. May be operated like the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 547 may be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Further, at the timing when the special lottery result is a big hit and an operation is performed on the operation unit or the end timing of the operation valid period, the inner frame movable body may be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. . When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds, and then the outer frame movable body is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. It is good to rotate around 90 degrees.

  The frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523, 528, 529, 530, and 531; FIGS. 538, 541, 542, 543, and 544; and 545 and 546, respectively. 538, 541, 542, 543 and 544, and 545 and 546, the outer frame movable body is in the second state. The body, or one or both of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body, may be configured to continue the vertical movement of about 1 to 2 cm or the turning movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, the player can easily notice that the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body have moved to the second state.

  In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the rotation direction of the frame movable body is clockwise as viewed from the right side. For this reason, when the player places his / her hand on the frame as compared with the case where the rotation direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise as viewed from the right side, the hand or the like is rolled into the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation.

  On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 533 and 534, and FIGS. 548 and 549, the rotating direction of the frame movable body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right. With this configuration, the rotating body is visually recognized as approaching the player, and the player can visually recognize the frame movable body in a powerful manner.

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated by rotating 360 degrees or more in the second state, but by a predetermined rotation. In the movement range, a rotation operation in a clockwise direction as viewed from the right and a rotation operation in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the right may be alternately repeated. For example, as shown in FIG. 532 (B), FIG. 532 (E), FIG. 547 (B), and FIG. 547 (E), focusing on a state where the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are upright, The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat the rotating operation within a range of 45 degrees to the front side and 45 degrees to the rear side. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a hand or the like is entangled in the door frame top unit 570 when the player places his or her hand on the frame.

  In addition, in the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), when the inner frame movable body performs a clockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right, When the frame movable body rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the right and the inner frame movable body rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates as viewed from the right. You may comprise so that a rotation operation | movement around may be performed. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a hand or the like is entangled in the door frame top unit 570 when the player places his or her hand on the frame.

  In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 523 and 538, the frame movable body includes the light emitting unit, but the frame movable body is illuminated at a predetermined position outside the frame movable body (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). The light emitting unit may be configured to illuminate the movable frame by the light emitting unit. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the light emitting unit provided in the frame movable body and the light emitting unit outside the frame movable body may be configured to illuminate the frame movable body to set a predetermined effect state.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E) and FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), the right side light emission inside the door frame top unit corresponds to the frame movable body. Although the example in which the unit 7050 and the left side light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570, the light emitting unit is provided in the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, respectively, or the right ear frame By providing a light emitting unit in each of the inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door The frame movable body may be configured to emit light in the same light emitting mode as the left light emitting unit 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the light emitting unit provided in the frame movable body and the light emitting unit outside the frame movable body may be configured to illuminate the frame movable body to set a predetermined effect state.

  With reference to FIG. 523 to FIG. 576, an example has been shown in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, or goes through the second state to the third state or the fourth state. A player or a store clerk of a game store pushes the frame movable body in the middle of changing to the second state or the frame movable body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state with his / her hand, thereby forcibly initializing the movable body. You may comprise so that it can return to the state (1st state) located in a position. In this case, a sensor that can detect the position of the frame movable body is provided in a drive mechanism (not shown) that drives the frame movable body, and when the frame movable body is located at the initial position at a timing that cannot be located at the initial position. May be configured such that an operation such as pushing is performed by a player or a store clerk, and the frame movable body remains at the initial position by not operating the drive mechanism any more.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for a player or a store clerk to return the frame movable body to the initial position (first state) at an arbitrary timing. Further, even when a heavy article (eg, a bag carried by the player) is placed on the frame movable body, the drive mechanism for operating the frame movable body is controlled so as not to operate the frame movable body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive mechanism. In addition, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a player or a store clerk of the game store is injured.

  523 to 576 show a basic structure of the frame movable body, a modification of the structure of the frame movable body, a basic control mode of the frame movable body, and a modification of the control mode of the frame movable body. However, the predetermined embodiment and the modification of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to the predetermined embodiment and the modification of the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other embodiments and modifications of the structure of the frame movable body may be applied to the predetermined embodiments and modifications of the structure of the frame movable body. In addition, one or more other embodiments and modifications of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to predetermined examples and modifications of the control mode of the frame movable body.

  Embodiments may be made by combining and applying each effect example in the embodiment or each technical matter in each effect example. Further, the embodiments may be implemented by combining and applying each technical matter in each of the accessory structures.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same operation and effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1402 Ordinary symbol display 1403 First special symbol indicator 1404 First special reserve number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserve number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Staging display device 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Big winning opening 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit accessory 6010 Face cover 6011 Face cover front 6011a First face light scattering section 601 1b 2nd face light scattering unit 6012 face cover upper surface 6013 face cover right surface 6014 face cover lower surface 6015 face cover left surface 6016 first arm 6017 second arm 6020 face substrate 6021 first ear 6021a First ear decoration section 6022 Second ear section 6022a Second ear decoration section 6023 Face light emission section 6023a First face light emission section 6023b Second face light emission section 6024 Mouth decoration section 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistance 6027a First resistance 6027b Second Resistance 6027c Third resistance 6027d Fourth resistance 6027e Fifth resistance 6027f Sixth resistance 6028 Capacitor 6028a First condenser 6028b Second condenser 6029 Connector 6030 Body 6100 Stump object 6200 Stump part 6210 Stump plate part 6210a Stump opening 6300 Stump box 6310 Box upper wall 6320 Box right wall 6330 Box lower wall 6340 Box left wall 6350 Box rear wall 6352 Rear wall substrate 6352a First rear wall substrate 6352b Second rear wall substrate 6354 Rear Wall light emitting portion 6354a First rear wall light emitting portion 6354b Second rear wall light emitting portion 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a First rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b Second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6360 First grass Movable part 6360a First grass decorative part 6370 Second grass movable part 6370a Second grass decorative part 6380 Rear wall plate part 6381 Grass plate part 6381a Grass plate colored transparent part 6381b Grass plate colorless transparent part 6382a Grass plate central decorative part 6382b Grass plate Upper decorative section 6382c Grass board right decorative section 6382d Grass board lower decorative section 6382e Grass board left decorative section 6400 Actor 6420 grass substrate 6422 grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422a grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422b grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422c grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6424 grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424a grass substrate rear first light emitting portion 6424b Grass substrate rear second light emitting portion 6426 Grass substrate opening 6426a Grass substrate first opening 6426b Grass substrate second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent portion 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442b Grass front cover colored transparent portion 6444 grass front cover light scattering portion 6444a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6446 grass front cover opaque portion 6448 grass front cover opening 6448a grass front cover first opening 6448b grass front cover second opening Part 6460 grass rear cover 6462 grass rear cover transparent part 462a grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462b grass rear cover colored transparent portion 6464 grass rear cover light scattering portion 6464a grass rear cover colorless light scattering portion 6464b grass rear cover colored light scattering portion 6466 grass rear cover opaque portion 6470 first hereditary object 6475 Second grass character 6480 Third grass character 6485 Fourth grass character 6500 Mountain character 6520 Mountain substrate 6522 Mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522a Mountain substrate front first light emitting portion 6522b Mountain substrate front second light emitting portion 6522c Mountain substrate front Third light emitting portion 6522d Mountain substrate front fourth light emitting portion 6522e Mountain substrate front fifth light emitting portion 6522f Mountain substrate front sixth light emitting portion 6522g Mountain substrate front seventh light emitting portion 6522h Mountain substrate front eighth light emitting portion 6522i Mountain substrate front ninth Light emitting portion 6524 Mountain substrate opening 6540 First mountain front cover 6542 First mountain front cover Color transparent portion 6544 First mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6548 First mountain front cover opening 6560 Second mountain front cover 6562 Second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6564 Second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6600 First giant tree Character 6610 First giant tree trunk substrate 6630 First giant tree leaf substrate 6650 Second giant tree trunk 6660 Second giant tree trunk substrate 6680 Second giant tree leaf substrate 6700 First cloud character 6750 Second cloud character 6800 6820 board back grass substrate 6822 board back grass substrate opening 6824a board back grass substrate first opening 6824b board back grass substrate second opening 6824c board back grass substrate third opening 6824d back of board Grass board 4th opening 6840 Panel back grass front cover 6842 Panel back grass front cover colored transparent section 6844 Board back grass front cover colored light scattering section 6848 board back grass Front cover opening 6848a Board back grass front cover first opening 6848b Board back grass front cover second opening 6848c Board back grass front cover third opening 6848d Board back grass front cover fourth opening 7000 Door frame top unit Right ear opening 7002 First right ear opening above door frame top unit 7004 Second right ear opening above door frame top unit 7010 First left ear opening above door frame top unit 7012 First left ear opening above door frame top unit 7014 Door frame top unit upper second left ear opening 7020 Door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7022 Door frame top unit lower first right ear opening 7024 Door frame top unit lower second right ear opening 7030 Door frame top Unit lower left ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7034 Door frame top unit lower second left ear opening 704 Door frame top unit upper binaural opening 7050 Right side light emitting part in door frame top unit 7052 Left side light emitting part in door frame top unit 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first Inner surface decorative portion 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7116 Right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7118 Right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7140 Right ear frame movable body turn Active axis 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7214 Left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface 7240 Left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7320 Right ear inner Movable body second surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7340 Right ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body second Surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7400 Left ear inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7420 Left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7430 Left ear Inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7450 Left ear outer frame movable body 7460 Left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7470 Left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7480 Left ear outer frame movable body Light-emitting unit 7490 Left ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7500 Door frame top unit face decoration unit 7510 Door frame top unit Face movable unit 7512 Door frame top unit Right eye decoration unit 7514 Door frame top unit Eye decoration part 7520 Door frame top unit lower face 7522 Door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit lower face movable body 7600 Door frame side unit right arm 7610 Door frame side unit right arm case part 7620 Door frame side unit Right arm upper arm 7630 door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7650 door frame side unit left arm 7660 door frame side unit left arm case 7670 door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7680 door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7700 curtain plate bottom unit right foot Movable body 7710 Curtain plate bottom unit right foot snap part 7720 Curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip part 7750 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7760 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot snap part 7770 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip part 9100 Character character 9110 Cover Member (cover)
9111 Transmission part (first area)
9112 Non-transmissive part (second area)
9120 Character substrate 9130 Base member 9200 Snowman object 9210 Cover member 9210a Front cover member 9210b Back cover member 9220 Snowman substrate 9301 Light emitting element (LED)
9302 resistance

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] includes a frame unit that forms the outer shape of the gaming machine, a lottery unit that performs a lottery based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, and a case where a specific result is obtained by the lottery by the lottery unit. A profit giving means for giving a profit, a performance executing means for performing a performance using a predetermined display means based on a lottery result of the lottery means, and a first effect means provided in the frame means; of the first variable Dote stage operable to JP different situation state, provided at a position different from said first variable Dote stage to the frame means, from a normal state based on the results of the lottery, the first and a second variable Dote stage operable to different second JP different situation states and especially different situation condition, the presentation execution means using a simulation image simulating a first variable Dote stage moving corresponding to the display of the representation first special movable for operating said first variable Dote stage Use out and, a second special movable effect of operating a variable Dote stage of the second without displaying the simulated image simulating said second variable Dote stage, the simulated image simulating the first movable means After operating the first movable means in response to the displayed dynamic display, operating the second movable means without displaying a simulated image simulating the second movable means, or After operating the second movable means without displaying the simulated image imitating the second movable means, it corresponds to the display of the dynamic display using the simulated image simulating the first movable means. A third special movable effect to operate the first movable means , and the lottery is performed when the third special movable effect is executed more than when the first special movable effect is executed. Gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of the result of the above is the specific result is high. That.

Claims (1)

A frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on satisfaction of predetermined conditions;
Profit giving means for giving a profit when a specific result is obtained in the lottery by the lottery means,
Effect performing means for performing an effect using predetermined display means based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
A first movable decoration means provided on the frame body and operable from a normal state to a first special decoration state based on a result of the lottery;
The frame is provided at a position different from the first movable decoration means, and is operable from a normal state to a second special decoration state different from the first special decoration state based on the result of the lottery. Second movable decoration means,
With
The effect execution means,
A first special movable effect for operating the first movable decoration means in response to the display of a dynamic display using a simulation image simulating the first movable decoration means;
A second special movable effect of operating the second movable decoration means without displaying a simulation image imitating the second movable decoration means, and
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second special movable effect is executed, the result of the lottery being the specific result is higher than when the first special movable effect is executed.